1KHA000835-UEN en RE.316 4 Numerical Protection and Control Unit - Operating Instructions (Edition Oct 2004) PDF

RE.
316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Edition October 2004
Numerical Protection and Control Devices
p
Operating Instructions
2004 ABB Switzerland Ltd
Baden
1st Edition
Applies for software version V6.4 and higher
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and
registration of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorized use, in
particular reproduction or making available to third parties without our explicit consent
in writing is prohibited.
The use is only allowed for the purpose laid down in the contract.
This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this the
reader find an error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest convenience.
The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a
warranty of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our customers
in mind that we constantly strive to improve our products and keep them abreast of
advances in technology. This may, however, lead to discrepancies between a
product and its 'Technical Description' or 'Operating Instructions'.
Version 6.4 and
higher
1. Introduction
2. Description of hardware
3. Setting the functions
4. Description of function and application
5. Operation (CAP2/316)
6. Self-testing and diagnostics
7. Installation and maintenance
8. Technical data
9. Interbay bus (IBB) interface
10. Supplementary information
12. Appendices
How to use the Operating Instructions for the RE.316*4 V6.4 and higher
What do you wish to What precisely? Look in the following Chapter (C) / Sections (S):
know about the device ...
* General theoretical Brief introduction C 1 (Introduction)
familiarisation General overview C 1, S 2.1. to S 7.1. (all Section summaries)
Technical data C 8 (Data Sheet, CT requirements)
Hardware C 2 (Description of hardware)
Software C 3 (Setting the functions)
C 4 (Description of function and application)
C 6 (Self-testing and diagnostics)
C 10 (Software changes)
* How to install Checks upon receipt S 7.2.1.

and connect it Location S 7.3.1.
Process connections C 12 (Wiring diagram), S 7.3., S 7.4. to S 7.5.5.
Control system connections C 9 (IBB)
S 9.6. (IBB address list)
* How to set and Installing the HMI S 5.2.2.

configure it Starting the HMI S 5.2.3. to S 5.2.4.2., S 7.5.1.
Configuration S 3.2. to S 3.4., S 5.3., S 5.4., S 5.9.
Setting functions S 3.5. to S 3.8., S 5.3., S 5.4., S 5.9.
Quitting the HMI S 5.2.4.3.
* How to check, test Checking the connections S 7.4.6. to S 7.4.10.

and commission it Functional test S 5.5.3.
Commissioning checks S 7.5.6.
* How to maintain it Fault-finding S 5.5.4., S 7.6.1.

Updating software S 7.7.
Adding hardware S 7.8.
* How to view and Sequential recorder S 5.5.1.

transfer data Disturbance recorder S 3.7.4., S 5.5.5.
Measurements S 5.5.2.
Local Display Unit S 5.10.
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. General ..............................................................................................1-2
1.2. Safety instructions..............................................................................1-3

1.2.1. Safety instruction indications .............................................................1-3
1.2.2. General rules .....................................................................................1-3
1.2.3. General safety instructions ................................................................1-4
1.3. Line Protection REL316*4..................................................................1-5

1.3.1. Application .........................................................................................1-5
1.3.2. Main features .....................................................................................1-5
1.4. Transformer Protection RET316*4.....................................................1-8

1.4.1. Application .........................................................................................1-8
1.4.2. Main features .....................................................................................1-8
1.5. Generator Protection REG316*4 .....................................................1-10

1.5.1. Application .......................................................................................1-10
1.5.2. Main features ...................................................................................1-10
1.6. Control Device REC316*4 ...............................................................1-12

1.6.1. Application .......................................................................................1-12
1.6.2. Main features ...................................................................................1-12
1-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. General
The following device types, the Line Protection REL316*4, the Trans-
former Protection RET316*4, the Generator Protection REG316*4 and
the Control Device REC316*4 comprise the new generation of fully
digital protection systems, i.e. the analog- process inputs are con-
verted to digital values immediately after the input transformers and
the resulting digital signals are processed exclusively by micro-proces-
sors.
This Operating Instructions is valid for all four device types. The desig-
nation 'RE.316*4' is used as the identification for the device family in
the following sections.
Because of its compact design, the use of only a few different hard-
ware units, modular software and continuous self-monitoring and diag-
nostic functions, the RE.316*4 family optimally fulfils all the demands
and expectations of a modern protection scheme with respect to effi-
cient economic plant management and technical performance.
The AVAILABILITY, which is the ratio between fault-free operating
time and total operational life, is certainly the most important require-
ment a protection device has to fulfil. As a result of continuous moni-
toring, this ratio in the case of RE.316*4 is almost unity.
SIMPLICITY of operation, control and commissioning of the device are
achieved by the compact design and the interactive, PC based con-
figuration program CAP2/316. Absolute FLEXIBILITY of the RE.316*4
scheme, i.e. adaptability to a specific primary system or existing pro-
tection (retrofitting), is assured by the supplementary functions incorpo-
rated in the software and by the ability to assign inputs and outputs
with the CAP2/316.
Decades of experience in the protection and control have gone into the
development of the RE.316*4 to provide the highest degree of RELI-
ABILITY, DISCRIMINATION and STABILITY. Digital processing of all
the signals endows the scheme with ACCURACY and constant SENSI-
TIVITY throughout its useful life.
1-2
1.2. Safety instructions

1.2.1. Safety instruction indications
The following symbols are utilised for safety instructions in this Oper-
ating Instructions. These apply to person and personal working with
the devices as well as the environment. This could involve more than
one device of this family.
DANGER: This symbol indicates immediate danger due to high elec-

trical voltage, or a mechanical or other cause. Non-observance can
lead to serious injury or even death.
WARNING: This symbol draws attention to a dangerous situation.

Non-observance can lead to serious injury to persons or damage to
property.
CAUTION ESD: This symbol indicates specific information for the

avoidance of equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge. The
constructional elements and modules may only be touched by per-
sons who are earthed.
CAUTION LASER/LED: This symbol indicates the use of a laser of

Class Laser/LED in the product. You should therefore avoid any
direct eye contact with the laser.
NOTICE: An important instruction that must be observed.
IMPORTANT: It must be ensured that no possibly damaging situation

can arise for the product or for its surroundings.
1.2.2. General rules

The RE.316*4 devices incorporates the latest practices and guidelines
and complies with the recognized safety rules. Nevertheless, care
must always be taken to avoid danger.
1-3
Only use the RE.316*4 devices when it is in perfect working order and
in strict accordance with these Operating Instructions.
Dangerous situations can arise if the equipment is used improperly,
especially if the user changes the configuration.
1.2.3. General safety instructions
DANGER: Live electrical equipment is in the immediate vicinity of

RE.316*4. Before working on the system, always ensure that contact
with, or proximity to live voltage parts are avoided.
The device RE.316*4 can initiate operation of other electrical equip-
ment (circuit-breakers and isolators). Before working on the device,
always ensure that unwanted operations are inhibited or have no
effect on personnel or equipment.
Strictly observe all safety precautions (interlocks, locks and blocking
devices), especially those issued for the specific station.
WARNING: Only properly authorized, professionally qualified and

correspondingly trained personnel, who have also read and under-
stood the operating instructions, may work on the RE.316*4 device.
1-4
1.3. Line Protection REL316*4

1.3.1. Application
The REL316*4 numerical line protection scheme is designed for the
high-speed discriminative protection of lines and cables in distribution
and transmission systems. The rated voltage of the line being pro-
tected is not a restriction and the protection is applicable to solidly or
low-resistance grounded systems, systems with Petersen coils or to
ungrounded systems.
REL316*4 is suitable for the protection of long or short overhead lines
or cables, double-circuit lines, heavily loaded lines, lines with weak
infeeds and what are referred to as 'short-zone' lines. All kinds of faults
are detected including close-in three-phase faults, cross-country faults,
evolving faults and high-resistance earth faults.
REL316*4 takes power swings and reversal of fault energy into
account. Switching onto an existing fault results in instantaneous trip-
ping of the circuit-breaker.
REL316*4 places relatively low requirements on the performance of
CTs and VTs and is not dependent on their characteristics (CVTs are
permissible).
REL316*4 can operate with any kind of communications channel
(PLC, optical fibers etc.) between the terminal stations.
1.3.2. Main features
REL316*4s library of protection functions includes the following:
Distance protection with
overcurrent or underimpedance starters (polygon characteristic)
5 distance stages (independently set polygon characteristics for
forwards and reverse measurement)
definite time overcurrent back-up protection (including "short-
zone" protection)
VT supervision
power-swing blocking
system logic for
switch-onto-fault protection
overreaching
permissive underreaching transfer tripping (also for weak
infeed and communications channel failure)
permissive overreaching transfer tripping (also for weak
infeed, communications channel failure and reversal of fault
energy direction)
1-5
blocking scheme (also for reversal of fault energy direction)

sensitive E/F protection for ungrounded systems
E/F protection for grounded systems
inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection
overtemperature protection
definite time over and undercurrent protection
provision for inrush blocking
inverse-time over/undercurrent protection (Current-Inv)
directional definite time overcurrent protection
directional inverse time overcurrent protection
definite time over and undervoltage protection
power protection
synchrocheck.
breaker failure protection
REL316*4 includes the following communication channel functions:
longitudinal differential protection
binary signal transmission.
REL316*4 includes the following logic functions:
auto-reclosure
supplementary logic functions such as
logic
timer delay
contact bounce filter
supplementary user logic programmed using CAP2/316
(function plan programming language FUPLA). This requires
systems engineering.
The following measurement and monitoring functions are also provided:
single-phase measuring function UIfPQ
three-phase measurement module
three-phase current plausibility
three-phase voltage plausibility.
An event and disturbance recorder is integrated in the device (with
information of fault distance converted to reference length).
1-6
The allocation of the opto-coupler inputs, the LED signals and the
auxiliary relay signal outputs, the setting of the various parameters, the
configuration of the scheme and the display of the events and system
variables are all performed interactively by means of the HMI.
REL316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a
local control PC and for remote communication with the station control
system.
REL316*4 is also equipped with continuous self-monitoring and self-
diagnostic functions. Suitable testing devices (e.g. the MODURES
test set XS92b) are available for quantitative testing.
REL316*4 can be semi-flush or surface mounted or can be installed in
an equipment rack.
1-7
1.4. Transformer Protection RET316*4

1.4.1. Application
The digital transformer protection RET316*4 is designed for fast
selective protection of two and three-winding power transformers.
It can also be applied to the protection of autotransformers and
generator/transformer units.
The unit detects the following faults on power transformers:
all phase faults
earth faults where the power transformer star-point is solidly or
low-impedance grounded
inter-turn faults
The RET316*4 places only low requirements on main CT performance.

RET316*4 can be supplied with a desired combination of the following
protection functions. The functions are selected from the RE.216 /
RE.316*4 library of function modules:
The transformer differential protection function (Diff-Transf) is one
of the most important and provides fast selective protection of all
transformers with ratings above a few MVA.
The thermal overload function (Overtemp) protects the insulation
against damage due to excessively high temperatures. It is
normally equipped with two independently set operating stages
and is used especially where oil temperature monitors are not
installed.
definite time over and undercurrent protection (Current-DT)
provision for inrush restraint
peak value overcurrent protection (Current-Inst)
inverse time-overcurrent protection (Current-Inv)
directional definite time overcurrent protection
(DirCurrentDT)
directional inverse time overcurrent protection
(DirCurrentInv)
inverse definite minimum time overcurrent function
(I0-Invers)
definite time over and undervoltage protection (Voltage-DT)
1-8
peak value overvoltage protection (Voltage-Inst)

power function (Power)
frequency function (Frequency)
rate-of-change frequency protection (df/dt)
definite time overfluxing (Overexcitat)
inverse time overexcitation (U/F-Inv)
distance protection (Distance) as backup protection for the power
transformer and neighbouring lines
breaker failure protection (BreakerFailure)
supplementary user logic programmed with the aid of
CAP2/316 (function plan programming language FUPLA).
This requires systems engineering.
logic
delay
counter (Count)
contact bounce filter
The following measurement and monitoring functions are also provided:
three-phase voltage plausibility
disturbance recorder
The device has an integrated event logger.
RET316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a
local HMI (PC) and for remote communication with the station control
system.
RET316*4 is also equipped with continuous self-monitoring and self-
diagnostic functions. Suitable testing devices (e.g. test set XS92b) are
available for quantitative testing.
RET316*4 can be semi-flush or surface mounted or can be installed in
an equipment rack.
1-9
1.5. Generator Protection REG316*4

1.5.1. Application
The REG316*4 numerical generator protection has been designed for
the high-speed discriminative protection of small and medium size
generators. It can be applied to units with or without step-up trans-
former in power utility or industrial power plants.
REG316*4 places relatively low requirements on the performance of
CTs and VTs and is independent of their characteristics.

REG316*4s library of protection functions includes the following:
generator differential (Diff-Gen)
transformer differential (Diff-Transf)
definite time over and undercurrent (Current-DT)
provision for inrush blocking
peak value overcurrent (Current-Inst)
voltage-controlled overcurrent (Imax-Umin)
inverse time overcurrent (Current-Inv)
directional definite time overcurrent (DirCurrentDT)
protection
directional inverse time overcurrent (DirCurrentInv)
protection
definite time NPS (NPS-DT)
inverse time NPS (NPS-Inv)
definite time over and undervoltage (Voltage-DT)
peak value overvoltage (Voltage-Inst)
underimpedance (Underimped)
underreactance (MinReactance)
power protection (Power)
stator overload (OLoad-Stator)
rotor overload (OLoad-Rotor)
frequency (Frequency)
rate-of-change frequency protection (df/dt)
1-10
overexcitation (Overexcitat)
inverse time overexcitation (U/f-Inv)
voltage comparison (Voltage-Bal)
overtemperature (Overtemp)
100 % stator ground fault (Stator-EFP)
100 % rotor ground fault (Rotor-EFP)
pole slipping (Pole-Slip)
inverse time ground fault overcurrent (I0-Invers)
breaker failure protection (BreakerFailure)
supplementary user logic programmed using CAP2/316
(function plan programming language FUPLA). This requires
systems engineering.
logic
timers
metering
debounce.
The following measuring and monitoring functions are also available:
three-phase voltage plausibility
The device has an integrated event logger.
REG316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a
local control PC and for remote communication with the station control
system.
REG316*4 is also equipped with continuous self-monitoring and self-
available for quantitative testing.
REG316*4 can be semi-flush or surface mounted or can be installed in
an equipment rack.
1-11
1.6. Control Device REC316*4

1.6.1. Application
The numerical control unit REC316*4 is designed to perform data acqui-
sition, monitoring, and control functions in MV and HV substations. It is
installed in the individual switchgear bays.
The switchgear bay control unit can be configured for SF6 gas-
insulated switchgear (GIS), for indoor and outdoor switchgear and for
single, double or multiple busbar stations.
REC316*4 registers and processes the switchgear position signals,
the measured variables and the alarms occurring in a switchgear bay.
The corresponding data are then made available to the station control
level at the communication interface (IBB).
REC316*4 receives control instructions from the station control level or
from the local mimic, processes them in relation to the bay control
logic and executes them.
The interlocks included in the REC316*4 control device prevent in-
admissible switching operations, which could cause damage to plant
or endanger personnel.
REC316*4 checks the synchronisation on both sides of the circuit-
breaker before enabling the close command.
A frequency protection function is integrated in REC316*4, which
enables intelligent load shedding.
REC316*4 also provides facility for adding feeder protection functions.
REC316*4 measures the currents and voltages at the main CTs and
VTs, calculates the corresponding real power, reactive power and fre-
quency and transfers the data to the station control level.
REC316*4 is equipped with a communication interface (IBB) for two-
way communication via an optical fiber link with the station control
level.
The library of function blocks for the REC316*4 control device includes
the following control, protection, measurement and logic functions:
Control function: This depends on the particular application for which
it is specifically created using CAP2/316 (FUPLA function plan pro-
gramming language).
detection and plausibility check of switchgear position signals
switchgear control
interlocks
generation and monitoring of switchgear commands
run-time monitoring
detection of alarms and alarm logic
1-12
integration of the local mimic.
Protection functions:
definite time overcurrent
peak value overcurrent
inverse time overcurrent
directional definite time overcurrent
directional inverse time overcurrent
inverse time overcurrent ground fault protection
definite time overvoltage
peak value overvoltage
power function
overtemperature
frequency function
rate-of-change frequency function
auto-reclosure
synchrocheck function
Breaker failure function
Logic functions:
logic
delay
counter
flatter detection
Contact bounce filter.
Measurement and monitoring functions:

single-phase measuring function for U, I, f, P and Q
three-phase measuring function for U, I, f, P, Q and cos
three-phase voltage plausibility.
The device has an integrated disturbance recorder and event recorder.
The allocation of the opto-coupler inputs, the LED signals and the aux-
iliary relay signal outputs, the setting of the various parameters, the
variables are all performed interactively by means of the menu-
controlled HMI.
1-13
REC316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a

local HMI (PC) and for remote communication with the station control
system.
REC316*4 is also equipped with continuous self-monitoring and self-
available for quantitative testing of measurement and protection
functions.
REC316*4 can be semi-flush or surface mounted or can be installed in
an equipment rack.
1-14
October 04
2. DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE
2.1. Summary............................................................................................2-2
2.2. Mechanical design .............................................................................2-4

2.2.1. Hardware versions .............................................................................2-4
2.2.2. Construction.......................................................................................2-4
2.2.3. Casing and methods of mounting ......................................................2-4
2.2.4. Front of the protection unit .................................................................2-4
2.2.5. PC connection....................................................................................2-5
2.2.6. Test facilities ......................................................................................2-5
2.3. Auxiliary supply unit ...........................................................................2-6
2.4. Input transformer unit.........................................................................2-6
2.5. Main processor unit............................................................................2-7
2.6. Binary I/O unit ....................................................................................2-8
2.7. Interconnection unit............................................................................2-8
2.8. Injection unit REX010 ........................................................................2-9
2.9. Injection transformer block REX011 ................................................2-13

2.9.1. REX011............................................................................................2-13
2.9.2. REX011-1, -2 ...................................................................................2-14
2.9.3. Figures .............................................................................................2-18
2.10. Testing without the generator ..........................................................2-27
2-1
2. DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE
2.1. Summary
The hardware of the digital protection scheme RE.316*4 comprises
4 to 8 plug-in units, a connection unit and the casing:
Input transformer unit Type 316GW61
A/D converter unit Type 316EA63
Main processor unit Type 316VC61a
or Type 316VC61b
1 up to 4 binary I/O units Type 316DB61
or Type 316DB62
or Type 316DB63
Auxiliary supply unit Type 316NG65
Connection unit Type 316ML61a
or Type 316ML62a
Casing and terminals for analog signals and connectors for binary
signals
The A/D converter Type 316EA63 is only used in conjunction with the
longitudinal differential protection and includes the optical modems for
transferring the measurements to the remote station.
Binary process signals are detected by the binary I/O unit and
transferred to the main processor which processes them in relation to
the control and protection functions for the specific project and then
activates the output relays and LEDs accordingly.
The analog input variables are electrically insulated from the electronic
circuits by the screened windings of the transformers in the input
transformer unit. The transformers also reduce the signals to a suitable
level for processing by the electronic circuits. The input transformer
unit provides accommodation for nine transformers.
Essentially the main processor unit 316VC61a or 316VC61b com-
prises the main processor (80486-based), the A/D converter unit, the
communication interface control system and 2 PCMCIA slots.
Binary process signals, signals pre-processed by the control logic,
events, analog variables, disturbance recorder files and device control
settings can be transferred via the communication interface to the
station control room. In the reverse direction, signals to the control
logic and for switching sets of parameter settings are transferred by
the station control system to the protection.
RE.316*4 can be equipped with one up to four binary I/O units.
2-2
There are two tripping relays on the units 316DB61 and 316DB62,
each with two contacts and according to version either:
8 optocoupler inputs and 6 signaling relays or
4 optocoupler inputs and 10 signaling relays.
The I/O unit 316DB63 is equipped with 14 optocoupler inputs and
8 signaling relays.
The 16 LEDs on the front are controlled by the 316DB6x units located
in slots 1 and 2.
2-3
2.2. Mechanical design
2.2.1. Hardware versions

RE.316*4 is available in a number of different versions, which are
listed in the data sheet under 'Ordering information'.
2.2.2. Construction
The RE.316*4 is 6 U standard units high (U = 44.45 mm) and either
225 mm (Order code N1) or 271 mm wide (Order code N2). The
various units are inserted into the casing from the rear (see Fig. 12.3)
and then screwed to the cover plate.
2.2.3. Casing and methods of mounting
The casing is suitable for three methods of mounting.
Semi-flush mounting
The casing can be mounted semi-flush in a switch panel with the aid of
four fixing brackets. The dimensions of the panel cut-out can be seen
from the data sheet. The terminals are located at the rear.
Installation in a 19" rack

A mounting plate with all the appropriate cut-outs is available for fitting
the protection into a 19" rack (see data sheet). The terminals are
located at the rear.
Surface mounting
A hinged frame (see data sheet) is available for surface mounting. The
terminals are located at the rear.
2.2.4. Front of the protection unit
A front view of the protection and the functions of the frontplate
elements can be seen from Fig. 12.2.
A reset button is located behind the frontplate which serves three
purposes:
resetting the tripping relays and where the are configured to latch,
also the signaling relays and LEDs and deleting the distance
protection display when running the control program
resetting of error messages resulting from defects detected by the
self-monitoring or diagnostic functions (short press)
resetting the entire protection (warm start, press for at least ten
seconds) following the detection of a serious defect by the self-
monitoring or diagnostic functions.
These control operations can also be executed using the local control
unit on the front of the device. Should the latter fail, the reset button
can be pressed using a suitable implement through the hole in the
frontplate.
2-4
2.2.5. PC connection
In order to set the various parameters, read events and measurements
of system voltages and currents and also for diagnostic and mainte-
nance purposes, a personal computer (PC) must be connected to the
optical serial interface (Fig. 12.2).
2.2.6. Test facilities

A RE.316*4 protection can be tested using a test set Type XS92b.
2-5
2.3. Auxiliary supply unit

The auxiliary supply unit 316NG65 derives all the supply voltages the
protection requires from the station battery. Capacitors are provided
which are capable of bridging short interruptions (max. 50 ms) of the
input voltage. The auxiliary supply unit is protected against changes of
polarity.
In the event of loss of auxiliary supply, the auxiliary supply unit also
generates all the control signals such as re-initialization and blocking
signals needed by all the other units.
The technical data of the auxiliary supply unit are to be found in the
data sheet.
2.4. Input transformer unit

The input transformer unit 316GW61 serves as input interface between
the analog primary system variables such as currents and voltages
and the protection. The mounting plate of the unit can accommodate
up to nine CTs and VTs. The shunts across the secondaries of the
CTs are also mounted in the input transformer unit.
The input transformers provide DC isolation between the primary
system and the electronic circuits and also reduce (in the case of the
CTs, with the aid of a shunt) the voltage and current signals to a
suitable level for processing by the A/D converters. Thus the input
transformer unit produces voltage signals at its outputs for both current
and voltage channels.
The CTs and VTs actually fitted in the input transformer unit vary
according to version. Further information can be obtained from the
data sheet.
2-6
2.5. Main processor unit

The main processor runs the control and protection algorithms as
determined by the particular settings. It receives its data from the A/D
converter unit and the I/O unit. The results computed by the algorithms
are transferred either directly or after further logical processing to the
binary I/O unit.
A 80486-based microprocessor is used in the main processor unit
316VC61a or 316VC61b. The samples taken by the A/D converter are
pre-processed by a digital signal processor (DSP). The interfaces for
connecting an HMI PC and for communication with the station control
system (SPA, IEC60870-5-103) are included. A PCMCIA interface with
two slots facilitates connection to other bus systems such as LON and
MVB. The flash EPROMs used as program memory enable the
software to be downloaded from the PC via the port on the front.
A self-monitoring routine runs in the background on the main proces-
sor. The main processor itself (respectively the correct operation of the
program) is monitored by a watchdog.
2-7
2.6. Binary I/O unit

The binary I/O unit 316DB6x enables binary signals received via opto-
couplers from station plant to be read and tripping and other signals to
be issued externally.
All the input and output units provide electrical insulation between the
external signaling circuits and the internal electronic circuits.
The I/O units in slots 1 and 2 also control the statuses of 8 LEDs each
on the frontplate via a corresponding buffer memory.
The numbers of inputs and outputs required for the particular version
are achieved by fitting from one to four binary I/O units. The relation-
ship between the versions and the number of I/O units is given in the
data sheet.
The optocoupler inputs are adapted to suit the available input voltage
range by choice of resistor soldered to soldering posts. This work is
normally carried at the works as specified in the order.
The technical data of the optocoupler inputs and the tripping and
signaling outputs can be seen from the data sheet.
2.7. Interconnection unit

The wiring between the various units is established by the intercon-
necting unit 316ML62a (width 271 mm) or 316ML61a (width 225 mm).
It is located inside the housing behind the frontplate and carries the
connectors and wiring needed by the individual units.
In addition, the interconnection unit includes the connections to the
local control unit, the reset button and 16 LEDs for status signals.
2-8
2.8. Injection unit REX010

The injection unit Type REX010 provides the power supply for the
injection transformer block Type REX011. The injection transformer
block generates the signals needed for the 100% stator and rotor
ground fault protection schemes. The signals all have the same
waveform (see Fig. 2.3).
The injection unit is installed in an REG316*4 casing and therefore the
mechanical and general data are the same as specified for the
REG316*4. Three versions of the injection unit with the designations
U1, U2 and U3 are available for the following station battery voltages:
Battery voltage Tolerance Output

U1: 110 or 125 V DC +10 % / -20 % 110 V or 125 V, 1.1 A
U2: 110; 125; 220; 250 V DC 88...312 V DC 96 V, 1 A
U3: 48; 60; 110 V DC 36...140 V DC 96 V, 1 A
Versions U2 and U3 operate with a DC/DC converter.

Newer injection units with the auxiliary supply unit 316NE62 are
marked with the code U0 and have only one variant with an voltage
range from 36 to 312 V.
The frequency of the injection voltage, which corresponds precisely to

14 of the rated frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz, can be selected by
positioning a plug-in jumper on PCB 316AI61. The frequency is then
12.5 Hz in position X12 and 15.0 Hz in position X11.
Controls and signals:

Green LED READY:
Auxiliary supply switched on
Red LED OVERLOAD:
The internal protection circuit has picked up and injection is
interrupted.
Yellow LED DISABLED:
Injection is disabled on the switch on the frontplate or via the
optocoupler input.
Only the green LED is lit during normal operation.
Toggle switch ENABLE, DISABLE:
Position 0: Injection enabled.
Position 1: Injection disabled.
Reset button RESET:
The protection circuit latches when it operates and is reset by this
button upon which the red LED extinguishes.
2-9
The protection circuit guards against excessive feedback from the

generator and interrupts the injection for zero-crossing currents
5 A.
The protection circuit will not reset, if the fault that caused it to pick up
is still present. In such a case, switch off the supply and check the
external wiring for short-circuits and open-circuits.
Optocoupler input:
This has the same function as the reset button and can also be
used to disable injection. The latter occurs when the input is at
logical '1'. Injection is resumed as soon as the input returns to
logical '0'.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the injection voltage is switched off before

carrying out any work at the star-point. The toggle switch on the
front of the injection unit REX010 must be set to 'disable' and the
yellow LED 'disabled' must lit.
The input voltage, the injection frequency and the optocoupler voltage
must be specified in the customers order and are then set in the works
prior to delivery.
There are no controls inside the unit, which have to be set by the user.
Supply failure
If the green LED READY is not lit in the case of version U1 although
the correct auxiliary supply voltage is applied, check and if necessary
replace the fuse on the supply unit 316NE61. The fuse holder is
located at the rear next to the auxiliary supply terminals.
Fuse type: cartridge 5 x 20 mm
2 A slow
Faulty U2, U3 and U0 units must be returned to the nearest ABB agent
or directly to ABB Switzerland Ltd, Baden, Switzerland.
2-10
Fig. 2.1 Injection unit REX010 (front view)

(corresponds to HESG 448 574)
2-11
Fig. 2.2 PCB 316AI61 in the injection unit

(derived from HESG 324 366)
showing locations of X11 and X12
2-12
2.9. Injection transformer block REX011

In conjunction with the injection unit Type REX010, the injection
transformer block Type REX011 supplies the injection and reference
signals for testing the 100% stator and rotor ground fault protection
schemes.
The injection transformer block used must correspond to the method of
grounding the stator circuit:
primary injection at the star-point: REX011
secondary injection at the star-point: REX011-1
secondary injection at the terminals: REX011-2
Each injection transformer type has three secondary windings for the
following voltages:
Uis: stator injection voltage
Uir: rotor injection voltage
Ui: reference voltage connected to analog input channel 8
of REG316*4.
The same injection transformer is used for stator and rotor protection
schemes.
The rated values of the injection voltages Uis, Uir and Ui apply for the
version REX010 U1 and a station battery voltage of UBat = 110 V DC.
All the voltages are less by a factor of 96/110 = 0.8727 in the case of
versions U2 and U3.
Thus the primary injection voltage for the stator circuit is 96 V.
2.9.1. REX011
This version is designed for primary injection at the star-point and is
available with the following rated voltages:
Uis 110 V
Uir 50 V *)
Ui 25 V
Table 2.1 REX011
*) The winding for voltage Uir has a tapping at 30 V. This enables Uir to be stepped down to 30 V or
20 V where an injection voltage less than 50 V is necessary.
2-13
2.9.2. REX011-1, -2
The injection transformers have the following IDs (see Table 2.2 and
Table 2.3):
HESG 323 888 M11, M12 or M13 for REX011-1
HESG 323 888 M21, M22 or M23 for REX011-2
The injection transformers used for secondary injection of the stator
circuit have four injection voltage windings connected in parallel or
series to adjust the power to suit the particular grounding resistor.
The value of the parallel resistor R'Ps, respectively the maximum
injection voltage determine the permissible injection voltage.
R'Ps [m] Uis [V] Version

>8 0.85 M11
> 32 1.7 M12
> 128 3.4 M13
Table 2.2 REX011-1
R'Ps [] Uis [V] Version

> 0.45 6.4 M21
> 1.8 12.8 M22
> 7.2 25.6 M23
Table 2.3 REX011-2
Always select the maximum possible injection voltage. For example,

for a grounding resistor R'Ps = 35 m, Uis = 1.7 V is used.
In the case of versions M11, M12 and M13, the impedance of the
connection between the injection transformer and the grounding
resistor R'Ps should be as low as possible. The resistance of both
connecting cables should not exceed 5% of R'Ps, e.g. for a grounding
resistor of R'Ps = 35 m and a length of the connecting cables of
2 2 m = 4 m, the cables must have a gauge of 40 mm2.
Voltages Uir and Ui are the same as for REX011.
2-14
The connections to the primary system are made via the two UHV
heavy-duty terminals 10 and 15, which are designed for spade
terminals. There are four universal terminals 11 to 14 type UK35
between the two heavy-duty terminals that are used for the internal
wiring.
Depending on the version, the four windings must be connected to the
corresponding universal or heavy current terminals.
Should the version as supplied be unsuitable for the application, the
connections of the windings can be modified as required according to
the following diagrams.
In the case of versions M12, M22, M13 and M23, shorting links KB-15
must be placed on the universal terminals. How this is done can be
seen from the diagram 'Shorting links' at the end of this section.
Shorting links and 3 rating plates are supplied with every transformer.
The corresponding rating plate must be affixed over the old one
following conversion.
Versions M11 and M21

S3 S4 S5 S6
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
10 11 12 13 14 15
heavy-duty terminals (UHV)

universal terminals (UK)
In the case of versions M11 (REX011-1) and M21 (REX011-2), the two
windings S3 and S4 are connected in parallel across the heavy-duty
terminals (10, 15). The other two windings are not used and are wired
to the universal terminals. The shorting links KB-15 are not needed
and must be removed.
2-15

S3 S4 S5 S6
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
10 11 12 13 14 15

shorting links KB-15
In the case of versions M12 (REX011-1) and M22 (REX011-2), two

pairs of parallel windings are connected in series. All the universal
terminals are connected together using the shorting links KB-15.

S3 S4 S5 S6
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
10 11 12 13 14 15
shorting links KB-15
In the case of versions M13 (REX011-1) and M23 (REX011-2), all the
windings S3...S6 are connected in series. Terminals M12 and M13 are
bridged by a shorting link KB-15.
2-16
In the following figure the shorting links of the versions M12 and M22
are shown:
Shorting links
Terminal screws
Shorting links
Universal terminals
Teminals 11 to 14
4 terminal screws, 3 shorting links with offset and 1 flat shorting link
are supplied with every transformer.
The shorting links are placed in the recesses provided on the universal
terminals.
Versions M12 and M22:

First place the broken off shorting link with the opening downwards on
terminal 11 and then fit 3 links one after the other. Each one must be
secured using one of the screws supplied.
Versions M13 and M23:

First place the broken off shorting link with the opening downwards on
terminal 12 and then fit 2 links one after the other. Each one must be
secured using one of the screws supplied.
2-17
2.9.3. Figures
Fig. 2.3 Injection signal Uis
Fig. 2.4 Wiring diagram for primary injection at the stator using
REX011
Fig. 2.5 Wiring diagram for secondary injection of the stator at the
star-point using REX011-1
terminals using REX011-2
Fig. 2.7 Wiring diagram for rotor ground fault protection using
REX011
REX011-1, -2
Fig. 2.9 Wiring diagram for testing without the generator using
REX011
REX011-1, -2
Fig. 2.11 Dimensioned drawing of the injection transformer block
Type REX011
[V]
110
-110
Injection Test
0 320 640 [ms]
Fig. 2.3 Injection signal Uis
2-18
R S T
Generator
REG316*4
T18
REX010 REX011 REs N12 N11 Us

T. T. X1 X1
T17
Ui1 5 6 Voltage
5
transformer
rest+ 7
rest- 6
RPs
7
8
3
Ui2 3
T15
10
Ui
Ui3 4
4 11
UBat+ 3 T16
Up8+ 1
UBat- 2 1 P8nax
Up8- 2
2
Fig. 2.4 Wiring diagram for primary injection at the stator using
REX011 (see Fig. 2.11)
2-19
R S T
Generator
REG316*4
Voltage
transformer
T18
N'12 N'11
N1 N2
Us
Grounding R'Es
transformator T17
R'Ps
T15
REX010 REX011-1
T. T. X1 X2
5
Ui1 5 10
rest+ 7 Uis T16
rest- 6
15
8
3
Ui2 3
X1
8
Ui
Ui3 4 9
4
UBat+ 3
Up8+ 1
UBat- 1 P8nax
2
Up8- 2
2
star-point using REX011-1
(see Fig. 2.11)
2-20
R S T
Grounding
transformator
REG316*4
Voltage
N1 N2 transformer
T18
N'12 N'11
Us
R'Es
T17
R'Ps
Generator
REX010 T15
REX011-2
T. T. X1 X2
Ui1 5 10
5
rest+ 7 Uis T16
rest- 6
15
8
3
Ui2 3
X1
8
Ui
Ui3 4 9
4
UBat+ 3
Up8+ 1
1 P8nax
UBat- 2 Up8- 2
2
terminals using REX011-2
(see Fig. 2.11)
2-21
+
Rotor
-
2x2 uF 2x2 uF
8 kV 2) 1) 8 kV
REG316*4
T14
REX010 REX011 REr

T. T. X1 X1
T13
5
Ui1 5 8
rest+ 7
RPr
316 GW61
rest- 6
9
8
3
Ui2 3
10
T15
Ui
Ui3 4
4
UBat+ 3 11
T16
Up8+ 1
1 P8nax
UBat- 2
Up8- 2
2
1) Injection at both poles

2) Injection at one pole for brushless excitation
REX011 (see Fig. 2.11)
2-22
+
Rotor
-
2x2 uF 2x2 uF
8 kV 2) 1) 8 kV
REG316*4
T14
REX010 REX011-1, -2 REr

T. T. X1
X1
T13
Ui1 5 6
5
rest+ 7
RPr
316 GW61
rest- 6
7
8
Ui2 3
3
T15
8
Ui
4
Ui3 4
UBat+ 3 9
T16
Up8+ 1
1 P8nax
UBat- 2
Up8- 2
2
1) Injection at both poles

2) Injection at one pole for brushless excitation
REX011-1, -2 (see Fig. 2.11)
2-23
S1
Ck = 4 uF
Rf
S2 CE = 1 uF
REG316*4
1k 2,5 W
T18
REX010 REX011 22 Us
T. T. X1 X1
T17
5
Ui1 5 8
7 50 V 150
6
9 >10 W
8
3 Ui2 3 T14
Ur
10 T13
Ui3 4
4 11 T15
UBat+ 3
1
Up8+ 1 P8nax Ui
UBat- 2
Up8- 2
2
T16
REX011
S1: Bridging of the rotor coupling capacitor

Ck: Rotor coupling capacitor
CE: Rotor/stator ground capacitance
Rf: Variable ground fault resistor
S2: Ground fault resistor = 0
2-24
S1
Ck = 4 uF
Rf
S2 CE = 1 uF
REG316*4
1 k 2,5 W
T18
REX010 REX011-1, -2
22 Us
T. T. X1 X1
T17
Ui1 5 6
5
7 50 V 150
6 316 GW61
7 >10 W
8
Ui2 3 T13
3
Ur
8 T14
Ui3 4
4 9 T15
UBat+ 3
1
Up8+ 1 P8nax Ui
UBat- 2 Up8- 2
2
T16
REX011-1, -2
S1: Bridging of the rotor coupling capacitor

Ck: Rotor coupling capacitor
CE: Rotor/stator ground capacitance
Rf: Variable ground fault resistor
S2: Ground fault resistor = 0 .
2-25
Fig. 2.11 Dimensioned drawing of the injection transformer block

Type REX011
2-26
2.10. Testing without the generator

In order to test the operation of the injection unit Type REX010 plus
injection transformer block Type REX011 or REX011-1/-2 and the
Stator-EFP and Rotor-EFP protection functions without them being
connected to the protected unit, set up the test circuit shown in Fig. 2.9
or Fig. 2.10.The two grounding resistors RE and RP are used for both
stator and rotor protection schemes to simplify the circuit.
The injection voltage of 50 V is also common to both.
The ground fault resistance is simulated by the variable resistor Rf.
Stator ground fault protection:

To test the stator ground fault protection, switch S1 must be kept
closed all the time.
The grounding resistor RE comprises two resistors of 1 k and 22 .
This is a simple method of simulating the ratio of the VT.
Settings for MTR and REs:
The theoretical value of MTR is determined as follows:
22 + 1000 110 V
MTR = x = 102
22 50 V
The low injection voltage of 50 V increases the value of MTR by a
factor 110 V/50 V.
REs = 1022
The settings can also be determined using the setting functions
'MTR-Adjust' and 'REs-Adjust' according to Section 3.5.32. which
is to be preferred to the above calculation.
Rotor ground fault protection:

To test the rotor ground fault protection, the switch S1 must be kept
open all the time with the exception of when the coupling capacitor is
bridged for setting mode 'AdjRErInp'.
Settings:
The theoretical settings are:
REr = 1022
Ck = 4 F
The settings can also be determined using the setting functions 'REs-
Adjust' and 'CoupC-Adjust' according to Section 3.5.33. which is to be
preferred to the above calculation.
2-27
October 2004
3. SETTING THE FUNCTION PARAMETERS
3.1. General ..............................................................................................3-5

3.1.1. Library and settings............................................................................3-5
3.1.2. Control and protection function sequence .........................................3-5
3.1.2.1. Repetition rate....................................................................................3-5
3.1.2.2. Computation requirement of protection functions ..............................3-6
3.1.2.3. Computing requirement of the control functions ..............................3-10
3.2. Control and protection function inputs and outputs..........................3-10

3.2.1. Analog / Digital Converter ................................................................3-10
3.2.2. Binary inputs ....................................................................................3-11
3.2.3. Signalling outputs.............................................................................3-11
3.2.4. Tripping relay outputs ......................................................................3-12
3.2.5. Measured variables..........................................................................3-12
3.3. Frequency range..............................................................................3-13
3.4. System parameter settings ..............................................................3-13

3.4.1. Relay configuration ..........................................................................3-13
3.4.2. Configuration of the A / D Converter................................................3-16
3.4.3. Entering comments for binary inputs and outputs............................3-18
3.4.4. Masking binary inputs, entering latching parameters and
definition of 'double indications' .......................................................3-18
3.4.5. System I / O .....................................................................................3-19
3.5. Protection functions .........................................................................3-23

3.5.1. HV distance protection function .......................... (HV-Distance)......3-23
3.5.2. Distance protection ................................................... (Distance)......3-25
3.5.2.1. General ............................................................................................3-47
3.5.2.2. Starters ............................................................................................3-48
3.5.2.2.1. Overcurrent starters .........................................................................3-48
3.5.2.2.2. Underimpedance starters.................................................................3-48
3.5.2.2.3. Current enable .................................................................................3-50
3.5.2.2.4. E/F detector .....................................................................................3-51
3.5.2.2.5. Phase preference logic ....................................................................3-51
3.5.2.2.6. Undervoltage starters.......................................................................3-52
3.5.2.3. Measuring units................................................................................3-52
3.5.2.3.1. Determining the distance zones.......................................................3-52
3.5.2.3.2. Directional element ..........................................................................3-58
3.5.2.3.3. Overreaching zone...........................................................................3-59
3.5.2.3.4. Reverse zone...................................................................................3-59
3.5.2.3.5. Time steps .......................................................................................3-59
3.5.2.4. Definitive zone .................................................................................3-60
3.5.2.5. Back-up overcurrent protection........................................................3-61
3.5.2.6. VT supervision .................................................................................3-62
3.5.2.7. Tripping logic....................................................................................3-63
3.5.2.8. Power-swing blocking ......................................................................3-65
3-1
3.5.2.9. Allocation of CT and VT inputs ........................................................3-65

3.5.2.10. Allocation of binary inputs ................................................................3-65
3.5.2.11. Allocation of tripping commands ......................................................3-67
3.5.2.12. Signals .............................................................................................3-67
3.5.3. Sensitive earth fault protection for ungrounded
systems and systems with Petersen coils......... (EarthFaultIsol)......3-69
3.5.4. Auto-reclosure................................................... (Autoreclosure)......3-75
3.5.4.1. General ............................................................................................3-90
3.5.4.2. Connections between auto-reclosure and
distance functions ............................................................................3-90
3.5.4.3. Connections between auto-reclosure and
overcurrent or differential functions..................................................3-92
3.5.4.4. Redundant schemes ........................................................................3-94
3.5.4.5. Master/follower logic ........................................................................3-96
3.5.4.6. Duplex logic .....................................................................................3-98
3.5.4.7. Timers ............................................................................................3-100
3.5.4.8. External binary inputs ....................................................................3-103
3.5.4.9. Close CB and signalling outputs ....................................................3-105
3.5.4.10. Timing diagrams ............................................................................3-107
3.5.4.11. Checking the dead times ...............................................................3-117
3.5.5. Sensitive earth fault protection for
grounded systems..............................................(EarthFltGnd2)....3-119
3.5.5.1. Coordination with the distance protection ......................................3-125
3.5.5.2. Choice of operating mode..............................................................3-126
3.5.5.3. Choice of transfer tripping scheme ................................................3-126
3.5.5.4. Setting the enabling pick-up levels ................................................3-130
3.5.5.5. Setting the characteristic angle 'Angle' ..........................................3-131
3.5.5.6. Setting the basic time 't Basic' .......................................................3-131
3.5.5.7. Circuit-breaker delay......................................................................3-132
3.5.5.8. The comparison time 't comp' ........................................................3-132
3.5.5.9. Setting the waiting time 't Wait' ......................................................3-132
3.5.5.10. Setting the transient blocking time 't TransBlk' ..............................3-132
3.5.5.11. CT/VT inputs of the function ..........................................................3-133
3.5.5.12. Binary inputs of the function...........................................................3-133
3.5.5.13. Outputs ..........................................................................................3-134
3.5.6. Inverse definite minimum time earth fault
overcurrent function .................................................. (I0-Invers)....3-135
3.5.7. Definite time over and undercurrent...................... (Current-DT)....3-141
3.5.8. Peak value overcurrent ........................................ (Current-Inst)....3-147
3.5.9. Inverse time overcurrent ....................................... (Current-Inv)....3-153

3.5.10. Directional definite time overcurrent
protection ...........................................................(DirCurrentDT)....3-159
3.5.11. Directional inverse time overcurrent
protection ...........................................................(DirCurrentInv)....3-167
3.5.12. Definite time NPS.......................................................(NPS-DT)....3-179
3.5.13. Inverse time NPS .......................................................(NPS-Inv)....3-183
3.5.14. Voltage-controlled overcurrent...............................(Imax-Umin)....3-187
3.5.15. Definite time over and undervoltage
protection .............................................................. (Voltage-DT)....3-195
3-2
3.5.15.1. Definite time stator earth fault (95 %) ............................................3-200

3.5.15.2. Rotor E/F protection.......................................................................3-210
3.5.15.3. Interturn protection.........................................................................3-212
3.5.16. Peak value overvoltage........................................ (Voltage-Inst)....3-213
3.5.17. Power............................................................................(Power)....3-217
3.5.18. Overtemperature protection ................................... (Overtemp.)....3-231
3.5.19. Synchrocheck function.......................................(SynchroChck)....3-239
3.5.19.1. General ..........................................................................................3-247
3.5.19.2. Settings ..........................................................................................3-249
3.5.19.3. Binary inputs of the function...........................................................3-255
3.5.20. Breaker failure protection................................ (BreakerFailure)....3-259
3.5.21. Transformer differential protection function ........... (Diff-Transf)....3-273
3.5.22. Generator differential .................................................(Diff-Gen)....3-297
3.5.23. Frequency protection ............................................. (Frequency)....3-303
3.5.24. Rate-of-change of frequency protection........................... (df/dt)....3-307
3.5.25. Overfluxing............................................................ (Overexcitat)....3-311
3.5.26. Inverse time overfluxing ............................................... (U/f-Inv)....3-315
3.5.27. Balanced voltage ................................................. (Voltage-Bal)....3-323
3.5.28. Underimpedance................................................. (Underimped)....3-329
3.5.29. Loss Of Excitation ............................................ (MinReactance)....3-337
3.5.30. Stator overload.................................................. (OLoad-Stator)....3-349
3.5.31. Rotor overload ................................................... (OLoad-Rotor)....3-355
3.5.32. Stator ground fault ................................................ (Stator-EFP)....3-361
3.5.33. Rotor Ground Fault (Injection Principle)
protection ............................................................... (Rotor-EFP)....3-383
3.5.34. Pole slipping..............................................................(Pole-Slip)....3-393
3.6. Control functions ............................................................................3-405

3.6.1. Control function........................................................... (FUPLA)....3-405
3.6.1.1. Control function settings - FUPLA..................................................3-407
3.6.1.1.1. General ..........................................................................................3-408
3.6.1.1.2. Timers ............................................................................................3-409
3.6.1.1.3. Binary inputs ..................................................................................3-409
3.6.1.1.4. Binary signals.................................................................................3-409
3.6.1.1.5. Measurement inputs ......................................................................3-410
3.6.1.1.6. Measurement outputs ....................................................................3-410
3.6.1.1.7. Flow chart for measurement inputs and outputs............................3-410
3.6.1.2. Loading FUPLA..............................................................................3-410
3.6.2. Logic .............................................................................. (Logic)....3-411
3.6.3. Delay / integrator............................................................(Delay)....3-415
3.6.4. Counter ...................................................................... (Counter)....3-419
3.6.5. Contact bounce filter ...............................................(Debounce)....3-421
3.6.6. Signal flutter detector ............................................(Defluttering)....3-423
3.6.7. LDU events ........................................................... (LDUevents)....3-427
3.7. Measurement functions..................................................................3-429

3.7.1. Measurement function .................................................. (UIfPQ)....3-429
3.7.2. Three-phase current plausibility............................(Check-I3ph)....3-433
3.7.3. Three-phase voltage plausibility ......................... (Check-U3ph)....3-437
3.7.4. Disturbance recorder ................................... (Disturbance Rec)....3-441
3.7.5. Measurement module .......................... (Measurement Module)....3-455
3-3
3.7.5.1. Impulse counter inputs...................................................................3-461

3.7.5.2. Impulse counter operation .............................................................3-462
3.7.5.3. Impulse counter operating principle ...............................................3-462
3.7.5.4. Interval processing.........................................................................3-463
3.8. Data transmission ..........................................................................3-465

3.8.1. Principle of operation of the A/D converter 316EA63 ....................3-465
3.8.1.1. Introduction ....................................................................................3-465
3.8.1.2. Synchronisation principle ...............................................................3-465
3.8.1.3. Data transmission principle............................................................3-465
3.8.1.4. Consequences of transmission errors ...........................................3-465
3.8.2. Longitudinal differential protection .............................(Diff-Line)....3-467
3.8.2.1. Setting instructions for lines with
a power transformer in the protected zone ....................................3-473
3.8.2.2. Setting instructions for lines without
a power transformer in the protected zone ....................................3-483
3.8.3. Binary data transmission....................................... (RemoteBin)....3-489
3-4
3. SETTING THE FUNCTION PARAMETERS

3.1. General
3.1.1. Library and settings
RE.316*4 provides a comprehensive library of protection and control
functions for the complete protection of lines, feeders, transformers,
and generators.
The setting procedure is carried out with the aid of a personal
computer and is extremely user-friendly.
The number of protection and control functions active in a RE.316*4
system is limited by the available computing capacity of the processing
unit.
In each case, the control program checks whether sufficient computing
capacity is available otherwise an error message is displayed.
The maximum number of protection functions is 48.
The settings and the software key determine which functions are
active. This facilitates configuration of different protection scheme:
Only functions that are actually needed should be activated. Every
active function entails computing effort, which can influence the
operating time.
Many of the functions can be used for multiple purposes, e.g.:
to achieve several stages of operation (with the same or
different settings and time delays)
for use with different input channels.
Other functions can only be configured for one specific purpose in
each set of parameter settings:
binary signal transmission
contact bounce filter (Debounce)
IEC 60870-5-103.
Functions active in the same set of settings can be logically
interconnected, e.g. for interlocking purposes.
3.1.2. Control and protection function sequence

3.1.2.1. Repetition rate
The protection system software controls the operating sequence of the
individual functions. The latter are divided into routines, which are
processed cyclically by the microprocessor. The frequency of the
processing cycle (repetition rate) is determined by the technical
requirements of the application.
3-5
For many functions, this depends on the permissible or desired

tripping delay. From this follows that the faster tripping should take
place, the higher will be the repetition rate. Typical relationships
between tripping delay and repetition rate can be seen from Table 3.1.
Repetition rate Explanation Delay time

4 4 times every 20 ms 1) < 40 ms
2 2 times every 20 ms 40 ... 199 ms
1 1 time every 20 ms 200 ms
1) for 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Table 3.1 Typical protection function repetition rates
The repetition rates of some of the functions do not depend on their

settings, e.g. the distance protection always has a repetition rate of 4
and the auto-reclosure 1.
The scanning of the binary inputs and the setting of the signalling and
tripping outputs takes place at the sampling rate of the analog inputs.
While the operating speed of the various protection functions is more
than adequate for their purpose, they do operate in sequence so that
the effective operating times of output signals such as 'Start' and 'Trip'
are subject to some variation. This variation is determined by the
repetition rate controlling the operation of the function. Typical values
are given in Table 3.2.
Repetition rate Variation

4 -2...+5 ms
2 -2...+10 ms
1 -2...+20 ms
Table 3.2 Variation in the operating time of output signals of

protection functions in relation to their repetition rates
3.1.2.2. Computation requirement of protection functions

The amount of computation a function entails is determined by the
following factors:
complexity of the algorithms used. This is characteristic for each
protection function.
Repetition rate:
The faster the operating time of a protection function, the higher its
repetition rate according to Table 3.1. The computation
requirement increases approximately in proportion to the repetition
rate.
3-6
Already active protection functions:

The protection system is able to use certain intermediate results
(measured variables) determined by a protection function several
times. In consequence, additional stages of the same protection
function with the same inputs generally only involve a little more
computation for the comparison with the pick-up value, but not for
conditioning the input signal.
The computation requirement of the RE.316*4 protection functions can
be seen from Table 3.3. The values given are typical percentages in
relation to the computing capacity of a fictitious main processing unit.
According to Table 3.1, the computation requirement of some of the
functions increases for low settings of the time delay t and therefore a
factor of 2 or 4 has to be used in some instances. When entering the
settings for a function with several stages, the one with the shortest
time delay is assumed to be the first stage.
The computing performance of a RE.316*4 is 250 %, providing a
316VC61a or 316VC61b central processor is fitted. This applies to all
devices equipped with the local control unit on the front. The
computing performance of older devices with a 316VC61 central
processing unit is limited to 200 %.
The computing load can be viewed by selecting 'List Procedure List'
from the 'List Edit Parameters' menu and is given for the four sets of
parameters in per thousand.
3-7
Function 1st stage 2nd and higher stages Factor (**)

1ph 3ph 1ph 3ph t < 40 ms t < 200 ms
Distance (min.) 50
starters Z< 20
Meas Bward 5
VTSupNPS 3
Power Swing 15
HV distance (min) 70
Meas Bward 5
VTSupNPS 3
Power Swing 15
EarthFltIsol 5 ditto 4 2
Autoreclosure 1 ditto
EarthFltGnd2 10 ditto 4 2
I0-Inverse 4 3
Current-DT 2 3 1 4 2
with Inrush Blocking 5 5 4 2
Current-Inst 3 4 2 4 2
Current-Inv 4 7 3
DirCurrentDT 19 ditto 4 2
DirCurrentInv 21 ditto
NPS-DT -- 6 1
NPS-Inv -- 8 3
Imax-Umin 5 8 2 4 2
Voltage-DT 2 3 1 4 2
Voltage-Inst 3 4 2 4 2
Voltage-Bal 4 9 ditto 4 2
Underimped 6 17 4 11
MinReactance 6 17 4 11
Oload-Stator 4 7 3
Oload-Rotor -- 6 3
Power 5 14 3 8 2
Overtemp. 12 15 ditto
Frequency 15 -- 3 2
df/dt 50 5
Overexcitat 15 -- ditto 2
U/f-inv 25,5 -- ditto
Stator-EFP 40 ditto
Rotor-EFP 40 ditto
Pole-Slip 20 ditto
Diff-Gen -- 40 ditto
Diff-Transf -- 50 ditto
SynchroCheck 16 ditto 2
Diff-Line 50 ditto
RemoteBin 8 (*)
SS-Umschalt 30 ditto
BreakerFailure 34 46 ditto
FUPLA 1/2/4 (***) ditto
3-8
Function 1st stage 2nd and higher stages Factor (**)

1ph 3ph 1ph 3ph t < 40 ms t < 200 ms
IEC60870-5-103 1 (*)
Logic 4 ditto
Delay 8 ditto
Counter 8 ditto
Debounce 0.1 (*)
Defluttering 4 ditto
Analog RIO Trig 2 ditto 4 2
LDU events 4 ditto
UifPQ 5 ditto
MeasureModule
Voltage/CurrentInp 10 ditto
Cnt 8 ditto
Check-I3ph 5 ditto
Check-U3ph 5 ditto
DisturbanceRec
without binary I/P 20 (*)
with binary I/P 40 (*)
(*) can only be set once (**) always 1 for delays 200 ms
(***) depends on repetition rate (low / medium / high)
Table 3.3 Computation requirement of protection functions

(in percent)
Example:
Table 3.4 shows the computation requirement according to Table 3.3
of a simple protection scheme with four active functions. Since
functions 1 and 2 use the same analog inputs, the amount of
computing capacity required for function 2 is reduced to that of a
second stage.
Function Input Settings Percentage

No. Type channel Phases Pick-up Time incl. factor
1 Current-DT 1 (,2,3) three 10.0 IN 30 ms 3% 4 = 12%

2 Current-DT 1 (,2,3) three 2.5 IN 100 ms 1% 2 = 2%
3 Current-DT 4 single 3.5 IN 300 ms 2% 1 = 2%
4 Voltage-DT 7 single 2.0 UN 50 ms 2% 2 = 4%
Total 20%
Table 3.4 Example for calculating the computation requirement
3-9
3.1.2.3. Computing requirement of the control functions

The computing requirement of the control functions cannot be directly
represented as a percent of the total computing capacity. The size of
the code, the type of control logic also determines the computing
requirement.
The protection and control function load on the main processor can be
checked after loading the program by selecting 'Display AD Channels'
from the 'Monitor' menu and checking the value of the 'Loop time'.
Fig. 3.1 Display of the computing time
The 'Loop time' is a measure of the computing requirement. When all

the functions are active, i.e. none are disabled, this number must not
exceed 20000. The value must be read when the device is in the
normal operating state and not during a trip.
Set the cycling time of the high-priority task to 20 ms (default, see
Section 3.6.1.1. 'Control function settings - FUPLA').
This ensures the correct processing of the protection and control
functions.
3.2. Control and protection function inputs and outputs

3.2.1. Analog / Digital Converter
(see Section 5.4.2.6.)
The protection scheme can include three types of input transformers,
which can also have different ratings:
protection CTs
metering CTs (core-balance)
VTs.
The number and arrangement of the input transformers are defined
either by sub-code K.. in the ordering code or by transformer type
entered for K=0.
Before being processed by the protection functions, the currents and
voltages coming from the input transformers are digitised in the analog
section of the main processor unit.
Every analog input channel is designated either single or three-phase:
CTs:
three-phase protection
single-phase protection
single-phase metering (core-balance)
3-10
VTs:
three-phase Y connected
3-phase, delta connection
single-phase
A protection function can only be used in a three-phase mode, if a
corresponding three-phase group of CT/VT input channels is available.
All protection function settings are based on the input values
(secondary ratings) of the RE.316*4. The fine adjustment to suit the
effective primary system quantities is accomplished by varying the
reference settings of the analog inputs.
3.2.2. Binary inputs

RE.316*4 recognises one of the following values:
logical '0' (fixed value) or FALSE
logical '1' (fixed value) or TRUE
binary input value (316DB6.)
binary control and protection values as defined by the function
number and the corresponding signalling output
binary values from the station control level
binary values from the distributed input units (500RIO11)
binary values with interlocking data.
All the above can also be set as binary inputs of control and protection
functions.
All the binary addresses set may be used either directly or inverted.
3.2.3. Signalling outputs

All the control and protection signalling outputs provide the following
facilities:
external signalling via LEDs
external signalling via relays
event recording
control of tripping relays
external signalling via the communications interface
external signalling via distributed output units (500RIO11)
output of interlocking data.
The following applies to external signals via a signalling relay or a
LED:
A signalling relay or LED can only be activated by a one signal.
Every signalling relay and LED can be individually set to latch.
3-11
A signal can activate up to two output channels, e.g.:

2 signalling relays
1 signalling relay and 1 LED
1 signalling relay and 1 tripping relay
An output each can also be configured for the communication
interface, the distributed output units, interlocking data and event
recording.
Important signals are duplicated, e.g. 'General Trip' and 'General Trip
Aux'.
3.2.4. Tripping relay outputs

All protection functions can directly actuate the tripping relays. A
tripping logic matrix is provided for this purpose, which enables any
function to be connected to any tripping channel. A tripping channel
can be activated by any number of protection functions.
Only the binary I/O units 316DB61 and 316DB62 are equipped with
tripping relays. Each unit has two relays each with two contacts for a
total of four contacts.
3.2.5. Measured variables

(see Section 5.5.2.)
Apart from being processed internally, the analog variables measured
by the RE.316*4 protection functions can also be viewed externally as:
a value:
The input variables measured by the protection functions are
available to the station control system via the communication
interface.
They can also be viewed locally on a PC (personal computer)
running the operator program or on the local display unit (LDU) on
the frontplate. Their values are referred to the secondary voltages
and currents at the input of the RE.316*4.
a recorded event:
The instant a protection function trips, the value of the corre-
sponding measured variable is recorded as an event.
3-12
3.3. Frequency range

The protection functions can be set to operate at a power system
frequency fN of either 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The algorithms, which execute
the protection functions, have been optimised to produce the best
results at the rated frequency fN. Discrepancies from the rated
frequency cause an additional error.
3.4. System parameter settings

3.4.1. Relay configuration
Summary of parameters:
Unit Default Min. Max. Step

Nominal Frequency Hz 50 50 60 10
A/D Converter on VC61 (Select)
Slot Nr. 1 not used (Select)
AD Config K 0 0 999 1
SWVers SX... X (Select)
SWVers S.XXX 100 1 999 1
Significance of the parameters:

Nominal Frequency
Determination of the rated frequency:
50 Hz or 60 Hz.
A/D Converter
defines the type of A/D converter:
on VC61: A/D converter on 316VC61a resp.
316VC61b
EA62 : Line differential protection with the older
A/D converter 316EA62
EA63 : Line differential protection with the newer
A/D converter 316EA63
EA6. Master .: Master device
EA6. Slave .: Slave device
EA6. Master Fox .: Master device for data transmission via
FOX
EA6. Slave Fox .: Slave device for data transmission via
FOX
EA6. ..... S: Short data transmission distance
EA6. ..... L: Long data transmission distance
3-13
The setting of the data transmission distance is normally determined

by the attenuation of the optical fibre cable between the two units.
However, when using FOX optical fibre equipment, the setting is
determined by the connection between the RE.316*4 and the FOX
equipment.
The data transmission distance setting influences the output power of
the transmission diode. It must therefore be selected such that the
receiver diode at the remote end is not overloaded.
To make sure that the setting is correct, measure the optical signal
strength while commissioning the system. The output power must be
in the respective range given in the following table (MM = Multi-mode
optical cable 50/125m, SM = Single-mode optical cable 9/125 m):
Setting
OFL Type EA6..S EA6..L
MM -26 -20 dBm -16 -13 dBm
SM -32 -22 dBm -20 -17 dBm
Select the setting such that taking the attenuation to be expected due
to the optical cable into account, the power at the receiving end is
between 34dBm to 22dBm. Measure the signal strength at the
receiving end to make sure that it is within this range.
Instead of measuring the optical power at the receiving end one can
check the value of the received power in the diagnosis menu ( see
Section 6.6). The value should be between 400 ... 15000. The
transmission functions reliably outside this range, as long as no
modem errors are reported. In spite of this in order to have a reserve
against aging of the components (Optical cable, Transmit and Receive
diodes), after the commissioning the received power should be in the
range of 400 ... 15000
NOTICE: Take care when measuring the output power to set the
level for the correct type of optical cable in use.
One device must be configured as master (or 'EA6. Master Fox .')
and the other as slave (or ' EA6. Slave Fox .').
If an A/D converter Type 316EA62 is installed, the 'A/D Converter'
parameter must be set to 'EA62' even if the optical fibre link is not
in operation yet.
3-14
AD Config K:
Version and type of input transformer unit:
0 ... 999: K0: A/D converter freely selectable
K1 ... K9: Standard variant for REL316*4
without longitudinal distance protection
K15 ... K17: Standard variant for REL316*4
with longitudinal distance protection
K21 ... K24: Standard variant for RET316*4
K41 ... K47: Standard variant for REC316*4
K61 ... K67: Standard variant for REG316*4
K80 ... K999: Project specific A/D converter unit,
A/D converter freely selectable
A list of input transformer unit codes is to be found in the data

sheet (Section 8).
NOTICE: This parameter must be set before configuring the

protection functions and cannot be changed subsequently. The
setting must agree with the type of the I/P transformer actually
installed in the device. The hardware is not checked.
Slot Nr. 1:
Defines the type of I/O board in slot 1:
not used, 316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63.
Slot Nr. 2:
Slot Nr. 3:
Slot Nr. 4:
SWVers SX...:
First part (letter) of the software code.
SWVers S.XXX:
Second part (figures) of the software code.
A summary of the protection functions according to software codes is
given in the data sheet (Section 8).
3-15
3.4.2. Configuration of the A / D Converter

Channel type
If for the hardware configuration K is set to 0 or 80999, CT and VT
channels can be entered in any order, providing a corresponding input
transformer unit is fitted. The codes K80 upto K999 are project
specific, and are documented in the respective project schematics.
In the following tables the configuration possibilities and their
significance are explained. Some types of A/D converters are only
utilized for specific devices.
Channel Description of the A/D converter channels Device

Type type
Not used To be selected, in case no A/D converter is used ALL
in this channel.
UT 1ph 0.57 VT 1-phase. REL316*4
Range 0 ... 1.3 UN REC316*4
IT 1ph Protection CT 1-phase ALL
ITM 1ph Metering CT 1-phase ALL
UT 1ph 1.00 VT 1-phase. RET316*4
Range 0 ... 2.2 UN REG316*4
UT 1ph 0.15 VT 1-phase with UN = 15 V. REG316*4
Used for the Stator- and Rotor-ESS
(for REX010/011) (Ui, Ustator).
UTS 3ph 0.57 VT 3-phase in Star connection. Measurement of REL316*4
the phase earth voltage. REC316*4
Range 0 ... 1.3 UN
UTS 3ph 1.00 VT 3 phase in Star connection. Measurement of RET316*4
the phase earth voltage. REG316*4
Range 0 ... 2.2 UN
IT 3ph Protection CT 3-phase ALL
ITM 3ph Metering CT 3-phase ALL
UTD 3ph 0.57 VT 3-phase in Delta connection. Measurement of REL316*4
the phase-to-phase voltage. REC316*4
Range 0 ... 1.3 UN
UTD 3ph 1.00 VT 3-phase in Delta connection. Measurement of RET316*4
the phase-to-phase voltage. REG316*4
Range 0 ... 2.2 UN
Table 3.5 Configuration options and significance for channel type,

device type and description of the A/D converters
3-16
Nominal value
Enter the rated values for the CTs and VTs in the input transformer
unit (1 A, 2 A, 5 A, 100 V or 200 V). S and T phases of three-phase
channels assume the same value as R phase.
In order that the resolution of the impedance setting for a rated current
of 5 A is meaningful, the impedance setting range for 5 A is
automatically reduced by a factor of 10.
NOTICE: The ratings must be set at the beginning and not changed
afterwards. This applies especially in the case of the distance
function.
Setting instructions for the longitudinal differential protection:

The rated current settings of the channels in the remote station
(channels 7, 8 and 9) must agree with the effective rated currents of
the CTs in the remote station.
Edit A/D prim/sec ratio

This setting is utilised to correctly display the primary value in the
measurands display of the HMI and LDU, for the evaluation of the
disturbance records, and for the IEC60870-5-103-Protocol. S and T
phases of three-phase CT and VT channels assume the same value
as R phase.
Edit A/D channel ref. value

The reference values of the CT and VT channels enable the device
ratings to by matched to those of the protected unit. They are a factor
that can be set in the range 0.5 to 2. S and T phases of three-phase
channels assume the same value as R phase.
Example: Rated voltage = 110 V
110 V
Reference value of the voltage channel = = 1.100
100 V
Effects of changing the reference values:
With the exception of the impedance settings for the distance function,
the protection function settings (parameters expressed in relation to
'IN' and 'UN') are automatically adjusted to the new reference values.
In the case of the distance function, however, adjusting just the
currents and not the voltages will change the impedance pick-up
values. For this reason the reference values for the current inputs
should not be changed.
Edit A/D channel comment

Facility is provided for the user to enter a comment for each analog
channel, which is displayed together with the channel type when the
corresponding CT or VT input parameter of a protection function is
selected.
3-17
3.4.3. Entering comments for binary inputs and outputs

By clicking on the 'Edit' button for the resp. slot card in the window
'Relay Configuration' the user can enter comments for each of the
binary inputs (see Section 5.4.2.1), LED (see Section 5.4.2.5), signalling
outputs (see Section 5.4.2.3) or tripping output (see Section 5.4.2.4.).
3.4.4. Masking binary inputs, entering latching parameters and

definition of 'double indications'
Binary channels can be 'masked' by clicking on the 'Edit' button for the
resp. slot card in the window 'Relay Configuration' (see Section 5.4.2.1),
so that they do not appear in the event list.
Every LED (see Section 5.4.2.5), every signalling relay (see Section
5.4.2.3)and tripping relay (see Section 5.4.2.4) can be set to latch.
LEDs will only latch, however, providing the 'LED Sig Mode' parameter
is also set for latching beforehand.
Note that the green LED1 ('Activ') cannot be set to a latching mode.
Two consecutive binary inputs can be combined to form a 'Double
Indication' (see Section 5.4.2.2). Up to 30 double signals can be defined
and a runtime supervision can be activated for each pair.
3-18
3.4.5. System I / O
The system parameters apply to all the protection and control
functions of the device:
Text Unit Default Min. Max. Step

LED Sig Mode AccumSigAll (Select)
TimeSynchronisation By PC on (Select)
Relay Ready SignalAddr
General Trip SignalAddr ER
General TripAux SignalAddr
General Start SignalAddr ER
General StartAux SignalAddr
Inj. Test Output SignalAddr
Test active SignalAddr
MMI is ON SignalAddr ER
InjTest Enable BinaryAddr F
Ext. Reset BinaryAddr F
Enable Test BinaryAddr T
Remote Setting BinaryAddr F
ParSet2 IN BinaryAddr F
ParSet1 OUT SignalAddr ER
Modem Error SignalAddr ER
Quit Status SignalAddr ER
MVB PB Warning SignalAddr ER
MVB PB Crash SignalAddr ER
Process Bus BA1 Ready SignalAddr ER
Process Bus LA Faulty SignalAddr ER
Process Bus LB Faulty SignalAddr ER
3-19
Explanation of parameters:
LED Sig Mode
Select the display mode for LED signaling:
'AccumSigAll'
Signals will not be reset, but accumulated. It should be noted
that signals from different events could be superimposed.
'ResetSigAll'
Reset with 'General Start'.
The signaling LEDs will be reset by a 'General Start' pick-up.
All subsequent signals will be displayed and maintained i.e.
the signals correspond to the last fault.
'ResetSigTrip'
Reset with 'General Start'.
All signaling LEDs are reset by a start. New signaling will only
be dispayed and maintained if tripping takes place.
'NoLatch'
The LED signals are not latched.
In all three latching modes, the LEDs can be reset either by selecting
the menu item 'Latch Reset' in the 'RESET menu' on the LDU or by
briefly activating the 'Ext. reset' binary input.
Only those LEDs will latch in the on state if they are configured
according to Section 3.4.4.
Time Synchronisarion By PC
switches on / off the synchronisation of the RE.316*4 clock by PC
clock when the HMI is started.
Relay Ready
Signal that the relay is ready to operate.
General Trip, General Trip Aux
General tripping signal generated via an OR function of all tripping
signals assigned to the tripping logic.
General Start, General Start Aux
Signal for 'General Start'.
This signal is the OR of all start signals configured as events.
Inj Test Output (see Section 7.9.1.3.)
Tripping signal for the test set.
When the device is set to the test mode, the output signal 'Inj. Test
Output' is assigned to the distance protection signal 'Trip CB'.
Although it is possible to allocate this signal to two outputs, only
one should be assigned. This signal is normally assigned to the
auxiliary relay S102.
3-20
Test active (see Section 5.5.3.)

Signal indicating that the device is in the test mode.
This signal remains set as long as the HMI menu 'Test functions' is
open.
MMI is on
Signal indicating that the control PC is connected and serviceable.
Inj Test Enable (see Section 7.9.1.3.)
Input for switching to and from the test mode. It is normally used in
conjunction with the test adapter Type XX93 or 316 TSS 01 and
assigned to the binary input OC 101. This input has to be inverted
when using the test plug casing Type XX93.
F: operating mode
T: test mode
xx: all binary inputs
Caution:
An active input does not influence the LED 'Activ' (green LED).
When the input is active, the Baud rate of the HMI interface is
switched to 9600 bps.
Ext. Reset
Input for remote resetting the signalling LEDs and relays:
F: no external reset
Enable Test
Input for enabling the test functions controlled by the MMI:
F: test functions blocked
T: test functions enabled
Remote Setting (see Section 5.9.1.)
Input for switching between sets of parameters.
F: Sets of parameters can only be switched by applying
signals to the inputs 'ParSet 2 IN... ParSet 4 IN'.
T: Sets of parameters can only be switched by signals from
the station control system.
ParSet 2 IN...ParSet 4 IN (see Section 5.9.1.)
Inputs for switching between different sets of parameters.
ParSet 1 OUT...ParSet 4 OUT (see Section 5.9.1.)
Signal indicating the active set of parameters.
3-21
Modem Error
Signals errors in the optical data transmission link between two line
differential relays.
This signal is output without any delays in the event of an error
(see Section 3.8. Data transmission).
The diagnostic function reports this error after a delay of 80 ms, i.e.
only when it is certain that the communications channel is
permanently disturbed.
Quit Status
signals the operation of the reset button on the front of the device.
MVB PB Warning, MVB PB Crash, Process Bus BA1 Ready... Process
Bus BA4 Ready, Process Bus LA faulty, Process Bus LB faulty
These messages are only generated when using an MVB process
bus (see Operating Instructions for the remote I/O system RIO580,
1MRB520192-Uen).
3-22
3.5. Protection functions

3.5.1. HV distance protection function (HV-Distance)
The HV distance protection is optimised for applications in EHV power
systems. The main difference compared with the standard distance
protection function is improved phase selection to achieve a better
response to evolving faults on parallel circuits.
Refer to the standard distance relay function in Section 3.5.2. for the
setting procedure. However, note must be taken of the following
differences (the parameters in Section 3.5.2. that do not apply to the
HV distance protection or have a different significance are marked):
The HV distance function is only equipped with underimpedance

starters, i.e. the overcurrent starters have been omitted. As a
consequence, the parameters 'Start Mode' and 'I start', the binary
input 'Ext UZ Blk' and the signals 'Start OC' and 'Start UZ' do not
exist.
The function is only applicable to solidly grounded systems. Also
the 'Phase Sel Mode' parameter has different settings.
In addition to the non-directional starter mode available up to the
present, the 'Phase Sel Mode' parameter also permits the direction
and reach of the overreach zone to be selected. This is only
effective, however, for phase selection in the first time step and
has no influence on (non-directional) signals.
The 'Phase Sel Mode' parameter can be set to one of the following:
non-directional (default)
forwards overreach
An earth fault detector with negative phase sequence restraint I2 is
now included in addition to the existing restraint using the largest
phase current Imax. The settings 'Blocked' and 'I0 AND U0' are no
longer available for the parameter 'Gnd Fault Mode'. The settings
are therefore (the corresponding earth fault criteria are given on
the right, IE = 3 I0 being referred to as the neutral current):
I0: (IE > '3I0min') AND (IE > 0.25 Imax)
I0 OR U0: (IE > '3I0min') AND (IE > 0.25 Imax)
OR (UE > '3U0min')
I0(I2): (IE > '3I0min') AND (IE > 0.23 I2)
I0(I2) OR U0: (IE > '3I0min') AND (IE > 0.23 I2)
OR (UE > '3U0min')
The slope of the measurement characteristic for the first zone is
changed from 7 to 14 if the load current exceeds the setting of
the new parameter 'I Load' and power is flowing from the relay
location towards the remote end of the line (overreaching due to
the semaphore effect).
The setting range for 'I Load' is 0...2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN (default
setting = 0.5 IN), where:
3-23
'I Load' = 0.01...1.99 IN: Characteristic switches as de-

scribed above.
'I Load' = 0 IN: Fixed slope of 14
'I Load' = 2 IN: Fixed slope of 7
The setting 'BlockZ1' in the 'Measurement' sub-menu has been

dropped and a binary input 'Ext. Block Z1' provided instead.
In the case of short lines and a large line-to-source impedance
ratio, a better response for phase-to-phase faults can be obtained
by correcting the phase-angles of US and UT.
Calibration is performed during commissioning as follows:
Inject the same voltage (0.5 UN) into all three phases in
parallel.
Read the phase error of S and T phases (in relation to R
phase) in the 'List AD channels'.
Enter the values of the readings for the parameters 'SR Error'
and 'TR Error' in the sub-menu 'Analog inputs'.
3-24
3.5.2. Distance protection (Distance)
A. Application
Distance protection for the high-speed discriminative protection of long
or short overhead lines or cables, double-circuit lines, heavily loaded
lines, lines with weak infeeds and what are referred to as 'short-zone'
lines.
The protection is applicable to solidly or low-resistance grounded
systems, systems with Petersen coils or to ungrounded systems.
All kinds of faults are detected including close-in three-phase faults,
cross-country faults, evolving faults and high-resistance earth faults.
The protection remains stable in the presence of power swings and
reversal of energy direction. Switching onto an existing fault results in
instantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker.
The distance function can also act as back-up protection for the power
transformer and neighbouring lines. Most of the logic described in this
Section (e.g. the transmission of signals) is not used for these
applications.
B. Features
Overcurrent or underimpedance starters (polygon characteristic)
5 distance stages (independently set polygon characteristics)
Definite time overcurrent back-up protection also applicable for
protecting short zones (teed section in 1 breaker schemes
(see Section 4.2.1.5.4.))
VT supervision
Power-swing blocking
Tripping logics for:
switch-onto-fault protection
overreaching zone
permissive underreaching transfer tripping (also for weak
infeed and communications channel failure)
permissive overreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed,
communications channel failure and reversal of energy
direction)
blocking scheme (also for reversal of energy direction)
3-25
C. Inputs and outputs
I. CT/VT inputs:
Three-phase currents
Three-phase voltages
Neutral current
Neutral current of the parallel circuit
II. Binary inputs:

Reversal of measuring direction
Distance function blocking
Underimpedance starter blocking
Overcurrent back-up blocking (I O/C)
Dead line
Manual CB close
Zone extension
Isolator open
Communication receive
Communication channel failure
Single-phase auto-reclosure ready
Tripping condition blocking for the switch-onto-fault protection
Incoming PLC blocking signal
First zone blocking
III. Binary outputs:

R+S+T starters
RST starter
R starter
S starter
T starter
E starter
I0 starter
U0 starter
Starter
Z< starter
Overcurrent back-up starter (I O/C)
Switch-onto-fault starter
Single-phase starter
CB trip
RST trip
R trip
S trip
T trip
Three-phase trip
Single-phase trip
Overcurrent back-up trip (I O/C)
Switch-onto-fault trip
Trip with transfer trip signal
3-26
'short-zone' protection trip

Time 2nd step
Zone 1 time
Zone 2 time
Zone 3 time
Zone 4 time
Final zone time
Measurement
Overreaching measurement
Forwards measurement
Reverse measurement
'weak infeed' trip
Distance protection blocked
Delayed distance protection blocked
VT supervision
Delayed VT supervision
Communication send
PLC boost
Memory frequency deviation
IV. Measurements:
Impedance loop RE
Impedance loop SE
Impedance loop TE
Impedance loop RS
Impedance loop ST
Impedance loop TR
3-27
D. Distance protection function settings - Distance

Text Units Default Min. Max. Step
GENERAL
Reference Length ohms/phase 01.000 0.01 30.000 0.001

CT Neutral Line side (Select)
Reset Events all (Select)
Fupla Directory DISTSTD
CT/VT INPUTS
U input CT/VT-Addr 0
I input CT/VT-Addr 0
I0 input CT/VT-Addr 0
I0P input CT/VT-Addr 0
STARTING (see 'Measurement' for final zone settings)

1) Start Mode OC (Select)
2) Phase Sel Mode Solid Ground (Select)
2) Gnd Fault Mode I0 (Select)
1) I start IN 004.00 0.5 10 0.01
I min IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01
3I0 min IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01
3U0 min UN 000.00 0 2 0.01
XA ohms/phase 000.0 0 999 0.1
XB ohms/phase 000.0 -999 0 0.1
RA ohms/phase 000.0 0 999 0.1
RB ohms/phase 000.0 -999 0 0.1
RLoad ohms/phase 000.0 0 999 0.1
Angle Load deg 45 0 90 0.1
Uweak UN 000.00 0 2 0.01
MEASUREMENT
X (1) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01

R (1) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RR (1) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RRE (1) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
k0 (1) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
K0 Angle (1) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
Delay (1) s 000.000 0 10 0.001
1) Not available on HV distance function.

2) Different settings for the HV distance function.
3-28
X (2) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01

R (2) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RR (2) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RRE (2) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RRE (2) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
k0 (2) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
K0 Angle (2) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
Delay (2) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
X (3) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
R (3) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RR (3) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RRE (3) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
k0 (3) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
K0 Angle (3) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
Delay (3) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
X (4/OR) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
R (4/OR) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RR (4/OR) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
RRE (4/OR) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 300 0.01
k0 (4/OR) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
K0 Angle (4/OR) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
Delay (4/OR) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
X (BACK) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 0 0.01
R (BACK) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 0 0.01
RR (BACK) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 0 0.01
RRE (BACK) ohms/phase 000.00 -300 0 0.01
*) Delay (Def) s 002.00 0 10 0.01
k0m 1 000.00 0 8 0.01
k0 Angle(m) deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01
UminFault UN 000.05 0.01 2 0.01
Mem Dir Mode Trip (Select)
*) Def Dir Mode non-dir (Select)
1) Block Z1 off (Select)
*) These parameters belong to the final zone.
The starting and measurement values the settings (in columns Min.,
Max. and Step) the parameters with unit 'Ohm/Phase' have to be
divided by 10 for relays with a rated current of 5 A. They do not
change for rated currents of 1 A and 2 A.
3-29
O/C BACK-UP PROTECTION
I O/C IN 000.00 0 10 0.01

Delay O/C s 005.00 0 10 0.1
VT SUPERVISION
VT Sup Mode off (Select)

VT Sup Blk Del off (Select)
VT Sup Deb Del off (Select)
U0min VTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01
I0min VTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01
U2min VTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01
I2min VTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01
TRIP SCHEMES
ComMode off (Select)

TripMode 1Ph trip (Select)
SOTF Mode off (Select)
SOTF10sec off (Select)
Weak off (Select)
Unblock off (Select)
Echo off (Select)
Trans Block off (Select)
t1 Block s 000.04 0 0.25 0.01
t1 Trans Block s 000.05 0 0.25 0.01
t2 Trans Block s 003.00 0 10 0.01
t1 Evol Faults s 003.00 0 10 0.01
POWER SWING BLOCKING
Time PS block s 000.00 0 10 0.01
BINARY INPUTS
Change Meas. Dir. BinaryAddr F

Ext. Block Dist BinaryAddr F
1) Ext UZ Block BinaryAddr F
Ext Block PSB BinaryAddr T
Ext Block O/C BinaryAddr F
DeadLine BinaryAddr F
Manual Close BinaryAddr F
ZExtension BinaryAddr F
Isolator open BinaryAddr F
Com Rec BinaryAddr F
3-30
Text Units Default
Com Fail BinaryAddr F

1 Pol AR BinaryAddr T
Ext Block SOTF BinaryAddr F
Ext Block HF BinaryAddr F
Zextension AR BinaryAddr F
Ext. Block Z1 BinaryAddr F
CB COMMANDS
Trip CB R Trip Chan 00000000

Trip CB S Trip Chan. 00000000
Trip CB T Trip Chan 00000000
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Start R+S+T SignalAddr ER

Start RST SignalAddr ER
Start RST Aux SignalAddr
Start R SignalAddr ER
Start R Aux SignalAddr
Start S SignalAddr ER
Start S Aux SignalAddr
Start T SignalAddr ER
Start T Aux SignalAddr
Start E SignalAddr
Start E Aux SignalAddr
Start I0 SignalAddr
Start U0 SignalAddr ER
Start O/C SignalAddr
Start SOTF SignalAddr
Start 1ph SignalAddr
Trip CB SignalAddr ER
Trip RST SignalAddr
Trip RST Aux SignalAddr
Trip CB R SignalAddr
Trip CB S SignalAddr
Trip CB T SignalAddr
Trip CB 3P SignalAddr
Trip CB 1P SignalAddr
3-31
Trip O/C SignalAddr ER

Trip SOTF SignalAddr
Trip Com SignalAddr
Trip Stub SignalAddr
Delay >=2 SignalAddr
Delay 1 SignalAddr
Delay 2 SignalAddr ER
Delay Def SignalAddr ER
Meas Main SignalAddr
Meas Oreach SignalAddr
Meas Fward SignalAddr
Meas Bward SignalAddr
Weak Infeed SignalAddr
Dist Blocked SignalAddr
Del Dist Blocked SignalAddr ER
Power Swing SignalAddr ER
VT Sup SignalAddr
VT Sup Delay SignalAddr
Com Send SignalAddr ER
Com Boost SignalAddr
Freq Dev SignalAddr
1) Start OC SignalAddr ER
1) Start UZ SignalAddr
ADDITIONAL LOGIC
BOOL_IN1 BinaryAddr F
: : :
BOOL_IN8 BinaryAddr F
TIMER_1 ms 0 0 30000 1
: : : : : :
TIMER_8 ms 0 0 30000 1
BOOL_OUT1 SignalAddr
: :
BOOL_OUT8 SignalAddr
3-32
GENERAL
Reference Length (see Section 3.5.2.1.)
Reactance (secondary value) to be used as reference length of the
line.
CT neutral (see Section 3.5.2.1.)
Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current di-
rection):
busbar side (old BBC diagram)
line side (standard today,
see wiring diagram in the Chapter 12)
This parameter only influences the distance function and only the
display of the system variables. It does not influence the values of
the A/D channels.
Reset Events (see Page 3-45)
Determination of whether all the distance function events in the
event list which have been reset should be displayed:
All
Partly
Fupla directory
The sub directory for the distance protection logic is selectable.
The default directory name 'DISTSTD' is valid in case the standard
distance protection logic is utilised, which is situated in the HMI sub
directory.
A different configuration is necessary only if instead of the standard
distance logic a special distance protection logic is utilised. The
procedure in this case has to be obtained from the associated logic
description.
CT/VT INPUTS (see wiring diagram in the Chapter 12)

U input
indicates the first of the VT inputs assigned to the three phase
voltages.
I input
indicates the first of the CT inputs assigned to the three phase
currents.
I0 input
indicates the CT input assigned to the neutral current (if fitted and
activated). This is used for the external acquisition of the neutral
current of the line. If the I0 input is not used, the neutral current is
derived from the phase currents.
3-33
I0P input
indicates the CT input assigned to the neutral current of the parallel
circuit (if fitted and activated). This is used for the neutral current of
the parallel circuit of a double-circuit line.
Note:
The CT input (I0P) should be wired in the same sense as the
neutral current input (I0) (e.g. terminals 9 and 10 correspond to
terminals 7 and 8 respectively).
STARTING (see Section 3.5.2.2./ 4.2.1.1.)

Start Mode 1)
Definition of the starters used:
OC - overcurrent
UZ - underimpedance
PhaseSelMode 2)
Phase preference for cross-country faults in systems with Petersen
coils and ungrounded systems:
solidly grounded (no phase preference)
RTS(R) cyclic
TRS(T) cyclic
RTS acyclic
RST acyclic
TSR acyclic
TRS acyclic
SRT acyclic
STR acyclic
Gnd Fault Mode 2)
Method of detecting ground faults:
I0
I0 OR U0
I0 AND U0.
Blocked (only phase-to-phase loop measured, e.g.
with only two CTs and V connected VTs)
I Start 1)
Pick-up value of the overcurrent starters.
I Min
Current level for enabling the protection.
3I0 Min
Current level of the neutral current (3I0) for enabling the protection
(ground fault detector).

2) Different settings for the HV distance function.
3-34
3U0 Min
Voltage level of the neutral voltage (3U0) at which the E/F
measurement is enabled (ground fault detector).
XA
Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the tripping
direction.
XB
Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the restraint
direction.
RA
Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the tripping
direction.
RB
Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the restraint
direction.
RLoad
Resistive reach for avoiding load encroachment.
Angle Load
Limit phase-angle for avoiding load encroachment.
Uweak
(Phase) Voltage pick-up value for determining the 'weak infeed' or
'dead line' conditions for enabling manually energisation of the line.
A setting of zero disables the function.
MEASUREMENT (see Section 3.5.2.3. / 4.2.1.2.)

X (n)
Pick-up line reactance for Zone (n):
X < 0 for the restraint direction
X = 0 disables the zone (Zone 1 cannot be disabled)
R (n)
Pick-up line resistance for Zone (n); the sign must be the same as
for X (n).
RR (n)
Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for phase faults;
the sign must be the same as for X (n).
RRE (n)
Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for E/Fs; the sign
must be the same as for X (n).
k0 (n)
Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for E/Fs in Zone
(n); (Z 0 Z1) / (3 x Z1) .
3-35
k0 Angle (n)
Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for E/Fs in
Zone (n); Arg [(Z0 Z1) / (3 Z1)] .
Delay (n)
Operating time for Zone (n).
X (BACK)
Pick-up line reactance for the reverse zone:
X = 0 zone disabled.
R (BACK)
Pick-up line resistance for the reverse zone.
RR (BACK)
Resistive reach for phase faults in the reverse zone.
RRE (BACK)
Resistive reach for E/Fs in the reverse zone.
Delay (Def) (see Section 3.5.2.4.)
Operating time for the final zone (starter reach).
k0m
Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a parallel
circuit (ratio of the mutual impedance to three times the positive-
sequence impedance); Zm0 / (3 Z1) . The mutual impedance is
not taken into account for a setting of zero.
k0 Angle(m)
Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a
[ ]
parallel circuit Arg Zm0 / (3 x Z1) .
Umin Fault (see Section 3.5.2.3.2.)

Minimum voltage at which the fault voltage is used for determining
fault direction.
Mem Dir Mode
Procedure to be followed after decay of the memory voltage and
no voltage is available for measurement:
Protection blocks
Protection trips
Conditional trip: Only trips, if the directions during the present
and the preceding times steps are in
opposition.
Def Dir Mode (see Section 3.5.2.4.)
Response at the end of the final time step (definitive time):
Non-directional: Trips for faults in both directions.
Forwards: Trips only for faults in the forwards direction.
3-36
Block Z1 1)
Zone 1 measurement blocking:
off
on
O/C BACK-UP PROTECTION (see Section 3.5.2.5. / 4.2.1.4.)

I O/C
Pick-up value of the definite time back-up overcurrent function.
Delay O/C
Time delay for the definite time back-up overcurrent function.
VT SUPERVISION
(see Section 3.5.2.6. / 4.2.1.3.)
VT Sup Mode
0 off
1 ZeroSeq [U0 I0]
2 NegSeq [U2 I2]
3 Zero*NegSeq [(U0 I0) + (U2 I2)]
4 Special [U2 (I0 + I2)]
VT Sup Blk Del
Delayed blocking of the distance function (12 s) for operation
of the VT supervision.
off immediate blocking
on delayed blocking
VT Sup Deb Del
Delay (1 s) for resetting blocking by the VT supervision.
off immediate reset
on delayed reset
U0 min VT Sup
Pick-up setting of the neutral voltage (U0) for VT supervision
referred to the rated VT voltage 100/ 3 or 200/ 3 .
I0 min VT Sup
Pick-up setting of the neutral current (I0) for VT supervision.
3-37
U2 min VT Sup
Pick-up setting of the negative sequence voltage (U2) for VT
supervision referred to the rated VT voltage 100/ 3 or 200/ 3 .
I2 min VT Sup
Pick-up setting of the NPS current (I2) for VT supervision.
TRIP SCHEMES (see Section 3.5.2.7. / 4.2.1.5.)

Com Mode
Type of transfer tripping scheme:
off
PUTT NONDIR
PUTT FWD
PUTT OR2
POTT
BLOCK OR
Trip Mode
Type of tripping (single or three-phase):
1PhTrip - single-phase tripping (for single-phase auto-
reclosure)
3PhTrip - three-phase tripping in all cases
3PhTripDel3 - single-phase tripping (for single-phase auto-
reclosure) up to the end of 'Delay (3)' then
three-phase tripping
SOTF Mode
Operating mode of the switch-onto-fault function:
off
non-dir. non-directional underimpedance starting
(recommended setting)
forward UR2 directional with overreaching (Zone 2, if
overreaching disabled) and non-directional
after decay of any memory voltage
SOTF 10sec
Enables the 10 s delay for the switch-onto-fault function:
off (t = 200 ms)
on (t = 10 s)
Weak
Enables 'Weak infeed' logic for the PUTT or POTT transfer tripping
modes (Uweak must also be set):
off
on
3-38
Unblock
Deblocking logic enable:
off
on (only suitable for PLC)
Echo
'Echo' logic enable for the POTT transfer tripping mode:
off
on
Trans Block
Enables 'Transient blocking' logic (stabilisation for reversal of
power direction on double-circuit lines) for the POTT and BLOCK
OR (overreaching blocking scheme) transfer tripping modes:
off
on
t1 Block
Time allowed for receiving a blocking signal in the BLOCK OR
(overreaching blocking scheme) mode.
t1 Trans Block
Time 1 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. Delay for
faults after a fault was detected in the reverse direction.
t2 Trans Block
Time 2 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. The logic
remains enabled for the time t2 after a fault was detected in the
reverse direction.
t1 Evol Faults
Time for discriminating evolving faults (three-phase trip for evolving
faults during this time setting).
POWER-SWING BLOCKING (see Section 3.5.2.8. and 4.2.1.6.)

Time PS Block
Maximum time during which the power-swing blocking function is
effective. The function is disabled when set to zero.
BINARY INPUTS (see Section 3.5.2.10.)

Change Meas. Dir
Input for changing the direction of measurement.
Ext. Block Dist.
Input for blocking the distance protection function:
F: not blocked
xx: all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
3-39
Ext. UZ Block 1)
Input for blocking the underimpedance starters:
F: underimpedance starters enabled
T: underimpedance starters disabled
Ext. Block PSB

External disable for the power-swing blocking function:
F: power-switch blocking enabled
T: power-switch blocking disabled
Ext. Block O/C

External disable of the back-up overcurrent function
F: enabled
T: disabled
Deadline
Line de-energised signal (auxiliary contact on the circuit-breaker
when the VTs are on the busbar):
F: input not used
Manual Close
Circuit-breaker manual close signal:
F: input not used
ZExtension
External zone extension control signal:
F: external zone extension disabled
Isolator Open
Isolator open signal for activating the 'short-zone' logic and
protection (T section in 1 breaker schemes):
F: disabled
Com Rec
Input for PLC signal from the remote station:
F: input not used
3-40
Com Fail
Input for PLC failure signal:
F: input not used
1 Pol AR
Single-phase trip enable (used in conjunction with the auto-
reclosure function):
F: three-phase trip only
T: single and three-phase trip (depending on type of fault)
Ext Block SOTF

Input for blocking the tripping condition for the switch-onto-fault
logic:
F: enabled
T: disabled
Note: The input does not disable the switch-onto-fault starting
signal.
Ext Block HF
Input for blocking a received PLC signal (controlled, for example,
by a sensitive E/F scheme using the same PLC channel):
F: input not used
Zextension AR
Input for enabling the overreaching zone by the auto-reclosure
function:
F: zone extension by the auto-reclosure function disabled
ExtBlock Z1
Input for blocking measurement in the first zone:
F: enabled
T: disabled
3-41
CB COMMANDS
Trip CB R
Tripping logic for the R phase pole of the circuit-breaker. This
signal is not generated while a blocking signal is being applied with
the exception of a trip by the back-up overcurrent protection.
Trip CB S
Tripping relay for the S phase pole of the circuit-breaker. This
Trip CB T
Tripping relay for the T phase pole of the circuit-breaker. This
SIGNALLING
Start R+S+T
General distance protection starting signal
(OR logic for all starting signals excluding 'weak infeed').
Start RST (StartRSTAux)
General distance protection starting signal
(OR logic for all starting signals including 'weak infeed').
Start R (Start R Aux)
Distance protection R phase starting signal
(including 'weak infeed').
Start S (Start S Aux)
Distance protection S phase starting signal
Start T (Start T Aux)
Distance protection T phase starting signal
Start E (Start E Aux)
Distance protection E/F starting signal (U0 or I0). Only generated
together with a phase starter.
Start I0
Neutral current starting signal (I0).
Start U0
Neutral voltage starting signal (U0).
Start O/C
Back-up overcurrent pick-up signal.
Start SOTF
Enabling signal for the switch-onto-fault protection.
Start 1ph
Indicates that the distance protection was started by a single
phase.
3-42
Trip CB
General circuit-breaker tripping signal. This signal is disabled while
a blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the
back-up overcurrent protection.
Trip RST (trip RST Aux)
General tripping signal. This signal is not disabled while a blocking
signal is being applied.
Trip CB R
Circuit-breaker R phase trip signal.
This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with
Trip CB S
Circuit-breaker S phase trip signal.
Trip CB T
Circuit-breaker T phase trip signal.
Trip CB 3P
Three-phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a blocking
signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up
overcurrent protection.
Trip CB 1P
Single-phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a blocking
signal is being applied with the exception of a trip by the back-up
overcurrent protection.
Trip O/C
Back-up overcurrent trip signal.
Trip SOTF
Switch-onto-fault trip signal.
Trip Com
Signal for tripping either enabled by the receipt of a permissive
signal or the non-receipt of a blocking signal. (This signal is
disabled while a blocking signal is being applied.)
Trip Stub
'Short-zone' protection trip signal.
Delay >= 2
Signal for starting in Zone 2 or higher.
Delay 1
Signal for starting in Zone 1.
3-43
Delay 2
Delay 3
Delay 4
Signal for starting in Zone 4 (excepting when Zone 4 is being used
as an overreaching zone).
Delay Def
Signal for starting in the final zone.
Meas Main
Measurement by the distance function (Zones 1, 2, 3, 4 or the final
zone).
Meas Oreach
Measurement in the distance protection overreach zone.
Meas Fward
Measurement by the distance protection in the forwards direction.
Meas Bward
Measurement by the distance protection in the reverse direction
(reverse zone).
Weak Infeed
Tripping by the 'weak infeed' function.
Dist Blocked
Signal indicating that the distance protection is blocked.
DelDistBlk
Signal delayed by 12 s indicating that the distance protection is
blocked.
Power Swing
Power-swing blocking function picked up.
VT Sup
VT supervision picked up.
VT Sup Delay
Delayed operation of the VT supervision after 12 s.
Com Send
Signal generated when a transfer trip signal is transmitted.
Com Boost
Signal for boosting PLC transmitting power.
Freq dev
Signal indicating a deviation of the memory voltage frequency.
3-44
Start OC 1)
Overcurrent starting signal.
Start UZ 1)
Underimpedance starting signal.
ADDITIONAL LOGIC
The following settings are only of consequence when a special logic is
loaded instead of the standard distance protection logic. Refer to the
description of the corresponding logic for their significance.
BOOL_IN1, BOOL_IN2...BOOL_IN8
Additional binary inputs for the special distance protection logic.
TIMER_1, TIMER_2...TIMER_8
Additional timer settings for the special distance protection logic.
BOOL_OUT1, BOOL_OUT2...BOOL_OUT8
Additional signals for the special distance protection logic.
Behaviour of the signals at the signalling relay outputs and in the

event list
Some of the signalling relay outputs remain excited until the entire
distance protection function has reset (i.e. until 'Start R+S+T' resets)
and others reset as soon as the particular condition disappears.
The parameter 'EventRecFull' (event recorder full) enables a choice to
be made, whether all operation and reset events have to be recorded
in the event list (essential when the protection is integrated in a station
control system) or whether the less important reset events may be
omitted.
The behaviour of the signals can be seen from the following list.
Output: H signal latches
NH signal does not latch
Event list: AR Pick-up (COMES) and reset (GOES)
are recorded.
A Only pick-up (COMES) is recorded pro
viding 'some' is set for 'EventRecFull'.
Signal Output Event list

Start R+S+T NH AR
Start RST NH A
Start RSTAux NH A
Start R H A
Start R Aux H A
3-45
Signal Output Event list

Start S H A
Start S Aux H A
Start T H A
Start T Aux H A
Start E H A
Start E Aux H A
Start I0 NH AR
Start U0 NH AR
Start OC NH AR
Start UZ H AR
Start O/C NH AR
Start SOTF H AR
Start 1ph NH AR
Trip CB NH A
Trip RST NH A
Trip RST Aux NH A
Trip CB R NH AR
Trip CB S NH AR
Trip CB T NH AR
Trip CB 3P NH A
Trip CB 1P NH A
Trip O/C NH AR
Trip SOTF NH A
Trip Com NH A
Trip Stub NH A
Delay >= 2 NH A
Delay 1 NH A
Delay 2 NH A
Delay 3 NH A
Delay 4 NH A
Delay Def NH A
Meas Main H A
Meas Oreach NH AR
Meas Fward H AR
Meas Bward NH AR
Weak Infeed NH AR
Dist Blocked NH AR
Del Dist Blocked NH AR
Power Swing NH AR
VTSup NH AR
VTSup delay NH AR
Com Send NH AR
Com Boost NH A
Freq Dev NH AR
3-46
E. Setting instructions
3.5.2.1. General
The first parameter in the sub-menu 'General' is 'Ref length' which is
needed to indicate the distance to a fault in the event of a trip, but
otherwise bears no influence in the protection function. The parameter
gives the reactance of the reference length (in secondary /ph per unit
length) and may be defined in km, miles, percent line length etc., i.e.
Xmeas.
distance =
ref. length
e.g.:
a) In km
Secondary reactance per km 0.2 /ph
Ref. length = 0.2 /ph
b) In percent line length

Secondary reactance of the line length 25 /ph
(1 % 0.25 /ph)
Ref. length = 0.25 /ph
The setting of the parameter 'CT neutral' depends on whether the

star-point of the main CTs is on the line side or the busbar side.
There are thus two possible settings 'Bus side' or 'Line side'. The
'Line side' option is the one to choose, providing the protection is
connected according to the wiring diagram in the appendix. This
setting only applies to the distance protection function. It does
not influence the power direction in all the other functions or the
displays of the A/D channels.
3-47
3.5.2.2. Starters
The distance function provides for two methods of starting, i.e.
overcurrent or underimpedance. The desired method is selected by
appropriately setting the parameter 'Start Mode' in the 'Starting' sub-
menu.
Depending on the setting of the parameter 'Def Dir Mode', a starter
can also trip on its own after the time 'Delay (Def)'. (see Section
3.5.2.4.)
3.5.2.2.1. Overcurrent starters

(see Section 4.2.1.1.2.)
Selecting OC for the parameter Start Mode enables the overcurrent
starters. The pick-up level of the overcurrent starters is determined by
the setting of the parameter 'Istart'. The corresponding setting range is
from 0.5 to 10 IN, in steps of 0.01 IN. The setting of 'Istart' must be
sufficiently above the maximum load current to avoid any risk of mal-
operation under normal load conditions. Note that all currents greater
than 80% of the highest phase current (and also the enabling current
'Imin') are taken into account by the phase selection function. When
determining the maximum load current it must be considered that
in the case of a double-circuit line, the load current IB can briefly
reach double its normal value when one circuit is tripped.
E/Fs can cause additional balancing currents IA in the healthy
phases.
It is equally important for an overcurrent starter, which has picked up,
to reliably reset at the maximum load current IBmax, if for example the
fault is tripped by a downstream protection. Taking due account of the
reset ratio of 0.95, the lowest permissible setting is given by:
IB max + IA
(Istart ) min > 1.25
0.95 IN
The maximum setting (Istart)max is derived from the minimum fault
current IK for a fault at the end of the next section of line:
(Istart ) max < IK min / IN
Should the above relationships result in (Istart)max being lower than
(Istart)min, the underimpedance starters must be used instead.
3.5.2.2.2. Underimpedance starters
Selecting UZ as the Start Mode parameter enables the
underimpedance starters. The following parameters then have to be
set:
3-48
XA
XB
RA
RB
RLoad
AngleLoad
The characteristic of the underimpedance starters and the correspond-
ing setting parameters can be seen from Fig. 3.2. The parameters
'RLoad' and 'AngleLoad' define the permissible load area.
X
XA
UNDERIMPEDANCE
CHARACTERISTIC
RB -RLoad AngleLoad RLoad RA
XB HEST 935 049 C
Fig. 3.2 Underimpedance starting characteristic
Because of the method used to represent impedances by the proc-

essor program, the impedance settings should not be set higher than
absolutely necessary, otherwise the resolution for low impedances will
be reduced.
Minimum permissible reach of the starters

The starting units must reliably pick-up for a fault towards the end of
the next section of line (back-up zone). Should back-up protection of
the adjacent section of line not be necessary, the starters must be set
to at least 1.3 times the impedance of the protected line. In the case of
short lines, fault resistance becomes a factor to be taken into account.
3-49
Maximum permissible reach of the starters

The setting must take account of the considerable increase in the
load current of the healthy circuit of a double-circuit line, when a
fault on one circuit is tripped.
To ensure that the phase selection is correct for single-phase auto-
reclosure, the starters in the healthy phases must not pick up for
an E/F on one of the phases (in spite of any balancing currents
which may occur).
The corresponding limits can be expressed mathematically as follows:
Solidly grounded systems
U
Z set /ph
2 (IB max + IA )
Ungrounded systems or system with Petersen coils

Uv
Z set /ph
2 IB max 1.25
where:
Zset maximum value of the impedance, i.e. the maximum value of
the expression:
XA 2 + RA 2 or XB2 + RB 2
U lowest phase voltage of the healthy phases for an E/F on one
phase (U = 0.85 x min. system voltage). The factor 0.85 takes
account of a negligibly small zero sequence source impedance.
Uv lowest phase-to-phase system voltage
1.25 safety factor
2 factor, which takes account of the fact that phase currents and
not phase-to-phase currents, are used.
These requirements are generally fulfilled without difficulty for most
applications. Should, however, the first inequality not be satisfied, the
right-hand side must be expressed vectorially and compared with the
underimpedance starting characteristic in relation to the setting
'RLoad' etc.
The healthy phases must be checked for the case of a single-phase-
to-ground fault.
3.5.2.2.3. Current enable
Before a phase can take part in phase selection, it must be conducting
a current higher than 'Imin'. The recommended setting is 0.2 IN.
3-50
3.5.2.2.4. E/F detector

There are three alternative operating modes for the E/F detector, the
desired one being chosen by the setting of the parameter 'Gnd Fault
Mode'. E/F detection can be based on measurement of the neutral cur-
rent alone or in combination with the neutral voltage. The fourth pos-
sibility is not to measure the ground loop at all, i.e. only the phase-to-
phase loop is measured. The following alternatives are available for
selection:
blocked (only measures the phase-to-phase loops)
I0
I0 AND U0
I0 OR U0
The criterion for the highest '3I0min' setting is:
the E/F detector must pick-up for all E/Fs in solidly grounded
systems and for all cross-country faults on ungrounded systems or
systems with Petersen coils, providing they lie within the reach of
the underimpedance starters.
The criteria for the lowest '3I0min' setting are:
the E/F detector must not pick up for an E/F on ungrounded
systems or systems with Petersen coils,
the E/F detector must not pick up for phase faults, although CT
errors can cause false neutral currents.
The recommended setting is '3I0min' = 0.5 IN.
Should it not be possible to find a setting, which satisfies both these
conditions, the neutral voltage (3U0min) must be used for measure-
ment in addition to the neutral current.
3.5.2.2.5. Phase preference logic
The desired phase preference logic for cross-country faults is chosen
with the aid of the parameter 'PhaseSelMode'.
In solidly grounded systems, the 'PhaseSelMode' parameter is dis-
abled by setting it to 'solid ground'.
It is essential for all the relays in ungrounded systems and systems
with Petersen coils to be set to the same phase preference logic. The
logic in use in a system must therefore be known before one of the
8 alternative schemes can be selected:
RTS(R) cyclic
TRS(T) cyclic
RTS acyclic
RST acyclic
TSR acyclic
TRS acyclic
SRT acyclic
STR acyclic
3-51
3.5.2.2.6. Undervoltage starters

(Uweak)
The undervoltage starters are used in conjunction with the switch-onto-
fault function and the transfer tripping schemes POTT and PUTT
NONDIR (see Section 3.5.2.7.). The corresponding pick-up value is
set in relation to the rated voltage with the aid of the parameter
'Uweak', which has a setting range of 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01.
3.5.2.3. Measuring units
All the settings for the impedance measuring zones are to be found in
the 'MEASUREMENT' sub-menu.
3.5.2.3.1. Determining the distance zones
Before it is possible to determine the reaches of the distance zones,
the impedances and phase-angles of the line sections during faults
must be known. Typical settings for the various zone reaches along
the line are given below:
Z3 = 0.85 (a + k b2)
Z2 = 0.85 (a + k b1)
b2
Z1 = 0.85 a
b1
ZAZ = 1.2 a
a b
A B C
HEST 935 050 C
Fig. 3.3 Typical settings for the reaches of distance relay zones
(grading table)
where:
Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 impedance reach of the various zones
[/ph]
ZOR impedance reach of the overreaching zone
[/ph]
k1 factor to take into account -
the apparent increase of line impedance 'seen' by a
relay due to an intermediate infeed
a, b impedance of the corresponding section of line
[]
3-52
A B I A' + I C
1 2 B'
3 4
I A'
D
~ ~
5
HEST 935 051 C
Fig. 3.4 Example for calculating k. The overreach must be

checked for k > 1 when the infeed B is not in operation.
IA ' + IB '
k= 1
IA
where:
IA' maximum fault current possible
IB' minimum fault current possible
1...5 distance relays
Calculating the secondary line impedances

The primary values calculated from the grading table for the line
impedances have to be converted to secondary values. These are
obtained by applying the following relationship:
ZLP ZLp
ZLs = =
KU KZ

K
I
where:
ZLp primary positive-sequence line impedance
ZLs secondary positive-sequence line impedance
KU main VT ratio
KI main CT ratio
KZ impedance ratio
The same applies to the conversion of the resistances and reactances.
The impedance characteristic is defined independently for each of the
four distance zones (Zone 4 is used alternatively for the overreaching
zone) by the following parameters (i = 1 to 4):
X (i)
R (i)
RR (i)
RRE (i)
k0 (i)
k0Ang (i)
Delay (i)
3-53
The reactance and resistance of the line or cable are set in the
proper units using the parameters 'R' and 'X' (see Fig. 3.5).
X
X
7
Zone 1
(2, 3, 4, OR, BWD)
27
-X/8 R RR RRE
27 R
-RR/2
-RRE/2
HEST 915 019 C
Fig. 3.5 Distance measurement characteristic
At a rated current of 1 or 2 A, the impedance parameters 'X', 'R', 'RR'

and 'RRE' have setting ranges of -300 to +300 /ph in steps of 0.01
(-30 to +30 /ph in steps of 0.001 for a rated current of 5 A).
A zone is disabled when 'X' is set to zero regardless of the settings of
the other parameters. In this case, the other zones are also blocked
with the exception of the last one. Zone 1 can only be disabled by the
parameter 'Block Z1' or the binary input 'ExtBlock Z1'.
The direction of measurement is reversed for negative values of 'X',
'R', 'RR' and 'RRE'.
Allowing for fault resistance

Provision is made with parameters 'RRE' and 'RR' for allowing for the
fault resistance in an E/F loop and in a phase-to-phase loop. The
setting takes the E/F resistance comprising the resistance of the arc
and the pylon footing resistance in relation to the line resistance into
account.
Typical settings lie in the range RR(E)/X = 0.5...3.
The arc resistance RB can be calculated according to A.R. van C.
Warrington as follows:
28700 d
RB =
I1.4
where:
3-54
d length of arc in m
I current in A
RB arc resistance in
Since the unit is /ph, the fault resistance appears differently in the
impedance plane according to the type of fault. Where the value of the
fault resistance RF is known in (see Fig. 3.6), it has to be entered in
the R/X diagram as follows:
E/F: R=RF/(1+k0)
phase-to-phase fault: R=RF/2
three-phase fault: R=RF/ 3

It is for this reason that fault resistance is compensated separately for
E/F and phase-to-phase loops using the parameters 'RRE' and 'RR'.
The parameter 'RR' will generally be set lower than 'RRE', because the
phase-to-phase fault resistance is normally very low.
RF
RF RF RF
RF
HEST 915 029 C
E/F Phase-to-phase fault Three-phase fault
Fig. 3.6 Fault resistance
Load current (area)

The load area defined by the underimpedance parameters 'RLoad' and
'AngleLoad' is taken into account be starting and measuring
characteristics. It follows from this that the relay can only trip, if the
fault impedance measured lies within the underimpedance starting
characteristic.
3-55
Underimpedance
characteristic
Zone 3
OV ERRE ACH ZO NE
Zone 2
Zone 1
RLoad
AngleLoad
R
REVERSE ZONE
HEST 935 053 C
Fig. 3.7 Relay characteristics
Note that the load impedance area is only formed when the under-
impedance starter (UZ) is in operation. It does not exist when starting
is provided by the overcurrent starter (OC).
3-56
Zero-sequence compensation of the protected line

The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation
factor are set individually for each zone using parameters 'k0' and
k0Ang'. The latter are calculated from the positive-sequence imped-
ance ZL and the zero-sequence impedance Z0L of the line:
( Z0L ZL )
k 0 =1/ 3 x
ZL
k 0 = 1 / 3 x (Z 0L ZL ) / ZL )
Range: 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01
k 0Ang = arctan (X 0L XL ) / (R0L RL ) arctan(XL / RL )

Range: -180 to +90 in steps of 0.01
Zero-sequence compensation for cables

Depending on the type of cable and the application, k0 is set between
10 and 130. If a complex setting is made for k0, the polygon
characteristic is rotated in the R-jX diagram. At k0 angles higher than
20, a slight setting error causes severe under or overreaching. The
setting is often incorrect because
the cable data are not known exactly
measured data are only accurate for through faults, but scarcely
ever accurate for internal faults
A setting of 0 or 180 (corresponds to negative values) is therefore
recommended for k0:
k0 = 1/3 (X0L XL) / XL
k0Ang = 0 for X0L > XL
k0Ang = -180for X0L < XL
Note that the value of R must be set at least to
(2 RL + R0L) / 3 and the desired RRE is increased by
(2 RL + R0L) / 3.
3-57
jX
(2 RL + R0L) / 3
k0
XL
k0 ZL Ph-Ph
XL - k0 XL
ZL 2 ZL + Z0) / 3 Ph-E
RR RRE
Fig. 3.8 Relay characteristics
Zero-sequence compensation of double-circuit lines

The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation
factor for a double-circuit line are set using parameters 'k0m' and 'k0
Angle(m)'. This compensation only applies to Zones 1 and 2, the
overreaching zone and the reverse zone.
3.5.2.3.2. Directional element

Each distance zone has its own directional measuring element. The
voltage used for measurement depends on the amplitude of the fault
voltage in relation to the parameter 'UminFault'. The fault voltage is
used, providing it is higher than the setting of 'UminFault', and a
voltage derived from the healthy voltage and the memory voltage is
used when it falls below. The recommended settings are 0.1 UN for
conventional VTs.
Should correct determination of direction not be possible (reference
voltage too low or memory voltage decayed), the setting of the
parameter 'MemDirMode' determines whether the protection blocks or
trips:
Block protection blocks all zones
(definitive zone only if directional)
Trip protection trips
Cond. trip Protection blocks unless the instantaneous and
preceding zones are in opposite directions, in which
case the protection trips.
3-58
3.5.2.3.3. Overreaching zone

(OR)
The settings including the designation '4/OR' ('X (4/OR)' ... 'Delay
(4/OR)') can be used either for a fourth measuring zone or a com-
pletely independent overreaching zone (but not for both at the
same time) by appropriately setting the parameter 'Delay (4/OR)'
(see Section 3.5.2.3.5).
In applications requiring a fourth zone, the measuring unit of the
second zone is used for overreaching.
An overreaching zone is necessary for the switch-onto-fault and zone
extension logics and for overreaching transfer tripping schemes.
3.5.2.3.4. Reverse zone

(BACK)
A reverse measuring zone is used in a blocking scheme and also the
logic for detecting a reversal of fault energy direction. It is set using the
parameters 'X (BACK)', 'R (BACK)', 'RR (BACK)' and 'RRE (BACK)'
which have setting ranges from 0 to -300 /ph.
Note that:
for underimpedance starting ('UZ'):
With the exception of the load discrimination defined by the
parameters 'RLoad' and 'AngleLoad', the reverse zone operates
independently of the starters.
for overcurrent starting ('OC'):
The reverse zone is only in operation when an overcurrent starter
('Istart') has picked up.
the binary input ('Ext. UZ Block') blocks operation regardless of the
starter mode for the reverse zone.
Signal output: Meas Bward.
Measurement of the reverse zone only takes place while the first
zone is active, i.e. the 'Meas Bward' signal resets, when 'Delay (2)'
has elapsed.
3.5.2.3.5. Time steps

(Delay)
The operating time of every activated distance zone (parameter 'X' <> 0)
is determined by the parameter 'Delay', which has a setting range of
0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01. The parameter 'Delay (4/OR)' is also asso-
ciated with a logic, which determines whether it applies to Zone 4 or to
the overreaching zone, i.e. if 'Delay (4/OR)' < 'Delay (2)', it applies to
the overreaching zone, otherwise to Zone 4.
3-59
The set times must satisfy the following relationships:

Delay (1) < Delay (2) < Delay (3) < Delay (4) < Delay(Def),
Delay (OR) < Delay (2).
When grading the operating times of several distance relays, the
minimum grading time should not be less than the sum of the circuit-
breaker operating time plus 150 ms (reset time + operating time of the
measuring system + safety margin).
Recommended timer settings:
Zone 1: normally instantaneous.
Zone 2: 'Delay (2)' is normally set to the sum of relay and circuit-
breaker operating times, arc extinction time, signal transmission
time and a tolerance margin, which amounts to about 0.25 to 0.5 s.
The tolerance includes an allowance for sequential tripping.
Zone 3: 'Delay (3)' is set to about 2 'Delay (2)'.
Zone 4: 'Delay (4)' or Delay (Def) is normally set to at least
4 'Delay (2)'.
Special cases may require settings, which deviate considerably from
the above recommendations.
The time steps of zones 1 to 4 must have settings less than 'Delay(Def)'.
3.5.2.4. Definitive zone
(Def)
The definitive (or fifth) zone is subject to the same parameters as the
underimpedance starters (i.e. XA, XB, RA, RB, RLoad and AngleLoad).
The corresponding time step is defined by the parameter 'Delay (Def)'.
3-60
XA
Definitive Zone
27
R
27
Directional
(in tripping direction)
XB HEST 935 054 C
Fig. 3.9 Definitive zone characteristic
The parameter 'Def Dir Mode' determines the response at the end of
the definitive time. It can be set to be either directional (in tripping
direction) or non-directional (see Fig. 3.9).
NOTICE: There is still a definitive zone even using the overcurrent

starter (OC), but only with respect to the parameters 'Delay (Def)' and
'Def Dir Mode'.
3.5.2.5. Back-up overcurrent protection

(O/C Back-up Protection)
The settings for the back-up overcurrent protection are made via the
sub-menu 'O/C BACK-UP PROTECTION'. The setting of the
parameter 'I O/C' determines the pick-up level, which can be chosen in
steps of 0.1 IN between 0 and 10 IN. The associated time delay is set
in steps of 0.1 s between 0 and 10 s by means of the parameter
'Delay O/C'.
3-61
The pick-up signal of the overcurrent unit is also used by the STUB
protection. If the function is being used for this purpose, i.e. the binary
I/P 'Isol open' is at logical '1', the tripping time is fixed at 25 ms.
The back-up overcurrent is always active. In case the STUB protection
is not utilized, and; the 'O/C BACK-UP PROTECTION' should only be
active when the distance protection is blocked, then connect the
inverted signaling output 'Dist Blocked' from the distance protection to
the blocking input 'Ext Blk OC' of the O/C backup protection.
3.5.2.6. VT supervision
The parameters for setting the VT supervision function are located in
the sub-menu 'VT SUPERVISON'. One of four different operating
modes can be chosen using 'VTSupMode'. The function processes
zero and negative-sequence components, which are either used on
their own ('ZeroSeq' and 'NegSeq') or combined ('Zero*NegSeq' and
'Spec').
ZeroSeq [U0 I0]
NegSeq [U2 I2]
Zero*NegSeq [(U0 I0) + (U2 I2)]
Spec [U2 (I0 + I2)]
The four pick-up values are the settings of the parameters
'U0min VTSup', 'U2min VTSup', 'I0min VTSup' and 'I2min VTSup'.
They can be set between 0 and 2 UN (or IN) in steps of 0.01. The basic
settings are 0.2 UN for the voltage and 0.07 IN for the current.
Only the 'NegSeq' or 'Spec' options are available in ungrounded
systems.
Upon operating, the VT supervision function is normally required to im-
mediately block the distance protection function (see Section 4.2.1.5.2.).
Provision is made, however, for blocking the distance function after a
delay of 12 s by setting the parameter 'VTSupBlkDel'. This parameter
is normally set in cases where only the overcurrent starters are in use.
If the VT supervision function remains picked up for longer than 12 s, it
resets only after a delay (1 s). Should a fault give rise to zero or
negative-sequence current components, it resets immediately.
The parameter 'VTSupDebDel' (deblocking) enables the reset delay to
be continuously enabled regardless of current.
3-62
Recommended setting:
Parameter Grounded Ungrounded
system system
VTSupDebDel enabled disabled
The signal 'VTSup' indicates that the distance function is being

blocked by the VT supervision and 'VTSupDel' that the 12 s delay is
running.
3.5.2.7. Tripping logic

(see Section 4.2.1.5.12)
The parameters for determining the tripping logic are grouped in the
sub-menu 'Trip Schemes'.
The various transfer tripping schemes are selected by setting the
parameter 'ComMode' (3 PUTT, POTT and OVERREACHING
BLOCKING schemes). The possible settings are given below. The
settings for the different schemes only appear after has scheme has
been selected.
PUTT NONDIR
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (non-directional)
'Weak' - enables the weak infeed logic.
PUTT FWD
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (in line direction)
No other parameters.
PUTT OR2
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (overreaching zone/Zone 2)
'Unblock' - selects the enabling logic for communications
channel failure.
POTT
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping
'Weak' - enables the weak infeed logic.
'Unblock' - selects the enabling logic for communications
channel failure.
'Echo' - enables the echo logic.
'Trans Block' - enables the logic for reversal of fault energy
't1 Trans Block' - min. holding time for the wrong energy direction
signal. This has to be set at least 50 ms longer than
the maximum reset time required by the communi-
cation channel.
3-63
't2TransBl' - max. holding time for the wrong energy direction

signal. This has to be set at least 0.4 s longer than
the dead time setting to make sure that blocking is
still effective should an attempt be made to reclose
the faulted line.
BLOCK OR
Blocking scheme
'TransBlock' - enables the logic for reversal of fault energy
't1 Block' - time allowed for the receipt of a PLC signal
't1 Trans Block' - min. holding time for the wrong energy direction
signal. This has to be set at least 50 ms longer than
the maximum signal transmission time.
't2 Trans Block' - max. holding time for the wrong energy direction
signal. This has to be set at least 0.4 s longer than
the dead time setting to make sure that blocking is
still effective should an attempt be made to reclose
the faulted line.
TripMode
Depending on the setting of the parameter 'TripMode', tripping is either
phase-selective, controlled by the binary input '1PolAR' (for '1phTrip'),
always three-phase (for '3phTrip') or three-phase after the time 'Delay
(3)' (for '3phTripDel3').
SOTF Mode
Access is gained to the switch-onto-fault logic settings by selecting the
parameter 'SOTF Mode'. The alternatives presented are whether the
switch-onto-fault logic should trip on the basis of the non-directional
underimpedance starters or the overreaching zone.
This logic is enabled either by the undervoltage function delayed by
10 s or 200 ms (see Section 3.5.2.2.6.) or the binary inputs 'Deadline'
and 'Manual close'.
Two signalling outputs 'Start SOTF' and 'Trip SOTF' are associated
with the switch-onto-fault logic. 'Start SOTF' is intended for blocking
the auto-reclosure function and 'Trip SOTF' signals that tripping took
place as a result of the switch-onto-fault logic.
SOTF 10 sec
The parameter 'SOTF 10sec' determines whether the undervoltage
function and the binary input 'Deadline' are enabled after 10 s ('on') or
after just 200 ms ('off'). 'off' indicates switching onto a fault after fast
auto-reclosure (Fast OR). Tripping in this case is thus based on the
decisions of the starters alone.
3-64
t1EvolFaults
The setting of the parameter 't1 Evol Faults' determines the time
during which an evolving fault once detected results in a three-phase
trip.
3.5.2.8. Power-swing blocking

Only the parameter 'Time PS block' for the time during which the
power-swing blocking signal is maintained has to be set in the
'POWER-SWING BLOCKING' sub-menu. The setting range is 0 to
10 s in steps of 0.01. Tripping is enabled again at the latest at the end
of this time.
The power-swing blocking function is disabled when 'tPSblock' is set to
zero or a logical '1' is applied to the binary input 'Ext Blk PSB'.
3.5.2.9. Allocation of CT and VT inputs

The parameters for allocating CT and VT input channels are grouped
in the 'ANALOGUE (CT/VT) CHANNELS' sub-menu.
3.5.2.10. Allocation of binary inputs

The parameters for allocating binary inputs are grouped in the
'BINARY INPUTS' sub-menu.
All binary inputs can be allocated to external signals or the outputs of
other functions.
Change Meas Dir

Applying a signal to this input reverses the direction of measurement
for the entire distance protection function (all zones).
Ext Block Dist

This input blocks the entire distance protection function. Blocking is
signalled by 'Dist Blocked' and after 12 s by 'Del Dist Blocked'. Only
the back-up overcurrent protection (I O/C) then remains active.
Ext UZ Block
This input blocks the underimpedance starters, the neutral voltage
starter (U0), the measurement for 'Weak' and the reverse measure-
ment. The overcurrent starters (OC) remain in operation.
Ext Block PSB

This input blocks the power-swing blocking function.
Ext Block O/C back-up

This input blocks the back-up overcurrent protection (O/C Back-up
Protection).
3-65
Deadline
The signal applied to this input is needed by the switch-onto-fault logic
to indicate to the distance function that the line is without voltage be-
fore the circuit-breaker is closed. It is used for the switch-onto-fault
logic providing the VTs are on the busbars.
Manual Close
Prior to manually closing the circuit-breaker, this signal enables the
switch-onto-fault logic and blocks the VT supervision function.
Zextension, ZExtension AR
The overreaching logic permits instantaneous tripping within the over-
reaching zone. It is enabled via the binary input 'Zextension' or
'ZExtension AR'.
For this purpose, the output 'Zextension' of the auto-reclosure function
is connected to the input 'ZExtension AR'.
Isolator open
This input is required by the STUB protection to ascertain whether an
isolator is open or not (see Section 4.2.1.5.4.).
Com Rec
This input is needed for the external signal 'Com Rec' (signal received
by PLC, optical fibre link or point-to-point radio).
Com Fail
This input signals to the protection that the PLC channel has failed.
1 Pol AR
This input permits single-phase tripping to take place and is used in
conjunction with single or three-phase auto-reclosure schemes. Refer
to the Section 'Auto reclosure' for the connection to the auto-reclosure
function.
Ext. Block SOTF

This input is needed in cases where the switch-onto-fault logic is not
enabled after an auto-reclosure.
Refer to the Section 'Auto reclosure' for the connection to the auto-
reclosure function.
3-66
Ext. Block HF
This input blocks the reception of an intertripping signal. It is used for
coordinating communication channel signals when in a solidly
grounded system, the distance protection and the E/F protection use
the same channel. It must be connected to the 'RecBlk' signal of the
E/F function.
Ext Block Z1
This input blocks measurement in zone 1.
3.5.2.11. Allocation of tripping commands
The parameters for allocating tripping commands are grouped in the
'CB COMMANDS' sub-menu.
The allocation of the output signals depends on whether single or
three-phase tripping has been set (parameter 'TripMode'). In the case
of three-phase tripping, the three tripping outputs are allocated to the
same auxiliary tripping relay. Single-phase tripping ('TripMode' set to
'1PhTrip' or '3PhTripDel3') requires three separate auxiliary tripping
relays, i.e. the protection has to be equipped with at least two binary
I/O units Type 316DB61/62.
3.5.2.12. Signals
(see Section 5.4.5.2)
The parameters for allocating binary outputs to auxiliary signalling
relays are grouped in the 'SIGNALLING' sub-menu.
Some signalling outputs latch until the entire distance protection func-
tion resets (i.e. until 'Start R+S+T' resets, see Section 3.5.2.).
3-67
3-68
3.5.3. Sensitive earth fault protection for ungrounded systems and

systems with Petersen coils (EarthFaultIsol)
A. Application
The sensitive E/F protection detects E/Fs on overhead lines in radial
systems. It is suitable for application in ungrounded systems, systems
with Petersen coils and in resistance grounded MV and HV systems.
The scheme monitors the neutral voltage and current of the protected
line. Depending on the characteristic angle chosen, it responds to
either the real or apparent value of the neutral power.
B. Features
Adjustable characteristic angle
Compensation of CT phase errors
Suppression of DC component in voltage and current signals
Suppression of harmonics in voltage and current signals
I. CT/VT inputs:
Neutral current
Neutral voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking signal

Tripping signal
Starting signal
IV. Measured variable:

Zero-sequence power
3-69
D. Sensitive earth fault protection settings - EarthFaultIsol


Trip Tripping chan. 00000000
P Setting PN 0.050 0.005 0.100 0.001
Angle degrees 0.00 -180.00 180.00 0.01
Drop-Ratio % 60 30 95 1
Delay s 0.50 00.05 60.00 0.01
PN UN*IN 1.000 0.500 2.500 0.001
Phi-Comp degrees 0.00 -5.00 5.00 0.01
Current Inp Chan CT/VT-Addr 0
Voltage Inp Chan CT/VT-Addr 0
BlockInp BinaryAddr F
Trip SignalAddr ER
Start SignalAddr ER
Explanation of the parameters:

Trip
Tripping logic (matrix).
P Setting
Pick-up power setting.
Angle
Characteristic angle for the power measurement.
0 = real power forwards
180 = real power backwards
-90 = apparent power forwards
90 = apparent power backwards
All angles between -180 and 180 can be set.
Drop-Ratio
Reset ratio of the measuring trigger.
Delay
Delay between the protection picking up and the protection
tripping. The delay setting also influences the reset time of the
function. For t > 100 ms, the protection resets after 50 ms.
Resetting is not otherwise intentionally delayed.
PN
Rated power given by UN*IN.
Phi-Comp
Compensation of CT and VT phase errors. The setting concerns
only the difference between the two errors.
3-70
Current Inp Chan

Defines the CT input channel used for the neutral current. Only
single-phase CT inputs can be set.
Voltage Inp Chan
Defines the VT input channel used for the neutral voltage. Only
single-phase VT inputs can be set.
Block Inp
Input for blocking the sensitive E/F function.
F: protection enabled
T: protection disabled
Trip
Tripping signal.
Start Out
Starting signal.
3-71
Settings:
Pick-up power P Setting
Characteristic angle Angle
Reset ratio Drop-Ratio
Delay Delay
Phase error compensation Phi-Comp
Rated power PN
The value entered for 'P Setting' is the power at which the function
picks up referred to rated power 'PN'. The parameter 'P Setting' has a
setting range of 0.005 to 0.100 in steps of 0.001.
The setting of the parameter 'Angle' determines the characteristic
angle of the measurement. Its implications are explained below under
'Real power' and 'Apparent power'.
The desired reset ratio is set as a percentage of the pick-up value
using the parameter 'Drop-Ratio'. To ensure that the reset ratio is
adequate for low values of 'P Setting', the following condition is
checked:
50
' Drop - Ratio' < 100
100 ' P Setting' + 1
An angle to compensate the relative phase errors of CTs and VTs can
be entered using parameter 'Phi-Comp'. The effective characteristic
angle is the sum of the parameters 'Angle' and 'Phi-Comp'.
The setting for the rated power is left at PN = 1.000. The corre-
sponding reference value in the 'ANALOGUE CT/VT CHANNELS-AD
CHANNEL REF VAL' menu must be adjusted for rated voltages other
than 100 V.
Real power
The real power component (real power component = proportion of real
power current x displacement voltage) of the zero-sequence power is
monitored to detect E/Fs in systems with Petersen coils and high-
resistance grounded systems. The neutral component of the current in
the healthy phases resulting from their capacitances to ground and the
inductive Petersen coil current unite at the fault location and return to
the source via the faulted phase.
A power relay is installed at both ends of every line with the exception
of stub lines, which only require a relay at the source end. If the E/F
current is too low and has to be artificially increased, an overvoltage
relay is fitted to detect the displacement voltage and connect a
grounding resistor temporarily to the star-point. To avoid any incorrect
response of the power relays while this is being done, they are
enabled after a short delay. The section of the line with the fault is
determined by comparison of the relay directions.
3-72
The real power component of the E/F current is determined by the

resistive losses of the lines, the Petersen coils and the grounding
resistors. A typical value for the charging current of overhead lines is
around 2.5 A / 10 kV and 100 km. In the case of cable systems, it can
be determined from the cable data. The minimum real power
component of the current at the minimum voltage at which the power
relay has to operate can be determined according to the above
procedure. The power at which it must pick up must be set somewhat
lower to allow for phase and ratio errors of the CTs.
The parameter 'Angle' must be set to 0 to measure real power in the
forwards direction, respectively 180 to measure real power in the
reverse direction.
Note:
The connections are made in strict accordance with the ABB wiring
diagram.
Example of how to determine the setting

Assuming an overhead line system with an E/F current (sum of the
three phase currents) of 30 A and a real power current component of
5 A. The core-balance CT has a ratio of 125:1. The star-point VT has a
secondary voltage of 100 V for a solid E/F at the generator/power
transformer terminals. Therefore:
PN = 1 A 100 V = 100 VA
It is required to detect E/Fs down to 50 % of the displacement voltage.
The E/F current flows only from one side, so that no division of the
current takes place.
The real power component of the current of 5 A results in a secondary
current of:
IW = 5 A 1/125 = 0.04 A at maximum displacement voltage
IW = 0.04 A 0.5 = 0.02 A at 50 % displacement voltage
The required pick-up power is thus:
P = 0.02 A 50 V = 1 VA
This corresponds to 1 % referred to the rated power PN of 100 VA.
A setting of 0.5 % PN is possible, but the accuracy of the CTs must be
checked before deciding whether such a sensitive setting is permis-
sible. The real power can be increased by adding a grounding resistor.
3-73
Apparent power
The apparent power component of the neutral power is monitored to
detect E/Fs in ungrounded systems. Every feeder is equipped with a
relay. During an E/F, the capacitive E/F current of the entire system
less that of the faulted line flows into the faulted line. Only the E/F relay
of the faulted line indicates power flowing into its line.
The minimum capacitive E/F current available to operate the relays is
the total capacitive E/F current of the whole system for the smallest
configuration to be expected less that of the faulted line. Of this
capacitive current, only the percentage corresponding to the assumed
minimum displacement voltage at which the protection is still required
to operate may be considered. If there are any double-circuit lines, the
division of current between the circuits must also be taken into
account.
To allow for the CT errors at such low current levels, the pick-up value
set on the relay must be less than the product of the minimum current
determined above and the minimum voltage.
The parameter 'Angle' must be set to -90 pick up for E/Fs in the
forwards direction and 90 for the reverse direction.
Note:
The connections are made in strict accordance with the ABB wiring
diagram.
Time delay
The delay required between the picking up of the relay ('start') and
tripping ('Trip') is set by means of parameter 'Delay'. The setting range
provided is 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01.
CT/VT inputs
The two CT and VT input channels 'CurrentInp' (current) and 'Voltage-
Inp' (voltage) have to be configured for the purpose. The current input
channel may only be allocated to a single-phase metering (core-
balance) CT and the voltage channel to a single-phase VT.
Binary inputs and outputs

The tripping output may be allocated to either a tripping relay or a
signalling relay (different parameters) and the starting signal to a
signalling relay.
Operation of the sensitive E/F protection can be inhibited by applying a
signal to the 'BlockInp' input.
3-74
3.5.4. Auto-reclosure (Autoreclosure)
A. Application
The function can be configured for single or three-phase auto-reclosure.
The unit can operate in conjunction with any of the three protection
functions (distance, longitudinal differential and overcurrent protection)
and either an internal or external synchrocheck function.
However, an additional standard FUPLA logic T142 as detailed in the
document 1KHF600220 is necessary for single-phase reclosing in 1
breaker applications.
B. Features
Up to 4 fast or slow reclosure attempts
First cycle with up to 4 individually configurable single and/or
three-phase reclosure attempts
Independent operating indicators for each reclosure cycle
Wide dead time setting range
Provision to control bypassing of the synchrocheck unit and
extending the dead time for the first zone by external signals
Clearly defined response to changing fault conditions during the
dead time (evolving faults)
Logic for 1st and 2nd main protection (redundant), duplex and
master/follower schemes
I. CT/VT inputs:
None
II. Binary inputs:

Start (Start)
Redundant start (Start 2) *)
Redundant start (Start 3) *)
Three-phase trip (Trip CB 3P)

Redundant three-phase trip (Trip CB2 3P) *)
Redundant three-phase trip (Trip CB3 3P) *)
General trip (Trip CB )

Redundant general trip (Trip CB2) *)
Redundant general trip (Trip CB3) *)
CB ready for open/close/open cycle (CB ready)

CB2 ready for open/close/open cycle (CB2 ready) **)
*) 2 and 3 denote the I/Ps of protection functions 2 and 3 or relays 2 and 3 in

a redundant protection scheme (see Fig. 3.13).
**) 2 denotes the I/Os for CB2 in a duplex scheme (see Fig. 3.16).
3-75
CB ready for close/open cycle (CO Ready)

CB2 ready for close/open cycle (CO Ready 2) **)
CB open (CB open)

CB2 open (CB2 open) **)
CB2 preferred circuit-breaker (CB2 Priority) **)
Synchrocheck (SynchroChck)
Synchrocheck 2 (SynchroChck2) **)
Dead line (Dead Line)

Dead line 2 (Dead Line2) **)
External blocking input (Ext. Block AR)

Conditional blocking input (Cond. Block AR)
Manual close blocking input (Manual Close)
External synchrocheck bypass (Ext.SCBypas)
External extension of dead time (Extend t1)
(1st attempt)
Delay from master CB (MasterDel)
Block from master CB (MasterUnsucc)
Block reclosure by follower (Inhibit Inp)
(redundant scheme)
External 1P-1P selector for 1st AR (MD1_EXT_1P_1P)
External 1P-3P selector for 1st AR (MD1_EXT_1P_3P)
External 1P3P-3P selector for 1st AR (MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P)
External 1P3P-1P3P selector for 1st AR (MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P)

CB close signal (Close CB)
CB2 close signal (Close CB2) **)
Overreach switching signal (ZExtension)

Definitive trip (Def. Trip)
Prepare trip of all three phases (Trip 3-Pol)
Block Follower CB (BlkFlwr)
Delay Follower CB (DelFlwr)
Block for Follower. recloser (Inhibit Outp)
Reclosure function ready (AR Ready)
Reclosure function blocked (AR Blocked)
Reclosure cycle running (AR in prog.)
1st single-phase reclosure in progress (First AR 1P)
1st three-phase reclosure in progress (First AR 3P)
2nd Reclosure in progress (Second AR)
3rd reclosure in progress (Third AR)
4th reclosure in progress (Fourth AR)
IV. Measurements:
None
**) 2 denotes the I/Os for CB2 in a duplex scheme (see Fig. 3.16).
3-76
D. Autoreclosuresettings - Autoreclosure
GENERAL PARAMETER
1. AR Mode 1P3P-1P3P (Select)
2..4. AR Mode off (Select)
Command Close CB Tripping chan. 00000000
FUPLA Directory AURESTD
TIMERS
t Dead1 1P s 1.20 0,05 300 0.01
t Dead1 3P s 0.60 0,05 300 0.01
t Dead1 Ext. s 1.00 0,05 300 0.01
t Dead2 s 1.20 0,05 300 0.01
t Dead3 s 5.00 0,05 300 0.01
t Dead4 s 60.00 0,05 300 0.01
t Oper s 0.50 0,05 300 0.01
t Inhibit s 5.00 0,05 300 0.01
t Close s 0.25 0,05 300 0.01
t Discrim. 1P s 0.60 0.10 300 0.01
t Discrim. 3P s 0.30 0.10 300 0.01
t Timeout s 1.00 0,05 300 0.01
t AR Block s 5.00 0,05 300 0.01
BINARY INPUTS
Start BinaryAddr off (F)
Trip CB 3P BinaryAddr off (F)
Trip CB BinaryAddr off (F)
Start 2 BinaryAddr off (F)
Trip CB2 3P BinaryAddr off (F)
Trip CB2 BinaryAddr off (F)
Start 3 BinaryAddr off (F)
Trip CB3 3P BinaryAddr off (F)
Trip CB3 BinaryAddr off (F)
CB Ready BinaryAddr off (F)
CO Ready BinaryAddr off (F)
CB Open BinaryAddr off (F)
Dead line BinaryAddr off (F)
Ext. Block AR BinaryAddr off (F)
Cond.Block AR BinaryAddr off (F)
Manual Close BinaryAddr off (F)
Inhibit Inp. BinaryAddr off (F)
Extend t1 BinaryAddr off (F)
MD1_EXT_1P_1P BinaryAddr off (F)
3-77

MD1_EXT_1P_3P BinaryAddr off (F)
MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P BinaryAddr off (F)
MD1_EXT_1P3P_1P3P BinaryAddr off (F)
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Close CB SignalAddr
Trip 3-Pol SignalAddr
Def. Trip SignalAddr
Inhibit Output SignalAddr
AR Ready SignalAddr
AR Blocked SignalAddr
AR in Progress SignalAddr
First AR 1P in Prog. SignalAddr
First AR 3P in Prog. SignalAddr
Second AR in Prog. SignalAddr
Third AR in Progress SignalAddr
Fourth AR in Prog. SignalAddr
First AR completed SignalAddr
2...4. AR completed SignalAddr
SYNCHROCHECK
SCBypas off (Select)
1P first AR
SCBypas off (Select)
1P3P first AR
Ext. SC Bypas BinaryAddr off (F)
Synchro Check BinaryAddr off (F)
Blocked
ZONE EXTENSION
ZE Prefault on (Select)
ZE 1. AR off (Select)
ZExtension SignalAddr
MASTER-FOLLOWER LOGIC
Master mode off (Select)
MasterDelay BinaryAddr off (F)
Mast.noSucc BinaryAddr off (F)
DelayFlwr. SignalAddr
Block to Flwr. SignalAddr
3-78
DUPLEX LOGIC
CB2 Ready BinaryAddr off (F)
CO Ready 2 BinaryAddr off (F)
CB2 open BinaryAddr on (T)
SynchroChck2 BinaryAddr off (F)
Dead line 2 BinaryAddr off (F)
Close CB2 Trip Chan 00000000
Close CB2 SignalAddr
CB2 Priority BinaryAddr off (F)
ADDITIONAL LOGIC
P INPUT1 BinaryAddr off (F)
:
P INPUT16 BinaryAddr off (F)
TMSEC Timer1 ms 0 0 30000 1
:
TMSEC Timer8 ms 0 0 30000 1
P OUTPUT1 SignalAddr
:
P OUTPUT8 SignalAddr
Remarks on the signal designations:

The I/O signals specifically for redundant or duplex schemes include
the figure '2', respectively '3' in their designations.
The signals belonging to the basic configuration (1 protection function
and 1 auto-reclosure function) do not necessarily include the figure '1'
in their designations.
Explanations of parameters:
GENERAL PARAMETER
1. AR Mode
Type of first reclosure
1. 1P-1P single-phase trip and reclosure for earth
faults (single-phase dead time), no reclosure
for phase faults
1. 1P-3P single-phase trip followed by three phase trip
after approx. 20 ms, three-phase reclosure
for earth faults (three-phase dead time
initiated by single-phase trip), no reclosure
for -phase faults
3-79
1. 1P3P-3P three-phase trip and reclosure for earth and

phase faults (three-phase dead time)
1. 1P3P-1P3P single-phase trip and reclosure for earth
faults (single-phase dead time), three-phase
trip and reclosure for phase faults (three-
phase dead time)
Ext. Selection External selection by the binary inputs
MD1_EXT_1P_1P, MD1_EXT_1P_3P,
MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P and
MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P.
2..4. AR Mode
Maximum number of reclosure attempts (all three-phase)
off no 2nd, 3rd or 4th reclosure
2 AR 2 reclosures
3 AR 3 reclosures
4 AR 4 reclosures
Close CB
Signal relay output for the command to close the circuit breaker.
FUPLA Directory
The sub directory for the auto reclose logic is selectable. The
default directory name 'AURESTD' is valid in case the standard
auto recluse protection logic is utilised, which is situated in the HMI
sub directory.
A different configuration is necessary only if instead of the standard
autoreclose logic a special autoreclose logic is utilised. The
procedure in this case has to be obtained from the associated logic
description.
TIMERS
t Dead1 1P
Dead time for first single-phase reclosure.
t Dead1 3P
Dead time for first three-phase reclosure.
t Dead1 Ext.
Extension of 1st dead time for single or three-phase reclosure
(effective as long as a logical '1' (pulse or continous) is applied to
the 'Extend t1' I/P before the dead time finishes (falling edge.)
t Dead2
2nd dead time.
t Dead3
3rd dead time.
t Dead4
4th dead time.
3-80
t Oper
Maximum duration of a fault for which a reclosure attempt is made.
t Inhibit
Period (CB recovery time) from the falling edge of the last
reclosure attempt during which the autoreclosure function is
blocked and after which the function is reset.
In the event of an evolving fault between discrimination and dead
times, the period commences at the instant of another trip
occurring between the two times.
The inhibit timer is also started if the protection trips after the fault
duration time 't Oper' has elapsed.
t Close
Duration of CB close signal.
t Discrim. 1P
Evolving fault discrimination time for single-phase reclosure.
t Discrim. 3P
Evolving fault discrimination time for three-phase reclosure.
t Timeout
Period following the dead time during which the CB close signal
has to occur. If it does not, the 'Def. Trip' signal is generated.
t AR Block
Time during which reclosure is blocked. 't AR Block' is started by
every blocking signal ('Ext.Blk AR', 'Cond.Blk. AR', 'Manual Close',
'Inhibit Inp' and 'MasternoSucc').
BINARY INPUTS
Start *)
I/P for signalling the start of a reclosure cycle.
This I/P is connected to the 'General start' signal of a protection
function.
Trip CB 3P *)
I/P for the three-phase trip signal.
The three-phase trip from a protection function is connected to
this I/P.
Trip CB
I/P for the general trip signal
The general trip from a protection function is connected to this I/P.
Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed.
*) For the auto-reclosure function to operate correctly, at least the Start and
Trip CB 3P inputs must be connected to a protection function or via a
binary system I/P to an external protection relay.
3-81
Start 2
I/P for the AR start signal.
In redundant protection schemes, the general start signal from the
2nd protection is connected to this I/P.
Trip CB2 3P
In redundant protection schemes, the three-phase tripping signal
from the 2nd protection is connected to this I/P.
Trip CB2
I/P for the general trip signal.
In redundant protection schemes, the general start signal from the
2nd protection is connected to this I/P.
Start 3
I/P for the AR start signal.
The general start signal from the 3rd protection can be connected
to this I/P.
Trip CB3 3P
The three-phase tripping signal from the 3rd protection can be
connected to this I/P.
Trip CB3
I/P for the general trip signal.
The general start signal from the 3rd protection can be connected
to this I/P.
CB Ready
I/P excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready
(open/close/open).
Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed or not fitted.
I/P logic: 'CB ready' OR 'CB2 ready'
In a duplex scheme, either an active 'CB ready' or 'CB2 ready' I/P
enables an auto-reclosure cycle.
Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
3-82
CO Ready
I/P excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready for a
close/open cycle.
Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True') if not needed, not fitted and 'Dead line' or
'ExtSCBypas' not used.
I/P logic for enabling the closing command: [('synchrocheck' AND
'CO Ready') OR 'Dead line' OR 'ExtSCBypas'].
CB Open
I/P excited by a signal from the CB when it is open.
To avoid the operation of fast circuit-breakers from being blocked
unintentionally, the effect of this input is delayed internally by
100 ms.
Dead line
I/P indicating that the line is de-energised ('CB open' input if the
VTs are on the busbar side).
An active I/P overrides the following logical relationship of the I/Ps:
'synchrocheck' AND 'CO Ready'.
Ext. Blk. AR
I/P for blocking the internal auto-reclosure function.
Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is immediately
blocked by a signal applied to this input.
The output signals 'Trip 3 Pol' and 'Def Trip' are generated and a
three-phase definitive trip takes place.
Cond. Blk. AR
I/P for a conditional blocking signal.
Blocking only takes place providing an AR cycle is not in progress.
When tripping is by the distance protection SOTF logic or a
directional E/F PLC signal, the corresponding signals can be
connected to this I/P to prevent auto-reclosure.
Manual Close
Blocking I/P excited by the manual CB close signal.
Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is immediately
blocked by a signal applied to this input.
3-83
Inhibit Inp.
I/P for blocking the follower reclosure function in a redundant
scheme. The follower is blocked from the end of the master closing
signal until the end of the reclaim time.
Extend t1
Input for conditionally extending the dead time (single and three-
phase) for the first (fast) reclosure.
MD1_EXT_1P_1P, MD1_EXT_1P_3P, MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P and
MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P
Inputs for externally selecting the mode for the first reclosure. They
are only effective when the parameter '1. AR Mode' is set to 'Ext.
select'.
Unused inputs must be set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'). If a signal is
applied to more than one input, the next mode in the list is the one
that is active. The auto-reclosure function is blocked if none of the
inputs is used.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Close CB
Indication 'Close command CB'.
Trip 3-Pol
Signal to the distance function so that it can only carry out a three-
phase trip.
This signal is inverted and connected to the distance protection I/P
'1P AR'.
This signal is active in many situations, but particularly when the
AR function is blocked, the CB is not ready for AR, the CB is open,
the single-phase discrimination time 't 1P Discrim' finishes or the
output signal 'First AR 3P' is active.
It resets at the end of reclaim time.
Def. Trip
Signal initiating lock-out tripping of the CB.
This signal is normally active when the protection trips again after
the last programmed reclosing shot or trips while the AR function is
blocked. The signal resets after a fixed time of 500 ms.
Inhibit Output
Signal for blocking the follower AR function in a redundant scheme.
This signal is active from the end of the close command from the
master AR function to the end of the reclaim time.
3-84
AR Ready
Signal indicating that the AR function is ready for a reclosure cycle.
This signal is active when the AR function is ON and standing by
and also during the closing command.
AR Blocked
Signal indicating that the auto-reclosure relay is blocked.
AR in Progress
Signal indicating that a reclosure cycle is in progress.
This signal is active from the beginning of the dead time until the
end of the last reclosure attempt.
First AR 1P in Prog.
Signal indicating that the 1st single-phase reclosure attempt is in
progress.
First AR 3P in Prog.
Signal indicating that the 1st three-phase reclosure attempt is in
progress.
Second AR in Prog.
Signal indicating that the 2nd reclosure attempt is in progress
(always three-phase).
Third AR in Progress
Signal indicating that the 3rd reclosure attempt is in progress
Fourth AR in Prog.
Signal indicating that the 4th reclosure attempt is in progress
First AR completed
Signal indicating that the 1st reclosure is completed.
2...4. AR completed
Signal indicating that the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reclosure is completed.
SYNCHROCHECK
SCBypas 1P first AR
Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals for the
first single-phase reclosure:
'on' First single-phase reclosure not enabled by
synchrocheck and close/open ready signals
(bypass always active).
'off' First single-phase reclosure enabled by the
synchrocheck and close/open ready signals
(bypass inactive).
3-85
SCBypas 1P3P first AR

Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals for the
first single or three-phase reclosure:
'on' First reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck and
close/open ready signals
(bypass always active).
'off' First reclosure enabled by synchrocheck and
close/open ready signals
(bypass inactive).
Ext.SCBypas
Bypasses the 'synchroChck' and 'CO Ready' signals.
I/P logic for enabling the close command: [('synchrocheck' AND
'CO Ready') OR 'Dead line' OR 'Ext.SCBypas'].
I/P logic for enabling the close command: [('synchroChk2' AND
'CO Ready 2') OR 'Dead line' OR 'Ext.SCBypas'].
SynchroCheck
I/P for a signal from a synchrocheck relay.
Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed, not fitted and 'Dead line' or
'ExtSCBypas' not used.
I/P logic: [('synchrocheck' AND 'CO Ready') OR 'Dead line' OR
'Ext.SCBypas'].
ZONE EXTENSION
To achieve the functions described below, the 'ZExtension' signal must
be connected to the distance protection function (see Section 3.5.4.2.).
This signal can be used to initiate fast tripping in schemes including
overcurrent functions (see Section 3.5.4.3.).
ZE Prefault
Distance relay reach setting before the first fault:
'on' overreaching ('ZExtension' signal active)
'off' underreaching ('ZExtension' signal inactive)
ZE 1. AR
Distance relay reach after the 1st reclosure attempt:
ZE 2. AR
Distance relays reach after the 2nd reclosure attempt:
3-86
ZE 3. AR
Distance relays reach after the 3rd reclosure attempt:
ZE 4. AR
Distance relays reach after the 4th reclosure attempt:
ZExtension
Signal to the distance function to switch it to overreach or enable
an overcurrent function with a short delay.
MASTER-FOLLOWER LOGIC
Master Mode
(for 1 breaker and redundant schemes)
Selection of an auto-reclosure function to be 'Master':
'on' Master O/P signals transmitted
'off' Master O/Ps blocked
MasterDelay
I/P for a signal delaying the closing command from the follower
reclosure function.
This signal picks up when the dead time of the master reclosure
function starts and is reset either by a new trip after the last
reclosure of the cycle or at the end of the wait time following
successful reclosure by the master.
Mast.noSucc
I/P for a blocking signal from the master CB.
This signal is triggered by the rising edge of the 'Def.Trip' output
from the master reclosure function and resets after a fixed time of
500 ms.
DelayFlwr.
Signal to delay the follower CB for as long as the master circuit-
breaker has not completed its auto-reclosure cycle.
The signal picks up at the start of master AR dead time and is
reset either by the rising edge of the 'Def.Trip' output or the falling
edge of the 'Close CB' output after the time 'tClose'.
Block to Flwr.
Signal to block the follower CB as long as reclosure of the master
CB is unsuccessful.
The excursion of this signal is the same as for the 'Def.Trip' output.
3-87
DUPLEX LOGIC
CB2 Ready
I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready
(open/close/open).
Set to 'off' ('F' or 'False'), if not needed or not fitted.
I/P logic: 'CB ready' OR 'CB2 ready'
In a duplex scheme, the auto-reclosure cycle is enabled either by
an active 'CB ready' or 'CB2 ready' I/P.
Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
CO Ready 2
I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready for a close/open
operation.
Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed, not fitted and 'Dead line 2' is
not used.
I/P logic for enabling the close command: [('synchrocheck2' AND
'CO Ready 2') OR 'Dead line 2' OR 'ExtSCBypas'].
CB2 open
I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is open.
Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed. Observe the information
given for the duplex logic in a duplex scheme (see Section 3.5.4.5.).
SynchroChck2
I/P for a signal from a synchrocheck function belonging to CB2.
Set to 'on' ('T' or 'True'), if not needed, not fitted and 'Dead line 2'
or ExtSCBypas not used.
I/P logic for enabling the close command: [('synchrocheck2' AND
'CO Ready 2') OR 'Dead line 2' OR 'ExtSCBypas'].
Dead line 2
I/P indicating that line 2 is de-energised (CB2 open and VTs 2 on
the busbar side).
An active I/P overrides the following logical relationship of the I/Ps:
'synchrocheck 2' AND 'CO Ready 2'.
Close CB2
Tripping relay O/P for the CB2 close command.
Close CB2
Auxiliary relay O/P for the CB2 close signal.
3-88
CB2 Priority
Input for determining the preferred circuit-breaker:
'off' ('F' or 'False') CB1 is preferred circuit-breaker
'on' ('T' or 'True') CB2 is preferred circuit-breaker
If both circuit-breakers are closed before a fault, only the preferred
circuit-breaker performs the entire auto-reclosure cycle. The other
circuit-breaker closes either after successful auto-reclosure or
when the close command to the preferred circuit-breaker is not
enabled (missing 'CO Ready' or 'Synchrocheck').
ADDITIONAL LOGIC
The following settings are only of consequence if a special auto-reclo-
sure logic is installed. In this case, consult the associated description
for the significance of the various settings.
P_INPUT1, P_INPUT2P_INPUT16
Additional binary input for a special auto-reclosure logic.
TMSEC_Timer1, TMSEC_Timer2TMSEC_Timer8
Additional timer settings for a special auto-reclosure logic.
P_OUTPUT1, P_OUTPUT2P_OUTPUT8
Additional signals for a special auto-reclosure logic.
3-89
3.5.4.1. General
The auto-reclosure function can perform from 1 to 4 auto-reclosure
attempts. The first attempt can be either single or three-phase while
the subsequent attempts are always three-phase. The type and num-
ber are determined by the parameters '1. AR Mode' (4 different modes
for the 1st reclosure cycle) and '2..4 AR Mode'.
The function can operate in conjunction with either an external dis-
tance protection relay or other internal protection functions.
It can also operate in a scheme comprising two or more protection
functions (see Sections 3.5.4.2. to 3.5.4.5.).
3.5.4.2. Connections between auto-reclosure and distance functions
The auto-reclosure function determines from the states of the input
signals 'start', 'Trip CB' and 'Trip CB 3P', whether the distance protec-
tion has picked up and whether it has performed a single or a three-
phase trip. Only the 'Trip CB' signal is generated for a single-phase
trip, whereas both the 'Trip CB' and 'Trip CB 3P' signals are generated
for a three-phase trip.
The external distance relay or internal distance function decides
whether single or three-phase tripping should take place.
The auto-reclosure function can send two signals to the distance pro-
tection. The 'Trip 3-Pol' signal informs the distance protection whether
it should perform a single or a three-phase trip. The 'ZExtension' signal
switches the distance protections overreaching zone on and off.
When setting the parameters, attention should be paid to the order of
the functions. For runtime reasons, the distance function should be
configured before the auto-reclosure function.
Where the SOTF logic is not required to operate during auto-reclosure,
connect the 'AR in progress' Signal to the 'Ext. Block SOTF' binary I/P
of the distance function. The 'SOTF 10 s' timer in the distance
functions SOTF logic is normally activated for dead times <10 s and in
this case the above connection is not necessary.
If the SOTF logic initiates tripping, an auto-reclosure cycle can be
inhibited by connecting the 'start SOTF' from the distance function to
the 'Cond. Block AR' I/P of the auto-reclosure function.
The exchange of signals in the various schemes (one distance and
one auto-reclosure function, and several protection functions and one
reclosure function) can be seen from Fig. 3.10, Fig. 3.11 and Fig. 3.14.
3-90
RE.216 / RE.316*4
Start RST Start Auto-reclosure
<Z Trip CB Trip CB function
Trip CB 3Ph Trip CB 3P
CO Ready
CB Ready
Start SOTF Cond. Block AR
Close CB
CB Open
1 Pol AR Trip 3-Pol
Z Extension AR Z Extension
HEST 045019 C
Fig. 3.10 Distance and auto-reclosure functions in the same unit
RE.216 / RE.316*4
Start Auto-reclosure
<Z Trip CB function
Trip CB 3P
CO Ready
CB Ready
Cond. Block AR
Close CB
CB Open
Trip 3-Pol
Z Extension
HEST 045020 C
Fig. 3.11 Distance protection and auto-reclosure functions in

different units
3-91
3.5.4.3. Connections between auto-reclosure and overcurrent or

differential functions
a) When setting the parameters, attention should be paid to the order
of the functions. For run-time reasons, the overcurrent function
should be configured before the auto-reclosure function.
To prevent the discrimination timer from operating, connect the
overcurrent 'Trip' signal to the two inputs 'Start' and 'Trip CB 3P' of
the auto-reclosure function.
The time 't Close' must be set longer than the maximum operating
time of the activated (graded) overcurrent functions to prevent the
reclaim time from blocking the AR function in the event of a
permanent fault:
tClose from AR function > tmax. overcurrent time delay
In cases where the zone extension signal is used in conjunction
with overcurrent functions (see zone extension settings), the terms
'overreach' and 'underreach' have the following meanings:
'overreach': enabling of an overcurrent function having a
short (non-graded) time delay.
'underreach' : enabling of an overcurrent function having a
long (graded) time delay.
The exchange of signals in conjunction with O/C functions is
shown in Fig. 3.12.
b) If only three-phase trip and reclosure operation is required in
conjunction with a differential current function, connect the
differential function trip output to the 'Start' and 'Trip CB 3P' inputs
of the reclosure function.
The additional FUPLA logic T129 is required for single-phase trip
and reclosure.
3-92
RE.216 / RE.316*4
O/C Trip 1 *) Start Auto-reclosure
(I 1>, t 1)
Logic Trip CB 3P function
CO Ready
CB Ready
Close CB
CB Open
Z Extension
O/C Trip
(I 2>, t 2)
Block
HEST045021 C
Fig. 3.12 Overcurrent and auto-reclosure functions in the same

unit
where:
t1 standard delay (0.5 ... 1.5 s)
t2 short delay (0.02 ... 0.2 s)
I1>, I2> pick-up value 'I set' for 'Trip'
3-93
3.5.4.4. Redundant schemes

Provision is made for coordinating the operation of two protection
functions and one or two auto-reclosure functions per line terminal
(see Fig. 3.13 and Fig. 3.14).
A master/follower logic has to be used to avoid any time-race
problems due to differing timer tolerances.
A redundant scheme assumes first and second main protection
schemes each with its own reclosure function. The operation of the
reclosure functions therefore has to be coordinated by configuring one
as 'master' and the other as 'follower'. If the master AR starts first, it
delays the operation of the follower AR until it has either achieved
successful reclosure or otherwise.
If the follower AR is enabled first, its dead time starts to run, but should
the master start during the follows dead time, operation of the follower
reclosure function is suspended and the master takes over and
performs its reclosure cycle.
The follower is on 'hot standby' and only takes over, if the master AR
or its protection function fails to operate.
The signal from a faulty contact like 'CO Ready' to the master recloser,
however, would result in a 'Def.Trip' output after the time 't Timeout'
and this would also block the Follower AR.
In the circuit of Fig. 3.13, the master and follower functions can also be
the other way round by appropriately configuring the system software.
3-94
<Z <Z
RE.216 / RE.316*4
Z Extension AR
Trip CB 3Ph
Start SOTF
Start RST
1 Pol AR
Trip CB
Cond. Block AR
Cond. Block AR
Z Extension
Z Extension
Trip CB
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB 3P
Trip 3-Pol
Start
Start
Trip 3-Pol
Auto-reclosure
Auto-reclosure
Trip CB2 3P
function
function
CB Open CB Open
CB Ready CB Ready
CO Ready CO Ready
Close CB Close CB
Inhibit Close Inhibit Output

Inhibit Output Inhibit Close
Delay Flwr. Master Delay
Master mode = 'ON' Master mode = 'OFF
HEST 045022 C
Fig. 3.13 Redundant scheme (first and second main < Z and
auto-reclosure functions) with master/follower logic
3-95
RE.216 / RE.316*4
< Z (1)
Start RST Start
Trip CB Trip CB
Trip CB 3Ph Trip CB 3P
Start SOTF Cond. Block AR
1 Pol AR Trip 3-Pol
Z Extension AR Z Extension
Auto-reclosure
Z Extension
Trip 3-Pol
function
Start 2
Trip CB2
< Z (2) Trip CB2 3P
CO Ready
CB Ready
Close CB
CB Open
Start
Trip CB 3P
Backup
HEST 045025 C
Fig. 3.14 Several protection functions and a common auto-

reclosure unit
3.5.4.5. Master/follower logic

Provision is made for a master/follower logic in 1 breaker schemes
with two line protections per line and an auto-reclosure function per
circuit-breaker.
One of the reclosure functions is assigned the role of master by
appropriately setting the parameter 'Master mode'. After a successful
reclosure, the master AR then enables the follower AR, respectively its
CB (the connections are as given in Fig. 3.15 for a three-phase trip
and reclosure for all types of faults).
3-96
MAIN 1 MAIN 2
Trip CB R Trip CB R
<Z Trip CB S Trip CB S <Z
Trip CB T Trip CB T
Start RSTAux
Start RSTAux
Start SOTF
Start SOTF
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB 3P
Start RST
Start RST
1 Pol AR
1 Pol AR
Trip CB
Trip CB
Cond. Block
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB2 3P
Trip 3-Pol
AR
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB2 3P
Start 2
Trip CB 2
Start
Trip 3-Pol
Cond. Block
Trip CB
Start 2
Trip CB 2
Start
AR
Delay Flwr. Master Delay
RE.316*4 Block to Flwr. Mast. no Succ.
RE.316*4
Master AR Follower AR
CO Ready
CB Ready
CO Ready
CB Ready
Close CB
CB Open
Close CB
CB Open
"Master CB "Follower CB
LINE
HEST 045 023 C
Fig. 3.15 Earth and phase fault master/follower scheme for AR

mode 1P3P-3P
Note: A second line on the diameter (1 breaker scheme) requires

additional connections and logic.
3-97
Follower CB delay 'DelayFlwr'

The master reclosure function sends an active 'DelFlwr' signal to the
'MasterDelay' I/P of the follower to delay its 'Close CB' command to the
follower CB until the master reclosure function issues the 'Close CB'
command, which is followed by a wait time of 300 ms as a precaution
to allow time for a successful reclosure. If the reclosure is unsuccess-
ful, the output remains high until the signal 'Def.Trip' is activated (the
'DelayFlwr' signal resets and 'Blk to Flwr' signal is generated).
Should this signal reset before the end of the follower dead time, the
close command to the follower CB is issued at the end of the dead
time.
Blocking reclosure by the follower 'Block to Flwr.'

The master reclosure function sends an active 'Block to Flwr.' signal to
the follower 'Mast.noSucc' I/P to block reclosure by the follower, if the
reclosure attempt by the master was unsuccessful as indicated by the
generation of its 'Def.Trip' output.
3.5.4.6. Duplex logic

A duplex logic for a line with two circuit-breakers is also included (see
Fig. 3.16).
Observe the following in connection with a duplex scheme:
For the scheme to operate correctly, the corresponding CB signals
must be connected to the 'CB open' and 'CB2 open' inputs for the
duplex logic (setting to 'off' disables the duplex logic). Follow the
procedure below, if separate 'CB ready' and 'CB open' signals are
not available from the circuit-breakers:
Connect the two circuit-breaker signalling contacts 'CB ready'
(air-pressure or spring charging) and 'CB closed' in series. For
this, 't Close' must be set longer than the maximum spring
charging time to suppress the definitive trip signal in the case of
a successful reclosure.
Assign the combined signals to the corresponding 'CB ready'
inputs.
Assign the same signals but inverted to the corresponding
'CB open' inputs.
The priority CB is selected with the input 'CB2 Priority'. If both
CBs are closed when a fault occurs, then the Autoreclose cycle
is executed only for the priority CB. In a normal case the
second CB is closed only after a successful autoreclosure of
the priority CB. It is also closed if the priority CB is prevented
from closing on a Close command because of missing release
signals ('CO Ready' resp. Synchrocheck).
3-98
Start Start RST
Fig. 3.16
CB Open
CB Ready Trip CB Trip CB
CB1
CO Ready Trip CB 3P Trip CB 3P
Start SOTF
< Z (1)
Close CB Cond. Block AR
Trip 3-Pol 1 Pol AR
Z Extension Z Extension AR
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
RE.216 & RE.316*4
function
Auto-reclosure
CB2 Open Z Extension

CB2 Ready Trip 3-Pol
CB2
CO Ready2 Start 2
Close CB2
Duplex scheme (< Z can be redundant)

Trip CB 2
< Z (2)
Trip CB2 3P
HEST 045 026 C
3-99
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.4.7. Timers
The timers have setting ranges extending up to 300 s in steps of
10 ms.
The purpose of each of the timers is described below.
Dead times 't Dead1 1P' to 't Dead 4'

Provided the trip signal is issued before 't Oper' elapses, the dead time
is the period between the tripping signal ('Trip CB') and the close
signal ('Close CB').
The required dead time must be entered separately for each reclosure
cycle. This necessitates setting the following parameters:
't Dead1 1P', 't Dead1 3P', 't Dead 2', 't Dead 3' and 't Dead 4'.
Provision is made for externally switching the dead times 't Dead1 1P'
and 't Dead1 3P' for the first (fast) reclosure attempt to a second
setting. The corresponding additional time period can be set with the
aid of the parameter 't Dead 1 Ext' and activated via the binary I/P
'Extend t1'.
The 2nd, 3rd and 4th reclosure attempts are always three-phase.
Extended dead time 't Dead 1 Ext'

This time provides facility for extending the dead time (e.g. should
the communications channel be defective or for a redundant scheme
with 2 auto-reclosure functions). The extended dead time is enabled
by the binary input 'Extend t1'.
Maximum fault duration for a reclosure attempt 't Oper'

If a fault has persisted for some time, the probability of a successful
reclosure reduces. The likelihood of the power system becoming
unstable is also greater for an unsuccessful auto-reclosure attempt
following a fault that has persisted for a long period. It is for these
reasons that the time after the inception of a fault during which
reclosure can be initiated is limited. The fault duration is set using
parameter 't Oper'.
The timer for the fault duration is started by the pick-up signal from the
protection function (Start). Faults resulting in tripping after 't Oper' are
locked out ('Def. Trip') and reclosure does not take place.
Should the fault duration time expire before the protection trips, auto-
reclosure is blocked and the reclaim time is started.
Example:
Time 'T Oper' < 'Delay(2)' of the distance function means that auto-
reclosure only takes place for faults in the first distance zone
('Delay(1)').
This function is not required for schemes that only use current func-
tions. The binary inputs 'Start' and 'Trip CB 3P' are connected together
(see Section 3.5.4.3.).
3-100
Reclaim time 't inhibit'

The purpose of the inhibit time is among other things to permit the
circuit-breaker to recover its full voltage withstand. To this end, it
disables the auto-reclosure function for the time set for parameter
't inhibit' after one of the following events:
the last reclosing attempt
a definitive trip resulting from a protection trip after the fault
duration time 't Oper'
a recurring trip between discrimination time and dead time
(evolving fault, see O/P signal 'Def. Trip').
Close signal duration 't Close'

The maximum duration of the circuit-breaker close signal (command
O/P 'Close CB') is determined by the parameter 't Close'. Any tripping
signal that occurs during this time overrides the close signal. A
second, third or fourth reclosure attempt can only take place, if the
next trip occurs within the time 't Close'.
Discrimination times 't 1P discrim.' and 't 3P discrim.'

The discrimination time determines the procedure in the event of a
different kind of fault occurring during the dead time (evolving fault),
i.e. one of the other two phases also picks up or the tripping signal
resets and picks up again. The discrimination time is started together
with the dead time. Should a tripping signal recur due to an evolving
fault between the expiry of the discrimination time and before the end
of the dead time, the reclaim timer is started and a definitive trip
('Def. Trip') initiated. The dead time is also discontinued and the signal
'AR in prog.' reset.
If the first fault was initially an earth fault and evolves during the time
't Dead1 1P', but before the end of the discrimination time 't Discrim
1P', the dead time 't Dead1 3P' is started and three-phase reclosure
takes place.
The discrimination time 't Discrim 3P' is also needed for 2 or 1
breaker schemes, where each circuit-breaker has its own auto-reclo-
sure function.
A typical setting for the parameters 't Discrim 1P' or 't Discrim 3P' for
single and three-phase reclosure is 50 % of the shortest dead time.
The minimum permissible setting for the discrimination time is:
100 ms + CB time
NOTICE: The time 't1EvolFaults' during which a subsequent fault

has to be detected (evolving or unsuccessful reclosure) must be set in
the distance function.
3-101
The distance protection parameter 't1EvolFaults' enables the time to

be set during which a subsequent fault (evolving or unsuccessful reclo-
sure) results in a three-phase trip, i.e. every second trip by the distance
protection function trips all three phases. The auto-reclosure function
also signals the switchover to three-phase tripping by exciting the
signal 'Trip 3-Pol' at the end of the fault discrimination time 't Discrim. 1P'.
It is advisable to set the time 't1EvolFaults' longer than the auto-reclo-
sure dead time 't Dead1 1P'.
't Timeout'
The parameter 't Timeout' determines the period after the dead time
within which the close signal must be issued, otherwise a 'Def.Trip' is
generated and no further reclosure attempt is made. Before a close
command is issued at the end of every dead time, the logic
[('synchroChck' AND 'CO ready') OR 'Dead Line' OR 'ExtSCBypas')] is
checked and the command only enabled providing all the criteria are
correct within the setting of 't Timeout'.
Blocking time 't AR Block'

The auto-reclosure function can be enabled or disabled by the follow-
ing binary I/P signals:
Ext. Block AR - also blocks during the reclosure cycle
Manual close - also blocks during the reclosure cycle
Inhibit Inp - also blocks during the reclosure cycle
CB Ready - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle
CB2 Ready - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle *)
CO Ready - blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after
expiry of the time 't time-out'
CO Ready 2 - blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after
expiry of the time 't time-out' *)
Mast.noSucc - blocks the follower CB after an unsuccessful
reclosure attempt by the master
Cond. Block AR - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle.
Should a 'Cond. Block AR' signal occur during a reclosure cycle (i.e.
the 'AR in prog.' signal is active), it only becomes effective from the
end of the current reclosure cycle and providing it is still active.
*) 2 denotes the I/Os for CB2 in a duplex scheme (see Fig. 3.16.).
3-102
A reclosure cycle remains blocked for the duration of the set blocking
time 't AR Block' after the last binary I/P has been enabled. Blocking
also takes place during initialisation of the protection relay when its
auxiliary supply is switched on or the parameter settings are being
loaded.
3.5.4.8. External binary inputs
Starting and tripping signals from the protection function: 'Start'

('Start 2', 'Start 3'), 'Trip CB' and 'Trip CB 3P' ('Trip CB2', 'Trip CB3',
'Trip CB2 3P', 'Trip CB3 3P')
In order to control the auto-reclosure function, it is necessary to
configure the three I/P signals 'Trip CB' (general trip), 'Trip CB 3P'
(three-phase trip) and 'Start'. The normal procedure to achieve this is
to select the protection signals via the sub-menu 'OUTPUT FROM
FUNCTION'. Since the auto-reclosure function is completely
independent, signals from other functions may also be selected.
In a 1st and 2nd main (redundant) protection scheme with one auto-
reclosure relay (see Section 3.5.4.4.), the I/P signals 'Trip CB2', 'Trip
CB2 3P' and 'Start 2' must also be connected to the second protection
function.
Circuit-breaker ready signals: 'CB ready' and 'CO Ready'

('CB2 ready' and 'CO Ready 2')
The I/Ps for the parameters 'CO Ready' and 'CB ready' (or 'CO
Ready 2' and 'CB2 ready' in a duplex scheme) must be connected to
the circuit-breakers in order to signal that they are ready to perform a
complete reclosure cycle. In cases where one of the I/Ps is not used, it
must be set to 'TRUE'.
An active 'CB ready' signal informs the auto-reclosure function that
reclosure is permissible (i.e. sufficient energy is available for a full
open/close/open cycle).
Once a reclosure cycle has started, this signal is ignored (because the
pressure varies during a reclosure cycle of an air-blast breaker).
Resetting of this signal is internally delayed by 100 ms.
The 'CO Ready' signal (close-open cycle can be carried out) is only
effective during a reclosure cycle, i.e. during the dead time. Should
there be insufficient energy to open the circuit-breaker again following
closure, the close signal is disabled and a 'Def. Trip' (definitive trip) is
generated.
This I/P is only used in conjunction with circuit-breakers, which provide
the corresponding information (C-O query), e.g. spring-charged and
air-blast circuit-breakers with two switching energy levels.
3-103
Circuit-breaker open 'CB open' ('CB2 open')

It is also necessary to include the initial status of the circuit-breakers to
prevent one from receiving a close signal, which was already open
before the fault occurred.
The binary I/P 'CB open' (and 'CB2 open' in a duplex scheme) is thus
provided to determine the initial status of a circuit-breaker.
The pick-up of these signals is delayed by 100 ms to prevent any
unwanted blocking of fast circuit-breakers.
A circuit-breaker that was already open before the 'Start' signal was
received ('CB open' at logical '1') is not closed by the auto-reclosure
function.
Where a circuit-breaker does not provide the necessary information
('CB open' signal), the I/P must be permanently set to 'off' ('F' or 'False').
Providing the scheme is also not a duplex scheme (i.e. only one CB),
the binary I/P 'CB2 open' must also be permanently set to 'on' ('T' or
'True').
Accordingly, these are the default settings for 'CB open' and 'CB2 open'.
The auto-reclosure function can then operate with a single circuit-
breaker without a 'CB open' signal and no superfluous close signal is
generated for the non-existing CB2.
De-energised line 'Dead Line' ('Dead Line 2') with checking of

synchronism 'synchroChck' ('synchroChck2')
Before the 'Close CB' (or 'Close CB2') instruction can be issued, either
the 'Dead line' or the 'synchroChck' I/P (or 'Dead line 2' or 'synchro-
Chck2' in a duplex scheme) must be at logical '1'.
Logic: [('synchroChck' AND 'CO ready') OR 'Dead Line' OR
'ExtSCBypas']
Logic: [('synchroChck2' AND 'CO ready 2') OR 'Dead Line 2' OR
'ExtSCBypas']
External blocking 'Ext. Block AR' and 'Cond. Block AR'

The reclosure function is always blocked by an active 'Ext. Block AR'
I/P.
An active 'Cond. Block AR' I/P will only block the function, providing a
reclosure cycle is not running (i.e. the 'AR in prog.' signal is at logical '0').
The 'Cond.Blk AR' signal is needed to prevent a reclosure cycle, when
no reclosure is wanted for a first trip that occurs during 't Oper'. This is
the case, for example, for trips by the switch-onto-fault (SOTF)
protection or by a directional E/F protection via PLC.
To prevent the SOFT from initiating auto-reclosure, the distance
protection 'SOFT start' signal must be connected to the 'Cond. Block
AR' input.
3-104
'Manual close'
The reclosure function is immediately blocked (for the blocking time
't AR Block') by a 'Manual close' signal. This signal is also needed for
the overreaching logic to switch the 'ZExtension' signal to 'on'.
External synchrocheck bypass signal 'ExtSCBypas'

This I/P provides facility for bypassing the 'synchroChck' and 'CO
Ready' (or 'SynchroChck2' and 'CO Ready 2' for CB2) enabling I/Ps.
It is only active for the first fast three-phase or single-phase reclosure
attempt.
External extension of the dead time Extend t1'

A logical '1' at the 'Extend t1' I/P extends the dead times 't Dead1
1P' and 't Dead1 3P' by the setting 't Dead1 Ext' for the first (fast)
reclosure attempt. This could be necessary, for example, in the event
of a communication channel failure or in a redundant scheme.
3.5.4.9. Close CB and signalling outputs
The most important auto-reclosure output is the 'Close CB' command,
which must be assigned to a heavy-duty auxiliary O/P relay. This and
14 other heavy-duty and signalling O/Ps are provided.
This signal picks up when the closing command is issued and resets at
the end of the time 't Close' or earlier if there is a tripping occurs upon
reclosing.
Status of the auto-reclosure function 'AR Ready' and 'AR Blocked'

The signal 'AR Ready' is generated when the auto-reclosure function
is ready to perform a reclosure cycle and the signal 'AR Blocked' when
it is blocked.
The 'AR Ready' signal is active providing a reclosure cycle is not
blocked (no 'AR Blocked' signal) and a dead time is not running.
The 'AR Ready' signal is active during a reclose command for
purposes of enabling the synchrocheck function (see Fig. 3.63 in the
synchrocheck function section).
Auto-reclosure cycle in progress

There are six signals, which show that a reclosure cycle is running and
what stage has been reached:
'AR in prog.' reclosure cycle in progress
'First AR 1P' first single-phase reclosure attempt
'First AR 3P' first three-phase reclosure attempt
'second AR' second reclosure attempt
'Third AR' third reclosure attempt
'Fourth AR' fourth reclosure attempt
The signal 'AR in prog' picks up at the start of the dead time and is
reset by the falling edge of the last reclose command.
3-105
Circuit-breaker closing signals 'Close CB' and 'Close CB2'

The CB closing command is normally assigned to a heavy-duty auxiliary
O/P relay by correspondingly configuring the parameter 'Close CB'
(also 'Close CB2' in a duplex scheme). It is also possible to assign the
same signal to a signalling O/P under the same parameter name.
A trip subsequent to a close command during the time 't Close' + 300 ms
switches the dead time step (second, third and fourth AR) or initiates a
lock-out trip (depending on the setting). A close command is reset
immediately after a trip.
Definitive trip 'Def. Trip'

The 'Def. Trip' signal indicates that the circuit-breaker will remain
tripped and no further reclosure attempts will be made. The following
conditions can cause a definitive trip:
All reclosure attempts were unsuccessful.
A starting or tripping signal was generated after the discrimination
time and before dead time.
Tripping takes place while a reclosure cycle is blocked (either via
the blocking I/P or by the reclaim time).
The 'synchroChck' (or 'Dead line') and/or 'CO Ready' I/Ps were not
enabled during 't Timeout' due to lack of synchronism.
The 'CB open' signal is still active 300 ms after the close signal
has reset (i.e. the CB has not responded to the close signal).
The trip signal that followed the start signal occurred after the fault
duration time 't Oper'.
Tripping occurred for a phase fault and the mode selected for the
first reclosure cycle is 1P-1P or 1P-3P.
Perform three-phase trip 'Trip 3-Pol'

The 'Trip 3-Pol' O/P instructs the line protection to trip all three phases.
The signal can be externally or internally connected.
This signal is generated automatically, if reclosure is blocked, 'CB
Ready' is inactive, the CB is open, the single-phase discrimination time
't1P Discrim' has elapsed or the signal 'First AR 3P' is active.
Zone extension 'ZExtension'

The setting of the auto-reclosure parameter 'ZE Prefault' determines
the pre-fault reach of the distance protection when the auto-reclosure
function is inactive (before the first fault), i.e. setting 'ZE Prefault' to 'on'
activates the output signal 'ZExtension' which then switches the
distance function to overreach.
The parameters 'ZE 1. AR reach' to 'ZE 4. AR reach' provide facility for
individually switching the reach for each reclosure attempt. Setting one
of these parameters to 'on' means that the 'ZExtension' O/P is at
3-106
logical '1' and the distance relay is switched to overreach either before
fault occurrence or for the following reclosure attempt, otherwise the
distance relay is set to underreach.
With the exception of its first change of state when providing
'ZEPrefault' is set to 'ON' it resets together with the signal 'Trip CB' or
'Trip CB 3P', this signal picks up and resets together with the 'Close
CB' signal.
The distance relay is switched to overreaching for a 'Manual close'.
It is switched to underreaching when the auto-reclosure function is
blocked.
Note also that the 'ZExtension' signal is connected to the binary input
'ZEMode AR' of the zone extension logic in the distance protection
function.
3.5.4.10. Timing diagrams

The time relationship between the various signals during operation of
the auto-reclosure function can be seen from Fig. 3.17 to Fig. 3.25.
3-107
Successful AR
time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
Z Extension
300 ms
First AR 1P
in Progress t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t Inhibit
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 1P
in Progress
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Fig. 3.17 Timing diagram for a single or double busbar

arrangement with 1 distance and 1 AR function.
Response for an earth fault.
Settings:
'1. AR Mode' = '1P-1P' or '1P3P-1P3P',
'2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on',
'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-108
Successful AR (evolving fault during t Discrim1P)

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 1P
in Progress
First AR 3P
in Progress
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
300 ms
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Unsuccessful AR (evolving fault within t Dead1 1P,

but after t Discrim1P)
time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 1P
in Progress
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P

Response for an earth fault that evolves.
Settings:
'1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off',
'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-109
Successful AR
time < t Operation
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 3P
in Progress
Second AR
in Progress 300 ms
Third AR
in Progress
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3 t Inhibit
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Operation
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 3P
in Progress
Second AR
in Progress
Third AR
in Progress
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3

Response for multiple phase faults.
Settings:
'1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P', '2..4. AR Mode' = 3,
'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off',
'ZE 2. AR' = 'on' and 'ZE 3. AR' = 'off'.
3-110
Master AR (Master Mode = "ON")

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
Z Extension
300 ms
First AR 1P
In Progress
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
Delay Flwr
Inhibit Output
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Follower AR (Master Mode = "OFF", AR on "hot standby")

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
Master Delay
Inhibit Close
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Fig. 3.20 Timing diagram for redundant scheme with 2 ARs.

Response for 1 successful reclosure.
Settings:
'ZE Prefault' = 'on' and 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-111
Master AR (Master Mode = "ON")

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 1P
in Progress
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
Delay Flwr
Inhibit Output
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Follower AR (Master Mode = "OFF", AR on "hot standby")

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
Master Delay
Inhibit Close
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Fig. 3.21 Timing diagram for redundant scheme with 2 ARs.

Response for 1 unsuccessful reclosure.
Settings:
'ZE Prefault' = 'on' and 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-112
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
Close CB2
Z Extension
First AR 3P
in Progress
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 3P
Successful AR
time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
300 ms
Close CB2
Z Extension
300 ms
First AR 3P
in Progress
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Fig. 3.22 Timing diagram for duplex scheme.

Response for a multiple phase fault.
Settings:
'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'
and 'CB2 Priority = 'Always FALSE'.
3-113
Master AR (Master Mode = "ON", CB on bus side)

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Close CB
Z Extension
Def. Trip
First AR 1P
in Progress
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
Delay Flwr
Block to Flwr
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Follower AR (Master Mode = "OFF", Centre CB)

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Close CB
Z Extension
Def. Trip
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
Master Delay
Mast.no Succ
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Fig. 3.23 Timing diagram for a 1 breaker scheme.

Response for an unsuccessful reclosure.
Settings:
'1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P' or '1P-1P',
'2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on'
and 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-114

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
t Close
Close CB
Z Extension
Def. Trip
300 ms
First AR 1P
in Progress
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
Delay Flwr
Block to Flwr
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked

time < t Operation
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
t Close
Close CB
Z Extension
Def. Trip
300 ms
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
Master Delay
Mast.no Succ
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Fig. 3.24 Timing diagram for a 1 breaker scheme.

Response for a successful reclosure.
Settings:
'1. AR Mode' = '1P3P-1P3P' or '1P-1P',
'2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', 'ZE Prefault' = 'on'
und 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off'.
3-115

time < t Operation
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
Block to Flwr
Delay Flwr
Close CB
Z Extension
First AR 3P
in Progress
Second AR
in Progress
Third AR
in Progress
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3

time < t Operation
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
Mast.no Succ
Master Delay
Z Extension
First AR 3P
in Progress
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Progress
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Fig. 3.25 Timing diagram for 1 breaker scheme.

Response for an unsuccessful multiple reclosure.
Settings:
'ZE Prefault' = 'on', 'ZE 1. AR' = 'off',
'ZE 2. AR' = 'on' and 'ZE 3. AR' = 'off'.
3-116
3.5.4.11. Checking the dead times

When commissioning the auto-reclosure function, it is not sufficient to
check the combined operation of protection function, auto-reclosure
function and circuit-breaker, the resulting dead times must also be
determined.
Since the dead time settings do not correspond to the effective total dead
times, especially in a scheme with two circuit-breakers (see Fig. 3.26), the
period during which the circuit-breaker is actually open must be
measured. This entails adjusting the dead time until the measured
breaker time minus arcing and pre-ignition times and the inevitable CB
tolerances result in an adequate composite dead time.
Providing the circuit-breakers at both ends of the line are of the same
type and thus permit the same tolerances to be assumed at both ends,
the same dead time tp can be set in the two terminal stations. Where
this is not the case, the tripping and closing times of the two circuit-
breakers must also be measured in addition to the dead times. The
dead times set for the two auto-reclosure functions must then ensure
that a sufficiently long 'overlapping' dead time exists to enable the
circuit-breakers to deionise.
3-117
A B
ts
tw
tp
0 1
C
6
2
A 5
3
4
O
t1 t2
t3 t4 t5
t6
t7
0 1
C 2
6
B 3 5
4
O
(t)
HEST 925 035 C
A: circuit-breaker 1 B: circuit-breaker 2
C: 'closed' position O: 'open' position
0: start 1: 'trip' signal
2: contacts part 3: current interrupted
4: 'close' signal 5: current flows again
6: contacts make
t1: tripping time t2: reclosing time t3: arc extinction time
t4: dead time t5: pre-ignition time t6: duration of interruption
t7: resulting dead time
tp: dead time ts: inhibit time tw: fault duration
Fig. 3.26 Resulting composite dead time

(Source: 'Guidelines for auto-reclosure in electrical
power systems' published by the German Association of
Power Utilities VDEW)
3-118
3.5.5. Sensitive earth fault protection for grounded systems

(EarthFltGnd2)
A. Application
High-resistance earth faults, which cannot be detected by the distance
protection, can still cause appreciable problems in spite of the rela-
tively low fault currents involved.
The sensitive E/F protection function has been included to complement
the main line protection function and cover the low E/F current range.
The protection processes the zero-sequence components 3I0 and 3U0.
B. Features
DC component filter
Harmonic filter
Directional measurement of zero-sequence components (derived
either internally or externally)
Current pick-up enabling level
Reference voltage enabling level
Permissive and blocking transfer tripping schemes
Echo logic for weak infeed and open circuit-breaker
Transient blocking logic for reversal of energy direction
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage
Current
II. Binary inputs:

External blocking
Receive
CB closed
VT supervision
Starting and tripping by the distance function

Pick-up
Trip
Fault forwards
Fault backwards
Transmit
Block distance protection receive
IV. Measurements:
Neutral voltage (3U0)
Neutral current (3I0)
Real power component of neutral power (3U0 x 3I0)
3-119
Apparent power component of neutral power

Fault direction (1 = forwards, -1 = backwards;
this measured variable only applies when the binary input 'CB
closed' is active)
This function does not transfer any tripping measurements via the IBB.
The measurements in the event list are not generated at the instant of
tripping, but when the enabling levels 'U-Setting' and 'I-Dir are exceeded'.
3-120
D. Sensitive E/F protection settings - EarthFltGnd2


Trip 00000000
Voltage Inp Chan CT/VT-Addr 0
Current Inp Chan CT/VT-Addr 0
V-Setting UN 0.200 0.003 0.100 0.001
I-Setting IN 0.100 0.100 1.000 0.01
Angle deg 60.0 -90.0 90.0 5
t Basic s 0.050 0.000 1.000 0.001
t Wait s 0.050 0.000 0.500 0.001
t Trans Block s 0.100 0.000 0.500 0.001
CT Neutral Line side (Select)
Communication Permissive (Select)
Mode
Send Mode MeasBwd (Select)
1 Channel off (Select)
Echo Mode off (Select)
Extern block Input BinaryAddr F
Receive BinaryAddr F
CB closed BinaryAddr T
VT Superv BinaryAddr F
Extern Start R BinaryAddr F
Extern Start S BinaryAddr F
Extern Start T BinaryAddr F
Extern Trip 3P BinaryAddr F
Extern Trip BinaryAddr F
Trip SignalAddr ER
Start SignalAddr ER
Meas Forward SignalAddr
Meas Backward SignalAddr
Send SignalAddr
Receive Inh. SignalAddr
Trip
VoltageInp
defines the VT input channel. All the VT input channels are
available for selection. If the neutral voltage is derived from the
three phase voltages, the first channel (R phase) of the group of
three must be selected.
3-121
Current Inp Chan

defines the CT input channel. All the CT input channels are
available for selection. If the neutral current is derived from the
three phase currents, the first channel (R phase) of the group of
three must be selected.
U-Setting
Reference voltage pick-up setting.
I-Setting
Current pick-up setting.
Angle
Characteristic angle setting.
t Basic
Basic time setting.
t Wait
Time allowed for a blocking signal to be transferred and for the
directional comparison to be made.
tTransBlk
Blocking time after a reversal of fault energy direction (transient
blocking).
CT neutral
Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current direction):
line (in accordance with the diagram in Fig. 12.4)
busbar (reversed connection)
ComMode
Kind of transfer tripping scheme:
permissive
blocking
SendMode
For what system condition a signal is transmitted in an intertripping
scheme:
forwards measurement (only permissive scheme)
non-directional (only blocking scheme)
backwards measurement (only blocking scheme)
1 Channel
Supplementary logic needed for coordinating E/F and distance
protections when using the same communications channel for a
permissive scheme.
off
on
3-122
Echo
Echo logic for weak infeed and open CB:
off echo logic disabled
Weak echo only for weak infeed
Bkr echo only when CB open
Weak & Bkr echo for weak infeed or CB open
Ext block
I/P for an external blocking signal.
F: enabled
T: disabled
Receive
PLC receive I/P.
F: no PLC receive signal
CB closed
CB position indicator I/P.
F: function disabled
T: function enabled
VT Superv
VT supervision I/P.
F: tripping enabled
T: tripping disabled
Ext Start R / S / T, Ext Trip 3P, Ext Trip

I/Ps for the distance function signals 'Start R', 'Start S', 'Start T',
'Trip CB 3P' and 'Trip CB' for coordinating operation.
F: not connected
Trip
Tripping signal O/P.
Start
O/P for signalling that the protection has picked up, i.e. the current
has exceeded the enabling setting ('I-Setting').
MeasFwd
O/P for signalling a fault in the forwards direction.
3-123
MeasBwd
O/P for signalling a fault in the backwards direction.
Send
PLC transmit signal.
RecveInh.
O/P for preventing the distance function from receiving a PLC
signal. (This is only effective when E/F and distance protections
use a common PLC channel, i.e. the parameter '1 Channel' is set
to 'on'.)
3-124
3.5.5.1. Coordination with the distance protection
Directional E/F function as ancillary to the distance function

Compared with integrated E/F and distance functions, the logic in an
independent E/F function needs certain starting and tripping signals
generated by the distance function and, providing the connections are
made as in Section 3.5.5.12., the E/F protection is blocked in the
following situations:
starting of more than one distance phase
three-phase tripping
any trip (single and three-phase), if '1 Channel' is set to 'on'
Scheme with independent communication channels

Apart from the added security of redundancy, independent communi-
cation channels enable different transfer tripping schemes to be used
for E/F and distance protections.
Providing the distance protection can detect a fault, it should trip before
the E/F protection picks up. For this reason, the basic operating time 't
Basic' for the E/F protection must be set longer than the longest
response time to be expected of the distance protection.
Scheme with a common communication channel

Where E/F and distance protections use the same communication
channel, the transfer tripping schemes must be either both permissive
or both blocking. In the case of permissive schemes, in which the dis-
tance protection operates with non-directional criteria at one end for a
weak infeed, a supplementary logic must be enabled by appropriately
setting the parameter '1 Channel'.
This supplementary logic interlocks the distance relays receive signal
at the end of the E/F functions basic time or when it picks up in the
backwards direction. To this end, the signal 'RecveInh' is connected to
the distance protection input 'ExtBlkHF'. Thus the communication
channel is initially available for use by the distance protection and only
made available to the E/F protection at the end of the basic time. The
basic time setting must allow adequate time for the distance protection
to detect and clear a fault if it can.
Independent directional E/F protection
The E/F function can also be applied as a completely independent
protection, but only in MV and HV systems.
The coordination of E/F and distance protections in this case is
achieved by appropriately setting the parameter 't Basic' .
3-125
If this time is too short, there is a likelihood that the E/F protection will
issue a three-phase trip before the circuit-breaker has opened for
faults that have been correctly detected by the distance protection.
The basic time of the E/F protection must therefore be long enough to
ensure that the distance protection can trip phase-selectively.
No facility is provided for using the distance relay starters to achieve
phase-selective tripping by the directional E/F function.
An independent directional E/F function requires its own
communication channel, which must be entirely independent of the
distance protection.
3.5.5.2. Choice of operating mode
It is assumed that the E/F protection settings at both ends of the pro-
tected line are the same. This applies especially to the basic time, the
blocking time, the transfer tripping scheme in use and options.
3.5.5.3. Choice of transfer tripping scheme
In the case of a permissive directional comparison scheme, the
amount of fault resistance, which can be detected reduces towards the
remote end of the line, because the enabling current must be
exceeded at both ends. Without additional precautions, the use of a
permissive scheme would be limited on lines with a weak infeed at one
end.
It was possible to eliminate this disadvantage by providing the
directional E/F protection with its own echo logic for weak infeeds that
can be switched in and out as required.
NOTICE: Note that the protection only operates in a comparison

mode during the comparison time (1 s) and is blocked at the end of
this time. The comparison time starts at the end of the basic time.
On the other hand, a directional comparison scheme using a blocking

signal is able to detect high-resistance E/Fs along the whole length of
the line, because the protection at the strong infeed end is always able
to trip although the current at the weak infeed end does not reach the
enabling level.
3-126
Permissive directional comparison scheme

In this scheme, each of the protection functions has to receive a signal
from the opposite end of line in order to be able to trip. A protection
function sends a permissive signal when its current exceeds the
enabling level 'I setting', the basic time 't Basic' has expired and the
fault detected is in the forwards direction.
Options:
Echo 'Bkr':
Providing this parameter is active, a permissive signal (echo) is
sent to the opposite end of the line, if the local circuit-breaker is
open and a signal is received. Tripping is thus possible at the
infeed end.
The duration of the echo signal is limited to 150 ms.
Non-directional echo 'Weak infeed':
If the directional E/F function at the weak infeed end of a line
cannot measure, because the reference voltage is too low or the
current does not reach the enabling level, a signal is returned to
the opposite end of the line if one is received.
This enables tripping to take place at the end with the stronger
infeed.
Start tBasic tBasic Start

I-Setting I-Setting
Send Send
& &
MeasFwd MeasFwd
Receive Receive
& &
Rel. 1 Rel. 2
A1 A2
HEST 925 020 C
Fig. 3.27 Principle of a permissive directional comparison scheme
where:
Start : current higher than the enabling level 'I setting'
t Basic : basic time
MeasFwd : fault in forwards direction
3-127
Tx: I-setting * MeasFwd * t Basic

I0 T: I-setting * MeasFwd * t Basic * Rx
TB: MeasBwd' + t TransBlk
I set
<Tx: MeasBwd * Rx>

I dir
Iasymm
<Tx: MeasBwd * Rx>
U set
U0
Basic operation mode
Non-directional echo and "Transient Blocking"
Non-directional echo HEST 925 022 C
Fig. 3.28 Operation of a permissive directional comparison

scheme
where:
<...> : optional function
Rx : receive
MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction including 'Transient
blocking'
MeasBwd' : fault in backwards direction
I dir : current enable for directional measurement
(= 0.7 I-Setting)
I-Setting : current enabling level
Iasymm : asymmetrical currents under normal load conditions
Tx : send
T : trip
TB : transient blocking
t TransBlk : blocking time
t Wait : waiting time
U-Setting : reference voltage
3-128
Blocking directional comparison scheme

Providing the conditions for directional measurement are fulfilled i.e.
the current higher than 'I dir' and the voltage higher than its enabling
level 'U-Setting', a protection function transmits a blocking signal to the
remote station immediately it detects a fault in the backwards direction.
Note: I dir = 0.7 I-Setting
A protection function measuring a fault in the direction of the protected
line trips at the end of the adjustable waiting time 't Wait', providing a
blocking signal is not received beforehand.
Options:
SendMode: 'non-directional'
A blocking signal is transmitted in this mode, if the current is higher
than 'I dir', the basic time has expired and no fault is detected in
the forwards direction (including situations when a direction measure-
ment is impossible, because 3U0 < U- Setting).
tBasic tBasic
I-dir I-dir
tBasic & & tBasic
I-Setting I-Setting
Send Send
MeasBwd MeasBwd
MeasFwd Receive Receive MeasFwd
& &
tWait tWait
Rel. 1 Rel. 2
A1 A2
HEST 925 021 C
Fig. 3.29 Principle of a blocking directional comparison scheme
where:
I-Setting
: current enabling level
I-dir : current enable for directional measurement
(= 0,7 I-Setting)
t Wait : waiting time
MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction
3-129
Tx: I dir * MeasBwd * t Basic

I0 <Tx: I dir *
MeasFwd * t
<+I dir * MeasFwd * t Basic>
T: I set * MeasFwd * t Basic * Rx * t Wait
I set
Tx: I dir * MeasBwd * t Basic
<+I dir * MeasFwd * t Basic>

I dir
Iasymm
U set
U0
Basic operation mode
Non-directional transmission HEST 925 023 C
Fig. 3.30 Operation of a directional comparison blocking scheme

(for the legend, see after Fig. 3.28)
3.5.5.4. Setting the enabling pick-up levels

The setting of the current enabling 'I dir' must take account of the zero-
sequence component in normal operation arising from system asym-
metries.
The pick-up setting for the voltage enabling signal 'U-Setting' is deter-
mined by the level of asymmetries on the secondary side (VT toler-
ances, asymmetrical burdens etc.).
The ability to read voltage and current values on the relay is a useful
aid for determining these settings.
For example, if the enabling current setting 'I-Setting' is too low, the
pick-up signal lights continuously (current circuit enabled).
Since an E/F causes asymmetrical voltages in the vicinity of the fault,
the current flowing via the system capacitances also has a zero-
sequence component. A capacitive current of this kind on a long line
lies within the setting range of the sensitive E/F protection function.
The pick-up level 'I dir' of the current circuit for the directional measure-
ment has a fixed setting of 0.7 'I set' to take account of influences
such as CT errors and the capacitive charging currents of the line.
The following procedure is recommended for setting the pick-up levels:
3-130
The enabling current for the directional measurement must be set

to at least twice the maximum possible asymmetrical current,
which can occur in normal operation.
Iasymm
I - Setting = 2.0
IN
The voltage pick-up must be set to 1.6 times the level of the
spurious voltages, which can occur due to asymmetries in the VT
secondary circuit.
Usec.asymm
U - Setting = 1.6
UN
where:
U-Setting : setting of the enabling voltage for the directional
measurement
Usec.asymm : voltage component 3 U0 caused by asymmetries in the
VT secondary circuit (e.g. VT errors)
UN : 100 V or 200 V according to VT unit in use
I-Setting : setting of the enabling current
Iasymm : current component 3I0 caused by asymmetrical load
currents
IN : primary CT rated current.
3.5.5.5. Setting the characteristic angle 'Angle'

The line marking the reversal of direction lies at +90 in relation to the
reference voltage.
In order to achieve symmetrical operation of the directional element in
spite of this, the characteristic angle should equal that of the zero-
sequence impedance of the source.
3.5.5.6. Setting the basic time 't Basic'

The basic time is the period between pick-up of the protection and the
earliest possible trip.
The operation of the protection function can be coordinated with others
on the same line by judiciously setting the basic time.
The basic time is also used to achieve coordination between the E/F
function (three-phase tripping) and the distance function (phase-
selective tripping).The E/F protection is delayed to allow time for the
distance protection to respond to a fault if it can.
3-131
The basic time is normally set to:

t Basic > max. tripping time of the phase-selective distance
protection (taking account of signal transmission time
and sequential tripping)
+ CB operating time
+ aux. contact time
(I/P 'CB closed')
+ safety margin
The sum of these times is usually about 100 to 200 ms.
3.5.5.7. Circuit-breaker delay
To avoid operation of the enabling current detector during the transient
oscillations, which occur following the closing of the circuit-breaker, it
is blocked for 50 ms upon receiving the corresponding signal from the
CB.
3.5.5.8. The comparison time 't comp'
The comparison time is the time allowed for the directional comparison
to be made and is therefore dependent on the type of transfer tripping
scheme.
The comparison time has a fixed setting of 1 s.
3.5.5.9. Setting the waiting time 't Wait'
The waiting time is also started at the end of the basic time, but is only
effective in a blocking scheme.
In a blocking scheme, tripping is delayed by the setting of 't Wait' to
allow time for the protection in the opposite station to decide on the
direction of the fault and to transmit a corresponding blocking signal if
necessary.
't Wait' should be set at least as long as the measuring time (about
30 ms) plus the longest possible signal transmission time.
3.5.5.10. Setting the transient blocking time 't TransBlk'

The protection function includes a 'transient blocking logic' to prevent
any mal-operation during the course of tripping a fault or auto-reclo-
sure on double-circuit lines, when there is a likelihood of the flow of
energy reversing direction. The time setting can be selected in a wide
range to suit the prevailing conditions.
For example, after a fault has been detected in the backwards direc-
tion, a second directional decision in the forwards direction is inhibited
for the setting of 't TransBlk' .
The time chosen is determined largely by the time required for the
measurement to reset and the transfer tripping scheme in use.
The recommended setting is 60 ms plus the reset time of the com-
munication channel.
3-132
3.5.5.11. CT/VT inputs of the function

Where the zero-sequence components of the voltages and the cur-
rents are derived internally, the CT and VT inputs must be connected
precisely as shown in the wiring diagram. The neutral of the CTs in this
case is formed on the line side and the parameter 'CT neutral' must be
set to 'line side' .
3.5.5.12. Binary inputs of the function
Ext. block
Exciting the 'Ext. block' I/P disables the entire protection function.
Receive
The signal transmitted by the protection in the opposite station is con-
nected to this I/P.
CB closed
The 'CB closed' I/P is intended for the position indicator signal from the
circuit-breaker and has a fixed pick-up delay of 50 ms. The protection
function is only enabled when this signal is received to confirm that the
CB is closed. The corresponding auxiliary contacts for the three
phases must be connected in series to ensure that the protection does
not operate during single-phase reclosure.
The echo logic is enabled 100 ms after the circuit-breaker is opened.
VT Supervision
The 'VT Superv' I/P is needed to block the echo logic. It can be excited
either by the 'VTSup' signal from the internal distance protection func-
tion or an auxiliary contact on the m.c.b. via a binary I/P.
If this I/P is not needed, it must be set to 'F'.
Ext Start R / S / T, Ext Trip 3P, Ext Trip

These I/Ps are for coordinating operation with the distance protection
function. To them are connected the distance function signals 'Start R',
'Start S', 'Start T', 'Trip CB 3P' and 'Trip CB'.
They must be set to 'F' if an independent directional E/F scheme is in
use.
3-133
3.5.5.13. Outputs
Trip
There are two 'Trip' signals, one for energising the tripping relay via
the tripping logic and the other for controlling LEDs and signalling
contacts.
Start
An active 'Start' O/P signals that the zero-sequence current has
exceeded the pick-up setting 'I-Setting'. This signal is only generated
providing the function is not blocked.
MeasFwd
'MeasFwd' is active when the measuring element detects a fault in the
forwards direction, i.e. the settings of 'I dir' and 'U setting' have been
exceeded.
MeasBwd
'MeasBwd' is active when the measuring element detects a fault in the
backwards direction, i.e. the settings of 'I dir' and 'U setting' have been
exceeded.
Send
The 'Send' O/P is the signal sent to the other end of the line.
Receive Inhibit
The 'Recve Inh' signal prevents the distance function from receiving a
PLC signal (see Section 3.5.5.1.). It is only generated when the parameter
'1 Channel' is set, the basic time has expired or the E/F protection
picks up for a reverse fault.
The signal 'Recve Inh' must be connected to the distance function I/P
'ExtBlkHF'.
3-134
3.5.6. Inverse definite minimum time earth fault overcurrent function

(I0-Invers)
A. Application
Overcurrent function with IDMT characteristic. A typical application is
as back-up for the E/F protection function, in which case it measures
3 I0 either supplied from an external source or internally derived.
B. Features
Tripping characteristic according to British Standard 142
(see Fig. 3.31):
c = 0.02 : normal inverse
c=1 : very inverse and long time earth fault
c=2 : extremely inverse
DC component filter
Harmonic filter
External 3 I0 signal or 3 I0 internally derived from the three phase
currents
Wider setting range than specified in BS 142
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Starting
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Neutral current
3-135
D. IDMT function settings - I0-Invers


Trip 00000000
c-Setting Very Inv. (Select)
k1-Setting s 13.50 0.01 200.0 0.01
I-Start IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
Min. Tripping Time s 0.0 0.0 10.0 0.1
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
Number Of Phases 1 Ph (Select)
Current Inp. Chan. CT/VT-Addr 0
Block Input BinaryAddr F
Trip Signal SignalAddr ER
Start Signal SignalAddr ER
Trip
c-Setting
Setting for the exponential factor determining the shape of the
operating characteristic according to BS 142 or for selecting the
RXIDG characteristic.
k1-Setting
Constant determining the tripping characteristic.
I-Start
Pick-up setting (initiates the tripping characteristic).
t-min
Definite minimum time of the tripping characteristic.
IB-Setting
Reference current to take account of discrepancies with respect to IN.
NrOfPhases
Number of phases evaluated for measurement:
1 : neutral current direct from an CT input
3 : neutral current derived internally from the three phases
Current Inp Chan
defines the CT input channel. All the current channels are available
for selection. In the case of a three-phase measurement, the first
channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected.
3-136
BlockInp
I/P for the external blocking signal.
F: unused
T: function always blocked
Trip
Tripping signal.
Start
Pick-up signal.
3-137
Protection function enable 'I-Start'

The IDMT function starts to run when the current applied to the
function exceeds the setting 'I-Start'. 'I-Start' is normally set to 1.1 IB.
Choice of tripping characteristic 'c'

The shape of the IDMT characteristic is determined by the constant 'c'.
The standard IDMT characteristics according to BS 142 are:
'normal inverse' : c = 0.02
'very inverse' and 'long time earth fault' : c = 1.00
'extremely inverse' : c = 2.00
Fig. 3.31 IDMT tripping characteristic for 'I0-Invers' (I = 3 I0)
'c-Setting' can also be set to 'RXIDG', in which case the functions

inverse characteristic corresponds to that of the relay Type RXIDG:
t [s] = 5.8 1.35 In (I/IB)
The parameter 'k1-Setting' has no influence in this case.
3-138
Time multiplier 'k1-Setting'

Discriminative operation of the relays along a line is achieved by time-
grading. Assuming all the relays to be set to the same IB, this involves
setting the time multiplier in equal steps (grading time), increasing from
the load towards the source.
For example, in the case of the 'very inverse' characteristic, the
constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is then
given by
k1
t=
3I0
1
IB
Assuming the grading time of the protection functions to be 0.5 s at

6 IB, the settings of k1 according to the formula
k1 = 5 t
for operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s become:
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2.5 12.5
The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows:

'normal inverse' : k1 = 0.14 s
'very inverse' : k1 = 13.5 s
'extremely inverse' : k1 = 80 s
'long time earth fault' : k1 = 120 s
Definite minimum time 't-min'

Where the IDMT function is being applied as back-up protection for a
directional E/F protection, the definite minimum time 't-min' must be set
as follows
t-min = t Basic + t comp
t Basic = basic time of the E/F function
t comp = comparison time of the E/F function (1 s)
3-139
Interconnections between IDMT and directional E/F functions

The IDMT protection is non-directional.
Directional operation can, however, be achieved by linking the direc-
tional signal ('MeasFwd', i.e. fault in forwards direction) from the E/F
protection to the blocking I/P of the IDMT function. The I/P must be
inverted so that blocking of the IDMT function is cancelled by an active
forwards signal.
When using this arrangement, it must be noted that, when 'MeasFwd'
does not pick up, the IDMT function cannot trip when the reference
voltage of the E/F function is too low. If tripping is required for this
case, the directional E/F signal 'MeasBwd' must be applied to the
blocking input.
Applications with single-phase reclosure

In schemes involving single-phase reclosure, the 'I0-Invers' function
has to be blocked for the time that one pole of a circuit-breakers is
open if the minimum tripping time 'tmin' is set less than the single-
phase dead time. This avoids false three-phase tripping due to the
load currents in the healthy phases.
Typical settings:
IB to be calculated
I-Start 1.1 IB
c-Setting depends on the protected unit
k1-Setting to be calculated
t-min 0.00
3-140
3.5.7. Definite time over and undercurrent (Current-DT)
A. Application
General purpose current function (over and under) for
phase fault protection
back-up protection
ground fault protection
or for monitoring a current minimum.
B. Features
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Single or three-phase measurement
Maximum respectively minimum value detection in the three-phase
mode
Detection of inrush currents
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
3-141
D. Definite time current function settings - Current-DT


Trip 00000000
Delay s 01.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
I Setting IN 02.00 0.02 20.00 0.01
Max / Min Max (1ph) (Select)
Current Inp. Chan CT/VT-Addr 0
Trip
defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping O/P of the
function (matrix tripping logic).
Delay
Time between the function picking up and tripping.
I Setting
Pick-up current setting.
Forbidden settings:
> 1.6 IN when supplied from metering cores
< 0.2 IN when supplied from protection cores
Max / Min
defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent or with inrush
blocking. Settings:
Min (3ph): Undercurrent.
Three-phase functions detect the highest
phase current.
Not permitted for single-phase functions.
Min (1ph): Undercurrent.
Three-phase functions detect the lowest
phase current.
Max (3ph): Overcurrent.
phase current.
Max (1ph): Overcurrent.
phase current.
Max-Inrush: Blocks during inrush currents if one phase
exceeds setting.
3-142
Number Of Phases
defines whether single or three-phase measurement.
Current Inp. Chan
defines the CT input channel. All current I/Ps may be selected. In
the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase)
of the group of three selected must be specified.
Block Input
I/P for blocking the function.
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Start Signal
Pick-up signal.
3-143
Settings:
Setting I Setting
Delay Delay
Over or undercurrent Max / Min
Number of phases Number Of Phases
The definite time current function protects transformers, primary
equipment of a captive network, and generators, which can cause an
overcurrent, such as an overload, short circuit and ground fault. The
filters at the measurement input damp the DC component of the
harmonics, thereby the protection reacts only on the fundamental
harmonics.
The protection can be used for sensitive current measurements e.g.
when the earth fault current is small.
Together with an external high impedance protection circuit, this
function can be used as a 'restricted earthfault protection (REF)'.
Setting I-Setting
The current setting 'I-Setting' must be sufficiently high on the one hand
to avoid any risk of false tripping or false signals under normal load
conditions, but should be low enough on the other to detect the lowest
fault current that can occur. The margin that has to be allowed
between the maximum short-time load current and the setting must
take account of:
the tolerance on the current setting
the reset ratio
The maximum short-time load current has to be determined according
to the power system conditions and must take switching operations
and load surges into account.
I-Setting
IN
Delay
HEST 905 010 C
Fig. 3.32 Operating characteristic of the definite time overcurrent

function
Compensating any difference between the rated currents of CT IN1
and protected unit IGN is recommended. This is achieved with the aid
3-144
of the reference value of the A/D channel or by correcting the over-

current setting.
For example, for IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting for a pick-
up current of 1.5 IGN = 1200 A would have to be
I 800 A
1.5 GN = 1.5 = 1.2
IN1 1000 A
Current Inp. Chan.

An interposing CT in the input is essential for current settings lower
than < 0.2 IN.
Delay
The delay is used to achieve discrimination of the overcurrent function.
It is set according to the grading table for all the overcurrent units on
the power system. The zone of protection of our overcurrent function
extends to the location of the next downstream overcurrent relay.
Should the downstream relay fail to clear a fault, the overcurrent
function trips slightly later as a back-up protection.
Setting Max / Min

This parameter enables the following operating modes to be selected:
Min (3ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current also falls
below the setting. This setting is not permitted for
single-phase measurement.
Min (1ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current falls
below the setting.
Max (3ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current also
exceeds the setting. This setting is not permitted
for single-phase measurement.
Max (1ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current exceeds
the setting.
Max-Inrush: Blocking of inrush currents when a phase current
exceeds the setting.
Operation of the inrush blocking feature (parameter MaxMin set
to 'Max-Inrush')
The inrush detector picks up and blocks operation of the function when
the amplitude of the fundamental component of the current exceeds
the setting of the current function.
3-145
The inrush detector is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic

component of the current I2h in relation to the fundamental frequency
component I1h (evaluation of the amplitudes).
The output of the function is disabled when the ratio I2h/I1h exceeds
10 % and enabled again when it falls below 8 %.
There is no setting for the peak value of I2h/I1h.
The function can operate with inrush blocking in both the single and
three-phase mode (parameter 'Number Of Phases').
In the three-phase mode, the phase used for evaluation is the one with
the highest amplitude at rated frequency (pick-up and inrush detec-
tion).
3-146
3.5.8. Peak value overcurrent (Current-Inst)
A. Application
General current monitoring with instantaneous response (over and
undercurrent)
Current monitoring where insensitivity to frequency is required
(over and undercurrent).
B. Features
Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and largely
independent of frequency
Stores the peak value following pick-up
No suppression of DC component
No suppression of harmonics
Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode
Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude (only available if function trips)
3-147
D. Peak value current function settings - Current-Inst


Trip 00000000
Delay s 0.01 0.00 60.00 0.01
I Setting IN 4.0 0.1 20 0.1
Min. Frequency Hz 40 2 50 1
Max / Min Max (Select)
Trip
defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the
function (matrix).
Delay
I Setting
Setting restrictions:
Min. Frequency
defines the minimum frequency for which measurement is
required.
Setting restriction:
< 40 Hz when supplied from metering cores
Number Of Phases
Current Inp. Chan.
defines the CT input channel.
All current inputs may be selected.
In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel
(R phase) of the group of three selected must be specified.
Block Input
Binary address used as blocking input.
F: not blocked
T: blocked
xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-148
Max / Min
defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent. Settings:
Max: overcurrent
Min: undercurrent
Trip Signal
Output for signalling tripping.
Start Signal
Output for signalling pick-up.
3-149
Settings:
Current pick-up I Setting
Delay Delay
Minimum frequency Min. Frequency
Over or undercurrent Max / Min
The instantaneous overcurrent function is a high-speed protection,
which operates in a wide frequency range. It is intended primarily for
two applications.
A protection measuring peak value is necessary for protecting units,
for which the influence of DC component and harmonics may not be
neglected. This is especially the case where rectifiers with semi-
conductors are involved.
The measuring principle of the function is relatively insensitive to fre-
quency and operates in a range extending from 4 to 120 % of rated
frequency. It is therefore able to protect units with synchronous starting
equipment during the starting sequence before reaching system
frequency (e.g. gas turbine sets with solid-state starters).
The function detects when the instantaneous value of the input current
exceeds the peak value corresponding to the setting. For example, for
a setting of 10 IN, it will pick up when the input current exceeds
10 2 IN = 14.14 IN (see Fig. 3.33).
A fault current of 6 1.8 2 IN = 15.27 IN could reach this level as a
consequence of a DC component.
The minimum frequency must be entered for every application, be-
cause it determines the reset time. A low minimum frequency means a
long reset delay and since a good protection is expected to have a
quick response, the reset time should be as short as possible, i.e. the
minimum frequency setting should not be lower than absolutely neces-
sary.
3-150
i 15
IN 14.14
10
Setting current
10 I N
0 t
Output signal
0 t
HEST 905 028 C
Fig. 3.33 Operation of the peak value overcurrent function
Typical settings:
a) Peak value phase fault protection
I-Setting according to application
Delay 0.01 s
f-min 40 Hz
b) Phase fault protection of a machine with synchronous starter

during start-up
I-Setting 1.5 IN
Delay 5s
f-min 2 Hz
3-151
3-152
3.5.9. Inverse time overcurrent (Current-Inv)
A. Application
Overcurrent function with time delay inversely proportional to the
current and definite minimum tripping time (IDMT).
B. Features
Operating characteristics (see Fig. 3.34) according to British
Standard 142:
c = 0.02 : normal inverse
c=1 : very inverse and long time earth fault
c=2 : extremely inverse
Detection of the highest phase value in the three-phase mode
Wider setting range than specified in BS 142
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
3-153
D. Inverse time overcurrent settings - Current-Inv


Trip 00000000
c-Setting 1.00 (Select)
k1-Setting s 013.5 0.01 200.0 0.01
I-Start IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
t-min s 0 0.0 10.0 0.1
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
Trip
c-Setting
Setting for the exponential factor determining the shape of the
operating characteristic according to BS 142 or for selecting the
RXIDG characteristic.
k1-Setting
Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic (time
grading).
I-Start
Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes effective.
t-min
Definite minimum tripping time.
Number Of Phases
defines the number of phases measured.
Current Inp. Chan.
defines the CT input channel. All current I/Ps may be selected. In
the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase)
of the group of three selected must be specified.
IB-Setting
Base current for taking account of differences of rated current IN.
3-154
Block Input
defines the input for an external blocking signal.
F: not used
T: function always blocked
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Start Signal
Pick-up signal.
3-155
Settings:
Base current IB-Setting
Characteristic enabling current I-Start
Type of characteristic c-Setting
Multiplier k1-Setting
The IDMT overcurrent function is used to protect transformers, feeders
and loads of the auxiliaries supply system against phase and earth
faults. The function responds largely only to the fundamental compo-
nent of the fault current.
Base current 'IB-Setting'

An IDMT relay does not have a fixed current setting above which it
operates and below which it does not, as does a definite time-over-
current relay. Instead, its operating characteristic is chosen such that it
is always above the load current. To this end, the relay has a reference
current IB that is set the same as the load current of the protected unit
IB1. The reference current IB determines the relative position of the
relay characteristic, which is enabled when the current exceeds the
reference current by a given amount ('I-Start'). By setting the reference
current IB to equal the load current of the protected unit IB1 instead of
its rated current, for
IB1 < IN of the protected unit : the protection is more sensitive
IB1 > IN of the protected unit : the protection permits maxi
mum utilisation of the thermal
capability of the protected unit
Example:
Load current of protected unit IB1 = 800 A
CT rated current IN1 = 1000 A
IN2 = 5A
Relay rated current IN = 5A
Relay reference current 'IB-Setting':
I 5A
IB = IB1 N2 = 800 A =4A
IN1 1000 A
Setting:
IB 4 A
= = 0 .8
IN 5 A
An alternative is to adjust the position of the IDMT characteristic to

match the rated load of the protected unit and set the reference current
to its rated current instead of its load current.
3-156
Enabling the characteristic 'I-Start'

The IDMT characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds the
setting 'I-Start'. A typical setting for 'I-Start' is 1.1 IB.
Choice of characteristic 'c-Setting'

The constant 'c-Setting' determines the shape of the IDMT charac-
teristic.
The settings for the standard characteristics according to BS 142 are:
Fig. 3.34 Operating characteristic of the IDMT overcurrent

function
'c-Setting' can also be set to 'RXIDG', in which case the functions

inverse characteristic corresponds to that of the relay Type RXIDG:
t [s] = 5.8 1.35 In (I / IB)
The parameter 'k1-Setting' has no influence in this case.
Multiplier 'k1-Setting'
The multiplier 'k1-Setting' enables the IDMT characteristic chosen by
the setting of parameter c to be shifted without changing its shape.
3-157
This is used for grading the operating times of a series of IDMT relays
along a line to achieve discrimination.
constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is given
by the equation
k1
t=
I
1
IB
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is

required, the factor k1 for each of the relays is given by
k1 = 5 t
This produces for operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s the following
settings for k1:
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2.5 12.5

Typical settings:
IB-Setting corresponding to load current of the protected unit
I-Start 1.1 IB
c-Setting according to desired characteristic for the protected unit
k1-Setting according to the time grading calculation
t-min 0.00
3-158
3.5.10. Directional definite time overcurrent protection

(DirCurrentDT)
A. Application
Directional overcurrent function for
detecting phase faults on ring lines
detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at one end
backup protection for a distance protection scheme
B. Features
Directionally sensitive three-phase phase fault protection
Voltage memory feature for close faults
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking
PLC receive

Start
Start R
Start S
Start T
Backwards measurement
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
of the three phase currents (IR, IS, IT)
Active power
A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction
(IR * UST, IS * UTR, IT * URS)
Voltage amplitude
Amplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages
(UST, UTR, URS)
3-159
D. Directional overcurrent settings - DirCurrentDT


Trip 00000000
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr 0
VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr 0
I-Setting IN 2.00 0.2 20.0 0.01
Angle Deg 45 -180 +180 15
Delay s 1.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01
MemDirMode Trip (Select)
MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01
Receive BinaryAddr T
MeasFwd SignalAddr ER
MeasBwd SignalAddr ER
Trip
defines the tripping channel activated by the functions tripping
output (matrix tripping logic).
CurrentInp
defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set
and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must
be specified.
VoltageInp
defines the VT input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be set
be specified.
I-Setting
Pick-up setting for tripping.
3-160
Angle
Characteristic angle.
Delay
Delay between pick-up and tripping.
tWait
Time allowed for the directional decision to be received from the
opposite end in a blocking scheme.
MemDirMode
determines the response of the protection after the time set for
memorising power direction:
trip
block
MemDuration
Time during which the power direction last determined remains
valid.
Receive
Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:
T: not used
Ext Block
F: not blocked
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Start Signal
Pick-up signal.
Start R
R phase pick-up signal.
Start S
S phase pick-up signal.
Start T
T phase pick-up signal.
MeasFwd
signals measurement in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd
signals measurement in the backwards direction.
3-161
Settings:
Pick-up current I-Setting
Delay Delay
Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait
Response at the end of the
memorised power direction time MemDirMode
Time during which the memorised
direction is valid MemDuration
Pick-up value I-Setting

'I-Setting' must be chosen high enough to prevent false tripping or
alarms from taking place and low enough to reliably detect the mini-
mum fault current. The setting must be sufficiently above the maximum
transient load current and allow for:
CT and relay inaccuracies
the reset ratio
The maximum transient load current has to be determined according
to the power system operating conditions and take account of switch-
ing operations and load surges.
I-Setting
IN
Delay
HEST 905 010 C
Fig. 3.35 Operating characteristic of the definite time overcurrent

detector
3-162
Where the rated CT current IN1 differs from the rated current IGN of the
protected unit, compensating the measurement to achieve a match is
recommended. This is done by correcting either the reference value of
the A/D input or the setting.
For example, assuming IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting to
pick up at 1.5 IGN = 1200 A would be
IGN 800 A
1.5 = 1.5 = 1 .2
IN1 1000 A
Characteristic angle
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an additional
criterion for preserving discrimination compared with non-directional
overcurrent protection. The directional sensitivity is 180 in relation to
the reference voltage. This is illustrated in the following diagrams. The
angles given apply for connection according to the connections in
Chapter 12.
y
IR vit
iti
L ns
se
.
UR IR ax
M
UTR URS
UT US
Restraint: = 45
cos (- ) = neg.
U ST U ST
Operation:
cos ( - ) = pos.
a) b)
L
HEST 005 001 C
' = phase-angle between current and voltage

(positive angle)
= Characteristic angle
L = Border line between operating and restraint areas
a) Definition of current b) Operating characteristic

and voltage
Fig. 3.36 Vector diagram for a fault in the forwards direction on

R phase
3-163
The function determines the power direction by measuring the phase-

angle of the current in relation to the opposite phase-to-phase voltage.
Which current is compared with which voltage can be seen from the
following table.
Current input Phase-to-neutral voltage Calculated voltage

IR US, UT UST = US - UT
IS UT, UR UTR = UT - UR
IT UR, US URS = UR - US
The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group of

connection of the VTs. For example, the phase-to-phase values are
calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), while the input
voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT type UTD).
Delay
The delay enables the protection to be graded with other time-
overcurrent relays to achieve discrimination. Its setting is thus chosen
in relation to the timer settings of upstream and downstream protective
devices. The zone of protection covered by this overcurrent protection
extends to the next overcurrent protection device.
Should in the event of a fault in the next downstream zone, the
protection for that zone fail, this protection function takes over after the
time set for 'Delay' and clears the fault as backup.
3-164
I
R Start R
I>
Meas Fwd
Forwards meas. R
U
ST &
1 & t Trip
1
&
Backwards meas. R
Receive
td
I
S Start S
I>
Forwards meas. S
U
TR &
Backwards meas. S Meas Bwd

& 1
I
T Start T
I>
Forwards meas. T
U
RS & Start
1
Backwards meas. T
&
Fig. 3.37 Block diagram

td = 'Delay'
t = 'tWait'
Time allowed for a signal to be received

Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals, each
can send a signal from its 'MeasBwd' output to the 'Receive' input of
the function at the opposite end of the line (e.g. via a PLC channel)
when it is measuring a fault in the reverse direction. This signal
prevents the respective directional overcurrent function from tripping,
because the fault cannot be in the zone between them. The functions
therefore have to allow time, i.e. the 'wait time', for the signal from the
opposite line terminal to be received. If none is received within 'tWait',
the circuit-breakers are tripped at both ends.
The time set for 'Delay' acts in this kind of scheme as a backup, which
does not rely on the communication channel. Thus when the 'Receive'
input is being used, the setting for 'Delay' must be longer than the
setting for 'tWait':
'Delay' > 'tWait'
Response after decay of the memorised voltage

The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to almost
zero for a close fault and make determining direction unreliable. For
3-165
this reason, the function includes a voltage memory feature and for the
first 200 milliseconds after the incidence of an overcurrent, the voltage
measured immediately before the fault is used as reference to
determine fault direction.
After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustable period
(see next paragraph).
'MemDirMode' provides facility for setting how the protection must
respond after this time or in the event that the circuit-breaker is closed
onto a fault and no voltage could be memorised beforehand. The two
possible settings are the protection can trip or it can block.
Time during which the memorised direction is valid

The 'MemDuration' setting determines how long the last valid direction
measurement shall be used. The setting should be as short as
possible (200 ms) when the function is being used as backup for a
distance function in an HV power system, because an actually
measured voltage is only available during this time and therefore it is
only possible to detect a reversal of direction during this time. For
longer settings, the last valid power direction is used instead of the
actually memorised voltage.
3-166
3.5.11. Directional inverse time overcurrent protection

(DirCurrentInv)
A. Application
Directional overcurrent function for
detecting phase faults on ring lines
detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at one end
backup protection for a distance protection scheme
B. Features
Directionally sensitive three-phase phase fault protection
Operating characteristics (see Fig. 3.38) according to British
Standard BS142:
c = 0.02: normal inverse
c = 1: very inverse und long time earth fault
c = 2: extremely inverse
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking
PLC receive

Start
Start R
Start S
Start T
Backwards measurement
Tripping
3-167
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
of the three phase currents (IR, IS, IT)
Active power
A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction
(IR * UST, IS * UTR, IT * URS)
Voltage amplitude
Amplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages
(UST, UTR, URS)
3-168
D. Directional overcurrent settings - DirCurrentInv


Trip 00000000
I-Start IN 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
Angle Deg 45 -180 +180 15
c-Setting 1.00 (Select)
k1-Setting s 13.50 0.01 200.00 0.01
t-min s 0.0 0.0 10.00 0.01
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01
MemDirMode Trip (Select)
MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01
Receive BinaryAddr T
Ext Block BinaryAddr F
MeasFwd SignalAddr ER
MeasBwd SignalAddr ER
Trip
output (matrix tripping logic).
CurrentInp
defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set
be specified.
VoltageInp
defines the VT voltage input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be
set and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected
must be specified.
3-169
I-Start
Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes effective.
Angle
Characteristic angle.
c-Setting
Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating
characteristic according to BS 142.
k1-Setting
Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic.
t-min
Definite minimum operating time, operating characteristic constant.
IB-Setting
Base current for taking account of differences of rated current IN.
tWait
Time allowed for the directional decision to be received.
MemDirMode
determines the response of the protection after the time set for
memorising power direction:
trip
block
MemDuration
Time during which the power direction last determined remains
valid.
Receive
Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:
T: not used
Ext Block
F: not blocked
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Start Signal
Pick-up signal.
Start R
R phase pick-up signal.
Start S
S phase pick-up signal.
Start T
T phase pick-up signal.
3-170
MeasFwd
signals measurement in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd
signals measurement in the backwards direction.
3-171
Settings:
Base current IB-Setting
Characteristic enabling current I-Start
Type of characteristic c-Setting
Delay Delay
Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait
Response at the end of the
memorised power direction time MemDirMode
Time during which the memorised
direction is valid MemDuration
Base current 'IB-Setting'

A tripping current is not set on an IDMT overcurrent function as it is on
a definite time overcurrent function. Instead the position of the charac-
teristic is chosen such that it is above the load current. The function,
however, has a 'base current' setting which is set to the full load cur-
rent IB1 of the protected unit. The base current setting determines the
position of the basic characteristic. The characteristic is enabled when
the base current is exceeded by a preset amount (I-Start). The adjust-
ment of the base current IB to the load current IB1 of the protected unit
instead of its rated current enables for
IB1 < rated current of prot. unit : more sensitive protection
IB1 > rated current of prot. unit : maximum utilisation of the
thermal capability of the
protected unit
Example:
Load current of the protected unit IB1 = 800 A
C.t rated current IN1 = 1000 A
IN2 = 5A
Protection rated current IN = 5A
Protection base current
IN2 5A
IB = IB1 = 800 A = 4A
IN1 1000 A
Setting
IB 4 A
= = 0 .8 A
IN 5 A
An alternative is to adjust the position of the IDMT characteristic to
match the rated load of the protected unit and set the base current to
its rated current instead of its load current.
3-172
Enabling the characteristic 'I-Start'

The IDMT characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds the
setting 'I-Start'. A typical setting for 'I-Start' is 1.1 IB.
Choice of characteristic 'c-Setting'

The constant 'c-Setting' determines the shape of the IDMT char-
acteristic.
The settings for the standard characteristics according to BS 142 are:
Fig. 3.38 Operating characteristic of the directional IDMT

overcurrent function
Multiplier 'k1-Setting'
The multiplier 'k1-Setting' enables the IDMT characteristic chosen by
the setting of parameter c to be shifted without changing its shape.
This is used for grading the operating times of a series of IDMT relays
along a line to achieve discrimination.
constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is given
by the equation
k1
t=
I
1
IB
3-173
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is

required, the factor k1 for each of the relays is given by
k1 = 5 t
This produces for operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s the following
settings for k1:
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2.5 12.5

3-174
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an additional
criterion for preserving discrimination compared with non-directional
overcurrent protection. The directional sensitivity is 180 in relation to
the reference voltage. This is illustrated in the following diagrams. The
Chapter 12.
y
IR vit
iti
L ns
e
.s
UR IR ax
M
UTR URS
UT US
Restraint: = 45
cos (- ) = neg.
U ST U ST
Operation:
cos ( - ) = pos.
a) b)
L
HEST 005 001 C
' = phase-angle between current and voltage

(positive angle)
= Characteristic angle
L = Border line between operating and restraint areas
a) Definition of current b) Operating characteristic

and voltage
Fig. 3.39 Vector diagram for a fault in the forwards direction on

R phase
The function determines the power direction by measuring the phase-

angle of the current in relation to the opposite phase-to-phase voltage.
Which current is compared with which voltage can be seen from the
following table.
Current input Phase-to-neutral voltage Calculated voltage

IR US, UT UST = US - UT
IS UT, UR UTR = UT - UR
IT UR, US URS = UR - US
The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group of

connection of the VTs. For example, the phase-to-phase values are
3-175
calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), while the input volt-
ages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT type UTD).
Time allowed for a signal to be received

I
R Start R
I>
Meas. Fwd
Forwards meas. R
U
ST &
1 & t Trip
1
&
Backwards meas. R
Receive
td
I
S Start S
I>
Forwards meas. S
U
TR &
Meas. Bwd
&
Backwards meas. S
1
I
T Start T
I>
Forwards meas. T
U
RS & Start
1
Backwards meas. T
&

td = Inverse time Delay
t = 'tWait'
Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals, each

can send a signal from its 'MeasBwd' output to the 'Receive' input of
the function at the opposite end of the line (e.g. via a PLC channel)
when it is measuring a fault in the reverse direction. This signal
prevents the respective directional overcurrent function from tripping,
because the fault cannot be in the zone between them. The functions
therefore have to allow time, i.e. the 'wait time', for the signal from the
opposite line terminal to be received. If none is received within 'tWait',
the circuit-breakers are tripped at both ends.
The time set for inverse time delay acts in this kind of scheme as a
backup, which does not rely on the communication channel. Thus
when the 'Receive' input is being used, the setting for 't-Min' must be
longer than the setting for 'tWait':
't-Min' > 'tWait'
3-176
Response after decay of the memorised voltage

The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to almost
zero for a close fault and make determining direction unreliable. For
this reason, the function includes a voltage memory feature and for the
first 200 milliseconds after the incidence of an overcurrent, the voltage
measured immediately before the fault is used as reference to deter-
mine fault direction.
After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustable period
(see next paragraph).
'MemDirMode' provides facility for setting how the protection must
respond after this time or in the event that the circuit-breaker is closed
onto a fault and no voltage could be memorised beforehand. The two
possible settings are the protection can trip or it can block.
Time during which the memorised direction is valid

The 'MemDuration' setting determines how long the last valid direction
measurement shall be used. The setting should be as short as pos-
sible (200 ms) when the function is being used as backup for a dis-
tance function in an HV power system, because an actually measured
voltage is only available during this time and therefore it is only pos-
sible to detect a reversal of direction during this time. For longer set-
tings, the last valid power direction is used instead of the actually
memorised voltage.
3-177
3-178
3.5.12. Definite time NPS (NPS-DT)
A. Application
Protection of generators against excessive heating of the rotor due to
asymmetrical load.
B. Features
Definite time delay
Three-phase measurement
I. Analog inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Proportion of negative-sequence current component
I2 = 1/3 (IR + a2 IS + a IT)
3-179
D. Definite time NPS function settings - NPS-DT


Trip 00000000
Delay s 1.00 0.50 60.0 0.01
I2-Setting IN 0.20 0.02 0.50 0.01
CurrentInp. AnalogAddr 0
Chan
BlockInput BinaryAddr F
Trip
function (tripping logic).
Delay
time delay between pick-up and tripping.
I2-Setting
NPS current setting for tripping.
Setting restriction:
Current Inp. Chan.
defines the A/D current input channel. All three-phase current
inputs may be selected. The first channel (R phase) of the group of
three selected must be specified.
Block Input
F: Not blocked
T: Blocked
xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of a protection function)
Trip Signal
Start Signal
3-180
Settings:
Negative-sequence component of stator current I2-Setting
Delay Delay
An NPS current is usually caused by asymmetrical loading of the three

phases, but may also be the result of an open-circuit phase (single-
phasing).
An asymmetrical load on a generator produces a magnetic field, which

rotates in the opposite direction to the positive-sequence field. The
negative-phase sequence flux induces currents in the rotor and these
result in additional rotor losses and increased rotor temperature. The
latter can represent a hazard for the rotor and this is the reason for
applying NPS protection.
The asymmetry of the load on a generator is defined in terms of the

negative-sequence stator current I2, which is therefore the quantity,
monitored.
The definite time NPS function is intended for systems where asym-
metries are of longer duration and do not change frequently. This
generally applies in the case of small to medium generators. Two NPS
stages are used, one for alarm and one for tripping.
The maximum continuous NPS current rating I2 is stated by the gene-

rator manufacturer, usually as a percentage of the generator rated
current IGN.
The alarm stage is normally set to I2 or somewhat lower, e.g.
for I2 = 10 % IGN, 'I2-Setting' is set to 8 % IGN.

The tripping stage is set 50 to 100 % higher than the alarm stage, e.g.
I2-Setting = 15 % IGN
The NPS protection is always delayed to avoid false tripping during
transient phenomena and especially during phase-to-phase and earth
faults on the power system. The delay may be relatively long, because
the rate at which the temperature of the endangered parts of the rotor
rises is relatively low.
3-181
I2
Tripping stage
I2
Alarm stage
0 t HEST 905 015 C
In cases where both stages are used for tripping, the one with the
higher setting must be faster.
Compensating the frequently differing rated currents of generator and

CTs is also recommended for the NPS protection. The corresponding
compensated setting is given by
IGN
Setting = calculated setting
IN1
Typical settings:
1st stage (alarm)
I2-Setting 0.1 IN
Delay 5s
2nd stage (tripping)
I2-Setting 0.15 IN
Delay 10 s
3-182
3.5.13. Inverse time NPS (NPS-Inv)
A. Application
Negative phase sequence protection especially of large generators
subject to high thermal utilisation against excessive heating of the rotor
due to an asymmetric load.
B. Features
Inverse time delay according to level of NPS (see Fig. 3.41)
Wide setting ranges for the parameters determining the operating
characteristic
Adjustable rate of counting backwards when the overload
disappears (cooling rate of thermal image)
Insensitive to DC components
I. Analog inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Proportion of negative-sequence current component
I2 = 1/3 (IR + a2 IS + a IT)
3-183
D. Inverse time NPS function settings - NPS-Inv


Trip 00000000
K1 - Setting s 10.0 5.0 60.0 0.1
K2 - Setting I2/IB 0.05 0.02 0.20 0.01
Min. Operating Time s 10.0 1.0 120.0 0.1
Max. Delay Time s 1000 500 2000 1
Reset Time s 30 5 2000 1
Current Inp. Chan. AnalogAddr 0
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
Trip
k1-Setting
Multiplier. Operating characteristic constant.
k2-Setting
Continuously permissible NPS (I2/IB) and operating characteristic
constant.
< 0.05 IN/IB when supplied from protection cores.
Min. Operating Time
Definite minimum operating time.
Max Delay TIme
Maximum delay after being enabled regardless of inverse
characteristic.
Reset Time
Time taken to reset (from the operating limit). This corresponds to
the time taken for the generator to cool.
Current Inp. Chan.
defines the A/D input channel.
All three-phase current inputs may be selected.
The first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must be
specified.
3-184
IB-Setting
Reference (base) current for compensating a difference in relation
to IN.
Block Input
F: Not blocked
T: Blocked
Trip Signal
Start Signal
Fig. 3.41 Operating characteristic of the inverse time NPS

function
3-185
Settings:
Reference current IB-Setting
Continuously permissible NPS k2-Setting
Minimum operating time Min. Operating Time
Maximum operating time Max. Delay TIme
Resetting time Reset Time
This protection is intended for large generators. It is especially recom-

mended where the level of NPS varies frequently, because in such
cases, higher levels of NPS are permissible for short periods.
Providing compensation using the reference value of the A/D channel
has not been made, the reference current IB for the protection is cal-
culated from the rated currents of the generator IGN and the CTs IN1
and IN2 as follows:
I
IB = IGN N2
IN1
The setting is the ratio IB/IN, where IN is the rated current of the pro-
tection, otherwise 'IB-Setting' would be 1.0 IN.
The following two parameters are required from the manufacturer of
the generator in order to set k1 and k2:
the continuously permissible NPS component i2 [p.u.]
the permissible energy of the NPS component i22 t [p.u.]

Factor k1 equals the permissible energy:
k1 = i22 t
Factor k2 equals the continuously permissible component i2:

k2 = i2
Typical settings:
IB-Setting according to protected unit
k1-Setting 10.0 s
k2-Setting according to protected unit
Min. Operating Time 10.0 s
Max. Delay Time 1000.0 s
Reset Time 10.0 s
3-186
3.5.14. Voltage-controlled overcurrent (Imax-Umin)
A. Application
Phase fault protection of generators with rapidly decaying fault current
such that a normal time overcurrent function could reset before its
delay had expired.
B. Features
Stores the maximum current value after pick-up
Resets either after recovery of the system voltage or after tripping
Processes the positive-sequence component of the voltage
Insensitive to DC component and harmonics
Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest
phase value in the three-phase mode
I. Analog inputs:
Current
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
Positive-sequence voltage
3-187
D. Voltage controlled overcurrent settings - Imax-Umin


Trip 00000000
Delay s 1.00 0.5 60.00 0.01
Current IN 2.00 0.5 20 0.1
Hold-Voltage UN 0.70 0.4 1.1 0.01
Hold-Time s 1.00 0.1 10 0.02
Nr Of Phases 1 Ph (Select)
Current Input Chan. AnalogAddr 0
VoltageInput Chan. AnalogAddr 0
Trip
Delay
Current
Hold-Voltage
Voltage below which the pick-up status latches, even if the current
falls below the pick-up setting.
Hold-Time
defines how long the tripping signal latches when the voltage
condition is fulfilled.
Nr Of Phases
Current Input Chan.
defines the analog current input channel.
3-188
VoltageInput Chan.
Defines the analog voltage input channel.
All three-phase voltage inputs may be selected. A phase-to-phase
voltage must be used for measurement. This is derived from the
set phase and the lagging phase.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Trip Signal
Start Signal
3-189
Settings:
Current pick-up Current
Delay Delay
Undervoltage Hold-Voltage
Reset delay Hold-Time
The voltage controlled overcurrent function comprises a definite time

overcurrent unit which latches when the undervoltage unit responds.
The protection is intended for generators and generator/transformer
units, for which a fault current can fall below the pick-up of the over-
current protection before it has an opportunity to trip.
Apart from the influence of a DC component, a decaying AC compo-
nent can only occur on a generator, the steady-state fault current of
which is very low because of the large synchronous reactance Xd typi-
cal of modern generators (see Fig. 3.42).
This function is largely insensitive to DC component and harmonics.
i
6
5
4
3
2
in
1
t
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
HEST 905 012 C
Fig. 3.42 Generator fault current
3-190
Overcurrent setting 'Current'

The current setting is chosen such that neither false tripping nor false
signals can occur during normal operation and yet the minimum fault
current is detected. The setting must therefore be between the maxi-
mum short-time load current and the minimum fault current and allow
for the tolerance on the protection setting and also its reset ratio. The
maximum short-time load current is a parameter of the power system
concerned and must take account of switching operations, load surges
and fast response excitation (Fig. 3.43).
I Minimum fault current
Maximum short-time
C urrent" load current
IN
"Delay"
HEST 905 013 C
Fig. 3.43 Operating characteristic of a definite time overcurrent

function
IN = rated current of the protection
Delay
The delay is used to achieve discrimination of the overcurrent function.
It is set according to the grading table for all the overcurrent units on
the power system. The zone of protection of the voltage-controlled
overcurrent function extends from the CTs supplying it in the generator
star-point to the location of the next downstream overcurrent relay.
Undervoltage setting 'Hold-Voltage'

Providing the overcurrent unit has picked up and the undervoltage unit
picks up as well, the undervoltage unit 'Hold-Voltage' latches it in the
pick-up state should the fault current fall below its pick-up setting. The
setting of the undervoltage unit must be such that it can clearly distin-
guish between a normal load and a fault condition. Because of the
different conditions prevailing during symmetrical and asymmetrical
faults, the positive-sequence component of the three-phase system is
evaluated. A setting well below the lowest voltage that can occur
during normal load conditions is chosen (Fig. 3.44).
3-191
UN Minimum short-time
load voltage
"Hold-Voltage"
setting for latching
HEST 905 014 C
Fig. 3.44 Operating characteristic of the undervoltage control unit
UN = rated voltage of the undervoltage unit
Reset time 'Hold-Time'

The reset time defined by the parameter 'Hold-Time' determines how
long the overcurrent unit remains latched to ensure a tripping signal of
sufficient duration. The delay starts at the instant of tripping.
Block diagram
I> 1 Start
tV Trip
U< & S
tH 1 R
HEST 045 009 V
Fig. 3.45 Block diagram of the Imax-Umin function
tV = Time delay
tH = Hold-Time
3-192
Typical settings:
Current 1.5 IN
Delay 3s
Hold-Voltage 0.7 UN
Hold-Time 0.5 s
Should the rated currents of generator and CTs differ appreciably,
compensation of the overcurrent setting is recommended, if this has
not already been done with the aid of the reference value of the A/D
channel.
Example:
Generator rated current IGN = 4 000 A
CT rated current IN1 = 5 000 A
Typical value 1.5
(referred to the rated
current of the protection)
Compensated setting:
IGN 4000
1.5 = 1.5 = 1 .2
IN1 5000
since the rated voltages of generator and VTs are generally the same,
compensation of the undervoltage setting is seldom necessary.
Should they differ, the compensated setting would be:
UGN
0.7
UN1
3-193
3-194
3.5.15. Definite time over and undervoltage protection (Voltage-DT)
A. Application
Standard voltage applications (overvoltage and undervoltage function).
B. Features
DC component filter
Harmonic filter
Single or three-phase voltage measurement
Maximum value, respectively minimum value, detection for three-
phase measurement
I. Analog inputs:
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Voltage amplitude
3-195
D. Over/undervoltage protection settings - Voltage-DT


Trip 00000000
Delay s 2.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
V-Setting UN 1.200 0.010 2.000 0.002
Max / Min Max (1) (Select)
Voltage Inp. Chan. AnalogAddr 0
Trip
Tripping circuit to which the O/P of the over/undervoltage function
is connected (matrix tripping logic).
Delay
Time delay between the function picking up and tripping.
V-Setting
Voltage setting for tripping.
Max / Min
Over or undervoltage mode selection:
Min (3ph): Undervoltage.
phase voltage.

Min (1ph): Undervoltage.
phase voltage.
Max (3ph): Overvoltage.
phase voltage.

Max (1ph): Overvoltage.
phase voltage.
3-196
Number Of Phases
Number of phases included in the measurement.
Voltage Inp. Chan
Analog I/P channel. All the voltage channels are available for
selection. In the case of a three-phase measurement, the first
channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Start Signal
Pick-up signal.
3-197
Settings:
Setting V-Setting
Delay Delay
Over or undervoltage Max / Min
Number of phases measured Number Of Phases
The overvoltage protection protects the stator coils of the generator as
well s transformers from dangerous overvoltages. Simultaneously the
magnetic core is protected from overheating resulting from increased
iron losses. Long duration overvoltage are especially to be expected
on the failure of the voltage regulators. A definite delay prevents
spurious tripping by transient conditions. Often the protection is
executed in two steps, which affects the tripping.
Pick-up voltage (U-Setting)

VT single phase or three phase delta connection:
A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V at the
input of the VT.
Note that although a setting of 2.0 UN is possible, the range of the
analog inputs of the input transformer units K01...K17 (REL316*4) and
K41...K47 (REC316*4) is only 1.3 UN (i.e. max. 130 V or 260 V).
Y connected three-phase VTs:
A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V/ 3 at
the input of the VT (phase-to-neutral voltage).
The first step is intended for protection against small however long
duration over voltage.
The second step is intended for protection against higher over voltage,
which has to set at a value of 70 % of the stator test voltage.
Compensating any difference between the rated voltages of VTs UN1
and protected unit UGN is recommended. This is achieved with the aid
of the reference value of the A/D channel or by correcting the voltage
setting.
For example, for UGN = 12 kV and UN1 = 15 kV, the setting for a pick-
up voltage of 1.4 UGN would have to be
U 12 kV
1.4 GN = 1.4 = 1.12
UN1 15 kV
3-198
Max / Min setting

This parameter provides a choice of the following settings:
Min (3ph): Protection picks up when all three phase voltages
have fallen below setting.
Min (1ph): Protection picks up when the lowest of the phase
voltages falls below setting.
Max (3ph): Protection picks up when all three phase voltages
have exceeded setting.
Max (1ph): Protection picks up when the highest of the phase
voltages exceeds setting.
U
V - setting
Stage 2
V - setting
Stage 1
UN
Delay Delay
0 t
HEST 905 055 C
Fig. 3.46 Operating characteristic of a two-stage overvoltage

protection
UN = rated relay voltage
Typical settings:
1st stage
V - setting 1.15 UN
Delay 2s
Max / Min Max (1ph)
2nd stage
V - setting 1.4 UN
Delay 0.1 s
Max / Min Max (1ph)
3-199
3.5.15.1. Definite time stator earth fault (95 %)
Settings:
Voltage V-Setting
Delay Delay
The definite time stator E/F scheme (95%) is designed for the pro-
tection of generators or generator/transformer units.
Description
The standard zone of protection in the case of generator/transformer
units is 95 % of the length of the stator winding (see Fig. 3.47). It is
normal to limit the zone to 95 % to avoid any risk of false tripping. The
stator E/F function is connected either to the VT at the stator star-point
or to the VTs at the generator terminals. In either case, the function
monitors the displacement of the star-point caused by a stator E/F.
The corresponding off-set voltage becomes a maximum for an E/F at a
generator terminal and zero for an E/F at the star-point (see Fig. 3.47).
A
U
Generator
5%
U
95 ma
% x
Voltage Transformer U> 5% U max
HEST 905 029 C
Fig. 3.47 Stator E/F protection for a generator/transformer unit
3-200
As can be seen from Fig. 3.47, the relay setting for a zone of protec-
tion of 95 % is 5 % of Umax. The scheme detects E/Fs on the gene-
rator stator winding, the cables to the step-up transformer and the
delta-connected windings of the step-up transformer.
The capacitances between primary and secondary of the step-up
transformer conduct currents emanating from E/Fs on the HV side to
the LV side and can cause false tripping of the stator E/F protection.
The capacitive coupling of E/F currents on the HV side takes place
regardless of whether the HV star-point is grounded or not. The capa-
citance C12 between HV and LV windings of the step-up transformer and
the capacitance C of the generator circuit form a potential divider that
determines the potential of the generator star-point (see Fig. 3.48a).
The value of the capacitance C is usually too low to reliably hold the
star-point below the pick-up setting of the protection. For this reason,
the generator star-point is grounded via a resistor RE (see Fig. 3.49)
which ensures that the potential of the star-point remains below the
setting of the protection for an E/F on the HV power system.
Correspondingly, the value of the resistor RE is chosen such that for a
given C12 and an E/F at the HV terminals of the step-up transformer,
the offset of the generator star-point does not reach the pick-up setting
of the 95 % E/F protection.
3 C 12 3 C 12
U HV U HV
Star-point 3 3
U RE U
3C
IE IE
HEST 905 030 FL
a) without grounding resistor b) simplified circuit with grounding

resistor
Fig. 3.48 Generator star-point off-set for an E/F on the HV side of

the step-up transformer
3-201
where:
C12 capacitance between primary and secondary of the step-up
transformer
C capacitance to ground of the stator windings, the cables
with protection capacitors and the LV step-up transformer
winding
U star-point offset
UHV rated voltage of the step-up transformer HV windings
IE E/F current
RE grounding resistor
The value of the grounding resistor RE determines the E/F current. In
view of the damage an E/F current can cause especially to the
laminations of the stator core the maximum E/F current should be
limited to 20 A for 10 s, i.e. the grounding resistor RE must not be too
small.
Tripping by the E/F protection is delayed by 0.5 s to avoid any risk of
false tripping during transient phenomena.
Designing a scheme for connection to the generator star-point

Alternative 1 with grounding resistor and VT (see Fig. 3.49):
Generator Step-up transformer

LV HV
1 2
U GN U HV
IE
3 C 12
I Emax
IE
U1n /U 2n
3C RE U>
IE
HEST 905 031 C
Fig. 3.49 Stator E/F protection with a grounding resistor at the

star-point
The value of the grounding resistor RE should be chosen such that:

the maximum E/F current IE 20 A
the offset of the generator star-point for an E/F on the HV side of
the step-up transformer does not exceed half the relay setting.
3-202
The star-point VT is designed in relation to the maximum continuous

voltage resulting from an E/F, i.e. the phase-to-neutral voltage of the
generator. Arcing faults can cause higher transient voltages and
consequentially saturation of the VT The specification of a relatively
high overvoltage factor such as 1.9 is therefore recommended.
VT rated voltages
UGN
U1n = (UGN = generator rated voltage)
3
U2n = 100 V (should nothing else be specified)
The minimum value of the resistor REmin:

UGN
RE min
3 IE max
where IEmax 20 A
The equation for determining the maximum value of the grounding
resistor REmax (95 % scheme) can be derived from the simplified
circuit diagram of Fig. 3.48b:
0.05 UGN
RE max
6 C12 UOS
where:
0.05 - protection sensitivity 5 % (95 % scheme)
6 - factor corresponding to 3 phases times 2 for half the pick-
up setting
The value of the effective grounding resistor RE is chosen between
REmax and REmin and rated for 10 s.
Example 1
UGN = 12 kV; UHV = 110 kV; C12 = 3 x 10-9 F; = 314 1/s
IEmax 20 A
a) HV system ungrounded
12000
RE min = 346
3 20
0.05 12
RE max = 965
6 314 3 10 9 110
3-203
Chosen RE = 750
UGN 12000
IE max = = = 9.24 A
3 RE 3 750
Specification:
1 grounding resistor 750 ; 10 A; 10 s
12000
1 VT / 100 V; single-phase insulation
3
b) HV system solidly grounded

Only 1/6 of the voltage UHV is effective.
12000
RE min = 346
3 20
0.05 12
RE max = 5790
110
6 314 3 10 9
6
Chosen RE = 3000
UGN 12000
IE max = = = 2.3 A
3 RE 3 3000
Specification:
1 grounding resistor 3000 ; 2.3 A; 10 s
12000
1 VT / 100 V; single-phase insulation
3
Alternative 2 with grounding transformer (see Fig. 3.50):

This arrangement is widespread in North America. The maximum
current for the grounding transformer is chosen to approximately equal
the capacitive component of the E/F current.
IEmax IC
UGN
IC = 3 C
3
3-204
Rated data of the grounding transformer:

UGN
U1n =
3
U2n = 100; 200; 400 V or 115; 230; 460 V
I1n = IEmax
I2n = Ie
U1n
where Ie = IE max
U2n
The grounding resistor Re connected to the secondary is give by

2
UGN U2n
Re =
3 IE max U1n
UGN
or for U1n =
3
2
U2n
Re =
U1n IE max
Rated power of the grounding transformer:
Sn = U1n I1n

LV HV
1 2
U GN U HV
IE
3 C 12
I
Em
ax
IE
U 1n /U 2n U3n /U 4n
3C Re U>
IE Ie
HEST 905 032 C
Fig. 3.50 Stator E/F protection with a grounding transformer at

the star-point
3-205
Example 2
UGN = 12 kV; IC = 10 A
IEmax = IC = 10 A
12000
U1n = = 6930 V
3
I1n = 10 A
U2n = 200 V
6930
I2n = Ie = 10 = 346 A
200
200 2
Re = = 0.577
6930 10
Sn = U1n I1n = 6930 10 70 kVA
Specification:
1 grounding transformer 70 kVA; 10 s; 50 Hz
6930/200 V; 10/346 A
1 resistor 0.577 ; 346 A; 10 s
1 interposing VT 10 VA; 50 Hz; 200/100 V
(only necessary if U2n > 100 V)
Example 3
UGN = 12 kV; IC = 10 A; grounding transformer specified according to
the rated voltage of the generator.
U1n = UGN = 12 kV
U2n = 230 V
I1n = IEmax = IC = 10 A
U1n 12000
I2n = Ie = IEmax = 10 = 522 A
U2n 230
2
12000 230
Re = = 0.254
3 10 12000
Sn = 12000 10 120 kVA
Specification:
1 grounding transformer 120 kVA; 10 s; 50 Hz
12000/230 V; 10/522 A
1 resistor 0.254 ; 522 A; 10 s
1 interposing VT 10 VA; 50 Hz; 230/100 V
3-206
Designing a scheme for connection to the generator terminals

If the generator star-point is inaccessible, the stator E/F protection is
connected to three VTs at the generator terminals (see Fig. 3.51). In
this case, the E/F current is fed by the three VT primary windings.
Assuming a permissible short-time current of the primary windings of
5 A, the E/F current must be limited to a maximum of 15 A.
The secondary rated voltage must be chosen such that it does not
exceed 300 V and, wherever possible, the secondary current does not
exceed 250 A.

LV HV
1 2
IE
U GN U HV
3 C 12
I1 I1 I1
IE = 3 I 1
I
E
U 1n /U 2n U 3n /U 4n
3C Ie Re Ie U>
HEST 905 033 C
Fig. 3.51 Stator E/F protection with grounding transformer at the

generator terminals
For an E/F at a generator terminal, the voltage of the phase concerned

becomes zero and the healthy phases are at phase-to-phase potential
with respect to ground. The vectorial addition of the two phase-to-
phase voltages produces three times the rated voltage across the
broken delta connection of the VT secondary windings:
U = 3 U2n
where U2n is the rated secondary voltage. If U is greater than 100 V,
the E/F protection must be connected via an interposing VT
When designing the scheme, the maximum current flowing through the
primaries of the VTs during an E/F is determined first.
Assuming that the permissible short-time primary current of the VTs is
5 A, then
IEmax = 15 A
3-207
The corresponding minimum value for the grounding resistor is

2
UGN 3U2n
R e min K
3Imax U1n
where K is the influence of the VT reactance. A mean value of 0.7 may
be assumed for VTs.
To ensure that the E/F protection remains stable for an E/F on the HV
side of the step-up transformer, the resistor may not be less than
2
0.05 UGN 3 U2n
R e max
6 C12 UHV U1n
The secondary current Ie is then chosen and the secondary rated
voltage calculated:
I
U2n = U1n E
3 Ie
The maximum voltage across Re becomes
UR = Re Ie
e
and the voltage across the broken delta windings 3U2n. This voltage
must be approximately 30 % higher than the voltage Re Ie across the
resistor so that the design current IE can flow.
Example 4
UGN = 12 kV; UHV = 110 kV; C12 = 3 x 10-9 F; = 314 1/s
HV system ungrounded.
IEmax = 15 A
UGN 12000
U1n = = = 6930 V
3 3
2
12000 3U2n 4 2
R e min 0.7 = 0.60 10 U2n
3 15 6930
2
0.05 12 3U2n 4 2
R e max = 1.81 10 U2n
9
6 314 3 10 110 6930
Since from this calculation Remax is greater than Remin, the protection
is stable at the chosen current IEmax and the value of the resistor Re
can be determined in relation to Remin.
Ie = 200 A
15
U2n = 6930 = 173 V
3 200
3-208
It then follows that

Remin 0.60 10-4 1732 = 1.80
Remax 1.81 10-4 1732 = 5.42
Re = 1.80
At Ie = 200 A, the voltage drop across the resistor Re is
UR = Re Ie = 1.8 200 = 360 V
e
Neglecting load current, the maximum voltage across the broken delta
windings is:
U = 3 U2n = 3 173 520 V
Specification:
1 resistor 1.80 ; 200 A; 10 s
12000
3 VTs / 173 V; single-phase insulated
3
1 interposing VT 10 VA; 50 Hz; 520 / 100 V
Note:
Because of the voltage drop of the VTs, the voltage does not reach
520 V at the full E/F current, but only 360 V. The setting of the pro-
tection must therefore be modified as follows:
Overvoltage setting
360
0.05 = 0.034 (3.4 % UN instead of 5 % UN)
520
Example 5
UGN = 27 kV; UHV = 400 kV; C12 = 3 x 10-9 F; x = 314 1/s
HV system solidly grounded
IE = 15 A
UGN 27000
U1n = = = 15600 V
3 3
2
27000 3U2n 6 2
R e min = 27 10 U2n
3 15 15600
2
0.05 27 3 U2n 6
Re max = 132 10 U2n2
9 400 15600
6 314 3 10
6
Ie = 250 A (chosen)
15
U2n = 15600 = 260 V
3 300
3-209
The resistor Re is chosen according to Remin:

Re = 27 10-6 2602 = 1.825
Re Ie = 1.825 300 = 547 V
3 U2n = 3 260 = 780 V
S= 3 260 300 = 135 103 VA
The specification and the modification of the protection setting is similar
to Example 4.
Typical settings:
V-Setting 0.05 UN
Delay 0.5 s
Note:
If a generator circuit-breaker is installed between the generator and
the step-up transformer, a second E/F protection scheme is required
for the zone between the step-up transformer and the unit transformer.
The second scheme is connected to the broken delta secondary
windings of three VTs. This scheme must also remain stable for E/Fs
on the HV system and during ferroresonance phenomena and for this
reason there is a resistor across the broken delta as well. Frequently,
the E/F protection is only required to protect the cables and bar
conductors, because the transformers are protected by differential
schemes and Buchholz relays. In this case, the E/F protection setting
is determined by the voltage offset for an E/F at the lowest load
voltage. A typical setting for reliable E/F detection in an ungrounded
system is 60 % UN, i.e.
V - setting = 0.6 UN
The delay can remain the same at 0.5 s. The second E/F scheme
usually gives only an alarm. Since the plant remains in operation for an
E/F on the cables, the resistor across the broken delta must be
continuously rated.
3.5.15.2. Rotor E/F protection
Settings:
Overvoltage V-Setting
Delay Delay
Over/undervoltage MaxMin
The rotor E/F function in conjunction with the ancillary unit Type
YWX 111 and 2 coupling capacitors is suitable for protecting synchro-
nous generators regardless of the method of excitation. The scheme
operates according to the Wheatstone bridge principle and is
uninfluenced by frequency. The harmonics of the excitation system do
not therefore effect the rotor E/F protection.
3-210
The bridge is connected to the rotor circuit by one or two high-voltage

capacitors. The first leg of the bridge consists of the coupling capa-
citors and the capacitance of the rotor winding in series. The second
capacitive leg, the resistive legs and a supply transformer for stepping
down the VT voltage (e.g. 100 V) to the 50 V needed for the measu-
ring circuit are in the ancillary unit Type YWX 111. A second trans-
former isolates the bridge from the input of the E/F protection function.
An E/F short-circuits the capacitance of the rotor winding and the
bridge is no longer balanced. There is thus a voltage across the bridge
that is detected by the overvoltage function. Depending on the design
of the scheme, the pick-up setting is between 0.5 and 3 V to detect an
insulation leakage of 1 k which is considered as being a rotor E/F.
Since all the components influence the setting, it is determined during
commissioning.
Typical settings:
V-Setting (for 1 k) 1 to 3 V
Delay 1s
MaxMin Max
Fig. 3.52 Rotor E/F protection function

C1, C2 = external coupling capacitances
3-211
3.5.15.3. Interturn protection

(voltage principle)
Settings:
Delay Delay
The purpose of the interturn protection is to detect short-circuits

between the turns of the generator stator windings.
The scheme should be as sensitive as possible to detect the majority
of interturn faults. However, because of various residual voltages
caused by asymmetries, the setting may not be lower than 5 % UN.
A slight delay will prevent false tripping due to transients.
Both ends of the primaries of VTs must be designed for the full HV
potential!
Since the star-points of the generator and the VTs are connected, the
high short-circuit power of the generator would cause severe damage
in the event of an interturn fault on a VT primary. HV fuses should
therefore be inserted in the VT primaries.
Typical settings:
V-Setting 0.05 UN
Delay 0.5 s
R S T
Voltage transformer
Generator
U>
HEST 905 017 C
Fig. 3.53 Interturn protection according to the voltage

principle
3-212
3.5.16. Peak value overvoltage (Voltage-Inst)
A. Application
General voltage monitoring with instantaneous response (over and
undervoltage)
Voltage monitoring where insensitive to frequency is required (over
and undervoltage)
B. Features
Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and largely
independent of frequency
Stores the peak value following pick-up
No suppression of DC component
Single and three-phase measurement
Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode
Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Voltage amplitude (only available if function trips)
3-213
D. Peak value voltage function settings - Voltage-Inst


Trip 00000000
Delay s 0.01 0.00 60.00 0.01
V-Setting UN 1.40 0.01 2.00 0.01
Min. Frequency Hz 40 25 50 1
Max / Min Max (Select)
Voltage Inp. Chan CT/VT-Addr 0
Trip
function (matrix).
Delay
V-Setting
Pick-up voltage setting.
Min. Frequency
defines the minimum frequency for which measurement is
required.
Max / Min
defines operation as overvoltage or undervoltage. Settings:
Max: overvoltage
Min: undervoltage
Number Of Phases
Voltage Inp. Chan.
defines the VT input channel.
All voltage inputs may be selected.
Block Input
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-214
Trip Signal
Start Signal
Settings:
Delay Delay
Minimum frequency Min. Frequency
Over or undervoltage Max / Min
The instantaneous overvoltage function is a high-speed protection,
which operates in a wide frequency range. It is intended primarily for
the following applications:
where an overvoltage protection is required, which is largely
insensitive to frequency especially for f > fN.
The limited capacity of the VTs to transform low frequencies must
be taken into account for f < fN:
Input transformer units K01...K17 (REL316*4) and K41...K47
(REC316*4):
f
1.3UN
fN
Input transformer units K21...K24 (RET316*4) and K61...K68

(REG316*4):
f
2.25UN
fN
where high-speed protection is required. The high speed is

achieved by measuring the instantaneous value of the voltage and
since DC components and harmonics are not suppressed, by
eliminating the inertia of the digital input filter.
Compared with the normal voltage function, the instantaneous function
has a larger tolerance on the pick-up setting. It should therefore only
be used in the above two cases.
The measuring principle is the same as that of the peak value current
function and therefore reference should be made to that Section for a
description of the principle and the significance of the minimum fre-
quency setting f-min.
3-215
Pick-up voltage (U-Setting)

Single-phase VT:
A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V at the
input of the VT
Note that although a setting of 2.0 UN is possible, the range of the
analog inputs of the input transformer units K01...K17 (REL316*4) and
K41...K47 (REC316*4) is only 1.3 UN (i.e. max. 130 V or 260 V).
Y connected three-phase VTs:
A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V/ 3 at
the input of the VT(phase-to-neutral voltage).
Typical settings:
V-Setting according to application
Delay according to application
Min. Frequency 40 Hz
3-216
3.5.17. Power (Power)
A. Application
Power function for monitoring
reverse power
active power
reactive power
power direction
B. Features
Definite time delay
Over or underpower
Provision for correction of phase errors caused by the input circuit
One, two or three-phase measurement (two-phase only with delta
connected VTs)
Wide range of applications (see Fig. 3.55 and Fig. 3.56)
Correction of CT and VT phase errors
Insensitive to DC components in voltage and current
Insensitive to harmonics in voltage and current
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Power
3-217
D. Power function settings - Power


Trip 00000000
P - Setting PN -0.050 -0.100 1.200 0.005
Angle deg 0.0 -180.0 180.0 5.0
Drop-Ratio % 60 30 170 1
Delay s 0.50 0.05 60.00 0.01
Max / Min Min (Select)
Phi-Compensation deg 0.0 -5.0 5.0 0.1
VoltageInp. Chan. CT/VT-Addr 0
PN UN*IN 1.000 0.500 2.500 0.001
Start Signal SignalAddr
Trip
channel of the tripping logic (matrix) activated by the functions
tripping O/P.
P - Setting
Power setting for tripping.
Forbidden settings:
< 0.005 PN connected to metering cores
< 0.020 PN connected to protection cores
In view of the required accuracy, the use of metering cores is
recommended for settings 0.2 PN.
Angle
Characteristic angle between voltage and current for maximum
sensitivity.
0 = active power measurement
90 = reactive power measurement (inductive),
Settings between these limits are possible, e.g. for directional
measurements at locations on the power system.
The correction of phase errors caused by the input circuit is also
possible.
3-218
Drop-Ratio
Reset value in relation to the pick-up value. Thus depending on the
sign of the pick-up value, the setting of the reset ratio must be
greater or less than 100 %.
Forbidden settings:
Reset ratios >100 % for Max and P Setting >0
Reset ratios <100 % for Max and P Setting <0
Reset ratios <100 % for Min and P Setting >0
Reset ratios >100 % for Min and P Setting <0
A large hysteresis must be selected for low pick-up settings and a
small one for high pick-up settings (see Fig. 3.54).
Forbidden settings for hysteresis (= 100% reset ratio) settings:
0.5 % ( P - Setting PN + 0.01)
10 % P - Setting PN
These conditions are fulfilled by setting, for example,
P - Setting
for 0.2 1: 95 %
PN
and
P - Setting
for 0.005 0.2 : 60 %
PN
Delay
Time between the function picking up and tripping. The time the
function takes to reset is also influenced by the delay set for
operation, i.e.:
for t > 100 ms, the function resets after 50 ms, otherwise resetting
is instantaneous.
Max / Min
Defines the operating mode as:
Max: overpower
Min: underpower
Caution:
The number and its sign are relevant and not just the value, i.e.
'Min' must be set for reverse power, because tripping takes place
for a power less than zero (P Setting < 0).
Phi-Compensation
Input of an angle to compensate CT and VT errors in the case of
highly accurate power measurements.
The setting is determined by the difference between CT and VT
errors.
3-219
Number Of Phases
Number of phases measured:
1: single-phase
2: two-phase, i.e. for a three-phase measurement with V
connected VTs
P = URS IR cos UST IT cos
A two-phase power measurement is only possible when
connected to delta connected VTs.
3: three-phase
P = UR IR cos + US IS cos + UT IT cos
(The measurement is only correct with delta connected VTs if
the three phase voltages are symmetrical.)
Current Inp. Chan.
defines the CT input channel.
All current I/Ps may be selected.
In the case of multi-phase measurement, the first channel of the
group of three (R phase) must be selected.
Voltage Inp. Chan.
All voltage I/Ps may be selected.
In the case of multi-phase measurement, the first channel of the
group of three (R phase) must be selected.
PN
Rated power as given by UN x IN. This enables the amplitude of
the power being measured to be compensated, e.g. to the rated
power factor of a generator.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Start Signal
Pick-up signal.
3-220
1
Reset ratio 95%
Reset ratio
60%
0.5
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.75

0 1
Setting PP
N
HEST 935 022 C
Fig. 3.54 Permissible reset ratio settings
3-221
(function with two additional timers)
Settings:
Reference power PN
Setting P - Setting
Reset ratio Drop-Ratio
Over/underpower Max / Min
Phase error compensation Phi-Compensation
tripping delay Delay
The power function can be used for many applications. Some
examples are given in Fig. 3.55 and Fig. 3.56. The angles given apply
for connection according to the connections in Fig. 12.4.
Q Q
Restrains Operates Operates Restrains
0 P 0 P
Active overpower settings: Active underpower settings:
- P-Setting >0 - P-Setting >0

- Max/Min MAX - Max/Min MIN
- Drop-Ratio <100% - Drop-Ratio >100%
- Angle 0 (30 ) *) - Angle 0 (30 ) *)
HEST 965 017 C
Fig. 3.55 Power function settings for different applications
*) The values in brackets apply for a single-phase measurement with the VT

connected phase-to-phase (e.g. IR current and URS voltage) or for a three-
phase measurement with delta connected VTs.
3-222
Q Q
Operates Restrains Operates
Restrains
0 P 0 P
Reserve power settings: Reactive overpower settings:
- P-Setting <0 - P-Setting >0

- Max/Min MIN - Max/Min MAX
- Drop-Ratio <100% - Drop-Ratio <100%
- Angle 0 (30 ) *) - Angle 90 (120 ) *)
Q
Restrains
0 60
P
Operates
Directional power settings:
- P-Setting <0
- Max/Min MIN
- Drop-Ratio <100%
- Angle 60 (90 ) *)
HEST 965 018 C
Fig. 3.56 Power function settings for different applications
*) The values in brackets apply for a single-phase measurement with the VT

connected phase-to-phase (e.g. IR current and URS voltage) or for a three-
phase measurement with delta connected VTs.
3-223
Determining the settings

Where the rated currents and possibly also rated voltages of CTs, VTs
and the protected unit differ, it is of advantage to refer the setting to
the rated power of the protected unit. This necessitates modifying the
sensitivity using the setting for PN.
Setting the reference power PN:
PN S GN SGN = 3 UGN IGN

=
U N IN 3 UN1 IN1 PGN = SGN cosGN
where:
SGN, PGN, UGN, IGN, cos GN: ratings of the protected unit
UN1, IN1: primary VT and CT ratings
PN, UN, IN: protection ratings
Example 1
Generator: 96 MVA, 13.8 kV, 4 kA, cos = 0.8
14.4 100
VTs / CTs: kV / V; 5 kA / 5 A
3 3
Protection: 100 V; 5 A
Reverse power: 0.5 % PGN
Alternative 1: No modification of PN
Settings:
PN
Reference power = 1 .0
UN IN
Reverse power:
P U I 13.8 4
= 0.005 GN GN cos GN = 0.005 0.8 = 0.003
PN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
3-224
Alternative 2: Modification for cosGN

Settings:
PN P
Reference power = GN = cos GN = 0.8
UN IN SGN
Reverse power:
P U IGN 13.8 4
= 0.005 GN = 0,005 = 0.004
PN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
Alternative 3: Modification for GN and CT/VT. data

Settings:
PN U I 13.8 4
Rated power = GN GN cos GN = 0.8 = 0.614
UN IN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
P
Reverse power = 0.005
PN
The power function is connected to the phase currents and a phase-to-
neutral or phase-to-phase voltage. The purpose of the phase compen-
sation is twofold:
to compensate the phase difference between the phase voltage
and the any measured phase-to-phase voltage
to determine whether the function responds to active or reactive
power
The following table summarises the most important operating modes
to simplify setting the corresponding parameters correctly. The
Fig. 12.4.
The phase compensation also provides facility for changing the direc-
tion of measurement or to compensate incorrect VT or CT polarity.
3-225
Function "MaxMin" "Drop-Ratio" "P-Setting" "Angle" *)
P
U RS
3-226
max MAX < 100%
0
Fig. 3.57
Active power IR >0 +30
P
min MIN > 100%
0
P
U RS 0
ABB Switzerland Ltd
max MIN < 100%
Phase compensation
Reverse power <0 +30
P
IR 0
min MAX > 100%
max MAX < 100% U RS Q

0
Inductive
reactive power >0 +120
min MIN > 100% IR Q

0
measurement of active power at low power factors.

max MIN < 100% U RS Q
0
Capazitive
reactive power <0 +120
min MAX > 100% I Q

R 0
*) Applicable for a single or three-phase measurement using phase-to-phase voltages (the setting is 30 HEST 965 019 C
current in relation to the phase-to-phase voltage URS

less for a three-phase measurement with Y connected v.t's or a two-phase measurement with V
connected v.t's).
Settings different applications when measuring phase R
CTs, which have a considerable adverse influence on the

RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
This setting is for correcting the phase error between the VTs and
Example 2
The active power error at rated current and a power factor of cos = 0
for a total phase error of 10' is
P = 0.03 = 0.03 10 = 0.3 % [%; 1; min]
This is an error which is not negligible at a setting of 0.5 %.
The total error corresponds to the difference between the VT and CT
errors. The case considered in this example of full reactive current
(100%) would scarcely occur in practice, but currents from about 80%
are possible.
Application as reverse power protection

The reverse power function is used primarily to protect the prime
mover. It is necessary for the following kinds of prime mover:
steam turbines
Francis and Kaplan hydro units
gas turbines
diesel motors
Two reverse power functions are used for prime movers with ratings
higher than 30 MW, because of their importance and value.
The reverse power function has two stages. The setting is half the slip
power of the generator/prime mover unit and is the same for both
stages.
The first stage has a short time delay and is intended to protect
against overspeeding during the normal shutdown procedure. By trip-
ping the main circuit-breaker via the reverse power function, the pos-
sibility of overspeeding due to a regulator failure or leaking steam
valves is avoided. To prevent false tripping in the case of steam tur-
bines, the reverse power function is enabled by auxiliary contacts on
the main steam valves of the prime mover.
The purpose of the second stage is to guard against excessively high
temperature and possible mechanical damage to the prime mover.
The time delay can be longer in this case, because the temperature
only increases slowly. Should power swings occur at low load due to
the speed regulator or system instability, the second stage will not be
able to trip, because the function repeatedly picks up and resets
before the time delay can expire. It is for just such cases that the
integrator ('Delay' function) is needed to ensure reliable tripping.
3-227
Block
t 1> Trip
U
P>
I Trip Trip
t 2>
Start
t 3>
Integrator
t1 fast stage interlocked with the main turbine steam valve

t2 slow stage
t3 slow stage with an integrator where power swings are to be expected
Fig. 3.58 Reverse power protection for steam turbines
Typical settings:
PN determined by the generator cosGN
P Setting (steam turbines of medium power) - 0.005
Max / Min Min
Drop-Ratio 60 %
Angle connection to IR and UR 0
connection to IR and URS +30
connection to IR and UST -90
connection to IR and UTR +150
Phi Compensation 0.0
Stage 1:
Delay 0.5 s
Stage 2:
Delay 20 s
or
Integrator ('Delay' function) for delay on operation and reset
Trip time 20 s
Reset time 3s
Integration 1
3-228
Note:
The following must be set for a 'Minimum forward power' scheme
according to Anglo-Saxon practice:
P Setting >0
MaxMin Min
Drop-Ratio 150 %
3-229
3-230
3.5.18. Overtemperature protection (Overtemp.)
A. Application
Overtemperature protection with accurate thermal image of the pro-
tected unit.
B. Features
1st order thermal model
Alarm and tripping stages
Adjustable initial temperature
DC component filter
Harmonic filter
Single or three-phase current measurement
Maximum value detection for three-phase measurement
Temperature rise calculated 40 times for each thermal time
constant setting
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Alarm
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Temperature rise
Power dissipation
Current
3-231
D. Overtemperature protection settings - Overtemp.


Trip 00000000
Theta-Begin % 100 000 100 001
Theta-Warning % 105 050 200 001
Theta-Trip % 110 050 200 001
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
TimeConstant min 5.0 1.0 500.0 0.1
Current Input Chan. CT/VT-Addr 0
Warning Signal SignalAddr ER
Trip
Tripping logic (matrix) for this function.
Theta Begin
Initial temperature rise. This temperature rise is set every time the
function is initiated, e.g. when the protection is switched on or
settings are changed.
Theta Warning
Temperature rise at which alarm is given.
Theta Trip
Temperature rise at which tripping takes place.
IB-Setting
Reference current: Normal operating current of the protected unit
referred to the rated current of the protection.
Time Constant
Thermal time constant for calculating the temperature rise.
Settings < 2 minutes are not permitted.
Number Of Phases
No. of phase currents measured.
Current Input Chan.
defines CT input channel.
All the current channels are available for selection. In the case of a
three-phase measurement, the first channel (R phase) of the group
of three must be selected.
3-232
Block Input
I/P for blocking the function
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Warning Signal
Alarm signal.
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
3-233
Settings:
Initial temperature rise Theta Begin
Temperature rise for alarm Theta Warn
Temperature rise for tripping Theta Trip
No. of phase currents measured Number Of Phases
Reference current IB-Setting
Thermal time constant Time Constant
The overtemperature function guards against inadmissible tempera-
ture rise caused by overcurrents. The temperature rise is modeled on
the basis of the influence of the current flowing through the protected
unit on a thermal image of the protected unit. In contrast to the over-
load protection, this function can protect units of any power rating and
thermal capacity. It monitors the temperature rise and not the absolute
temperature. It takes account therefore neither of the ambient tempera-
ture nor the effectiveness of a cooling system.
The protection operates with a thermal image of the temperature rise.
A current change causes the temperature of the protected unit to rise
from an initial value to a final value according to one or several ex-
ponential functions. The various influences on the temperature rise are
the thermal response of, for example in the case of a power trans-
former, the cooling water, the oil, the windings etc. One exponential
function such as that of the transformer oil is always more dominant
than the others. The thermal image used in the protection for modeling
the transient temperature rise operates according to an exponential
function.
The excursion of the temperature rise modeled by the protection is
determined by the following:
the final steady-state temperature corresponding to the current
the increased temperature rise due to the transfer functions.
The protection assumes that at the rated current IGN of the protected
unit, the temperature rise represents 100 %. Neglecting any compen-
sation of the A/D channel or the base current IB, the protection meas-
ures a current IR determined by the rated current of the CTs:
IN2
IR = IGN
IN1
where
IGN : rated current of the protected unit
IN1, IN2 : rated primary and secondary CT currents.
The current referred to the rated current IN of the protection is:
IR IGN IN2
IR = =
IN IN IN1
3-234
The steady-state temperature rise becomes:

2
I I
W = GN N2 100 %
IN IN1
At a constant current, the tripping time is:
2

[%] 100 I
0 I
t = ln B
I
2
[%] 100

IB
where
0 : initial temperature rise
: pick-up temperature rise
: thermal time constant
The effective tripping time can be higher than the calculation period
(= / 40).
The variables in the submenu 'DISPLAY OPERATING VALUES' are
the calculated temperature rise, the power dissipation and the current.
The first two are mean values over the period of calculation (= / 40).
The values shown in the event list is the power dissipation at the
instant of tripping.
Example:
Rated current of the protected unit IGN = 8000 A
CT ratings IN1 = 10000 A
IN2 = 5A
Rated relay current IN = 5A
The temperature rise measured by the protection at a rated current of
IGN is:
2
8000 5
W = 100% = 64 %
5 10000
The settings for overtemperatures of 5 % and 10 % respectively are:
Theta-Warn = 67 %
Theta-Trip = 70 %
Normally the protection is configured such that the initial temperature
rise is 100 % ('Theta-Begin' = 100 %).
With IB adjusted, the settings become:
IB IGN IN2 8000 5
Base current: = = = 0 .8
IN IN IN1 5 10000
3-235
The settings for alarm and tripping are then:

Theta-Warn = 105 %
Theta-Trip = 110 %
Transformers have two distinct exponential functions, one for the oil
and one for the winding. The corresponding mean values are:
Oil : oil = 50 K oil = 120 min
Winding : W oil = 10 K W = 10 min
The total temperature rise of the winding is thus W = 60 K.
Since however the model operates with just a single exponential func-
tion, its temperature rise has to follow the best possible equivalent ex-
ponential function as shown in Fig. 3.59. The steady-state temperature
rise of this equivalent function is identical to the total temperature rise
of the winding, i.e. W = 60 K in the example above. Its time con-
stant, however, is typically 60 to 80% of the temperature rise of the oil
(see Fig. 3.60).
3-236
1,5
nw = 100C nw = 60C
1,0
i = in Oil = 90C Oil = 50C
w = 10 min tOil = 120 min
0 t
w ( t = )
[C] 160
l ( t = ) w
140
Oil
120
nw
100
Oil Oil
80
60
40
w Oil
20
w Oil
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 t [min]
HEST 905 035 C
Fig. 3.59 Temperature rise of a transformer winding
3-237

=126.4C
140
Winding temperature
Thermal image temperature
120
130
[C] [%]
120
110
Overload i = 1.2
Temperature rise at rated nw n oil = 10C w = 10 min
110 current
n oil = 50C oil = 120 min
Thermal time constant setting = 90 min
100 100
0 100 200 300 400 500
t [min]
HEST 905 036 C
Fig. 3.60 Actual temperature rise of the winding compared to the

temperature rise of the thermal image
Typical settings:
IB-Setting to be calculated
Theta Begin 100 %
Theta Warn 105 %
Theta Trip 110 %
3-238
3.5.19. Synchrocheck function (SynchroChck)
A. Application
Checking the synchronisation criteria (amplitudes, phase-shift and
frequency difference) of two electrical systems and, providing the
corresponding limits are satisfied, enabling them to be connected in
parallel.
B. Features
Monitoring synchronism:
Single-phase voltage measurement.
Comparison of the voltages (dU), phase-shift (dPh) and
frequencies (df) of two voltage vectors. Calculation of the
corresponding differences between the voltage vectors in the
complex plane.
Evaluation of the fundamental frequency components of the
voltage signals (after filtering of harmonic and DC components).
Monitoring voltage:
Single or three-phase voltage measurement.
Evaluation of instantaneous values (non-digitally filtered analog
signals) resulting in a large permissible frequency range. Detection
of the largest and smallest of the three phase voltages in the case
of three-phase measurement.
No filtering of harmonics or DC component.
Choice of phase for the voltage I/Ps on busbar and line sides (for
amplitude and phase-angle adjustment).
Additional voltage I/P (for use in double busbar stations) with
provision for remote switchover.
Provision for remote selecting the operating mode.
I. Analog inputs:
Voltages (2 or 3 single or three-phase I/Ps for 'Voltage Busbar
Input 1', ' Voltage Busbar Input 2' and ' Voltage Line Input')
II. Binary inputs:

2 I/Ps for enabling the synchrocheck function
('Release Input 1' and 'Release Input 2')
3 I/Ps for interlocking the synchrocheck O/Ps ('Interlock
Synchrocheck Bus 1', ' Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2' and '
Interlock Synchrocheck Line')
1 I/P for bypassing the synchrocheck function ('Override
Synchrocheck')
2 I/Ps for remotely selecting operating mode
('Operation Mode Input 1' and ' Operation Mode Input 2')
3-239
2 I/Ps for remotely switching voltage channels in double busbar

stations ('Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active').
III. Signal Outputs:

Function pick-up ('Start Signal')
Circuit-breaker closing enable signal ('Permit To Close Signal')
Function disabled signal ('Sync. Blocked Signal')
Enable O/P blocked signal ('Trig. Blocked Signal')
Synchrocheck bypassed signal ('Sync. Override Signal')
Amplitude difference in permissible range ('Ampl Diff. OK
Signal')
Phase-shift in permissible range ('Phase Diff. OK Signal')
Frequency difference in permissible range ('Freq Diff. OK
Signal')
Busbars energised ('Live Bus OK Signal')
Busbars de-energised ('Dead Bus OK Signal')
Line energised ('Live Line OK Signal')
Line de-energised ('Dead Line OK Signal')
IV. Measurements:
Synchronism check (single-phase)
'Voltage amplitude difference'
(dU) = U bus - U line
'Maximum Phase Difference'
(dPh) = PhBusbar - PhLine
'Frequency Difference'
(df) = f bus - f line
Voltage check (single or three-phase)
Max. busbar voltage 'Maximum Busbar Voltage'
Min. busbar voltage 'Mininimum Busbar Voltage'
Max. line voltage 'Maximum Line Voltage'
Min. line voltage 'Mininimum Line Voltage'
[Single-phase: max. voltage = min. voltage
Three-phase: max. voltage = max. phase-to-phase voltage
min. voltage = min. phase-to-phase voltage]
3-240
D. Synchrocheck function settings - SynchroCheck

GENERAL PARAMETERS
PermitToClose Trip Chan 00000000
Max. Voltage Diff. UN 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05
Max. Phase Diff. deg 10.0 05.0 80.0 05.0
Max. Frequency Diff. Hz 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05
Minimum Voltage UN 0.70 0.60 1.00 0.05
Maximum Voltage UN 0.30 0.10 1.00 0.05
Operation Mode SynChck only (Select)
SupervisingTime s 0.20 0.05 5.00 0.05
t-Reset s 0.05 0.00 1.00 0.05
ANALOG INPUT
Voltage Busbar Input Phase 1ph R-S (Select)
Voltage Busbar Input 1 AnalogAddr 0
Voltage Busbar Input 2 AnalogAddr 0
Voltage Line Input Phase 3ph Y (Select)
Voltage Line Input AnalogAddr 0
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
PermitToClose Signal SignalAddr ER
Sync. Blocked Signal SignalAddr
Trig. Blocked Signal SignalAddr
Sync. Override Signal SignalAddr
Ampl.Diff. OK Signal SignalAddr
Phase Diff. OK Signal SignalAddr
Freq. Diff. OK Signal SignalAddr
Live Bus OK Signal SignalAddr
Dead Bus OK Signal SignalAddr
Live Line OK Signal SignalAddr
Dead Line OK Signal SignalAddr
BINARY INPUTS
Bus 1 Active BinaryAddr T
Bus 2 Active BinaryAddr F
Release Input 1 BinaryAddr T
Release Input 2 BinaryAddr F
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1 BinaryAddr F
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2 BinaryAddr F
Interlock Synchrocheck Line BinaryAddr F
Override Synchrocheck BinaryAddr F
Operation Mode Input 1 BinaryAddr F
Operation Mode Input 2 BinaryAddr F
3-241
GENERAL PARAMETERS
Permit To Close
Logic (matrix) O/P channel at which the CB close signal is
available.
Max. Voltage Diff.
Max. permissible voltage difference dU between the phases
used for checking synchronism.
Max. Phase Diff.
Max. permissible phase-shift dPh between the voltages of the
phases used for checking synchronism.
Max. Frequency Diff.
Max. permissible difference of frequency df between the phases
used for checking synchronism.
Minimum Voltage
Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and line being live
(lowest phase voltage in the case of three-phase measurement).
Maximum Voltage
Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and line being
dead (highest phase voltage in the case of three-phase
measurement).
Operation Mode
Possible synchrocheck function operating modes:
'SynChk only': Synchrocheck
[Synchrocheck conditions fulfilled AND
(bus live AND line live)]
'dBus & lLine': Synchrocheck OR
(bus dead AND line live)
'lBus & dLine': Synchrocheck OR
(bus live AND line dead)
'dBus dLine': Synchrocheck OR
(bus dead AND line live) OR
'dBus & dLine': Synchrocheck OR
Supervising Time
Period between the function picking up and it issuing the CB close
enable ('PermitToClos').
All the conditions for synchronism must remain fulfilled during this
time, otherwise the function is reset.
t-Reset
Reset time following the non-fulfilment of one or more synchronism
conditions.
3-242
ANALOG INPUT
Voltage Busbar Input Phase
Choice of phase I/P on the busbar side.
Possible settings:
1 ph RS, ST or TR; 1 ph RE, SE or TE; 3 ph Y; 3 ph
The phase chosen must agree with the voltage I/P channel
selected (i.e. ' Voltage Busbar Input 1' and, if selected, ' Voltage
Busbar Input 2').
Voltage Busbar Input 1
1st voltage I/P channel on the busbar side. This must agree with
the phase chosen (' Voltage Busbar Input Phase'). In the case of a
three-phase connection (' Voltage Busbar Input Phase' = '3 ph Y' or
'3 ph '), the first channel
(R phase) of a three-phase group must be chosen.
2nd voltage I/P channel (if applicable) on the busbar side. This
must agree with the chosen phase (' Voltage Busbar Input Phase').
In the case of a three-phase connection (' Voltage Busbar Input
Phase' = '3 ph Y' or '3 ph '), the first channel (R phase) of a three-
phase group must be chosen.
If a second I/P is not configured, the function only takes account of
the 1st voltage I/P channel (' Voltage Busbar Input 1').
Voltage Line Input Phase
Choice of phase I/P on the line side.
Possible settings:
1 ph RS, ST or TR; 1 ph RE, SE or TE; 3 ph Y; 3 ph
The phase chosen must agree with the voltage I/P channel
selected (i.e. ' Voltage Line Input').
Voltage Line Input
Voltage I/P channel on the line side. This must agree with the
chosen phase (' Voltage Line Input Phase'). In the case of a three-
phase connection (' Voltage Line Input Phase' = '3 ph Y' or '3 ph
'), the first channel (R phase) of a three-phase group must be
chosen.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Permit To Close Signal
Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is enabling closure
of the circuit-breaker. It is generated at the end of the measuring
period ('Supervising Time') and remains active for as long as the
synchronism conditions are fulfilled, or until a blocking signal is
received, or the synchrocheck function resets.
Start Signal
Signal generated at the instant the conditions for synchronism are
fulfilled for the first time.
3-243
Sync. Blocked Signal

Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is disabled, i.e.
both the I/Ps 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1' and ' Interlock
Synchrocheck Bus 2' are set to 'FALSE' (F), and that the
synchrocheck algorithm has been discontinued.
Trig. Blocked Signal
The CB close enabling O/Ps are blocked (one or more blocking
I/Ps are at logical '1'), but the synchrocheck algorithm continues to
run.
Sync. Override Signal
Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is bypassed and a
CB close enabling signal is being generated ('PermitToClos')
regardless of whether the synchronism conditions are fulfilled or
not.
Ampl. Diff. OK Signal
Signal indicating that the voltage difference dU between the
phases used for checking synchronism has fallen below the value
of the parameter 'Max Voltage Diff.'.
Phase Diff. OK Signal
Signal indicating that the phase-shift dPh between the phases
used for checking synchronism has fallen below the value of the
setting of 'Max. Phase Diff.'.
Freq. Diff. OK Signal
Signal indicating that the difference of frequency df between the
phases used for checking synchronism has fallen below the value
of the setting of 'Max. Frequency Diff.'.
Live Bus OK Signal
Signal indicating that the busbar is energised.
(U > 'Minimum Voltage')
Dead Bus OK Signal
Signal indicating that the busbar is de-energised.
(U < 'Maximum Voltage')
Live Line OK Signal
Signal indicating that the line is energised.
(U > ' Minimum Voltage')
Dead Line OK Signal
Signal indicating that the line is de-energised.
(U < ' Maximum Voltage')
3-244
BINARY INPUTS
Bus 1 Active, Bus 2 Active
Binary I/Ps for switching between voltage I/P channels by an
remote signal in the case of double busbars (mimic busbar). This
I/Ps are only active providing the second busbar I/P channel has
been configured ('Voltage Busbar Input 2').
F: I/P disabled
T: I/P enabled
'Bus 1 Active' 'Bus 2 Active' Selected voltage I/P

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE 'Voltage Busbar Input 1' active
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE 'Voltage Busbar Input 2' active
Other conditions The previous voltage I/P
remains active
Release Input 1, Release Input 2

Binary I/Ps for enabling the synchrocheck function. (The I/Ps are
connected internally to an OR gate so that at least one must be set
to 'TRUE' (T) or appropriately controlled by an remote signal.) If
both I/Ps are set to 'FALSE' (F), the functions routine (synchronism
algorithm) does not run.
These I/Ps are used where the synchrocheck function is only
needed at certain times (e.g. in auto-reclosure schemes).
F: synchrocheck function disabled
T: synchrocheck function enabled
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1, Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2, Interlock

Synchrocheck Line
Binary I/Ps for interlocking the enabling signals at the O/P of the
synchrocheck function.
These would be typically controlled by fuse failure equipment
(m.c.bs) monitoring the VT circuits.
F: blocking I/P disabled
T: blocking I/P continuously enabled
Parts of the function effected by the blocking I/Ps:
Assuming that both busbar I/P channels have been configured,
the active blocking I/P depends on the statuses of the binary
I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active':
3-245
'Bus 1 Active' 'Bus 2 Active' Selected voltage I/P

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1' and
'Interlock Synchrocheck Line'
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2' and
'Interlock Synchrocheck Line'
Other conditions The previous blocking I/Ps remain
active
Assuming that only the first busbar I/P channel has been
configured, all the blocking I/Ps are active regardless of the
statuses of the binary I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active'.
The active blocking I/Ps are connected internally to an OR gate
and the CB close enabling O/Ps are blocked, if one of them is set
to 'TRUE' (T).
Override Synchrocheck
Binary I/P for bypassing the synchrocheck function. This causes an
enabling signal to be issued regardless of whether the
synchronism conditions are fulfilled or not. It overrides the
functions blocking and other enabling I/Ps.
F: I/P disabled
T: I/P enabled (The synchrocheck O/P 'Permit To Close' is
continuously active.)
Operation Mode Input 1, Operation Mode Input 2
I/Ps for remotely selecting the operating mode:
F: I/P disabled
T: I/P continuously enabled
'Operation Mode 'Operation Mode Synchrocheck mode

Input 1' Input 2'
(F) FALSE (F) FALSE Mode specified in the control
program ('Operation Mode')
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE Synchrocheck OR
(T) TRUE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR
OR
3-246
3.5.19.1. General
It is only permissible to connect two energised parts of a power
system, if the difference between the amplitudes of their voltages and
the phase-shift between them are within acceptable limits.
The purpose of the synchrocheck function is to determine these
parameters and decide whether it is permissible to connect the sys-
tems in parallel.
The function thus issues an enable signal ('Permit To Close'),
providing the voltages of the two systems are higher than the set
minimum voltage ('Minimum Voltage') and
the difference between the voltage amplitudes dU
the phase-shift dPh
the difference between the frequencies df
do not exceed the limits set for the parameters 'Max. Voltage Diff.', 'Max.
Phase Diff.' and 'Max. Freq Diff' for the adjustable time 'Supervising
Time'.
According to the operating mode ('Operation Mode') selected, the
function also permits de-energised parts of a power system to be
coupled.
Provision is also made for switching between voltage I/Ps belonging to
the busbars of a double busbar station by appropriately controlling two
binary I/Ps ('Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active'). Note that the function
can only check the synchronism of two voltages at any one time, that
of one of the busbars and that of the line.
The synchrocheck function is therefore used mainly
to connect infeeds in parallel and to connect outgoing feeders to
the system
to interconnect two synchronous or asynchronous parts of a power
system
in auto-reclosure schemes
as a safety check when carrying out manual switching operations
Note:
The expressions in brackets are the names of the corresponding
setting parameters. Refer also to Section D.
3-247
Application example: Feeder connected to double busbars
SS1
SS2
T1
CB
Line
VT Line
T2
Closing
command
Switching
unit
Permit to Close
Bus 2 Active
Voltage Line Input
Bus 1 Active
VT SS2 Interlock Synchrocheck

Voltage Busbar Input 2 Synchrocheck Line
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2
VT SS1
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1
HEST 045 018 C
Fig. 3.61 Principle of synchrocheck scheme for determining the

instant when it is permissible to connect a feeder to the
power system (the voltages of busbar 'SS2' and the line
are monitored).
where:
SS1, SS2 : busbar 1, busbar 2
VT SS1, VT SS2, VT Line : VTs on busbar 1, busbar 2 and line
T1, T2 : isolators on busbars 1 and 2
CB : circuit-breaker
Voltage Busbar Input 1,
Voltage Busbar Input 2 : voltage I/P channels on the busbar side
Voltage Line Input : voltage I/P channel on the line side
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1,
Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2,
Interlock Synchrocheck Line:
I/Ps for blocking the synchro-check
function by the VT fuse failure
equipment
3-248
Bus 1 Active, Bus 2 Active : Binary I/Ps for switching between the
analog busbar voltage I/Ps in
accordance with the configuration of the
isolators (mimic busbar)
3.5.19.2. Settings
Max. voltage difference dU Max. Voltage Diff.
Max. phase-shift dPh Max. Phase Diff.
Max. frequency difference df Max. Frequency Diff.
Minimum voltage level for monitoring Minimum Voltage
(determination of whether plant is energised)
Maximum voltage level for monitoring Maximum Voltage
(determination of whether plant is de-energised)
Choice of operating mode Operation Mode
Measuring period (delay before issuing Supervising Time
enable)
Reset delay t-Reset
Choice of phase for monitoring on the Voltage Busbar Input Phase
busbar side
Choice of phase for monitoring on the Voltage Line Input Phase
line side
Monitoring the conditions for synchronism ('Max. Voltage Diff.', 'Max.
Phase Diff.' and 'Max. Frequency Diff.')
The determination of voltage difference, phase-shift and frequency
difference is performed for just one of the phases of the three-phase
system. For this purpose, the analog values are first filtered by a digital
Fourier bandpass filter (to obtain the fundamentals) and then the
orthogonal components 'U bus' and 'U line' are derived.
The phase-shift dPh between the voltages and the difference between
their amplitudes dU are calculated from the corresponding vector
diagram in the complex plane.
Apparent
d
bus, : complex vectors for line
U bus and U line
L
line B
B, L : angular velocities for
bus
dPhi bus and line
PhiL d = bus line
PhiB dPhi = PhiB PhiL
Real
HEST 925 018 C
Fig. 3.62 Monitoring the conditions for synchronism
3-249
The frequency difference df is obtained by determining the rate at

which the phase-shift between the voltage vectors varies:
df
d
(dPhi) (B L )
df
The conditions for synchronism are fulfilled, providing the values of the
resulting variables are within the limits set for 'Max.Voltage Diff.', 'Max
Phase Diff.' and 'Max. Frequency Diff.'.
Typical values:
Max.Voltage Diff.: 0.2 UN
Max Phase Diff.: 10
Max. Frequency Diff.:
50 mHz - for connecting largely synchronous parts of a stable
closely meshed system or where high demands
with regard to synchronism have to be fulfilled.
100 mHz - in auto-reclosure schemes with long dead times
(e.g. three-phase slow reclosure) or for auto-
reclosure of short transmission lines.
200 mHz - in auto-reclosure schemes with short dead times,
but where high slip frequencies are to be expected.
3-250
Note:
The setting of the synchronism measuring period ('Supervising
Time') must be chosen to correspond to the settings for the maximum
phase-shift and maximum frequency difference.
Monitoring the voltage in two power systems

('Minimum Voltage', 'Maximum Voltage')
The determination of voltage amplitude can be either based on
monitoring a single phase or all three phases depending on how the
particular AnalogAddr is configured. If the three phases are included,
then the highest voltage of the three is detected for the maximum limit,
respectively the lowest of the three for the minimum limit.
In order to be able to monitor the voltages in a wide frequency range,
instantaneous values are measured (instead of digitally filtered analog
voltages).
The voltage detectors may be used to determine whether a system is
de-energised or whether it is energised:
A system is considered to be 'de-energised', if its voltage (highest
of the three phases in the case of three-phase measurement) falls
below the setting of the parameter 'Maximum Voltage'.
A system is considered to be 'energised', if its voltage (lowest of
the three phases in the case of three-phase measurement)
exceeds the setting of the parameter 'Minimum Voltage'.
On no account will an enable signal permitting closure of the circuit-
breaker be issued, should the voltage lie between the limits of
'Maximum Voltage' and 'Minimum Voltage'.
Typical values:
Minimum Voltage 0.70 UN
Maximum Voltage 0.30 UN
Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck function

('Operation Mode')
Basically, an enable signal will always be issued, if the conditions for
synchronism ('dU', 'dPh' and 'df') are fulfilled for the prescribed period
and both systems, i.e. busbar and line, are energised
(voltage > Minimum Voltage').
In cases where closure of the circuit-breaker should also be enabled
when one system is de-energised, e.g. connection of a radial feeder,
this can be achieved by appropriately setting the parameter 'Operation
Mode':
3-251
'Operation Mode' Closure enabled when:

'SynChk only' Synchronism conditions fulfilled AND
(busbar > 'Mininum Voltage' AND
line > 'Minimum Voltage')
'dBus & lLine' 'SyncChk only' OR
(busbar < 'Maximum Voltage' AND
line > 'Minimum Voltage')
'lBus & dLine' 'SyncChck only' OR
(busbar > 'Minimum Voltage' AND
line < 'Maximum Voltage')
'dBus | dLine' 'SyncChk only' OR
line > 'minVoltage')
OR
(busbar > 'Minimum Voltage' AND
'dBus & dLine' 'SyncChk only' OR
Remote mode selection:

Four of the five operating modes can be selected by external signals
applied to two of the functions binary I/Ps ('Operation Mode Input 1'
and 'Operation Mode Input 2').
Binary I/P signals Mode (see above)

'Operation Mode Input 1'
'Operation Mode Input 2'
(F) FALSE (F) FALSE 'Mode set in the control program'
('Operation Mode')
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE 'dBus & lLine'
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE 'lBus & dLine'
(T) TRUE (T) TRUE 'dBus | lLine'
Choice of phase for the voltage I/P on the busbar and line sides
('Voltage Busbar Input Phase', 'Voltage Line Input Phase')
The phase voltage ('Voltage Busbar Input Phase', 'Voltage Line Input
Phase') to be used for determining synchronism can be entered
separately for busbar and line I/Ps (to facilitate individual adjustment of
phase-angle and amplitude).
All single and three-phase voltages are available for setting (1ph RS,
ST or TR; 1ph RE, SE or TE; 3ph Y; 3ph ), but the ones chosen must
agree with the setting for the corresponding I/P channels (see Section D.
'Synchrocheck function settings').
3-252
Where both busbar I/Ps are in use, the definition of the phase ('Voltage
Busbar Input Phase') applies to both busbars.
Notes:
A phase-to-phase measurement is to be preferred for a single-
phase voltage measurement.
If a single-phase I/P has to be chosen on both sides, the same
phase should be used wherever possible.
If a three-phase 'Y' connection is selected, phase-to-phase
voltages are formed internally. This reduces the harmonic content
and enables the function to continue to be used in ungrounded
systems, which are required to remain in service with a single earth
fault.
According to the setting for 'Voltage Busbar Input Phase' and
'Voltage Line Input Phase', either a just one phase or all three
phases are monitored.
Whether or not the conditions for synchronism ('dU', 'dPh' and 'df')
are fulfilled is determined on the basis of a single phase, whereby
the following apply:
Where three phases are monitored on busbar and line sides,
the phase-to-phase potential URS is the one extracted for
further processing.
Should a three-phase measurement be defined on one side
and a single-phase on the other, Then the single-phase voltage
set for the single-phase I/P is used on both sides.
The measuring period ('Supervising Time'), reset time ('t-Reset')

and the operating time of the function and also the dead time of
any auto-reclosure function
Measuring period ('Supervising Time'):
This adjustable delay time, which is initiated at the end of the pick-up
time, is the period during which all the conditions for synchronism must
be continuously fulfilled to permit closure of the circuit-breaker. The
timer is reset should one of the parameters move out of the permis-
sible range.
Providing they all remain within their preset ranges, the enable signal
('Permit To Close') is issued at the end of the measuring period.
Especially in auto-reclosure applications, it is of advantage to set the
measuring period ('Supervising Time') in relation to the settings for
'Max. Phase Diff.' and 'Max. Frequency Diff.'. It also provides facility for
allowing for the operating time of the circuit-breaker:
2 (' Max. Phase Diff .' ) []
' Supervising Time' [s ] (tv + ts ) [s ]
(' Max Frequency Diff .' ) [Hz ] 360
3-253
where:
ts: circuit-breaker operating time
Typical range: 0 ... 100 ms
tv: time required by the function to pick up
(response by the function to transient phenomena in the input
voltage and timer tolerances):
typically 60... 80 ms for values of 'Supervising Time' < 200 ms
typically 80... 100 ms for values of 'Supervising Time' 200 ms
The above setting for the measuring period ensures that for a constant
frequency difference df within the setting of 'Max. Frequency Diff.', the
phase-shift dPh will still be inside the set permissible angular range (-
'Max. Phase Diff.' to + 'Max. Phase Diff.') at the end of the time
'Supervising Time'.
Typical values:
For a phase-shift setting ('Max. Phase Diff.') of 10:
'Max Frequency Diff.' 'Supervising Time'

200 mHz 100... 200 ms
100 mHz 250... 450 ms
50 mHz 600...1000 ms
Minimum operating time of the function:

The minimum operating time achieved by the function, i.e. the shortest
possible time between the instant the synchronism conditions are
fulfilled for the first time and the generation of the signal enabling the
circuit-breaker to be closed 'Permit To Close', is given by the sum of
the measuring time setting 'Supervising Time' and the pick-up
response time 'tv' of the function.
Min. operating time = ('Supervising Time') + tv
Auto-reclosure dead time:
In an auto-reclosure scheme, the dead time set for the auto-reclosure
function must be at least as long as the minimum operating time of the
synchrocheck function given above in order to permit the synchro-
check function to issue an enable signal ('Permit To Close') within the
dead time:
dead time min. operating time = ('Supervising Time') + tv
Reset time ('t-Reset'):
From the instant that one or more of the synchronism conditions are
no longer fulfilled, the enabling signal O/P ('Permit To Close') and the
pick-up signal reset after the time set for 't-Reset'.
This ensures the a CB closing signal can be maintained for a certain
minimum time.
3-254
Typical value:
t-Reset 50 ms
Note:
Where high slip frequencies df are to be expected, 't-Reset' must
be short enough to prevent the phase-shift from exceeding the set
permissible range of phase-angles (-'Max. Phase Diff.' to + 'Max.
Phase Diff.') during the reset time.
3.5.19.3. Binary inputs of the function

Inputs for switching between analog busbar inputs
('Bus 1 Active', 'Bus 2 Active')
Where the two busbar I/Ps ('Voltage Busbar Input 1' and 'Voltage
Busbar Input 1') have been configured for a double busbar installation,
the measurement can be switched from one busbar to the other by
signals corresponding to the isolator positions applied to the I/Ps 'Bus
1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active':
'uBus1Activ' 'uBus2Activ' Analog I/Ps for synchronisation

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE 'Voltage Busbar Input 1' and 'Voltage Line Input'
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE 'Voltage Busbar Input 2' and 'Voltage Line Input'
Other combinations of the states of these two I/Ps do not result in any
switching of the AnalogAddr channels and the prevailing situation is
maintained.
Notes:
The function (timer, all measuring elements and the associated
O/Ps) is automatically reinitialised when busbar I/Ps are switched.
This procedure takes about 60 ms (internal response times).
The function then begins to evaluate the new busbar voltage and
from this instant onwards the generation of an enable signal
('PermitToClos') relating to the new system configuration is
possible.
The two binary I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active' are inactivated
in configurations in which only one busbar I/P ('Voltage Busbar
Input 1') is defined.
Blocking inputs for preventing the synchrocheck function from issuing

an enable signal (' Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1', ' Interlock
Synchrocheck Bus 2', ' Interlock Synchrocheck Line')
These are assigned to the corresponding voltage I/Ps and used mainly
when the VT circuit can be interrupted by fuse-failure equipment
(miniature circuit-breakers). In such cases, the blocking I/Ps are
connected to auxiliary contacts on the fuse-failure equipment. This
3-255
precaution eliminates any risk of the synchrocheck function permitting

the closure of a circuit-breaker onto a line it considers to be de-ener-
gised, which in reality is under voltage.
Functionality of the blocking I/Ps:
Both busbar voltage I/Ps have been configured:
Which of the blocking I/Ps is enabled depends on which of the
busbar I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active' is active, i.e. on which
voltage I/P is active:
'uBus1Activ' 'uBus2Activ' Active blocking I/Ps

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1' and 'Interlock
Synchrocheck Line'
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2' and 'Interlock
Synchrocheck Line'
Other combinations of the states of these two I/Ps do not influence

the blocking I/Ps and the prevailing situation is maintained.
If only one busbar voltage I/P is configured, all the blocking I/Ps
('Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 1', 'Interlock Synchrocheck Bus 2'
and 'Interlock Synchrocheck Line') are enabled regardless of the
states of the binary I/Ps 'Bus 1 Active' and 'Bus 2 Active'.
The active blocking I/Ps are connected to an OR function so that a
logical '1' from any one of them causes all the measuring elements
and the associated O/Ps ('Start Signal', 'Ampl. Diff. OK Signal', 'Phase
Diff. OK Signal', 'Freq. Diff. OK Signal', 'Live Bus OK Signal', 'Live Line
OK Signal', 'Dead Bus OK Signal' and 'Dead Line OK Signal') and also
the enabling O/P ('Permit To Close Signal') to reset. The algorithm of
the synchrocheck function, however, continues to run.
Inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function

('ReleaseInp1', 'ReleaseInp2')
Since the synchrocheck function is only required during the relevant
switching operations and auto-reclosure cycles, it may be blocked at
all other times to save processor time. The binary I/Ps 'Release
Input 1' and 'Release Input 2' are used for this purpose. Internally they
are the I/Ps of an OR gate, so that at least one must be active before
the synchrocheck program will run.
If neither of the two enabling signals is at logical '1', processing of the
algorithm ceases. All the functions measuring element O/Ps also reset
immediately and any circuit-breaker close enabling signal ('Permit To
Close Signal') resets after the time set for 't-Reset'.
Conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function is especially recom-
mended, where it has to operate in conjunction with other functions in
the same unit such as distance protection, which are critical from the
operating time point of view, so as not to adversely influence their trip-
ping times.
3-256
Application example:
The scheme below shows a synchrocheck function in the same unit as
the distance protection and autoreclosure functions. The synchrocheck
function is only required during the dead times of the autoreclosure
function. This is achieved by connecting the inverted O/P signal
'AR Ready' generated by the autoreclosure function to the binary I/P
'Release Input 1' (or 'Release Input 2') of the synchrocheck unit.
Start
Distance Auto- AR ready Synchro-
function reclosure check
Trip CB function
Release Input 1
Trip CB 3P Close CB
Synchro Check
Permit to Close Signal
HEST 045024 C
Fig. 3.63 Block diagram showing the interconnections between

the functions for a scheme with conditional enabling of
the synchrocheck function
Input for bypassing the synchrocheck function

('OverridSync')
A signal applied to this binary I/P causes a 'Permit To Close Signal' to
be generated immediately regardless of whether the conditions for
synchronism are fulfilled or not.
This I/P overrides all other blocking or enabling I/Ps.
Inputs for remotely selecting the operating mode

('OpModeInp1', 'OpModeInp2')
Refer to 'Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck function' in
Section 3.5.19.2. 'Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck
function'.
3-257
3-258
3.5.20. Breaker failure protection (BreakerFailure)
A. Application
Redundant tripping schemes (RED 1))
Repeated tripping attempts (BFP 2))
Backup tripping (BFP)
End fault protection (EFP 3))
Unconditional tripping (UT 4))
External trip initiation
B. Features
Single or three-phase operation
Blocking
Two independent timers (t1, t2)
Transfer tripping
Provision for disabling features (RED, BFP, EFP, UT)
Unique ID for each binary input and output
I. CT/VT inputs
Current
II. Binary inputs

13205 Block BFP
13710 Start L1
13720 Start L2
13730 Start L3
13740 Start L1L2L3
13705 External Start
13770 CB Off
13775 CB On
13780 Ext. Trip t2
13785 Ext. Trip EFP
III. Binary outputs

23305 Trip t1
23315 Trip t1 L1
23320 Trip t1 L2
23325 Trip t1 L3
23310 Trip t2
23340 Remote Trip
1) Redundant
2) Breaker failure protection
3) End fault protection
4) Unconditional trip
3-259
23345 Red. Trip L1

23350 Red. Trip L2
23355 Red. Trip L3
23375 EFP Rem Trip
23370 EFP Bus Trip
23330 Retrip t1
23360 Uncon Trip t1
23380 Ext Trip t1
23335 Backup Trip t2
23365 Uncon Trip t2
IV. Measurements
Current amplitude L1
3-260
D. Breaker failure protection settings BreakerFailure

General Parameters
Current Input CT/VT-Addr 0
I Setting IN 1.20 0.20 5.00 0.01
Delay t1 s 0.15 0.02 60.00 0.01
Delay t2 s 0.15 0.02 60.00 0.01
Delay tEFP s 0.04 0.02 60.00 0.01
t Drop Retrip s 0.05 0.02 60.00 0.01
t Drop Butrip s 0.05 0.02 60.00 0.01
t Pulse RemTrip s 0.05 0.02 60.00 0.01
t1 active on (Select)
t2 active on (Select)
RemTrip active on (Select)
EFP active on (Select)
Red active on (Select)
Start Ext act. on (Select)
RemTrip after t1 (Select)
CB Commands
TRIP t1 00000000
TRIP t1 L1 00000000
TRIP t1 L2 00000000
TRIP t1 L3 00000000
TRIP t2 00000000
Remote Trip 00000000
Red Trip L1 00000000
EFP Rem Trip 00000000
EFP Bus Trip 00000000
3-261
Binary Inputs
Block BFP BinaryAddr F
Start L1 BinaryAddr F
Start L1L2L3 BinaryAddr F
External Start BinaryAddr F
CB Off BinaryAddr F
CB On BinaryAddr F
Ext Trip t2 BinaryAddr F
Ext Trip EFP BinaryAddr F
Signal Outputs
Trip t1 SignalAddr ER
Trip t1 L1 SignalAddr ER
Trip t2 SignalAddr ER
Remote Trip SignalAddr ER
Red Trip L1 SignalAddr ER
EFP Rem Trip SignalAddr ER
EFP Bus Trip SignalAddr ER
Retrip t1 SignalAddr ER
Uncon Trip t1 SignalAddr ER
Ext Trip t1 SignalAddr ER
Backup Trip t2 SignalAddr ER
Uncon Trip t2 SignalAddr ER
General Parameters
NrOfPhases
defines the number of phases supervised.
'1' single-phase operation
'3' three-phase operation
3-262
Current Input
defines the CT input channel. Single and three-phase CTs can be
set. The first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected must
be specified for three-phase CTs.
I Setting
Pick-up of the current criterion for the breaker failure protection
(BFP), end fault protection (EFP) and the redundant tripping logic
(RED).
Delay t1
'Retrip' tripping delay
Delay t2
Backup tripping delay.
Delay tEFP
End fault protection delay.
t Drop Retrip
Reset delay for 'Retrip', 'Redundant Trip' and 'External Trip Initiate'.
t Drop Butrip
Reset delay for backup tripping attempt.
t Puls RemTrip
Transfer tripping impulse width.
t1 active
defines whether timer t1 is enabled or disabled.
'on' Timer t1 enabled
'off' Timer t1 disabled
t2 active
defines whether timer t2 is enabled or disabled.
'on' Timer t2 enabled
'off' Timer t2 disabled
RemTrip active
defines whether transfer tripping is enabled or disabled.
'on' Transfer tripping enabled
'off' Transfer tripping disabled
EFP active
defines whether the end fault protection is enabled or disabled.
'on' End fault protection enabled
'off' End fault protection disabled
Red active
defines whether the redundant logic is enabled or disabled.
'on' Redundant tripping logic enabled
'off' Redundant tripping logic disabled
3-263
Start Ext active

defines whether the unconditional tripping logic is enabled or
disabled.
'on' Unconditional tripping logic enabled
'off' Unconditional tripping logic disabled
RemTrip after
defines the delay for transfer tripping.
't1' after BFP time t1
't2' after BFP time t2
CB Commands
TRIP t1
output TRIP t1 (matrix tripping logic). This output is activated for a
'Retrip', 'External Trip Initiate' or 'Unconditional Trip'.
TRIP t1 L1, L2 or L3
outputs TRIP t1 L1, L2 or L3 (matrix tripping logic). This output is
activated for a phase segregated 'Retrip'.
TRIP t2
output TRIP t2 (matrix tripping logic). This output is activated for a
'Backup Trip' or 'Unconditional Trip' the after second time step t2.
REMOTE TRIP
output REMOTE TRIP (matrix tripping logic).
RED TRIP L1, L2 or L3
outputs RED TRIP L1, L2 or L3 (matrix tripping logic).
EFP REM TRIP
output EFP REM TRIP (matrix tripping logic).
EFP BUS TRIP
output EFP BUS TRIP (matrix tripping logic).
Binary Inputs
Block BFP
Input for blocking the function.
F: not blocked
T: blocked
3-264
Start L1, L2 or L3
BFP or RED Start in phase L1, L2 or L3
F: disabled
T: enabled
Start L1,L2 or L3
BFP or RED Start in all three phases
F: disabled
T: enabled
External Start
starts the unconditional trip.
F: disabled
T: enabled
CB-Off
signals that the circuit-breaker is fully open and also used to start
the end zone fault protection.
F: CB not fully open
T: CB fully open
CB-On
signals that the circuit-breaker is fully closed.
F: CB not fully closed
T: CB fully closed
Ext Trip t2
Input for signals from the other BFP units in the station.
F: No external trip after t2
T: External trip after t2
Ext Trip EFP

Input for signals from the end zone fault outputs of the other BFP
units in the station.
F: No trip for end zone fault
T: Trip for end zone fault
3-265
Signal Outputs
Trip t1
signals a trip which is activated by one of the following logics:
Repeat trip (see 'Retrip t1')
External trip (see 'Ext Trip t1')
Unconditional trip (see 'UnconTrip t1')
Trip t1 L1, L2 or L3
signals a repeat trip of phase L1, L2 or L3.
Trip t2
signals a backup trip. This signal is activated by the following
logics:
Backup trip after t2 (see 'Backup Trip t2')
Unconditional trip after t2 (see 'UnconTrip t2')
Remote Trip
signals a transfer trip.
Red Trip L1, L2 or L3
signals a redundant trip of phase L1, L2 or L3.
EFP Rem Trip
signals an end zone trip. This signal is an impulse of length
't Puls Rem Trip' generated when the EFP timer has timed out.
EFP Bus Trip
signals an end zone trip. This signal is generated when the EFP
timer has timed out and resets 'tDrop Bu Trip' after the initiating
signal has reset.
Retrip t1
signals a repeat trip after t1. This signal is generated when the
BFP timer t1 in one of the phases has timed out.
Uncon Trip t1
signals an unconditional trip after t1. This signal is generated when
the UT timer t1 has timed out.
Ext Trip t1
signals an external trip. This signal is generated when either the
input 'Ext Trip t2' or 'Ext Trip EFP' is enabled.
Backup Trip t2
signals a backup trip after t2. This signal is generated when the
BFP timer t2 has timed out.
Uncon Trip t2
signals an unconditional trip after t2. This signal is generated when
the UT timer t2 has timed out.
3-266
Settings:
Pick-up current setting: I Setting
Tripping delay: Delay t1
Delay t2
Delay tEFP
Rest delay: t Drop Retrip

t Drop BuTrip
Impulse: t Puls RemTrip
Enabled signals: t1 active

t2 active
RemTrip active
EFP active
Red active
Start Ext active
Pick-up current setting 'I Setting'

If the BFP current detector pick-up setting is too low, there is a pos-
sibility that the detectors may reset too late after it has successfully
tripped the circuit-breaker. This can be caused by damped oscillations
on the secondary side of the CT.
On the other hand, if the setting is too high, the BFP may fail to oper-
ate at all should, for example, the current fall below pick-up again due
to severe CT saturation. A typical setting for the pick-up current is just
below the minimum fault current that can occur on the respective line.
3-267
Tripping delays t1 and t2

The tripping delay settings enable the BFP to be adapted to its par-
ticular operating environment (e.g. circuit-breaker characteristics etc.).
Fig. 3.64 shows a typical timing diagram for clearing a fault.
Fault CB Repeat
incidence (1) Start (2) open (3) trip (4)
CB Backup
open (5) trip (6)
Tripping time tCB open tReset + tMargin
tCB open tReset + tMargin
Delay t1
Delay t2
Fig. 3.64 Operation of the BFP/UT timers t1 and t2
Timing in the case of breaker failure:

(1) A fault has occurred and been detected by a protective device.
(2) A tripping command is transmitted to the circuit-breaker after the
unit protection operating time which also starts the BFP. The
tripping command can be either single (Start Lx) or three-phase
(Start L1L2L3). The redundant signals are also activated at the
same time.
(3) The circuit-breaker ruptures the fault current.
(4) After the reset delay tReset plus a safety margin tMargin , the BFP
either detects that the fault current has been interrupted and the
protection function resets, or the fault current continues to flow
and a second attempt is made by the BFP to trip the circuit-
breaker.
(5) The second attempt to trip the circuit-breaker is successful and
the fault current is interrupted.
3-268
(6) After a further reset delay tReset plus a safety margin tMargin , the
BFP either detects that the fault current has been interrupted and
the protection function resets, or the fault current continues to
flow and the BFP initiates backup tripping.
If the BFP is only required to carry out a single breaker failure step,
timer t1 can be disabled (see 't1 active'). The response of the BFP
corresponds once again to Fig. 3.64, but with timer t1 set to zero.
Timing in the case of an unconditional trip:

(1) A fault has occurred and been detected by a protective device.
(2) A signal at input 'External Start' starts the UT function.
(4) If after the reset delay tReset plus a safety margin tMargin , the CB
auxiliary contact 'CB-On' still signals to the UT that the CB is
closed, a second attempt is made by the UT function to trip the
circuit-breaker.
(5) The second attempt to trip the circuit-breaker is successful and
the fault current is interrupted.
(6) If after a further reset delay tReset plus a safety margin tMargin the
CB auxiliary contact 'CB-On' still signals to the UT that the CB is
closed, backup tripping is initiated by the UT function.
Delay t1 t CB open + tReset + t Margin
Delay t 2 t CB open + tReset + tMargin
tCB open CB opening time including arc extinction time

tReset Reset time of the current criterion 1)
tMargin Allowance for variations in normal fault clearing times 2)
1) see reset time of the current detector tReset

2) see safety margin tMargin
3-269
Tripping delay tEFP

The setting for tEFP can be seen from Fig. 3.65 which shows a typical
timing diagram for tripping a fault.
CB CB EFP
tripping signal (1) open (3) tripping signal (4)
tCB open
tReset + tMargin
tCB Off tEFP
CB
tripped (2)
Fig. 3.65 Timing diagram for an end zone fault
(1) Tripping command applied to the CB.

(2) CB auxiliary contact sends a signal that the CB is open to the
'CB-Off' input of the function which is used to start the EFP.
(4) After a reset delay plus a safety margin, the current unit either
detects that the fault current has been interrupted and the EFP
function resets, or the fault current continues to flow and an EFP
signal is issued.
tEFP t CB open t CB Off + tReset + tMargin
tCB open CB opening time including arc extinction time

tCB Off CB opening time of the CB auxiliary contact
(Signal 'CB open')
tReset Reset time of the current detector 3)
tMargin Allowance for variations in normal fault clearing time 4)
3) see reset time of the current detector tReset

4) see Margin time tMargin
3-270
Reset time of the current detector tReset

The current detector reset time is determine by the power system
configuration as follows:
Power system time constant up to 300 ms
Fault current up to 40 IN
Primary CTs TPX: tReset = 28 ms (ISetting 0.2 IN)

Primary CTs TPY: tReset = 28 ms (ISetting 1.2 IN)
tReset = 38 ms (ISetting 0.4 IN)
Safety margin tMargin

A safety margin of 20 ms is recommended.
Reset times 't Drop Retrip' and 't Drop Butrip'

The function includes two independently adjustable signal reset de-
lays.
't Drop Retrip' determines the reset delay for the following signals:
23305 Trip t1
23315 Trip t1 L1
23320 Trip t1 L2
23325 Trip t1 L3
23345 Red Trip L1
23350 Red Trip L2
23355 Red Trip L3
23330 Retrip t1
23360 Uncon Trip t1
23380 Ext Trip t1
't Drop BuTrip' determines the reset delay for the following signals:
23310 Trip t2
23370 EFP Bus Trip
23335 Backup Trip t2
23365 Uncon Trip t2
3-271
Impulse 't Pulse RemTrip'

't Puls RemTrip' determines the width of the transfer tripping impulse
for the following signals:
23340 Remote Trip
23375 EFP Rem Trip
Enabling and disabling the various features

A number of the functions features can be enabled and disabled.
t1 active
This setting provides facility for disabling the timer t1. When it is dis-
abled, none of the 'repeat trip' group of signals is generated.
t2 active
This setting provides facility for disabling the timer t2. When it is dis-
abled, none of the 'backup trip' group of signals is generated.
RemTrip active
This setting provides facility for disabling transfer tripping. When it is
disabled, none of the 'remote trip' group of signals is generated.
EFP active
This setting provides facility for disabling the end fault protection.
When it is disabled, none of the 'end fault' group of signals is gener-
ated.
Red active
This setting provides facility for disabling the redundant protection.
When it is disabled, none of the 'redundant' group of signals is gener-
ated.
Start Ext active

This setting provides facility for disabling the unconditional trip feature.
When it is disabled, none of the 'unconditional trip' group of signals is
generated.
3-272
3.5.21. Transformer differential protection function (Diff-Transf)
A. Application
Differential protection of two and three-winding power transformers
generator/transformer units.
B. Features
Non-linear, current-dependent operating characteristic
(see Fig. 3.66)
High stability during through-faults and in the presence of CT satu-
ration
Short tripping times
Inrush current restraint
using the second harmonic
detection of the highest phase current
detection of the load current to determine whether the
transformer is energised or not
Compensation of phase group
Compensation of CT ratio
Scheme for three-winding transformers
phase-by-phase comparison of the highest winding current with
the sum of the currents of the other two windings
DC current component filter
harmonic filter
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current (2 or 3 sets of 3 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

tripping
R phase trip
S phase trip
T phase trip
IV. Measurements:
R phase summation current
S phase summation current
T phase summation current
R phase restraining current
S phase restraining current
T phase restraining current
3-273
D. Transformer differential protection settings - Diff-Transf


Trip 00000000
g - Setting IN 0.2 0.1 0.5 0.1
v Setting 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.25
b Setting IN 1.50 1.25 5.00 0.25
g - High IN 2.00 0.50 2.50 0.25
I - Inst IN 10 3 15 1
Inrush Ratio % 10 6 20 1
Inrush Time s 5 0 90 1
a1 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
s1 Y (Select)
Current Inp.Chan. 1 CT/VT-Addr 0
a2 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
s2 y0 (Select)
CurrentInp.Chan. 2 CT/VT-Addr 0
a3 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
s3 y0 (Select)
Current Inp.Chan. 3 CT/VT-Addr 0
Inrush Input BinaryAddr F
High Set Input BinaryAddr F
Trip-R Signal SignalAddr
Trip-S Signal SignalAddr
Trip-T Signal SignalAddr
Inrush Signal SignalAddr
Stabilizing Signal SignalAddr
Explanation of Parameters:
Trip
function (matrix).
g - Setting
defines the basic setting g of the operating characteristic.
v - Setting
defines the pick-up ratio v of the operating characteristic.
b - Setting
defines the value b of the operating characteristic. This should be
set to approx. 1.5 times rated current.
3-274
g - High
High-set Basic setting which replaces the normal basic setting
when activated by the HighSetInp input.
It is used to prevent false tripping due, for example, to excessive
flux (overfluxing).
I - Inst
Differential current, above which tripping takes place regardless of
whether the protected unit has just been energised or not. This
enables the time required to trip to be shortened for high internal
fault currents.
Inrush Ratio
Ratio of 2nd harmonic current content to fundamental current
above which an inrush condition is detected.
Inrush Time
Time during which the inrush detection function is active following
initial energisation or an external fault.
a1
Amplitude compensation factor for winding 1.
s1
Connection of winding 1 (primary)
Settings provided:
Y: star-connected
D: delta-connected
Current Inp.Chan. 1
defines the CT input channel for winding 1.
The first channel (R phase) of the two groups of three phases must
be specified.
a2
s2
Vector group for winding 2.
Settings provided: All usual groups of connection with
designation of the circuit (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag)
phase-angle adjustment of the winding 2 voltage in relation to
the winding 1 voltage in multiples of 30.
Current Inp.Chan.2
defines the CT input channel for winding 2. The first channel
(R phase) of the two groups of three phases must be specified.
a3
3-275
s3
Vector group for winding 3.
Settings provided: All usual groups of connection with
designation of the circuit (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag)
phase-angle adjustment of the winding 3 voltage in relation to
the winding 1 voltage in multiples of 30.
Current Inp.Chan. 3
defines the CT input channel for winding 3. The first channel (R
phase) of the two groups of three phases must be specified.
The protection operates in a two-winding mode, if a third input is
not selected.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Inrush Input
activates the inrush restraint, even though the transformer is
already energised.
This enables, for example, the inrush current resulting from
energising a parallel transformer to be detected and compensated.
F: not used
High Set Input

determines whether the normal or high-set Basic setting g is used.
F: not used
Trip Signal
Output for the signalling tripping.
Trip-R Signal
Output for signalling tripping by R phase.
Trip-S Signal
Output for signalling tripping by S phase.
Trip-T Signal
Output for signalling tripping by T phase.
3-276
Inrush Signal
Output for signalling inrush current.
Stabilizing Signal
Output for signalling IH > b during through-faults.
I
IN
3
Operation for
I'1
<b
Operation IN
2 or
I'2
<b
IN
1
v Restraint
g
1 b 2 3 IH
IN
Protected I2
I1 unit
I3 HEST 965 007 C
I = I1 + I2 + I3 Operating (differential)
current
I' I' cos for cos 0

IH = 1 2 Restrain current
0 for cos < 0
whereI'1 = greatest of I1,I2 ,I3

I' 2 = I1 + I2 + I3 I'1
= (I'1; I' 2 )
Fig. 3.66 Operating characteristic: Diff-Transf
3-277
Basic setting g
Pick-up ratio v
Operating characteristic switching point b
Increased basic setting g - High
Pick-up differential current I - Inst
(uninfluenced by inrush detection)
Pick-up ratio of the inrush detector Inrush Ratio
Inrush detection time Inrush Time
Amplitude compensation factors a1 a2 a3
Connection of winding 1 s1
Vector groups of windings 2 and 3 s2 s3
The purpose of the transformer differential protection is to detect
phase faults in the protected zone. It may also detect earth faults and
interturn faults. The protection is sensitive, fast and absolutely
discriminative.
Basic setting g
The basic setting 'g' defines the pick-up setting of the differential
protection for internal faults.
The lowest possible value should be chosen for 'g' (high sensitivity) to
enable it to detect transformer earth faults and interturn faults in
addition to phase faults.
The setting of 'g' must not be too low, however, to avoid the danger of
false tripping due to:
CT errors
the maximum off-load transformer current at the maximum short-
time system voltage
tap-changer range
The off-load current (magnetising current) of a modern power
transformer is very low, usually between 0.3 and 0.5 % of rated current
at rated voltage. During short-time voltage peaks, e.g. following load
shedding, the off-load current can reach as much as 10 % or more.
The tap-changer voltage range is usually between 5 % and 10 %,
but ranges of 20 % and more occur. Its influence has to be taken into
account regardless of whether the tap-changer is manually operated or
controlled by a voltage regulator.
All three of these influences cause a differential current, which flows
during normal system conditions. The setting for 'g' must be chosen
above the level of this differential current. A typical setting is g = 0.3 IN
(i.e. 30 % IN).
3-278
Pick-up ratio v
The pick-up ratio 'v' is decisive for the stability of the protection during
external phase and earth faults, i.e. in the presence of high through-
fault currents.
The value of 'v' defines the ratio of the operating current to restraint
current. The setting should be such that when operating under load
conditions, weak faults causing only a low differential current can still
be detected, but at the same time there is no risk of false tripping
during through-faults. A typical setting is v = 0.5.
Restraint current b
The restraint current b defines the point at which the characteristic is
switched.
The sloped section of the characteristic ensures that the relay remains
stable during through-faults with CT saturation.
The ability to switch between two different slopes enables the
characteristic to adapt to different conditions.
The recommended setting for 'b' is 1.5. This provides high stability
during high through-fault currents and sufficient sensitivity to detect
fault currents in the region of the operating current.
Factors a2 and a3
The full setting range for the factors a2 and a3 for compensating
current amplitude only applies, if the reference value for the CT input
channels is set to 1.000. At all other settings, the permissible upper limit
reduces in proportion to the ratio of the CT input channel reference values
(transformer winding 1/winding 2, respectively winding 3/winding 1).
Operating characteristic
The restraint current in the case of a three-winding power transformer
is derived from the currents of two windings and not three. In the
interest of the best possible through-fault stability, the two largest
currents of the three windings are used for this purpose.
The restrain current is either defined by the equation
IH = I1 I2 cos for -90 < < 90
or is zero
IH = 0 for 90 < < 270
The angle
= (I1, I2 )
3-279
The following vector diagram of the current on primary and secondary

sides and of the differential current measured for a transformer on load
was assumed.
I2 I1

I2
I HEST 905 003a C
The following vector diagrams then result for a through-fault
I2 I1
= 0
I I2
HEST 905 003b C
and an internal fault
I2 I1 I2
= 180
HEST 905003c C
According to the equation for the restrain current, IH becomes:

for ( = 0) : IH = I1 x I2
and for internal faults
a) fed from on side (I2 = 0) : IH = 0
b) fed from both sides ( = 180) : IH = 0
High through-fault currents can cause CT saturation and for this
reason, the gradient of the characteristic is switched to infinity for
IH/IN > b.
When measuring the operating characteristic, it should be noted that
the gradient of the characteristic is only switched to infinity, if apart
from IH, I1 and I2 are also higher than b.
3-280
I
IN
0,75
0,5
0,25
g b
IH
0 0,5 1 1,5 IN
HEST 905 003d C
Fig. 3.67 Operating characteristic of the transformer differential

protection for high through-fault currents
This characteristic, however, would scarcely be able to detect faults in

the protected zone at through currents as low as the load current.
Therefore if one of the windings is conducting a current which is less
than the setting of 'b', i.e.
I1 I
or 2 < b
IN IN
the characteristic is switched back to the gradient according to 'v'.
I
IN
0,75
0,5
0,25
g b
IH
0 1 2 IN
HEST 905 003e C
Fig. 3.68 Operating characteristic of the transformer differential

protection for low through-fault currents
This characteristic provides higher sensitivity for the detection of faults

in the protection zone.
3-281
Example:
Internal fault and rated current flowing through the transformer:
I1 I
= 4 2 =1 = 0
IN IN
-I 2
I1
I I2 HEST 905 003f C
I = I1 + I2 = 4 IN IN = 3 IN
IH = I1 I2 cos = 4 IN 1IN 1 = 2 IN
Internal faults will thus be reliably detected when a through-current is

flowing even at the highest setting for 'v'.
Increased basic setting g-High
The increased basic setting g-High has been provided as a means of
preventing false tripping under particular operating conditions. It is
activated by an external signal.
Situations occur during normal system operation which cause a higher
differential current, e.g.
increased magnetising current as a consequence of a higher
system voltage (switching operations, following load shedding,
generator regulator faults etc.)
large variation of current ratio (tap-changer at the end of its range)
Providing special conditions of this kind are detected by a voltage relay
or a saturation relay, the corresponding signal can be used to switch
the differential function from 'g' to 'g high'. The recommended setting is
'g high' = 0.75 IN.
The reset ratio following a trip remains unchanged at 0.8 g.
Differential current I-Inst

The differential current setting 'I Inst' facilitates fast tripping of high
internal fault currents (inhibits the detection of an inrush current).
The setting must be higher than any normal inrush current to be
expected.
A typical value for power transformers of low to medium power is:
I - Inst. = 12 IN.
3-282
Pick-up ratio for detecting inrush

The setting of this ratio determines the sensitivity of the function for
detecting inrush.
Generally the ratio of 2nd harmonic to fundamental is greater than
15 %. Allowing a margin to ensure that an inrush condition is detected,
a setting of 10 % is recommended.
Duration of active inrush detection

The setting for how long the inrush detection function should be active
depends on how long the danger of false tripping due to an inrush
current, which only flows through one winding, exists. A typical setting
is 5 s.
The inrush detection is active if:
the binary input 'Inrush Input' is set,
the Transformer is shut off
during the period 'Inrush Time' after it is recognized that the
transformer has been switched on.
The transformer will be recognized as switched on, when the highest
phase current in all the windings exceeds 4 % IN (in case the 'a' factor
and the reference value is one).
Amplitude compensation factors a1, a2, a3

Factors a1, a2 and a3 facilitate compensating differences between the
rated currents of the protected unit and the CTs.
The 'a' factors are defined by the ratio of the CT rated current to the
reference current.
In the case of a two-winding transformer, both windings have the same
rated power and the rated current of the transformer is taken as the
reference current. Providing the factor 'a' is correctly set, all the
settings of g, v, b, g-High and I-Inst. are referred to the rated current of
the transformer and not to the rated primary current of the CT
3-283
250/5 A
1
110 kV 131 A
25 MVA
20 kV 722 A
2
1000/5 A
HEST 905 004a C
ICT1 250
IB1 = ITN1 = 131 A a1 = = = 1.91
ITN1 131
ICT 2 1000
IB2 = ITN2 = 722 A a1 = = = 1.38
ITN2 722
The reference current is only chosen to be different from the

transformer rated current, if this should be necessary because of the
setting range of factors a1 and a2.
Differences between the rated currents of the CTs and a two-winding
transformer may also be compensated by adjusting the reference
values of the A/D channels. In this case and assuming the power
ratings of the two windings to be the same, the factors are set to
a1 = a2 = 1. The reference values in the case of the above example
are:
ITN1 131 ITN2 722
= = 0.524 = = 0.722
ICT1 250 ICT 2 1000
A further difference lies in the fact that the 'a' factors only effect the
differential protection, whilst changing the reference values of the A/D
channels effects the currents for the entire protection system (all
functions and measured variables).
The windings of a three-winding transformer normally have different
power ratings and a reference power has to be chosen, which is used
for all three windings. All the settings of the protection are then
referred to the reference currents calculated from the reference power.
3-284
250/5 A
25 MVA 110 kV 131 A
1 500/5 A
3
2
5 MVA 6,3 kV 458 A

600/5 A
20 MVA 20 kV 577 A HEST 905 004b C
Assuming the reference power SB to be 25 MVA, the reference

currents IB and the 'a' factors become:
SB 25 ICT1 250
IB1 = = 131 A a1 = = = 1.91
3 UTN1 3 110 IB1 131
SB 25 ICT 2 600
IB 2 = = 722 A a2 = = = 0.83
3 UTN2 3 20 IB 2 722
SB 25 ICT 3 500
IB3 = = 2291 A a3 = = = 0.22
3 UTN3 3 6.3 IB3 2291
The same results are obtained by applying the formulas with the
reference power SB:
UTN1 ICT1 3 110 250 3

a1 = = = 1.905
SB 25000
UTN2 ICT 2 3 20 600 3

a2 = = = 0.83
SB 25000
UTN3 ICT 3 3 6.3 500 3

a3 = = = 0.218
SB 25000
A further possibility of compensating different rated powers in the case
of three-winding transformers is to use
the reference values of the A/D channels to match the protection to
the different rated currents of CTs and transformer
factors a1, a2 and a3 to compensate the different powers of the
windings.
3-285
The 'a' factors compensate the signals at the inputs of the differential
protection.
If the reference values of the A/D channels are changed, the changes
apply to the entire protection system (i.e. all functions and measured
variables).
This can be seen from the following example.
Reference values:
ITN1 131
Winding 1: Reference value = = = 0.524
ICT1 250
ITN2 577
ICT 2 600
ITN3 458
ICT 3 500
Factors a1, a2 and a3:
ITN1 131
a1 = = =1
IB1 131
ITN2 577
a2 = = = 0.799
IB 2 722
ITN3 458
a3 = = = 0.200
IB3 2291
CTs in the unit transformer feeder

When designing the overall differential protection for a generator/trans-
former unit, there are the following alternative methods of taking ac-
count of the CTs or lack of CTs in the unit transformer feeder (Fig. 3.69).
Alternative No.1: No CTs in the unit transformer feeder.
This alternative is mainly needed for hydroelectric power plants, which
have a relatively low auxiliaries requirement. The disadvantage is that
the zone of protection is unlimited in the direction of the unit
transformer feeder with the possible hazard of false tripping for a fault
on the unit auxiliaries supply system. This hazard can be avoided by
correspondingly setting 'g'.
3-286
i F2
Unit S aux. sys.

transformer
i F
G S GN
i F
HEST 905 009 C
A fault on the unit auxiliaries supply system causes a current iF (in p.u.)
to flow to the generator star-point.
Saux.sys.
iF = iF2
SGN
Example:
Saux.sys.
iF2 = 10; = 0.03
SGN
iF = 10 0.03 = 0.3
It follows from this that 'g' must be set higher than 0.3 to avoid the
possibility of a false trip.
Alternative No. 2: CTs installed in the unit transformer feeder on the
generator side of the unit transformer (Fig. 3.69). These CTs usually
have the same ratio as the generator CTs although the rating of the
unit transformer is much less. The reason is the high fault level on the
generator side of the unit transformer and the consequentially high
thermal and dynamic stress on the CTs.
The reference value of the CT channel of the protection is determined
by the rated current of the generator and not of the unit transformer.
Alternative No. 3: CTs installed in the unit transformer feeder on the
auxiliaries side of the unit transformer (Fig. 3.69). In this case, the CTs
are specified according to the rated current of the unit transformer.
Advantages:
clearly defined zone of protection
reduced performance required of the CTs, which are therefore
cheaper
3-287
Disadvantages:
Interposing CTs may be necessary
reduced sensitivity of the protection for faults in the protected zone,
but on the auxiliaries side of the unit transformer
800/5 A
3000/5 A
300 MVA
GT 220/18 kV
30 MVA
0.8/10 kA 10/1 A
UT 18/6 kV
1/3 kA
10000/5 A
I>
300 MVA
G 18 kV
10 kA
10000/5 A
HEST 905 054 C
Fig. 3.69 The overall differential protection of a genera-

tor/transformer unit
Group of connection of a three-phase transformer s1, s2, s3

Factor s1 defines the connection of the three phase windings 1.
Factors s2 and s3 define the group of connection of windings 2 and
windings 3 respectively, i.e. they define firstly how the windings are
connected and secondly their phase-angle referred to windings 1.
The following arrangement is an example for two generators with a
common step-up transformer:
3-288
d11 d11
2 3
HEST 905 004c C
The factors are correspondingly:

s1 = Y
s2 = d11
s3 = d11
Factors s2 and s3 are defined according to their phase shift in relation
to the HV side, i.e. to windings 1.
Note:
This setting for the vector group (s2 = d11, s3 = d11) assumes that in
relation to the protected unit, the star-point is symmetrically formed
and grounded on the secondary side of the main CTs.
Should this not be possible for some reason (e.g. plant requirements),
the group of connection has to be compensated.
3-289
Compensation for group of connection

Phase-to-phase currents are measured in order to compare primary
and secondary currents without regard to the circuit of the transformer.
The combination of these currents internally in the protection takes
account, however, of their phase relationships. The relationships
between the current vectors for different groups of connection can be
seen from the following illustrations.
For example, for a Yd5 connected transformer

I
R
1R
I 2R Star-connected primary
I R
1S
S
I 1T
I 2S Delta-connected secondary
S
T I 2T
T Phase-angle between the currents of
I
1R the same phase on both sides
5 x 30 = 150
150
I1r (compensated) = 1 / 3 ( I1R + I1S )

I
HEST 905 005 C
I2r (compensated) = I2R
Yy0 Yy6
1 2 I1R I2R 1 2 I
1R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R
Yd1 Yd5
1 2 I 1 2 I
1R I 1R
2R
R R R
R
S S S
S
T T T
T
I 2R
Yd7 Yd11
1 2 I 1R 1 2 I
I 2R 1R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R HEST 905 006 C
3-290
Yz1 Yz5
1 2 I1R I 2R 1 2 I1R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R
Yz7 Yz11
1 2 I 1R 1 2
R I2R I1R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R
1R
Dy1 Dy5
I1R I 2R 1 2
1 2
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I
2R
Dy7 Dy11
1 2 I 1 2
1R
R I2R I1R
R R
S R
S S
T S
T T T
I 2R
Dd0 Dd6
1 2 I 1R I 2R 1 2 I1R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I2R
HEST 905 007 C
Dz0 Dz2
1 2 I 1R I 2R 1 2 I1R
R R R I2R
R
S S S
S
T T T
T
Dz4 Dz6
1 2 I 1 2 I1R
R 1R
R R
S R
S S
T S
T T
T
I
2R
I2R
Dz8 Dz10
1 2 I1R 1 2 I
1R
R R R I2R
R
S S S
S
T T T
T I 2R
HEST 905 008 C
3-291
List of all the compensation matrices for R phase

(S and T phases cyclically rotated):
Compensation matrices Amplitude factor

(R phase)
A = ( 1 0 0) 1
B = (-1 0 0) 1
C = ( 1 -1 0) 1/ 3
D = (-1 1 0) 1/ 3
E = ( 1 0 -1) 1/ 3
F = (-1 0 1) 1/ 3
G = ( 2 -1 -1) 1/3
H = (-2 1 1) 1/3
J = (-1 2 -1) 1/3
K = ( 1 -2 1) 1/3
L = (-1 -1 2) 1/3
M = ( 1 1 -2) 1/3
N = ( 0 1 0) 1
O = ( 0 -1 0) 1
Table 3.6 Compensation matrices and associated amplitude

factors
a) Star connection on winding 1

Two-winding transformer:
Group Comp. matrix Comp. matrix
Winding 1 Winding 2
Yy0 E E
Yy6 E F
Yd1 E A
Yd5 C B
Yd7 E B
Yd11 C A
Yz1 E G
Yz5 C H
Yz7 E H
Yz11 C G
3-292
Three-winding transformer:
Compensation matrix winding 1
X X X
Compensation matrix winding 2 Compensation matrix winding 3
s3 y0 y6 d1 d5 d7 d11 z1 z5 z7 z11
s2
y0 EEE EEF EEA CCB EEB CCA EEG CCH EEH CCG
y6 EFE EFF EFA CDB EFB CDA EFG CDH EFH CDG
d1 EAE EAF EAA COB EAB COA EAG COH EAH COG
d5 CBC CBD CBO CBB CBN CBA CBK CBH CBJ CBG
d7 EBE EBF EBA CNB EBB CNA EBG CNH EBH CNG
d11 CAC CAD CAO CAB CAN CAA CAK CAH CAJ CAG
z1 EGE EGF EGA CKB EGB CKA EGG CKH EGH CKG
z5 CHC HD CHO CHB CHN CHA CHK CHH CHJ CHG
z7 EHE EHF EHA CJB EHB CJA EHG CJH EHH CJG
z11 CGC CGD CGO CGB CGN CGA CGK CGH CGJ CGG
Table 3.7 Summary of the compensation matrices for a three-

winding transformer with a star connection on winding 1
b) Delta connection on winding 1

Applies for two and three-winding transformers:
Group Comp. matrix Comp. matrix
Winding 1 Winding 2 (and 3)
Dy1 A C
Dy5 A F
Dy7 A D
Dy11 A E
Dd0 A A
Dd6 A B
Dz0 A G
Dz2 A K
Dz4 A L
Dz6 A H
Dz8 A J
Dz10 A M
3-293
Example:
The compensation for the currents of a three-winding transformer
Yd5y0 is as follows:
s1 = Y
s2 = d5 CBC results from Table 3.7, i.e. the
s3 = y0
compensation matrix
for winding 1 = C = (1 -1 0) (see Table 3.6)
with an amplitude factor of 1 / 3
compensation matrix = B = (-1 0 0) (see Table 3.6)

for winding 2 with an amplitude factor of 1
compensation matrix = C = (1 -1 0) (see Table 3.6)

for winding 3 with an amplitude factor of 1/ 3
The function currents then become:
Function currents (calculated)

Currents measured at
the CTs
Ir1 1 1 0 IR1
1
Winding 1: Is1 = 0 1 1 IS1
I 3 1 0 1 IT1
t1
Ir 2 1 0 0 IR2

Winding 2: Is2 = 1 0 1 0 IS2
I 0 0 1 I
t2 T 2
Ir 3 1 1 0 IR3
1
Winding 3: Is3 = 0 1 1 IS3
I 3 1 0 1 IT3
t3
3-294
Typical values:
g 0.3 IN
v 0.5
b 1.5
g high 0.75 IN
I - Inst 12 IN
Inrush Ratio 10 %
Inrush Time 5s
a1, a2, a3 have to be calculated
s1, s2, s3 depend on plant
3-295
3-296
3.5.22. Generator differential (Diff-Gen)
A. Application
Differential protection of generators.
B. Features
Non-linear current-dependent tripping characteristic
(see Fig. 3.70)
High stability during through-faults and CT saturation
Short operating times
Optimised for the differential protection of generators, i.e.
no inrush restraint
no compensation of group of connection
only two measuring inputs
Suppression of DC off-set
Suppression of harmonics
I. Analog inputs:
Current (2 sets of 3 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Tripping
R phase trip
S phase trip
T phase trip
IV. Measurements:
R phase summation current
S phase summation current
T phase summation current
3-297
D. Generator differential function settings - Diff-Gen


Trip 00000000
g - Setting IN 0.10 0.10 0.50 0.05
v - Setting 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.25
Current Inp. Chan 12 AnalogAddr 0
Trip SignalAddr ER
Trip-R SignalAddr
Trip-S SignalAddr
Trip-T SignalAddr
Trip
defines the Tripping channel activated by the tripping output of the
g - Setting
Basic setting (sensitivity) g of the operating characteristic.
v - Setting
Pick-up ratio (slope) of the operating characteristic.
Current Inp. Chan.
defines the A/D input channels. The first channel (R phase) of the
two groups of three phases must be specified.
Block Inp Chan
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Signaling Trip
Output for signalling tripping
Note:
The differential protection function does not have a pick-up signal.
Every time it trips, the signal 'GenStart' is set together with 'Trip',
providing the tripping command is configured to be recorded as an
event.
The tripping measurands will be stored in the event list only if the
trip command is configured in the event list.
3-298
Signaling Trip-R
signals that tripping was initiated by R phase.
Signaling Trip-S
signals that tripping was initiated by S phase.
Signaling Trip-T
signals that tripping was initiated by T phase.
Fig. 3.70 Operating characteristic of the generator differential

protection (Diff-Gen)
3-299
Basic setting g - Setting
Pick-up ratio v - Setting
The purpose of the generator differential protection is to detect phase

faults in the stator zone. The protection is sensitive, fast and absolutely
discriminative.
Basic setting g
The basic setting g defines the pick-up of the differential protection for
internal faults. It is the section of the operating characteristic with a low
restraint current IH.
The lowest possible value should be chosen for 'g' (high sensitivity) to
enable it to detect the worst case faults, e.g. when excitation is low.
The protection cannot detect interturn faults on the same winding,
because they do not produce a differential current.
Since, however, a small differential current flows during normal
operation, false tripping could result if 'g' is set too low. The spurious
differential current is usually due to imbalances of CT errors and CT
burdens.
Allowing for an unwanted differential current, a typical setting is 0.1 IN.
Higher values have to be set for 'g' should, for example, the CTs on
opposite sides of the protected unit have different accuracy classes or
their burdens be too high.
The level of primary current at which the protection picks up depends
on the relay settings and the ratio of the CTs. Assuming that there is
no compensation of the A/D channels by reference value settings, it is
calculated as follows:
Relay setting g = 0.1 IN
(where IN is the relay rated current)
Generator rated current IGN = 4000 A
CT rated current IN1 = 5000 A
Calculated primary pick-up current
(referred to the generator rated current):
g IN1 5000
i= = 0.1 = 0.125
IN IGN 4000
3-300
Pick-up ratio v
The pick-up ratio 'v' is decisive for the stability of the protection during
through-faults. This is the section of the operating characteristic with
restraint currents higher than 1.5 IN.
The value of 'v' defines the pick-up current ID for a restrain current IH in
the moderately sloped region of the operating characteristic. In the
case of generator differential protection, 'b' has a fixed setting of 1.5
(compare this with Fig. 3.67 and Fig. 3.68 for transformer differential
protection).
The 'v' setting should be low enough to make the protection sensitive
to faults when load current is flowing, but high enough to avoid false
tripping during through-faults. A typical setting is v = 0.25.
A higher setting (v = 0.5) is chosen in cases where the transient
behaviour of the CTs during through-faults can cause large differential
currents. This is normally the result of under-sized CTs or widely
differing CT burdens.
Typical settings:
g-Setting 0.1 IN
v-Setting 0.25
3-301
3-302
3.5.23. Frequency protection (Frequency)
A. Application
Under and overfrequency
Load-shedding
B. Features
Measurement of one voltage
Frequency calculation based on the complex voltage vector
Undervoltage blocking
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Start
Trip
IV. Measurements:
Frequency
Voltage
3-303
D. Frequency function settings - Frequency


Trip 00000000
Frequency Hz 48.00 40.00 65.00 0.01
BlockVoltage UN 0.20 0.20 0.80 0.10
Delay s 01.00 0.10 60.00 0.01
MaxMin Min (Select)
Blocked (U<) SignalAddr
Trip SignalAddr ER
Start SignalAddr
Trip
defines the tripping relay activated by the tripping output of the
function (matrix).
Frequency
Operating value.
underfrequency not fN
overfrequency not fN
Block Voltage
Peak value of the voltage for blocking.
(reset ratio approx. 1.05)
Delay
Max / Min
defines operation as overfrequency or underfrequency. Settings:
Max: Overfrequency
Min: Underfrequency
Voltage Inp. Chan.
defines the voltage input channel.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
3-304
Blocked (U<) Signal

defines the output for signalling blocking by undervoltage
(signal address).
Trip Signal
Start Signal
There are often several stages of frequency protection using several
single-stage relays.
Settings:
Frequency Frequency
Delay Delay
Undervoltage blocking Block Voltage
Under or over frequency Max / Min
Frequency protection is used either to protect synchronous machines
and prime-movers against the effects of operating at under or
overfrequency or for load-shedding in the event of an overload.
The adverse effects in the former case prevented by the frequency
protection are:
excessive temperature rise and additional iron losses in the
generator
damage to the generator and the prime-mover by vibration
Some synchronous machines are subject to severe vibration if they
are operated at speeds other than their rated speed.
Vibration occurs more usual at speeds below rated frequency, but can
occur both above and below. A complete scheme often comprises
therefore 4 stages, two for alarm and tripping for overfrequency and
two for alarm and tripping for underfrequency. Tripping is delayed to
avoid the risk of maloperation during transients.
3-305
Typical settings:
1. Protection of machines
1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage

Alarm Tripping Alarm Tripping
Frequency (Hz) 51.0 52.0 49.0 48.0
Delay (s) 1.5 3 1.5 3
Block Voltage 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Max / Min Max Max Min Min
Table 3.8 Typical settings for alarm and tripping stages
2. Load-shedding
1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage
Alarm Load-shed. Alarm Load-shed. Load-shed.
Frequency (Hz) 49.8 49.0 48.7 48.8 47.5
Delay (s) 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Block Voltage 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Max / Min Min Min Min Min Min
Table 3.9 Typical settings for alarm and tripping stages
3-306
3.5.24. Rate-of-change of frequency protection (df/dt)
A. Application
Static, dynamic and adaptive load shedding in power utility and
industrial distribution systems
Generator protection
B. Features
One phase voltage as input variable
Supervises the rate-of-change df/dt of the frequency
Provision for enabling by absolute frequency
Insensitive to harmonics and other high-frequency signals
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Blocked by undervoltage
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Rate-of-change of frequency
Absolute frequency
Voltage amplitude
3-307
D. Rate-of-change frequency settings df/dt


Trip 00000000
df/dt Hz/s -1.0 -10.0 +10.0 0.1
Frequency Hz 48.00 40.00 65.00 0.01
Block Voltage UN 0.2 0.2 0.8 0.1
Delay s 0.10 0.10 60.00 0.01
Voltage Inp. Chan. CT/VT-Addr. 0
Blocked (U<) Signal SignalAddr
Trip
df/dt
Rate-of-change of frequency pick-up setting.
Inadmissible settings:
df/dt = 0
df/dt > 0 for absolute frequency settings < fN
df/dt < 0 for absolute frequency settings > fN
Frequency
Setting of the absolute frequency enabling criterion.
Operation for overfrequency or underfrequency is determined by
the absolute frequency setting:
Underfrequency for frequency settings < fN
Overfrequency for frequency settings > fN
The absolute frequency criterion is disabled for a setting of
'Frequency' = 0. In this case, tripping is dependent solely on the
rate-of-change setting df/dt.
Inadmissible settings:
Frequency = fN
Frequency < fN 10 Hz
Frequency > fN + 5 Hz
Block Voltage
Pick-up setting for undervoltage blocking (reset ratio approx. 1.05,
reset time approx. 0.1 s).
3-308
Delay
Delay from the instant the function picks up to the generation of a
tripping command.
Voltage Inp. Chan.
defines the voltage input channel. All voltage inputs may be
selected with the exception of the special voltage inputs for the
100% ground stator fault protection.
Block Input
F: enabled
T: disabled
Blocked (U<) Signal
signals when the function is blocked by the undervoltage criterion.
Trip Signal
3-309
Several rate-of-change of frequency stages are often needed and the
additional stages are achieved by configuring the function as many
times as is necessary.
Settings:
Rate-of-change of frequency df/dt
Absolute frequency Frequency
Undervoltage Block Voltage
Delay Delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function only trips when the rate-of-
change is higher than setting, the absolute frequency criterion picks up
and the voltage is not lower than the undervoltage setting.
The additional absolute frequency criterion prevents unwanted opera-
tion of the rate-of-change function during power system transients.
Where it is desired that the rate-of-change function should operate
without regard to the absolute frequency, this is achieved by setting
the absolute frequency criterion to '0'.
3-310
3.5.25. Overfluxing (Overexcitat)
A. Application
Protection of generators and power transformers against excessive
flux.
B. Features
Evaluation of the voltage/frequency ratio
Single-phase measurement
Definite time delay
Determination of frequency from the complex voltage vector
Over or underexcitation mode
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Voltage / frequency
Frequency
3-311
D. Overfluxing function settings - Overexcitat


Trip 00000000
Delay s 1.00 0.10 60.00 0.01
V/f - Setting UN/fN 1.20 0.20 2.00 0.01
Max / Min MAX (Select)
Voltage Inp. Chan. CT/VT-Addr 0
Trip SignalAddr ER
Start SignalAddr
Trip
Delay
V/f - Setting
Setting of the voltage/frequency ratio for tripping.
Max / Min
defines operation as overfluxing or underfluxing. Settings:
Max: overfluxing
Min: underfluxing
Voltage Inp. Chan.
Block Input
F: Not blocked
T: Blocked
Trip Signal
Start Signal
3-312
Settings:
Magnetic flux V/f - Setting
Delay Delay
Over/underfluxing Max / Min
The overfluxing function is primarily intended to protect the iron cores

of power transformers. Tripping by the function is delayed to avoid
false operation during system transients such as load shedding.
The magnetic flux is not measured directly. Instead the voltage/fre-
quency ratio which is proportional to the flux and easier to measure is
monitored.
Overfluxing can result from either an increase of system voltage or a
reduction of system frequency.
For example, 10 % overfluxing at constant frequency is equivalent to
increasing the value of the U/f ratio to 1.1 UN/fN.
Typical settings:
V/f - Setting 1.1 UN/fN
Delay 5s
Max / Min Max
3-313
3-314
3.5.26. Inverse time overfluxing (U/f-Inv)
A. Application
Protection of generators and power transformers against excessive
flux, especially in heavily loaded non-laminated metal parts, and the
associated excessive heating of the unit.
B. Features
Evaluation of the voltage/frequency ratio
Inverse time delay according to U/f ratio
Determination of frequency from the complex voltage vector
Delay determined by integrating function response
Input of delay table facilitates matching the operating characteristic
to a specific machine according to IEEE Guideline
C 37.91-1985
Adjustable rate of counting backwards when the overfluxing
disappears
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Voltage/frequency
Frequency
3-315
D. Inverse time overfluxing function settings - U/f-Inv

Text Unit Default Min. Max Step

.
Trip 00000000
UB-Setting UN 1.00 0.80 1.20 0.01
U/f-Setting UB/fN 1.10 1.05 1.20 0.01
t-min min 0.20 0.01 2.00 0.01
t-max min 60.0 5.0 100 0.1
t-Reset min 60.0 0.2 100 0.1
t [U/f=1.05] min 70.00 0.01 100 0.01
t [U/f=1.10] min 70.00 0.01 100 0.01
t [U/f=1.15] min 06.00 0.01 100 0.01
t [U/f=1.20] min 01.00 0.01 100 0.01
t [U/f=1.25] min 00.480 0.01 30 0.001
t [V/f=1.30] min 00.300 0.01 30 0.001
t [u/f=1.35] min 00.220 0.01 30 0.001
t [U/f=1.40] min 00.170 0.01 30 0.001
t [U/f=1.45] min 00.140 0.01 30 0.001
t [U/f=1.50] min 00.140 0.01 30 0.001
VoltageInput Chan. CT/VT-Addr 0
Trip
function (matrix).
UB - Setting
Reference (base) voltage for compensating a difference between
the VT rating and the rating of the generator or transformer.
U/f - Setting
Voltage/frequency ratio setting referred to UB / fN.
3-316
t - min
Minimum operating time after being enabled regardless of inverse
characteristic. Operating characteristic constant.
t - max
Maximum operating time after being enabled regardless of inverse
t - Reset
Time taken to reset (from the operating point). This corresponds to
the time taken by the generator to cool.
t[U/f = 1.05] ... t[U/f = 1.50]
Table of 10 values (data input) for defining a specific inverse
operating characteristic.
Voltage Input Chan.
Block Input
F: Not blocked
T: Blocked
Trip Signal
Start Signal
3-317
Settings:
Magnetic flux for enabling char. U/f - Setting
Reference value UB-Setting
Minimum operating time t - Min
Maximum operating time t - Max
10 values defining the inverse t[U/f = 1.05] ... t[U/f = 1.50]
time operating characteristic
Reset time t - Reset
The overfluxing function protects the iron cores of generators and

power transformers against excessive flux.
The magnetic flux is not measured directly. Instead the voltage/fre-
quency ratio which is proportional to the flux and easier to measure is
monitored.
Overfluxing can result from either an increase of system voltage or a
reduction of system frequency.
For example, 10 % overfluxing at constant frequency is equivalent to
increasing the value of the U/f ratio to 1.1 UB /fN.
The limit curve for the maximum magnetic flux (U/f) permissible for
electrical machines is defined in
standards
data supplied by manufacturers
The limit curve for Westinghouse machines is given in Fig. 3.71.

The operating characteristic of the U/f-Inv protection function should
be selected to be just below the short-time limit curve for overfluxing.
The time limits t-min and t-max must also be set (see Fig. 3.72).
It must also be noted that depending on the standard or specification,
the units are also designed for a continuous level of overfluxing apart
from the short-time level. Typical values for generators would be 100,
105, 107.5 and 110%. The choice of characteristic must also take the
continuous level of overfluxing into consideration.
3-318

has not been made, the reference voltage UB for the protection is
calculated from transformer rated voltage UTN and the VT rated
voltages UN1 and UN2 as follows:
U N2
UB = U TN
U N1
The setting is the ratio UB/UN, where UN is the rated voltage of the
protection, otherwise 'UB-Setting' would be 1.0 UN.
The overfluxing curve of the generator must be known in order to set
the times t-min and t-max and enter the table of 10 values t [U/f = 1.05]
... t [U/f = 1.50].
Typical settings:
U/f-Setting 1.1 UB/fN
UB-Setting according to protected unit
t-min 0.2 min
t-max 60 min
t [U/f = 1.05...1.50] according to protected unit1)
t-Reset according to protected unit
A-Westinghouse-transformers
B-Westinghouse-generators
140
135
Permissible overfluxing [%]
130
125
A
120
B
115
110 110%
105 105%
100 continuous
.1 .2 .5 1.0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200
t [min]
HEST 935 004 FL
Fig. 3.71 Permissible overfluxing when off-load
1) Refer to Fig. 3.73 for typical settings for a Westinghouse unit.
3-319
300
HEST 935 023 FL

200
100
50 60
t [min]
t-max
40
30
20
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
0.5 0.6
0.4
0.3
0.2
t-min
0.1
130
125
120
105
100
115
110
Overfluxing [%]
Fig. 3.72 Operating characteristic for a generator with a

permissible continuous voltage in the range
100 5 % UN
3-320
% 150
[VB/fN]
145
140
135
130
Permissible short-time
125
overfluxing
Approximation
120 according to table
115
V/f-Setting
110
105
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 1.0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60
t-min Time in minutes t-max
HEST 935 024 C
Fig. 3.73 Example of an overfluxing curve
Applications for Power Transformers (IEEE C37.91-1985)

150
140
1
2
% 130
V
O
L
T 120
S
/
H
z 110
100
Data on overfluxing limits must be

requested from the various suppliers
90
0.01 0.1 1.0 10 100 1000
Minutes
HEST 935 025 C
Fig. 3.74 Transformer overfluxing limits of three manufacturers
3-321
3-322
3.5.27. Balanced voltage (Voltage-Bal)
A. Application
Monitoring/comparison of two groups of single or three-phase voltage
inputs to detect voltage measurement errors.
B. Features
Comparison of the amplitudes of two groups of voltage inputs
(e.g. line 1and line 2)
Single or three-phase voltage measurement
Indication of group with the lower voltage
Evaluation of voltage balance per phase in the three-phase mode
with selection by OR gate for tripping
Adjustable delays for operation and reset
I. Analog inputs:
Voltage (2 sets of 1 or 3 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
Line 1 trip (voltage input U1)
Line 2 trip (voltage input U2)
IV. Measurements:
Single-phase mode
Difference between voltage amplitudes (U1 - U2)
Three-phase mode
Voltage amplitude difference for R phase (U1R - U2R)
Voltage amplitude difference for S phase (U1S - U2S)
Voltage amplitude difference for T phase (U1T - U2T)
3-323
D. Balanced voltage function settings - Voltage-Bal


Trip 00000000
V - Unbalance UN 0.20 0.10 0.50 0.05
Delay s 0.04 0.00 1.00 0.01
t-Reset s 1.50 0.10 2.00 0.01
Number Of Phases s 3 Ph (Select)
Voltage Input Line1 AnalogAddr 0
Voltage Input Line 2 AnalogAddr 0
Trip Line1 Signal SignalAddr
Trip Line Signal 2 SignalAddr
Trip
V - Unbalance
Voltage difference setting for tripping.
Difference between the amplitudes of the two voltage input
channels which results in tripping. The setting applies to all three
phases in the three-phase mode.
Delay
t-Reset
Time required for the measurement to reset after the tripping
condition has disappeared (reset ratio: 0.90).
Number Of Phases
Voltage Input Line1
defines the 1st analog voltage input channel U1 (line 1).
Voltage Input Line 2
defines the 2nd analog voltage input channel U2 (line 2).
3-324
Block Input
F: Not blocked
T: Blocked
Trip Signal
Start Signal
Trip Line 1 Signal
Same as Trip, but only if the amplitude of the voltage at input U1 is
less than that at input U2 (determination of the voltage difference
per phase in the three-phase mode).
Trip Line 2 Signal
Same as Trip, but only if the amplitude of the voltage at input U2 is
less than that at input U1 (determination of the voltage difference
per phase in the three-phase mode).
U 2R
U1R:
1 x UN
R phase voltage amplitude of
Operates
Line 1 voltage channel 1 (line 1)
(U 1 < U 2 )
0,8 U2R:
Restrains R phase voltage amplitude of
voltage channel 2 (line 2)
Operates Three-phase mode:

0,2 Line 2 The characteristic applies
(U 2 < U 1 )
accordingly to S and T phases
U 1R
0 0,2 0,8 1 x UN
HEST 915 009 C
Fig. 3.75 Operating characteristic of the balanced voltage

function (show for R phase and
the setting V - Unbalance = 0.2 UN)
3-325
Settings:
Max. voltage difference V - Unbalance
Delay Delay
Reset delay t-Reset
The balanced voltage function is intended mainly for detecting voltage

measurement errors by other devices.
It compares the voltages (amplitudes) of two generally identical volt-
age sources connected to the same busbar phase-by-phase.
The function picks up when the difference between voltages of the
same phase exceeds a set pick-up value (V - Unbalance).
A tripping signal is emitted for the source with the lower voltage (Trip
Line 1 Signal or Trip Line 2 Signal) and a general tripping signal (Trip)
generated after a set time delay (Delay), providing the tripping
condition remains fulfilled throughout the delay time. These signals are
available for blocking protection and instrumentation connected to the
faulty source and thus prevent false tripping or measurements.
The tripping signals are maintained for the setting of the reset time
(t-Reset) after the tripping condition is no longer fulfilled.
The function is thus suitable for detecting VT circuit faults (fuse failure)
and faults on the protection and metering circuits connected to them.
3-326
Notes:
Only the voltages of similar sources that have coincident
amplitudes and phase-angles and are connected to the same
busbar should be compared.
To prevent false tripping during extreme variations of frequency, either
the pick-up setting can be increased or the balanced voltage function
can be blocked by a frequency function.
Differing primary rated voltages of the VTs can be compensated by
appropriately setting the reference values of the corresponding A/D
channels. The adjusted reference values then apply for all the
protection functions connected to the same channels.
Application example:
R S T V.t. 1
Line 1
U 1R
Protection/
U 1S instrumentation
U 1T equipment
1
Voltage input
channel (U1 )
Blocking
input
TRIP-Line 1
Voltage comparsion
Blocking
function TRIP
input
(three-phase)
TRIP-Line 2
Voltage input
channel (U2 )
Blocking
input
V.t. 2
U 2R
Protection/
U 2S instrumentation
U 2T equipment
2
Line 2
HEST 915 010 C
Fig. 3.76 Three-phase balanced voltage scheme (one measured

voltage failed)
3-327
The protection monitors the voltages of the two VTs 1 and 2:

In the event of a fault (in this example an open-circuit lead in the circuit
of VT 1), the protection function detects an unbalance and after the set
delay time generates the tripping signals 'Trip' and 'Trip-Line1'.
These then initiate blocking of the metering and protection devices
(such as underimpedance, voltage-controlled overcurrent and distance
protections etc.) connected to VT 1.
Typical settings:
Max. voltage difference (V - Unbalance) 0.20 UN
Delay 0.04 s
Reset time (t-Reset) 0.50 s
3-328
3.5.28. Underimpedance (Underimped)
A. Application
Back-up phase fault protection for the generator feeder.
B. Features
Circular operating characteristic (see Fig. 3.77)
Adjustable time delay
Insensitive to DC component in voltage and current
Detection of the lowest impedance in the three-phase mode
Underimpedance measurement enabled by undercurrent unit (0.1 IN)
I. Analog inputs:
Current
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Impedance (value)
3-329
D. Underimpedance function settings - Underimped


Trip 00000000
Delay s 00.50 0.20 60.00 0.01
Z Setting UN/IN 0.250 0.025 2.500 0.001
Number Of 001 1 3 1
Phases
Current Inp. AnalogAddr 0
Chan.
Voltage Inp. AnalogAddr 0
Chan.
SignalingTrip SignalAddr ER
Start Out SignalAddr ER
Trip
Delay
Z Setting
Pick-up impedance setting.
Number Of Phases
Current Inp. Chan.
Voltage Inp. Chan.
defines the analog voltage input channel.
In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (e.g. the
phase-to-phase voltage R-S) of the group of three selected must
be specified.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
3-330
Signaling Trip
Start Out
Fig. 3.77 Operating characteristic of the underimpedance function
3-331
Settings:
Impedance Z Setting
Delay Delay
The underimpedance function serves as back-up protection for phase

faults on the generator/transformer unit. It is faster and more sensitive
than the overcurrent protection. Its disadvantage is that the zone of
protection is shorter than the differential protection, which serves as
the main protection.
The underimpedance scheme is connected to the CTs at the generator
star-point and to the VTs at the generator terminals. The under-
impedance operating characteristic is a circle in the R/X plane,
whereby the origin represents the location of the VTs. The zone of
protection covers the generator windings the cables and the step-up
transformer.
The setting of the underimpedance function is determined by the short-
circuit reactance of the step-up transformer. Otherwise, the distance
between the step-up transformer and the HV circuit-breaker is mostly
too short to be able to discriminate reliably with the impedance setting
between faults in the generator/transformer unit zone and faults on the
other side of the HV circuit-breaker. The impedance is thus set to 70 %
of the transformer impedance which at least includes the transformer
winding on the generator side in the zone of protection.
The setting of the underimpedance function is referred to rated voltage
and current.
The impedance of the protected zone is determined by the short-circuit
reactance of the step-up transformer and is given by:
z1 = 0.7 xT [p.u.]
The impedance seen by the underimpedance function depends on the
CT and VT ratios Ki and Ku and the rated data of step-up transformer
and protection:
I UN1
K i = N1 Ku =
IN2 UN2
3-332
Step-up transformer
GT
Protection zone
I>
Z<
HEST 905 019 C
Fig. 3.78 Underimpedance protection
3-333
The impedance to be set on the protection in p.u. is:

UTN K i I
Z-Setting = 0.7 xT N [1; 1; V; A]
ITN K u UN
or
UTN IN1 UN2 I
Z-Setting = 0.7 xT N [1; 1; V; A]
ITN IN2 UN1 UN
For simple cases where UTN = UN1, ITN = IN1, UN2 = UN

and IN2 = IN:
Z-Setting = 0.7 xT [1; 1]
where:
z1 impedance of the protected zone
xT short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer
Ki, Ku ratios of CTs and VTs
IN1, IN2 CT rated currents
UN1, UN2 VT rated voltages
UTN, ITN rated voltage and current of the step-up transformer
UN, IN rated voltage and current of the underimpedance
function
The factor of 0.7 avoids any risk of false tripping for a fault on the HV
system at the cost of a zone of protection that is shorter than differen-
tial protection zone.
Example:
Transformer: 100 MVA; 12 kV; 4.8 kA; xT = 0.1
CTs and VTs: 12000/100 V; 5000/5 A
Protection: 100 V; 5A
I 5000
K i = N1 = = 1000
IN2 5
UN1 12000
Ku = = = 120
UN2 100
3-334
Settings:
U TN K I
Z Setting = 0.7 x T i N
I TN Ku U N
12 1000 5
Z Setting = 0.7 0.1 = 0.073
4.8 120 100
It must not be forgotten that a current of at least 0.1 IN must flow

before the underimpedance function is enabled.
Typical settings:
Z Setting 0.07
Delay 0.5 s
x
+0.07
0 r
Z-Setting
-0.07
HEST 935 003 C
Fig. 3.79 Operating characteristic of the underimpedance

function
Setting: Z Setting = 0.07
3-335
3-336
3.5.29. Loss Of Excitation (MinReactance)
A. Application
Detection of inadmissible operating conditions due to under-
excitation of a synchronous generator.
B. Features
Circular operating characteristic (see Fig. 3.80)
Selectable to operate inside or outside the circle
Adjustable size and position of the operating characteristic
Correction of phase errors caused by input circuit
Adjustable time delay
Insensitive to DC component in voltage and current
Detection of the lowest impedance (distance from the centre of the
circle)
Underreactance measurement enabled by undercurrent unit (0.1 IN)
I. Analog inputs:
Current
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Impedance (distance from the centre of the circle)
3-337
D. Underreactance function settings - MinReactance


Trip 00000000
Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.01
XA-Setting UN/IN -2.00 -5.00 00.00 0.01
XB-Setting UN/IN -0.50 -2.50 +2.50 0.01
Angle deg 0 -180 180 5
Max / Min Min (Select)
Current Inp. Chan. AnalogAddr 0
Voltage Inp. Chan. AnalogAddr 0
Signaling Trip SignalAddr ER
Start Out SignalAddr
Trip
Delay
XA-Setting
defines the first intersection of the impedance circle with the
reactance axis (assuming a phase correction setting of 0).
Setting restriction: |XA| < |XB|.
XB-Setting
defines the second intersection of the impedance circle with the
reactance axis (assuming a phase correction setting of 0).
Angle
For compensating phase errors of the analog input signals caused
by the input circuit.
The setting can also be used to move the position of the im-
pedance circle.
Max / Min
defines whether over or underreactance function.
Settings:
Min: underreactance function with tripping inside the circle
Max: overreactance function with tripping outside the circle
Number Of Phases
3-338
Current Inp. Chan.

Voltage Inp. Chan.
In the case of three-phase measurement, the first channel (e.g. the
phase-to-phase voltage R-S) of the group of three selected must
be specified.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Signaling Trip
Start Out
Fig. 3.80 Operating characteristic of the underreactance function

with MaxMin = Min (default)
3-339
Settings:
Reactance XA XA-Setting
Reactance XB XB-Setting
Phase correction Angle
Delay Delay
Integrator (separate 'Delay' function) Trip-Delay

Reset-Delay
Operating principle of the underreactance function

The underreactance or underexcitation function protects the generator
in potentially dangerous operating conditions which can arise in the
event of loss of, or reduced excitation. There is a danger in such situa-
tions of the unit becoming unstable and running out of synchronism.
This causes thermal stress due to induced currents on the one hand,
and mechanical stress due to surges of torque on the other.
It is general knowledge that a synchronous machine may not be
loaded as much capacitively as inductively, because excessive
capacitive load causes it to drop out-of-step. The reason is the steady-
state stability limit as defined by the load angle = 90, which can only
be reached when the unit is underexcited, i.e. for a capacitive power
factor . When the voltage is measured at the generator terminals, the
locus of the stability limit of a generator/transformer set is a circle as
shown in Fig. 3.82. The circle encloses the operating points of an
underexcited generator down to the extreme point XA which repre-
sents total loss of excitation. The protection has a circular charac-
teristic that does not normally coincide with the stability limit at the top
to avoid false tripping during voltage dips caused by power system
faults.
Operation of the function is delayed to allow for possible recovery of
synchronism following dynamic phenomena with brief load angles of
> 90. A typical setting for the time delay is 2 s.
The scheme includes an integrator (separate 'Delay' function) to
maintain the underexcitation signal in the event of power swings. This
is necessary because the normal 'Delay' setting repeatedly resets
during power swings and prevents tripping from taking place.
3-340
Determining the characteristic

The circular operating characteristic of the protection is defined by the
two points A and B. Point A is given in the case of turboalternators by
the unsaturated synchronous reactance xd and in the case of
generators with salient poles by the synchronous reactance xq. As can
be seen from Fig. 3.81, the stability of a generator with salient poles is
given by xq, because the load angle is also determined by this
reactance. The steady-state stability limit is reach at this point when
excitation is lost.
Point B is defined as half the transient reactance xd' and determined
by the voltage and current measured at the generator terminals when
the unit is out-of-step and the generator is in phase opposition to the
power system.
a) Turboalternator
xd i
e
- phase-angle
- load angle
u < u, I
< u, e
i

HEST 905 018 C
b) Salient pole generator

e
xq i
xd i
HEST 905 018 C
Fig. 3.81 Vector diagram of an overexcited generator.

Voltages, currents and reactances are in p.u.
3-341
The reactances XA and XB, are defined according to the phase-to-

phase voltages and calculated for turboalternators as follows:
UGN Ki
XA = xd 3
3IGN Ku
x ' U K
XB = d GN i 3
2 3IGN K u
In the above equation, xq is replaced by xd for salient pole units.

I
K i = N1
IN2
UN1
I
K u = 3 = N1
UN2 IN2
3
where:
xd, xd' unsaturated synchronous reactance and saturated
transient reactance of the generator in p.u.
xq synchronous reactance in p.u.
UGN, IGN rated generator voltage and current
Ki CT ratio
Ku VT ratio
UN1, UN2 VT rated voltages
IN1, IN2 CT rated currents
3-342
Example:
Turboalternator 100 MVA; 12 kV; 4.8 kA
xd = 2.0; xd' = 0.25
UN1
12000
VTs Ku = 3 = = 120
UN2 100
3
5000
CTs Ki = =5000
1
UGN Ki 12000 5000

XA = xd 3 = 2.0 3 = 208.3
3 IGN Ku 3 4800 120
xd ' UGN K 0.25 12000 5000

XB = i 3= 3 = 13.02
2 3 IGN K u 2 3 4800 120
The reactance settings referred to the protection ratings UN and IN

become:
XA 208.3
XA Wert = IN = 1 = 2.08
UN 100
XB 13.02
XB Wert = IN = 1 = 0.130 = 0.13
UN 100
3-343
Phase correction
The scheme can include one to three independent measuring sys-
tems, each of which is connected to a phase-to-phase voltage and a
phase current. For example, there are three possible reference volt-
ages for the R phase measuring system, i.e. URS, UST and UTR.
Since, however, all the measuring systems need the angle of their own
phase, i.e. for R phase the angle of the voltage UR, the angle of the
voltage signal has to be corrected in any event.
Phase compensation
Reference voltage Vector diagram "Angle"
R U RS
RS +30
T S
R
*)
ST -90
T S
U ST
U TR R
*)
TR +150
T S
HEST 905023 C
*) single-phase measurement only
The phase compensation can also be used when the characteristic

needs to be shifted by a given angle or flipped over into the inductive
region, e.g. for test purposes.
The phase angle compensation have to be considered as per the
connection diagrams illustrated in Fig. 12.4. If the star-point of the CT
secondaries on the generator star-point side is grounded, an angle of -
180 must be added.
3-344
Typical settings:
XA-Setting according to application
e.g. -2.0
XB-Setting according to application
e.g. -0.13
Phase-angle (delta-connected VTs)
+30
Tripping delay timer:
Delay 2s
or separate integrator ('Delay' function):
Trip-Delay 6s
Reset-Delay 3s
Step-up
transformer
E
US
xd xT
x d - generator synchronous reactance [p.u.]

x T - transformater short-circuit reactance [p.u.]
Steady-state stability
x limit curve
xT
0
x' d r
XB-Setting
2
xd
Characteristic of the
underexcitation function XA-Setting
XA set
settings [UN / IN ]
XB set
HEST 905 021 C
Fig. 3.82 Setting the characteristic of the underexcitation function

according to the steady-state stability limit curve of the
generator/transformer set
All reactances in p.u.
3-345
tR tR tR tR
Pick-up
0
"TRIP-Delay" setting
t int
Integration
0
Trip
0
HEST 935 017 C
tint integrated time

tR reset time
Fig. 3.83 Underreactance protection

Effect of the integrator during power swings
3-346
Display of measured variable:

The display of the measured variable in the case of the
underreactance protection is an impedance vector which starts at the
centre of the circular characteristic. This vector and the vector of the
impedance measured at the generator terminals form a triangle as
shown in Fig. 3.84. The protection picks up, if the displayed impedance
equals or is less than the radius of the circle:
1 X '
z xd d
2 2
Example:
xd = 2; Xd' = 0,2
z (2 0.1) = 0.95
1
2
x
U
I
z
r
X d' 0
xd
HEST 905 034 C
Fig. 3.84 Display of the impedance measured by the

underreactance function
3-347
3-348
3.5.30. Stator overload (OLoad-Stator)
A. Application
Overload protection for the stators of large generators.
B. Features
Delay inversely proportional to overload (see Fig. 3.85)
Operating characteristic according to ASA-C50.13 (American
Standard Requirements for Cylindrical-Rotor Synchronous
Generators) with extended setting range
Detection of highest phase in the three-phase mode
I. Analog inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
3-349
D. Overload function settings - OLoad-Stator


Trip 00000000
K1 Setting s 41.4 1.0 120.0 0.1
I - Start IB 1.10 1.00 1.60 0.01
t - min s 10.0 1.0 120.0 0.1
tg s 120.0 10.0 2000.0 10.0
t - max s 300.0 100.0 2000.0 10.0
t - Reset s 120.0 10.0 2000.0 10.0
Current Input Channel AnalogAddr 0
IB - Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
Trip
K1 Setting
I - Start
Enabling current for operating characteristic.
t - min
Minimum operating time. Operating characteristic constant.
tg
Time during which the inverse characteristic is active. Operating
characteristic constant.
This must not exceed the maximum delay time.
t - max
t - Reset
the time taken by the generator to cool.
3-350
Number Of Phases
Current Input Channel
All current inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase
measurement, the first channel of the group of three selected must
be specified.
IB-Setting
to IN.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Trip Signal
Start Signal
Fig. 3.85 Operating characteristic of the stator overload function
3-351
Settings:
Reference current IB - Setting
Enabling current I - Start
Multiplier K1 Setting
Minimum operating time t - min
Time inverse characteristic effective tg
Maximum delay t - max
Resetting time t - Reset
The stator overload function protects stator windings against excessive

temperature rise as a result of overcurrents. The function is applicable
to turbo-alternators designed according to the American standard
ASA-C50.13 or a similar standard defining overload capability.
has not been made, the reference current IB for the protection is
calculated from the generator load current IB1, which is usually the
same as the generator rated current, and the CT rated currents IN1
and IN2 as follows:
IN2
IB = IB1
IN1
The setting is the ratio IB/IN, where IN is the rated current of the
protection, otherwise 'IB - Setting' would be 1.0 IN.
The multiplier k1 is 41.4 s for units designed according to ASA.
For units with a similar overload capacity:
m n
k1 = [s; s; K]
n
where:
: thermal time constant of the stator
m : maximum permissible temperature rise of the stator winding
n : rated temperature rise of the stator winding
3-352
Example:
= 5 min or 300 s
m = 70 K
n = 60 K
7060
k1 = 300 = 50 s
60
Typical settings:
IB-Setting according to protected unit
I-Start 1.1 IB
K1 - Setting 41.4 s
t - min 10.0 s
tg 120.0 s
t - max 300.0 s
t - Reset 120.0 s
3-353
3-354
3.5.31. Rotor overload (OLoad-Rotor)
A. Application
Overload protection for the rotors of large generators.
B. Features
Delay inversely proportional to overload (see Fig. 3.86)
Operating characteristic according to ASA-C50.13 (American
Standard Requirements for Cylindrical-Rotor Synchronous
Generators) with extended setting range
Current measurement
three-phases of AC excitation supply
evaluation of the sum of the three phases (instantaneous
values without digital filtering)
I. Analog inputs:
Current
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Current amplitude
3-355
D. Overload function settings - OLoad-Rotor


Trip 00000000
K1 Setting s 33.8 1.0 50.0 0.1
I - Start IB 1.10 1.00 1.60 0.01
t - min s 10.0 1.0 120.0 0.1
Tg s 120.0 10.0 2000.0 10.0
t - max s 300.0 100.0 2000.0 10.0
t - Reset s 120.0 10.0 2000.0 10.0
Current Input Channel AnalogAddr 0
IB - Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
Trip
K1 Setting
I - Start
Enabling current for operating characteristic.
t - min
Minimum operating time. Operating characteristic constant.
tg
Time during which the inverse characteristic is active. Operating
characteristic constant.
This must not exceed the maximum delay time.
t - max
t - Reset
the time taken by the machine to cool.
3-356

All current inputs may be selected. In the case of three-phase
measurement, the first channel of the group of three selected must
be specified.
IB - Setting
to IN.
Block Input
F: not blocked
T: blocked
Trip Signal
Start Signal
Fig. 3.86 Operating characteristic of the rotor overload function
3-357
Settings:
Reference current IB - Setting
Enabling current I - Start
Multiplier K1 Setting
Minimum operating time t - min
Time inverse characteristic effective tg
Maximum delay t - max
Resetting time t - Reset
The rotor overload function protects the rotor winding of generators

against excessive temperature rise as a result of overcurrents. The
function is applicable to turbo-alternators designed according to the
American standard ASA-C50.13 or a similar standard defining over-
load capability. It is connected to CTs in the AC excitation supply. It
may nor be used for brushless excitation systems.
has not been made, the reference current IB for the protection is cal-
culated from the AC load current IB1 of the excitation supply which is
usually the same as the full load excitation current and the CT rated
currents IN1 and IN2 as follows:
IN2
IB = IB1
IN1
The setting is the ratio IB/IN, IN being the rated current of the pro-
tection.
The multiplier k1 is 33.8 s for units designed according to ASA. For
units with a similar overload capacity:
m n
k1 = [s; s; K]
n
where:
: thermal time constant of the rotor
m : maximum permissible temperature rise of the rotor winding
n : rated temperature rise of the rotor winding
3-358
Typical settings:
IB - Setting according to protected unit
I - Start 1.1 IB
K1 Setting 33.8 s
t - min 10.0 s
tg 120.0 s
t - max 300.0 s
t - Reset 120.0 s
3-359
3-360
3.5.32. Stator ground fault (Stator-EFP)
A. Application
Ground fault protection function for detecting ground faults close to the
star-point of a generator. The scheme is based on the principle of
biasing the potential of the generator star-point by injecting a coded
low-frequency signal. The injection signal is generated by the injection
unit REX 010 and fed into the stator circuit by the injection transformer
block REX 011. In conjunction with the voltage function 'Voltage' that
covers 95 % of the winding, this protection completes detection of
ground faults over 100 % of the winding. Compensation is provided for
the influence of a second high-resistance grounded star-point in the
zone of protection.
Stator ground faults producing a current at the star-point > 5 A cause
the P8 contactor to reset which separates the injection unit Type
REX 010 from the injection transformer block REX 011 and interrupts
injection in both stator and rotor circuits. The 95 % stator ground fault
protection then clears the fault on its own.
B. Features
Protects the star-point and a part of the stator winding depending
on the ground fault current. The entire winding is protected when
the generator is stationary.
Biases the star-point in relation to ground by injecting a signal
generated in the REX 010 unit
Computes the ground fault resistance
Monitors the amplitude and frequency of the injection signal
Monitors the measuring circuit with respect to open-circuit and
correct connection of the grounding resistor
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage (2 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking
2nd parallel star-point
MTR adjustment
REs adjustment
3-361

Alarm stage pick-up
Alarm
Trip stage pick-up
Trip
2nd parallel star-point
MTR adjustment active
REs adjustment active
Injection open-circuit internally
Injection open-circuit externally
IV. Measurements:
Ground fault resistance Rfs
Measurement transformer ratio MTR
Grounding resistor REs
Explanation of measurements:
Rfs:
Ground fault resistances between 0 and 29.8 k can be deter-
mined and displayed. A display of 29.9 k or 30 k indicates a
ground fault resistance >29.8 k. A value of 29.9 k or 30 k is
displayed when there is no ground fault.
A whole number fault code between 100 and 111 is displayed in
cases when it is not possible to compute the ground fault resis-
tance.
100.0 means no injection for more than 5 s.
101.0 means incorrect frequency. Either the injection frequency
on the REX 010 or the rated frequency on the REG316*4 is
incorrectly set.
102.0 means external open-circuit.
109.0 means that both the binary inputs 'Adjust REs Input' and
'AdjMTRInp' are enabled.
No other codes will normally be generated, but if they are, they are
a diagnostic aid for service people.
MTR:
The value measured for MTR is displayed when the input 'Adjust
MTR Input' is enabled.
During normal operation, the value entered for MTR via the HMI is
displayed.
3-362
REs:
When the input 'Adjust REs Input' is enabled, the error code 123.0
is displayed initially until the resistance has been calculated. It can
take up to 10 s before the value measured for REs is displayed.
During normal operation, the value entered for REs via the HMI is
displayed.
Normal operation: Neither of the two inputs 'Adjust MTR Input' and
'Adjust REs Input' is enabled and injection is
taking place.
NOTICE: Only one of the binary inputs may be enabled at any one
time, otherwise an error code is generated for the measurements
Rfs, MTR and REs (see table below).
Adjust MTR Input Adjust REs Input

0 0 Protection active and Rfs is
computed
1 0 Determination of MTR and Rfs
0 1 Determination of REs and Rfs
1 1 Error codes: MTR = 1090.0,
REs = 109.0, Rfs = 109.0
0: binary input disabled

1: binary input enabled
Table 3.10 Configuration possibilities and their significance.
3-363
D. Stator ground fault settings - Stator-EFP


Trip 00000000
Alarm Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.01
Trip Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.01
Rfs Alarm Value k 10.0 0.1 20.0 0.1
Rfs Trip Value k 1.0 0.1 20.0 0.1
REs k 1.00 0.80 5.00 0.01
REs 2. Star point k 1.00 0.90 5.00 0.01
Rfs Adjust k 10.0 8.000 12.00 0.01
Meas. Transf. Ratio 100.0 10.0 200.0 0.1
Nr. Of Star Points 1 1 2 1
Voltage Input Ui CT/VT-Addr. 0 *)
Voltage Input Us CT/VT-Addr. 0 *)
2. Star Point Input BinaryAddr F

Adjust MTR Input BinaryAddr F
Adjust REs Input BinaryAddr F
Alarm Signal SignalAddr ER
Start Alarm Signal SignalAddr
Inj. Interrupt Signal SignalAddr
Ext. Interrupt Signal SignalAddr
2. Star point Signal SignalAddr
Adjust MTR Signal SignalAddr
Adjust REs Signal SignalAddr
Extern Block Signal SignalAddr
Trip
*) REG316*4 requires an input transformer unit Type 316GW61 K67

assigned to the following voltage input channels:
VoltageInpUi: Channel 8
VoltageInpUs: Channel 9
3-364
Alarm Delay
Time between pick-up of the alarm stage and an alarm.
Trip Delay
Time between pick-up of the tripping stage and a trip.
RFs AlarmValue
Ground fault resistance setting for alarm.
RFs for alarm must be higher than RFs for tripping.
RFs-Trip Value
Ground fault resistance setting for tripping.
REs
Grounding resistor REs for primary system grounding.
Where the grounding resistor is connected to the secondary of a
VT, its value related to the primary system R'Es has to be
calculated and entered.
REs 2. Star Point
The total grounding resistance of a 2nd star-point in the zone of
protection.
Rfs-Adjust
Simulated ground fault resistance used as a reference value for
calculating REs in the 'REs-Adjust' mode.
Meas. Transf. Ratio
VT ratio for a directly grounded primary system.
Nr. Of Star Points
Number of star-points in the zone of protection.
Voltage Input Ui
defines the voltage input channel for the reference voltage.
Channel 8 must be used.
Voltage Input Us
defines the voltage input channel for the measured voltage.
2. Star Point Input
Binary address used as status input. It determines whether the
second star-point is connected in parallel to the first.
(F FALSE, T TRUE, binary input or output of a protection
function).
Adjust MTR Input
switches the protection function to the MTR determination mode.
function).
3-365
Adjust REs Input

switches the protection function to the REs determination mode.
function).
Block Input
function).
Trip Signal
(signal address)
Start Signal
Output for signalling the pick-up of the tripping stage.
(signal address)
Alarm Signal
Output for signalling an alarm.
(signal address)
Start Alarm Signal
Output for signalling the pick-up of the alarm stage.
(signal address)
Inj. Interrupt Signal
Output for signalling an open-circuit injection circuit.
(signal address)
Ext. Interrupt Signal
Output for signalling an open-circuit measuring circuit.
(signal address)
2. Star Point Signal
Output for signalling a second star-point in parallel.
(signal address)
Adjust MTR Signal
Output for signalling the binary status of 'AdjMTRInp'.
(signal address)
Adjust REs Signal
Output for signalling the binary status of 'AdjREsInp'.
(signal address)
Extern Block Signal
Output for signalling that the function is disabled by an external
signal.
(signal address)
3-366
The value of 'Rfs Alarm Value' for alarm must always be higher than
that of 'Rfs Trip Value' for tripping.
Both alarm and tripping stages have their own timers.
Typical delays used for the 100 % ground fault protection are in the
range of seconds.
Settings:
'Rfs Trip Value' for tripping
'Rfs Alarm Value' for alarm
Delay for tripping
Delay for alarm
Grounding resistor REs
Measuring transformer ratio (MTR).
Typical settings:
Alarm stage:
RFs-Setting 5 k
Delay 5s
Tripping stage:
RFs-Setting 500
Delay 2s
Setting procedure:
The accuracy of the Rfs calculation depends on the values entered for
REs and MTR. Therefore check the settings and correct them if
necessary by connecting resistors between 100 and 10 k between
the star-point and ground while the generator is not running.
The protection function provides a convenient way of setting these two
parameters in the software by switching its mode using the input
'Adjust MTR Input' or 'Adjust REs Input'. This is the recommended
procedure. In this mode, the settings of the parameters 'MTR' and
'REs' are calculated with the aid of simulated ground fault resistances.
The two parameters are displayed continuously in the measured
values window.
Should the values of REs and MTR determined by the adjustment
modes differ from their nominal values, the calculated values are the
preferred values.
3-367
Determination of 'MTR':
Ground the star-point (Rf = 0 ).
Set the input 'Adjust MTR Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical
'1' to the binary input.
Select menu 'Monitor', 'Measurement', 'Display Function
Measurements', '100% Stator Ground Fault' and click on 'Open
Function'. Note the value for 'Meas. Transf. Ratio'.
Return to the 'Configuration' menu, then the submenu 'Protection
Functions'. In the window 'Select Protection Function' select the
function '100% Stator Ground Fault (Injection Principle)', now enter
the value noted for the 'Meas. Transf. Ratio' and download the set
file into the relay.
Remove the connection between the star-point and ground.
Reset the binary input Adjust MTR Input.
Determination of REs.
The selection of the menus and items is the same as for the
determination of 'MTR' above:
Simulate a ground fault Rf by connecting a resistor between the
star-point and ground: 8 k < Rf < 12 k
In the window 'Select Protection Function', window '100% Stator
Ground Fault (Stator EFP)':
Enter the value for the setting 'Rfs Adjust'.
Set the input 'Adjust REs Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical
Enter the approximate value for 'REs'. If the grounding resistor is
on the secondary system side, the value entered must be referred
to the primary side (Refer also to the Sections concerning REs and
MTR in the case of secondary injection at the star-point, respec-
tively at the terminals.) and download the set file into the relay.
Open the submenu 'Display Function Measurements' in the
'Monitor', 'Measurement', and note the value of 'Grounding
Resistor' (or 'REs' on the LDU).
Enter the value noted for the setting of 'REs' in the 'Configuration'
menu, then the submenu 'Protection Functions' and download the
set file into the relay.
Remove the simulated ground fault.
Reset the input 'Adjust REs Input'.
The protection function will only switch back from the
determination mode to the normal protection mode when both
binary Inputs have been reset.
Check the settings by connecting resistors of 100 to 20 k
(P 5 W) between the star-point and ground and compare their values
with the readings of the measured values on the screen.
NOTICE: The tripping and alarm outputs are disabled as long as one
of the two binary Inputs 'Adjust MTR Input' or 'Adjust REs Input'
is enabled, i.e. the protection will not trip if the stator circuit is
grounded. The two signals 'Inj. Interrupt Signal' and 'Ext. Interrupt
Signal', however, are not disabled.
3-368
REs and MTR in the case of primary injection at the generator

star-point
An injection transformer block Type REX 011 is needed for this circuit.
Fig. 3.87 shows the wiring diagram for primary injection (peak value of
Uis 110 or 96 V DC) at the generator star-point. The star-point is
grounded via the resistor REs and the parallel resistor RPs. The current
at the star-point must not exceed 20 A. It is recommended, however,
to select the resistors such that the star-point current is 5 A to protect
as much of the winding as possible.
The total resistance is thus:
UGen
Condition 1: REs + RPs
3 IEmax
where: UGen phase-to-phase voltage at the generator
terminals
IEmax max. star-point current = 20 A
The following conditions must also be fulfilled:
Condition 2a: Injection in Stator- und Rotor circuit:
R + REs
RPs 87 and RPs Ps
5 .5
Condition 2b: Injection only in Stator circuit:
R + REs
RPs 77 and RPs Ps
5 .5
Condition 3: REs 4,5 RPs and REs 5 k
The VT must be designed such that for a solid ground fault at the
generator terminals, the rated frequency component voltage
Us = 100 20 %, i.e. the ratio MTR = N12/ N11 must lie within the
following range:
Condition 4:
N12 UGen REs
1.2 n 0.8 n , where n =
N11 3 100 V REs + RPs
N12 UGen
A VT = will fulfill condition 4 in most cases.
N11 3 100 V
3-369
Design example:
UGen = 8 kV
Assumed: IEmax 5 A
Injection in Stator- und Rotor circuit
Determination of the grounding resistors:
8 kV
Condition 1: REs + RPs 924
3 5 A
924
Condition 2: RPs 87 and RPs = 168
5 .5
Assumed: RPs = 100
Condition 3: REs 4.5 100 = 450 and REs 5 k
In order to fulfill conditions 1, 3 and 4: REs = 1'000

Determination of the VT:
N12 8 kV
Assumed: = = 46.188
N11 3 100 V
Condition 4 is fulfilled because:
N12
1,2 n 0,8 n = 50.4 33.6 where
N11
8 kV 1'000
n= = 42
3 100 V 1'000 + 100
The following values are permissible:

RPs = 100
REs = 1'000
N12 N11 = 8 kV 3 100 V
Design instructions:
The injection unit REX010 is equipped with a converter to accommo-
date battery voltages between 48 V and 250 V. The peak injection
voltage is 96 V.
Giving due account to the available power, typical resistance values
for most applications are REs = 1000 and RPs = 150 . Both RPs and
REs must be able to conduct the maximum star-point current for 10 s.
The resistor RPs must also be continuously rated for the injection
voltage (injected power < 150 W).
3-370
The maximum generator star-point current is determined by the

resistors REs and RPs. Using the above resistors, this current would
be, for example, 5.3 A for UGen = 10.5 kV or 13.5 A for UGen = 27 kV.
REs and MTR in the case of secondary injection at the star-point

An injection transformer block Type REX011-1 is needed for this
circuit.
The bias voltage can also be injected across part of the grounding
resistor connected to the secondary of a grounding VT (see Fig. 3.88).
The two resistors R'Es and R'Ps limit the maximum current at the star-
point which must not exceed 20 A. The total resistance is thus:
2
UGen N
Condition 1: R'Es +R'Ps 2
3 IEmax N1
where: UGen phase-to-phase voltage at the generator terminals
N1/N2 ratio of the grounding transformer
Uis Injection voltage, depending on the configuration is
0,85 V, 1,7 V or 3,4 V.
The following conditions must also be fulfilled:

Condition 2a: for injection in Stator and Rotor circuit:
R' + R'Es
2
Uis
R'Ps 1.2 and R'Ps Ps
130 W 5.5
Condition 2b: Injection only in Stator circuit:
R' + R'Es
2
Uis
150 W 5.5
2
N
Condition 3: R'Es 4.5 R'Ps and R'Es 5.0k 2
N1
Us = 100 V 20 %, i.e. the ratio MTR' = N'12/ N'11 must lie within the
following range:
Condition 4:
N'12 UGen N2 R'Es
1.2 n 0.8 n , where n =
N'11 3 100 V N1 R'Es + R'Ps
3-371
N'12 UGen N
A VT = 2 will fulfill condition 4 in most cases.
N'11 3 100V N1
NOTICE: In many cases it is better to avoid using an additional VT

and connect the A/D converter directly to R'ES, if Us is within the
limits: 80 V Us 150 V. In this case the reference value of the
corresponding voltage channel should be adapted for 100 % ESS und
95 % ESS
The settings for REs and MTR must be entered via the HMI, i.e. the
values of R'Es and MTR' reflected to the primary of the grounding
transformer:
2
N
REs = R'Es 1 0.25 k
N2
110 V N'12 110 V
MTR = MTR' =
Uis N'11 Uis
The injection voltage Uis depends on the value of the parallel
resistance R'Ps and can be either 0.85 V, 1.7 V or 3.4 V.
The minimum value of the resistor R'Ps in relation to the corresponding
injection voltage Uis can be seen from the following table. The
maximum possible injection voltage should be chosen in each case.
R'Ps [m] Uis [V]

> 5.5 0.85
> 22 1.7
> 88 3.4
Table 3.11 REX011-1
The two determination modes 'REs Adjust' and 'MTR Adjust' determine
and display the values for REs and MTR, i.e. they present the
secondary circuit reflected on the primary system side. Inaccuracies
due to contact resistance, grounding resistor tolerances etc., are thus
automatically compensated.
Determining the values for REs and MTR by means of the
determination modes 'REs Adjust' and 'MTR Adjust' during
commissioning is recommended in preference to calculating their
values.
As a check, calculate the values of R'Es and MTR' from the values
given for RE and MTR in the measured value window as follows:
3-372
2
N
R'Es = REs 2
N
Uis
MTR' = MTR
110 V
In most cases, the calculated and determined values will not agree.
Discrepancies of 20 % are acceptable. Where the discrepancies
especially in the case of REs are large, check the actual values of
the grounding resistors and the grounding transformer.
Design example:
UGen = 16 kV
N1 14.4 kV
= = 60
N2 240 V
Assumed: IEmax 5 A
Injection only in Stator circuit

2
16 kV 1
Condition 1: R'Es + R'Ps = 513 m
3 5 A 60
3. 4 V 2 513 m
Condition 2: R'Ps resp.. 77 m R'Ps 93.3 m
150 W 5 .5
Assumed: R'Ps = 80 m
Condition 3: R'Es 4.5 80 m = 360 m
In order to fulfill Conditions 1, 3 and 4:
R'Es = 400 m
Determination of the VT:
N'12 16 kV 1
Assumed: = = 1.54
N'11 3 100 V 60

N'12
1.2 n 0.8 n = 2.35 1.54 1.254
N'11
16 kV 1 400 m
where n = = 1.39
3 100 V 60 400 m + 42 m
3-373

R'Ps = 80 mS
R'Es = 400 mS
N12 N11 = 154 V 100 V
In this example the VT can be avoided, because the maximum output
voltage amounts to 139 V, In this case the reference value of the
voltage channel for 100 % ESS und 95 % ESS must be changed to
1.39.
Calculation of the settings REs and MTR:
REs = 400 m (60 ) = 1.44k

2
N'12 110 V
MTR = = 112
N'11 1.7 V
for an injection voltage of Uis = 6.8 V.
Installations with a second star-point in the zone of protection

The following parameters settings have to be made:
'Nr. Of Star Points' = 2
'2. Star Point Input' = ON
In cases in which the second star-point is always connected in
parallel to the first.
'2. Star Point Input' = binary system input
in cases where the second star-point is connected to the first by a
switch, the closed position of the switch being signalled a logical '1'
applied to a binary input.
'REs 2.Star Point' = value of the grounding resistor connected to
the second star-point.
NOTICE: The stator ground fault protection scheme sees the

grounding resistor of the second star-point as a ground fault with the
value 'REs 2.Star Point'.
Assuming a ground fault of resistance Rfs occurs, the total
resistance of the parallel resistors Rfs and 'REs 2. Star Point' is
calculated first. The value of Rfs can be simply determined from this,
providing the value of 'REs 2. Star Point' is known.
This procedure is subject, however, to certain restrictions. The
maximum ground fault resistance that can be detected is
approximately ten times the value of 'REs 2. Star Point'. Assuming the
grounding resistor of the second star-point to be 1 k, ground faults
with a resistance less than 10 k can be detected. For this reason,
choosing a grounding resistor 'REs 2. Star Point' 2 k is
recommended wherever possible.
3-374
In a star - open delta connected transformer with a burden, is similar

to a second star-point and must be compensated accordingly.
A resistor R has the same effect as a earth fault resistor Rf as per the
formula:
2
N
R f = R' 1
3 N2
Design example:
R' = 4
N1 13.8 kV/ 3
=
N2 120 V
2
13.8 kV / 3
Rf = 4 = 1'959
3 120 V

The system is loaded with a permanent earth fault resistance of
1959 , which has to be compensated as a second star-point.
REs and MTR in the case of secondary injection at the generator

terminals
An injection transformer block Type REX011-2 is needed for this
circuit.
The bias voltage can also be injected across part of the grounding
resistor connected to the broken-delta secondaries of a grounding VTs
at the generator terminals (see Fig. 3.89).
The two resistors R'Es and R'Ps limit the maximum current at the star-
point which must not exceed 20 A. The total resistance is thus :
2
UGen 3 N2
Condition 1: R'Es + R'Ps
3 IEmax N1
where: UGen phase-to-phase voltage at the generator
terminals
N1/N2 ratio of the grounding transformer
3-375
The grounding resistors R'Es and R'Ps must fulfill the following
conditions:
Condition 2a Injection in Stator and Rotor circuit:
R' + R'Es
2
Uis
130 W 5.5
Condition 2b Injection only in Stator circuit:
R' + R'Es
2
Uis
150 W 5.5
Condition 3: R'Es 4.5 R'Ps
Us = 100 V 20 %, i.e. the ratio MTR' = N'12/ N'11 must lie within the
following range:
Condition 4:
N' 12 UGen 3 N2 R'Es
1.2 n 0.8 n , where n=
N' 11 3 100 V N1 R'Es + R'Ps
N'12 UGen 3 N2
A VT = will fulfill condition 4 in most cases.
N'11 3 100 V N1
The settings for REs and MTR must be entered via the HMI, i.e. the
values of R'Es and MTR' reflected to the primary of the grounding
transformer:
2
N1
REs = R'Es 0.725 k
3 N2
110 V N'12 110 V
MTR = MTR' =
Uis N'11 Uis
The injection voltage Uis depends on the value of the parallel resistor
R'Ps and can be either 6.4 V, 12.8 V or 25.6 V.
The minimum value of the resistor R'Ps in relation to the corresponding
injection voltage Uis can be seen from the following table. The
maximum possible injection voltage should be chosen in each case.
R'Ps [] Uis [V]

> 0.32 6.4
> 1.3 12.8
> 5.0 25.6
Table 3.12 REX011-2
3-376
Design example:
UGen = 12 kV
12 kV
N1 3
=
N2 600 V
3
Assumed: IEmax 5 A
Injection for Stator and Rotor earthing protection

Condition 1:
2

3 600 V
3 (600 V )
2
12 kV 3 =
R'Es + R'Ps = 10.4
3 5 A 12 kV 3 5 A 12 kV

3
12.82 10.4
Condition 2: R'Ps resp. 1.26 R'Ps 1.89
130 W 5 .5
Assumed: R'Ps = 1.5

Condition 3: R'Es 4.5 1.5 = 6.75
In order to fulfill conditions 1, 3 and 4: R'Es = 10.0

Determining the VT:
600 V
3
N'12 12 kV 3 3 600 V
Assumed: = = = 6 .0
N'11 3 100 V 12 kV 100 V
3
N'12
1.2 n 0.8 n = 6.6 6.0 4.4 where
N'11
600 V
3
n=
12kV
3 10 = 6 0.91 = 5.5
3 100 V 12kV 10 + 1
3
R'Ps = 1
R'Es = 10
N'12 N'11 = 3 600 V 100 V
3-377
Calculation of the settings REs and MTR:

2
12kV

REs = 10 3 = 1.33k
3 600 V

3
N'12 110 V
MTR = = 103.1
N'11 6.4 V
for an injection voltage Uis = 12.8 V.
R S T
Generator
N12 N11
REs Us
Voltage
transformer
Uis RPs
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.87 Stator ground fault protection with primary injection
3-378
R S T
Generator
Voltage
transformer
N1 N2 N'12 N'11
R'Es Us
R'Ps Uis
Grounding
transformator
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.88 Stator ground fault protection with secondary injection at

the generator star-point
R S T Voltage
transformer
N1 N2 R'Es N'12 N'11

Us
R'Ps Uis
Grounding
transformator
Injection voltage
Generator
Fig. 3.89 Wiring diagram for secondary injection of the stator

(grounding transformer at the generator terminals)
3-379
R S T
S1
REs-2.Starpt
Generator
Switch position to
binary input
N12 N11
REs
Us
Voltage
transformer
Uis RPs
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.90 Stator ground fault protection for installations with

two star-points
3-380
R S T
N1 N2
R'
S1
Generator
Switch position
to binary I/P
N12 N11
REs
Us
Voltage
Uis transformer
RPs
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.91 Stator earthfault protection for installations with

2 star-points, second star-point as transformer in 'Star
open Delta - connection' with burden R'.
3-381
3-382
3.5.33. Rotor Ground Fault (Injection Principle) protection (Rotor-EFP)
A. Application
For the detection of ground faults on the rotor windings of generators.
Because of its low sensitivity to spurious signals, this scheme can be
used for all kinds of excitation systems.
B. Features
Detection of ground faults on rotor windings
Injection voltage applied via resistors and coupling capacitors to
both poles of the rotor
Computes the resistance of the ground fault
Monitors the amplitude and frequency of the injection signal
Monitors the measuring circuit with respect to open-circuit and
correct connection of the grounding resistor
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage (2 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking
Coupling capacitor adjustment
REr adjustment

Alarm stage pick-up
Alarm
Trip stage pick-up
Trip
Coupling capacitor adjustment active
REr adjustment active
Injection open-circuit internally
Injection open-circuit externally
External blocking
IV. Measurements:
Ground fault resistance RFr
Coupling capacitor Ck"
Grounding resistor REr"
3-383
Explanation of measurements:
Rfr:
Ground fault resistances between 0 and 29.8 k can be deter-
mined and displayed. A display of 29.9 k or 30 k indicates a
ground fault resistance >29.8 k. A value of 29.9 k or 30 k is
displayed when there is no ground fault.
A whole number fault code between 100 and 111 is displayed in
cases when it is not possible to compute the ground fault resis-
tance.
100.0 means no injection for more than 5 s.
101.0 means incorrect frequency. Either the injection frequency
on the REX 010 or the rated frequency on the REG316*4 is
incorrectly set.
102.0 means external open-circuit.
109.0 means that both the binary inputs 'Adjust REr Input' and
'Adjust Capacitor Input' are enabled.
111.0 means that the binary input 'Adjust REr Input' is enabled.
No other codes will normally be generated, but if they are, they are
a diagnostic aid for the service people.
Ck":
When the input 'Adjust Capacitor Input' is enabled, 133.00 is
displayed initially until the coupling capacitor has been computed.
This can take a maximum of 10 s after which the value measured
for C is displayed.
During normal operation, the value entered for the coupling
capacitor C via the HMI is displayed.
REr":
When the input 'Adjust REr Input' is enabled, the error code 133.00
is displayed initially until the resistance has been calculated. It can
take up to 10 s before the value measured for REr is displayed.
The value measured for Rf is 97.0.
During normal operation, the value entered for REr on the HMI is
displayed.
3-384
Normal operation: Neither of the two inputs 'Adjust Capacitor Input'

and 'Adjust RErInput' is enabled and injection is
taking place.
NOTICE: Only one of the binary inputs may be enabled at any one
time, otherwise an error code is generated for the measurements
Rfr, C and REr (see table below).
Adjust Capacitor Input Adjust REr Input

0 0 Protection active and Rfr is computed
1 0 Determination of C and Rfr
0 1 Determination of REr (Rfr = 111.0)
1 1 Error codes: 109.00 and 109.00
(Rfr = 109.0)
0: binary input disabled

1: binary input enabled
Table 3.13 The configuration possibilities and their significance
3-385
D. Rotor ground fault settings - Rotor-EFP


Trip 00000000
Alarm-Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.05
Trip-Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.05
RFr Alarm Value k 10.0 0.1 25.0 0.1
Rfr Trip Value k 1.0 0.1 25.0 0.1
REr k 1.00 0.90 5.00 0.01
Uir V 50 (Select)
RFr Adjust k 10.0 8.000 12.00 0.01
Coupling Capacitor F 4.00 2.00 10.00 0.01
Voltage Input Ui CT/VT-Addr. 0 *)
Voltage Input Ur CT/VT-Addr. 0 *)
Adjust REr Input BinaryAddr F

Adjust Capacitor Input BinaryAddr F
Alarm Signal SignalAddr ER
Start Alarm Signal SignalAddr
Inj. Interrupt Signal SignalAddr
Ext. Interrupt Signal SignalAddr
Adjust Rer Signal SignalAddr
Coupling Cap Signal SignalAddr
Extern Block Signal SignalAddr
*) REG316*4 requires an input transformer unit Type 316GW61 K67 assigned

to the following voltage input channels:
VoltageInpUi: Channel 8
VoltageInpUr: Channel 7
3-386
Trip
Alarm Delay
Time between pick-up of the alarm stage and an alarm.
Trip Delay
Time between pick-up of the tripping stage and a trip.
RFr Alarm Value
Ground fault resistance setting for alarm.
RFr for alarm must be higher than RFr for tripping.
RFr Trip Value
Ground fault resistance setting for tripping.
REr
Grounding resistor REr.
Uir
The normal rotor injection voltage is 50 V. Provision is also made
for an injection voltage of 20 or 30 V by appropriately changing the
wiring on the injection transformer unit Type REX 011.
RFr Adjust
Simulated ground fault resistance used as a reference value for
calculating REr in the 'REr Adjust' mode.
Coupling Capacitor
The total capacitance C of the two coupling capacitors in parallel.
Voltage Input Ui
defines the voltage input channel for the reference voltage Ui.
Voltage Input Ur
defines the voltage input channel for the measured voltage Ur.
Adjust REr Input
switches the protection function to the REr determination mode.
function).
Adjust Capacitor Input
switches the protection function to the C determination mode.
function).
3-387
Block Input
function).
Trip Signal
Start Signal
Output for signalling the pick-up of the tripping stage.
Alarm Signal
Output for signalling alarm.
Start Alarm Signal
Output for signalling the pick-up of the alarm stage.
Inj. Interrupt Signal
Output for signalling an open-circuit injection circuit.
Ext. Interrupt Signal
Output for signalling an open-circuit measuring circuit.
Output for signalling an open-circuit injection circuit. Both pick-up
and reset of this signal are delayed by 5 s.
Adjust Rer Signal
Output for signalling the binary status of 'AdjRErInp'.
Coupling Cap. Signal
Output for signalling the binary status of 'AdjCoupCInp'.
Extern Block Signal
Output for signalling that the function is disabled by an external
signal.
3-388
The value of 'RFr Setting' for alarm must always be higher than that of
'RFr Setting' for tripping. Both alarm and tripping stages have their own
timers. Typical delays used for the rotor ground fault protection are in
the range of seconds.
Recommended resistances:
REr = 1000
RPr = 100
Settings:
Grounding resistor REr
Coupling capacitor C
'RFr Setting' for tripping
'RFr Setting' for alarm
Delay for alarm
Delay for tripping
Typical settings:
Alarm stage:
RFr-Setting 5 k
Delay 5s
Tripping stage:
RFr-Setting 500
Delay 2s
Setting procedure:
How accurately Rfr is measured depends on the values entered for
REr and C. Therefore check the settings and correct them if necessary
by connecting resistors between 100 and 10 k between the rotor
and ground while the generator is not running.
The protection function provides a convenient way of setting these two
parameters in the software by switching its mode using the input
'Adjust REr Input' or 'Adjust Capacitor Input'. In this mode, the settings
of the parameters 'REr' and 'C' are calculated with the aid of simulated
ground fault resistances.
Determination of REr
Short-circuit the coupling capacitors.
Set the input 'Adjust REr Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical
Simulate a ground fault Rf by connecting a resistor to the rotor:
8 k < Rf < 12 k
Click on the 'Configuration' menu, then the submenu 'Protection
Functions':
Set the input 'Adjust REr Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a logical
In the window 'Select Protection Function' select the function
3-389
'100% Rotor Ground Fault (Injection Principle)', and enter the value
of the simulated ground fault for 'Rfr Adjust' and the nominal value
for REr and download the set file into the relay.
Select menu 'Monitor', 'Measurement', 'Display Function
Measurements', 'Rotor Ground Fault' and click on 'Open Function'.
Note the value of 'Ground Resistor' (or 'REr' on the LDU).
Enter the value noted for the setting of 'REr' in the 'Configuration'
menu, then the submenu 'Protection Functions' and download the
set file into the relay.
Remove the short-circuit from across the coupling capacitors and
remove the simulated ground fault.
Reset the input 'Adjust REr Input'.
Determination of C:
Set the input 'Adjust Capacitor Input' to 'Always TRUE' or apply a
logical '1' to the binary input.
Ground the rotor winding (Rf = 0 ).
In the window 'Select Protection Function' select the function
'100% Rotor Ground Fault', now enter the nominal value of C into
the parameter 'Coupling Capacitor' and download the set file into
the relay.
Open the submenu 'Display Function Measurements' in the
'Monitor', 'Measurement', and note the value of 'Coupling
Capacitor' (or 'Ck' on the LDU).
Enter the value noted for the setting of 'Coupling Capacitor' in the
'Configuration' menu, then the submenu 'Protection Functions' and
download the set file into the relay.
Remove the simulated ground fault from the rotor.
Reset the binary input 'Adjust Capacitor Input'.
Design instructions:
The grounding resistors and coupling capacitors have to fulfill the
following conditions:
Rotor grounding resistor Rpr : 150 Rpr 500
Rotor grounding resistor REr : 900 REr 5 k
Coupling capacitors
C = C1 + C2 : 2 F C 10 F
Time constant = REr C : 3 ms 10 ms
The grounding resistor Rpr must be continuously rated for the injection
50 V
current I = .
Rpr
The coupling capacitors must be designed for the maximum excitation

voltage.
3-390
Application examples:
Rpr = 200 , P = 15 W
REr = 1 k
C = 2 2 F, 8 kV
= 4 ms
+
Rotor
-
C1 C2
C = C1 + C2
REr
Ur
Uir RPr
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.92 Injection at one pole of the rotor winding
3-391
+
Rotor
C1 C2
C = C1 + C2
REr Ur
Uir RPr
Injection voltage
Fig. 3.93 Injection at both poles of the rotor winding
3-392
3.5.34. Pole slipping (Pole-Slip)
A. Application
The pole slipping function detects the condition of a generator that is
completely out-of-step with the power system.
B. Features
Detection of slip frequencies in relation to the power system of 0.2
to 8 Hz
Alarm before the first slip (rotor angle pick-up setting)
Discriminates generating and motoring directions of rotor phase-
angle
Discriminates an internal and an external power swing centre
Trips after a set number of slips
Trips within a set rotor angle
I. Analog inputs:
Current
Voltage
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking of the entire function
Blocking operation in generating direction (to left)
Blocking operation in motoring direction (to right)
External enable for zone1

Alarm before the first slip
Operation for generating slip (to left)
Operation for motoring slip (to right)
First operation in zone 1
First operation in zone 2
n1-th operation in zone 1 (tripping)
n2-th operation in zone 2
IV. Measurements:
Slip impedance
Slip frequency
3-393
D. Pole slip settings - Pole-Slip


Trip1 00000000
ZA UN / IN 0.200 0.000 5.000 0.001
ZB UN / IN -0.250 -5.000 0.000 0.001
ZC UN / IN 0.100 0.000 5.000 0.001
Phi deg 85 60 270 1
Warn Angle deg 110 0 180 1
Trip Angle deg 90 0 180 1
Slip of Zone 1 1 0 20 1
Slip of Zone 2 3 0 20 1
t - Reset s 5.000 0.500 25.000 0.010
Current Input Chan. AnalogAddr 0
Voltage Input Chan. AnalogAddr 0
Block Input Generator BinaryAddr F
Block Input Motor BinaryAddr F
Enable Zone 1 Inpt BinaryAddr F
Warning Signal SignalAddr ER
Generator Signal SignalAddr ER
Motor Signal SignalAddr ER
Zone 1 Signal SignalAddr ER
Zone 2 Signal SignalAddr ER
Trip 1 Signal SignalAddr ER
Trip 2 Signal SignalAddr ER
Trip 1 Signal
defines the tripping channel activated by the tripping output of
stage 1 of the function (tripping logic).
3-394
ZA
Forwards impedance 1). ZA marks the end of zone 2 and is also
used for determining phase-angle.
ZB
Reverse impedance 1). ZB marks the beginning of zone 1 and is
also used for determining phase-angle.
ZC
Impedance of the zone limit 1). ZC is the end of zone 1 between ZB
and ZC and the beginning of zone 2 between ZC and ZA.
phi
Angle of the slipping characteristic and of ZA, ZB and ZC. Phi also
determines the energy direction:
60... 90 CT neutral on the line side
240...270 CT neutral on the generator side
Warn Angle
Rotor angle above which alarm of potential slipping is given
(rotor angle > 'Warn Angle').
Trip Angle
Rotor angle below which first 'Trip 1 Signal' and the 'Trip 2 Signal'
are issued (rotor angle < 'Trip Angle').
Slip of Zone 1
Number of slips for zone 1, i.e. number of slips before 'Trip 1
Signal' is issued and signalled.
Slip of Zone 2
Number of slips for zone 2, i.e. number of slips before 'Trip 2
Signal' is signalled.
1) The impedance unit 1.000 UN/IN represents an impedance of 100%. Thus

if the impedance setting in percent is known, it can be set directly, e.g. the
setting for 10% is 0.100.
An impedance of 1.000 UN/IN corresponds to a current of 1 IN at the rated
phase-to-neutral voltage UN / 3 in all three phases. The respective
positive-sequence impedance is UN / 3 / IN :
UN IN Impedance unit
100 V 1A 57.735 /ph
100 V 2A 28.868 /ph
100 V 5A 11.547 /ph
200 V 1A 115.470 /ph
200 V 2A 57.735 /ph
200 V 5A 23.094 /ph
3-395
t - Reset
The reset time 't - Reset' prevents the function from resetting
between two slips providing n1 or n2 is greater than 1.
Current Input Chan.
VoltageInput Chan.
Block Input Generator
Blocking input for detecting pole slip to the left, i.e. the generator is
faster than the power system.
Block Input Motor
Blocking input for detecting pole slip to the right, i.e. the generator
is slower than the power system.
(The power system drives the generator as if it were a motor.)
Block Input
Blocking input for the entire pole slipping function.
Enable Zone 1 Input
Zone 1 is enabled for slipping in zone 2 as well, i.e. independently
of ZC.
Warning Signal
Detection of variations of rotor angle (before the first slip occurs).
Generator Signal
Signals rotor movement to the left, i.e. the generator is faster than
the system.
Motor Signal
Signals rotor movement to the right, i.e. the generator is slower
than the system. (The power system drives the generator as if it
were a motor.)
Zone 1 Signal
First slip between ZB and ZC or between ZB and ZA, providing the
input 'Enable Zone 1 Input' is enabled.
Zone 2 Signal
First slip between ZC and ZA.
Trip 1 Signal
Tripping and signalling when the counter for zone 1 reaches the
value n1.
Trip 2 Signal
Signalling when the counter for zone 2 reaches the value n2. If
Trip2 is to control tripping, the signal Trip2 has to be assigned to a
tripping relay (see also Section 5.4.5.4.).
3-396
E. Detecting rotor slip and shift

Rotor shift is detected by monitoring the voltage Ucos , i.e. the com-
ponent of the voltage in phase with the current.
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in
the impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating
is signalled. If the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor
movement is from left to right and motoring is signalled (the power
system drives the generator as if it were a motor).
The movements in the impedance plain can be seen from Fig. 3.94.
The transient behaviour is described by the transient e.m.fs EA and
EB, and by Xd' , XT and the transient system impedance ZS.
The detection of rotor angle is enabled when

the minimum current 0.10 IN is exceeded
the value of Ucos falls below 0.92 UN
the voltage Ucos has an angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor in relation to the slip

line and the rotor angle exceeds the angle set for 'Warn Angle'.
Slipping is detected when

a change of rotor angle is detected
the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB
the direction of rotation has remained the same since start
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts
as being in zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire dis-
tance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when 'Enable Zone 1 Input' is enabled
(external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping).
After the first slip, the signals 'Zone 1 Signal' or 'Zone 2 Signal' and -
depending on the direction of slip - either 'Generator Signal' or 'Motor
Signal' are issued.
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where
the slip line is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are
displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if
the change of the rotor angle detection has reset after the preceding
slip or the slip line is crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB.
3-397
A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB resets all the
signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
The 'Trip 1 Signal' tripping command and signal are generated after n1
slips in zone 1, providing the rotor angle is less than 'Trip Angle'.
The 'Trip 2 Signal' signal is generated after n2 slips in zone 2,
providing the rotor angle is less than 'Trip Angle'.
All signals are reset if:
the direction of movement reverses,
the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
no rotor relative movement was detected during the time 't - Reset'.
3-398
Fig. 3.94 Locus of the impedance measured at the generator

terminals during pole slipping in relation to the power
system A
Xd' : transient reactance of the generator

XT : short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer
ZS : transient impedance of the power system A
3-399
F. Setting instructions
Settings: Current and voltage inputs

A three-phase group must be used for the current input.
The following can be set for the voltage input:
single-phase input using URS
three-phase delta group
three-phase star group
Setting: Phi
The angle Phi determines the angle of the slip line and is monitored to
detect slip. The impedances ZA, ZB and ZC lie on this line.
Phi is also used to check power direction, i.e. the polarity of the CTs:
60... 90 CT neutral on the line side
i.e. connection according to Fig. 12.4
240...270 CT neutral on the generator side
Setting: ZA
ZA is the impedance of the slip line and marks the limit of zone 2. It is
also used for measuring phase-angle (see 'Warn Angle' and 'Trip
Angle').
ZA should be set to the impedance between the location of the
protection and the off-load voltage of the equivalent circuit for the
entire power system.
Setting: ZB
ZB is the impedance of the slip line in the reverse direction and marks
the limit of zone 1. It is also used for measuring phase-angle (see
'Warn Angle' and 'Trip Angle').
ZB should be set to the generator reactance Xd' in the reverse direction
(negative sign).
Setting: ZC
ZC divides the slip line into two zones. Zone 1 lies between ZB and ZC
and zone 2 between ZC and ZA.
ZC should be set to the impedance from the location of the protection
up to the first busbar.
3-400
Fig. 3.95 Determining the settings for ZA, ZB, ZC, and Phi
according to Xd', XT and ZS
Setting: Warn Angle

The rotor angle is given by the triangle bounded by the instantaneous
impedance and the impedances ZA and ZB. The protection, however,
measures the angle between the instantaneous voltage and the rotor
voltages EA and EB, which closely approximates the impedance tri-
angle.
The setting for 'Warn Angle' can be set between 0 and 180 and
determines the rotor angle above which alarm of imminent slipping is
given.
With the 'Warn Angle' = 0, alarm is given immediately the rotor angle
changes, providing it lies within the pick-up range.
'Warn Angle' enables the operating status of the generator to be cor-
rected, because its rotor angle setting is reached before the first slip.
The machine can normally be stabilised for rotor angles up to 135, for
example, by changing the excitation or switching in compensators.
For a setting of 'Warn Angle' = 180, alarm is not given until the first
slip takes place, i.e. at the same time as the signal for zone 1 or
zone 2.
Typical setting: 'Warn Angle' = 110
3-401
Fig. 3.96 Example of the operation for n1 = 1,

Warn Angle = 53 and Trip Angle = 96
3-402
Setting: TripAngle
Phi is evaluated in relation to 'Trip Angle' when one of the zones has
reached its number of slips, i.e. n n1 or n2.
For a setting of 'Trip Angle' = 180, the tripping command 'Trip1' and
the signals 'Trip 1 Signal' and 'Trip 2 Signal' are issued immediately.
For a setting of 'Trip Angle' = 0, these signals are only issued when
the slip detector has reset, i.e. when the generator is again close to
synchronism with the power system.
A setting of 'Trip Angle' between 180 and 0 (typically 90) determines
the rotor angle at which tripping takes place and the signals are
generated.
The setting at which tripping should take place is determined accord-
ing to an operating point that
occurs shortly after the last permissible slip
is favourable for the circuit-breaker (least stress due to reignition)
Typical setting: 'Trip Angle' = 90
Settings: n1, n2, t-Reset

The number of slips n1 or n2 that may be considered permissible
depends on the generator being protected and must be stated by the
manufacturer.
For settings of n1 and n2 1, the reset time 't - Reset' can be set to
any low value.
For settings of n1 or n2 > 1, 't - Reset' must not be set lower than the
period 1/fS of the lowest slip frequency fS to be detected. Slip
frequencies from 0.2 Hz upwards are reliably detected using the
typical setting of 5 seconds.
3-403
3-404
3.6. Control functions

3.6.1. Control function (FUPLA)
A. Application
The control function is designed to perform data acquisition, monitor-
ing, and control functions in MV and HV substations.
The control logic of a switchgear bay can be configured for SF6 gas-
insulated switchgear (GIS), for indoor and outdoor switchgear and for
single, double or multiple busbar stations.
The control function registers and processes the switchgear position
signals, the measured variables and the alarms occurring in a switch-
gear bay. The corresponding data are then made available at the
communication interface (IBB).
The control function receives instructions from the station control
system (SCS) or from the local mimic, processes them in relation to
the bay control logic configuration and then executes them.
The interlocks included in the control function device prevent inadmis-
sible switching operations, which could cause damage to plant or en-
danger personnel.
B. Features
The control function depends on the particular application for which it
is specifically created using CAP 316. It includes essentially:
Detection and plausibility check of switchgear position signals
Switchgear control
Interlocks
Monitoring of switchgear commands
Run-time supervision
Integration of the local mimic
Detection of alarms and alarm logic
Processing of measured variables
Eight FUPLA functions can be configured. The total maximum size
of FUPLA code for all the functions is 128 kB. The FUPLA function
cannot be copied and not configured as 48th function. The function
plan programming language CAP 316 is described in the publication
1MRB520059-Uen.
3-405
I. CT/VT inputs:
Constants, measured protection variables, IBB inputs and
sampled values
II. Analog outputs:

Measured variable outputs
III. Binary inputs:

Blocking input, binary input for blocking FUPLA
Binary inputs from the IBB, the system and protection functions
IV. Binary outputs:

Binary outputs to the IBB, the system, protection functions and
for event processing
V. Measurements:
Measured variable outputs
3-406
3.6.1.1. Control function settings - FUPLA

When the FUPLA is reconfigured, the project directory must be
selected before any other parameter.
After clicking on the 'Browse' select the directory in which the files
'project1.bin' and 'project.cfg' are located and select 'project1.bin'. The
project name will be inserted from this file in the first line, alongwith the
time stamp in the second line and the file size in the third line.
The individual parameters can be entered now.
3-407
3.6.1.1.1. General

RepetitRate low low high 1
Cycl. time ho ms 20 0 1000 1
Blocking BinaryAddr F
RepetitionRate
Determines the number of FUPLA runs per cycle.
high: four FUPLA run per cycle
medium: two FUPLA run per cycle
low: one FUPLA runs per cycle
CycleTime
Determines the interval between FUPLA starts.
BlockInput
(F FALSE, T TRUE, system binary input,
protection function binary output or input via the IBB).
This blocks FUPLA.
3-408
3.6.1.1.2. Timers
EXTIN signals of the time factor type and signals belonging to the
TMSEC group are displayed in this window.
The signals can be connected to the following sources:
Measured variable constant
Setting range and resolution:
TMSEC signal group: 0...60.000 s, for TON
0...40.00 s, for TONS
TIMEFACTOR signal group: 0...4000 s, for TONL
Protection function binary output (measured variable)
Observe the factors ms (TON), 10 ms (TONS), 1 s (TONL).
Input from the SCS
Observe the factors ms (TON), 10 ms (TONS), 1 s (TONL).
Input from AXM
Observe the factors ms (TON), 10 ms (TONS) 1 s (TONL).
3.6.1.1.3. Binary inputs
Binary inputs can be connected to the following sources:
Always ON ('1')
Always OFF ('0')
Binary system inputs
Protection function binary outputs
Inputs from the SCS: 768 inputs in 24 groups of 32 signals each
3.6.1.1.4. Binary signals
Binary signals can be connected to the following sinks:
LEDs
Signalling relays
Event processor (excluding 'BinExtOut' blocks)
Protection function binary inputs
Tripping channels
Outputs to the SCS: 768 inputs in 24 groups of 32 signals each
3-409
3.6.1.1.5. Measurement inputs

Measurement inputs can be connected to the following sources:
Measured variable constant,
integer or percent range.
Protection function measured variable,
the range for angles is 180.00 and currents and voltages are
transferred in the corresponding units.
Input from the IBB,
integer range.
CT/VT input channels.
3.6.1.1.6. Measurement outputs
Measurement outputs can be connected to the following sinks:
Measurements Nos. 1...64
3.6.1.1.7. Flow chart for measurement inputs and outputs
FUPLA
1
O1 V1 function No.
Measurement
IBB IBB outputs
SCS output Measurement SCS input
CHAN. 4 CHAN. 9 inputs
O 64 V 64
64
Fig. 3.97 Flowchart for measured variable inputs and outputs
IBB channel No. 4 is write-only and IBB channel No. 9 read-only. The
range of values for IBB channel No. 4 is -32768... +32767 which
corresponds to a 16 Bit integer.
3.6.1.2. Loading FUPLA
The FUPLA code has to be loaded again each time the FUPLA
configuration is changed. After making internal FUPLA changes and
copying the new versions of the files 'project1.bin' and 'project.cfg' to
the FUPLA directory, select 'Communication' from the main menu and
then 'Setfile Download to RE..16' to load the new FUPLA code.
3-410
3.6.2. Logic (Logic)
A. Application
Logical combination of binary input signals or of output signals from
the protection functions, e.g. for
specific signals required by the application
supplementary protection functions
B. Features
Binary I/P channels assignable to
binary I/P signals
protection function O/P signals
All I/P channels can be inverted
Following logic functions available for selection:
OR gate with 4 I/Ps
AND gate with 4 I/Ps
R/S flip-flop with 2 I/Ps for setting and 2 I/Ps for resetting:
The O/P is '0', if at least one of the reset I/Ps is '1'.
The O/P is '1', if at least one of the set I/Ps is '1' AND none
of the reset I/Ps is '1'.
The O/P status is sustained when all the I/Ps are at '0'.
Every logic has an additional blocking I/P, which when activated
switches the O/P to '0'.
I. CT/VT inputs:
None
II. Binary inputs:

4 logic inputs
Blocking
III. Binary O/Ps:

Tripping
IV. Measurements:
None
3-411
D. Logic function settings - Logic


Trip 00000000
Logic Mode OR (Select)
Binary Output Signal SignalAddr ER
Binary Input 1 (R1) BinaryAddr F
Binary Input 2 (R2) BinaryAddr F
Binary Input 3 (S1) BinaryAddr F
Binary Input 4 (S2) BinaryAddr F
Trip
Definition of the tripping circuit excited by the functions O/P
(tripping matrix).
Logic Mode
Definition of the logic function to be performed by the 4 binary I/Ps.
Possible settings:
OR: OR gate with all 4 binary I/Ps
AND: AND gate with all 4 binary I/Ps
R/S flip-flop: Flip-flop with 2 set I/Ps (S1 and S2) and 2 reset
I/Ps (R1 and R2). The O/P is set or reset when
at least one of the corresponding I/Ps is at
logical '1' (OR gate).
Reset I/Ps take priority over the set I/Ps.
Binary Output Signal
Output for signalling a trip.
Block Input
F: not used
The O/P is always at logical '0' when the blocking I/P is at logical '1'.
The blocking I/P acts as a reset I/P for the flip-flop function.
3-412
BinInp1 (R1), BinInp2 (R2), BinInp3 (S1), BinInp4 (S2)

Binary inputs 1 to 4 (AND or OR function)
Reset inputs 1 and 2 and set inputs 1 and 2 (RS flip-flop)
F: not used (OR logic or RS flip-flop)
T: not used (AND logic)
3-413
3-414
3.6.3. Delay / integrator (Delay)
A. Application
General purpose timer for
integration of pulsating binary signals to obtain a continuous signal,
e.g. output of the loss-of-excitation function (out-of-step protection)
or reverse power protection
extension of short I/P signals (pulse prolongation)
simple time delay
B. Features
I/P channel and blocking input assignable to
binary I/P signals
protection function output signals
I/P channel and blocking input can be inverted.
Adjustable reset time
2 types of time delay
Integration: Only the time during which the I/P signal is at
logical '1' counts at the end of the time delay.
No integration: The total time from the instant the timer starts
until it is either reset or expires counts.
I. CT/VT inputs:
None
II. Binary inputs:

Input signal
Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Time from the instant the timer starts
3-415
D. Delay/integrator function settings - Delay


Trip 00000000
Trip Delay s 01.00 00.00 300.00 0.01
Reset Delay s 00.01 00.00 300.00 0.01
Integration 0/1 0 0 1 1
Binary Input BinaryAddr F
Trip
Definition of the tripping logic (matrix) excited by the functions
output.
Trip Delay
Time between start signal at the input and the tripping signal at the
output.
Reset Delay
Time required for the timer to reset after the input signal has
disappeared.
Integration
Determination of the response of the function in the presence of a
pulsating I/P signal:
0: The delay continues to run, providing the I/P signal does not
disappear for longer than the reset time (see Fig. 3.98).
1: The time during which the I/P is at logical '1' is integrated,
i.e. tripping does not take place until the sum of logical '1' time
equals the set delay time (see Fig. 3.99).
Binary Input
Timer input.
Block Input
F: enabled
T: disabled
xx: ll binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
3-416
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Start Signal
Pick-up signal.
tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Impulse
prolongation
0 t 0 t
tA tA
(No (No
tripping) tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
tR
tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Impulse
prolongation
0 t 0 t
tA tA
(No
tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
HEST 935 019 C
Note: Tripping only takes place, if a start also occurs within the time tR.
tA tripping time ('Trip Delay')

tR reset time ('Reset Delay')
Fig. 3.98 Operation of the 'Delay' function without integration
3-417
tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Setting
Setting
tint tint
Integration
0 t 0 t
(No (No
tripping) tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
tR tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Setting
Setting
tint tint
Integration
0 t 0 t
Tripping
0 t 0 t
HEST 935 020 C
tint integrated time for tripping

tR reset time ('Reset Delay')
Setting 'Trip Delay'
Fig. 3.99 Operation of the 'Delay' function with integration
3-418
3.6.4. Counter (Counter)
A. Application
General counters, e.g. for
counting the output impulses of the field failure or reverse power
protection functions
prolongation of short input signals
B. Features
Input channel and blocking input can be set by
binary input signals
output signal from a protection function
Provision for inverting signals applied to the inputs
I. CT/VT inputs:
None
II. Binary inputs:

Input signal
Blocking

Start
Trip
IV. Measurements:
Count reached
3-419
D. Counter settings - Count


Trip 00000000
Set Count 1 1 100 1
Drop Time S 00.04 00.01 30.00 00.01
ResetTime S 010.0 000.1 300.0 000.1
Binary Input BinaryAddr F
Trip
Set Count
Number of input impulses counted by the counter before it trips.
Drop Time
Time the counter output signal is maintained after the input signal
causing it has reset.
ResetTime
Time after the input signal has reset before the counter is reset to
zero if it did not trip.
Binary Input
Counter input
xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions).
Block Input
F: function enabled
T: function disabled
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Start Signal
Pick-up signal.
3-420
3.6.5. Contact bounce filter (Debounce)
A. Application
Suppresses the contact bounce phenomena of binary signals. This
function is only used for the signals of binary input modules.
B. Features
Adjustable maximum bounce time
The first edge of the respective input signal is prolonged by the
time 'SupervisTime'.
I. CT/VT inputs:
None
II. Binary inputs:

Binary signals (input signals)
Blocking

None
IV. Measurements:
None
3-421
D. Contact bounce filter settings - Debounce


Binary Input 1 BinaryAddr F
Supervision Time 1 Setting 1 ms 1 ms 10000 ms 1 ms
.
.
Binary Input 1 16
Binary inputs Nos. 1 16
F: not used
xx: all binary inputs.
Supervision Time (per Channel)
Maximum bounce time setting.
The first edge of the input signal is prolonged by the time set for
'Supervision Time'.
NOTICE: Connect functions requiring filtered signals to the correct

binary inputs to start with.
The contact bounce filter 'Debounce' may only be configured once
per set of parameters.
3-422
3.6.6. Signal flutter detector (Defluttering)
A. Application
Suppresses the recording of multiple events for binary signals subject
to contact bounce.
B. Features
Input channels can be set by
binary input signals
output signals (trips) from protection functions
provision for inverting signals applied to the inputs
adjustable supervision time and permissible signal change
Two outputs assigned to each input:
signal flutter detected (too many signal changes during the
supervision time)
image of the status of the input signal
I. CT/VT inputs:
None
II. Binary inputs:

Binary signals (input signals)

Signal flutter detected
Image of the input signal status
IV. Measurements:
None
3-423
D. Signal flutter detector settings - Defluttering


Supervising Time s 1.0 0.1 60.0 0.1
Nr of Signal Changes 2 2 100 1
State of Input 1 SignalAddr ER
Flutter State Input 1 SignalAddr ER
Supervising Time
defines the time during which multiple signals count as signal
flutter.
Nr Of Signal Changes
defines the number of signal changes during the supervision time
to count as signal flutter. If a higher number of signal changes is
detected during the supervision time, the signal is deemed to be
fluttering.
Binary Input 1
Binary input No. 1
Binary Input 2
Binary input No. 2
Binary Input 3
Binary input No. 3
3-424
Binary Input 4
Binary input No. 4
State of Input 1
signals the status of input No. 1
State of Input 2
State of Input 3
State of Input 4
Flutter State Input 1
signals that flutter detected on input No. 1
3-425
General:
If a signal at an input changes its state in a given period of time
(Supervising Time) more frequently than a given number of times (Nr of
Signal Changes), the input is deemed to be fluttering due, for example,
to contact bounce. As a result, no further signal changes at the input
are recorded as events. Its basic protective function, however, remains
intact. This condition is maintained until fewer signal changes are
counted than the number defined for the given period.
Settings:
Supervision time Supervising Time
Number of signal changes permissible Nr of Signal Changes
The functions counters continuously count the signal changes at the
inputs selected. They are reset at the end of each supervision period.
Should the number of signal changes counted during the period
exceed the maximum permissible for the input, the input is tagged as
fluttering and the corresponding output set. The 'fluttering' condition is
maintained for as long as the number of signal changes is higher the
set limit and is only cancelled and the output reset when a smaller
number of changes is counted during the period.
To prevent the flutter function from fluttering itself (i.e. the number of
changes of an input is just about equal to the number of changes
setting), the number of changes for resetting to the non-fluttering state
must be less than the number of changes required for pick-up minus
ten percent, but at least one change less when the number of changes
for pick-up is set to less than ten.
Note that the start and finish of a supervision period is not signalled
externally. It can therefore occur that fluttering is not signalled although
the number of changes briefly exceeded the maximum permissible, but
the excess happened to straddle two supervision periods.
Typical settings:
Supervising Time 10 s
Nr of Signal Changes 20
3-426
3.6.7. LDU events (LDUevents)
A. Application
Generates events that can be viewed on the local display unit (LDU)
and provides facility for setting a user name.
B. Features
Binary input that can be set by
a binary input signal
an output signal from a protection function
Provision for inverting signals applied to the inputs
Direct connection of input to output: input 1 controls output 1, input
2 control output 2 etc.
Additional blocking input for entire function: all outputs are reset to
logical '0' when blocking input at logical '1'.
An event lists the name of the signal connected to the input and not
the name of the output.
I. CT/VT inputs:
None
II. Binary inputs:

4 independent inputs
Blocking

4 independent outputs
IV. Measurements:
None
3-427
D. LDU event function settings LDUevents


Blocking Input BinaryAddr F
Signalling Output 1 SignalAddr ER
Blocking Input
F: not used
All outputs at logical '0' when the blocking input is active.
Binary Input 1, Binary Input 2, Binary Input 3, Binary Input t4
Binary inputs 1 to 4: Every input acts directly on the corresponding
output and can only be influenced by the inversion and blocking
parameters.
Signal Output 1, Signal Output 2, Signal Output 3, Signal Output 4
Signalling outputs 1 to 4: Every input acts directly on the
corresponding output. Whether an output is recorded as an event
can be enabled or disabled. When it is enabled, it appears on the
local display.
NOTICE: In contrast to all other functions, the name of the signal

connected to the corresponding input appears in the event list instead
of the name of the output. A function can therefore be given a
descriptive, easily understood name that appear in the event list and
on the local display.
3-428
3.7. Measurement functions

3.7.1. Measurement function (UIfPQ)
A. Application
Measurement of voltage, current, real and apparent power and fre-
quency, e.g. for display on the monitor of the control unit or for trans-
ferring to a high level station control system for further processing.
B. Features
Single-phase measurement (1 voltage and 1 current I/P)
Phase-to-ground or optionally phase-to-phase voltage meas-
urement (providing three-phase Y connected VTs are installed)
Evaluation of the fundamental frequency components
High accuracy in the frequency range (0.9 ... 1.1) fN
Frequency of voltage measured unless voltage too low, in which
case current is measured; if both are too low, the result is set to
rated frequency
At least 1 measurement per second
Filters for voltage and current DC components
Filters for voltage and current harmonics
Provision for compensation of connection and measurement phase
errors.
I. CT/VT inputs:
Voltage
Current
II. Binary inputs:

None

None
IV. Measurements:
Voltage (unit UN)
Current (unit IN)
Real power (unit PN (P))
Apparent power (unit PN (Q))
Frequency (unit Hz)
3-429
D. Measurement function settings - UIfPQ


Angle degrees 0.000 -180.0 180.0 0.1
PN UN*IN 1.000 0.200 2.500 0.001
Voltage Mode direct (Select)
Voltage Input Chan. CT/VT-Addr 0
Current Input Chan. CT/VT-Addr 0
Explanation of parameters
Angle
Characteristic angle for measuring real power. The phase-angle is
also taken into account when measuring apparent power.
The default setting of 0.0 degrees should not be changed, when
voltage and current I/Ps are in phase when measuring purely real
power, e.g. when measuring the phase-to-ground voltage and
current of the same conductor.
The setting may vary from 0.0 in the following cases:
compensation of CT and VT phase errors
compensation of the phase-shift between phase-to-ground and
phase-to-phase voltages
compensation of the phase-shift between voltage and current in
general (e.g. when measuring S-T voltage and R current).
PN
Rated power corresponding to UN IN.
This enables the amplitude of the measured power to be adjusted,
for example, to equal the rated power factor of a generator.
Voltage Mode
Definition of the method of voltage measurement and therefore
also the calculation of power. Possible settings:
Direct The voltage of the selected voltage I/P is
measured directly.
Delta The phase-to-phase voltage formed by the
selected voltage I/P and the cyclically lagging
voltage channel is measured.
This setting is not permitted when only a single-
phase is connected or when phase-to-phase
voltages are connected.
3-430
Voltage Input Chan.

Defines the VT input channel.
All voltage I/Ps are available for selection.
Current Input Chan.
Defines the CT input channel.
All current inputs are available for selection.
The measurement function must be carefully set to obtain the best
accuracy. The following must be observed:
CT/VT input channel reference values
The reference values for the voltage and current input channels
must be set such that, when the rated values are applied to the
inputs, 1.000 UN and 1.000 IN are measured by the function.
In most cases it will be possible to retain the default reference

setting (1.000) for the CT and VT input channels. Note that any
changes made to the reference value of a three-phase voltage or
current I/P applies to all phases.
'Angle' setting for phase error compensation
The parameter 'Phase-angle' must be correctly set in order to
measure real and apparent power correctly. In most cases it will be
possible to retain the default reference setting of 0.0 degrees when
measuring the phase-to-ground voltage and current of the same
conductor.
Other settings may be necessary in the following cases:
a) A phase-to-phase voltage is being measured, e.g. meas-
urement of the R phase current in relation to the R - S voltage:
phase compensation: +30.0
b) Compensation of CT and VT phase errors.
phase compensation: according to calibration,
e.g. (5.0...+5.0)
c) Change of measuring direction or correction of CT or VT
polarity.
phase compensation: +180.0 or 180
Where several of these factors have to be taken into consideration,
the phase compensation in all the cases must be added and the
resultant set.
The angles given apply for connection according to the
connections in Chapter 12.
3-431
Power reference value 'PN'

In most cases it will be possible to retain the default reference
setting (1.000). Since the errors in the voltage and current
reference values add geometrically, a fine setting is recommended
to achieve the best possible accuracy.
Check the settings for 'Angle' and 'PN' using an accurate test set
according to the following procedure:
a) Inject purely active power at rated voltage and current.
b) The active power measurement must be as close as possible to
1.000 or oscillate symmetrically to either side of it.
Adjust the value of 'PN' as necessary.
c) The reactive power measurement must be as close as possible to
0.000 or oscillate symmetrically to either side of it.
Adjust the value of 'Angle' as necessary.
3-432
3.7.2. Three-phase current plausibility (Check-I3ph)
A. Application
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase current inputs for
monitoring the symmetry of the three-phase system
detection of a residual current
supervision of the CT input channels
B. Features
Evaluation of
the sum of the three phase currents
the sequence of the three phase currents
Provision for comparing the sum of the three phase currents with a
residual current I/P
Adjustment of residual current amplitude
Blocking at high currents (higher than 2 IN)
Blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low currents
(below 0.05 IN)
I. CT/VT inputs:
Phase currents
Neutral current (optional)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Difference between the vector sum of the three phase currents
and the neutral current
3-433
D. Current plausibility function settings - Check-I3ph


Trip 00000000
I-Setting IN 0.20 0.05 1.00 0.05
Delay s 10.0 0.1 60.0 0.1
CT Compensation 1.00 -2.00 +2.00 0.01
Current Input Channel CT/VT-Addr 0
Summation Current CT/VT-Addr 0
Input
Trip
Definition of the tripping logic (matrix) excited by the functions O/P.
I-Setting
Current setting for tripping.
Delay
Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal at the
O/P.
Forbidden settings:
1 s for current settings 0.2 IN
CT Compensation
Amplitude compensation factor for the residual current I/P,
enabling different transformation ratios of the main CTs for phase
and residual currents to be equalised.
The polarity of the residual current can be reversed by entering
negative values.
Defines the current input channel.
Any of the three-phase current I/Ps may be selected.
The first channel (R phase) of a three-phase group is entered.
Summation Current Input
Defines the neutral current input channel.
Any of the single-phase current I/Ps may be selected.
Block Input
F: enabled
T: disabled
3-434
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Note:
If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place regardless of
setting (I-Setting).
3-435
3-436
3.7.3. Three-phase voltage plausibility (Check-U3ph)
A. Application
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase voltage inputs for
detection of residual voltage
monitoring the asymmetry of the three-phase voltage system due
to the zero-sequence component
supervision of the VT input channels
B. Features
Evaluation of
the sum of the three phase voltages
the sequence of the three phase voltages
Provision for comparing the sum of the three phase voltages with a
residual voltage I/P
Adjustment of residual voltage amplitude
Blocking at high voltages (higher than 1.2 UN)
Blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low voltages
(below 0.4 UN phase-to-phase)
Evaluation of the phase voltages is only possible in the case of Y
connected input transformers, otherwise the residual component
cannot be detected.
I. CT/VT inputs:
Phase voltages
Neutral voltage (optional)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking

Tripping
IV. Measurements:
Difference between the vector sum of the three phase voltages
and the neutral voltage
3-437
D. Voltage plausibility function settings - Check-U3ph


Trip 00000000
V-Setting UN 0.20 0.05 1.20 0.1
Delay s 10.0 0.1 60.0 0.1
VT Compensation 01.00 -2.00 +2.00 0.01
Voltage Input Channel CT/VT-Addr 0
Summation Voltage Input CT/VT-Addr 0
Trip Signal Signaladdr ER
Trip
Definition of the tripping logic (matrix) excited by the functions
output.
V-Setting
Voltage setting for tripping.
Delay
Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal at the O/P.
Forbidden setting:
1 s for voltage settings 0.2 UN
VT Compensation
Amplitude compensation factor for the residual voltage I/P,
enabling different transformation ratios of the main VTs for phase
and residual voltages to be equalised.
The polarity of the residual voltage can be reversed by entering
negative values.
Voltage Input Channel
Defines the voltage input channel.
Any of the three-phase voltage inputs may be selected.
The first channel (R phase) of a three-phase group is entered.
Not applicable with delta connected VTs.
Summation Voltage Input
Defines the neutral voltage input channel.
Any of the single-phase voltage inputs may be selected.
3-438
Block Input
F: enabled
T: disabled
Trip Signal
Tripping signal.
Note:
If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place regardless of
setting (U-Setting).
3-439
3-440
3.7.4. Disturbance recorder (Disturbance Rec)
A. Application
Recording current and voltage wave forms and the values of function
variables before, during and after operation of a protection function.
B. Features
Records up to 9 CT and VT inputs
Records up to 12 measured function variables
Records up to 16 binary inputs
Sampling rate of 12 samples per period (i.e. 600, respectively 720
Hz)
9 analog and 8 binary signals recorded in approx. 5 seconds
Function initiated by the general pick-up or general trip signals, or
by any binary signal (binary I/P or O/P of a protection function).
Data recorded in a ring shift register with provision for deleting the
oldest record to make room for a new one.
Choice of procedure if memory full: either 'stop recording' or
'Overwrite oldest records'.
I. CT/VT inputs:
All installed inputs available
II. Measured variable inputs:

All installed measured function variables available
III. Binary inputs:

All installed inputs available (also outputs of protection
functions)
IV. Binary outputs:

Start of recording
Memory full
V. Measurements:
None
3-441
D. Disturbance recorder function settings - Disturbance Rec


Station Address 1 0 99 1
PreEvent ms 40 40 400 20
Event ms 100 100 3000 50
PostEvent ms 40 40 400 20
Recording Mode A (Select)
Trigger Mode TrigByStart (Select)
Storage Mode StopOnFull (Select)
Binary Output SignalAddr ER
Mem Full Signal SignalAddr ER
Analog Input 1 CT/VT-Addr
.
.
.
.
Trig Binary Input 1 No Trigger (Select)
.
.
MWA Input 1 MeasVar
.
.
MWA Input 12 MeasVar
MWA Scale1 Factor 1 1 1000 1
.
.
MWA Scale12 Factor
3-442
Station Address
Number of the disturbance recorder for identifying records for
subsequent evaluation.
PreEvent
Definition of how long the recorder runs before a possible event.
Event
Definition of the maximum limit for the duration of an event
(recording mode A). In recording mode B, the same parameter sets
the duration of recording.
PostEvent
Definition of how long the recorder runs after an event (after
EventDur).
Recording Mode
Definition of how events should be recorded. Possible settings:
A: Recording only while the trigger signal is active. (minimum
time = 100 ms, maximum time = event duration setting).
B: Recording from the instant of the trigger signal for the event
duration setting.
Trigger Mode
Definition of the instant of triggering and how binary signals are
recorded. The configured CT and VT channels are always
recorded. Possible settings:
TrigByStart: The disturbance recorder is triggered when a
protection function picks up (general pick-up).
Binary signals are not recorded.
TrigByTrip: The disturbance recorder is triggered when a
protection function trips (general trip).
Binary signals are not recorded.
TrigByBin1: The disturbance recorder is triggered by the binary
I/P 1. Binary signals are not recorded.
TrigAnyBin: Defined binary signals are recorded and recording
is triggered by any of them via an OR gate.
TrigStrt&Bin: Defined binary signals are recorded and recording
is triggered by any of them via an OR gate and also when a
protection function picks up (general pick-up).
TrigTrip&Bin: Defined binary signals are recorded and
recording is triggered by any of them via an OR gate and also
when a protection function trips (general pick-up).
3-443
NOTICE: If the trigger conditions are connected to an OR gate and

one of them is fulfilled, the other trigger conditions bear no influence
and no further records are made. In this situation, a record is initiated
when the disturbance recorder is reset.
Storage Mode
determines the procedure when the memory is full:
StopOnFull: No further data are recorded when the memory is
full.
Overwrite: The oldest records are overwritten and therefore
lost.
Binary Output
O/P signalling that recording is taking place.
Mem Full Signal
Warning that the memory is full. Normally, there remains
sufficient room for at least one more record after this signal is
generated.
Analog Input 1...Analog Input 12
Defines the CT and VT inputs to be recorded. The setting is the
number of the I/P.
The numbers of the CT and VT inputs do not necessarily have to
agree with the numbers of the CT and VT channels, however, no
gaps are permitted (setting zero).
Binary Input 1...Binary Input 16

Binary inputs to be recorded (for triggering modes 'TrStrt&Bin,
TrigAnyBin and TrTrip&Bin'). Binary address (binary input or output
of a protection function). No recording takes place for FFALSE or
TTRUE.
A particular order is not necessary. There may also be gaps.
3-444
Trig Binary Input 1...Trig Binary Input 16

Definition of a corresponding binary signal as one of the trigger
signals for initiating recording. All the trigger signals thus defined,
are connected to an OR gate so that any one of them can start
recording. Possible settings are:
No trigger: The corresponding signal has no influence on the
start of recording.
Trigger: A positive-going edge of the corresponding signal from
logical '0' to logical '1' initiates recording.
Inv. Trigger: A negative-going edge of the corresponding signal
from logical '1' to logical '0' initiates recording.
MWA Input 1...MWA Input 12
Measured variables to be recorded.
Possible settings are:
Disconnected, no input
Output of a protection function, measured variable of the
selected function
Input from SCS, input variable of IBB channel 4,
inputs 1...64.
Input from AXM, input from the remote Analog Input card
MWA Scale 1...MWA Scale 12
Scaling factors for reading the disturbance records.
3-445
General:
NOTICE: The disturbance recorder function may be configured

only once for each parameter set.
Only the original function can be active in each set. In case a
disturbance recorder is active in each parameter set or copied from
the original function, the following must be observed:
To prevent an incorrect interpretation all the old records are deleted,
upon switching over to another active parameter set. Therefore these
must be uploaded before a switch over.
The special 'disturbance recorder' function serves to record current

and voltage waveforms and measured function variables when a
protection function picks up. A battery buffered 64 kByte memory is
provided for this purpose, which enables 9 analog and 8 binary signals
to be recorded within a maximum of approx. 5 seconds.
To ensure that the memory is not filled by useless data, recording only
takes place after a starting signal (trigger signal). Each time a start
signal is generated, the data are recorded for a predefined time and
saved as an 'event'. Thus depending on the definitions of the relevant
times, the memory has capacity for between 1 and approx. 56 events.
To enable the circumstances leading up to an event and also the
responses after an event to be studied, an event comprises three
parts, the pre-event data (recorded before the start signal), the data of
the event itself and the post-event data. The durations of these three
periods can be independently defined.
How the data prior to an event is obtained requires a little more
explanation. Data are continuously recorded from the instant the
programming of the perturbograph function has been completed. They
are fed into a ring shift register, the older data at the beginning being
overwritten as soon as the register is full. This cyclic overwriting of the
ring register continues until a start signal initiates the recording of an
event (trigger signal). Thus the circumstances immediately prior to the
actual event are available in the ring register.
The duration of the record of the actual event is determined by the
tripping signal (trigger signal), i.e. recording continues for as long as it
is active (recording mode A). If the tripping signal is very short,
recording lasts for at least 100 milliseconds and if it is very long,
recording is discontinued upon reaching the maximum duration (set
event time). A second mode of operation is also provided (recording
mode B), for which the duration of recording always equals the set
event time regardless of the duration of the trigger signal.
3-446
The post-event circumstances are of less importance, especially in

recording mode B, in which case simply the duration of recording is
extended. The essential thing is that during post-event recording, a
new trigger signal can initiate the recording of new events. This,
however, means that two events overlap and it may not always be
possible to fully reconstruct the circumstances of both events (part of
the pre-event data is in the preceding event).
The entire event memory operates as a ring register. This means that
a single event can be deleted to make room for a new one without
having to delete the others.
The procedure followed when the memory is full can be selected.
Either recording is discontinued and no new events are recorded, or
the oldest records are overwritten so that the memory always contains
the latest events. It must be noted that in this mode, a record can be
deleted before it has been transferred to an operator station. Even if
transfer of a record is in progress, it will be interrupted to make room
for a new record.
Application programs
Disturbance recorder data files are stored in a binary format and can
only be evaluated using the PSM E_wineve program (see Operating
Instructions 1MRB520372-Ude) or the REVAL program (see REVAL
Operating Instructions 1MDU10024-EN).
Disturbance recorder data (currents, voltages and measured variables)
can be transferred back to the RE.316*4 device using the conversion
program XSCON (in conjunction with the test set XS92b). To inject the
disturbance signals with other test equipment convert the disturbance
records with PSM / E_wineve to COMTRADE format.
Refer to Section 9.3. for the procedure for transferring disturbance
data via the IBB.
Measured function variables may have values which cannot be entirely
reproduced by the evaluation software. Such variables can be reduced
using the scaling factors 'MeasScale'. The highest number the
evaluation software can reproduce faithfully is 16535. The evaluation
software automatically takes account of the scaling factors.
3-447
The following table shows scaling examples for the most important
measured function variables.
Function Meas. variable Nominal value 'MeasScale'

UIfPQ f (50Hz) 20000 2
UIfPQ P 820698 52
UIfPQ Q 820698 52
Synchro Check degrees (180) 31415 2
Power PN 1641397 105
Nominal value
'MeasScale' is given by: + Margin
16535
Processor capacity:
The disturbance recorder function runs on the same central processing
unit (CPU) as the protection functions. The processor capacity
required by the disturbance recorder function as a percentage of the
total capacity and in relation to the number of signals is:
20 % for 9 analog and 0 binary signals
40 % for 9 analog and 16 binary signals
The disturbance recorder function will thus be generally confined to
recording the analog variables and be triggered by the general start or
general trip signals. Changes in the states of binary signals are
nevertheless registered by the event recorder.
3-448
Recording duration:
The time during which data are recorded can be determined from the
following relationship:
65535 ((n + 1) 22)
t rec = p
(2a + b) 12
where trec: max. recording time
n: Number of events recorded
a: Number of CT and VT channels recorded
b: Number of Bytes required for binary channels
(one Byte per eight binary signals)
p: duration of one cycle at power system frequency
(e.g. 20 ms for 50 Hz)
Example:
n = 10
a=9
b = 2 (i.e. 9 to 16 signals)
p = 20 ms
65535 ((10 + 1) 22)
t rec = 20 ms = 5.44 s
( 2 9 + 2) 12
It follows that for the given number of channels and power system
frequency, the capacity is sufficient for 10 events of 540 ms duration
each.
3-449
File PLOT.TXT
The programs PSM E_wineve, REVAL and XSCON need the file
PLOT.TXT to be able to process the disturbance recorder data.
Example PLOT.TXT
Hardware configuration: A/D config: K9
Overcurrent: A1 (IN = 1 A)
Overvoltage: U1 (UN = 100 V)
N: 1
S: M316V6.5
D0 : OC101 /CO: 1
D1 : OC106 /CO: 1
D2 : f 2 Trip /CO: 1
U0 : UR /CO: 1 /TR: 39.62000 /UN: V

U1 : US /CO: 1 /TR: 39.62000 /UN: V
U2 : UT /CO: 1 /TR: 39.62000 /UN: V
I3 : IR /CO: 1 /TR: 54.150 /UN: A
I4 : IS /CO: 1 /TR: 54.150 /UN: A
I5 : IT /CO: 1 /TR: 54.150 /UN: A
I6 : I0 /CO: 1 /TR: 54.150 /UN: A
I7 : IM0 /CO: 1 /TR: 1.2530 /UN: A
U8 : USS /CO: 1 /TR: 39.62000 /UN: V
where:
N: station number: text
S: station name: text
Dnn binary channels: text (max. 8 char.)
Unn:, Inn: voltage channel, current channel: text (max. 8 char.)
/CO 1 to 15: number of the plot colour for PSM E_wineve
(In the case of REVAL the plotting colour is
determined by the particular layout)
/TR: conversion ratio for PSM E_wineve, REVAL
/UN: unit for PSM E_wineve, REVAL: text
NOTICE: 'Unn:' and 'Inn:' are needed by XSCON to indicate whether

a channel is being used for voltage or current.
3-450
Ratio TR
Voltage channels for REL316*4 and REC316*4
100 V: TR = 19.81 in V
200 V: TR = 39.62 in V
TR = 0.1981 times UN
Voltage channels for REG316*4 and RET316*4
15 V: TR = 5.144 in V
100 V: TR = 34.312 in V
200 V: TR = 68.624 in V
TR = 0.34312 times UN
Current channels RE.316*4
Protection: 1 A: TR = 10.83 in A
2 A: TR = 21.66 in A
5 A: TR = 54.11 in A
TR = 10.83 times IN
Metering: 1 A: TR = 0.2506 in A
2 A: TR = 0.5011 in A
5 A: TR = 1.253 in A
TR = 0.2506 times IN
These ratios enable WinEVE to determine the secondary values.
These ratios must be multiplied by the ratio of the main CTs and VTs
to obtain the primary system values.
Automatic creation of the file plotxxx.txt:

In case a disturbance recorder is configured, the file plotxxx.txt is
automatically stored in the directory, from which the HMI is started, if:
CAP2/316 starts online, or otherwise subsequent to the upload of
the configuration from the device,
the configuration is downloaded to the device,
a new configuration file is opened,
but not if the configuration data is stored onto a disk.
3-451
Merger of several plotxxx.txt:

Several files plotxxx.txt with different station numbers (xxx) can be
combined to a single plot.txt. The file plot.txt must be at the same
location as the disturbance recorder data for the REVAL evaluation
program.
Example:
PLOT.TXT (existing file), plot020.txt (data for station No. 20) and
plot021.txt (data for station No. 21) can be combined using the DOS
command:
C:\REL316
C>copy PLOT.TXT+plot020.txt+plot021.txt PLOT.TXT
The file PLOT.TXT can be modified using an editor.
Instructions for installing the data evaluation program
PSM E_wineve
The data evaluation program must be installed in accordance with the
operating instructions 1MRB520372-Uen.
WINEVE
Copy the file 'PLOT.TXT' to the directory:
C:\I650\EVENTS
A disturbance should be recorded during the commissioning of every
relay and the record stored in the directory given above.
The procedure for installing the station parameter files is as follows:
Start the WINEVE program.
Open a fault record
The following error message appears:
C:\I650\STATION\ST0xx.PAR
Could not find file.
Click on OK.
Select the menu item 'Import station file' in the 'Parameter' menu.
Select the file PLOT.TXT belonging to this disturbance recording.
Select the menu item 'Save station' in the 'Parameter' menu.
This procedure must be repeated for all the relays. The configuration
file PLOT.TXT is no longer necessary and the error message
concerning the missing station file does not appear. WINEVE provides
facility for editing and resaving all the station parameters (texts,
colours etc.).
3-452
Exception: The ratios TR have to be changed in the file PLOT.TXT and

the file re-imported and saved again as described above.
REVAL
Copy the file 'PLOT.TXT' to the following directory:
C:\SMS\REVAL\EVENTS
REVAL rereads the file PLOT.TXT every time a disturbance record is
loaded, however, any colours specified in PLOT.TXT are ignored.
Instead, the colours are assigned by REVAL and can be edited after a
disturbance record has been loaded.
3-453
3-454
3.7.5. Measurement module (Measurement Module)
A. Application
Measurement of 3 phase voltages, 3 phase currents, active and
reactive power, power factor cos (cos phi) and frequency, e.g. for
display on an operating device or transmission to a station monitoring
system.
B. Features
Measurement of 3 phase voltages (Y and delta), currents, active
and reactive power, power factor cos and frequency.
Provision for using the 3 phase current inputs in combination with
either 3 phase-to-phase voltages or 3 phase-to-earth voltages.
2 independent impulse counter inputs for calculation of interval and
accumulated energy
The three-phase measurement and impulse counters can be used
independently and may also be disabled.
Up to 4 measurement module functions can be configured on one
RE..16 device.
All inputs and outputs can be configured by the user.
C. Inputs and Outputs
I. CT / VT inputs:
Voltage
Current
II. Binary inputs:

2 impulse inputs
2 reset inputs

2 outputs for the new counter value
IV. Measurement values:

Voltage URS (Unit UN)
Voltage UST (Unit UN)
Voltage UTR (Unit UN)
Voltage UR (Unit UN)
Voltage US (Unit UN)
Voltage UT (Unit UN)
Current R (Unit IN)
Current S (Unit IN)
Current T (Unit IN)
Active power P (Unit PN)
Reactive power Q (Unit QN)
Power factor cos (Unit cos phi)
3-455
Frequency f (Unit Hz)

Interval energy value 1 (E1Int)
Interval pulse number 1 (P1Int)
Accumulated energy value 1 (E1Acc)
Accumulated pulse number (P1Acc)
Interval energy value 2 (E2Int)
Interval pulse number 2 (P2Int)
Accumulated energy value 2 (E2Acc)
Accumulated pulse number 2 (P2Acc)
3-456
D. Measurement module function settings (Measurement Module)


VoltageInp 0
PN UN*IN*3 1.000 0.200 2.500 0.001
AngleComp Deg 0.000 -180 180 0.1
t1-Interval Select 15 min
PulseInp 1 BinaryAddr F
Reset 1 BinaryAddr F
ScaleFact 1 1.0000 0.0001 1.0000 0.0001
Cnt 1 New SignalAddr
t2-Interval Select 15 min
PulseInp 2 BinaryAddr F
Reset 2 BinaryAddr F
ScaleFact 2 1.0000 0.0001 1.0000 0.0001
Cnt 2 New SignalAddr
VoltageInp
defines the voltage input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be
set and the first channel (R phase) of the group of three selected
must be specified.
Voltage and current inputs must be assigned before the three-
phase measurement part of the function can be activated. If only
the pulse counter part of the function is to be used, both CT and
VT inputs must be disabled.
CurrentInp
defines the current input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set
be specified.
Current and voltage input signals must come from the same CT/VT
input module.
PN
Reference value for measuring power. It enables the amplitude of
the power values to be adjusted to take account, for example, of
the rated power factor cos or to compensate the amplitude errors
of the input transformers.
3-457
AngleComp
Angular setting for compensating the phase error. It is set to obtain
the best possible power measuring accuracy. In many cases, the
default setting of 0.0 degrees will be acceptable, but a different
setting may be necessary to compensate the following:
a) CT and VT phase errors
typical setting: -5 ... +5
b) correction of CT or VT polarity
typical setting: -180or +180
t1-Interval
Interval set for accumulating pulses assigned to E1 acc_interval and
Pulse1acc_interval.
The following settings are possible: 1 min, 2 min, 5 min,
10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 60 min and 120 min.
PulseInp 1
Input for energy counter impulse.
F: not used
T: always active. This setting should not be used.
Note: Minimum pulse-width is 10 ms.
Reset 1
Input to reset E1accumulate and Pulse1accumulate outputs.
F: no reset
T: always reset
ScaleFact 1
Factor for scaling E1 outputs in relation to pulse counter output:
E1acc_interval = Pulse1acc_interval ScaleFact 1
E1accumulate = Pulse1accumulate ScaleFact 1.
Cnt 1 New
Output to indicate that new values are available at impulse counter
1 outputs and have been frozen. The binary output is cleared 30 s
after the interval starts.
t2-Interval
See t1-Interval.
PulseInp 2
See PulseInp 1.
3-458
Reset 2
See Reset 1.
ScaleFact 2
See ScaleFact 1.
Cnt 2 New
See Cnt 1 New.
3-459
E. Setting Instructions
To get the best performance from the measurement module, be sure
to set it properly. The following notes should help to decide the correct
settings:
Reference values for the analog input channels
The settings in this case should be chosen such that the functions
measures 1.000 UN and 1.000 IN when rated voltage and current
are being applied. In many cases the default setting (1.000) will be
satisfactory.
Phase compensation 'Angle comp'
This setting is important for correct measurement of active and
reactive power and the power factor cos . For most cases, it is
possible to accept the default value 0.0.
A different setting may be necessary to compensate the following:
a) CT and VT phase errors
typical setting: between -5.0 and +5.0
b) correction of direction of the measurement or CT or VT polarity
typical setting: -180.0 or +180.0
Add multiple errors to obtain the correct compensation setting.
The angles given apply for connection according to the con-
nections in Chapter 12.
Voltage measurement
The zero-sequence component in case of delta-connected VTs is
assumed to be zero, but with Y-connected VTs the zero-sequence
voltage does have an influence on the phase-to-ground
measurements. In an ungrounded power system, the phase-to-
ground voltages will float in relation to ground.
Power and frequency measurements
A power measurement is obtained by summing the powers of the
three-phase system: 3 S = UR IR* + US IS* + UT IT*. The
measurement is largely insensitive to frequency in the range
(0.8...1.2) fN. The frequency measured is that of the positive
sequence voltage. Should the voltage be too low, the frequency is
not measured and a value of 0.0 Hz results.
Where only the impulse counter is in use, both analog inputs
(current and voltage) must be disabled.
Where only the measurement part of the function is in use, the
binary impulse and reset inputs of both impulse counters must be
disabled, i.e. 'always FALSE'.
3-460
3.7.5.1. Impulse counter inputs

The impulses counted are normally generated by a measuring or
metering device (see Fig. 3.100).
1
TPulse =
fPulse
tPulse tPause
Fig. 3.100 Impulse counter input signal
The maximum impulse repetition rate is 25 Hz (see Fig. 3.100). Thus

the minimum time between the positive-going edges of two input
1
impulses is TPuls, min = Hz = 40 ms .
25
The pulse-width is determined by the function generating the impulses
and the ratio between the pulse-width and the interval between lagging
and leading edges should be in the range 1:3 to 1:1, i.e.:
1 1
tPulse, min = TPulse, min = TPulse, min = 10 ms
1+ 3 4
Since the impulse counter is polled approximately every 5 ms,
impulses are reliably detected with a safety factor of about 2.
The impulse counter evaluates the positive-going edges (01) of the
input signal.
To filter any contact bounce (debouncing) phenomena, only the first
positive-going edge is evaluated within a given period (typically 10 ms).
3-461
3.7.5.2. Impulse counter operation

Fig. 3.101 shows the principles of impulse counter operation.
Block diagram for one impulse counter channel

Scaling
factor
tinterval
Impulse Intermediate Eacc_interval

buffer Scaling
counter acc_interval
input Pulseacc_interval
Counter
freeze
tinterval Scaling
Reset factor
Intermediate Eaccumulate
buffer Scaling
accumulate
Pulseaccumulate
Signal response
tinterval tinterval tinterval Reset
tinterval t
Impulse counter
input t
Eacc_interval
Pulseacc_interval t
Counter values
to be transferred
Eaccumulate
Pulseaccumulate
Counter value t
to be transferred
Fig. 3.101 Block diagram for one impulse counter channel and
signal response
3.7.5.3. Impulse counter operating principle

The binary inputs 'Reset 1' and 'Reset 2' reset the counter values
Eaccumulate and Pulseaccumulate to zero. The interval values Eacc_interval
and Pulseacc_interval are not reset.
3-462
When a reset command is applied to binary input 'Reset 1' or 'Reset 2',
measurement events with the values of Eaccumulate and Pulseaccumulate
are created for the respective channel before its counters are reset.
Impulse counter values are stored in a RAM with a battery supply and
are not lost should the auxiliary supply fail. Impulses arriving at the
inputs while the software is being initialised, e.g. after settings have
been made, are lost.
Capacity for Pulseaccumulate:
At the maximum impulse repetition rate, the total number of
impulses counted during a year is 25 pps 3,600 s/h 8,760
h/year = 788,400,000 impulses per year. The output is reset to
zero when a counter reaches 2,000,000,000, i.e. 2 109.
Unless special measures taken or a counter is reset, it can
overflow at the worst after approx. 2,5 years.
Should an impulse counter overflow, the value of Pulseaccumulate is
recorded in the event list. No further measures have been
included, because
1. an overflow is hardly likely to occur.
2. should an overflow occur, it is obvious providing the counters
are checked regularly, for example, by an SCS.
If necessary, the total number of impulses counted since the last
reset can be determined even after an overflow.
3.7.5.4. Interval processing

The interval starts at a full hour plus a even multiple of tInterval and is
synchronised to a full minute by the internal RE..16 clock.
Assuming tInterval is set to 120 min, the interval is started at even hours
throughout the day.
Impulse counter and energy outputs are set at the start of the first
regular interval, even if the previous interval was incomplete. This
ensures that no impulses are lost after starting the function.
When tinterval expires, the following takes place:
The counter values Eaccumulate, Pulseaccumulate, Eacc_interval and

Pulseacc_interval are stored in the intermediate buffers and remain
unchanged until the end of the next interval.
When the new impulse counter results are frozen at the end of the
interval, the binary output 'Cnt 1 New', respectively 'Cnt 2 New' is
set to TRUE. It is reset after 30 s regardless of interval duration
and can be used to initiate reading of a new set of frozen interval
values.
3-463
If selected for transmission, transmission of the counter values via

the LON interface is initiated by the positive-going edge of this
output.
The values Eacc_interval and Pulseacc_interval of the respective
channel are only recorded as measurement events providing the
output 'Cnt 1 New', respectively 'Cnt 2 New' is being used, for
example, to control an event recorder, LED or signalling relay.
The freezing of results, resetting and event recording of the interval
counters is illustrated in Fig. 3.102.
Impulse counter input
t
Pulseacc_interval Internal only
Reset
t
Measurement
event
Pulseaccumulate Internal only
CounterFrozen 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
tInterval tInterval tInterval tInterval tInterval t
Fig. 3.102 Interval processing
3-464
3.8. Data transmission

3.8.1. Principle of operation of the A/D converter 316EA63
3.8.1.1. Introduction
Local and remote stations are synchronised at the same sampling
rate. Because the measurement of the data exchanged between the
stations is synchronised, the method of memory management and
subsequent digital filtering, the measured variables of all the channels
(local and transferred remote signals) are made available to the main
CPU at the same time. This is an essential for reliable differential
longitudinal protection.
3.8.1.2. Synchronisation principle
The transfer of data via the optical modem between the 316EA62 units
in the two stations (master and slave) is synchronised.
Which of the stations is designated master and which slave is
determined when setting the system parameters using the operator
control program (HMI).
Should the communications channel become disturbed or interrupted,
each of the A/D converters generates its own clock signal.
A counter is started when the master transmits a signal to the slave.
Upon receiving the signal, the slave sends an echo back to the master.
The counter is stopped by the master and the count divided by 2 when
it receives the echo. The result is the transmission time. The echo
signal includes specific data which are tested by both stations and
generate an error flag should the result of the test be negative.
3.8.1.3. Data transmission principle

The first three converted signals obtained from up to six local channels
are transferred via the serial interface to the optical modem, which
then transmits them to the synchronously operating remote station.
All the converted variables of the local station (maximum 6 channels)
and the variables received from the opposite station (maximum 3
channels) are digitally filtered before being transferred to the dual-port
memory on the main CPU board 316VC61a.
Provision is also made for the binary signal transmission function to
transfer 8 binary signals at the same time for processing in the remote
station (see Section 3.8.3. Binary signal transmission).
3.8.1.4. Consequences of transmission errors
Should an error occur during the transmission of data, an error flag is
set. Thereby in such cases, the affected protection function is
automatically blocked.
Attention is immediately drawn to data errors (error flag set on the
316EA62 board) by the system alarm 'Modem error'. If the binary
signal transmission function is also active, the alarm 'RemoteBiError' is
generated.
3-465
The diagnostic function, on the other hand, records these errors after a
delay of 80 ms, i.e. only after the communications channel is
considered to be permanently disturbed. A single transmission error,
e.g. a parity error, does not therefore lead to an error being recorded
by the diagnostic function.
Consequences of transmission errors for protection functions:

Functions which process the local analog variables (A/D channels
1 to 6) are excluded from blocking by the communications channel
and serve as back-up protection.
Functions which process the analog variables transferred via the
communications channel (A/D channels 7 to 9) are blocked (Diff-
Line, Check-I3ph, Current etc.).
The signals of the binary signal transmission function are set to
'OFF' (0 or false).
The inputs of the disturbance recorder A/D channels 7 to 9 are set
to zero.
Note on the 'SynchroCheck' and 'EarthFltGnd2' functions:

During an attempt to synchronise the two stations, the synchro-check
function can generate the signals 'Voltage Busbar Input Phase',
'Voltage Line Input Phase', 'Phase Diff. OK Signal' and 'Freq. Diff. OK
Signal'. Nevertheless, incorrect operation cannot take place (closing of
the circuit-breaker not enabled). The sensitive earth fault function
('Sensitive Earth Fault for Grounded Systems') can briefly generate the
signals 'Start Signal', 'Meas Forward' and 'Meas Backward'. This also
cannot cause incorrect operation.
3-466
3.8.2. Longitudinal differential protection (Diff-Line)
A. Application
Differential protection of overhead lines, cables, transformer feeders
(two-winding transformers) and generator/transformer units.
B. Features
Non-linear inverse current operating characteristic
(see Fig. 3.103)
High stability during through-faults and CT saturation
Fast operation
Individual comparison of phase currents
Optional for power transformer protection:
Inrush restraint
evaluation of the ratio of second harmonic to fundamental
detection of the highest phase current
detection of an energised transformer on the basis of the load
current
Phase compensation for group of connection
Amplitude compensation (CT ratio)
I. CT/VT inputs:
Current (2 x 3 inputs)
II. Binary inputs:

Blocking
Inrush
g-High

Tripping
Tripping R phase
Tripping S phase
Tripping T phase
Inrush signal
Stability signal
3-467
IV. Measurements:
R phase neutral current
S phase neutral current
T phase neutral current
R phase restraint current
S phase restraint current
T phase restraint current
3-468
D. Longitudinal differential function settings - Diff-Line


Trip 00000000
Current Inp.Ch 1 CT/VT-Addr 0
a1 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
s1 D (Select)
Current Inp.Ch 2 CT/VT-Addr 0
a2 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
s2 d0 (Select)
g Setting IN 0.30 0.1 0.5 0.1
v Setting 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.25
b Setting IN 1.50 1.25 5.00 0.25
g High Setting IN 1.20 0.50 2.50 0.25
I -Inst IN 3 3 15 1
InRush Ratio % 10 6 20 1
InRush Time s 5 0 90 1
Block Inp BinaryAddr F
In Rush Inp BinaryAddr F
High Set Inp BinaryAddr F
Trip SignalAddr ER
Trip-R SignalAddr
Trip-S SignalAddr
Trip-T SignalAddr
Inrush Current SignalAddr
Stabilisation SignalAddr
Trip
Tripping logic (matrix) to which the tripping output of the function is
connected.
Current Inp.Ch 1
Defines the CT input channel for side 1. The first channel (R
phase) of the group of three must be selected.
a1
CT ratio compensation factor on side 1.
s1
Group of connection on side 1 (primary).
Possible settings:
Y: star-connected winding (transformer in the zone of
protection)
D: delta-connected winding
3-469
Current Inp.Ch 2
Defines the CT input channel for side 2. The first channel (R
phase) of the group of three must be selected.
a2
CT ratio compensation factor on side 2.
s2
Group of connection on side 2.
Possible settings: All the usual phase groups, defining
how connected (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag)
phase-shift of the voltage on side 2 in relation to the voltage on
side 1 in multiples of 30
g Setting
Defines the basic setting g for the operating characteristic.
v Setting
Defines the pick-up ratio v for the operating characteristic.
b Setting
Defines the setting of b on the operating characteristic.
This is normally set to about 1.5 times the load current.
g High Setting
This is a high-set Basic setting which becomes effective when the
input 'HighSetInp' is activated.
The higher setting prevents mal-operation from taking place which
may otherwise occur due, for example, to a temporarily higher
excitation current (overfluxing).
I -Inst
The differential current above which tripping takes place
independently of the inrush detector.
This setting enables operating times for high internal fault currents
to be reduced.
InRush Ratio
Ratio of 2nd harmonic to fundamental of the current above which
the inrush detector picks up.
InRush Time
Time during with the inrush detector is enabled after the protected
unit is energised or after a through-fault.
Block Inp
Input for blocking the function
F: enabled
T: disabled
3-470
In Rush Inp
Activates the inrush detector although the transformer is already
energised. It enables inrush currents to be detected which occur,
for example, when a transformer is energised in parallel.
F: not used
High Set Inp
Activates the high-set Basic setting g-High.
F: not used
T: always active
Trip
Tripping signal.
Note:
The differential protection function does not have a starting signal
and every time it trips the signal 'General start' is set together with
the 'Trip' signal, providing the Trip command is configured to be
recorded as an event (ER).
The tripping measurands will be stored in the event list only if the
trip command is configured in the event list.
Trip-R
Tripping signal R phase.
Trip-S
Tripping signal S phase.
Trip-T
Tripping signal T phase.
Inrush Current
Inrush current detection signal.
Stabilisation
Signal IH > b during a through-fault.
3-471
Fig. 3.103 Operating characteristic of the longitudinal differential

protection function
3-472
Basic setting g Setting
Pick-up ratio v Setting
Operating characteristic changing point b Setting
High-set Basic setting, g-High Setting
Instantaneous operating current
(uninfluenced by inrush detector) I -Inst
Inrush detector pick-up ratio InRush Ratio
Time during which inrush detector active InRush Time
Choice of current input Current Inp.Ch 1, 2
CT ratio compensation factors a1 a2
Group of connection on side 1 s1
Group of connection on side 2 s2
The longitudinal differential function is primarily a phase fault
protection, but may also detect ground faults. It is a sensitive, fast and
strictly discriminative unit protection.
3.8.2.1. Setting instructions for lines with a power transformer in the
protected zone
Basic setting g
The setting for 'g Setting' defines the minimum operating current at
which the function picks up for an internal fault.
The value for 'g Setting' should be as low as possible to enable the
function to detect high-resistance faults as well as solid phase faults.
Inter-turn faults are also detected where the protected unit includes a
power transformer.
The setting for 'g Setting' must be high enough, on the other hand, to
exclude any risk of mal-operation due to:
line capacitance charging currents
line leakage currents
CT errors
the off-load current of any power transformer included in the
protected unit at the highest short-time system voltage
It should be noted when the protected unit includes a power
transformer that:
The off-load current of a modern transformer is very low, usually
between 0.3 % and 0.5 % of IN at rated system voltage. However,
the excitation current can reach 10 % or more of IN at the
maximum short-time system voltage such as can occur, for
example, following load shedding.
A tap-changer can vary the voltage ratio in the range 5 to 10 %,
in some cases up to 20 % and more. This has to be taken into
account both in the case of power transformers with manually
adjusted tap and with automatic tap-changers.
3-473
Note:
This error is proportional to the through-current and is therefore
best taken into account by the pick-up ratio setting 'v Setting'.
These factors produce an operating current which flows under normal
system operating conditions. The basic setting 'g Setting' must
therefore be chosen higher than the off-load operating current. A
typical value is g = 0.3 IN (30 % IN).
Pick-up ratio v
The pick-up setting 'v Setting' determines the stability of the
longitudinal differential scheme during an external fault, i.e. at high
levels of through-fault current.
The value of 'v Setting' is defined by the ratio of the operating current
to restraint current. It should be chosen such that faults can be
detected under load conditions which only produce a low operating
current. Through-fault stability must be maintained, however, at all
costs. A typical setting is v = 0.5.
Restraint current b
The restraint current b defines the point at which the slope of the
characteristic is switched.
The inclined part of the operating characteristic permits the protection
to remain stable even when CT saturation occurs during a through-
fault.
The combination of the two slopes with a variable point of switching
from one to the other enables the operating characteristic to be
adapted to suit the requirements of the application.
A setting of 1.5 is recommended for 'b Setting'. This provides high
stability during through-faults and adequate sensitivity for fault currents
in the region of the load current.
Factor a2
The full setting range of factor a2 for CT ratio correction only applies
when the reference values of the analog channels are set to 1.000.
The highest permissible setting reduces for other reference value
settings according to the ratio between the analog channel reference
values (line side 2 to line side 1).
Operating characteristic
A restraint current is derived from the input variables I1 and I2
measured at the two ends of the protected unit to ensure adequate
through-fault stability. As the name implies, the restraint current
opposes the operating current.
3-474
The restraint current is either given by the equation:
IH = I1 I2 cos for -90 < < 90
or it is zero
IH = 0 for 90 < < 270
The angle is defined as
= < (I1; I2 )
The vector diagram relating the currents entering and leaving the
protected unit and the operating current measured on a loaded line is
as follows:
I2 I1

I2
I HEST 905 003 C
The following diagram then applies during a through-fault:
I2 I1
= 0
I I2
HEST 905 003 C
This then changes to the following for an internal fault:
I2 I1 I2
= 180
HEST 905003 C
According to the equation for the restrain current, IH becomes
in the case of a through-fault ( = 0) : IH = I1 I2
respectively in the case of an internal fault

a) supplied from one end (I2 = 0) : IH = 0
b) supplied from both ends ( = 180) : IH = 0
High through-fault currents may cause CT saturation. It is for this
reason that the characteristic is switched to the one with an infinite
slope for IH/IN > b.
3-475
It should be noted that for the part of the characteristic with an infinite
slope to be active, I1 and I2 must also be higher than b and not just IH.
I
IN
0,75
0,5
0,25
g b
IH
0 0,5 1 1,5 IN
HEST 905 003 C
Fig. 3.104 Operating characteristic of the longitudinal differential

function for high through-currents
This characteristic would scarcely, however, detect an internal fault

supplied from one end when a through-current such as the load
current is flowing. Therefore if the current at one end of the line is
lower than the setting for 'b', i.e.
I1 I
or 2 < b
IN IN
the slope determined by the setting for 'v' applies throughout.
I
IN
0,75
0,5
0,25
g b
IH
0 1 2 IN
HEST 905 003 C
Fig. 3.105 Operating characteristic for low through-currents
This characteristic provides high sensitivity for detecting internal faults.
3-476
Example:
Internal fault and through-current.
I1 I
= 4 2 =1 =0
IN IN
-I 2
I1
I I2 HEST 905 003 C
I = I1 + I2 = 4 IN - IN = 3 IN
IH = I1 I2 cos = 4 IN 1 IN 1 = 2 IN
It follows from this that even at the highest setting for 'v', the internal
fault is reliably detected in spite of the through-current.
High-set Basic setting g-High

The high-set Basic setting 'g-High' is an alternative basic setting for
greater stability under certain operating conditions. The change from
the normal basic setting is accomplished with the aid of an external
signal.
In some instances with a power transformer included in the protected
unit a higher operating current can be produced by, for example:
an increased off-load (excitation) current due to a higher system
voltage (switching operations, following load shedding, generator
regulator fault etc.)
an increased CT ratio error (transformer tap-changer on the
maximum or minimum tap).
Where such abnormal operating conditions are detected by a voltage
relay or an overfluxing relay, they can be used to switch the basic
setting of the longitudinal differential function from 'g' to 'g-High'. The
recommended setting is g-High = 0.75 IN.
The reset ratio in the event of a trip remains unchanged at 0.8 g.
Operating current I -Inst

The setting for 'I -Inst' enables faster tripping to be achieved for
internal faults in certain circumstances (disables restraint by the inrush
detector).
The setting chosen must be higher than the maximum current to be
expected when energising the protected unit (e.g. capacitive line
charging current).
The typical setting is I-Inst = 12 IN for protected units with small to
medium power transformers.
3-477
Pick-up ratio for inrush detection

This setting defines the sensitivity for detecting inrush phenomena.
Most transformers have a ratio of 2nd harmonic to fundamental in
excess of 15 %. A setting of 10 % is recommended to ensure reliable
inrush detection.
Time allowed for inrush detection

The time during which the inrush detector is enabled is determined by
how long after energising the protected unit there is a danger of
maloperation due to inrush flowing just from one side. Typical settings
are 5 s for protected units with power transformers.
The inrush detection is active if:
the binary input 'In Rush Inp' is set,
the Transformer is shut off
during the period 'Inrush Time' after it is recognized that the
transformer has been switched on.
The transformer will be recognized as switched on, when the highest
phase current in all the windings exceeds 4 % IN (in case the 'a' factor
and the reference value is one).
HINWEIS: Both inrush detectors have to be active when there is a

power transformer in the protection zone even if it is only fed from
one end, because both functions process the same measured
variables.
Choice of current input

To simplify the setting of a1, a2, s1 and s2, reversing the selection of
the channels on master and slave is recommended irrespective of
whether the protected unit includes a power transformer or not.
This procedure enables a1 and a2 as well as s1 and s2 to have
identical settings in both master and slave.
Settings:
Master: CurrentInp1 to channel No.1
CurrentInp2 to channel No.7
Slave: CurrentInp1 to channel No.7
CurrentInp2 to channel No.1
CT ratio factors a1 and a2

The factors a1 and a2 provide facility for compensating differences
between the rated currents of the protected unit and the CTs.
The 'a' factors are defined by the ratio of the CT rated current to the
reference current.
3-478
In the case of a two-winding transformer in the zone of protection, both

windings have the same rated power and the transformer rated current
is taken as the reference current. Providing the 'a' factors are correctly
calculated and set, the settings for 'g Setting', 'v Setting', 'b Setting', 'g-
High Setting' and 'I -Inst' are all referred to the rated current of the
transformer and not the primary rated current of the CTs.
250/5 A
1
110 kV 131 A
25 MVA
20 kV 722 A
2
1000/5 A
HEST 905 004a C
ICT1 250
IB1 = ITN1 = 131 A a1 = = = 1.91
ITN1 131
ICT2 1000
IB2 = ITN2 = 722 A a2 = = = 1.38
ITN2 722
The reference current setting only differs from the rated current of the
transformer if this is necessary because of the setting ranges of the
'a1' and 'a2' factors.
It is also possible to take account of differences between CT and two-
winding power transformer rated currents using the reference value
settings of the A/D channels. In this case, a1 = a2 = 1 providing the
primary and secondary powers are the same. For the above example,
the reference value settings are:
ITN1 131 ITN2 722
= = 0.524 = = 0.722
ICT1 250 ICT 2 1000
The 'a' factors only compensate the CT ratios for the longitudinal
differential function.
Changing the reference values of the A/D channels compensates the
CT ratios for all the systems functions and measurements.
3-479
Compensating the phase group of a power transformer in the

zone of protection
Phase-to-phase currents are used for measurement in order to be able
to compare the primary and secondary currents without regard to
whether the windings are connected in star or delta. The phase-angle
between the currents, however, has to be compensated by adding or
subtracting current components within the protection function. The
phase relationships between the current vectors for the various groups
of connection can be seen from the following figures.
For example, for a power transformer Yd5
Star-connected primary
I
1R
R I 2R
I R
1S
S
I 1T
I 2S Delta-connected secondary
S
T I 2T
T Phase-angle between the currents of the
I
1R
same phase
5 30 = 150
150
I1r (compensat ed) =1/ 3 ( I1R + I1S )

I
HEST 905 005 C
I2r (compensat ed) =I2R
Yy0 Yy6
1 2 I1R I2R 1 2 I
1R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R
Yd1 Yd5
1 2 I 1 2 I
1R I 1R
2R
R R R
R
S S S
S
T T T
T
I 2R
Yd7 Yd11
1 2 I 1R 1 2 I
I 2R 1R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R HEST 905 006 C
3-480
Yz1 Yz5
1 2 I1R I 2R 1 2 I1R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R
Yz7 Yz11
1 2 I 1R 1 2
R I2R I1R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R
1R
Dy1 Dy5
I 1 2
1 2 1R I 2R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I 2R
Dy7 Dy11
1 2 I 1
1R 2
R I I1R
R R 2R
S R
S S
T S
T T
T
I 2R
Dd0 Dd6
1 2 I 1R I 2R 1 2 I1R
R
R R R
S
S S S
T
T T T
I
2R
HEST 905 007 C
Dz0 Dz2
1 2 I 1R I 2R 1 2 I1R
R R R I2R
R
S S S
S
T T T
T
Dz4 Dz6
1 2 I 1 2 I1R
R 1R
R R
S R
S S
T S
T T
T
I
2R
I2R
Dz8 Dz10
1 2 I1R 1 2 I
1R
R R R I2R
R
S S S
S
T T T
T I 2R
HEST 905 008 C
3-481
List of all compensation matrices for R phase

(S and T phases cyclically rotated):
Compensation matrices Ratio factor

(R phase)
A = ( 1 0 0) 1
B = (-1 0 0) 1
C = ( 1 -1 0) 1 / 3
D = (-1 1 0) 1 / 3
E = ( 1 0 -1) 1 / 3
F = (-1 0 1) 1 / 3
G = ( 2 -1 -1) 1/3
H = (-2 1 1) 1/3
J = (-1 2 -1) 1/3
K = ( 1 -2 1) 1/3
L = (-1 -1 2) 1/3
M = ( 1 1 -2) 1/3
N = ( 0 1 0) 1
O = ( 0 -1 0) 1
Table 3.14 Compensation matrices with associated ratio factors
a) Y-connected on side 1
Applies to two-winding transformers:
Phase group Compensation matrix Compensation matrix
Side 1 Side 2
Yy0 E E
Yy6 E F
Yd1 E A
Yd5 C B
Yd7 E B
Yd11 C A
Yz1 E G
Yz5 C H
Yz7 E H
Yz11 C G
3-482
b) -connected on side 1
Applies to two-winding transformers:
Phase group Compensation matrix Compensation matrix
Side 1 Side 2
Dy1 A C
Dy5 A F
Dy7 A D
Dy11 A E
Dd0 A A
Dd6 A B
Dz0 A G
Dz2 A K
Dz4 A L
Dz6 A H
Dz8 A J
Dz10 A M
3.8.2.2. Setting instructions for lines without a power transformer in the

protected zone
The recommendations below are the result of extensive
measurements on our transient network simulator and take into
account the requirement of stability and tripping time of the protection.
As reference current for all recommendations below, a current Ibase has
to be defined.
Ibase is chosen to be equal or greater than the maximal load current of
the line, normally Ibase is made equal to the rated CT primary current.
The settings g, b and I-Inst are per unit values referred to Ibase.
Choice of current input

To simplify the setting of a1, a2, s1 and s2, reversing the selection of
the channels on master and slave is recommended irrespective of
whether the protected unit includes a power transformer or not.
This procedure enables a1 and a2 as well as s1 and s2 to have
identical settings in both master and slave.
Settings:
Master: Current Inp. Ch. 1 to channel No.1
Current Inp. Ch. 2 to channel No.7
Slave: Current Inp. Ch. 1 to channel No.7
3-483
a1 and a2- settings (CT-ratio adaptation)

Range 0.05 ... 2.20, Steps 0.01.
These settings allow adaptation of Ibase, when the rated CT primary
current differs from the maximal load current.
a) Case 1 CTs in the line feeder with equal CT ratios

Lines in substations with single or multiple bus arrangement and
1 CB stations with CTs in the line feeder.
The CT ratio is matched to the maximal load current, i.e. rated CT
primary current = max. Iload
a1 = 1; a2 = 1
b) Case 2 CTs in the line feeder with unequal CT ratios

Lines in substations with single or multiple bus arrangement and
1 CB stations with CTs in the line feeder. CTs of unequal ratio
at the two line ends.
Adaptation to the lower rated CT primary current:
a = ICT / Ibase
Master Slave Slave Master
1000/1 A 800/5 A 1000/1 A 800/5 A

a1 = 1000/800 = 1.25 a1= 1.25 a1 = 1 a1 = 1
a2 = 1 a2 = 1 a2 = 1000/800 = 1.25 a2 = 1.25
Ibase = 800 A Ibase = 800 A
c) Case 3 CTs in the diameter

Lines in substations with 1 - or 2 - CB arrangement. 2 CTs of a
diameter connected in parallel, high CT-ratio.
The CT ratio of the current transformers located in the diameter of
1 CB stations are usually matched to the through current from
one bus to the other and not to the rated line current.
a = ICT / Ibase
3-484
s- setting (Connection/Vector group correction)

For a line alone, no phase group compensation necessary and the
following is selected:
s1=D, s2=d0
With this setting the zero sequence component of the currents is
included in the measurement, and the best sensitivity and correct
phase selection is achieved.
No other s- setting shall be selected, unless there is a transformer in
the protected zone.
v- setting (bias at small currents, below Ibase b)

0.25 or 0.50
v= 0.50 is chosen as a standard setting
Minimum operating current

Two ranges can be set: g and g-High
a) g- setting (lower range)
Range 0.1 ... 0.5, Step 0.1
Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always FALSE
The g setting defines the minimum operating current.
The protection will pick up for a fault current of > Ibase g.
In most line protection applications the range 0.1 ... 0.5 is too low.
Settings as given in Section b) below are preferred
b) g-High setting (upper range)
Range 0.50 ... 2.5, Step 0.25
Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always TRUE
With this setting the g-setting is not active any more, the g-High
setting determines the pick-up current.
The protection will pick up at a fault current of > Ibase g-High.
c) Minimum allowed setting
capacitive ch arg ing current of the protected Line
g or g High 2.5
Ibase
This setting ensures full stability in an effectively grounded

network. In non-effectively grounded networks apply a factor 3.0
instead of 2.5.
With this setting transient capacitive inrush currents will not
endanger the stability.
3-485
It may be an advantage to set g-High b, thereby minimising the

requirements imposed on the CTs. See examples in Section 3.
The pick-up current shall be set lower than the minimum fault
current and shall allow for sufficient ground-fault resistance.
Justification of factors 2.5 and 3.0 (used above)
The capacitive charging currents are measured by the protection

as differential currents. The minimum operating current therefore
has to be set higher then the maximum capacitive charging current
occurring for a fault outside the line.
Since the measurement is made on a per phase basis, the
capacitive current to be taken into account is the highest possible
charging current per phase. This current arises in the healthy
phases during a single phase-ground fault (voltage rises).
The 'capacitive charging current of the protected line' is the phase-
current measured at single ended infeed, i.e. current measured
with the circuit open at the remote end.
f = 2.5 = f1 f2' f3 In solidly grounded systems

f = 3.0 = f1 f2" f3 In systems with isolated neutral or Petersen
coil compensation (non-effectively ground
networks)
f1 = 1.2 Max. system voltage
f2' = 0.8 3 Max. phase to ground voltage in solidly
grounded systems (Z0 / Z1 < 4)
f2" = 3 Max. phase to ground voltage in non-
effectively grounded systems
(4 < Z0 / Z1 < )
f3 = 1.5 Safety factor
The pick-up current 'g-High' may be used in most applications and
may be set relatively high, since the operating current is referred to
the actual short circuit current flowing through the fault
( = differential current) rather than to the individual infeed currents.
A fast supervision logic blocks the differential function in the case
of a communication failure in the fibre optic link, no second release
criterion is therefore required. For this reason the differential
protection trips both ends of the line and is not dependent on the
individual infeed currents nor faces a problem in case of weak
infeed from one end.
Max. fault resistance
The max. ground fault resistance, which can be detected is
approximately (source impedances neglected):
Urated
RF =
3 Ibase g high
3-486
Inrush restraint
Parameter 'In Rush Inp' = Always TRUE
This setting allows optimal stability also in case of heavy through
flowing transformer inrush currents with long DC time constants.
b- setting
Switching over to v = , the 2nd harmonic inrush restraint remains
active
Range 1.25 ... 2.50, Steps 0.25
(b Ibase) has to be set above ILoad_max.
Recommended setting: b = 1.5.
I-Inst setting
v = , the 2nd harmonic inrush restraint is not active above this current
level.
Range 5 ... 15, Steps 1.0 for SW-Versions < V4.0
Range 3 ... 15, Steps 1.0 for SW-Versions V4.0
I-Inst = 3 is chosen as a standard setting
I-Inst = 5 is recommended for a line with single end infeed, feeding a
transformer with high MVA rating.
With this setting the protection tolerates high inrush currents flowing
over the line. Such currents might produce unequal saturation
phenomena in the CTs at the two line ends.
The peak value of the inrush current may reach up to 15 Ibase.
3-487
3-488
3.8.3. Binary data transmission (RemoteBin)
A. Application
Provision for transmitting and receiving up to 8 binary signals between
local and remote stations. The function is only active when the system
is equipped with an A/D converter Type 316EA62. The binary signals
are transferred between the stations via optical modems on the
316EA62 plug-in units and the optical fibre cables linking them.
Binary signals which are received can be used for blocking, tripping
and control functions.
B. Features
Transmission of any 8 binary signals to the remote station
Provision of 8 signals received from the remote station (4 of which
can be assigned to the tripping logic)
I. CT/VT inputs:
None
II. Binary inputs:

8 inputs
(binary signals for transmission to the remote station)

8 outputs
(signals received from the remote station which can be
assigned to binary outputs)
Transmission error signal
IV. Measurements:
None
3-489
D. Binary data transmission settings - RemoteBin


Trip 1, Rem Chan 1 Trip Chan 00000000
Send Channel 1 BinaryAddr F
Remote Channel 1 SignalAddr ER
Remote Bin Error SignalAddr ER
Trip 1, Remote Chan 1
Tripping logic (matrix) excited by the signal 'RemChan 1' from the
remote station.
remote station.
remote station.
remote station.
3-490
Send Channel 1 (2...8)

Input 1 (2...8) for transmitting a signal to the remote station.
F: disabled
T: enabled
Remot Channel 1 (2...8)
Signal 1 (2...8) received from the remote station.
Remote Bin Error
Signal indicating an error during binary data transmission.
3-491
NOTICE: The 'Binary Data Transmission' function may only be

configured once for each parameter set.
Should the binary data transmission fail, the alarm 'Remote Bin Error'
is generated and the remote channels are set to 'Off' ('0'). If this
response would disrupt an application, provision is made for inverting
the signals transferred by inverting the signal (Send Channel) before
transmission in the remote station and inverting the signal (Remote
Channel) after reception in the local station.
A failure of the communications channel ('Modem Error') also
generates the alarm 'Remote Bin Error' even if the 'Binary Data
Transmission' function is only activated in one station.
3-492
October 04
4. DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION AND APPLICATION
4.1. Summary............................................................................................4-4
4.2. Protection functions ...........................................................................4-6

4.2.1. Distance protection ............................................................................4-6
4.2.1.1. Starters ..............................................................................................4-6
4.2.1.1.1. Operation of the starters ....................................................................4-6
4.2.1.1.2. Overcurrent starters ...........................................................................4-6
4.2.1.1.3. Underimpedance starters...................................................................4-8
4.2.1.1.4. Phase selection................................................................................4-11
4.2.1.2. Measuring units................................................................................4-13
4.2.1.2.1. Operation of the measuring units.....................................................4-13
4.2.1.2.2. Measurement during processing period I.........................................4-13
4.2.1.2.3. Measurement during processing period II........................................4-16
4.2.1.2.4. Directional decision..........................................................................4-18
4.2.1.2.5. Construction of the measuring characteristic...................................4-19
4.2.1.3. VT supervision .................................................................................4-22
4.2.1.4. Back-up overcurrent function O/C....................................................4-25
4.2.1.5. System logic.....................................................................................4-25
4.2.1.5.1. Structure of the system logic............................................................4-25
4.2.1.5.2. Enabling and blocking logic (SUPBL) ..............................................4-26
4.2.1.5.3. Switch-onto-fault logic (SOTF).........................................................4-27
4.2.1.5.4. Short-zone logic (STUB) ..................................................................4-28
4.2.1.5.5. Zone extension logic (ZE) ................................................................4-29
4.2.1.5.6. Transient blocking logic (Transbl) ....................................................4-30
4.2.1.5.7. Communication channel failure (Deblock) .......................................4-32
4.2.1.5.8. Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT).........................4-33
4.2.1.5.9. Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)...........................4-35
4.2.1.5.10. Overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR)..................................4-38
4.2.1.5.11. PLC transmit logic (HFSEND)..........................................................4-39
4.2.1.5.12. Tripping logic....................................................................................4-40
4.2.1.6. Power swing blocking (PSB)............................................................4-43
4.2.1.7. Signal designations and abbreviations ............................................4-45
4.2.2. Auto-reclosure..................................................................................4-49
4.2.2.1. Logic segments................................................................................4-49
4.2.2.2. Signal designations..........................................................................4-57
4.2.3. Breaker failure protection.................................................................4-60
4.2.3.1. Introduction ......................................................................................4-60
4.2.3.2. Three-phase/ single-phase mode ....................................................4-61
4.2.3.3. 'Redundant Trip'...............................................................................4-61
4.2.3.4. 'Retrip' ..............................................................................................4-62
4.2.3.5. 'Backup Trip' ....................................................................................4-62
4.2.3.6. 'Remote Trip'....................................................................................4-62
4.2.3.7. 'Unconditional Trip'...........................................................................4-62
4.2.3.8. 'End Fault Trip' .................................................................................4-62
4.2.3.9. 'External Trip' ...................................................................................4-63
4-1
4.2.4. High-impedance...............................................................................4-64
4.2.4.1. General ............................................................................................4-64
4.2.4.2. Restricted E/F protection for a transformer ......................................4-65
4.2.4.2.1. Basic requirements ..........................................................................4-65
4.2.4.2.2. Components of a restricted E/F scheme..........................................4-65
4.2.4.2.3. Design..............................................................................................4-65
4.2.4.2.4. Example ...........................................................................................4-67
4.2.5. Application of the transformer differential protection in
a 1 breaker configuration ..............................................................4-72
4.2.6. Standstill protection..........................................................................4-72
4.2.6.1. General ............................................................................................4-72
4.2.6.2. Standstill protection using an overcurrent function ..........................4-73
4.2.7. Rotor ground fault protection ...........................................................4-73
4.2.7.1. Application .......................................................................................4-73
4.2.7.2. Determining the settings ..................................................................4-74
4.2.7.2.1. Required data ..................................................................................4-74
4.2.7.2.2. Recommended settings for Rf , respectively 'U-Setting' and t .........4-74
4.2.7.3. Functional check ..............................................................................4-75
4.2.7.4. Installation and wiring ......................................................................4-75
4.2.7.4.1. Location and ambient conditions .....................................................4-75
4.2.7.4.2. Checking the wiring..........................................................................4-75
4.2.7.4.3. Connection of a two-stage scheme..................................................4-76
4.2.7.4.4. Connection to excitation systems with shaft-mounted diodes .........4-76
4.2.7.4.5. Adaptation of the scheme in the case of shaft filters .......................4-76
4.2.7.5. Commissioning ................................................................................4-76
4.2.7.5.1. Pre-commissioning checks ..............................................................4-76
4.2.7.5.2. Calibration of the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21 .....................4-77
4.2.7.5.3. Measuring the voltage values ..........................................................4-78
4.2.7.5.4. Testing in operation .........................................................................4-79
4.2.7.6. Maintenance ....................................................................................4-81
4.2.7.6.1. Likely causes of problems................................................................4-81
4.2.7.6.2. Maintenance ....................................................................................4-81
4.2.7.7. Fault-finding .....................................................................................4-81
4.2.7.8. Accessories and spares...................................................................4-81
4.2.7.9. Appendices ......................................................................................4-81
4.2.8. Application of the under reactance protection function ....................4-84
4.2.8.1. Introduction ......................................................................................4-84
4.2.8.2. Out-of-step conditions......................................................................4-84
4.2.8.3. Monitoring a given load angle ..........................................................4-84
4.2.9. Stator ground fault protection for generators in parallel...................4-88

4.2.9.1. Principle of operation .......................................................................4-88
4.2.9.2. Busbar ground faults........................................................................4-89
4.2.9.3. Ground fault protection during start-up ............................................4-89
4.2.9.4. Grounding transformer.....................................................................4-90
4.2.9.5. Ferro resonance damping resistor Rp ..............................................4-90
4.2.9.6. Grounding resistor Re ......................................................................4-91
4.2.9.7. Contactor .........................................................................................4-91
4.2.9.8. Residual current CT .........................................................................4-91
4.2.9.9. Required REG316*4 functions.........................................................4-91
4.2.9.10. Protection sensitivity ........................................................................4-92
4-2
4.2.10. 100 % stator and rotor ground fault protection.................................4-95
4-3
4. DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTION AND APPLICATION

4.1. Summary
Both analog and binary I/P signals pass through a signal conditioning
stage before being processed by the main processor:
Analog signals go through the chain comprising the input transformer,
shunt, low-pass filter (anti-alias filter), amplifier, sampling (sample and
hold), multiplexer and A/D converter. As digital signals they are then
separated by digital filters into real and apparent components before
entering the main processor. The binary signals are isolated by opto-
couplers in the input circuits and are evaluated by the main processor.
The protection algorithms and the logic functions are then processed
in the main processor.
The distance protection function is equipped with overcurrent or
underimpedance starters. In ungrounded systems, all the usual cyclic
and acyclic phase preference schemes are available.
The residual (neutral) current and/or residual (zero-sequence) voltage
are monitored to detect earth faults.
The first distance zone, the overreaching zone and the reverse zone
are measured simultaneously. All of the distance zones have wide
setting ranges and can be set totally independently of each other, also
with respect to whether they measure in the forwards or reverse
direction. There are three directional distance zones and a fourth,
which can be either directional or non-directional as demanded by the
application. The overreaching and reverse zones are for use in
transfer tripping schemes with signal transmission between the units at
the two ends of a line. The operating characteristics are polygons with
the reactance borders slightly inclined to give an ideal tripping area.
For close three-phase faults with very low voltages, the use of a
reference voltage comprising a healthy voltage and the voltage of a
memory feature ensures a reliable directional decision.
Compensation of the mutual zero-sequence impedance of parallel
circuits can be achieved by appropriate selection of the zero-sequence
impedance factor (k0) or the residual current of the parallel circuit
using k0m.
A VT supervision feature (fuse failure) is already incorporated. Its
measurement can be based on either the zero-sequence component
(U0 not I0) and/or the negative-sequence component (U2 not I2).
The latter is of special advantage in ungrounded systems or systems
with poor grounding.
An independent back-up overcurrent function becomes a short-zone
protection, as soon as the line isolator is opened. Tripping of the
overcurrent back-up protection is uninfluenced by any signal, which
may be blocking the distance protection (e.g. VT supervision or power
swing blocking).
4-4
The power swing blocking function monitors the variation of the

quantity U cos . This method of detecting power swings is entirely
independent of the characteristic and location of the distance
protection. Power swings with frequencies between 0.2 and 8 Hz are
detected.
The sensitive E/F protection for ungrounded systems and systems with
Petersen coils measures both in the forwards and reverse directions. A
characteristic angle of 90 (U0 I0 sin ) is chosen for ungrounded
systems and one of 0 (U0 I0 cos ) for systems with Petersen
coils.
A logic, which can be freely programmed with the aid of FUPLA
(function block programming language), provides convenient facility for
achieving special circuits needed for specific applications.
The auto-reclosure function enables up to four three-phase reclosure
cycles to be carried out, each with independently set dead time for fast
or slow auto-reclosure.
Where necessary, a large variety of supplementary protection and
logic functions is contained in the RE.216 and RE.316*4 function
software libraries.
The distance protection logic gives the user access for blocking or
enabling purposes to a wide range of functions, including for example
the kind of transfer tripping scheme, switch-onto-fault logic, zone
extension logic, VT supervision logic and whether the protection
should trip just the phase concerned or all three phases for an E/F.
The memory of the event recorder function has sufficient capacity for
up to 256 binary signals, which are recorded together with their relative
times of occurrence and information regarding the distance to the fault.
The disturbance recorder acquires and stores 9 analog and 16 binary
signals. The number of disturbance records that can be stored
depends on the total duration of an event, determined by the pre-event
data (event history) and the duration of the event itself.
4-5
4.2. Protection functions

4.2.1. Distance protection
4.2.1.1. Starters
4.2.1.1.1. Operation of the starters
The REL316*4 distance function is equipped with either overcurrent or
underimpedance starters. The setting of the parameter 'StartMode'
determines which of the two is in operation.
A starter must pick up at least twice before its signal is processed
(for phase selection, starting timers, signaling etc.). Should a starter
pick up only sporadically; only the backwards-measuring system and
ancillary functions such as displaying measurements etc. are enabled.
Starting signals do not reset unless all the starters have reset.
4.2.1.1.2. Overcurrent starters
The variables at the I/Ps of the overcurrent starters are the phase
currents IR, IS and IT and the residual current IE (3I0), respectively the
neutral voltage UE (3U0). Initially, a logic determines Imax, i.e. the
highest of the three phase currents IR, IS and IT.
If the value of Imax exceeds the setting of the parameter 'Istart'
(overcurrent starters), each of the phase currents Iph is checked to
determine whether it exceeds the setting of the parameter 'Imin'
(current enable) and also 80 % of Imax. In the case of the residual
current, the corresponding values are the setting of the parameter
'3I0min' and 25 % of Imax.
In the case of the ground current IE, it is checked whether it exceeds
the setting of the parameter '3I0min' and also 25 % of Imax.
Depending on the setting of the parameter 'Earth fault detector' (I0, I0
AND U0, I0 OR U0), it is checked at the same time whether the
residual voltage has exceeded the setting of the parameter '3U0min'
(neutral voltage enable).
The logical signals R, S, T and E are accordingly changed from logical
'0' to logical '1' or remain at logical '0'. The kind of fault and the phases
involved are thus determined, information, which is needed for
phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured)
signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)
enabling signals for single or three-phase tripping
starting the timers for the measuring zones
The starting signals R, S, T and E do not reset until measurement has
taken place and the impedances of all six loops lie outside the back-up
impedance zone. (If only the overcurrent starters are in operation,
there is no underimpedance-starting characteristic and relay response
is determined by the setting of the overcurrent starter 'Istart'.)
4-6
START
IR, IS, IT, IE, UE
I max = highest
value of
IR, IS, IT
N
I max > I start
(Iph > Imin) N

AND
(Iph > 0.8 I max)
set log.
signal "ph" (R, S, T)
N all
phase currents
IR, IS, IT
[(IE 3I0 min)

N
AND (IE 0.25 Imax)]
AND/OR
(UE 3U0 min)
set log.
signal "E"
END
HEST 955038 FL
Fig. 4.1 Overcurrent starters (I>)
4-7
4.2.1.1.3. Underimpedance starters

The variables at the I/Ps of the underimpedance starters are the phase
currents IR, IS and IT and the residual current IE (3I0) and the phase-to-
neutral voltages UR, US, UT and the neutral voltage UE (3U0).
START
UR, US, UT, UE

IR, IS, IT, IE
[(IE 3I0min) N
AND (IE 0.25 Imax)]
AND/OR
(UE 3U0 min)
Y
(Iph1 Imin) N
N
Iph Imin AND
(Iph2 Imin)
Y
Y
U ph Uph1 - Uph2
Z= Z=
2 x Iph Iph1 - Iph2
N N
Z < Z Start Z < Z Start
Y Y
set temp. set temp.

signals "ph, "E" signals "ph1", "ph2"
N all N all
ph-0 loops ph-ph loops
Y Y
Loop = Selectivity
phase selection conditions
Uph Uph1-Uph2 set

Z= or Z=
Iph + 1 x IE Iph1 - Iph2 log. signals
N
Z < Z Start
log. signals =
temp. signals
END
HEST 955037 C
Fig. 4.2 Underimpedance starters (Z<)
4-8
Depending on the setting of the parameter 'Earth fault detector' (I0, I0

AND U0, I0 OR U0), the function determines initially whether one or
both of the E/F criteria is fulfilled, i.e. whether the residual current IE
exceeds the setting of the parameter '3I0min' and/or the residual
voltage UE the setting of the parameter '3U0min'. Should this be the
case, the three phase-to-ground loops are measured first, otherwise
just the three phase-to-phase loops.
The three phase-to-ground loops are dealt with as follows:
If IR (or IS, or IT) is greater than 'Imin', the corresponding loops are
enabled and the loop impedances calculated as follows:
UR
ZR = (uncompensated)
2 IR
US
ZS = (uncompensated)
2 IS
UT
ZT = (uncompensated)
2 IT
All uncompensated impedances ZR, ZS and ZT are compared with the
starting characteristic and temporarily set the logical signals 'Ph' and
'E' (no display). An impedance loop is selected (see Section 4.2.1.1.4.)
on the basis of these signals (loop = selected phase).
If the loop is a phase-to-neutral one, the impedance is compensated
by k0 = 1 for calculation:
Uph 0 UR
Zph 0 = e.g. ZR 0 =
Iph + 1 IE IR + 1 IE
If the loop is a phase-to-phase one, the impedance is calculated
using phase-to-phase quantities:
Uph ph UR US
Zph ph = e.g. ZRS =
Iph ph IR IS
If the impedance (Z) calculated for the loop determined by the phase
selection logic lies within the underimpedance-starting characteristic
(Zstart), the loop is used for measurement.
The logical signals are needed for
signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)
enabling signals for tripping
4-9
The three phase-to-phase loops are dealt with as follows:

Providing Iph1 and Iph2 (IR and IS, IS and IT, or IT and IR) are higher
than 'Imin', the corresponding loops are enabled and the impedances
are calculated as follows:
UR US
ZRS =
IR IS
US UT
Z ST =
IS IT
UT UR
Z TR =
IT IR
Comparison of the three starting impedances eliminates the healthy
loops (discrimination condition).
If just one of the loop impedances lies within the underimpedance
starting characteristic (Zstart), only the signals (R and S), or (S and T),
or (T and R) would be set to logical '1'.
If more than one of the loop impedances lie within the under-
impedance starting characteristic, the signals R and S and T are set to
logical '1'. The kind of fault is thus determined, information, which is
needed for
phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured)
signaling the kind of fault (remote signaling relays, frontplate LEDs
etc.)
enabling signals for single or three-phase tripping
4-10
Underimpedance starting and definitive zone characteristic
XA
UNDERIMPEDANCE
CHARACTERISTIC
XB HEST 935 049 C
Fig. 4.3 Underimpedance starting and definitive zone

characteristic
4.2.1.1.4. Phase selection

The phase selection logic determines the loop
for the underimpedance starting measurement when an ground
fault has been detected
to be measured in the first period (max. 20 ms) after starting
to be measured during the time the function is in the picked-up
state when a ground fault has been detected on an ungrounded
system or system with Petersen coils (phase selection solidly
grounded).
4-11
In a solidly grounded system (parameter 'PhaseSelMode' set to 'solid

gr.'), the loop to be measured is determined according to the following
table:
Starters Loop measured

E/F R,E RE
E/F S,E SE
E/F T,E TE
Phase-to-phase fault R,S RS
Phase-to-phase fault S,T ST
Phase-to-phase fault T,R TR
Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault R,S,E RS
Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault S,T,E ST
Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault T,R,E TR
Three-phase fault R,S,T TR (RS) (ST)
In a solidly grounded system, both phases involved in a phase-to-

phase-to-ground fault have to be tripped, which is not the case in
ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils.
In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils (parameter
'PhaseSelMode' set to cyclic/acyclic phase selection), the loop to be
measured is determined according to the following table:
Starters Loop measured

Phase-to-phase fault R,S RS
Phase-to-phase fault S,T ST
Phase-to-phase fault T,R TR
Three-phase fault R,S,T TR (RS) (ST)
Cross-country fault *) R,S,E according to
Cross-country fault *) S,T,E phase
Cross-country fault *) T,R,E selection logic
*) two E/Fs at different locations
In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils, it is usual for

only one E/F of the two involved in a cross-country fault to be tripped,
so that as much of the system remains in operation as possible.
This is achieved by arranging for all the distance relays on the system
to measure the same E/F loop and this is the purpose of the phase
selection function.
4-12
The logic of the phase selection function provides a choice of the

following sequences:
Starters Fault loop measure in relation to 'PhaseSelMode'

RTSR TRST RTS RST TSR TRS SRT STR
cycl. cycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl.
R, S, E SE RE RE RE SE RE SE SE
S, T, E TE SE TE SE TE TE SE SE
T, R, E RE TE RE RE TE TE RE TE
RTSR cyclic (R before T, T before S, S before R) means, for example,

that for a cross-country fault T-R-E, R phase (the R-E loop) is
measured rather than T phase, for a cross-country fault S-T-E, T
phase (the T-E loop) rather than S phase and for a cross-country fault
R-S-E, S phase (the S-E loop) rather than R phase.
RTS acyclic (R before T before S) means, for example, that for a
cross-country fault T-R-E, R phase (the R-E loop) is measured rather
than T phase, for a cross-country fault S-T-E, T phase (the T-E loop)
rather than S phase and for a cross-country fault R-S-E, R phase (the
R-E loop) rather than S phase.
4.2.1.2. Measuring units
4.2.1.2.1. Operation of the measuring units
When either the overcurrent or underimpedance is activated twice
then, the distance measurement of a fault is enabled.
Initially the fault loop determined by the phase selection function is
measured. This is called processing period I and lasts until a trip
signal is generated in the first zone or a maximum of one period of the
power system frequency.
At the latest after one period of the power system frequency, all six
impedance loops are measured. This is called processing period II,
during which the three phase-to-ground loops and the three phase-to-
phase loops are measured alternately.
Comparison of the results of the six measurements eliminates those
impedance loops, which are not involved in the fault (discrimination
conditions).
The timer started by the starting units controls the comparison of the
measured impedances with the polygon characteristic.
4.2.1.2.2. Measurement during processing period I
Processing period I lasts from the instant a starter picks up until the
first tripping signal is generated, but is restricted to a maximum of one
period of the power system frequency. The input signals are the phase
currents IR, IS, IT, the residual current IE (3I0), the residual current of
any parallel circuit IEm (3I0m), the neutral current IEm of any parallel
circuit of a double-circuit line (3I0m) and the three phase-to-ground
4-13
voltages UR, US and UT, which have been sampled, analog and
digitally filtered and broken down into their component vectors.
If the overcurrent starters are in operation and have picked up, the
phase selection function is performed and the loop to be measured
determined. Should this not be the case, the loop determined by the
underimpedance starters is measured.
The impedance of a phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E is calculated
using the equation:
UR
ZR = (compensated)
IR + k 0 IE + k 0m IEm
where
k0: zero-sequence compensation factor for Z0
k0 = (Z0 - Z1) / 3Z1
k0m: zero-sequence compensation factor for the mutual impedance
Z0m of double-circuit line
k0m = Z0m / 3Z1
The mutual zero-sequence impedance of a double-circuit line
(k0m IEm) is only compensated for the 1st, 2nd and overreaching
zones, and in the latter two cases, only if their direction of
measurement is the same as that of the 1st zone. In this respect, a
reverse measuring zone is treated in the same manner as an
overreaching zone.
The mutual zero-sequence impedance (k0m IEm) is not com-
pensated, should IEm exceed 1.25 IE or the direction of IEm not be
the same as that of IE. This prevents a 'healthy' parallel circuit from
being adversely influenced by a fault relatively close to the relay
location of the faulted circuit.
Assuming a fault between R and S, the impedance of the phase-to-
phase loop is calculated using the equation:
UR US
ZRS =
IR IS
It is determined almost simultaneously, whether the impedance
measured lies within the characteristic and whether it is in the direction
of the 1st zone and overreaching zone, or in the direction of the
reverse measuring zone. The corresponding tripping and other signals
are processed by the system logic. Tripping of the circuit breaker,
however, only takes place after a measuring unit has operated
twice.
4-14
START
UR, US, UT, UE

IR, IS, IT, IE
Overcurrent
starter
Overcurrent N
starter
Loop =
phase selection
Z calculation
(ph-0 compensated)
Z Start , Z 1-4 , (Z OR ),
Z Back , direction
N
Trip
Signalling,
fault location,
Z(loop)
N
t > 1 periode
Stoping
the timers
Y
Change to
processing
Change to periode II
processing
periode II
END
HEST 955035 FL
Fig. 4.4 Processing period I
4-15
4.2.1.2.3. Measurement during processing period II

Processing period II commences after the first tripping signal or at the
latest one period of the system frequency after a starter picks up. The
variables measured are the same as those already processed during
processing period I.
Only in the case of a cross-country fault in an ungrounded system or
system with Petersen coils is measurement restricted during process-
ing period II to just the impedance loop determined by the phase
selection logic.
Otherwise all the phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase impedance
loops are continuously processed in sequence, providing the enabling
and ground fault criteria are fulfilled.
The equations used to calculate the loop impedances are the same as
those in the preceding Section.
It is then determined whether the impedance measured lies within the
characteristic and whether it is in the direction of the zone being
measured. The overreaching zone and reverse measuring zone are
evaluated as part of the measurement of the 1st zone. The corre-
sponding tripping and other signals are processed by the system logic.
Tripping of the circuit breaker, however, only takes place after a
measuring unit has operated twice.
Displaying impedance and fault distance

The impedance and fault distance only appear in the even list after a
further measurement has tripped unless
the measuring loop, i.e. the phase selection, has changed
the impedance is measured to be outside the characteristic
tripping was initiated by the reverse measuring zone, the
overreaching zone or the switch-onto-fault (SOTF) logic
In the above cases, the impedance and fault distance stored by the
preceding measurement (which produced tripping) is displayed.
4-16
START
UR, US, UT, UE

IR, IS, IT, IE
I >, Z < Starting
N
solidly grounded
network
Phase selection
AND (I> starting
active)
Y
6 Z calculations N
(ph-0 compensated) ph-E
Y
Selectivity
conditions
ph-0 Z-calculation 3 ph-ph Z-calculation
Z Start , Z 1-4 , (ZOR ),

Z Back , direction
Y
Fallback
conditions
Reset-
Signalling
signalling
N
Trip
Signalling
fault location
Z(loop)
Stoping the
timers
END
HEST 955036 C
Fig. 4.5 Processing period II
4-17
4.2.1.2.4. Directional decision

To determine the fault direction, the fault voltage is checked. If the fault
voltage exceeds the parameter 'UminFault' (minimum fault voltage)
then the phase-angle of the impedance, is determined with the fault
current and fault voltage:
U
arg Z = arg = arg U arg I
I
arg: argument of the complex number (angle)
U : fault voltage
U = UR (phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E)
U = UR-US (phase-to-phase loop, e.g. R-S)
I : fault current
I = IR + IE k0 + IEm k0m (phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E)
I = IR - IS (phase-to-phase loop, e.g. R-S)
arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be designated a
'forward fault':
-27 < arg Z < +117
arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be designated a
'reverse fault':
+153 < arg Z < -63
Z is the impedance measured by the protection device, corresponding
to the line impedance ZL. Since the fault voltage is used the source
impedance does not play any role - see following Section 4.2.1.2.5.
If the fault voltage is less than the parameter 'UminFault', the
impedance is determined from the fault current and a reference
voltage:
U
arg Zref = arg ref = arg Uref - arg I
I
arg: argument of the complex number (angle)
Uref: reference voltage
Uref = [(US - UT) + 1/8 (USmem - UTmem)] 27
(phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E)
Uref = [(UT - UR) + 1/8 (UTmem - URmem)] 180
(phase-to-phase loop, e.g. R-S)
I : fault current
I = IR (phase-to-ground loop, e.g. R-E)
I = IR - IS (phase-to-phase loop, e.g. R-S)
The reference voltage Uref is derived from the 'healthy' phase voltages
(cross-polarized voltage) and a fraction of the memory voltage Umem.
The duration of the memory voltage is limited to between 5 and
15 periods of the system frequency. The duration depends on the
deviation of the measured frequency from the system frequency, i.e. at
4-18
rated system frequency the duration is 15 periods, in the case of

deviation this is reduced proportionally.
In case the reference voltage Uref is greater than 0.5 % of rated
voltage, it is used to determine fault direction:
In this case, a 'forward fault' should satisfy the condition:
-90 < arg Zref < +90
A 'reverse fault' should satisfy the condition:
+90 < arg Zref < -90
Zref is the measured impedance, which in addition to the line
impedance ZL contains a component of the source impedance ZS. To
visualize the influence of the source impedance a transformation of the
tripping zone has to be done (see Section 4.2.1.2.5)
When the reference voltage is less than 0.5% of rated voltage, the
direction decision for the phase-to-ground loop is ignored, and tripping
is blocked. For phase-to-phase loops, depending on the parameter
'MemDirMode', tripping is either enabled or blocked.
4.2.1.2.5. Construction of the measuring characteristic
X
X
7 / 14
27
-X/8 R RR RRE
27 R
-RR/2
-RRE/2
HEST 045 010 V
Fig. 4.6 Measuring characteristic using fault voltage as reference
4-19
7 / 14
R RR RRE
-X/8
R
ZS'
-RR/2
-RRE/2

HEST 045 011 V
Fig. 4.7 Measuring characteristic for fault in the forward direction

with healthy voltage resp. memorized voltage as
reference
RRE/2
RR/2
-RRE -RR -R X/8
R
ZS'
7 / 14
-X
HEST 045 012V
Fig. 4.8 Measuring characteristic for fault in the reverse direction

using a healthy voltage resp. memorized voltage as
reference
4-20
= 27 for Ph-E-fault, else 30

ZS' is dependant on the fault type. With single infeed and
disregarding the memorized voltage for Ph-E an Ph-Ph-
fault the ZS' value is:
k +1
Ph-E-fault: Z S ' = Z S 0S
k0 + 1
3
Ph-Ph-fault: ZS ' = ZS 30
2
Z
3-Ph-fault: ZS ' = S
9
ZS: Source impedance
k0: Zero sequence current-compensation factor of the
feeder, parameter 'k0 (n)'
k0S: Zero sequence current-compensation factor of the
source
4-21
4.2.1.3. VT supervision
The purpose of the VT supervision function is to monitor the VT leads
with respect to asymmetrical short-circuits and open-circuits. An m.c.b.
can be included for three-phase VT short-circuits and arranged to
block the protection via a separate opto-coupler I/P.
The I/P variables monitored by the VT supervision function are the
three voltages UR, US, and UT and the three currents IR, IS, IT. The
zero-sequence (U0, I0) and negative-sequence (U2, I2) components
are calculated for both the three-phase voltage and three-phase
current systems.
3U0 = UR + US + UT
3U2 = UR + US a2 + UT a a = -0,5 + j 3 /2 = 1 /120
3I0 = IR + IS + IT
3I2 = IR + IS a2 + IT a
3I 0 > 0 I2 >0 3I0 = 0 I2 >0
3U 0 > 0 U2 > 0 3U0 > 0 U2 > 0
U0 and not I0 U2 and not I2
R R
S S
T T
3I0 > 0 I2 >0

3U 0 > 0 U2 > 0
U 2 and not I2 HEST 915 021 FL
Fig. 4.9 VT supervision
4-22
The measurement has to be performed using the negative-sequence

component, whenever there is no source of residual current behind the
relay, i.e. no grounded transformer neutrals. The parameter 'VTSup
Mode' (operating mode) must be set accordingly.
The zero and/or negative-sequence components of currents and
voltages are compared with the settings of the parameters 'U0min
VTSup' [U0_VTSUP], 'I0min VTSup' [I0_VTSUP], 'U2min VTSup'
[U2_VTSUP] and 'I2min VTSup' [I2_VTSUP] and the associated binary
signals U0, U2, I0 and I2 are then set to logical '1' or left at logical '0'.
The signals U0 and U2 are delayed by 5 ms as a precaution against
incorrect blocking as a result of discrepancies between the operating
times of the three circuit-breaker poles.
Depending on the operating mode selected, one of the following four
conditions is monitored:
U0 not I0 residual voltage, but no residual current
U2 not I2 NPS voltage, but no NPS current
(U0 not I0) + (U2 . not I2) condition 1 or 2
U2 not (I0 + I2) NPS voltage, but neither residual current

nor NPS current
Blocking by the VT supervision function is delayed for 12 s following

manual closing of the circuit-breaker, an external blocking signal
(m.c.b. via an opto-coupler I/P), a transfer tripping signal from the
opposite station or the generation of a local tripping signal.
Should U0 (or U2) and I0 (or I2) pick-up during this delay, operation of
the VT supervision function remains blocked until U0 (or U2) resets.
This measure prevents unwanted blocking during single-phase auto-
reclosure.
The signal generated by the VT supervision function 'VTSupMode'
instantly blocks the distance protection function. Resetting the
parameter 'VTSupMode' [VTSUP_BLKDEL] enables the distance
function to be blocked after delay of 12 s.
From 12 s after the VT supervision circuit has picked up, resetting of
blocking is delayed by 1 s. Standard m.c.bs can therefore be used,
providing their main contacts do not close before their auxiliary
contacts.
Blocking by the VT supervision circuit resets the instant a fault with
zero and negative-sequence components occurs.
The parameter 'VTSupDebDel' [VTSUP_DEBDEL] (deblocking)
provides facility for setting the 1 s reset delay permanently regardless
of current.
4-23
The blocking signal issued by the VT supervision function does not

influence the back-up overcurrent function.
P_U2_VTSUP
INP30C4
2
TONB
I 4
5 T TOFFB
Q I
14 T
Q BIT_VTSUP1_1
P_U0_VTSUP
INP30C2
6
TONB
I 8
5 T TOFFB
Q I
14 T
Q BIT_VTSUP1_2
Fig. 4.10 Segment VTSUP1
1
P_DRST >=1
OUT3072
P_MANCL_DIST
INP3105
P_HFREC 2
INP3102 TOFF
P_EXTBL_DIST I
INP3100 12000 T 5
Q >=1
3
P_I2_VTSUP >=1 4
INP30C5 TOFFB
P_I0_VTSUP I
INP30C3 22 T 7
Q >=1
6
BIT_VTSUP1_1 & 8
o &
<
P_VTFAIL_IU2
9 10 OUT3076
BIT_VTSUP1_2 & >=1 11
o &
<
P_VTFAIL_IU0
12 OUT3075
>=1
BIT_VTSUP2_1
4-24
3
BIT_VTSUP2_1 &
P_VTSUP_BLKDEL o
INP3A15 1
TON
I 2
12000 T TOFF
Q I
1000 T
4 Q P_VTFAIL_DLY
P_I0_VTSUP >=1 6 7 OUT30B5
INP30C3 5 & >=1
P_I2_VTSUP o >=1
INP30C5
P_VTSUP_DEBDEL P_VTFAIL
INP3A16 OUT3091
4.2.1.4. Back-up overcurrent function O/C

The distance protection function includes a definite time overcurrent
unit as back-up protection. A starting signal 'Start O/C' is set to logical
'1', when one or more of the currents IR, IS, and IT exceed the setting
of the parameter 'I O/C'. Following the adjustable time delay
'O/C delay', the tripping signal 'Trip O/C' is set to logical '1' and applied
to the system logic.
Blocking signals generated by the distance, underimpedance starting,
power swing blocking or VT supervision functions do not influence the
back-up overcurrent function.
The back-up overcurrent function is independent of the distance
protection starters and, since it does not have to perform any phase
selection, can therefore have a more sensitive setting.
4.2.1.5. System logic
4.2.1.5.1. Structure of the system logic
The system logic processes the binary I/P signals from external plant
(opto-coupler I/Ps) and all the binary signals of the distance protection
function.
The system logic is programmed using FUPLA (function block
programming language) and is divided into what are referred to as
segments, which are processed with a higher priority than, for
example, the auto-reclosure function.
4-25
VTSUP
SUPBL
SOTF
STUB
ZE
Binary input data of the distance protection function and the Input/Output unit
TRANSBL
UNBLOCK
Binary output data to perturbograph and the Input/Output unit

PUTTREC
PUTSEND
POTTREC
POTSEND
BLOCREC
BLOSEND
HFSEND
TRIP
HEST 915 022 FL
Fig. 4.13 System logic in the distance protection function
The O/Ps of the system logic are binary signals for controlling a fault
recorder, LED signals and auxiliary tripping and signaling relays.
4.2.1.5.2. Enabling and blocking logic (SUPBL)
The logic of the VT supervision function (segment VTSUP) has already
been described in the relevant Section. The segment SUPBL
coordinates all the external blocking signals distance protection
[EXTBL_DIST] (opto-coupler I/Ps), the power swing blocking function
[PS_BLOCK] and the VT supervision function [VT_BLOCK] and blocks
all the distance protection functions [DISTBL] with the exception of the
back-up overcurrent function.
4-26
1
TOFFB
P_EXTBL_DIST I
INP3100 100 T 2
Q >=1
P_PSBLOCK
INP3056
P_VTFAIL P_DISTBL
OUT3091 3
TON
I
12000 T
Q P_DISTBL_DEL
Fig. 4.14 Segment SUPBL
4.2.1.5.3. Switch-onto-fault logic (SOTF)

When a circuit breaker is closed onto and existing three-phase fault
(e.g. forgotten earthing clamps), a three-phase trip is immediately
initiated.
The fault detectors in this case are the non-directional starters
(overcurrent or underimpedance units) or optionally the overreaching
zone, but this is only used in the following special cases:
power transformer with high inrush currents at the remote end of
the line. In such cases fault detection involving the distance
measuring units is safer.
Close faults with complete voltage collapse may possibly not
otherwise be detected, in which case the parameter 'MemDirMode'
has to be set to 'Trip'.
The switch-onto-fault logic can be activated and the switch-onto-fault
signal [SOTF] set to logical '1' in one of three ways:
a) by an auxiliary contact of the CB control switch when closing the
CB (opto-coupler I/P 'Manual close' [MANCL_DIST])
b) by an auxiliary contact of the CB when opening the CB (opto-
coupler I/P 'Dead line' [DEADLINE])
c) by prolonged undervoltage ('U weak') on all three phases and no
current enable which corresponds to a dead line [UWEAK_R,S,T].
Alternative 2) is used, if the VTs are connected to the busbars and
alternative 1) is not possible. The criteria of alternatives 2) and 3) may
only be recognised after either 200 ms or 10 s [SOTF_10S] (setting),
depending on whether the switch-onto-fault logic is required to operate
after auto-reclosure (200 ms) or not (10 s). For dead times longer than
10 s (autoreclosure function) there is the possibility of using the
blocking input 'Ext Blk SOTF'. This is a binary I/P which is interlocked
by [P_SOTF_INIT] via an AND gate (see Section 3.5.4.2.).
4-27
Combining undervoltage and a missing current enable signal [CREL_

R, S, T] as in alternative 3) prevents mal-operation of the logic after
200 ms, respectively 10 s, in cases of system faults with low fault
current contribution, which are detected in the higher distance zones.
Resetting of the signal 'SOTF' [START_SOTF] is delayed by 1 s, i.e.
every distance protection start within a time of 1 s after one of the
three switch-onto-fault criteria was fulfilled gives rise to three-phase
tripping [SOTF] of the circuit-breaker.
2
P_UWEAK_R >=1
INP3034
P_UWEAK_S 3
INP3035 TON
P_UWEAK_T I
INP3036 1 5000 T
& Q BIT_UWEAK_5000
P_CREL_R o
INP3030
P_CREL_S o
INP3031 4
P_CREL_T o >=1
INP3032 5
P_DEADLINE1 & 6
INP3107 TON
P_SOTF_10S I
INP3A13 10000 T 9
Q >=1
7 8
& TONB
o I
200 T
Q 10
TOFF
P_MANCL_DIST I
INP3105 1000 T
Q P_START_SOTF
11 OUT30B7
&
P_SOTF_INIT P_SOTF
INP3053 OUT3073
Fig. 4.15 Segment SOTF
4.2.1.5.4. Short-zone logic (STUB)

In 1 breaker schemes, the short zone between the two circuit-
breakers and the line isolator can be protected by the back-up
overcurrent function by permitting its instantaneous pick-up signal
[OC_RST] to trip the circuit-breakers [TRIP_STUB] after 25 ms
whenever the line isolator is open (signal applied to the opto-coupler
I/P 'Isol open').
This arrangement is only necessary, if the VTs are installed on the line
side of the isolator and the CTs are in the bars between the circuit-
breakers.
1
P_ISOL_OPEN & 2
INP3121 TONB
P_OC_RST I
INP3054 25 T
Q P_TRIP_STUB
OUT30B6
Fig. 4.16 Segment STUB
4-28
4.2.1.5.5. Zone extension logic (ZE)

This logic enables the reach of the distance measurement to be
switched from the underreaching first zone to overreaching
[BIT_TRIP_ZE] under the control of a signal from another function or
an external signal.
Such a signal can originate, for example, from the internal auto-
reclosure function (binary input 'ZExtensionAR' [AR_ZE]) or from an
opto-coupler input (binary input 'ZExtension' [ZE_FOR_ DIST]).
The internal auto-reclosure function issues an overreach signal
[AR_ZE] when all the auto-reclosure conditions are fulfilled.
1
P_ZE_FOR_DIST >=1
INP3111 2
P_AR_ZE & 4
OUT3094 RSFF
P_MEAS_OR2 S
INP3052
3
P_START_ALL 1 :B R
INP3050 Q BIT_TRIP_ZE
Fig. 4.17 Segment ZE
4-29
4.2.1.5.6. Transient blocking logic (Transbl)

This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive overreaching
transfer tripping scheme (POTT) or an overreaching blocking scheme
(BLOCK OR) on double-circuit lines with infeeds from both ends and a
high mutual zero-sequence impedance (both circuits on the same
pylons). A blocking scheme does not require this logic, providing the
waiting time is set sufficiently long.
The logic solves the following problem:
The problem (with POTT)
A1 B1
t=0 s:
Relays A1, B1 and B2
detect the fault
in the OR zone
and send a signal
to the opposite station.
Relay A2 detects
a backward fault.
A2 B2
A1 B1
t = sign.rec.: Relays A1, B1 and A2
receive a signal from
the opposite station.
A2 B2
A1 B1
t = CB open : CB A1 opens
before CB B1 opens.
Relay A2 detects the
fault in the OR zone,
but still receives
a signal from
the opposite station,
e.g. it trips and opens
A2 B2
the healthy line.
HEST 915 023 C
Fig. 4.18 Transient blocking
4-30
The operation of the logic is as follows:

The solution (with Logic in relay A2
A1 B1 TBA T1
MEAS_BW >=1 &

TBE
t=0s
T2 100ms
A2 B2
A1 B1 TBA T1
MEAS_BW >=1 &

TBE
t = sign.rec.
T2 100ms
A2 B2
A1 B1 TBA T1
MEAS_BW >=1 &

TBE
t = CB open
T2 100ms
A2 B2
TBA = (Com Rec + Unblock) Meas Oreach

TRIP = TBA TBEnot
TBE is active for at least
TBE resets at latest after
HEST 915 024
Fig. 4.19 Transient blocking
The critical relay A2 cannot trip, because the reverse measurement

signal [MEAS_BWD] is maintained for at least T1 (parameter
't1TransBl') and resets at the latest after T2 (parameter 't2TransBl').
The purpose of T2 is to ensure that blocking is maintained should
auto-reclosure of the faulted circuit take place.
T1 allows time for the incorrect signal 'Com Rx' to reset. Its setting is
thus given by the reset time of relay B2 and the reset time of the
communication channel. The receiver signal must not be prolonged.
4-31
Tripping takes place instantaneously, if the tripping condition TBA is

still fulfilled after the time T1.
Tripping always causes the logic to be reset, after which it remains
inactive for 100 ms. The faulted circuit will therefore be immediately
tripped, for example, in the case of an unsuccessful auto-reclosure
attempt.
1
P_TBA_BLOCK >=1 2
OUT3720 TONB
P_TBA_POTT I
OUT3707
PAR_B_T1_TRANSBL T 7
PAR3860 Q o &
3
>=1
P_MEAS_BWD
INP3067 4
TON
I
PAR_W_T2_TRANSBL T 5
PAR3880 Q >=1 6
TOFF
P_D I
OUT3071 100 T 8
Q o &
<
FL_TRANSBL BIT_TBE
INP3832
Fig. 4.20 Segment TRANSBL
4.2.1.5.7. Communication channel failure (Deblock)

This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive underreaching
transfer tripping scheme (PUTT OR2) or a permissive overreaching
transfer tripping scheme (POTT).
The logic causes the communication channel failure signal from the
communication equipment (opto-coupler I/P 'Com Fail') to be inter-
preted for 100 ms as a receive signal. This enables tripping
[BIT_UNBL] to take place in PUTT OR2 or POTT schemes in cases
where the PLC receive signal is attenuated by the primary system fault
on the line.
1
FL_UNBLOCK &
INP3833
P_HFREC o 2
INP3102 TONB
P_HFFAIL I
INP3103 20 T 4
Q &
3
TONB
I
100 T
Q o BIT_UNBL
Fig. 4.21 Segment DEBLOCK
4-32
4.2.1.5.8. Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)

The PUTT logic is divided into a receive logic (segment PUTTREC)
and a transmit logic (segment PUTSEND).
The O/P signals from the receive logic (PUTTREC) are transferred to
the transmit logic, while taking account of any weak infeed (Weak)
[UWEAK_R, S, T] and short-term enable signals due to communi-
cation channel failure (Deblock) [BIT_UNBL].
The tripping criterion is thus available for evaluation in conjunction with
the underimpedance starting characteristic (PUTT NONDIR) [PUTT_
NONDIR], the starting characteristic in the forward direction (PUTT
FWD) [PUTT_FWD] or the overreaching zone, respectively the 2nd
distance zone (PUTT OR2) [PUTT_OR2].
The O/P signals from the transmit logic (PUTTSEND) are passed on to
the common transmit logic for PUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR schemes.
The tripping (Trip) [TRIP_PUTT] and transmit (Tx) criteria [SEND_
PUTT] can be seen from the following diagram.
t
Delay (Def)
Meas Main
Delay (3)
Meas Main
Delay (2)
Com Rec
Weak Infeed Weak Infeed

Start R+S+T Start R+S+T
Meas Bward 0 sec Meas Main Meas Oreach Meas Fward
E A B C D
t = Delay (1) Trip = Meas Main

= 0 sec : Send = Meas Main
t = Com Rec : Trip (PUTT NONDIR) = Com Rec * (Start R+S+T + Weak)
Trip (PUTT FWD) = Com Rec * Meas Fward
Trip (PUTT OR2) = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach
Send = Meas Main
t = Delay (2) : Trip = Meas Main
Send = Meas Main

Send = "0"
t = Delay (Def) : Trip = Start R+S+T (dir/nondir)

Send = "0"
HEST 915 025 FL
Fig. 4.22 PUTT NONDIR, PUTT FWD, PUTT OR2
4-33
1
FL_PUTT_NONDIR &
INP3810 4
P_START_ALL >=1
INP3050 2
FL_PUTT_FWD &
INP3811
P_UZ_FORWARD
INP30C1
3
FL_PUTT_OR2 &
INP3812 7
P_MEAS_OR2 &
INP3052
5
P_TH2 >=1
INP3061
P_M_OWN o
OUT3084 6
BIT_UNBL >=1
P_HFREC
INP3102 8
& 11
FL_WEAK &
INP3813
9
TOFFB
I
100 T
Q o
10
TOFFB
I
20 T
Q
P_UWEAK_R
INP3034 o
BIT_UWEAK_5000 o P_UWEAKR_PUTT
OUT3700
12
&
o
P_UWEAK_S
INP3035 o
o P_UWEAKS_PUTT
OUT3701
13
&
o
P_UWEAK_T
INP3036 o
o P_UWEAKT_PUTT
14 OUT3702
>=1
P_UWEAK_PUTT
15 OUT3703
>=1
P_TRIP_PUTT
OUT3704
Fig. 4.23 Segment PUTTREC
1
FL_PUTT_NONDIR >=1
INP3810
FL_PUTT_FWD
INP3811
FL_PUTT_OR2 P_PUTT_ON
INP3812 2 OUT3721
&
P_TH3 o
INP3062
P_MEAS_MAIN
INP3051
P_START_ALL P_SEND_PUTT
INP3050 OUT3722
Fig. 4.24 Segment PUTSEND
4-34
4.2.1.5.9. Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)

The POTT logic is divided into a receive logic (segment POTTREC)
and a transmit logic (segment POTSEND).
The O/P signals from the receive logic (POTTREC) are transferred to
the transmit logic, while taking account of any weak infeed (Weak)
[UWEAK_R, S, T], short-term enable signals due to communication
channel failure (Deblock) [BIT_UNBL] and transient blocking (Transbl)
[BIT_TBE].
The O/P signals from the transmit logic (POTTSEND) are passed on to
the common transmit logic for PUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR schemes,
while taking account of the signal returned from the remote end of the
line in the case of a weak infeed (Echo).
The tripping (Trip) [TRIP_POTT] and transmit (Tx) criteria [SEND-
POTT] can be seen from the following diagram.
t
Delay (Def)
Meas Main
Delay (3)
Meas Main
Delay (2)
Com Rec

E A B C D

= 0 sec : Send = Meas Oreach * notTransbl
t = Com Rec : Trip = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach * notTransbl

Trip Weak = Com Rec * Weak * notMeas Bward * notMeas Oreach
Send = Meas Oreach * notTransbl
Send Echo = Com Rec * notMeas Bward

Send = "0"

Send = "0"

Send = "0"
HEST 915 026 FL
Fig. 4.25 POTT
4-35
2
P_MEAS_OR2 &
INP3052 1
BIT_UNBL >=1
P_HFREC P_TBA_POTT
INP3102 8 OUT3707
&
BIT_TBE o
4
P_TH2 >=1
INP3061
P_M_OWN
OUT3084 3
FL_ONE_CHL &
INP3824
P_EF_BLKHF o
INP31A3
5
TOFFB
P_MEAS_BWD I
INP3067 200 T 9
Q o &
P_UWEAK_R
INP3034 6
TOFFB
I
20 T
Q
7
TOFFB
I
200 T
Q o
o
FL_WEAK
INP3813
BIT_UWEAK_5000 o P_UWEAKR_POTT
OUT3710
10
o &
P_UWEAK_S
INP3035
o
o
o P_UWEAKS_POTT
OUT3711
11
o &
P_UWEAK_T
INP3036
o
o
o P_UWEAKT_POTT
12 OUT3712
>=1
P_UWEAK_POTT
13 OUT3713
>=1
P_TRIP_POTT
OUT3714
Fig. 4.26 Segment POTTREC
4-36
1
FL_POTT 1 :B P_POTT_ON
INP3820 2 OUT3705
&
P_MEAS_OR2
INP3052
BIT_TBE o
11
P_TH2 o >=1
INP3061
10
3 o &
& o
FL_ECHO
INP3821 4
>=1
P_MEAS_BWD 5
INP3067 TOFFB
P_M_OWN I
OUT3084 100 T
Q o
P_HFREC
INP3102 6
&
P_EF_BLKHF
INP31A3
FL_ONE_CHL o
INP3824 7
& 8
TONB
I
150 T 9
Q o &
P_SEND_POTT
OUT3706
Fig. 4.27 Segment POTSEND
4-37
4.2.1.5.10. Overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR)

The BLOCK OR logic is divided into a receive logic (segment
BLOCREC) and a transmit logic (segment BLOSEND).
The O/P signals from the receive logic (BLOCREC) are transferred to
the transmit logic, while taking account of any transient blocking due to
reversal of energy direction (Transbl).
The O/P signals from the transmit logic are passed on to the common
transmit logic for PUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR schemes.
The tripping (Trip) and transmit (Tx) criteria can be seen from the
following diagram.
t
Delay (Def)
Meas Main
Delay (3)
Meas Main
Delay (2)
Com Rec

E A B C D

= 0 sec : Send = Meas Bward
t = t1Block : Trip = Meas Oreach * notComRec * notTransbl

Send = Meas Bward + Transbl
Send = "0"

Send = "0"

Send = "0"
HEST 915 027 FL
Fig. 4.28 BLOCK OR
4-38
1
FL_BLOCK_OR &
INP3830
P_HFFAIL o 2
INP3103 TONB
P_MEAS_OR2 I
INP3052
PAR_B_T1_BLOCK T 4
PAR3840 Q &
P_HFREC o
INP3102 3
P_TH2 >=1
INP3061
P_M_OWN o
OUT3084
BIT_TBE o P_TRIP_BLOCK
OUT3717
5
o &
P_TBA_BLOCK
OUT3720
Fig. 4.29 Segment BLOCREC
1
FL_BLOCK_OR &
INP3830
P_HFFAIL o P_BLOCK_ON
INP3103 3 OUT3715
&
P_TH2 o
INP3061
P_MEAS_OR2 o
INP3052 2
TOFFB
P_MEAS_BWD I
INP3067 100 T 5
Q >=1
4
&
BIT_TBE P_SEND_BLOCK
OUT3716
Fig. 4.30 Segment BLOSEND
4.2.1.5.11. PLC transmit logic (HFSEND)

The task of the transmit logic is to boost (Com Boost) the PLC
transmitter and transmit a signal (signaling relay O/P 'Com Send')
[HFSEND] to the opposite end of the line (signaling relay O/P 'Com
Boost') [HFBOOST].
General rules are:
The underreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive under-
reaching transfer tripping scheme (PUTT).
The overreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive over-
reaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT).
The reverse measuring zone transmits the blocking signal in an over-
reaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR).
4-39
1
P_PUTT_ON >=1
OUT3721
P_POTT_ON
OUT3705
P_BLOCK_ON BIT_HF_ON
OUT3715 3
2 &
P_SEND_PUTT >=1
OUT3722
P_SEND_POTT
OUT3706
P_SEND_BLOCK
OUT3716
P_DISTBL o P_HFSEND
OUT3077 4 OUT3081
P_UWEAK_R >=1 8
INP3034 &
P_UWEAK_S
INP3035 6
P_UWEAK_T &
INP3036 5
TON
I
2000 T 7
Q o >=1
P_START_ALL P_HFBOOST
INP3050 OUT3080
Fig. 4.31 Segment HFSEND
4.2.1.5.12. Tripping logic

The main purpose of the tripping logic is coordination of single and
three-phase tripping of the circuit-breaker (heavy-duty tripping relay
O/Ps). It also provides additional starting and tripping signals.
Single, respectively three-phase tripping is initiated when at least the
following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
starter picked up, i.e. underimpedance start or overcurrent start or
undervoltage start (Weak) [UWEAK_R, S, T] from the POTT or
PUTT receive logic
trip by the relays own measuring unit or by the back-up overcurrent
unit or by the short-zone logic or by the switch-onto-fault logic or by
the zone extension logic or from the PUTT, POTT or BLOCK OR
receive logic.
no blocking signal is being generated by the enable and blocking
logic. (This signal cannot block tripping by the back-up overcurrent
unit or short-zone logic.)
Only single-phase tripping will take place when:
the parameter '3PhTripMode' is set to '1PhTrip'
the starter of just one phase has picked up
none of the conditions for three-phase tripping is fulfilled.
Any one of the following conditions will result in three-phase tripping:
The parameter '3PhTripMode' is set to 'Trip CB 3P'.
The starters of more than one phase have picked up.
The auto-reclosure function has instructed the distance function to
trip all three-phases.
Either the back-up overcurrent function or the short-zone logic has
tripped.
4-40
operation of the switch-onto-fault logic

A second trip occurs (e.g. evolving fault) during, for example, the
auto-reclosure dead time.
The parameter '3PhTripMode' is set to 'Trip CB 3P/Delay 3' and
the zone 3 time has expired (auto-reclosure in the 2nd zone as
well).
1
P_START_R >=1
INP3000
P_UWEAKR_PUTT
OUT3700
P_UWEAKR_POTT BIT_R
OUT3710
2
P_START_S >=1
INP3001
P_UWEAKS_PUTT
OUT3701
P_UWEAKS_POTT BIT_S
OUT3711 4
3 &
P_START_T >=1
INP3002
P_UWEAKT_PUTT
OUT3702
P_UWEAKT_POTT BIT_T
OUT3712 5 7
& >=1
6
&
BIT_TRIP1_345
8
>=1
P_OC_RST P_RST
INP3054 9 OUT3070
& 15
P_DRST &
OUT3072 10
TOFF
I
PAR_W_T1_TRIP T 11
PAR38C0 Q & 12
TONB
o I
4 T 14
Q >=1
13
&
BIT_TRIP1_12
<
Fig. 4.32 Segment TRIP1
3
BIT_TRIP1_345 >=1
P_THREE_PH_TRIP
INP3A11
P_AR_1POL_INP o
INP3112 1
P_TH3 &
INP3062 2
P_TH3P >=1
INP3A10
P_OC_D
INP3055
P_SOTF
OUT3073
P_TRIP_STUB
OUT30B6
BIT_TRIP1_12 BIT_THREE_P
4
P_UWEAK_PUTT >=1
OUT3703
P_UWEAK_POTT P_WI
OUT3713 OUT30B4
4-41
6
P_SOTF >=1
OUT3073 2
P_ZE_FOR_DIST >=1
INP3111 1
P_AR_ZE &
OUT3094 3
P_ZE_EN & 5
INP3814 RSFF
P_MEAS_OR2 S
INP3052
4
P_START_ALL 1 :B R
INP3050 Q
P_TRIP_STUB
OUT30B6
P_OC_D 7
INP3055 TOFFB
P_MEAS_MAIN I
INP3051 8 10 100 T
P_TRIP_PUTT >=1 >=1 Q P_M_OWN
OUT3704 OUT3084
P_TRIP_POTT
OUT3714 9
P_TRIP_BLOCK &
OUT3717 14
P_HF_OFF o &
INP30C7
11
BIT_THREE_P >=1
18
BIT_R >=1
12 15
>=1 &
BIT_S
13 16
>=1 &
BIT_T P_D
OUT3071
17
o & 19
o
P_DISTBL I01 O01 P_DRST
OUT3077 I02 OUT3072
I03 O02 P_D3PH
I04 OUT3085
I05 O03 P_D1PH
P_EF_ENABLE I06 OUT3083
INP3DC5 O04 P_DH
P_EF_TRIP_OUT I07 OUT3087
INP31A1 O05 P_DR
OUT30B0
O06 P_DS
OUT30B1
O07 P_DT
OUT30B2
1
P_DR >=1
OUT30B0
P_DS
OUT30B1
P_DT P_DRST
OUT30B2 2 OUT3072
&
P_D3PH
OUT3085
3
&
o 6
o >=1
4
o &
5
o & 7
o TONB
I
8 T
Q P_D1PH
OUT3083
8
&
BIT_TRIP3_1 P_DH
OUT3087
4-42
4.2.1.6. Power swing blocking (PSB)

The purpose of the power swing blocking function is to prevent un-
wanted tripping of the distance protection function in response to
power system instability with oscillatory fluctuations of power (power
swings) or loss of synchronism (out-of-step). The power swing block-
ing function does not influence the operation of the back-up over-
current function.
When power swings occur, the electrical parameters of the system
vary at a slower or faster rate in relation to the angle between the
voltage vectors of the energy sources in different parts of the system.
In the case of a fault on the other hand, step changes of these
parameters take place. The parameters, which regardless of location
are subject to appreciable variation in the general region around phase
opposition ( = 180), are the resistance R and the voltage component
U cos . The value of corresponds to the angle between phase
voltage and current.
E1 U E2
Ucos
U )Ucos
I
E1 E2
Independent of: -Relay location

-Relay characteristics
-Relay settings
HEST 915 028
Fig. 4.36 Power swing blocking
4-43
The voltage and current input variables are passed on to the evalua-
tion system. The criterion for pick-up of the power swing blocking func-
tion is the continuous variation of (U cos ), which corresponds to
the variation of real power in relation to current amplitude
(P = I U . cos ). The value of (U cos ) is determined after every
zero-crossing of the current. A blocking signal is generated, as soon
as a repetitive variation of the value of (U cos ) is detected, i.e. a
variation must be detected at least three times to count as a power
swing.
Two periods are needed to detect the faster power swings up to a fre-
quency of 8 Hz. The power swing blocking function does not pick up
during a fault, because the variation of (U cos ) in relation to time
only occurs once and at a much higher rate than the functions
operating range.
Slow swings are evaluated over five periods by a second system. At its
lowest operating limit, this system detects a frequency of 0.2 Hz.
Together the two systems cover a range from 0.2 to 8 Hz and no set-
ting is required during commissioning.
The blocking signal 'PSB' is maintained for as long as the distance
protection function is in the picked-up state. The power swing blocking
function is only effective for the symmetrical three-phase condition and
cannot block the distance function for asymmetrical faults (E/Fs and
phase-to-phase faults).
A blocking signal is not issued, if the zero-crossings of the current
signal occur at relatively irregular intervals, because considerable
differences between the zero-crossing intervals are a clear indication
of a fault on the power system. Phase jumps in the current wave form
occur at the incidence of a fault, as a consequence of incorrect
switching and when CT saturation takes place. Since the currents
during power swings are sinusoidal and do not contain a DC com-
ponent, it is permissible to assume that the problem of CT saturation
does not arise.
Zero-crossings resulting from the slip are in any event excluded by the
current enable setting of Imin.
4-44
4.2.1.7. Signal designations and abbreviations
FUPLA name HMI name Signal description INT PAR CPU OPT OUT
3P Preparation of a three-phase trip x

AR_1POL-INP 1P recl. Single-phase reclosure by the auto-reclosure function x
AR_ZE ZExtensionAR Sig. from recl. function to switch distance function to overreach x
BLOCK_ON Overreaching blocking scheme selected x
BLOCK_OR BLOCK OR Overreaching blocking scheme x
CREL_E Start I0 Residual current enable, I0 criterion x x
CREL_R R phase current enable x
CREL_S S phase current enable x
CREL_T T phase current enable x
D Trip RST General trip signal before blocking gate from R, S or T phases x
D_RELEASE Any trip before phase selection x
D1PH Trip CB 1P Single-phase trip signal before blocking gate x
D3PH Trip CB 3P Three-phase trip signal before blocking gate x
DEADLINE1 Dead line Line isolator open; used when VTs on the busbars. x
DH Trip Com Trip via the communication channel x
DISTBL Dist blocked Tripping blocked x
DISTBL DEL DelDistBlk Delayed tripping blocked signal x
DR Trip CB R Trip signal to R phase of CB x
DRST Trip CB General trip from R, S or T phase x
DS Trip CB S Trip signal to S phase of CB x
DT Trip CB T Trip signal to T phase of CB x
ECHO Echo Transmission of an echo sig. in a POTT scheme x
EXTBL_DIST Ext blk dist Distance function blocked by external signal x
EXTBL_PSB Ext blk PSB Power swing blocking blocked by external signal x
HF_ON A transfer tripping mode is selected. x
HFBOOST Com boost Signal to boost PLC power ready for transmission x
HFFAIL Com fail PLC channel failure x
HFREC Com Rx Signal received by PLC x
HFREC_EF (unused) x
HFSEND Com Tx PLC signal transmitted x
HW_RDY Hardware standing by x
I0_VTSUP VT supervision I0> setting exceeded. x
I2_VTSUP VT supervision I2> setting exceeded. x
ISOL_OPEN Isol open Line isolator open (only in conjunction with short-zone logic) x
M_OWN Relays own measurement, no transfer tripping involved. x
MANCL_DIST Manual close Signal from CB manual control switch x
MEAS_BWD Meas Bward Fault in the reverse direction x x
MEAS_MAIN Meas main Fault in zone 1, 2, 3, 4 or <Z (dir./non-dir.) acc. to sig. delay x x
MEAS_OR2 Meas Oreach Fault in the overreach zone or zone 2 x x
4-45
OC_D Trip O/C General O/C trip x x

OC_RST Start O/C General O/C start x x
ONE_CHL (not used) x
POTT POTT Permissive overreaching transfer tripping x
POTT_ON POTT scheme selected x
PSBLOCK Power swing Power swing function blocking signal x x
PUTT_FWD PUTT FWD PUTT for forwards only x
PUTT_NONDIR PUTT NONDIR PUTT for the entire underimpedance characteristic x
PUTT_ON A PUTT scheme is selected x
PUTT_OR2 PUTT OR2 PUTT only for overreach zone or zone 2 x
R Starting or Uweak phase selection sig. for R phase x
RELAY_RDY Relay ready Relay standing by. x
RST Start RST General start with Uweak active x
S Starting or Uweak phase selection sig. for S phase x
SEND_BLOCK Tx signal from BLOCK OR scheme x
SEND_POTT Tx signal from POTT scheme x
SEND_PUTT Tx signal from PUTT scheme x
SOTF Trip SOTF Switch-onto-fault condition fulfilled x
SOTF_10S SOTF10sec Switch-onto-fault condition fulfilled (after 10 s) x
SOTF_INIT Switch-onto-fault start x
ST1 Delay 1 Zone 1 time delay running x x
ST1FWD Zone 1 set for forwards measurement x
START_ALL Start R+S+T General start with Uweak inactive x x
START_E Start E General E/F start with I0 and/or U0 x x
START_OC Start OC Overcurrent start x x
START_R Start R General start by R phase with Uweak inactive x x
START_S Start S General start by S phase with Uweak inactive x x
START_T Start T General start by T phase with Uweak inactive x x
START_U0 Start U0 Residual voltage start, U0 criterion x x
START_UZ Start UZ Underimpedance start x x
STDEF Delay def Lock-out timer running x x
STOR Overreach zone selected, i.e. T4<T2 x x
4-46
T Starting or Uweak phase selection sig. for T phase x

T1_BLOCK t1Block Waiting time for HFREC, default 40 ms x
T1_TRANSBL t1TransBl Timer for monitoring the TBA signal, default 50 ms x
T1_TRIP t1EvolFaults Timer for detecting evolving faults, default 3000 ms x
T2_TRANSBL t2TransBl Max. duration of the TBE signal, default 3000 ms x
TBA_BLOCK BLOCK OR tripping condition fulfilled. x
TBA_POTT POTT tripping condition fulfilled. x
TBE Transient blocking logic selected. x
TH1 End of zone 1 time x
TH2 Delay >=2 End of zone 2 time x x
TH3P 3PhTripDel3 Three-phase trip after TH3 x
THDEF End of lock-out time x
THREE_PH_TRIP 3ph trip Always 3 phases tripped. x
TRANSBL TransBl Transient blocking logic x
TRIP_BLOCK Tripping signal from BLOCK OR scheme x
TRIP_POTT Tripping signal from PUTT scheme x
TRIP_PUTT Tripping signal from POTT scheme x
TRIP_STUB Trip Stub Tripping by short-zone logic x
TRIP_ZE Tripping by zone extension logic x
U0_VTSUP U0> setting exceeded. x
U2_VTSUP U2> setting exceeded. x
UNBL Deblocking selected. x
UNBLOCK Unblock PLC channel failure x
UWEAK_POTT 'General Uweak condition fulfilled' from POTT x
UWEAK_PUTT 'General Uweak condition fulfilled' from PUTT x
UWEAK_R Weak infeed in R phase x
UWEAK_S Weak infeed in S phase x
UWEAK_T Weak infeed in T phase x
UWEAKR_POTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in R phase' from POTT x
UWEAKR_PUTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in R phase' from PUTT x
UWEAKS_POTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in S phase' from POTT x
UWEAKS_PUTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in S phase' from PUTT x
UWEAKT_POTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in T phase' from POTT x
UWEAKT_PUTT 'Uweak condition fulfilled in T phase' from PUTT x
UZ_FORWARD Meas. Fward Fault in forwards direction x x
VT_FAIL VTSup V.t supervision operated. x
VTFAIL_DLY VTSup Delay Delayed VT_FAIL signal x
VTFAIL_IU0 V.t supervision using zero-sequence component x
VTFAIL_IU2 V.t supervision using negative-sequence component x
4-47
WEAK Weak POTT/PUTT phase selection by weak infeed logic x

WI Weak Infeed Weak infeed condition fulfilled. x
ZE_FOR_DIST ZExtension Signal switching distance function to overreach x
INT: internal signal connecting two FUPLA segments

P_..........
BIT_........ (not contained in the above table)
PAR: Parameter or mode which can be set.
PAR_B_ (short-time element, TONB: delayed pick-up,
TOFFB: delayed reset)
PAR_W_...... (long-time element, TON: delayed pick-up,
TOFF: delayed reset)
FL_......... (Flag, Mode)
CPU: Main processor signal
P_..........
OPT: Opto-coupler input
P_..........
OUT: Signal output which can be assigned to an output relay,
LED, event recorder or disturbance recorder
P_..........
4-48
4.2.2. Auto-reclosure
4.2.2.1. Logic segments
The auto-reclosure logic comprises the several FUPLA segments, the
block diagrams of which are shown below.
The relationship between the inputs and outputs and the designations
used for the HMI is given in Section 4.2.2.2.
1
P_MD1_EXT &
P_MD1_EXT_1P_1P
P_MD1_EXT_1P_3P o
P_MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P o
2
P_MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P o >=1
P_MD1_1P_1PAR BIT_MD_1P_1P
3
&
o 4
o >=1
P_MD1_1P_3PAR BIT_MD_1P_3P
5
&
6
o >=1
P_MD1_1P3P_3PAR BIT_MD_1P3P_3P
7
& 8
>=1
P_MD1_1P3P_1P3P BIT_MD_1P3P_1P3P
Fig. 4.37 Segment MODE_1AR:

Selection of the mode for the first auto-reclosure cycle
4-49
1
P_AR_START >=1
P_AR_START_2
P_AR_START_3 BIT_AR_START
2
P_TRIP &
5
P_TRIP_3P o >=1
3
P_TRIP_2 &
P_TRIP_3P_2 o
4
P_TRIP_3 &
9
P_TRIP_3P_3 o >=1
6
>=1
11
P_AR_RUN o &
10
BIT_MD_1P_3P >=1
BIT_MD_1P_1P
13
>=1
12
&
BIT_DISCRT
P_1AR_1P BIT_AR1_DEFTR
8 15
o & >=1
7
>=1
BIT_MD_1P3P_3P
14
NPLS
In
Out
17
RSFF
P_AR_BLCKD S
18 20
>=1 & 16
BIT_MD_1P3P_1P3P NPLS
In
19 21 23 Out R
>=1 >=1 RSFF Q P_AR_3POL_OUT
o S
22
>=1
P_CL_CB
P_CL_CB2 R
Q BIT_AR1_3P_EN
25 27
o & o &
24 26
>=1 RSFF
S
R
Q BIT_AR1_1P_EN
28 29 30
NPLS & &
In
Out
BIT_AR1 o
P_MAST_DEL o BIT_AR_TRIP
31
&
32
o PPLS
BIT_DEADT o In
Out BIT_ST_DEAD_T
33
o & 34
TON
o I
TMSEC_OPERT Tim
Q BIT_BLK_OPT_FIN
Fig. 4.38 Segment ARTRIP:

Starting and tripping inputs, determination of the auto-
reclosure mode, AR initiation and fault duration time
4-50
1
TON
P_CB_OP I
100 Tim 3
Q >=1
2
TOFF
P_RDY_OCO I
100 Tim 4
Q o &
10
P_AR_RUN o &
5
TON
P_CB2_OP I
100 Tim 7
Q >=1
6
TOFF
P_RDY_OCO2 I
100 Tim 9
Q o & 16
o >=1
8
P_CL_CB >=1 11
TOFF
P_CL_CB2 I
50 Tim 12
Q o &
P_MANCL_AR
13
BIT_AR_START o &
o
BIT_AR_TRIP
14
o &
P_COND_BLCK
P_EXTBL_AR
P_TST_AROFF
BIT_BLK_OPT_FIN
15
P_MD1_EXT &
P_MD1_EXT_1P_1P o
P_MD1_EXT_1P_3P o
P_MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P o 17
TOFF
P_MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P o I
TMSEC_BLCK_T Tim 18
Q >=1
BIT_INHIB_OUT
P_INH_IN P_AR_BLCKD
19
o & 20
o >=1
P_AR_RDY
21
P_AR1_ZE &
25
BIT_AR1 >=1
22
P_AR2_ZE &
P_2AR
23
P_AR3_ZE &
P_3AR
24
P_AR4_ZE &
26
P_4AR &
28
>=1
27
o &
o
P_AR_ZEMD P_AR_ZEOUT
29 30
& RSFF
S
R
Q BIT_CB1_DISABLED
31 32
& RSFF
S
R
Q BIT_CB2_DISABLED
Fig. 4.39 Segment BLOCK:

Blocking and zone extension logic
4-51
1 2
BIT_ST_DEAD_T & COUNTX
o C Q0 BIT_ARINI
R
Q1 BIT_AR1
Q2 P_2AR
Q3 P_3AR
Q4 P_4AR
Q5 BIT_AR_FIN
Q6 P_AR_RUN
4
&
3
P_AR_MD2 >=1
P_AR_MD3
8
P_AR_MD4 o >=1
5
&
6
&
7
&
BIT_LAST_AR
<
9
P_AR_BLCKD ASSB
<
10
&
BIT_AR1_1P_EN P_1AR_1P
11
TON
I
TMSEC_DEADT1_1P Tim 13
Q o &
17
>=1
12
RSFF
S
R 14
Q o &
16
BIT_AR1_3P_EN &
15
TON
I
TMSEC_DEADT1_3P Tim 20
Q o >=1
18
TOFF
I
TMSEC_DEADT1_EXT Tim 19
Q &
27
P_EXT_T1_EN >=1
21
TON
I
TMSEC_DEADT2 Tim 22
Q o &
23
TON
I
TMSEC_DEADT3 Tim 24
Q o &
25
TON
I
TMSEC_DEADT4 Tim 26
Q o &
28
TON BIT_DEADT
I
TMSEC_DISCRT_1P Tim 31
Q o &
36
>=1
29
RSFF
S
R 30
Q o & 32
PPLS
In 34
Out >=1
33 35
o & TOFF
I
TMSEC_DISCRT_3P Tim
37 Q BIT_DISCRT
o &
o P_1AR_3P
Fig. 4.40 Segment ARCOUNT:

Auto-reclosure attempt counter
4-52
1
P_MAST_DEL &
2
P_AR_RUN >=1
BIT_CB1_WAIT
3
BIT_DEADT & 4
TOFF
BIT_CB1_DISABLED o I
TMSEC_TIME_OUT Tim
Q BIT_T_OUT1
5 6
& PPLS
o In 7
Out &
BIT_AR_TRIP BIT_TOUT_TRIP1
8 13
P_MDSCBYPS_1P & & 17
o &
BIT_AR1_1P_EN
10
BIT_AR1 >=1
9
&
P_MDSCBYPS_1P3P
12
P_EXTSC_BYP >=1
11
P_SYN_CK &
P_CO_RDY 15
RSFF
P_DEADL S
14
>=1 16
P_AR_BLCKD R TON
Q I
TMSEC_CL_T Tim
Q o
P_CL_CB
18
PPLS
1 In
Out BIT_INIT_BLOCK
20
o &
o
o
19
NPLS
In
Out
o BIT_CB1_DEFTRIP
Fig. 4.41 Segment CLOSE1:

Close signal for the first circuit-breaker
4-53
1
P_MAST_DEL &
2
P_AR_RUN >=1
BIT_CB2_WAIT
3
BIT_DEADT & 4
TOFF
BIT_CB2_DISABLED o I
TMSEC_TIME_OUT Tim
Q BIT_T_OUT2
5 6
& PPLS
o In 7
Out &
BIT_AR_TRIP BIT_TOUT_TRIP2
8 13
P_MDSCBYPS_1P & & 17
o &
BIT_AR1_1P_EN
10
BIT_AR1 >=1
9
&
P_MDSCBYPS_1P3P
12
P_EXTSC_BYP >=1
11
P_SYN_CK2 &
P_CO_RDY2 15
RSFF
P_DEADL2 S
14
>=1 16
P_AR_BLCKD R TON
Q I
TMSEC_CL_T Tim
Q o
P_CL_CB2
19
o &
o
18
NPLS
In
Out
o
BIT_INIT_BLOCK o BIT_CB2_DEFTRIP
Fig. 4.42 Segment CLOSE2:

Close signal for the second circuit-breaker
4-54
1
TOFF
P_CL_CB I
300 Tim 2
Q & 5
RSFF
BIT_AR_TRIP S
3
BIT_DEADT >=1
P_AR_BLCKD R
Q BIT_CL_AND_TR1
4 7
NPLS o &
In 6
Out &
P_AR_RUN
P_CB_OP
o BIT_CL1_UNS
8
o & 9
RSFF
o S
R
10 Q BIT_CL1_SUC
RSFF
S 11
R TON
Q I
40 Tim 12
Q &
P_MAST_MDE P_DEL_FLW
Fig. 4.43 Segment SUCCES1:

Close supervision for the first circuit-breaker
1
TOFF
P_CL_CB2 I
300 Tim 2
Q & 5
RSFF
BIT_AR_TRIP S
3
BIT_DEADT >=1
P_AR_BLCKD R
Q BIT_CL_AND_TR2
4 7
NPLS o &
In 6
Out &
P_AR_RUN
P_CB2_OP
o BIT_CL2_UNS
8
o & 9
RSFF
o S
R
Q BIT_CL2_SUC
Fig. 4.44 Segment SUCCES2:

Close supervision for the second circuit-breaker
4-55
16
P_MAST_MDE &
13
BIT_TOUT_TRIP1 >=1
BIT_TOUT_TRIP2
1
BIT_CB1_DEFTRIP >=1 2
RSFF
BIT_CL1_UNS S
P_AR_BLCKD R 7
Q &
3
BIT_CB2_DEFTRIP >=1 4
RSFF
BIT_CL2_UNS S
R 5
Q >=1
BIT_CB2_DISABLED
BIT_CL2_SUC
o
6
>=1
BIT_CB1_DISABLED
8
BIT_CL1_SUC &
o
9
BIT_AR_TRIP &
BIT_DISCRT o
BIT_DEADT
BIT_AR1_DEFTR
10
BIT_CL_AND_TR1 >=1
11
BIT_CL_AND_TR2 &
BIT_LAST_AR
12 15
& TMOC
I
500 Tim
Q P_BLCK_TO_FLW
17
>=1
P_MAST_NOSUC
14 18
& TMOC
I
22 500 Tim
19 o & 23 Q P_DEF_TRP
& 21 >=1
>=1
20 24
& TOFF
I
TMSEC_INHIB_T Tim
Q BIT_INHIB_OUT
25
&
P_INH_OUT
26
o &
P_CB2_PRIORITY
BIT_T_OUT2
o BIT_CB1_WAIT
27
o &
o
BIT_T_OUT1
o BIT_CB2_WAIT
Fig. 4.45 Segment DEFTRIP:

Master/follower and duplex logic and definitive TRIP
signal
4-56
4.2.2.2. Signal designations

The relationship between the designations of the FUPLA input and
output signals and the parameter designations used in the HMI can be
seen from the following tables. The tables do not show the connec-
tions between the various segments.
Timer settings
FUPLA signal name HMI designation HMI setting

TMSEC_BLCK_T t AR Block 0.05 300
TMSEC_CL_T t Close 0.05 300
TMSEC_DEADT1_1P t Dead1 1P 0.05 300
TMSEC_DEADT1_3P t Dead1 3P 0.05 300
TMSEC_DEADT1_EXT t Dead1 Ext 0.05 300
TMSEC_DEADT2 t Dead2 0.05 300
TMSEC_DISCRT_1P t Discrim. 1P 0.10 300
TMSEC_DISCRT_3P t Discrim. 3P 0.10 300
TMSEC_INHIB_T t Inhibit 0.05 300
TMSEC_OPERT t Oper 0.05 300
TMSEC_TIME_OUT t Timeout 0.05 300
Binary inputs

P_AR_MD2 2..4WE Modus 2 AR
P_AR_START Start -
P_AR_START_2 Start 2 -
P_AR_START_3 Start 3 -
P_AR_ZEMD ZE Prefault On
P_AR1_ZE ZE 1. AR On
4-57

P_CB_OP CB Open -
P_CB2_OP CB2 Open -
P_CB2_PRIORITY CB2 Priority -
P_CO_RDY CO Ready -
P_CO_RDY2 CO Ready 2 -
P_COND_BLCK Cond.Blk AR -
P_DEADL Dead line -
P_DEADL2 Dead line 2 -
P_EXT_T1_EN Extend t1 -
P_EXTBL_AR Ext. Blk. AR -
P_EXTSC_BYP Ext.SCBypas -
P_INH_IN Inhibit Inp. -
P_MANCL_AR Manual Close -
P_MAST_DEL MasterDelay -
P_MAST_MDE Master mode On
P_MAST_NOSUC Mast.noSucc -
P_MD1_1P_1PAR 1. AR Mode 1. 1P-1P
P_MD1_1P_3PAR 1. AR Mode 1. 1P-3P
P_MD1_1P3P_3PAR 1. AR Mode 1. 1P3P-3P
P_MD1_1P3P_1P3P 1. AR Mode 1. 1P3P-1P3P
P_MD1_EXT 1. AR Mode Ext. selection
P_MD1_EXT_1P_1P MD1_EXT_1P_1P -
P_MD1_EXT_1P_3P MD1_EXT_1P_3P -
P_MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P -
P_MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P -
P_MDSCBYPS_1P SCBypas 1P -
P_MDSCBYPS_1P3P SCBypas1P3P -
P_RDY_OCO CB Ready -
P_RDY_OCO2 CB2 Ready -
4-58

P_SYN_CK SynchroChck -
P_SYN_CK2 SynchroChck2 -
P_TRIP Trip CB -
P_TRIP_2 Trip CB2 -
P_TRIP_3 Trip CB3 -
P_TRIP_3P Trip CB 3P -
P_TRIP_3P_2 Trip CB2 3P -
P_TRIP_3P_3 Trip CB3 3P -
Signal outputs
FUPLA signal name HMI designation

P_1AR_1P First AR 1P
P_1AR_3P First AR 3P
P_2AR Second AR
P_3AR Third AR
P_4AR Fourth AR
P_AR_3POL_OUT Trip 3-Pol.
P_AR_BLCKD AR Blocked
P_AR_RDY AR Ready
P_AR_RUN AR in Prog
P_AR_ZEOUT ZExtension.
P_BLCK_TO_FLW Blk.toFlwr.
P_CL_CB Close CB
P_CL_CB2 Close CB2
P_DEF_TRP Def. Trip
P_DEL_FLW DelayFlwr.
P_INH_OUT Inhibit Outp
4-59
4.2.3. Breaker failure protection

This function provides backup protection to clear a fault after being
enabled by the unit protection for the case that the circuit-breaker (CB)
should fail. It has to operate as quickly and reliably as possible
especially on EHV systems where stability is crucial.
To this end, current detectors continuously monitor the line currents
and if they do not reset after a preset time, which allows for the
operating times of the unit protection and the circuit-breaker, a tripping
command is issued to either attempt to trip the same circuit-breaker
again or trip the surrounding circuit-breakers.
Resetting of current detectors is influenced by the following factors:
Even after the main CB contacts open, the current does not
immediately drop to zero, but to a level determined by the fault
resistance and the resistance of the arc across the open CB
contacts. The current only becomes zero after the de-ionization
time of the CB arc.
The pick-up setting of the detector
The fault level prior to operation of the CB
Whether the main CTs saturate. If a CT saturates, its secondary
current may not pass through zero at the same time as its primary
current and if the primary current is interrupted at zero, the CT flux
may be at some positive or negative value. The secondary current
therefore decays through the burdens of the relays thus increasing
the reset time.
The resetting time varies typically between 20 and 30 ms.
Since for the above application, the current detectors should reset as
quickly as possible, Fourier filter algorithms are included to minimize
the affect of CT saturation and eliminate completely or substantially
any DC offset.
The block diagram below shows the basic functions, which are
explained in the following Sections.
4-60
I Current
detectors
Redundant Red Trip Lx
Start Lx logic
Trip t1 Lx
Retrip
logic Retrip t1
Remote Trip
Remote logic
Backup Trip t2
Back up logic
EFP Bus Trip

End Fault
CB Off logic EFS Rem Trip
CB On Uncon Trip t2
Unconditional
Start Ext logic Uncon Trip t1
Ext Trip EFP

Ext Trip t1
Ext Trip t2 1
Trip t1
1
Trip t2
1
HEST 005 045 C
4.2.3.2. Three-phase/ single-phase mode

The function has three current detectors. When it is used in the three-
phase mode, each current detector measures the current in each of
the three phases.
In order to accommodate a fourth current detector measuring the
neutral current, this function has to be duplicated and the second
function set to the single-phase mode and the appropriate current pick-
up. The two functions then operate in parallel.
This arrangement also covers the two special cases of phase-to-
phase-to-ground and three-phase-to-ground faults.
4.2.3.3. 'Redundant Trip'
The 'Redundant Trip' logic performs phase-segregated direct tripping
of the same circuit-breaker without any intentional time delay, if the
Start inputs are active and the corresponding current detectors have
picked up. This ensures that the breaker receives a tripping command
in the event of a unit protection trip circuit failure, which would
otherwise cause a second attempt to trip the same breaker or backup
tripping of the surrounding breakers.
4-61
4.2.3.4. 'Retrip'
The unit protection issues a trip command and simultaneously starts
individual phases or all three phases of the breaker fail function.
A second attempt is made to trip the corresponding phase or phases
after the first time step (t1), providing the current detectors have not
reset.
The 'Retrip' logic can be disabled if not required.
Separate timers for each phase ensure correct operation during
evolving faults.
4.2.3.5. 'Backup Trip'
A second time step (t2) follows the first time step (t1) and initiates
backup tripping, which is always of all three phases. If the first time
step is disabled, the second time step is started immediately, providing
the current detectors have activated by the starting signal from the
protection.
The backup trip logic trips all surrounding breakers feeding the fault.
4.2.3.6. 'Remote Trip'
The 'Remote Trip' logic trips the breaker at the remote end of the line.
Remote tripping can take place concurrently with the 'Retrip' or
'Backup' functions or not at all as desired.
In contrast to the other tripping commands which remain activate for a
given period after the initiating signal has reset, the remote tripping
signal is an impulse with a width which is adjustable irrespective of
when the starting signal from the protection resets.
4.2.3.7. 'Unconditional Trip'
This feature was introduced to respond to low-level faults with currents
too low for the current detectors to pick up or do not initially cause any
fault current at all such as mechanical protection devices like
Buchholz, etc.
The start input bypasses the current detectors and activates the time
steps if the breaker is in the closed position. In all other respects, this
logic is similar to the 'Retrip' and 'Backup' logics.
4.2.3.8. 'End Fault Trip'
While in the case of a fault between a circuit-breaker and a single set
of CTs, the circuit-breaker may not fail, the affect on the power system
and the action that has to be taken are the same as if the circuit-
breaker had failed.
Where there is only a single set of CTs on the busbar side of a circuit-
breaker, the zones of protection do not overlap and a fault between the
circuit-breaker and the CTs is seen as a line fault, although it belongs
to the busbar zone and persists after the circuit-breaker has been
4-62
tripped. The breaker failure protections 'End Fault Trip' logic ultimately
clears such faults at the end of the second time step.
This logic is enabled if the breaker is open and the current detectors
are still picked up, indicating a fault between the breaker and the CTs.
The speed of tripping is determined by the time delay setting.
Depending on whether the single set of CTs is on the line side or bus
side of the circuit breaker, either the section of busbar or the circuit
breaker at the remote end of the line is tripped.
4.2.3.9. 'External Trip'
This function has been included to make the breaker fail protection
more user-friendly and reduce the amount of systems engineering
required. It generates an instantaneous trip when either of the
following inputs is activated:
The input connected to the second time steps of other breaker fail
protection devices in the station.
The input connected to the end fault outputs of other breaker fail
protection devices in the station.
4-63
4.2.4. High-impedance
4.2.4.1. General
In a high-impedance scheme, the measurement circuit represents a
high-impedance across a circulating current circuit. High-impedance
protection is used for
phase and possibly earth fault protection for generators, motors
and compensators
restricted E/F protection for power transformers
The main advantage of a high-impedance scheme compared with a
normal differential scheme is its better stability for relatively low
through-fault currents (between IN and 5 IN).
The disadvantages are
the high voltage across the circulating current circuit during internal
faults
the special requirements to be fulfilled by the CTs
A high-impedance scheme is used to advantage where
fault currents are relatively low,
discrimination is absolutely essential.
This is the case for phase faults on air-cored compensators and earth
faults on power transformers that are grounded via an impedance. In
some instances solidly grounded transformers can also be protected.
Either an overcurrent function with a series resistor or an overvoltage
function can be used in a high-impedance scheme. The restricted
earth fault protection (R.E.F.) described in the next Section is an
example for the application of an overcurrent function.
The required level of through-fault stability is determined by the value
of the high impedance presented by the protection measuring circuit.
4-64
4.2.4.2. Restricted E/F protection for a transformer

4.2.4.2.1. Basic requirements
A restricted E/F scheme must be able to
detect E/Fs in the protection zone
remain stable during both phase and earth through-faults
The scheme is designed to remain stable
in the case of a solidly grounded star-point for an external E/F
current
in the case of an impedance grounded star-point for the highest
external phase and earth fault current
When designing a scheme, it is assumed that one CT is fully saturated
and none of the others.
4.2.4.2.2. Components of a restricted E/F scheme
A restricted E/F scheme comprises the following items:
RE.316*4 overcurrent function is connected to a measuring CT
linear stabilizing resistor RS
non-linear resistor
shorting contacts where necessary
4.2.4.2.3. Design
The E/F current is determined by
a) the generator and step-up transformer reactances when the HV
circuit breaker is open (see Fig. 4.47).
b) in addition to a) by the HV power system when the HV circuit-
breaker is closed (see Fig. 4.48).
As a result of the current distribution for a through-fault, the star-point
CT conducts the highest current in the case of a solidly grounded
transformer as shown in Fig. 4.48. Apart from the burden of the cables,
the high fault level results in a high CT flux and a high probability of it
saturating.
The influence of external phase faults on the circulating current circuit
is limited, especially if the connections between the CT cores can be
kept short. Phase faults are therefore neglected when designing a
scheme for a solidly grounded system. They may not be neglected,
however, where a system is impedance grounded.
4-65
The value of the stabilizing resistor is chosen such that the voltage
drop caused by the highest external E/F and possibly phase fault
current across the secondary winding and leads of the saturated CT
cannot reach the pick-up setting of the protection (see Fig. 4.49).
The knee-point voltage of the CTs is specified such that the they can
supply sufficient current during an internal fault to enable the
protection to trip. The knee-point voltage Uk of the CTs must therefore
be appreciably higher than the voltage drop Ua.
Symbols used:
IE primary star-point current (AC component) for a
through-fault
I2 secondary current of the non-saturated CTs
I2N CT secondary rated current
I1N CT primary rated current
IN protection rated current
R2 secondary resistance of the saturated CT at 75C
RL lead resistance according to the Figure
Ua , Ui voltage drops across the circulating current circuit for
external and internal faults
Uk CT knee-point voltage
I current setting
RS stabilizing resistor
IF highest primary fault current (AC component) for an
internal E/F
Equations:
Ua = (R2 + 2 RL) I2
Uk 2 Ua
I = 0.25 I2N (solidly grounded star-point)
I = 0.10 I2N (impedance grounded star-point)
Ua
RS
I
Ui = RS I2 (I2 results from IF)
Umax = 2 2 Uk ( Ui Uk )
4-66
4.2.4.2.4. Example
Determination of the stabilizing resistor:
CTs 1000/1 A
R2 = 5
100 m
RL = = 0.5
50 4 mm 2
(CT lead gauge 4 mm2)
Maximum earth fault through current:

IE = 10,000 A
This is the E/F current on an HV system with the following data:
xd" = x2 = 0.2 ; xT = xT0 = 0.1 ; xsys = xsys 0 = 0.01
1
I2 = 10 000 = 10 A
1000
Ua = (5 + 2 0,5) 10 = 60 V
Uk 2 Ua = 120 V
Chosen Uk = 200 V
Settings for a solidly grounded system:

I = 0.25 IN = 0.25 A
(The setting I = 0.1IN is usually chosen for a impedance grounded
system.)
Stabilizing resistor
U 60
RS = = 240
I 0,25
Chosen RS = 300
Check of the overvoltage at maximum fault current
3 I1N 3 1000
IF = = = 100 000 A
2 xNetz + xNetz0 0,02 + 0,01
1
I2 = 100 000 = 100 A
1000
Ui = RS I2 = 300 100 = 30 000 V
Umax = 2 2 Uk ( Ui Uk )
= 2 2 200 (30 000 200 ) = 6 905 V
4-67
Since this value exceeds the permissible maximum peak value of

2,000 V, a non-linear resistor must be connected across the circulating
current circuit to limit the voltage. Shorting contacts may also be
necessary.
CT specification:
Rated currents 1000/1 A
Winding resistance R2 5
Knee-point voltage Uk = 200 V
Magnetising current I2m 2 % I2N
i.e. I2m 0.02 A at U2 = 60 V
The CTs must conform to British Standard 3938, Class X.
The CTs should also:
have evenly distributed secondary windings on a toroidal core (i.e.
to minimize the secondary leakage flux)
not have any winding correction
Stabilizing resistor specification:

300 ; 0.5 A
Test voltage: 2 kV
Non-linear resistor specification:

E.g. Metrosil Type 600 A/S1.
Shorting contacts:
The circulating current circuit must be short-circuited within the thermal
rating time of the two resistors, if an internal fault cannot be tripped in
a shorter time.
Overcurrent function settings:

I-Setting 0.25 IN
Delay 0.02 s
4-68
G T
4.286
Power
system
4.286
HEST 935 005 FL
Fig. 4.47 E/F on the HV system supplied by the generator
xd" = x2 = 0.2 ; xT = xT0 = 0.1

The current values are referred to the rated current of
the transformer.
4-69
HEST 935 006 FL

system
Power
95.8793
4.1238
95.8793
105.4672
2.0619
2.0619
5.4641
9.5879
T
G
Fig. 4.48 E/F on the HV system supplied by the generator and the
HV system
xd" = x2 = 0.2 ; xT = xT0 = 0.1 ;

xsys = xsys 0 = 0.01
4-70
Saturated c.t. Internal E/F
IE
IE External
R2 E/F
RS
Ui
I>
I2 I2
RS
VDR Shorting contact
I>
HEST 935 007 FL
Fig. 4.49 Restricted E/F protection of a Y connected transformer

winding
4-71
4.2.5. Application of the transformer differential protection in a 112

breaker configuration
A stable behavior of the differential protection function at through fault
conditions is achieved by using a three feeder differential protection as
it is shown in Fig. 4.50. Therefore, a RET316*4 version with a input
transformer unit K22 and a software code ST310, ST320 or ST330 is
needed.
Through Fault
RET316*4
ST3xx
HEST 985036 C
Fig. 4.50 Connection of the transformer differential protection in a

1 breaker configuration. Standstill protection
4.2.6. Standstill protection

4.2.6.1. General
The purpose of the standstill protection is to isolate the generator from
the system as quickly as possible, if it is connected to the system by
mistake, e.g. when stationary, during start-up or when running without
voltage.
The protection must have a short operating time to minimize the
mechanical stress on the rotors and bearings of generator and turbine,
should the unit be connected to the system suddenly under these
conditions. Nevertheless, it must remain stable during external faults
and transients.
Standstill protection can be provided by a fast overcurrent or power
function. Function modules for both alternatives are included in the
REG316*4 function library. The following example shows the over-
current alternative.
4-72
4.2.6.2. Standstill protection using an overcurrent function

The overcurrent function is enabled by an undervoltage function, if the
period without voltage exceeds a given time.
The standstill protection scheme comprises the following items:
an overcurrent function 'Current'
an undervoltage function 'Voltage'
a timer 'Delay'
The block diagram can be seen from Fig. 4.51. The computing require-
ment is 23 %.
Function No.1 Voltage Function No.2 Delay
Trip Trip
U U-Setting = 0.85 UN TRIP time = 0.0 s
Delay = 1.00 s Reset time = 20.0 s
Block
Function No.3 Current
I-Setting = 1.5 IN Trip

I Delay = 0.02 s
Standstill
protection
HEST 935 008 FL
Fig. 4.51 Block diagram of a standstill protection scheme based on

an overcurrent function
4.2.7. Rotor ground fault protection

4.2.7.1. Application
Ground faults on the rotor windings of synchronous generators and
motors can be detected by the protection function 'Voltage' in combi-
nation with an ancillary unit Type YWX111-11 or YWX111-21.
The scheme is connected by coupling capacitors (electrical insulation)
to positive and negative poles of the rotor winding and to the shaft
ground. The ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21, the coupling capaci-
tors and the natural capacitance of the rotor winding form a balanced
R/C bridge. In the event of a ground fault, the fault resistance shunts
the capacitance of the rotor winding to the shaft and disturbs the
balance of the bridge. The voltage difference across the bridge is
applied to an input VT on the REG316*4 and causes its voltage
function to trip.
4-73
Mechanical design
The ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21 is accommodated in a casing
of dimensions 183 113 81 mm for surface mounting on a panel.
4.2.7.2. Determining the settings
Since it is not possible with this scheme to set the value of leakage
resistance directly, a voltage corresponding to the leakage resistance
has to be determined for setting on the REG316*4 (U-Setting). The
time delay t [s] before tripping takes place must also be set. The
normal setting range for the leakage resistance R is between 0 and
5000 :
U-Setting = 0.5...3 V
t = 0.5...5 s
R: leakage resistance between

the rotor winding and ground (shaft)
U-Setting: voltage setting
t: operating time
4.2.7.2.1. Required data
No special data are required in order to determine the settings for the
protection. Determining the settings by calculation is somewhat difficult
and therefore they are determined by measurement.
4.2.7.2.2. Recommended settings for Rf , respectively 'U-Setting' and t
Basically any value may be set for Rf and the time delay t within their
available ranges.
Very sensitive settings are not recommended to prevent mal-operation
of the protection during fast load regulation on the power system. This
is especially the case in schemes which trip the field switch and shut
the machine down.
Recommendation:
Stage 2: 'Trip'
R 2000
t 1.5 s
Stage 1: 'Alarm'
R 5000
t 1.5 s
Note that the difference voltage across the bridge is low for high
leakage resistances and high for low leakage resistances.
4-74
4.2.7.3. Functional check

The procedure for checking the function of the protection prior to
installation or connection is given in Section 4.2.7.5.3. Alternatively a
test circuit can be set up as shown in Fig. 4.54 and the procedure
followed according to Section 4.2.7.5.4.
4.2.7.4. Installation and wiring
4.2.7.4.1. Location and ambient conditions
The ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21 must be mounted as close as
possible to the REG316*4 (same cubicle or panel) to minimize the
probability of interference.
The coupling capacitors CK, on the other hand, should not be in the
relay room, but as close as possible to the machine. The connecting
cables to the primary system must be suitable for the insulation level of
the rotor circuit.
4.2.7.4.2. Checking the wiring
Check the conformity of all connections with the wiring diagram for the
plant.
Check that the rated frequency and supply voltage of 100 V AC or
220 V AC agree with the data on the rating plate of the ancillary unit
Type YWX111-11/-21.
The supply voltage of 100 V AC or 220 V AC can be provided by the
normal power distribution network or a VT connected to the generator
concerned. The auxiliary supply can also be taken from the input
terminals of an input transformer module of the REG316*4 used for
measuring the generator voltage.
Since duplicate grounds can be problematical, it may be necessary to
interrupt the ground connection to terminal 3 of YWX111-11/-21
(connection to the shaft ground) in the cubicle or on the panel.
A high percentage of harmonics produced by the excitation system
between the excitation voltage and ground, can lead to an overload on
the ancillary system YWX111-11/-21. When the power loss between
the terminals 6 and 3 is more than 10 W, then the bridge between
terminals 6 and 7 should be removed, and connect an external resistor
between terminals 6 and 8. This data can be utilized for the
explanation of the Fig. 4.52
4-75
4.2.7.4.3. Connection of a two-stage scheme

A two-stage protection scheme requires two 'Voltage' functions and
one ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21.
Usual utilization:
Stage 1: 'Alarm'
Stage 2: 'Trip'
The connection are the same as the one stage scheme.
4.2.7.4.4. Connection to excitation systems with shaft-mounted diodes
Schemes for protecting excitation circuits with diodes mounted on the
shaft of the generator (rotating diodes) must have a connection via a
slip-ring to just one pole of the rotor circuit.
The two coupling capacitors CK1 and CK2 must thus be connected in
parallel to either the positive or negative pole. Where there is a choice
(several slip-rings), the connection of CK1/2 to the minus pole is to be
preferred.
The remaining connections must be in accordance with Fig. 4.55.
4.2.7.4.5. Adaptation of the scheme in the case of shaft filters
If the rotor circuit includes a so-called shaft filter to prevent damage to
the bearings, the filter reduces the sensitivity of the protection.
In such cases, the sensitivity can be restored to the desired level by
increasing the value of R9 in the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21.
Standard: R 9 = 120
(normal sensitivity)
With shaft filter: R 9 = 1 k
(increased sensitivity)
Location of resistor R9: see Fig. 4.57.
4.2.7.5. Commissioning
The commissioning procedure is described in Sections 4.2.7.5.1. to
4.2.7.5.4. The tripping circuits of the REG316*4 should be interrupted
while performing the tests according to Sections 4.2.7.5.3. and
4.2.7.5.4.
4.2.7.5.1. Pre-commissioning checks
Check the wiring according to Section 4.2.7.4.
Check that the YWX111-11/-21 is connected to the correct
auxiliary supply voltage of 100 V AC or 220 V AC.
Check that the shaft grounding brush of the generator makes proper
contact and is in good working order.
4-76
4.2.7.5.2. Calibration of the ancillary unit Type YWX111-11/-21

The measuring bridge of which the YWX111-11/-21 is part must be
balanced with the unit connected by appropriately selecting the values
of the capacitors CX.
Fig. 4.52 Calibration of the YWX111-11/-21
USH: Aux. supply 100 V AC or 220 V AC

CR: Stray rotor ground (shaft) capacitance
CK1, CK2: Coupling capacitors, 2 F each
CX: Calibration capacitor, Polyester, U 400 V
RE: External resistance 2.2 k, 137 W
(Type designation FWA40-20,
Ident-Nr. 1MRB380107P0001)
V: AC voltmeter with battery supply
Calibration can be carried out while the machine is stationary.
Procedure:
Interrupt the REG316*4 tripping circuits.
Connect an AC voltmeter to terminals 1 and 2 of
YWX111-11/-21.
Connect a decade capacitor in place of CX.
Close the excitation switch.
Switch on the auxiliary supply USH.
Vary CX until the output voltage across terminals 1 and 2 of
YWX111-11/-21 becomes a minimum; typically 50 mVr.m.s..
Note: It is possible that the 50 mVr.m.s. will not be reached
in the case of schemes with shaft filters and
increased YWX111-11/-21 sensitivity (R9 = 1 k).
4-77
Solder in a capacitor or combination of capacitors with the total

value determined for CX.
Theoretical value of CX
a) Circuit according to Fig. 4.55a (or Fig. 4.52):
(CK1 + CK 2 ) CR
CX =
CK1 + CK 2 + CR
b) Circuit according to Fig. 4.55b:

3CK (3CS + CR )
CX =
3CK + 3CS + CR
4.2.7.5.3. Measuring the voltage values

The value of the voltage across the bridge as measured on the
YWX 111 in relation to different leakage resistances is determined by
measurement with a variable resistor inserted in place of the leakage
resistance as shown in Fig. 4.53.
Fig. 4.53 Measuring the voltages corresponding to leakage

resistance

RP: Test E/F resistor
Leakage resistor RP:
0 , solid ground fault
2000 , 2.5 W
5000 , 2.5 W
The measurement can be carried out with the machine stationary.
4-78
Procedure:
Connect RP = 5000 , 2000 or 0 to the positive pole of the
excitation circuit.
Close the excitation switch.
Switch on the auxiliary supply USH.
Measure the voltage for different values of leakage resistance.
Set the voltage measured for 2000 or 5000 on the REG316*4.
The voltages are usually in the range of 0.5 and 3 V.
Repeat the procedure for RP = 5000 , 2000 or 0 , but
connected to the minus pole.
4.2.7.5.4. Testing in operation
This test checks that the REG316 and the ancillary unit function cor-
rectly with the generator in operation. Once again a rotor fault is simu-
lated by installing a leakage resistor. The protection must effectively
trip.
Fig. 4.54 Circuit for testing in operation

RP: Test E/F resistor
Leakage resistor RP: 1000 , 10 W, insulation voltage according to
IEC recommendations (for different excitation
voltages)
4-79
Procedure:
Test conditions: machine at rated speed with excitation and on
load, grounding test switch ES open.
Set the voltage on the REG316*4 as measured according to
Section 4.2.7.5.3.
Close the grounding switch ES.
Slowly reduce the voltage setting 'U-Setting' in steps until the
protection trips.
Caution: The tripping signal is delayed.
Connect the test resistor RP to the minus pole of the excitation
circuit and repeat the above procedure.
Measure and record the voltage across terminals 1 and 2 of
YWX111-11/-21 during the test.
After the test has been completed, open the grounding switch ES
and close the REG316*4 tripping circuits.
Checking the calibration of YWX111-11/-21

Measure the voltage across the bridge at terminals 1 and 2 of
YWX111-11/-21 with the machine running on load with excitation. The
reading should be 150 mVr.m.s. in normal operation (ES open). If it is
higher,
check the contact resistance of the shaft grounding brush (see
Section 4.2.7.6.).
repeat the calibration of YWX111-11/-21 according to Section
4.2.7.5.2.
Note: It is possible that the 150 mVr.m.s. will not be reached in
the case of schemes with shaft filters and increased
YWX111-11/-21 sensitivity (R9 = 1 k).
4-80
4.2.7.6. Maintenance
4.2.7.6.1. Likely causes of problems
Should the protection become defective, i.e. operate incorrectly, the
cause may be one of the following
The shaft grounding brush is making poor contact
see Section 4.2.7.6.2.
The calibration of the YWX111-11/-21 is incorrect
see Sections 4.2.7.5.2. and 4.2.7.5.4.
The YWX111-11/-21 is grounded in the cubicle (terminal 3)
causing a duplicate ground see Section 4.2.7.4.2.
The protection is too sensitive (the setting for the level of leakage
resistance is too high) or the time delay t is too short.
4.2.7.6.2. Maintenance
The ancillary unit requires no special maintenance. As with all safety
systems, however, it should be tested at regular intervals. This can be
carried out as described in Section 4.2.7.5.
The shaft grounding brush should be checked and cleaned at frequent
intervals and the contact pressure adjusted as necessary.
4.2.7.7. Fault-finding
Fault-finding is confined to testing the device according to Section
4.2.7.5. to determine whether it operates correctly. Faulty units should
be returned to the nearest ABB agent or directly to ABB Switzerland
Ltd., Baden, Switzerland.
4.2.7.8. Accessories and spares
When ordering accessories or spares, state the type and serial num-
ber of the unit for which they are intended. If a number of identical
units is installed in a plant, keeping a spare unit on stock is recom-
mended.
Spare material must be stored in a clean dry room at moderate tem-
peratures. Testing spare units in conjunction with the routine testing of
units in operation is recommended.
4.2.7.9. Appendices
Fig. 4.55 Wiring diagram of the REG316 and the ancillary unit
Type YWX111-11/-21
Fig. 4.56 Internal operation and terminals of the YWX111-11/-21
Fig. 4.57 Component side of the PCB in the YWX111-11/-21
4-81
a) Connection to the DC side of the rotor circuit
b) Connection to the AC side of the rotor circuit
Fig. 4.55 Wiring diagram of the REG316*4 and the ancillary unit
Type YWX111-11/-21
CK1, CK2: coupling capacitors; 2 x 2 F, 8-20 kV, 0.55 A

CK: coupling capacitors; 3 x 0.5 F, 8-20 kV, 0.55 A
CS: filter capacitors for thyristor excitation
USH: auxiliary supply; 100 V or 220 V, 50/60 Hz
B: shaft grounding brush
4-82
Fig. 4.56 Internal operation and terminals of the YWX111-11/-21
Fig. 4.57 Component side of the PCB in the YWX111-11/-21,

4-83
4.2.8. Application of the under reactance protection function

The under reactance protection function can be used for a number of
purposes. It is normally used, however, to detect out-of-step conditions
for load angles 90. It is similarly applicable to monitoring a
maximum load angle, e.g. = 70.
4.2.8.2. Out-of-step conditions
The stability limit of a turbo-alternator with or without step-up
transformer is illustrated at the upper left in Fig. 4.58 as a function of
the impedance measured at the generator terminals and at the upper
right as a power diagram. The operation of the protection is set to the
circle (lower left of Fig. 4.58) to avoid tripping during a fault or power
swings on the power system. The setting range permits the protection
characteristic to be adjusted to the stability limit curve (see upper left
of Fig. 4.58), which is applicable whether the generator is connected to
a step-up transformer or directly to a busbar.
4.2.8.3. Monitoring a given load angle
The setting range also facilitates monitoring a given load angle, e.g.
< 90, for:
alarm purposes when a certain maximum load angle is reached
fulfilling special requirements, e.g. to take account of the influence
of differing values of Xd and Xq at the stability limit
salient pole machines
A load angle of < 90 represents an offset circle in the impedance
plane (see left of Fig. 4.59). The centre of the circle lies on a straight
line, which is displaced from the R axis by the angle . The circle is the
locus of the operating points with the load angle . The corresponding
characteristic in the power diagram is a straight line with a slope of .
The value of the load angle is set by means of the phase-angle
compensation setting, which must be increased by the amount
(90 ). For = 70, the reference voltage R-S and the R phase
current, the following phase-angle compensation must be set:
30 + (90 70) = 50
The reactance XA is set either to the synchronous reactance Xd or a
value, which takes account of differing values of Xd and Xq.
The following general statement applies:
X
XA =
sin
4-84
XB = 0 in Fig. 4.59. XB can also be positive or negative and repre-

sented in an impedance plane by circles, which do not pass through
the origin. In a power diagram, these circles correspond to circles to
the left and right of the straight lines through points C', A' and E'. Point
A is common to all circles with the same load angle and the same XA
setting (see Fig. 4.58).
Instable
ZN
XT Stable
SN
0 B
Xd
Instable
Stable
Instable
A
~ ~
Xd XT
~
X'd
~
Xd
SN
Fig. 4.58 Stability limit of a generator/transformer set and the

characteristic of the 'Minreactance' protection function
4-85
Fig. 4.59 Locus of the load angle < 90
4-86
Fig. 4.60 Operating characteristic for different settings of 'XB-Setting'

and a load angle < 90
4-87
4.2.9. Stator ground fault protection for generators in parallel

This is a discriminative ground fault scheme for generators with un-
grounded star-points. It covers 80 % of the winding and operates on
the basis of a directional zero-sequence component in the various
generator feeders. Since the capacitive component of a ground fault
current does not usually provide a sufficiently reliable criterion for
determining the feeder concerned, the ground fault current is artificially
increased by adding a real power component. The latter is generated
either by three single-phase VTs or a three-phase VT Whichever is the
case, the secondaries are connected as a broken delta and a resistor
(Re) is switched briefly into the delta after a ground fault has been
detected. The combined VT and grounding transformer are connected
to the continuously energized busbars. The number of generator
feeders can vary.
The protection scheme comprises two parts:
The first part is a non-discriminative ground fault detector on each
busbar comprising a:
grounding transformer
Ferro resonance damping resistor Rp
switched grounding resistor Re
zero-sequence voltage detector for switching in the resistor
contactor
interposing VT
The second part comprises the power function and either a core-
balance or three bushing CTs to measure the zero-sequence current
and discriminatively locate the ground fault after the real power
component has been added.
4.2.9.1. Principle of operation
Initially a ground fault is detected non-discriminately due to the
occurrence of a neutral voltage measured by a sensitively set voltage
function. The grounding resistor Re is switched in circuit after a short
delay (t1 = 0.1 s) to prevent operation during power system transients.
Only then is the ground fault current large enough to enable the power
functions on the generators to decide whether the ground fault is on
their generator feeder or not. The delay for the power function is set to
isolate the fault after 0.5 s. The grounding resistor Re is connected for
1.9 s. The resistor Re is switched out of circuit again after a delay of
2 s initiated by the voltage function.
Two timers ensure correct operation of the scheme:
T1 prevents operation during transients, t1 = 0.1 s
T2 prevents 'pumping' when the grounding resistor Re is switched
in and out of circuit, t2 = 1 s
4-88
The protection operates with a maximum real power component in the

ground fault current of 1220 A for a ground fault at the generator
terminals. The neutral voltage is then a maximum. The ground fault
current is proportional to the neutral voltage and is a maximum for a
ground fault at the generator terminals and a minimum for a ground
fault at the star-point.
An offset of the of the neutral of the three phase voltages is caused:
a) in normal operation by:
asymmetries of the phase-to-ground
the presence of a third harmonic component
b) under abnormal operating conditions by
switching transients
internal and external ground faults
To avoid any risk of mal-operation, the setting of the ground fault
detector must be higher than any voltage offset, which can occur
during normal operation.
Under abnormal conditions, the voltage offset can be increased by the
ferro resonance of the capacitance with the inductance of the VTs.
The danger of mal-operation of the ground fault detector due to
switching operations is minimized or even eliminated altogether by
adding the resistor Rp and also a delay. The effectiveness of this
measure depends on how low the resistor Rp can be. A low resistor,
however, increases the current, the power of the resistor and the load
on the VTs or grounding transformer.
4.2.9.2. Busbar ground faults
Should no ground fault be located on one of the generator feeders, it
has to be on the busbars or possibly an outgoing feeder. In such a
case, the voltage function operates and the alarm 'Busbar ground fault'
is generated after the set delay of 2 s.
4.2.9.3. Ground fault protection during start-up

The power function can only detect a ground fault on the generator
feeder when the circuit-breaker is closed. For the time that the circuit-
breaker is open, ground fault protection is afforded by a sensitive
voltage function which trips the excitation switch in the event of a
stator ground fault after a delay of 0.5 s. This ground fault protection
scheme is blocked once the circuit-breaker closes.
4-89
4.2.9.4. Grounding transformer

The following arrangements can be used to increase the ground fault
current:
3 single-phase VTs with a maximum rating of 80 kVA for 10 s. This
arrangement can be used at 6.66 A up to a rated generator voltage
of 12 kV, at 5 A up to 16 kV and at 4 A up to 20 kV.
3 single-phase dry VTs can conduct 6.66 A at voltages higher than
12 kV.
Apart from a higher overload rating, a 3 single-phase grounding
transformer also has the advantage of a negligible voltage drop.
Example
for generators with a rated voltage of 10.5 kV and a ground fault
current of 20 A (6.66 A per phase):
Voltage transformers Short-time

sec. rating
U1N [V] U2N [V] S [kVA] [A] 10 s
10500 167 70 240
3
4.2.9.5. Ferro resonance damping resistor Rp

For a ground fault in the busbar zone, the ground fault detector issues
an alarm without interrupting operation. The resistor Rp must therefore
be rated for continuous operation. It generally has a rating of 1 or 2 A,
which is permissible for most VTs, but has only a limited damping
capacity. The output power of the VT in the example varies at a
continuous current of 2 A between 577 and 831 VA.
When the main priority is to prevent mal-operation, the resistor Rp is
chosen according to the maximum continuous rating of the VTs, which
is usually in the range of 5 to 10 % of the permissible 10 s current.
Where the VTs are also used for metering, it should be noted that the
voltage and phase errors increase at the maximum continuous current.
4-90
4.2.9.6. Grounding resistor Re

The grounding resistor must be rated for 10 s. A voltage drop of 20 %
is allowed if a VT is used as grounding transformer. For a ground fault
current of 20 A and a rated voltage of UN = 10.5 kV, the recommended
value of the resistor is:
UN Ubroken Rp Re I2
[V] [V] [] [A] VT [A] 10 s
10.500 500 250 2 1.7 240
4.2.9.7. Contactor
The contactor switches both ends of the grounding resistor Re.
4.2.9.8. Residual current CT

Alternative I:
1 core-balance CT 100/1 A, rated burden 2.5 .
Alternative II:
3 bushing CTs, .../5 A - 33/1 A, rated burden 1.5 .
The above burdens apply for CT leads of 2 100 m with a gauge of
4 mm2.
4.2.9.9. Required REG316*4 functions
The following REG316*4 functions are required for a discriminative
ground fault scheme:
1 100 V voltage input
1 metering current input
1 to 4 tripping channels
depending on the number of circuit-breaker tripping coils and
whether redundancy is required or not
1 'Ground fault' signaling channel
2 signaling inputs
The start-up scheme requires:
1 100 V voltage input
1 or 2 tripping channels for the de-excitation switch
1 'Start-up ground fault' signaling channel
1 'Generator CB closed' signaling input
4-91
4.2.9.10. Protection sensitivity

For a ground fault at the generator terminals, a real power current of
20 A results in a voltage of approximately 80 V, respectively 100 V at
the input of the REG316*4. The lower of the two voltages takes the
voltage drops of three single-phase VTs into account. A current of 4 A
and a voltage of 16 V are produced by a ground fault at 20 % of the
winding from the start-point. The current at the input of the REG316*4
in the case of a core-balance CT with a ratio of 100/1 A is 0.04 A
which corresponds to a power of 0.64 W at 16 V. This is detected by
the power function with a setting of 0.5 % or 0.5 W at URN = 100 V and
IRN = 1 A.
Fig. 4.61 Discriminative ground fault and start-up schemes for a

generator feeder
4-92
Fig. 4.62 Operation of the ground fault protection for a fault
a) on the busbar
b) on a feeder
4-93
1
3
U> 2
5
P> 6 7 8
U> 9
UR
UTR USR U TR
U
UT US
HEST 965039 FL
U SR
Legend:
1 Generator star-point VT
2 Start-up scheme VT
3 3 neutral CTs for the generator ground fault current
4 Power relay for the generator ground fault protection
5 Grounding transformer
6 Grounding resistor Re
7 Ferro resonance damping resistor Rp
8 Interposing VT
9 Voltage relay for the busbar ground fault protection
Fig. 4.63 Three-phase diagram and vector diagram of the

protection
4-94
4.2.10. 100 % stator and rotor ground fault protection

Stator ground fault protection
The ground fault protection of the entire stator winding comprises a
95 % scheme and a 100 % scheme (see Fig. 4.64). The zones of the
two schemes overlap in the stator windings. Ground faults in the region
of the generator terminals are detected primarily by the 95 % stator
ground fault scheme. Ground faults near the star-point, on the other
hand, can only be detected by the 100 % stator ground fault scheme.
The functions required for the two schemes are
a 'Voltage' function for the 95 % stator ground fault protection
the 'Stator-EFP' for the star-point zone protection
The 95 % scheme uses the generator voltage and detects a ground
fault on the basis of the displacement of the star-point voltage it
causes.
The 100 % star-point scheme injects a voltage to permanently bias the
star-point. The injection voltage has an impulse waveform with an am-
plitude of about 100 V and a frequency of 12.5 or 15 Hz. It is provided
by an injection unit Type REX010 and an injection transformer unit
REX011. The scheme measures the ground fault leakage resistance.
The sensitivities of the two schemes can be set in the case of the
95 % scheme by the pick-up voltage (typically 5 V)
100 % star-point scheme by settings for the ground fault resistance
(typically 5 k for alarm and 500 for tripping)
The zone of the 100 % scheme depends on the maximum zero-
sequence current at fundamental frequency flowing at the star-point.
This occurs for a fault at the generator terminals. The low-frequency
injection voltage is switched off when the zero-sequence current
component at power system frequency exceeds 5 A. For a current of
IE max = 20 A, the pick-up current of 5 A is reached for a ground fault at
25 % of the winding from the star-point. It is of advantage to limit the
ground fault current to IE max 5 A so that the zone of the 100 %
scheme extends over the whole stator winding.
4-95
Fig. 4.64 100 % stator and rotor ground fault protection
4-96
Rotor ground fault protection

The rotor ground fault protection injects a voltage with an amplitude of
50 V and a frequency of 12.5 or 15 Hz to permanently bias the
potential of the rotor circuit in relation to ground. The scheme signals a
ground fault when the leakage resistance of the rotor circuit falls below
the value set on the protection.
The injection voltage of 50 V is supplied by the same injection unit
Type REX010 and injection transformer unit Type REX011 as are
used for the stator ground fault scheme.
4-97
October 2004
5. OPERATION (CAP2/316)
5.1. Summary............................................................................................5-5
5.2. Installing and starting CAP2/316........................................................5-6

5.2.1. PC requirements ................................................................................5-6
5.2.2. Installing CAP2/316 ...........................................................................5-6
5.2.3. Starting the HMI .................................................................................5-9
5.2.4. Starting and stopping CAP2/316......................................................5-10
5.2.4.1. Operating modes of the configuration program CAP2/316 ..............5-10
5.2.4.2. Starting CAP2/316 ...........................................................................5-11
5.2.4.3. Stopping CAP2/316 .........................................................................5-12
5.3. Operation .........................................................................................5-13

5.3.1. General ............................................................................................5-13
5.3.2. Screen display .................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.1. The status display ............................................................................5-14
5.3.2.2. Main menu items and icons .............................................................5-15
5.4. Step-by-step configuration of a device.............................................5-18

5.4.1. Short introduction.............................................................................5-18
5.4.2. Relay configuration ..........................................................................5-18
5.4.2.1. Binary input card 316DB6x ..............................................................5-20
5.4.2.2. Double indication .............................................................................5-21
5.4.2.3. Signal outputs of the card 316DB6x ................................................5-23
5.4.2.4. Tripping relay outputs of the card 316DB6x.....................................5-24
5.4.2.5. Light emitting diodes (LED)..............................................................5-25
5.4.2.6. Analog Digital converter................................................................5-26
5.4.3. Station and bay name ......................................................................5-28
5.4.4. System I/O .......................................................................................5-28
5.4.5. Configuring binary outputs ...............................................................5-29
5.4.5.1. Signal LED .......................................................................................5-30
5.4.5.2. Signal relays ....................................................................................5-31
5.4.5.3. Event recording................................................................................5-32
5.4.5.4. Trip indication relays ........................................................................5-33
5.4.5.5. Signal to SCS (Substation Automation System) ..............................5-34
5.4.5.6. Signal to RBO (Remote input output system) ..................................5-35
5.4.5.7. Signal to ITL (Interlocking) ...............................................................5-36
5.4.6. Configuring binary inputs .................................................................5-37
5.4.6.1. TRUE / FALSE.................................................................................5-38
5.4.6.2. Inputs via optocoupler (binary inputs) ..............................................5-39
5.4.6.3. Output from a protection function.....................................................5-40
5.4.6.4. Inputs from SCS (Substation automation system) ...........................5-41
5.4.6.5. Inputs from RBI (Remote input output system)................................5-42
5.4.6.6. Inputs from ITL (Interlocking data) ...................................................5-43
5.4.7. Configuring protection functions ......................................................5-44
5.4.7.1. Protection functions in the library and active functions ....................5-44
5.4.7.2. Inserting a function...........................................................................5-45
5-1
5.4.7.3. Deleting a function ...........................................................................5-45

5.4.7.4. Copying a function ...........................................................................5-46
5.4.7.5. Configuring a function ......................................................................5-47
5.4.8. Listing the settings ...........................................................................5-50
5.4.8.1. Displaying the parameters ...............................................................5-50
5.4.8.2. Displaying the reference value of analog and
process measurements....................................................................5-51
5.4.9. Saving and loading the configuration from a file ..............................5-51
5.4.9.1. Saving the configuration to a file......................................................5-52
5.4.9.2. Loading a saved configuration from a file ........................................5-52
5.4.10. Down-/uploading a configuration from the device ............................5-52
5.4.10.1. Uploading a configuration from the device.......................................5-52
5.4.10.2. Downloading a configuration to the device ......................................5-54
5.5. Monitor menu ...................................................................................5-54

5.5.1. Event handling .................................................................................5-55
5.5.1.1. Displaying new events .....................................................................5-55
5.5.1.2. List of the events..............................................................................5-56
5.5.1.3. Clearing the event list ......................................................................5-57
5.5.1.4. Clearing latched outputs ..................................................................5-58
5.5.2. Processing of measurements ..........................................................5-58
5.5.2.1. Displaying A/D converter channels ..................................................5-59
5.5.2.2. Displaying the process measurement values ..................................5-59
5.5.2.3. Displaying binary inputs, signal outputs, trip relays and LEDs ........5-61
5.5.2.4. Displaying remote analog or binary in-/outputs................................5-61
5.5.2.5. Displaying ITL in-/outputs ................................................................5-62
5.5.2.6. Displaying SCS outputs ...................................................................5-63
5.5.2.7. Displaying FUPLA signals................................................................5-63
5.5.3. Test function ....................................................................................5-65
5.5.3.1. Activating the protection functions ...................................................5-66
5.5.3.2. Activating trip outputs, signal outputs and LED outputs...................5-67
5.5.3.3. Activating the RBO outputs (Remote Binary Outputs) .....................5-68
5.5.3.4. Activating the analog outputs (remote output) .................................5-69
5.5.3.5. Event handling, measurement and diagnostic information ..............5-69
5.5.3.6. Parameter set switching...................................................................5-69
5.5.3.7. Toggling binary outputs....................................................................5-70
5.5.4. Diagnostics ......................................................................................5-71
5.5.5. Disturbance recorder .......................................................................5-72
5.6. Configurating CAP2/316 ..................................................................5-73

5.6.1. Changing the language....................................................................5-73
5.6.2. Changing the password ...................................................................5-74
5.6.3. Automatic deletion of the event list after a download.......................5-74
5.6.4. Downloading device firmware ..........................................................5-74
5.6.5. EA63 firmware download .................................................................5-75
5.6.6. Configurating the communications port ...........................................5-75
5.7. Help menu........................................................................................5-76

5.7.1. User Manual.....................................................................................5-76
5.7.2. RIO580/ LON/ MVB/ IEC60870-5-103 User Manual........................5-76
5.7.3. About CAP2/316 ..............................................................................5-76
5-2
5.8. Import / Export of data .....................................................................5-77

5.8.1. Importing files...................................................................................5-77
5.8.1.1. Loading MBA parameters (mbaXX.par)...........................................5-77
5.8.1.2. Loading RIO parameters (*.rio)........................................................5-77
5.8.2. Exporting files ..................................................................................5-78
5.8.2.1. SigTOOL (*.sig)................................................................................5-78
5.8.2.2. Saving RIO parameters (*.rio)..........................................................5-78
5.9. Operation with several sets of parameters ......................................5-79

5.9.1. Switching over a parameter set .......................................................5-79
5.9.2. Creating parameter sets ..................................................................5-80
5.9.2.1. Assigning a protection function to a parameter set..........................5-80
5.9.2.2. Copying a configured protection function.........................................5-81
5.9.2.3. Logic interconnection .......................................................................5-81
5.10. Local operation ................................................................................5-82

5.10.1. Summary..........................................................................................5-82
5.10.2. Limitations........................................................................................5-82
5.10.3. General description..........................................................................5-82
5.10.3.1. Mechanical assembly and front view ...............................................5-82
5.10.3.2. Electrical connection ........................................................................5-83
5.10.3.3. Password .........................................................................................5-83
5.10.3.4. Passive operation ............................................................................5-83
5.10.3.5. LDU keypad .....................................................................................5-84
5.10.4. The three status LEDs .....................................................................5-85
5.10.4.1. General ............................................................................................5-85
5.10.4.2. Starting the device ...........................................................................5-85
5.10.4.3. Protection functions inactive ............................................................5-85
5.10.4.4. Normal device operation ..................................................................5-86
5.10.4.5. Pick-up of a protection function (General start) ...............................5-86
5.10.4.6. Protection trip (General Trip) ...........................................................5-86
5.10.4.7. Fatal device error .............................................................................5-87
5.10.5. Text display (LCD) ...........................................................................5-87
5.10.5.1. General ............................................................................................5-87
5.10.5.2. Language .........................................................................................5-87
5.10.5.3. Interdependence ..............................................................................5-87
5.10.5.4. Configurability ..................................................................................5-87
5.10.6. Menu structure .................................................................................5-88
5.10.7. Entry menu.......................................................................................5-90
5.10.8. Main menu .......................................................................................5-90
5.10.8.1. Measurands .....................................................................................5-91
5.10.8.1.1. A/D Channels...................................................................................5-91
5.10.8.1.2. Function measurands ......................................................................5-92
5.10.8.1.3. Binary signals...................................................................................5-93
5.10.8.2. Event list ..........................................................................................5-96
5.10.8.3. Users guide .....................................................................................5-96
5.10.8.4. Disturbance recorder .......................................................................5-96
5.10.8.5. Diagnosis menu ...............................................................................5-97
5.10.8.5.1. Diagnosis Info ..................................................................................5-97
5.10.8.5.2. IBB-Status-Info.................................................................................5-98
5.10.8.5.3. Process bus info ..............................................................................5-98
5-3
5.10.8.5.4. LED Description ...............................................................................5-98

5.10.8.6. Reset-Menu .....................................................................................5-99
5.10.9. Automatic display...........................................................................5-100
5.10.9.1. General description........................................................................5-100
5.10.9.2. Starting the automatic display........................................................5-100
5.10.9.3. Stopping the automatic display ......................................................5-100
5.10.9.4. Automatic display cycle..................................................................5-100
5-4
5. OPERATION (CAP2/316)
5.1. Summary
The HMI program CAP2/316 has been designed to be largely self-
sufficient and requires a minimum of reference to the manual. This
approach achieves a number of advantages:
The same program can be utilized for both the RE.216 and the
RE.316*4 devices.
Functions can be selected from extremely user-friendly menus with
full screen displays and windows.
'Pop-up' prompts wherever practical to guide the user and avoid
errors, see Section 6.11.
Provision for creating, editing and checking parameter sets off-line,
i.e. without being connected to the protection device.
Provision for reading or writing parameter sets from and to files.
Self-explanatory texts using a minimum of mnemonic codes.
Provision for the user to enter customized descriptions for
functions, inputs and outputs.
The possibility to view and analyse event lists offline or online.
Copy Paste Windows functionality for configuration of comments.
Call up of HELP with the 'F1' key, for clarifications or aid to
problems - from help files stored in PDF format.
5-5
5.2. Installing and starting CAP2/316

5.2.1. PC requirements
Processor i486 / 50 MHz or higher
Operating system Windows XP / Windows 2000/
Windows NT 4.0
Hardware memory 128 MB
Free disk space 50 .. 500 MB
Interfaces 1 serial interface
USB with USB serial connector
PC Card with serial I/O converter
5.2.2. Installing CAP2/316
Start menu
Install the complete software packet on one disk.
Stop all other application programs and insert the installation CD into
the CD-ROM drive. The following start-up menu will pop up.
Fig. 5.1 Start menu of the installation CD
NOTICE: Ensure that the latest installation instructions are available.

You are recommended to go through the Readme.txt, which is stored
in the installation CD.
5-6
Installation of the CAP2/316

1. Stop all user programs, and insert the installation CD into the CD-
ROM drive
2. The start menu will pop-up automatically.
In case this does not happen select 'Start' and 'Execute' buttons. In
the 'Open' menu and with the 'Search' button, change the drive to
the CD-ROM and executeCD-Start.exe
3. When the next window pops-up execute 'Start Install'
4. Follow the installation instructions as displayed on the screen
regarding
Language, License contract, Registration and the destination
directory.
5. Select the installation sequence:
Fig. 5.2 Selection menu for start of the installation
5-7
6. When 'Customize' is selected the possibilities shown in the figure

below are available:
Fig. 5.3 Installation components
It is important, that the selected option boxes are checked. The

description on the right side displays the required amount of
storage space.
7. Select 'Next' and follow the instructions.
8. Once all inputs are completed the installation will begin
automatically.
NOTICE: All available options are displayed. This includes existing

installed CAP2/316 versions. If the box corresponding to the installed
versions were inadvertently crossed, this would lead to the
deinstallation of that version.
5-8
5.2.3. Starting the HMI

To start the HMI, click on the 'Start' icon at the bottom left hand corner
of your PC display, and select 'Program Files', 'ABB Industrial IT',
'Protect IT', 'RE..16', 'RE..16 Selector'.
Fig. 5.4 Window displayed on selection of RE..16 Selector
The selector searches all COM interfaces for a connected relay. If a

connected relay is found, then the corresponding CAP2/316 will be
started on-line, else the user can start one of the installed CAP2/316
off-line.
Fig. 5.5 CAP2/316 off-line
5-9
5.2.4. Starting and stopping CAP2/316

On clicking on the 'Continue' button the HMI is started with the
selected parameters.
Fig. 5.6 Window on start of the CAP2/316
5.2.4.1. Operating modes of the configuration program CAP2/316

The configuration program can be started in three modes.
off-line: If no device is connected at the start of the CAP2/316, it
starts off-line. Even if a device is connected, the user can
choose to start in off-line mode.
In this case the device type has to be selected in the box
'General Device'. Normally the RE.216 is pre-selected,
however, the RE.316 can be selected for configuring such a
device. See Section 5.2.4.2.
on-line If a device is connected then the CAP2/316 starts in the on-
line mode. One can switch from off-line to on-line mode (with
a connected device) by selecting 'Connect' from the
'Communication' menu. See Section 5.4.10.1.
If the program is started with a connected device, then the
software automatically selects the correct device type.
5-10
Demo If at startup 'Demo' is selected in the 'Communication' field,

then a virtual device with predefined configuration is
simulated. This mode permits configuration changes,
however this does not have any effect on the event list and
the measurand values.
The demo mode enables familiarisation with the CAP2/316
without requiring a connected device. For example, it is
possible to display the event list and measurand values of a
predefined device.
Fig. 5.7 Selection of the device type
5.2.4.2. Starting CAP2/316

As soon as the program starts select the mode of operation and the
device type, and click on the box 'Continue'.
Change from off-line to
Demo, or if a device is
connected , then from
on-line to off-line.
Select the device type
'Continue' starts the

configuration program
Fig. 5.8 Start the CAP2/316
The main program starts with the selected parameters, when

'Continue' is selected. If a device is connected, then at first all settings
are loaded into the main memory of the PC. This procedure lasts a
while. See Section 5.4.10.
The communication port number (1..4) and communication speed
(9600, 19200) can be selected by clicking on the button 'Setting'.
If accidentally the CAP2/316 is started without a connected device,
and then retroactively an appropriate device is connected, one can
execute 'Check on-line'. Thereby one has the possibility to switch to
5-11
the online mode without having to start the program once again. The
device type is selected automatically.
NOTICE: If the configuration program has to operate in the 'online'

mode with data exchange between the PC-HMI and the unit, ensure
that the serial data cable is connected. The connection is established
between the configured serial port of the PC-HMI and the fiber optical
connector on the device front. The device must be in operational
mode i.e. the green LED in on state or blinks.
If changing over the cable from one device to another, stop and
restart the CAP2/316 program, after the cable is re-connected.
If the device is not time synchronized via the IBB, and if the device is
so parameterized, then the CAP2/316 acquires the PC clock time.
5.2.4.3. Stopping CAP2/316

Similar to other Windows programs, stop the CAP2/316 from the pull-
down main menu 'File' 'Exit' or ALT-F4.
5-12
5.3. Operation
5.3.1. General
The HMI can be in one of four modes:
Menu: User can select a sub-menu item.
Operation: User can enter data, e.g. parameter settings,
confirmation of prompts, password etc.
Output: Display of measured variables, event lists etc.
Wait: This can occur in any one of the above states, while
a function is being executed (menu is blocked, other
programs can still execute, Multitasking feature of
Windows).
If a selection is made in the main menu or in the icon bar, a new
Window is opened. In this Window it is possble to select further sub-
menus. In order that a modification becomes effective, click on the
'OK' or 'Save to file' button. To discard changes click on the 'Cancel'
button.
NOTICE: If off-line changes are made and it is intended to load

these into the device, then these changes should be saved onto the
disk, before the connection to the device is established.
As soon as the device is connected the configuration in the device
is uploaded into the HMI (working memory).
The configuration or modifications made before are thereby
overwritten. If the previously made modifications are to be saved to
the device, these must be read in into the HMI after establishing
connection to the device, and then downloaded from the HMI to the
device. See Section 5.4.10.1.
If from sub-menus further sub-menus are opened, then the changes
will become active and taken over as the actual configuration if it is
confirmed with 'OK' in the topmost sub-menu.
5-13
5.3.2. Screen display

5.3.2.1. The status display
The following information is displayed in the lowermost frame of the
CAP2/316:
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
Fig. 5.9 Status Display
1) Help:
Information regarding the active menu item.
2) Software version of the CAP2/316
It is mandatory that this value corresponds to the version number
(x) in front of the dot and with the sub-version number (y) after the
dot. See item 3. below in the status line. (Example: x.yz; the
revision index is represented as a character (z)).
3) Software version of the device (CPU Firmware):
Provides information of the firmware-version of the device. To
guarantee an accurate communication between the device and the
PC, the firmware number of the device must correspond to the SW
version number of the CAP2/316 as described under point 2).
4) Provides information of the utilized communication protocol to the
substation automation system (SCS) resp. which type of firmware
is stored in the device:
'SPA', 'IEC103', 'LON' or 'MVB'.
5) Displays whether the configuration program is in the:
'on-line', 'off-line' or 'Demo' mode of operation.
6) Displays the active parameter set:
'Parset (14) '.
7) Displays the configured communication port 'COM (14) '.
8) Displays the active interface to the device:
The data displays which port is connected to the PC:
'TC57' = Communication is via the Frontend
'SPA' = Communication is via the interface at the rear.
9) Displays the relay type:
'REC316*4', 'REG316*4', 'REL316*4', or 'RET316*4'.
5-14
5.3.2.2. Main menu items and icons

From the main menu list or the icons bar the user can activate the
following
Main menu
Icon header
Fig. 5.10 Main menu items and icons
Main menu:
File: Open and save the settings,
open the event list
Import MBA and RIO parameters,
Export from SIGTool and RIO parameters
Printer configuration
End the configuration (HMI) program
View: Activate the toolbar or status bar

View Edit parameters
View the Reference values
Configuration: Create the relay configuration, the protection

functions and the station and bay name
The configuration menus can also be activated from
the icon bar.
Monitor: Event list:

Display, or, print all the events in the device event list
memory, or, clear the memory.
Clear latched outputs.
Measurements:
Display the variables of the protection system and the
process input values of the A/D converter.
Test-Functions:
Test the protection function of the parameter sets
Checking of the LEDs, tripping and signalling relays.
Diagnostics
All relevant information to analyse a fault.
Disturbance recorder:
Upload the DR file, if configured.
5-15
Communication: Connect or disconnect communication to the device.

Upload / download set files from / to the device. The
set files can also be cleared from the device.
Configuration of the communication only possible in
offline mode.
Options: Set the language or change the password.

Clear the event list after download of the set file.
Download 'Firmware' to the processor or the line
differential protection card 316EA63.
Help: Select the operation manual or other HW / SW

specific manuals.
Information about the license and SW version.
The above is valid for the 'on-line' mode. In the 'off-line' mode it is
possible to use the following menu items i.e. 'File', 'View',
'Configuration', 'Help' and some of the sub-menus in 'Options' and
'Monitor'.
NOTICE: The above mentioned menus, with the exception of

'Configuration', 'Options', 'Help', is meaningful only when the system
is in 'on-line' mode with active communication to the device. All
displays are an exact replica of the data in the device.
Icon list
The icon bar is activated in the 'View' menu by selection 'Toolbar'. This
facilitates a fast selection of the configuration menus.
Create a new set file. If the currently open set file is not
saved, it will be lost!.
Save the current set file. If the set file in the PC memory has
to be saved under a different file name, use the 'Save as'
sub-menu in the menu 'File'.
Create the device configuration. The hardware related device

configuration such as AD Converter, Binary channels,
Tripping channels, Signalling channels and the Software key.
5-16
Configuration of the system (In- /Output) parameters: The

system parameters concern those that are independent of
the functions. The significance of the parameters is
explained in Section 5.4.4 and Section 3.4.5.
Configuration of the parameter for the InterBayBus: This is

required for connection to the control system e.g. LON, SPA,
MVB. The description of the parameterisation is explained in
the respective documentation of the bus. Monitoring of the
IBB is possible in the pull down menu 'Monitor'
'Diagnostics' 'IBB Information' (see 'Help').
Configuration of the potection functions and selecting all

possible functions from the functions library.
Configuration of the PC COM interface

Communications port (COM 1...4) as well as the baud rate
(9600, 19200 baud). ABB recommends use of 9600 baud.
Call up the CAP2/316 short description.

When 'Help' is called up in the main menu, in addition to the
operating instructions, the complete description of the IBB is
available.
5-17
5.4. Step-by-step configuration of a device

This section guides you step-by-step the items to be configured so that
the configuration can be successfully downloaded into the device.
Start the CAP2/316 (see Section 5.2.4.2.).
5.4.1. Short introduction
It is mandatory that the following sequence is followed for the
configuration of the device:
Section(s)
1) Configure the relay 5.4.2.
2) Configure the binary inputs / outputs 5.4.2.1., 5.2.4.3.,
(comments and latching) 5.4.2.4., 5.4.2.5.
3) Configure the AD converter (Sec. Nom value, 5.4.2.6.
Reference value, Prim/Sec.-ratio,
Comments)
4) Configure the station- and bay name 5.4.3.
5) Configure system in- /outputs 5.4.4.
6) Configure the protection function 5.4.7.
7) Save the complete device configuration 5.4.9.1.
8) Download the configuration to the device 5.4.10.1.
5.4.2. Relay configuration

The relay identification code on the rear of the device is used for the
relay configuration. Information regarding the relay type and the relay
identification code are available in the Datasheet in Section 8. The
configuration menu of the individual cards is opened by clicking on the
'Edit' button by the side of the definition of each of the cards (s. Fig.
5.11).
A typical order code is shown below:
A1,B0,C5,D0,U1,K63,H2,E1,I3,F1,J3,Q0,V0,R0,W0,Y2,N1,M1,SR200.
5-18
The relay identification code is explained in detail in the data sheet.

Use this table to help in the configuration shown below:
Fig. 5.11 'Relay Configuration RE.316*4'
Nominal Frequency: Determines the rated frequency 50 Hz or 60

Hz.
A/D Converter: Defines the type of the A/D converter unit
(316VC61 or 316EA62/ 316EA63 for
longitudinal distance protection).
Slot Nr. 1 to Determines the type in- /output unit in
Slot Nr. 4: Slots 1 ... 4.
A/D Config K: Determines the predefined variant of the
converter unit.
SW Vers SX: The first part (letter code) of the software key.
SW Vers S.XXX: Second part (number) of the software key.
A major part of the configuration is achieved once the parameters
defined above A/D Config K and SW Vers are configured.
When the 'A/D Config K' parameter is configured, the predefined
values as per the connection diagram in Chapter 12 are loaded. The
converter 'Sec.nom.value' has to be configured in addition. This is
explained in Section 5.4.2.6.
With the SW Vers, licensed protection functions are available from the
software library. The SW Vers (SW key) configured in the CAP2/316
must tally with the software key in the device. If this is not the case,
then it will not be possible to download the configuration to the device.
There are a few more parameters to be configured and comments to
be defined for the In / Output cards as per the Sections 5.4.2.1. to
5.4.2.6.
5-19
5.4.2.1. Binary input card 316DB6x

The following window opens on clicking the 'Edit' button next to the
316DB6x (slot Nr. 14) card in the 'Relay Configuration' menu:
Binary inputs are not

Channel number displayed in the event list Comments of binary inputs
Fig. 5.12 Configuration window for the binary input events
The comments for the binary inputs can be configured in this window,
for display in the event list. A check in the box next to the comments
supresses display in the event list.
5-20
5.4.2.2. Double indication

By clicking on the folder 'Double Indication' it is possible to define up to
30 double indications.
1st select double indication Run time 2nd input is selected
channel supervision automatically
Fig. 5.13 Configuration of 'Double indication'
When a double signal is configured, then a change of state of one of

two consecutive binary signals results in a display in the event list. On
configuring the first binary input the second consecutive binary input is
automatically configured as the second input of the double indication.
The parameter 'Runtime supervision' enables or disables the runtime
supervision for each double indication.
What is the runtime supervision:

Double signals are needed to unequivocally determine the status
(position) of switchgears. For this purpose, the two signals detecting
the end positions of the switch are connected to two consecutive
inputs and form a 'double indication'. Double indications are presented
in a somewhat different form in the event list. Instead of 'on' or 'off', the
signals are listed as '0-0', '0-1', '1-0' or '1-1', whereby '0-1' means that
the switch is closed and '1-0' that it is open. The switch is moving
when the signals produce '0-0', while the combination '1-1' should not
occur at all in normal operation.
5-21
The event '0-0' only signifies a transitory status while the switch (CB or
isolator) is actually moving. Providing everything is functioning
normally this signal is less interesting and therefore can be
suppressed. Should on the other hand, the switch stick in an
intermediate position, this signal becomes very important. The runtime
supervision enables these two conditions to be distinguished. It can be
set independently for each double indication and is active for a setting
other than zero. The event '0-0' is thus initially suppressed and
remains so, as long as the switch reaches either its open or closed
limit position before the end of the runtime supervision setting. This
prevents the event list from becoming filled up with unnecessary data.
The '0-0' event is subsequently displayed in the event list, should a
switch not reach its end position within the specified time. The time
stamp corresponds to the start of the switch movement.
The status '1-1' is never suppressed even during the period of the
runtime and appears in the event list immediately. This status indicates
that the switch is 'Open' or 'Closed' simultaneously. This impossible
situation is reported as a fault of the switch feedback.
The configuration of the double indication for the remote in- /output
system RIO580 is described in the respective documentation.
Timer data:
Min. setting: 0.0 s
Max. setting: 60.0 s
Increments: 0.1 s
Default setting: 0.0 s (i.e. runtime disabled)
5-22
5.4.2.3. Signal outputs of the card 316DB6x

Two outputs are available: Optical LED outputs on the frontend of the
relay (see Section 5.10.8.5.4.) or signalling relay contacts.
Latched signal output Comment of the signal outputs
Fig. 5.14 Selection window for the 'Signal Outputs'
The comments of the signal outputs document and provide a better

overview of the configuration of the device as supplemental
information for the signal in the event list.
Latched outputs can be reset when they are acknowledged with the
binary input 'ExtReset', from the local interface (LDU), or from the
CAP2/316 in the main menu 'Monitor' and sub-menus 'Event Handling'
'Clear latched outputs' (see Section 5.10.8.6.).
5-23
5.4.2.4. Tripping relay outputs of the card 316DB6x

A tripping output matrix can be created from the OUTPUT-command of
the various protection functions or by the combination of output
channels (see Section 5.4.7.5.):
Comments of the trip latched output
Latched tripping output in the output-matrix
Fig. 5.15 Configuration window of the 'Trip Out Latched'
The in-/output cards 316DB61 and 316DB62 have two 'Trip Out
Latched' intermediate relays. The 316DB63 output card does not have
this functionality.
The comments of the 'Trip Out Latched' serve the purpose of
documentation of this output. This is then displayed in the tripping
matrix of the function.
The 'Trip Out Latched' outputs can be reset when they are
acknowledged with the binary input 'ExtReset', from the local interface
(LDU), or from the CAP2/316 in the main menu 'Monitor' and sub-
menus 'Event Handling' 'Clear latched outputs' (see Section 5.10.8.6.).
NOTICE: The 'OUTPUT' command of a function sets the 'General

Trip' combination signal only if the tripping matrix is configured and
the event recorder is parametrized.
An exception is the distance function, for which the 'General Trip'
combined OR signal is always set.
5-24
5.4.2.5. Light emitting diodes (LED)

A maximum of 2 8 'LEDs' can be parameterized. If only one slot of
the 316DB6x is populated than only 8 LEDs can be used on the front
end of the device (LED 1 ... 8). The LEDs channels 9 ... 16 can be
utilized if the 2nd slot of the device is also populated. The slots 3 and 4
cannot control the LEDs.
Latching LED Comments of the LEDs
Fig. 5.16 Configuration window for the 'Signal LEDs'
NOTICE: The first channel (green LED 1) is reserved for the function
READY display and therefore cannot be configured for other puposes.
The second channel (red LED 2) is mainly utilized for displaying a
TRIP activation.
The remaining 3..16 channels are yellow LEDs.
Latched LED outputs can be reset when they are acknowledged with
the binary input 'ExtReset', from the local interface (LDU), or from the
CAP2/316 in the main menu 'Monitor' and sub-menus 'Event
Handling' 'Clear latched outputs' (see Section 5.10.8.6.).
In contrast to the signalling and trip output relays, the LEDs are also
latched when the power to the device is switched OFF and then ON.
5-25
5.4.2.6. Analog Digital converter

On clicking the 'Edit' button next to the 'A/D Config K' the following
window is displayed (see Section 5.4.2.):
Fig. 5.17 Configuration of the A/D converter
In sub-menu 'Configuration Transformers RE.316' the following pa-

rameters can be configured which are described in detail in Section
3.4.2.
Modify channel type:
When in the relay configuration the
Parameter 'A/D Config K' is set to
K = 00 or K 80, then for each analog
channel the converter type can be
selected. Three phase converter can
only be selected for channels 1...3, 4...6
or 7...9. Normally the relay is pre-
configured with the 'A/D Config K' and
therefore need not be reconfigured.
Fig. 5.18 Configuration channel type with K=00
Prim/Sec ratio:
This value is required for the IEC60870-5-103-protocol, for the
display of the measurand values in the sub-menu 'Monitor' of the
'Main menu', and for the signal display in the evaluation program
'E_Wineve'. For three phase A/D converters this value is valid for
all three phases simultaneously.
5-26
Sec.nom.val:
Configure the nominal rated value of the current and voltage
transformer. For three phase A/D converters this value is valid for
all three phases simultaneously.
Ref. value:
With the reference value the relay nominal rated value can be
adapted to the primary equipment nominal value. For three phase
A / D converters this value is valid for all three phases
simultaneously.
Comments:
Comments up to 25 characters can be configured for each
channel.
5-27
5.4.3. Station and bay name

The station and bay name for a
device can be configured. This is
displayed on the topmost line of the
CAP2/316 display, along with the file
name. Up to 12 characters can be
used for each name. This can be
configured by selecting the menu
'Configuration', 'Station Name_Bay
name'.
Fig. 5.19 Station and bay name configuration
The station- and bayname is also displayed on the local control unit
(LDU) if one is utilized.
5.4.4. System I/O
The most important parameters, which are utilized as an ABB
standard, are presented here.
For details regarding the system parameters see Section 3.4.5.
To access the system parameters select 'Configuration' and then
'System Parameters'.
LED Sig Mode = ResetSigAll
Relay Ready = depending on the

application configure a signalling
relay binary output. Per default
the signalling relay Nr. 6 is
configured, as this has a N/O,
N/C contact.
General Trip = LED 2 (red LED)
Ext Reset = depending on the
application connect to an
external input, for resetting the
latched outputs.
Fig. 5.20 System parameter
5-28
5.4.5. Configuring binary outputs

A binary output can be configured with 'Edit' in the 'System
Parameters' menu or as an output of a protection function.
Two physical output sinks can be configured per source (e.g. output of
a function). The listing in the event recording, signal transmission to
the substation automation system 'SCS', signal to a remote I/O
'Remote Binary Output' (RBO), as also the 'Interlocking Data' signal to
ITL do not count as physical outputs. Therefore these can be used in
addition to both physical sinks (see Section 5.4.5.3.). If an attempt is
made to utilize more than two physical sinks, then further assignments
are not possible.
Typical sources are
Outputs from system parameters such as 'Relay Ready', 'Modem
Error' etc.
Output from a protection function (e.g. 'Start Overcurrent')
Physical sinks are

Signal LEDs
Signal relays
Trip relays
Other sinks are:
Event recorder / event list
Signal transmission to the SCS (Substation Automation System),
RBO (Remote Binary Output), ITL (Interlocking data)
Source Sink Nr. 1

physical Sinks
Sink Nr. 2
Each 1x ER, SCS, RBO,

ITL
Fig. 5.21 Definition of the source binary outputs
NOTICE: Use the trip matrix if more than two sinks are required per
source. Normally the trip matrix is utilized for trip signals. (see Section
5.4.7.5). The 'General Start' and 'General Trip' are available in
duplicate.
5-29
5.4.5.1. Signal LED

On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source card and the folder
'Signal LEDs' the following window is displayed:
Slot Channel number of Allocation of the signal LED
the signal LED
Fig. 5.22 Signal LED
Comment text if defined for the inputs and outputs are displayed. A tick
in the box enables the selection of the text. Select the second slot to
configure the signal LEDs in this slot.
If the allocation is made for an output and confirmed with 'OK', then in
the box next to the 'Edit' button the following text will be displayed:
Lx: L = LED on the front of the relay
x = LED channel number 1 ... 16
Example: L02, (signal LED, channel 02)
NOTICE: The first channel (green LED 1) is reserved for the function
READY display, and, hence cannot be used. If a channel is already
utilized, it is displayed in grey, and cannot be selected
The second channel (red LED 2) is mainly utilized for displaying a
TRIP activation.
(Parameterization of the 'General Trip' see Section 5.4.4.)
The channels 8 to 16 on the relay front can only be configured if the
second slot is populated.
Slots 3 and 4 cannot control LEDs.
5-30
5.4.5.2. Signal relays

On selecting the 'Edit' button next to a source, and on selecting the
folder 'Signal Relays' the following window is displayed:
Slot Channel number for Allocation of the signalling
the signalling relays relays
Fig. 5.23 Signal relays
Comment text if defined for the inputs and outputs are displayed. A tick
in the box enables the selection of the text. Select the second slot to
configure the signal LEDs in this slot.
An allocated channel is shown as a grey block, and cannot be reused.
If the allocation is made for an output and confirmed with 'OK', then in
the box next to the 'Edit' button the following text will be displayed:
Sxyy: S = Signal relay
x = Slot number (1 ... 4)
yy = Channel number (1 ... 10)
Example: S106, (signal relay, channel 06)
5-31
5.4.5.3. Event recording

folder 'Event Recording' the following window is displayed:
Event recording On / Off
Fig. 5.24 Event recording
If the event recording is activated with 'On' and 'OK', then an 'ER' is
displayed in the field next to the 'Edit' button.
NOTICE: The 'Start' message of a function sets the 'General Start'

message only if the 'Event Recording' is parameterized.
The distance function is an exception whereby the start signal 'Start
R+S+T' is always displayed as an event and results in the 'General
Start' combined signal.
In the case of the differential protection function, the 'Start' signal is
displayed in the 'General start' when the 'Event Recording' is
parameterized.
NOTICE: A 'Start' command from a function sets the 'General Start'

message only if the trip matrix is configured and the 'Start' message is
parameterized in the 'Event Recording'.
The distance function is an exception whereby the 'General Start'
signal is always configured.
5-32
NOTICE: A 'Start' measurement value from a function is displayed

in the event recorder only when the 'Start' message is parameterized
in the 'Event Recording'.
5.4.5.4. Trip indication relays

folder 'Trip Relays' the following window is displayed:
Selection of slot Channel number Allocation of the trip relay
for the trip relay
Fig. 5.25 'Trip Relay' indication
The allocation of a source of a trip relay is similar to that of the

indication relay see Section 5.4.5.2.
Once the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the field next to the
'Edit' button will have the following text:
Cxyy: C = Trip relay
x = Slot number (1 ... 4)
yy = Channel number (01 ... 02)
Example: C101, (trip relay Slot 1, Channel 01)
NOTICE: Trip Relays can also be utilized for Indication. In general

the Trip Relay is used for the Trip Matrix to activate the protection
function (see Fig. 5.40). It is possible to use an OR function for the trip
and the trip relay indication. Thereby the trip relay can be activated by
an indication output or from the tripping matrix.
5-33
5.4.5.5. Signal to SCS (Substation Automation System)

folder 'Signal to SCS' the following window is displayed:
SCS group selection SCS data point Allocation of 'Signal to SCS'
Fig. 5.26 'Signal to SCS'
Select the group from which the signal is to sent to the SCS (Station
Control System = Substation automation system). The SCS groups
1c 24c are used for transmitting short signals to the MVB
interbaybus (signal capturing).
If a channel is already selected then it is displayed in grey and cannot
be allocated again.
SCxxyy: SC = SCS signal
xx = number of the SCS group (1 ... 24)
yy = data point within a group (01 ... 32)
(*) = (c) signal capturing, ( ) no signal capturing
Example: SC503, (SCS group 5, data point 03)
5-34
5.4.5.6. Signal to RBO (Remote input output system)

folder 'Signal to RBO' the following window is displayed:
RBO Group = Output relay within the Allocation to Utilized
module address module 'Signal to RBO' output
Fig. 5.27 'Signal to RBO'
To allocate a signal to a RBO (Remote Binary Output) select the

device (RBO-Grp xx).
If the channel has already been allocated, then it cannot be selcted
once again, the field is displayed in gray.
RBOxxyy: RBO = RBO signal
xx = module address (1 ... 80)
yy = output relay within a module (01 ... 16)
Example:
RBO302, (output module with the address 3, output relay 02)
5-35
5.4.5.7. Signal to ITL (Interlocking)

folder 'Signal to ITL' the following window is displayed:
ITL Group Signal number Allocation of the Utilized Signal
Signal to ITL
Fig. 5.28 Signal to ITL
An interlocking telegram comprises 48 signals. These are grouped

in the ITL-Grp 1 the signals 1 to 16,
in the ITL-Grp 2 the signals 17 to 32 and
in the ITL-Grp 3 the signals 33 to 48.
ITLxx: ITL = ITL signal
xx = signal number (1 ... 48).
Example: ITL1, (ITL signal 1)
5-36
5.4.6. Configuring binary inputs

A binary input can be configured by selecting a pushbutton in the
'System Parameters' or in a protection function.
Click on the respective button
Fig. 5.29 Example: Configuration of a binary input
Each binary input can be allocated to many sinks. However one sink
can have only one source.
Typical sources are:
Signal from SCS (Substation Automation System), RBI (Remote
Binary Input), ITL (Interlocking data)
Output from a system parameter e.g. 'Relay Ready',
'Modem Error' etc. (similar to a protection function)
Output of a protection function (e.g. 'Start Overcurrent')
Predefined values (Always ON, Always OFF)
Binary inputs acquired via Opto-coupler inputs
Typical sinks are:

Input from a function (e.g. Blocking 'Under frequency' with 'Breaker
Open')
Inputs from system parameters e.g. 'Ext Reset'
Source Sink Nr. 1
Sink Nr. 2
Sink Nr. xx
Fig. 5.30 Definition of source sink binary inputs
5-37
5.4.6.1. TRUE / FALSE

By clicking on the selector button next to a source, and then selecting
the folder 'TRUE/FALSE' the following window is displayed:
Binary input 'Always FALSE'
Fig. 5.31 TRUE / FALSE
The binary input of a function can be set to ON (logical 1) or OFF

(logical 0). This allocation can be performed by clicking on the 'Edit'
button next to the binary input and selecting the 'TRUE/FALSE' folder.
Always ON ('1') or
Always OFF ('0')
NOTICE: The default value for all inputs is 'Always OFF'. If a

particular input is no longer used it should be set to 'Always OFF'.
5-38
5.4.6.2. Inputs via optocoupler (binary inputs)

the folder 'Binary Inputs' the following window is displayed:
Selection of slot Input Allocation of Inversion input
channel- optocoupler channel signal
number
Fig. 5.32 Binary input
Each input to a function can be allocated to a normal or inverted

system binary input (optocoupler input). The allocation is done in the
folder of the programable binary input of a function. The allocation is
done by clicking on the button of the programable input of a function.
In the menu 'Binary inputs' select the slot number and then the desired
channel number. By clicking on the 'Inv.' box the input to the function
will be inverted.
Comments if configured for this input will be displayed.
If the allocation is confirmed with 'OK', then the button next to the input
will display the follwing text:
(*) Slot x / y: (*) = (-) Inverted, ( ) normal input
x = Card / slot number (1 ... 4)
y = Optocoupler input channel number (1 ... 10)
Cancel the channel selection by configuring the 'TRUE / FALSE' (see
Section 5.4.6.1.).
5-39
5.4.6.3. Output from a protection function

the folder 'Output from Function' the following window is displayed:
Select the function Allocation of the Inversion of the Signal
function output function output name
Fig. 5.33 Output from a protection function
Each function input can be allocated as normal or inverted to an output

of a protection function. The allocation is done in the folder of the
programable binary input of a function. The allocation is done by
clicking on the button of the programable input of a function. In the
menu 'Binary inputs' select the folder 'Output from function' and the
channel number. By clicking on the 'Inv.' box the input to the function
will be inverted and sent to the output.
Comments provides the association of the signal output to the function
(e.g. Trip, Start of function etc.)
(*) f x y: (*) = (-) inverted, ( ) normal input
x = function number (0 ... 48) or IBB
y = signal name (Start, Trip ... )

Section 5.4.6.1.).
5-40
5.4.6.4. Inputs from SCS (Substation automation system)

the folder 'Inputs from SCS' the following window is displayed:
SCS group Signal input Allocation of the Inversion of input
selection channel number signal from SCS from function
Fig. 5.34 Input from SCS
Each function input can be allocated a normal or inverted input from

the SCS. The allocation is done in the folder of the programmable
binary input of a function. The allocation is done by clicking on the
button of the programmable input of a function. In the 'Select Binary
Input' window select the folder 'Input from SCS' select the 'SCS Grp
Nr.' and the channel number within this group. By clicking on the 'Inv.'
box the input will be inverted and transmitted to the input of the
function.
(*) SCS xx / yy: (*) = (-) inverted, ( ) normal input
xx = number of the SCS group (1 ... 24)
yy = channel number within a SCS group (01 ... 32)
Section 5.4.6.1.).
5-41
5.4.6.5. Inputs from RBI (Remote input output system)

the folder 'Inputs from RBIs' (Remote Binary Input) the following
window is displayed:
RBI Group = Signal input Allocation of the Inversion of the
module channel number input from the RBI input to the Function
address
Fig. 5.35 Input from RBI

the RBI. The allocation is in a manner similar to that for the SCS input
(see Section 5.4.6.4.).
(*) RBI xx / yy: (*) = (-) inverted, ( ) normal input

xx = module address (1 ... 80)
yy = input number of the device (01 ... 19)
Section 5.4.6.1.).
NOTICE: The inputs 17, 18 and 19 deliver special information.
Input 17: A value of 1 denotes that the device is transmitting and

receiving data ('Device connected').
Input 18: A value of 1 denotes Channel A of the device is defective
('Line A defect').
Input 19: A value of 1 denotes Channel B of the device is defective
('Line B defect').
5-42
5.4.6.6. Inputs from ITL (Interlocking data)

the folder 'Inputs from ITL' (Interlocking data) the following window is
displayed:
ITL Group = Field Output channel Allocation to the Inversion of the
device address input from ITL input
Fig. 5.36 Input from ITL data

the ITL data. The allocation in a manner similar to that for the SCS
input (see Section 5.4.6.4.).
(*) ITL xx / yy: (*) = (-) inverted, ( ) normal input
xx = address of the source signal from the field
device (1 ... 64)
yy = signal number (1 ... 49)
Section 5.4.6.1.).
NOTICE: The Input Number 49 Signal, provides the information

whether the device is active (Signal is 1) or not (Signal is 0).
5-43
5.4.7. Configuring protection functions

5.4.7.1. Protection functions in the library and active functions
Function library Function list in device
5)
4)
6)
7)
9) 2) 3) 1) 8)
Fig. 5.37 Function library and active functions
To open the 'Select Protection Function' sub-menu, select

'Configuration' in the main menu, and then 'Protection Functions' from
the pull down menu.
Function library
As described in Section 5.4.2, as per the SW Vers Sx.xxx as well as
the configured relay identification, the respective protection functions
can be loaded into the device. These are displayed in the function
library on the left hand side of the 'Select Protection Function' window.
The scope of the functions in the function library is dependant on the
Software key (SW Vers Sx.xxx).
List of functions in the device

On the right side of the 'Select Protection Function' window the
functions which are stored in the device are displayed.
Legend
1) Configured functions with the ANSI code and the corressponding
symbol.
2) A green button next to the right of the ANSI code indicates that the
minimal requirements of the function have been configured. If the
5-44
button is red, then the function is not correctly configured and

therefore cannot be activated.
3) The number between the button and the function is the function
number. This is utilized for the allocation of the output from the
function (see Section 5.4.6.3.).
4) For each of the functions a short description of the function is
provided. The ANSI code of the function is provided before the
desription. The ANSI code represents the exact meaning and
functionality of the protection function, and overrides the text
description / clarification.
5) This provides an overview of the function configured for the various
parameter sets, which can be defined by item 6) below.
6) A tick in the P1..4 box indicates if the function is configured for the
respective parameter set (see Section 5.9.2.1.).
7) Displays from which function this particular function has been
copied. The A/D converter, the trip signal card and the signal
outputs cannot be changed (see Section 5.4.7.2.).
8) The bar display and the numeric value provide information of the
capacity utilization of the CPU by the currently configured
protection functions in the device.
9) The protection functions in the device can be further added from
the function library with the 'drag and drop' method (see Section
5.4.7.2.).
5.4.7.2. Inserting a function
In order to insert a new function from the function library into the
device configuration, select the function with the left mouse button,
and drag it across to the device configuration side with the button
pressed, and then drop it by releasing the button. The function is
added to the end of the list. In case the new function is to be placed in
a empty place ('No Func'), drag the function to this placeholder and
then drop it. In order to replace an existing function with a new
function, the old function has to be first deleted which results in a 'No
Func', if it is not the last function in the device.
If a particular function placeholder has to be left free then insert a 'No
Func' in this spot from the library.
5.4.7.3. Deleting a function

An activated function can de deleted, by selecting
this with the left mouse button. Then press the right
mouse for the pop-up menu and select 'Delete'.
Fig. 5.38 Deleting a function
5-45
5.4.7.4. Copying a function

If the configuration of a parametrized function has be reutilized to a
large extent in a second parameter set, then this function can be
copied.
The new copied function inherits all the configuration of the original
function. In the new copied function the following parameters cannot
be changed:
all analog inputs
all signalling outputs
all trip output channels
If these parameters are changed in the original function, then these
are automatically changed in the copied function.
The configuration of the binary input and the parameter 'ParSet1...4''
has to be configured once again in the copied function. The source of
the binary inputs must be active in the same parameter set as that of
the copied function. The copied function cannot be active in the same
parameter set as the original function, and the parameter set of the
copied must be greater than that of the original:
P1 pO P4 and pO < pK P4
pO = parameter set number of the original function
pK = parameter set number of the copied function
If copies of a function exist, the original function cannot be deleted
(see Section.5.9.2.2.).
5-46
5.4.7.5. Configuring a function

To configure a function double click with the left mouse button on the
function or position the mouse pointer on the desired function, click the
right mouse button and select 'Properties' from the pop-up menu (as
described in Section 5.4.7.3).
Example: Configuration of a current function.
7)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Fig. 5.39 Configuration of a function
The configuration and setting of the parameters are not explained

here. This is explained in detail in Chapter 3. The configuration
guidelines and a description of the function can be called up by
pressing the 'F1' key. A prerequisite is that during the installation of the
configuration program the complete operating instructions should also
be installed (see Section 5.2.2.).
1) In the case of a RE.316*4 device the default value for 'Run On
CPU' is CPU-1, as the device has only one CPU.
2) The trip channels can be configured by clicking on the button next
to the trip. The trip channel matrix will be displayed, which are
configured with a tick mark. When the mouse is moved near the
selected trip matrix, as described in Section 5.4.2.4 below, the
configured description of the trip channel is displayed. A grey
background indicates that the trip channels are configured for
another protection function. Click on the button 'OK' to activate the
configuration. In the box next to the 'Trip' the text 'Select' will be
displayed, to indicate that the trip channel has been configured. An
empty text field i.e. '.......' indicates the trip channel is not
configured.
5-47
Function Function Configured Comments for Trip channel

number type trip channels the trip matrix
channel
Fig. 5.40 Trip signals as per the trip matrix
Notice : ABB recommends that the trip channels are configured via
the trip channel matrix. This facilitates the simultaneous activation of
the trip channel from different protection functions.
NOTICE: A 'Trip' command from a function activates the combined

'General trip' signal only if the trip matrix is configured and the 'Trip'
signal is parametrized for the event logger (ER) display.
An exception is the distance function, for which the 'General trip'
combined signal is always set.
3) The function parameters are defined in detail in Chapter 3.

4) In the current channel (voltage channel) the A/D channels utilized
by the function are configured. If the particular protection function
is a three phase function, then only a three-phase input A/D
channel can be configured. It is sufficient to configure only the first
of the three consecutive phases with a tickmark. If a single phase
function has to be configured then any one of the three phases can
be configured. If the configuration is activated with 'OK' then a
numerical value is displayed in the box next to the A/D converter
channel. Otherwise '.......' is displayed indicating that the A/D
converter is not yet configured.
5-48
Fig. 5.41 A/D converter channels
5) The function can be blocked by an output from another function or

by a binary input (see Section 5.4.6.).
6) If the function is triggered or started, the start or trip can be output
as a binary output (see Section 5.4.5.).
7) The trip characteristic of the actual function is displayed.
5-49
5.4.8. Listing the settings

5.4.8.1. Displaying the parameters
All the settings of a specific group of settings can be displayed on the
screen, printed or saved to a file. These possibilities are shown in the
Fig. 5.42 below.
The menu shown below can be called up from the main menu 'View'
and 'View Edit Parameters'.
Selection of a Display of the Printing of the Save as file
group selected group parameters
Fig. 5.42 Display of the parameters
The desired display of the parameter can be selected by the mouse,

which is displayed on the screen. The selected view can be printed on
the installed printer by clicking on the button 'Print'.
If it is desired to import the parameters into a document editor, the
data can be stored in *.rtf-Format (rich text file) file by clicking on
'Save to file'.
5-50
5.4.8.2. Displaying the reference value of analog and process

measurements
In the top menu under the pulldown menu 'View' select 'View
Reference values' to view all analog reference values and
measurement values from the protection functions. The format of the
measurand values are also displayed (Integer, Complex etc.) The
nominal value can be used for the calculation of the conversion scale
for the input values of the disturbance recorder. See Chapter 3,
Configuration of the disturbance recorder function.
Nominal value Reference value
Analog channel analog channel analog channel
Measurand Legend Meas Format Description

format nominal measurand measurand
measurand value
Fig. 5.43 Reference value
5.4.9. Saving and loading the configuration from a file

The saving and loading of a configuration is similar to other programs
that run in a Windows environment. In order to save or open a file, a
disk drive with directories has to selected or installed.
NOTICE: In general the modifications done to the configuration are

in the working memory of the CAP2/316. Before downloading a
configuration into the RE..16 device it is recommended to store the
configuration onto a harddisk or diskette to prevent overwriting with
subsequent changes, unless the CAP2/316 is connected to the device
and is 'on-line' mode.
5-51
5.4.9.1. Saving the configuration to a file

The configuration can be saved from the main menu 'File' and from the
pulldown menu 'Save'. If the file has to saved under a different name
us 'Save As'. When the configuration is saved two files are created,
which are in machine code and utilized by the configuration program.
The files have the ending '.asc' and '.set'.
5.4.9.2. Loading a saved configuration from a file
If the configuration is to be downloaded into a device, in the main
menu in the folder 'File' select 'Open' 'Set File' and select the set file.
The configuration is in the main memory of the computer. To load it
and to store into the device follow the instructions described in Section
5.4.10.1.
NOTICE: In the PC-HMI all configuration saved with the DOS-

Version from V5.0 upwards, can be opened with the configuration
program CAP2/316.
5.4.10. Down-/uploading a configuration from the device

To be able to communicate with the device ensure that the PC is
connected to the device with the serial cable provided for this purpose.
The connection from the PC is via a serial port (RS232) or an USB
port, connecting to the optical connector on the front end of the device.
The device must be operational i.e. the green LED should be ON
indicating that a valid configuration is stored in the device, or blinking
indicating that the device is not yet configured.
5.4.10.1. Uploading a configuration from the device
If the PC-HMI is connected to the device when starting the CAP2/316
the configuration in the device is automatically uploaded to the
CAP2/316 (see Section 5.2.4.2). If the CAP2/316 has already been
opened, it can be in one of two states described below (no
communication is possible with the device in 'Demo' mode.):
on-line
In the on-line state of the CAP2/316 the configuration can be uploaded
from the device into the working memory of the CAP2/316 by selecting
'Communication' and then the sub-menu 'Setfile Upload from RE..16'.
off-line
If the PC is connected to the device as described above and if the
CAP2/316 is in the off-line mode, then establish communication with
the device by selecting 'Communication' in the main menu and then
the sub-menu 'Connect'. Now the active configuration in the device will
be automatically uploaded to the CAP2/316.
5-52
Display during the upload of the configuration

If the configuration program was
initially in the off-line state, this
warning message is displayed before
the configuration is uploaded from the
device to the CAP2/316.
Fig. 5.44 Warning message before upload of the configuration
The time required for the

upload of the configuration
from the device is dependant
on the baud rate.
Fig. 5.45 Display during upload of the device configuration
At the end of the upload the display to

the left confirms that the upload from
the device has been succesfully
concluded. The window can be closed
by clicking on the 'OK' button.
Fig. 5.46 Completion of the upload from the device
If the configuration has been downloaded from the same PC to the

device, then the upload from the device is not executed (see Fig. 5.45)
and the confirmation (see Fig. 5.46) displayed is 'Upload from relay
finished'. In this case the configuration is taken from the '*.dat' file, as
long as the device identification and the time stamp in the file is
identical to that stored in the device.
If the configuration program was initially

in the off- line state, then at the end of
the upload, the window on the left side is
displayed, which can be closed by
clicking on the 'OK' button.
Fig. 5.47 Device connected
5-53
5.4.10.2. Downloading a configuration to the device

To download the configuration in the working memory of the CAP2/316
to the device, select 'Communication' in the main menu and then the
sub-menu 'Setfile Download to RE..16'. The password dialog box will
be displayed, see Section 5.6.2. Per default no password is set.
Subsequently the configuration is downloaded to the device.
Display during download of the configuration

The download time of the
configuration to the device is
dependant on the baud rate
of the communication link.
Fig. 5.48 Display during download of the configuration
To be certain that the configuration is

downloaded into the device the
popwindow shown on the left is
displayed, which is closed by clicking on
the 'OK' button.
Fig. 5.49 End of the configuration download
5.5. Monitor menu

The monitor menu is meaningful only in
the on-line mode. In the off-line mode
the event list can be read from the saved
binary file (*.ebn). If the event list is
stored as an ASCII file (*.evt), it can be
opened from the menu 'File' 'Open'
'Event ASCII-File'.
Fig. 5.50 Display menu
5-54
5.5.1. Event handling

The events can be displayed in two
different modes. The two sub-menus in
the pull down menu of 'Monitor' 'Event
Handling' are 'Display Current Events'
and 'List Event List'. In addition the
event list and latched outputs can be
cleared.
Fig. 5.51 Overview of the 'Event Handling' menu
5.5.1.1. Displaying new events

Event No time Function State of the
number Date synch. description signal
Exit Time Function Signal comment, Scrollbar

number I/O
Fig. 5.52 Display a new event list
In this display mode the PC acquires the latest events from the device.
All existent events are displayed with absolute time, and in sequence
in which they are created. The events are displayed once, in short
when the display is closed and reopened events from the previous
display are not shown, only the latest created events are displayed.
5-55
The events can be printed on the configured printer when the 'Print'
button is actuated. The events can be stored as an ASCII file (*.evt), if
the 'Save as ASCII' button is actuated. Detailed instructions are
provided in Section 5.5.1.2.
5.5.1.2. List of the events

Event No time Function description State of the
nimber Date synch. signal
Exit Time Function Signal comment, Scrollbar

number I/O
Fig. 5.53 Listing of the events in the device event list buffer
In this display mode the entire event storage buffer is displayed (255
events).
If the signal 'General Start Signal' is received, then the subsequent
events are diplayed with relative time to this signal, otherwise an
absolute time is displayed. The display can be called up repeatedly,
until it is deleted.
With the keys '', '', 'PgUp', 'PgDn' and the 'Scrollbar' one can move
one line up / down or a complete page. Hitting the 'Home' or 'End' key
moves the cursor to the start or end of the event list.
To display the relative time of events subsequent to a particular event,
double click with the mouse on that particular event line.
In both types of display an invalid time stamp is marked with a 'T'
between the time stamp and the function number. An invalid time
stamp occurs due to loss of the time synchronisation signal on the
Inter Bay Bus. If a device is not connected to an IBB then on loss of
upply power all events are marked as invalid, until the device is
5-56
connected to a PC running the CAP2/316. The device is then

synchronized with the PC system time.
The event list can be saved as files for further analysis in the off-line
mode. The files can be saved in two formats:
a) Save as ASCII file (.evt-file extension)
If the events are saved as an ASCII file, it can be opened and edited
with any word processor. It is also possible to open the file with the
CAP2/316 in the off-line mode and if necessary printed. The *.evt file
can be opened from the main menu 'File', 'Open', 'Event ASCII File'.
b) Save as binary file (.ebn-file extension)
If the event list is stored as a binary file *.ebn then it can only be
opened in the off-line mode with the CAP2/316 program. To open the
file, select in the main menu 'Monitor', 'Event Handling' and then 'List
Event List'. It is possible to save the events in ASCII format to facilitate
processing with a word processor program as described above.
5.5.1.3. Clearing the event list
To delete the event list

select 'Clear Event List'.
Subsequently confirm the

clearing of the list.
Entering the password.

Per default no password
is set. For details of
password input see
Section 5.6.2.
When the event list is

cleared the following
diplay is shown.
Fig. 5.54 Clearing the event list
5-57
When a new configuration is downloaded to the device the event list is

automatically cleared. See Section 5.6.3.
5.5.1.4. Clearing latched outputs
If latched outputs have
to be reset, they can
be cleared from the
main menu under
'Monitor' and 'Event
Handling', 'Clear
latched outputs'.
Fig. 5.55 Clearing the latched outputs
The exact process for the password is explained in detail in Section

5.5.1.3
5.5.2. Processing of measurements

The process
values of the
protection
functions as well
as the inputs /
outputs of the
device can be
displayed with
this menu item.
The menu item
'Display FUPLA
Signals'
facilitates the
control of the
logic signals of
the FUPLA
blocks and can
be used for test
purposes.
Fig. 5.56 Overview of the measurement display
5-58
5.5.2.1. Displaying A/D converter channels

9 converter channel inputs are displayed together:
Reference Measurement Selection of Current
channel value Value at 100 % display date/ time
Phase Selection of 1st Selction of Hold/activate the

angle channel reference measurement display
channel
Fig. 5.57 A/D converter channel display
The reference channel has to be assigned. The frequency is measured

in the reference channel and serves as reference for the phase angle
display. if the primary or secondary values are selected, in the display
settings the process values of the individual converter channels are
displayed. By clicking on the 'Stop' button the process values can be
frozen or reactivated.
5.5.2.2. Displaying the process measurement values
All protection functions with a measurement algorithm provide process
measurement values. In the Monitor sub-menu 'Measurements', the
desired protection function can be selected.
The following functions do not provide any process measurands:
Autoreclose Logic
Remote binary signals Disturbance recorder
FUPLA LDU events
IEC 60870-5-103 Bounce supression
Flutter detector
5-59
To view the process values, select

in the 'Monitor' sub-menu
'Measurements' and 'Display
Function Measurement' and select
the protection function from the list.
Fig. 5.58 Select protection function
Function type Setting value of the function Trip characteristic
Process value
Fig. 5.59 Process measurement display
The display 'Process Measurement' displays the actual setting value

on the left side. The trip values are partially dynamic. The actual
measurement value of the protection function is displayed online.
5-60
5.5.2.3. Displaying binary inputs, signal outputs, trip relays

and LEDs
Binary inputs Signal outputs Trip relays LEDs
Fig. 5.60 Display of the in-/outputs of the device
The status display of the in-/outputs is possible with the above shown
displays. The legend at the bottom of the display indicates the
meaning of the color of the lamps for ON / OFF state. The slot number
and the card number are displayed in the top respectively bottom lines.
5.5.2.4. Displaying remote analog or binary in-/outputs
Display of the measurement Select module address
Fig. 5.61 Display of the AXM input
The desired remote analog inputs / outputs (AXM) or binary inputs

(RBI) or binary ouputs (RBO) are displayed when the module address
is selected in the right hand field.
5-61
5.5.2.5. Displaying ITL in-/outputs

It is possible to display the ITL data. In total there are 48 outputs
(16 outputs organized in 3 groups) and 3072 inputs (48 inputs in
64 groups). Once the group is selected in the right hand side the
requested data is displayed. The active signals are displayed in a
different color than the inactive as per the legend shown in the lower
left corner of the window. For the supervision of the data transmission
a counter (heartbeat) is displayed. For outputs the counter of the local
device is displayed, where as in the case of the inputs, the local as
well as the remote counter is displayed.
The two counters display, whether the data Selection of the field device
is being updated. address
Fig. 5.62 ITL data input display
Fig. 5.63 ITL data output display
5-62
5.5.2.6. Displaying SCS outputs

The SCS outputs are displayed in 3 groups each comprising
256 signals. The group can be selected with a mouse click in the lower
left hand side of the display. The selected SCS group (01...03) is
displayed in the lower left hand corner, as well the output signals
1256, 257512, upto 513768 in the other section of the display.
Display of SCS output (1...256, 257...512 upto 513...768)
Selection of the SCS group (01...03)

Fig. 5.64 SCS output display
Active outputs are displayed in a color corresponding to the legend at

the bottom of the display.
5.5.2.7. Displaying FUPLA signals

FUPLA signals can also be displayed. The FUPLA file with the
extension 'xx.BIN' must be available so that it can be opened by the
CAP2/316 program. This means that the file must be in the directory
specified in the configuration data.
On selection of 'Display FUPLA Signals' a list of functions is displayed,
similar to the process measurement values see Section 5.5.2.2. After
the selection of the function the following window is displayed.
5-63
With a double click on the signal the 'Input List' resp. 'Output List' or
'Segment List' will display the respective signals in the display
window.
The 'Fupla Cycletime' displays

the start, stop and the operating
time of the FUPLA, which
serves as supervision of
whether the FUPLA is operating
or not.
To check the status of the FUPLA signals select 'Display Signals'. The
status of the signals will be displayed online.
Fig. 5.65 Display of FUPLA in-/outputs, cycle time and signals
5-64
5.5.3. Test function
Fig. 5.66 Menu selection of the test function
The test functions can only be opened with a password, because they
can stop the normal operation of the device. The functionality is meant
specifically for commissioning, and should be used only when the
station is out of operation, or, in operation, if the trip and signalling
relays are isolated.
On closing the menu 'Test Functions' the device will be restarted with
the last active parameter set.
The operation of the test function is illustrated below.
5.5.3.1. 5.5.3.5. 5.5.3.2. 5.5.3.6.
5.5.3.3. 5.5.3.7. 5.5.3.4. 5.5.1.1.
Fig. 5.67 Sub-menus of the test function
5-65
5.5.3.1. Activating the protection functions

By clicking on 'Protection Functions' a list of the functions that can be
tested are displayed. Out of this list the function that has to be
activated can be selected. The following functions cannot be tested:
Distance protection Counter
Auto-reclosure Logic
Pole slip Measurements
Earth fault grounded Measurement module
Remote binary Disturbance recorder
FUPLA LDU-Events
IEC60870-5-103 Bounce suppression
Defluttering Breaker failure
Time delay
The simulated values can be entered in a display which is similar to
the one used for the configuration of the protection function and the
display of the process measurements. The functioning of the
protection function, the trip and signalling relays can be checked with
the simulated values.
When the simulated value has been entered click on the 'Perform Test'
button to start the test.
Configuration of the protection Protection function characteristic
function
Simulated measurement value of the protection Perform the test

function
Fig. 5.68 Enter simulated value for testing
5-66
5.5.3.2. Activating trip outputs, signal outputs and LED outputs

Clicking on one of the pushbuttons 'Trip Outputs', 'Signal Outputs' or
'LED Outputs' - in the 'Test Functions' opens the respective window.
The slots that have been configured are displayed. When the output is
selected with a mouse click, then the color of the output is displayed in
blue. When all the ouputs to be activated are selected, click on the
'Perform Test' button. The outputs will be activated and displayed in
red color.
If the outputs have to be reset click on the 'Reset Test' pushbutton.
The output will be deactivated excepting if it is configured as a latched
output. In the case of latched ouputs select the sub-menu 'Event
Handling' in the window 'Test Functions' and select 'Clear latched
outputs' to reset the latched outputs. When the 'Test Functions'
window is closed, the device is restarted and the ouputs are
automatically reset.
Only the trip or signalling outputs can be activated at a time from an
in-/output type. It is also not possible to set two different types of
signals e.g. signalling outputs and LEDs.
Slot Signal in Testmode
Start of the test Reset test
Fig. 5.69 Activation of the trip relay, signalling relay or LEDs
5-67
5.5.3.3. Activating the RBO outputs (Remote Binary Outputs)

On entering the module address one or more output channels can be
selected (with a mouse click as explained in Section 5.5.3.2). The
outputs can be activated by clicking on the 'Perform Test' pushbutton
whereby the selected channel will be activated.
Only the relays from the respective module can be simulated. Besides,
it is not possible to set two different types of signals e.g. signalling
outputs in the RE.316*4 and one on a remote RIO device.
Relay output channel Module address
Fig. 5.70 Activation of the RBO outputs
5-68
5.5.3.4. Activating the analog outputs (remote output)

After entering the module number select the output channel. The
simulated value is output on activation of the test, i.e. on clicking
'Perform Test'. Only one module can be accessed at a time.
Scaling of the process value Module number
Channel selection Test value input Perform test
Fig. 5.71 Activation of the analog output
5.5.3.5. Event handling, measurement and diagnostic information

The sub-menus 'Event Handling', 'Measurement' and 'Diagnostics'
permit the use of this functionality within the test mode. These provide
the same functionality as described in the Sections 5.5.1, 5.5.2 and
5.5.4.
5.5.3.6. Parameter set switching
In order to test a protection function from another parameter set, the
required parameter set has to be activated. This is achieved in the
sub-menu 'Paraset Switch'.
Select the desired parameter set with the mouse.

The active parameter set is displayed in gray.
Active parameter set
Fig. 5.72 Parameter set switching
In the case of LON, communication is interrupted for 20 to 25 s.
5-69
5.5.3.7. Toggling binary outputs

To select the binary output double click on the function in the list and
then choose the desired output. By clicking on the button 'Toggle to'
'On' or 'Off' the status of the binary output can be changed respectively
toggle the status from ON to OFF and vice versa.
Selection of the function Selection of the function signal
Close the selection Pushbutton Signal Signal status

window of the status
Fig. 5.73 Toggle binary outputs
As long as the 'Toggle Binary Output' window is open, all remote I/Os
are decoupled from the process signals. These are transmitted only
when the test function menu is closed.
See the following logic:
Process signal &
Selected window 1
'Toggle Binary Output'
closed Binary output
Simulated signal
HEST 045 006 V
Fig. 5.74 Decoupling of the process during the toggling of the

binary output
5-70
5.5.4. Diagnostics
Fig. 5.75 Diagnostics menu
The diagnostic menu in 'Monitor' in the main menu provides the following
possibilities:
'List Diagnostic Info'
The result of the self-monitoring of the complete device, the main
processor, the analog inputs card 316EA62 or 316EA63 (if
present) and the analog input on the main processor board are
displayed. It also comprises the time of the last changes in the
configuration.
Furthermore the name and status of the FUPLA-Logic loaded in

the device are displayed.
'Get Hex Dump', 'Clear Hex Dump'
This is vital help information for finding the cause of restarts.
'IBB-Information'
Provides information on the status of the IBB connection. This is
dependent on the type of the bus protocol (LON, IEC60870-5-103,
SPA, or MVB).
'RBIO-Information'
Displays information of the status of the process bus and the
remote in-/output system.
'Reset SCS Input Data'
On entering the respective password, the SCS input data stored in
the device will be reset.
Further information is available in Chapter 6.
5-71
5.5.5. Disturbance recorder
Fig. 5.76 Selection of the disturbance recorder menu
Two possibilities are available for the processing of the disturbance

recorder.
a) Display Disturbance Recorder Data
Displays all the stored disturbance records.
Display date and event

time
Close window
Transfer the selected
recording to a file
Delete the first recording
Fig. 5.77 Display of the stored disturbance recordings.
Store to file:
A recording can be saved to a file by first selecting the recording with
the mouse and then clicking on the button 'Transfer to file'.
After selection of the directory, the recording is stored to the file. It is
important that the file name which contains the Station- (xxx) and
recording (yyy) (RExxx.yyy) is not modified. These are created by the
CAP2/316.
Delete first recording:
The oldest i.e. the first recording is deleted. This action cannot be
undone!
b) Reset Disturbance Recorder
The disturbance recorder is reset. All recorded disturbances are
deleted. This process cannot be reversed! The disturbance records
are also deleted if the disturbance recorder configuration is modified.
5-72
5.6. Configurating CAP2/316

In the main menu 'Options' the basic settings of the CAP2/316 can be
done:
Fig. 5.78 Sub-menu options
5.6.1. Changing the language

The desired language can be
selected through the displayed
icons. The selection is done by
clicking on the 'OK' button or
double clicking on the desired
language icon. After a short delay
the language is switched over.
Selection of the desired language.
Fig. 5.79 Switching the language
NOTICE: To change the language in the LDU on the device, it is

neccessry to download the configuration to the device once again
(see Section 5.4.10.2).
5-73
5.6.2. Changing the password

To change the password, first
enter the old password, then the
new password and verify
(reconfirm) the new password.
Only a maximum of 6 characters
can be used. A lost password can
only be modified in SYSMAN in
the sub-menu 'Old Password'.
Fig. 5.80 Change the password
This 'Password' is requested if password protection is configured e.g.

when modified configuration has to be downloaded to the device.
Fig. 5.81 Enter password
5.6.3. Automatic deletion of the event list after a download

When selected the event list is
cleared automatically after a
download to the device.
Fig. 5.82 Clear event list after a download
A tick mark next to this sub-menu indicates that the functionallity is

activated, whereby after every download to the device the event list is
cleared. To activate the functionallity click with the left mouse button
on this item. If already activated a second lick will deactivate this
functionallity.
5.6.4. Downloading device firmware
New or augmented functionallity can be implemented by updating the
firmware as also by adding new hardware. With this menu the existing
firmware in the device is deleted and replaced with the newly selected
firmware. This activity has a duration of approx. 15 minutes. The exact
process is described in Chapter 7, in updating of firmware.
5-74
5.6.5. EA63 firmware download

The firmware for the line differential protection card 316EA63 must be
downloaded to the device before it is commissioned. The menu is
active only if the 316EA63 is activated and the CAP2/316 is on-line
(see Section 5.4.2. and Chapter 7).
NOTICE: After the command Firmware download the device must

be started once again with a power off power on sequence.
NOTICE: After the command Clearset to clear the set file in the
RE..16 the EA63 Firmware must be downloaded once again to the
device.
5.6.6. Configurating the communications port

A further configuration is displayed in the menu 'Communication'.
Fig. 5.83 Communication port configuration
In the sub-menu 'Comm Settings' the communication port to be used

on the PC and the baud rate (9600 oder 19200 baud) can be
configured. The configuration is activated by clicking on 'OK'. This
configuration can only be done in the off-line mode. In the on-line
mode this sub-menu is displayed in grey and cannot be selected. The
sub-menu item can also be selected from the icon list.
5-75
5.7. Help menu
Fig. 5.84 Help main menu
The following menu items are meaningful only if the manuals have
been installed along with the main operation program - the CAP2/316.
Otherwise the manuals will not be displayed (see also Section 5.2.2.),
instead an error message.
5.7.1. User Manual
This menu item will call up the latest operating instructions of the
device.
The SPA commands and the respective SPA address list are clarified
in Chapter 9 of the operating instructions.
5.7.2. RIO580/ LON/ MVB/ IEC60870-5-103 User Manual
With this menu item all the operating instructions of the various
communication protocols can be called up.
5.7.3. About CAP2/316
This sub-menu provides information about the actual software version
and license information.
5-76
5.8. Import / Export of data

With the function 'Import'/'Export' different files can be created that
help in the execution of the SCS engineering and in commissioning.
5.8.1. Importing files
Fig. 5.85 Import of files
5.8.1.1. Loading MBA parameters (mbaXX.par)

The mbaXX.par file created for a different RE.216 or RE.316*4 which
is connected to the same process bus can be downloaded to another
device. The PB-device address should be substituted for the XX.
Thereby the configuration of the bus adminstrator and the cycle times
from the other device on the process bus can be reutilized.
5.8.1.2. Loading RIO parameters (*.rio)
The saved RIO parameters of another remote device which is
connected to the same process bus can be download with the sub-
menu item 'Load Rio pars'.
5-77
5.8.2. Exporting files
Fig. 5.86 Export of files
5.8.2.1. SigTOOL (*.sig)

The sub-menu lists all the signals along with the different associated
information (Name, Address, Event number, BWA-Index etc.). This can be
used subsequently for loading the database of the substation control
system.
5.8.2.2. Saving RIO parameters (*.rio)

The RIO parameters can be saved with this sub-menu item 'Save Rio-
pars' for further use in other remote RIO devices, which are connected
to the same process bus.
5-78
5.9. Operation with several sets of parameters

The protection and control devices permit up to four independent sets
of relay settings respectively protection configurations to be defined.
Only one of these parameter sets can be active when in operation.
Provision is available for activating or deactivating individual parameter
sets.
5.9.1. Switching over a parameter set
Each of the parameter sets can be switched over by
a) a binary input signal (opto-coupler galvanically isolated) or
b) a command from the station automation system (SCS).
Configuration of the binary inputs

A maximum of four binary inputs is used for switching the parameter
sets. These are configured by clicking on the icon 'I/O' in the icon list, or
selecting the sub-menu 'System Parameters' in the main menu item
'Configuration' (see Section 5.4.4.).
In case the parameters 'ParSet 2 IN''ParSet 4 IN' have the default

value 'Always FALSE' then, only the parameter set 1 can be activated.
'Remote Setting' If this parameter is set to TRUE, the switching
of the parameter sets can be activated from the
substation control system (SCS), else the
switching is controlled by the binary inputs
'ParSet 2 IN', 'ParSet 3 IN' and 'ParSet 4 IN'
'ParSet 2 IN', 'ParSet 3 IN', 'ParSet 4 IN':
The four parameter sets can be activated as
per the table below
ParSet2 IN ParSet3 IN ParSet 4 IN active Parameterset
F F F 1
T F F 2
F T F 3
T T F No switching
F F T 4
T F T No switching
F T T No switching
T T T No switching
As is apparent from this table, simultaneous

activation of more than one input will not switch
over the active parameter set.
5-79
Configurating signalling outputs

The active parameter set can be indicated with one of four outputs
('ParSet 1 OUT' 'ParSet4 OUT '), via a signalling relay or a LED. The
output can also be recorded in the event list. These outputs can be
configured similar to other outputs.
5.9.2. Creating parameter sets

5.9.2.1. Assigning a protection function to a parameter set
All protection functions have parameters 'P1''P4'. The configuration
of these parameters determines in which parameter set the function is
active. 'P1''P4' corresponds to parameter set 14.
Overview of all functions Folder to view the active functions of
the respective parameter set.
Selection in which parameter set the

function should be active.
Indicates from which parameter set

the function has been copied.
Fig. 5.87 Assignment to the parameter sets
The assignment is done with a tick in the box 'P1''P4'. Select the
folder 'ParSet1...4' for this purpose.
Select the folder 'ParSet1...4' to view the active functions of a
parameter set and the respective CPU usage. From which parameter
set a protection function has been copied, is displayed in the column
'Copy of' (see Section. 5.9.2.2).
5-80
5.9.2.2. Copying a configured protection function

If the settings of a configured protection function are to be reutilized to
a large extent in another parameter set, then the function can be
copied to another parameter set. The procedure is described in
Section 5.4.7.4
The copied function cannot be active in the same parameter set as the
original function, and the parameter set of the copied must be greater
than that of the original:
P1 pO P4 and pO < pK P4
pO = parameter set number of the original function
pK = parameter set number of the copied function
If copies of a function exist, then the original function cannot be
deleted
5.9.2.3. Logic interconnection

If the inputs and outputs of more than one function are linked together,
then the functions must be active in the same parameter set.
NOTICE: The outputs from copied distance functions can be

linked to inputs of other functions only if these functions appear after
the distance function in the function list.
5-81
5.10. Local operation

5.10.1. Summary
The local mimic (LDU = Local Display Unit) of the RE.316*4 is a
simpler alternative to the PC based HMI, the CAP2/316. It provides
service personnel with facility for viewing status, events and
measurements. The hierarchically structured menu provides limited
access to the process and system data. The unit is operated with the
aid of just a few pushbuttons. Three light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
indicate the status of the system independently of the menu being
displayed.
5.10.2. Limitations
The LDU is an integral part of an RE.316*4 device and provides a
number of facilities for service personnel.
Information about the process and the state of the device can be
viewed on the LDU, but it is not possible to either change or copy
device settings. The device can be restarted, however, by selecting a
special menu.
5.10.3. General description
The LDU is primarily intended for service personnel so that they can
obtain brief information on the status of the RE.316*4 device and the
process.
An overview is provided by the three LEDs, further details can be
viewed with the various menus on the LCD. It is neither possible to
configure the functions of the LEDs nor the menu structure. The texts
of the different displays cannot be edited, since these conform to the
text on the PC-HMI and correspond to the configuration of the device.
5.10.3.1. Mechanical assembly and front view
The LDU is fitted at the bottom right of the frontplate. The LEDs
familiar from older units are at the top. The reset button is accessible
through a small hole in the frontplate.
5-82
1 2 3
1 Green LED
2 Yellow LED
3 Red LED
4
4 LCD
5 CLEAR PB
C 5
6 ENTER PB
7 Arrow keys
E 6
8 Optical Serial
Interface
8 7
Fig. 5.88 Front view of the local display unit (LDU)
5.10.3.2. Electrical connection
The PC-HMI is connected to the device via the optical interface on the
LDU, which provides a galvanic isolation of the device.
A special cable has to be used to connect the PC which converts
electrical signals into optical signals and vice versa.
5.10.3.3. Password
A password is not required for the LDU.
5.10.3.4. Passive operation
The user communicates with the RE.316*4 via the LDU in a passive
role, i.e. device and process data can be viewed, but none of the
displayed data or parameters can be modified. Modifications can only
be done with the PC-HMI.
The only exception is the reset function which is available in a special
menu.
5-83
5.10.3.5. LDU keypad

The LDU keypad comprises six pushbuttons. Only one key can be
activated at a moment to excute an action. As long as one PB is
pressed, pressing a second has no effect.
There are two possibilities of navigating the menu:
Step-by-step: A button is pressed to activate the first operation and
then the next button to activate the second operation etc.
Holding down a button: An action can be repeated (scrolling) by
holding down a key longer than the preset time (fixed setting of 0.5
seconds).
The pushbuttons activate the following functions:
'E'
executes an operation (ENTER function), i.e. a menu item is
executed, normally, moving down a level in the menu hierarchy.
The button has no effect at the lower most level of the menu
structure.
'C'
corresponds to the ESCAPE button on a PC. It is used to return to
the entry level menu.
'', ''
The up and down arrow keys are used either for selecting a
desired menu item in a menu structure or for moving within a
displayed list (e.g. different events in the event list). In the following
text, these keys are represented by the symbols '^' and 'v'.
''
The right arrow key has the same effect as the 'E' button. In the
following text it is represented by the symbol '>'.
''
Use this key to exit an active menu and to return to the next level
up in the menu hierarchy. In the following text this key is
represented by the symbol '<'.
5-84
5.10.4. The three status LEDs

5.10.4.1. General
An RE.316*4 unit can be in different states, the important ones are
indicated by the three LEDs. The three LEDs colors: green, yellow
and red can be in different states - off, flashing or on. The LEDs are
represented by squares as in the diagrams below.
= on = flashing = off
In the start menu, on the first line, the meaning of the three LEDs is
explained.
green yellow red
Active Start Trip

ABB REC316*4
Fig. 5.89 Caption of the LEDs
5.10.4.2. Starting the device

During the start of the device and the initialization phase, the yellow
and green LEDs flash, to indicate that the device is not operational.
green yellow red
Fig. 5.90 LED states at start of the RE.316*4
5.10.4.3. Protection functions inactive

If none of the protection functions is active (none programmed or all
blocked), the device initialization has been successful and no errors
are found, the device is still not ready for operation. In this state the
green LDU LED flashes and the green LED in the top row is ON
continuously.
green yellow red
Fig. 5.91 LED states when the protection functions are inactive
5-85
5.10.4.4. Normal device operation

When the device is active and operates without errors or faults, the
green LDU LED is ON , yellow and red LEDs are OFF.
green yellow red
Fig. 5.92 LED states in normal operation
5.10.4.5. Pick-up of a protection function (General start)

The pick-up of at least one protection function (General start signal
active) is indicated when the green and yellow LDU LEDs are ON. The
yellow LED remains ON after reset of the general start. The latched
ON has to be reset manually (see Section 5.10.8.6).
grn gelb rot
Fig. 5.93 LED states in general start
5.10.4.6. Protection trip (General Trip)

A trip initiated by at least one protection function (General Trip signal
active) is indicated when the green, yellow and red LDU LEDs are ON.
The yellow and red LEDs remain ON after reset of the general trip.
The latched ON has to be reset manually (see Section 5.10.8.6).
green yellow red
Fig. 5.94 LED states for a general trip
5-86
5.10.4.7. Fatal device error

When the device has a fatal error and is no longer operational then all
three LDU LEDs flash.
green yellow red
Fig. 5.95 LED states for a fatal error
5.10.5. Text display (LCD)

5.10.5.1. General
Upper and lower case characters are displayed as well as all language
specific characters for German, English and French.
Measurand display are refreshed approx. every second
(measurements, binary signals etc.).
5.10.5.2. Language
The LDU supports a number of languages, however, the language
used by the HMI on the PC during commissioning is the language set
on the LDU. This cannot be modified during normal operation. The
LDU language is programmed automatically to correspond to that of
the PC-HMI. Care must therefore be taken when changing parameter
settings that the HMI on the PC is operating in the desired language.
5.10.5.3. Interdependence
The menus are not dependent on changes in the process or the status
of the device, i.e. a menu text remains unchanged on the display until
the user selects a different menu item. The only exceptions are the
start-up procedure and during downloading of parameter settings from
the CAP2/316 to the device. During these procudures the entry menu
is displayed. No menus can be selected during download from the PC
to the RE.316*4.
5.10.5.4. Configurability
The menu structure described below cannot be modified or configured.
It is neither possible to add a menu item nor to change a menu text.
Certain menu items and texts are dependent on the system
configuration. For example, if an additional protection function is
configured, the menu items needed to view the measurands are
automatically inserted. The signal texts are inherited from the HMI.
5-87
5.10.6. Menu structure

The information displayed on the LDU is organized in a five level
hierarchical structure. An overview of the menu structure is given in
the diagram below. The user can only navigate vertically from one
menu level to the next i.e. it is not possible to jump to the same
hierarchical level in another vertical branch.
Every menu item (excepting the entry menu) consists of two parts:
Header (first line on the LCD): The header displays the title of the
active menu item. This line has a hyphen '-' at the start and the end
of the text, to differetiate it from a selectable menu item. This
header is always displayed, even when there are more than three
selectable menu items and it is necessary to scroll through them.
Menu lines: Lines two, three and four display the sub-menus.
Note: An arrow pointing downwards at the end of line 4 means that
the menu contains more displayable sub-menu items. These can
be viewed by pressing the arrow key 'v'. An arrow pointing upwards
at the end of line 2 means that the menu contains more sub-menu
items above the ones displayed. These can be viewed by pressing
the arrow key '^'.
5-88
ENTRY MENU
MAIN MENU
MEASURANDS
AD Channels
Nominal Values
Primary Values
Secondary Values
Function Measurands
1. Function
:
n. Function
Binary Signals
Input Signals
RBI Inputs
ITL Inputs
Signal Relays
Trip Relays
RBO Outputs
ITL Outputs
Analog Signals
Input Signals
Output Signals
EVENT LIST
USERS GUIDE
DISTURBANCE RECORDER
DIAGNOSIS MENU
Diagnosis Info
IBB-Status Info
ProcessbusInfo
LED Description
RESET MENU
Latch-Reset
Clear Eventlist
Reset PC-Card
System Restart
Fig. 5.96 Menu structure
5-89
5.10.7. Entry menu

The first menu level is the entry level menu. It is displayed after every
system start or after pressing the 'C' pushbutton. It does not have a
header, but four lines of text. The main menu can be accessed from
the entry menu by pressing either button 'E' or '>'.
The entry menu comprises two parts:
The first line states the significance of the three LEDs:
green LED: 'Active'
yellow LED: 'Start'
red LED: 'Trip'
Lines two to four show the name of the device, the system name
assigned to it and the software version.
The entry menu comprises four lines. The buttons 'C', '^' and 'v' have
no effect in this menu. As there is no item to select an underscore is
not displayed. If the RE.316*4 has not been configured, 'Local Display'
appears on line 3, otherwise the name assigned to the device using
the HMI. The figure below shows a typical entry menu:
Activ Start Trip

ABB REC316*4
Example
V5.1
Fig. 5.97 Entry menu
5.10.8. Main menu

The main menu displays all the sub-menus to help obtain more
information on the device and the primary process. 'Main Menu' is
displayed in the header line. The three lines below display the sub-
menus. If there are more sub-menus, these are indicated with a
downward pointing arrow, in line four. The first of the sub-menus (line
2 of the display) is always underscored, indicating it is preselected.
The list can be scrolled through using the arrow keys '^' and 'v',
whereby the sub-menus scroll up resp. down, and a different sub-
menu item is then displayed on line 2 with an underscore. Hence one
sub-menu item is always underscored and preselected. The selected
sub-menu is activated by pressing either button 'E' or '>'. A 'v' (down
arrow) on the last position of line 4 or a '^' (up arrow) indicates the
possible scroll direction, for the display of other sub-menus.
5-90
The following sub-menus are available:

Measurands
Eventlist
Users -Guide
Disturbance Recorder
Diagnosis menu
Reset Menu
-Mainmenu-
Measurands
Eventlist
Users Guide
Fig. 5.98 Main menu
5.10.8.1. Measurands
The measurands menu lists all the sub-menus that can be selected for
viewing the various measurand displays. 'Measurands' is displayed in
the header and below this the three lines of sub-menus are displayed
The following sub-menus can be selected:
AD-Channels
Funct. Measurements
Binary Signals
Analog Signals
-Measurands-
AD-Channels
Funct. Measurements
Binary Signals
Fig. 5.99 Measurands menu
5.10.8.1.1. A/D Channels

This menu provides facility for selecting the display of the rated,
primary or secondary values.
-AD-Channels-
Nominal Values
Prim.Values
Sec.Values
Fig. 5.100 A/D channels
5-91
The three sub-menus list all the CT and VT input signals that can be
displayed. The headers are 'Rated values', 'Prim.values' and
'Sec.values' respectively and the measurands are displayed on the
three lines below. To scroll through the list use the '^' and 'v' keys. The
'E' and '>' have no effect, because this is the lowest level of the sub-
menu. An arrow at the end of line four pointing downwards and/or at
the end of line two pointing upwards indicate in which direction the
user can scroll to view the other values.
The displayed values and text (units etc.) vary according to the
configuration of the RE.316*4. Nine current or voltage input values can
be displayed and the phase-angle of the measured value in relation to
the reference channel is also displayed.
-Nominal Values-
3 0.865IN 120
4 1.102UN 0
5 1.021UN-120
Fig. 5.101 Rated values
Frequency display and setting the reference channel

The tenth measurand displays the frequency of the reference channel.
To change the reference channel, scroll to line 11 using the down
arrow key 'v'. The reference channel is set on this line. Each time the
arrow key 'v' is pressed after line 11 selects the next higher input as
reference channel. After the ninth channel, the first channel is used
once again as the reference channel. On pressing the up arrow key '^'
the last selected input is selected as the reference channel. Channel 1
is selected as the default reference channel on entry into this menu.
-AD-Channels-
9 0.77IN-120
10 51.11 Hz
11 Ref.Channel 1
Fig. 5.102 CT and VT inputs and selection of reference channel
5.10.8.1.2. Function measurands

This menu displays all the configured functions. The header is 'Funct.
measurands', the configured functions are displayed on the next three
lines.
The no of lines displayed is dependent on the configured protection
functions. When no function has been configured, a 'No function' is
displayed.
5-92
-Funct.Measurand-
1.Current-DT
2.U>High Voltage
3.Power
Fig. 5.103 Function measurand menu
Display of the function measurands

The menu lists all the measurands that can be viewed for the selected
function. The function name is displayed in the header, followed on the
next three lines by the measurands. If there are more than three
measurands, the rest of the list can be viewed using the arrow keys '^'
and 'v'. The buttons 'E' and '>' have no effect, because this is the
lowest level of menu. If a function does not have any measurands then
lines 2 to 4 are empty.
The displayed values and text (units etc.) vary according to the
selected function.
-10.UifPQ-
1 0.997 UN
2 4.014 IN
3 10.999 P(PN)
Fig. 5.104 Measurements by the UifPQ function
5.10.8.1.3. Binary signals

The binary signals menu lists all the binary signals that can be viewed.
The header is 'Binary Signals' and in the following three lines the types
of binary signals are listed as sub-menus.
The following sub-menus are available:
Binary Inputs
RBI-Inputs
ITL-Inputs
Signalling Relays
Trip Relays
RBO-Outputs
ITL-Outputs
-Binary Signals-
Input Signals
RBI-Inputs
ITL-Inputs
Fig. 5.105 Binary signals menu
5-93
Binary inputs, signalling relays, trip relays

The selection and display of the binary inputs, signalling relays and
tripping relays are similar to one another, and, as an example the
procedure for the binary inputs is explained.
Selecting the menu item 'Input Signals' opens a sub-menu with the
numbers of input/output modules, which when selected displays the
states of the input signals. The header is 'Input signals' and all the
populated slots of the binary input/output modules are displayed on the
next three lines.
-Input Signals-
Slot 1 DB61
Slot 2 DB62
Fig. 5.106 Binary inputs
Measurands - binary input modules

The process values of the binary input card are displayed in this sub-
menu. 'Slot 1 DB6' for example is displayed on the header line and the
process values on line 3. The buttons 'E' and '>' have no effect,
because this is the lowest level of the menu structure. Since only one
line is displayed, the arrow keys 'v' and '^' are not used. To present the
states in a readable manner a logical '0' is represented by a hyphen '-'
and a logical '1' by an 'X'. The LSB is on the extreme left similar to the
HMI.
-Slot 1 DB61-
-X-X---X
LSB
Fig. 5.107 Display of the binary input module values
RBI, ITL inputs, RBO and ITL outputs

Since the selection and display of the RBI and ITL inputs and outputs
is very similar, the procedure for the RBI inputs will be explained and
applies for all the others.
When opened, the 'RBI-Inputs' display the current states of the RBI
inputs of the first module. If none of the input modules is assigned this
number, all the inputs indicate a zero. The display can be switched
from one remote module to the next using the arrow keys 'v' and '^'.
To present the states in a readable manner a logical '0' is represented
by a hyphen '-' and a logical '1' by an 'X'. The LSB is on the extreme
left is as in the HMI.
5-94
-RBI-Inputs-
1
-X-X---X--------
LSB
Fig. 5.108 RBI inputs
Analog inputs, Analog outputs

Since the selection and display of the analog inputs and analog
outputs are very similar, the selection and display of analog inputs is
illustrated.
The 'Analog Signals' menu provides a choice between inputs and
outputs. The 'Input signals' sub-menu displays the numbers of all the
devices that have been configured. To display the input signal values
select one of the devices.
-Analog Signals-
Input signals
Output signals
Fig. 5.109 Analog signals
-Input signals-
Device No. 9
Device No. 10
Fig. 5.110 Input signals
Display of the analog values

This menu displays all the measurands of the selected device. The
device number is displayed as the menu header and the measurands
are listed below. The measurands in the list can be viewed using the '^'
and 'v' buttons. The buttons 'E' and '>' have no effect, because this is
the lowest level of the menu structure.
-Device No. 9-
1 14.01 mA
2 2.52 V
3 143.42
Fig. 5.111 Viewing the input variables of device No. 9
5-95
5.10.8.2. Event list

This menu item displays the latest 20 events, together with the tripping
values of the protection functions and also the special 'LDU events'
function. 'Event List' is displayed in the header and the latest events
are displayed below it. The older events can be viewed using the
arrow keys. The numbers of the events are the same on the LDU and
the HMI. Note that an event cannot be displayed in total because 4
lines are needed and only 3 are available. To view the complete
information use the arrow keys 'v' and '^'.
The displayed text (function name and unit) is the same as that in the
event list on the HMI.
-Event list-
32 1.Current-DT
4.036 IN
13:55;57.571
Fig. 5.112 Event list
5.10.8.3. Users guide

This menu item provides access to brief instructions on the use of the
LDU, e.g. the functions of the buttons.
-Users Guide-
E=Enter the
preselected
menu
Fig. 5.113 Users guide
5.10.8.4. Disturbance recorder

The menu 'Disturb.Rec.' displays a list of the data stored in the
disturbance recorder. If there are several entries, these can be scrolled
through using the arrow keys 'v' and '^'. When the list is opened the
oldest record is displayed first. When the disturbance recorder is
empty, '0 events' is displayed.
5-96
-Disturb.Rec.-
Event 1
9803-17
13:55;56.575
Fig. 5.114 List of disturbance records
5.10.8.5. Diagnosis menu

This menu provides access to the different kinds of diagnostic
information. The header displays 'Diagnosis Menu' and the list of sub-
menus are listed below.
DiagnosisInfo
IBB-StatusInfo
ProcessbusInfo
LED Description
-Diagnosis Menu-
DiagnosisInfo
IBBStatusInfo
ProcessbusInfo
Fig. 5.115 Diagnostics
5.10.8.5.1. Diagnosis Info

This menu item displays diagnostic information in a similar form to the
HMI. 'Diagnosis Info' is displayed in the header and the diagnostic
information is displayed on the three lines below. The entire list can be
viewed using the arrow keys '^' and 'v'.
The status of the device is displayed first, followed by the date and
time when the software was downloaded, then the time when settings
were last changed and finally the status of the loaded FUP programs.
-Diagnosis Info-
RelayStatus:
No Error

Fig. 5.116 General status information
5-97
5.10.8.5.2. IBB-Status-Info
Select this menu item to view information on the interbay bus (LON,
MVB etc.). 'IBB-StatusInfo' is displayed in the header followed by three
lines with the IBB diagnostic information. You can scroll through the list
using the '^' and 'v' keys:
The connected interbay bus (SPA, IEC60870-5-103, LON or MVB)
is shown on the second line together with the information 'Ready'
(operational), 'No response' (if no telegrams are transferred, but
the device is ready) or 'Inactive' (this appears, for example, when
the corresponding interface is not configured). The HMI must be
used to obtain more detailed information.
Station number and actual time
Neuronchip ID (only for LON)
-IBB-StatusInfo-
SPA-BUS
Ready
Fig. 5.117 Interbay bus information
5.10.8.5.3. Process bus info

Here information about the process bus can be viewed in a manner
similar to information about the station bus. The 'Process bus inf' is
displayed in the header. The operating mode and the status of the PC
card, the PC card type, the software version and the PC card counter
appear below.
-ProcessbusInfo-
PC-Card Error:
No Error

Fig. 5.118 Information about the process bus (PC card error)
5.10.8.5.4. LED Description

With the help of this menu, the description of the LEDs at the top left of
the frontplate can be viewed on the LDU.
-LED Description-
1:Relay ready
2:Trip 1
3:Trip 2
Fig. 5.119 Significance of the LEDs
5-98
Entering the LED description text

As described in Section 5.4.2.5, the text entered for the LEDs and the
rest of the text in the HMI has to be downloaded to the device, so that
it can be eventually displayed.
5.10.8.6. Reset-Menu
This menu item opens a sub-menu that enables the user to delete
different kinds of information or execute a warm start.
Following four possibilities are available:
Latch-Reset (resetting of latched signals)
Clear Eventlist
Reset PC-Card
System Restart
The first menu item 'Latch reset' resets the two LEDs 'Start' and 'Trip'
on the front of the LDU. In addition all the latched LEDs on the
frontplate and all latched outputs (signalling and tripping relays) are
reset.
The second menu item clears the event list (only the one displayed in
the LDU and not the one in the PC).
The item 'System Restart' initiates a warm start of the device.
-Reset-Menu-
Latch-Reset
Clear Eventlist
Reset PC-Card
System Restart
Fig. 5.120 Reset menu
For every selection of the above menu items, a dialogue appears

requesting confirmation for the execution of the action 'Are you sure?
No / Yes?'. The default response is 'No'. Select the appropriate
response using the arrow keys 'v' and '^' (in the same way as selecting
a menu item) and execute by pressing 'E' or '>'.
-Latch-Reset-
Are you sure?
No /
Yes
Fig. 5.121 Are you sure?
5-99
-Reset PC-Card-
Are you sure?
No /
Yes
Fig. 5.122 Are you sure?
5.10.9. Automatic display

5.10.9.1. General description
In addition to the manual procedure for selecting information for
display, there is an automatic display routine that cyclically displays
the latest available information. This executes if the PC-HMI is not
connected and no buttons are actuated on the LDU. The automatic
display switches continuously through the different data.
5.10.9.2. Starting the automatic display
After each system start, the entry menu appears. The automatic
display cycle starts, providing no buttons are pressed within a minute.
If a particular menu item (e.g. measurements) has been selected
manually, then this is displayed even if no buttons are pressed. The
automatic display starts only from the entry menu providing no buttons
are pressed and the HMI is not connected.
5.10.9.3. Stopping the automatic display
Stop the automatic display routine by pressing the button 'C' (clear
button). The entry menu appears and you can navigate through the
menu structure in the normal way.
5.10.9.4. Automatic display cycle
The sequence of the automatic display cycle is as follows:
Entry menu
Measurand(s) 1. Function
Measurand(s) 2. Function
....
Measurand(s) of last function
Event list
Each display remains visible for about 15 seconds before switching to
the next block of information. When a function has more than three
measurands, all of them are shown in sequence before next function is
displayed. The same applies when there are more than three events in
the event list.
5-100
Oktober 04
6. SELF-TESTING AND MONITORING
6.1. Summary............................................................................................6-2
6.2. Monitoring the auxiliary supply...........................................................6-2
6.3. Monitoring the firmware .....................................................................6-2
6.4. Monitoring the hardware ....................................................................6-3
6.5. Diagnostic events...............................................................................6-4
6.6. Device diagnosis................................................................................6-6

6.6.1. Signaling of the detailed diagnostic information 316VC61.................6-9
6.6.2. Display of the detailed diagnostic information 316EA63 ..................6-10
6.6.3. Display of the FUPLA status ............................................................6-12
6.7. HEX dump........................................................................................6-13
6.8. IBB information ................................................................................6-13

6.8.1. SPA bus ...........................................................................................6-14
6.8.2. LON bus...........................................................................................6-14
6.8.3. MVB bus ..........................................................................................6-16
6.8.4. IEC 60870-5-103 bus.......................................................................6-18
6.9. RIO information................................................................................6-18
6.10. Resetting SCS data .........................................................................6-18
6.11. Possible error messages of CAP2/316 ............................................6-19
6-1
6. SELF-TESTING AND MONITORING

6.1. Summary
The continuous self-monitoring and diagnostic features incorporated in
RE. 316*4 assure high availability both of the protection functions and
the power system it is protecting. Hardware failures are signaled
instantly via an alarm contact.
Special importance has been given to monitoring the external and
internal auxiliary supply circuits. The A/D converters (external CT/VT
input boards Type 316EA62 or 316EA63 or A/D converters on the
CPU board) are checked for their functioning and tolerance, by
comparing with the A/D conversion of two reference voltages.
The execution of the program itself is monitored by a watchdog.
Security when transferring data by serial communication between the
protection and a local control and setting unit (PC) or with a remote
system (station control system) is provided by a communication
protocol with a "Hamming" distance of 4.
Special functions are provided for monitoring the integrity of the VT
connections and for checking the symmetry of the three phase
voltages and currents.
6.2. Monitoring the auxiliary supply
Both the external auxiliary supply applied to the protection and the
internal electronic supplies are continuously monitored. The supply
unit is capable of bridging supply interruptions up to 50 ms. After this
time, the O/P's are blocked and the unit is reset and reinitialized.
6.3. Monitoring the firmware
A hardware timer (watchdog) monitors the execution of the program.
Providing the program runs correctly, the timer is reset at regular
intervals. Should for some reason the execution of the program be
interrupted and the timer not be reset, the O/Ps are blocked and the
unit reinitialized.
Note: If a watchdog start has occurred five times within 24 hours, the
device is blocked and indicates fatal error.
6-2
6.4. Monitoring the hardware

For the most part, the hardware is either monitored or self-testing both
while the system is being initialized after switching on and afterwards
during normal operation. Upon switching on the auxiliary supply, a test
routine completely checks the hardware including the RAM and the
flash EPROM checksums. The function and accuracy of the A/D
converter is tested by converting a 10 V reference voltage to a digital
value and checking that the result lies within 1 %.
The 'power up' test takes about 10 seconds. During this period the
green ('Active') LED is OFF and the protection functions are blocked.
Upon successful completion of the test, the green LED flashes and the
start-up routine commences. As soon as the green LED is ON, the
device is operational.
The above routine continues to run in the background during normal
operation, and the memory (excepting the RAM) is checked
periodically. The reference voltage, current and voltage signals are
converted to digital signals (A/D converters), and continuously
monitored.
6-3
6.5. Diagnostic events

A corresponding entry is made in the event list whenever the
diagnostic function detects a failure.
The following entries in the list are possible:
System start
The device was switched on.
Protection restart
The protection and control functions were activated.
System warm start
The device was restarted after the reset button was pressed or a
watchdog time-out.
Protection stop
The protection and control functions were stopped by the
parameters being re-entered.
Supply failure
The device was switched off or there was a supply failure.
Diagnosis: main processor 316VC61a/316VC61b ready (0001H).

Diagnosis: A/D processor EA6. not ready.
The external A/D processor 316EA62 or 316EA63 is not ready.
This occurs during normal operation, because the A/D processor
on the 316VC61a/316VC61b is active.
Diagnosis: internal A/D ready (0001H)
The A/D processor on the 316VC61a/316VC61b is ready.
Diagnosis: system status: OK
The above list of diagnostic messages reflects the operating state

when the device is standing by.
6-4
The following messages and hexadecimal weightings can be

generated by a fault recognized by the diagnosis in the device:
Designation Function Weighting

RDY Device standing by 0001H
WDTO Watchdog time-out 0002H
WDDIS Watchdog disabled 0004H
HLT Stop procedure initiated 0008H
SWINT Software interrupt 0010H
RAM RAM error 0100H
ROM ROM error 0200H
VREF Reference voltage out-of-tolerance 0400H
ASE A/D converter error 0800H
EEPROM Parameter memory error 2000H
Table 6.1 Hexadecimal weightings
The hexadecimal weighting of an error message may also be the

addition of simpler errors. For example, VREF and ASE are recorded
as 0400H + 0800H = 0C00H.
Failures with a weighting less than 080H are listed as minor errors,
e.g. a warm start after pressing the reset button.
Failures with a weighting higher than 0100H are fatal errors and result
in blocking of the protection and control functions.
Note: Normally, a 'fatal error' always blocks the protection and

control functions.
To reset a 'fatal error' switch the device off and on. If the error
disappeared, the device will restart and change to 'no error'.
6-5
Example
Diagnostic signal CPU Diagnostic signal 316EA6.
Fig. 6.1 Event list after switching the device off and on
6.6. Device diagnosis

Device diagnostic data can be viewed by selecting 'Signals' and
Diagnostics from the HMI main menu:
Fig. 6.2 Diagnostics menu
6-6
Selecting 'List Diagnostic Info' shows the following:

Selection of plug-in unit Status signals
Fig. 6.3 Device diagnosis
The green status signals indicate that the protection unit is in order.
Red and not green colors of one or more status signals indicate an
erroneous behavior, a fatal error, of the device.
The yellow status signals indicate a non-urgent error. The errors are
explained in more detail under Details. For viewing details of other
cards these must be selected beforehand.
6-7
Significance of the individual status signals:
Status Display Significance

State of the No error Signifies that the device is fully
device operational.
Non-urgent error Signifies that the device is operational,
however that a restart has occurred (see
also Fig. 6.4), or that the plug-in unit
316EA6 is not ready.
Urgent error This error occurs if an EEPROM error
has occurred on the 316EA62 plug-in
unit.
Fatal error A severe error blocking the device.
Protection Running This means that the device has been
state configured.
Not running The green LED on the device front is
flashing, because no valid configuration
has yet been uploaded in the device.
Internal No error This means that the A/D conversion on
A/D status (with 316EA6.) the 316EA6 plug-in unit is ready and
running.
Not ready This means that the A/D conversion on
(with 316EA6.) the 316EA6 card is not running. This is
not a problem, since the conversion
occurs on the 316VC61card.
Not ready This means that the A/D conversion on
(with 316EA6.) the 316EA6 card is not running.
Table 6.2 Status signals
Note: Pay no further attention to non-urgent errors.

The status signals may be cancelled with the reset button or with the
aid of the reset menu of the local signal. The status signals are reset
automatically at the latest after one day.
6-8
6.6.1. Signaling of the detailed diagnostic information 316VC61.

The detailed diagnostic information for the individual plug-in units is
displayed by their selection and with the button Details.
Details of the CPU 316VC61. are to be interpreted as follows:
HW-number: 00000078D5CF1
Every processor board 316VC61a resp. 316VC61b has a unique
hardware number.
ProcessorID: 04A4
Codes for the microprocessor:
0434 stands for processor board 316VC61a
04A4 stands for processor board 316VC61b
PCMCIA ID: 0082
Code for the PCMCIA controller (PC card).
Firmware Date: = 2002-12-12 08:57;48
Date and time when the device firmware was created.
Set-File Date: = 2002-12-20 14:13;30
Date and time when the parameter settings were last downloaded.
Detailed information on the erroneous behavior is given under
Discovered errors. The mentioned hexadecimal weightings of the
error messages are not encoded here but emitted in text form.
For the error message below (Fig. 6.4) the result is 001BH.
This is composed of 02H + 08H + 10H + 01H = 1BH.
01H for device ready is not indicated as an error.
As an example the warm start of a device is shown as non-urgent
error:
Fig. 6.4 Device diagnosis 316VC61b after warm start
6-9
6.6.2. Display of the detailed diagnostic information 316EA63

The detailed diagnostic information for the individual plug-in units is
displayed by their selection and with the button Details.
The details of 316EA63 are to be interpreted as follows:
Status: Error located
Here the status of the 316EA63 card is specified.
FW version: 4.2.1.3 EA63
Gives information about the firmware of the card. This is uploaded
on this plug-in unit with the CAP2/316. See also Section 7.
4. = means EA-VC interface version
2. = means EA-EA compatibility version
1. = means 316EA63 hardware version
3 = means 316EA63 firmware version
HW version: C.0.1
Gives information about the hardware of the card.
C. = means revision status of the print
0. = means version DIC
1 = means version ACC
EA63 configuration:
Here the configuration of the 316EA63 is specified. This can work
either as master or as slave, whereby L stands for long distance
and K for short distance.
Optical receiver energy A:
Here the signal strength of the receiver A is indicated. This should be
within the range of 400 ... 15000. If the receiving signal is too small,
the 316EA63 configuration at the opposite end must be set to L (long).
If the signal is too strong, it must be set to S (short).
Optical receiver energy B:
This port is not foreseen at present and not to be considered
further.
Under Undiscovered error detailed information of the erroneous
behavior is given. This allows the location and correction of the
error. The following figure (Fig. 6.5) shows an overdriven signal of
the 316EA63.
Fig. 6.5 Detail diagnosis 316EA63 (overdriven)
6-10
The A/D converter 316EA62 resp. 316EA63 generates its own

diagnostic messages:
Short description Function Weighting

Ready Device standing by 0001H
Watchdog Watchdog timeout 0002H
HW version EA EA versions check. Here the 0004H
Incompatibility versions of the two EA-plug-in units are
checked on their versions.
SW version EA EA versions check. Here the 0008H
Incompatibility versions of the two EA-plug-in units are
checked on their versions.
Local channels Error of the local conversion values 0020H
No signal Error of the values transmitted from the 0040H
opposite end, no signal.
Synchronization Error in the communication with the 0040H
opposite end, no synchronization.
RAM error RAM error 0200H
Vref error The reference voltage is out of tolerance 0400H
Vref0 error The admissible base voltage is out of 0800H
tolerance.
Parameter The configurations of both devices exhibit 1000H
incompatibility parameters not compatible with each
other.
Modem A Modem A is not ready. 2000H
not ready
Modem B Modem B is not ready. 4000H
not ready
Table 6.3 Hexadecimal weightings of the 316EA6. card
6-11
6.6.3. Display of the FUPLA status
Fig. 6.6 Display of the FUPLA status
FUPLA status: FUPLA-No. 1 (DIST600 ): in process (Prog).

Shows the name of the FUPLA uploaded in the device. This allows the
explicit identification of the uploaded FUPLA code. The FUPLA can be
processed either in the program memory (Prog) or in the parameter
memory (Para). Uploading the FUPLA code is followed by the start of
the process in the parameter memory. Afterwards the code is copied
into the program memory Prog in the background. In the program
memory the processing speed is higher.
It is possible to upload up to eight different FUPLA logics. The status
of each logic is displayed. The following states are possible:
Status Significance
Blocked (*) The blocking input is preventing the execution of the
FUPLA logic.
Halted (*) The execution of the FUPLA logic has been halted
because, for example, the FUPLA code cannot be
accessed temporarily.
Processing (*) The FUPLA logic is being processed.
Initialized (*) The FUPLA logic is already initialized, but inactive.
Inactive (*) The FUPLA logic is loaded, but is not running.
(*) The respective states can be processed either in the
(Prog) or (Para) memory. This is shown in brackets in
each case.
Table 6.4 FUPLA status
6-12
6.7. HEX dump

Additional information to the diagnostic information is available by
selecting Diagnostics from the main menu and then Load HEX
dump. The user cannot evaluate this data, but they are frequently
useful to ABB personnel for fault finding. Once the data has been read,
it should be deleted again by selecting Delete HEX dump to make
room for saving new data. There is only one HEX dump that may be
old, because it is not overwritten by the newest device fault.
Fig. 6.7 HEX dump
If you are not sure whether this HEX dump has been generated by the
fault to be examined, forward it together with the following information
to sa-t.supportline@se.abb.com:
HEX DUMP (*.hdp)
Device configuration (*.set)
Information about the used CAP2/316 software version
Device type: REG-, RET-, REC- or REL316*4,
with or without local display unit (LDU, display on the front)
Event list (*.evt or *.ebn)
Stored diagnostic information (*.rtf)
6.8. IBB information

Depending on the firmware installed and therefore the choice of the
interbay bus, various data on the status of the bus in relation to the
station control system and the PC card can be obtained via this menu
item.
6-13
6.8.1. SPA bus

In the case of the SPA bus, only little information is displayed, such as
status information, number of errors, etc..
Fig. 6.8 Diagnostic menu for the SPA bus
6.8.2. LON bus

In the case of LON bus, information about the PC card and the number
of messages transmitted and received is provided.
Fig. 6.9 Diagnostic menu for the LON bus
6-14
The table below explains the significance of the various items of

information.
Text displayed Significance

Neuron Chip ID-No. Hardware number of the neuron chip on the PC
card
Domain Number of the domain to which the device
belongs (can be set via the LON bus).
Subnet No. Number of the sub-network to which the device
belongs (can be set via the LON bus).
Node No. Device node number (can be set via the LON
bus).
Transmission errors Number of errors detected during reception
Transaction timeouts Number of transaction confirmations not
received.
Receiver transaction Number of messages received that were lost,
timeouts because of incorrect settings at the receiving
end.
Missed messages Number of messages lost, because the receive
memory in the RE.316*4 was full.
Reset cause Reason for the last restart executed by the PC
card.
Interface status Normal: Configured and on-line.
Version number PC card firmware version
Error number 0 = no error otherwise error on the PC card.
Model number Always 0
Driver state OK or error message
Cross table for network Valid or invalid (table loaded via the LON bus).
variables
No. Of semaphore hits Information for ABB purposes
No. Of semaphore Information for ABB purposes
misses
No. Of semaphore fails Information for ABB purposes
No. Of IN buffer Number of messages received and lost, because
overflows the driver buffer was full.
No. Of transmitted Total number of messages transmitted since the
messages information was deleted.
No. Of received Total number of messages received since the
messages information was deleted.
No. Of transmitting errors Counts the number of data transmitted
erroneously.
6-15

No. Of OUT buffer Number of messages not transmitted, because
overflows the buffer on the PC card was full.
No. Of event buffer Number of events not transmitted, because the
overflows buffer on the PC card was full.
No. Of lost incoming Number of messages lost, because the driver
messages receive buffer was full.
Table 6.5 Diagnostic information LON
Clear LON Bus diagnostic info 'InterbayBus Diagnostic Info'

Selecting the button 'Clear' resets the various diagnostic information
counters to zero.
Send service telegram 'Serv. Tel'

The button 'Serv. Tel' causes the PC card to send a service telegram,
which corresponds to pressing the service button on the PC card. It is
needed when configuring the network.
6.8.3. MVB bus
The MVB bus provides information about the PC card and the number
of messages transmitted and received.
Fig. 6.10 Diagnostic menu for the MVB bus
6-16
The table below explains the significance of the various items of

information in the diagnostic menu.

Working Mode Indicates the function of the PC card as connection
to the interbay bus. If a PC card is not inserted, 'Not
connected' is displayed on this line
PC-Card Status Initializing, ready, minor error, fatal error, 'no state'
PC-Card Error No error, Unknown error, No response, Initial error,
Subsystem error etc.
PC-Card Type Interbay bus. If a PC card is not inserted, 'Software
unknown' is displayed.
PC-Card SW-Vers. PC card firmware date and version
PC-Card Heartbeat Signals whether the PC card firmware is active or not.
Driver State Possible states: initializing, ready, minor error, fatal
error, ' no state '
Driver Heartbeat Signals whether the driver software in the RE.316*4
is active or not.
No. of received Total number of messages received since the
Messages information was deleted.
No. of transmitted Total number of messages received since the
Messages information was deleted.
No. of Transmission Number of errors while transmitting a message, for
fails example, because the buffer on the PC card was not
available.
No. of lost incoming Number of messages lost, because the driver
Messages receive buffer was full.
Table 6.6 Diagnostic information MVB
Clear MVB-diagnostic info 'InterbayBus Diagnostic Info '

With the button Clear the various counters of the diagnostic
information can be reset to zero.
6-17
6.8.4. IEC 60870-5-103 bus

In the case of the IEC60870-5-103 bus no detailed information is
available.
Fig. 6.11 Diagnostic menu for the IEC 60870-5-103 bus
6.9. RIO information

Information is displayed on the status of the process bus and the
distributed input/output system. A detailed description of the data is
given in publication 1MRB520192-Uen.
6.10. Resetting SCS data

After entering his password, an authorized user can delete the SCS
input data.
6-18
6.11. Possible error messages of CAP2/316
Error message Remedy

- Plug in communication cable
- Check communication interface (Port)
- Switch the device off/on.
- Plug in communication cable

- Switch the device off/on.
- Close another application using the same

interface.
- The wrong CAP2/316 has been used for

the resp. device.
- Use the correct CAP2/316 for the device.
- Connection is not available any more.

Wait possibly until CAP2/316 is in the
offline status. Afterwards select Connect
under Communication.
- Compare the SW key in the settings under

I/O with the one at the rear of the device
(SW Vers SX.YYY).
6-19
- There have been inadmissible connections

made between the protection functions,
which were detected only during the final
test. Check again the connections between
the functions.
- It is possible that the memory for the local
data overflows, if several parameter sets
with many functions are being configured.
In this case these signals are also
and after acknowledgement with 'OK': displayed. Reduce the size of the
configuration.
Table 6.7 Error message and remedy
6-20
October 2004
7. INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE7-3
7.1. Summary............................................................................................7-3
7.2. Inspection and precautions ................................................................7-4

7.2.1. Inspection upon receipt......................................................................7-4
7.2.2. Precautions to avoid transport damage .............................................7-4
7.3. Assembly ...........................................................................................7-4

7.3.1. Place of installation and ambient conditions ......................................7-4
7.3.2. Cubicle ...............................................................................................7-5
7.3.3. Installing racks in cubicles .................................................................7-6
7.4. Installation..........................................................................................7-6
7.4.1. Grounding guidelines .........................................................................7-6
7.4.1.1. Cubicle grounding ..............................................................................7-6
7.4.1.2. Additional grounding points along cables ........................................7-11
7.4.2. Wiring...............................................................................................7-11
7.4.2.1. External wiring .................................................................................7-11
7.4.2.2. Internal wiring...................................................................................7-11
7.4.3. Screening.........................................................................................7-12
7.4.3.1. Cable screens ..................................................................................7-12
7.4.3.2. Terminating cable screens...............................................................7-12
7.4.4. Communication cables.....................................................................7-13
7.4.4.1. Laying optical fiber cables................................................................7-15
7.4.5. Guidelines for wiring rack assemblies..............................................7-15
7.4.6. Checking the CT connections ..........................................................7-18
7.4.7. Checking the VT connections ..........................................................7-18
7.4.8. Checking the auxiliary supply connections ......................................7-19
7.4.9. Checking the duty of the tripping and signaling contacts .................7-19
7.4.10. Checking the opto-coupler inputs ....................................................7-19
7.5. Commissioning ................................................................................7-20

7.5.1. Connecting the setting and control PC ............................................7-20
7.5.1.1. Minimum PC requirements ..............................................................7-20
7.5.1.2. Serial interface parameters..............................................................7-20
7.5.1.3. PC connecting cable ........................................................................7-20
7.5.2. Connecting the equipment to the auxiliary d.c. supply.....................7-20
7.5.3. Connecting the binary inputs and outputs........................................7-21
7.5.4. Connecting VT and CT circuits ........................................................7-22
7.5.5. Connecting optical fiber cables for the longitudinal differential
protection .........................................................................................7-22
7.5.6. Commissioning tests........................................................................7-23
7.6. Maintenance ....................................................................................7-24

7.6.1. Fault-finding .....................................................................................7-24
7.6.1.1. Stand-by LED on the frontplate........................................................7-24
7.6.1.2. Human/machine interface ................................................................7-25
7-1
7.6.1.3. Restarting.........................................................................................7-26
7.7. Software updates .............................................................................7-27

7.7.1. Settings ............................................................................................7-27
7.7.2. Deleting the settings and the program and downloading a new
program............................................................................................7-27
7.7.3. Problems transferring the new software ..........................................7-28
7.8. Replacing hardware units ................................................................7-30
7.9. Testing the protection functions .......................................................7-32

7.9.1. MODURES test set XS92b ..............................................................7-32
7.9.1.1. Test socket case XX93 and test connector YX91-4.........................7-33
7.9.1.2. Test socket casing 316 TSS 01, test plug RTXH 24 and
test cable YX 91-7............................................................................7-34
7.9.1.3. Switching to the test mode...............................................................7-34
7.9.2. Testing the distance protection function ..........................................7-35
7.9.3. Checking the direction of measurement ..........................................7-35
7.9.4. Testing the directional E/F function..................................................7-37
7.9.4.1. Injecting power system voltages and currents .................................7-37
7.9.4.2. Real power measurement................................................................7-37
7.9.4.3. Apparent power measurement.........................................................7-38
7.9.4.4. Testing using a test set ....................................................................7-39
7-2
7. INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

7.1. Summary
The place of installation and the ambient conditions must conform to
the data given in the data sheet (see Chapter 8). Sufficient room must
be left in front and behind the equipment to allow access for
maintenance or adding to the system. Air must be allowed to circulate
freely around the unit.
During the course of commissioning, all the wiring to the unit must be
checked and the auxiliary supply voltage and the voltage for the opto-
coupler inputs must be measured.
Functional testing can be carried out with the aid of the test set Type
XS92b.
All the essential functions of the protection are subject to continuous
self-testing and monitoring and therefore periodic maintenance and
testing are not normally necessary.
It is recommended, however, to check the values of the voltages and
currents of the external circuits from time to time using the on the input
channel display on the HMI. The tripping circuits should be tested at
the same time.
7-3
7.2. Inspection and precautions

7.2.1. Inspection upon receipt
Upon receipt, check that the consignment is complete. Inform your
local ABB company or representative should discrepancies be found in
relation to the delivery note, shipping documents or order.
Visually check all the items when unpacking. Should any transport
damage be found, lodge a claim in writing with the last carrier without
delay and inform the nearest ABB company or agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, it must be
stored in a suitable room in its original packing.
7.2.2. Precautions to avoid transport damage
Install the relays carefully into the racks so that they cannot fall out.
Relays and other loose parts that are separate must be packed in the
original packing box to preclude damage.
7.3. Assembly
7.3.1. Place of installation and ambient conditions
When choosing the place of installation, ensure that there is sufficient
space in front of the equipment, i.e. that the serial interface connector
and the local control and display unit are easily accessible.
In the case of semi-flush mounting or installation in 19" equipment
racks, space behind the equipment must be provided for adding ancil-
lary units (e.g. 316DB61 and 316DB62), replacing units and changing
electronic components (firmware).
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or de-
stroyed by inadmissible ambient conditions
the relay location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution
(dust, aggressive substances)
severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of
humidity, surge voltages of high amplitude and short rise time and
strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as far as pos-
sible
air should be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment
The room where the equipment is installed should be free of dust, the
floor covered if possible with a semi-conducting plastic flooring mate-
rial and cement floors and walls should be suitably painted.
The room must be well ventilated so that the temperature is in the
range 10 C to +55 C and the relative humidity between 30 and 70%.
Lead/acid batteries must not be in the same room.
7-4
7.3.2. Cubicle
The cubicles delivered by ABB are equipped with a hinged frame and
are suitable for installation:
standing against a wall
back-to-back
side-by-side
free-standing
Leave sufficient space in front to avoid damage when the hinged frame
is opened. There must generally be enough room for carrying out
maintenance and for using the associated instruments.
Do not install equipment cubicles in corners, which would hinder
opening the hinged frame and working on the cubicle.
Free access is especially important in the case of cubicles not
equipped with a hinged frame. Cubicles are normally erected on a
pedestal or as a suite of cubicles on a platform to facilitate cleaning the
floor and routing of cables.
Fig. 7.1 Example of a front view and view with the hinged
equipment frame swung out of a cubicle
7-5
7.3.3. Installing racks in cubicles

Pay attention when determining the cubicle layout to leave a space of
at least 1 Unit between the racks (1 U / 1 HE = 44.45 mm as specified
in IEC 60297 and DIN 41494 Part 1). This space is necessary for
cables and ventilation to prevent overheating (see Fig. 7.1).
7.4. Installation
7.4.1. Grounding guidelines

Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over-volt-
ages on instrument transformer and control signal cables. There is
also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical instal-
lations that can induce spurious currents in the relays themselves or
the leads connected to them.
Transient overvoltages and RF fields can affect the operation of the
relay.
On the other hand, the relay can transmit interference that can
interfere with and disrupt the operation of other relays.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain stan-
dards have to be observed with respect to grounding, wiring and
screening.
NOTICE: All these precautions can only be effective if the station

ground is of good quality.
7.4.1.1. Cubicle grounding
Mechanical design
The RF (radio frequency) impedance from the location of the various
relays in the cubicle to the cubicle ground must be low.
There must therefore be a good electrical contact between the metal
parts of the cubicle such as side plates, blanking plates etc., and the
frame and base of the cubicle. The contact surfaces must not only be
good electrical conductors, they must also be corrosion-proof so that
long-term good electrical conductivity is preserved.
Non-observance of these conditions can result in the cubicle or parts
of it resonating at certain frequencies, which increase the interference
transmitted by the relays in the cubicle and can lower their immunity to
electrical interference from outside.
7-6
Grounding straps (copper braid) and their fittings

The interference currents conducted by the ground connections are of
high frequency and as a result of the skin effect, only the part of the
ground straps near the surface is of consequence.
Tinned copper braid is therefore used for the ground straps and not
copper rod, because the cross-section of an equivalent rod would be
much greater.
Data of copper braid straps:
Width 20 mm
Cross-section 16 mm2
(necessary for protection grounds)
Both ends of the straps must be fitted with lugs suitable for the con-
necting to ground bolts.
The surfaces in contact with the lugs must be electrically conducting
and corrosion-proof.
2
1
1 Copper braid
2 Cable lug
3 Ground bolt
4 Steel flat washer
5 Contact surface
Fig. 7.2 Grounding straps and fixture
CAUTION: In the case of aluminium contact surfaces, a cupal disc

(copper-plated aluminium) must be fitted between the lug and
aluminium surface to prevent corrosion.
7-7
Grounding a single cubicle

The moving parts of a cubicle such as the doors (front and rear) or
hinged frame must be connected to the cubicle structure by three
copper braid straps.
} } Braided copper strip, width 20 mm, cross-section 16 mm2

} Ground rail terminal (sleeve) or conducting connection
1 Door or hinged frame

2 Cubicle ground rail near bottom of cubicle
3 Station ground
4 RE.316*4
Fig. 7.3 Cubicle grounding principles
The cubicle ground rail is connected to the station ground by a copper

braid strap.
If the distance to the station ground exceeds 5 m, two straps must be
run in parallel as closely as possible to each other.
7-8
Grounding principles for adjacent cubicles

Where cubicles are standing next to each other (less than 1 m apart),
observe the following additional conditions (example with 2 cubicles):
HEST 045 001 V
1 Cubicle
2 Cubicle ground rail
3 Station ground
Fig. 7.4 Grounding principles for two adjacent cubicles
(schematic view)
The ground rails in the two cubicles are connected together and each
one individually connected to the station ground. The ground rails of
cubicles that are more than 1 m apart do not have to be connected.
The cubicles of a suite of several cubicles are also connected together
and each one individually connected to the station ground.
7-9
Grounding for relays mounted in an open frame

An open frame must be electrically conducting, corrosion-proof and
properly connected to the station ground (see below).
1 1 1
4 4 4
5
} non-insulated connection
1 Electrically conducting connection on both sides

2 Mounting plate
3 Open frame
4 braided copper (at least 3 cm wide)
5 Station ground
Fig. 7.5 Methods of grounding relays in open frames
(front view, semi-flush and surface mounting)
The contact surfaces between mounting plates or covers and the

frame must be electrically conducting, i.e. neither contact surface may
be painted and the contact area must be corrosion-proof (e.g. gal-
vanized).
The relays must be grounded directly to the rack frame (see Fig. 7.5),
if the contact surfaces are poor conductors or to the mounting plate
providing the surfaces are good conductors.
The relays must be grounded such that the grounding straps are as
short as possible.
As described in Section 7.4.1.1., a second grounding strap must be
run in parallel if the station ground is more than 5 m away.
Also refer to document 1MRB520197-Ten 'Grounding and Wiring of
Control and Protection Equipment'.
7-10
7.4.1.2. Additional grounding points along cables

Where cubicles are at different potentials, balancing currents can flow
through the screens of cables that are grounded at both ends, which
induce interference in the cable cores. Where the distance between
the cubicles is greater than approximately 10 m, the induced inter-
ference can be strong enough to affect the equipment.
One solution is to run the cables next to the ground rails of the station
grounding mesh and to ground the cables screens every 5 to 10 m.
For this purpose, remove a suitable length of insulation and fit a clamp
to ground the exposed screen to a grounded metal surface. The clamp
and the metal surface must be clean, electrically conducting and cor-
rosion-proof.
The type of clamp must be chosen such that it holds the cable firmly
without pinching or crushing the screen of the cores.
7.4.2. Wiring
7.4.2.1. External wiring
The external wiring includes all the connections between the primary
system plant and the cubicle, rack or relay terminals.
The corresponding cables should be run in metal cable ducts that are
connected at several points to the station ground.
The external wiring comprises of the following groups:
instrument transformer leads
auxiliary supply connections
binary inputs and outputs
Experience as shown that most interference is induced in the instru-

ment transformer leads and therefore these should be run in sepa-
rate cable ducts away from the other cables.
CAUTION: The instrument transformer leads in GIS stations must

be screened (see Section 7.4.3. 'Screening'). This is also to be recom-
mended in other kinds of stations.
7.4.2.2. Internal wiring

The internal wiring comprises the connections between the cubicle or
rack terminals and the terminals on the relays. This wiring should be
kept as short as possible especially in open frames.
As described in Section 7.4.2.1. 'External wiring', it is recommended to
separate the instrument transformer leads from the other cables, i.e.
they should not be run in the same cable ducts or loom. To reduce the
7-11
risk of parallel coupling, cables may also be crossed at right angles.

The minimum cross coupling occurs when cables cross at right angles.
Pre-wiring non-defined inputs should be avoided wherever possible for
EMC reasons (antenna for interference).
7.4.3. Screening
7.4.3.1. Cable screens

Cables have braided screens with a cover ratio of more than 80%.
7.4.3.2. Terminating cable screens
Cable screens must be terminated such that the entire circumference
of the screen is in contact with ground. Cable screens must be
grounded at both ends.
CAUTION: The screening effect is inadequate in industrial instal-

lations if the cable screen is grounded by a wire soldered to it.
The screens of cables can be grounded best if the cables enter cubi-
cles via cable glands. Where this is not possible, proceed as illustrated
in Fig. 7.6, taking care that that the cable screens are grounded inside
the cubicle as closely as possible to the entrance.
In order to connect the screen to ground, remove a suitable length of
the insulation, push the exposed screen back over end of the remain-
ing insulation and clamp it to a metal surface. Both the clamp and the
metal surface must be electrically conducting and corrosion-proof.
1 3
2 4
1 Cable insulation
2 Screen pushed back over end of insulation
3 Cable clamp
4 Cores
Fig. 7.6 Cable screen termination
7-12
It is important that the screen be pushed back over the end of the
insulation as otherwise it frays with time and the quality of the ground
connection diminishes. The risk of the screen and cores being pinched
is also reduced.
Screens in the case of open frames are also secured by a clamp to the
mounting plate close to the relay as shown in Fig. 7.7.
1 Equipment frame
2 Bare mounting plate with relay
3 Cable screen terminations
4 Station ground
5 Screened cables
Fig. 7.7 Cable screen terminations in open equipment frames
(rear view for semi-flush mounting, front view for surface
mounting)
The unscreened ends of the cores going to the relay terminals must be
kept as short as possible and the groups of cables should be run sepa-
rately as explained in Section 7.4.2.2. 'Internal wiring'.
7.4.4. Communication cables
No precautions have to be taken in the case of optical fiber cables.
Conventional copper communication cables must be screened (see
Section 7.4.3.). The cable shield must be effectively connected to
ground in the cubicles at both ends immediately adjacent to the cable
inlet (see Section 7.4.1.1.).
With the cable shields grounded at both ends, any potential differences
between the cubicles will cause balancing currents to flow in the
shields that can induce interference in the cables. This can interfere
with the function of a relay at cable lengths of 10 m and more.
7-13
A possible solution is to run the cables along ground rails of the

meshed ground system of the station building and grounding the
shields at intervals of 5 to 10 m.
For this purpose, a suitable length of insulation is stripped from the
shield and the exposed shield connected by a cable cleat to a
grounded metal surface (Fig. 7.6). Both the cleat and the contact
surface must be electrically conducting and non-corroding.
An alternative is to run a low-impedance ground connection parallel to
the screened cables to 'bypass' the balancing currents.
1 2 3
5 4
HEST 045 002 V
1 Second cubicle, e.g. control console

2 Screened signal cable
3 Cubicle
4 Grounded cable shield
5 Bypass (braided copper parallel ground)
Fig. 7.8 Low-impedance parallel ground connection
Fig. 7.8 shows a parallel ground connection between an substation

automation system console and a cubicle. The same arrangement
applies in the case of two cubicles.
The parallel ground is of braided copper. It should be kept parallel to
the signal cable. This reduces the RF impedance of the connection. To
ensure that the screened cable and the bypass ground remain
physically parallel, they can be loosely strapped together at intervals.
Cables conducting analog (LF) signals must have twisted cores. Multi-
core cables must have twisted pairs.
7-14
7.4.4.1. Laying optical fiber cables

Refer to the suppliers instructions for how to lay optical fiber cables.
Optical fiber cables may never be sharply bent or pinched. Always
observe the minimum permissible bending radius (typically 50 mm).
7.4.5. Guidelines for wiring rack assemblies

Where digital protection devices (individual units) or protection
systems are supplied in a rack, it is essential that the binary inputs
and outputs (BIOs) and the auxiliary supply which have to be wired
from the rack to the cubicle terminals be run separately from the CT
and VT cables (not in the same duct or loom).
This precaution reduces the parallel coupling of conducted inter-
ference.
Should this not be possible along the whole route, parallel coupling
can be reduced by transposing the cables. Complete separation,
however, is to be preferred.
7-15
RE. 316*4
c.t's/v.t's
Aux. supply
Aux. supply
Crossing
c.t's/v.t's
Terminals
Fig. 7.9 Separation of rack wiring in a cubicle
Screened leads must be used for the CT and VT wiring from the
terminals to the equipment.
Recommendation
It is also recommended to use screened leads for the binary inputs
and outputs (BIOs) and the auxiliary supply.
The following applies if the equipment is not installed in a
cubicle:
The terminals should be as close as possible to the equipment
terminals so that the unscreened lengths of cables are very short!
Screened CT, VT, binary input and output and auxiliary supply cables
can be secured in one of the following ways:
7-16
Assemblies fitted into panels

CT and VT leads to the terminals can be secured, for example, to a
surface (steel rail) using cable clamps. The surface must be in direct
contact with the plant ground and the cable screens must make good
contact with the cable clamps all the way round.
This, however, is not always the case and the screen is frequently not
in contact at the sides which impairs the screening effect. To over-
come this drawback, a tinned copper braid tape can be wound on top
of the cable screen in the region of the clamps. This then ensures
maximum screening efficiency.
Assemblies fitted into cubicles
(2 alternatives)
a) The CT and VT cables going to the terminals can pass through
cable glands. Again the cable screens must be in good contact
with the gland all the way round and the gland with the station
ground (e.g. via the panel or strip material in which the gland is
fitted).
CT and VT leads to the terminals can be secured, for example, to a
surface (steel or copper) using conduit clamps. The surface (e.g. floor
plate) must be in direct contact with the station ground and the cable
screens must make good contact with the conduit clamps all the way
round.
b) This, however, is not always the case and the screen is frequently
not in contact at the sides which impairs the screening effect. To
overcome this drawback, a tinned copper braid tape can be wound
on top of the cable screen in the region of the clamps. This then
ensures maximum screening efficiency.
To prevent corrosion, a Cupal disc (copper plated aluminium) must be
inserted between aluminium and copper parts.
7-17
7.4.6. Checking the CT connections

The CTs must be connected in strict accordance with diagram
supplied with the equipment.
The following must be carried out to check the CTs and CT circuits:
polarity check
primary injection test
plot of the excitation curve
CT circuit grounding
The polarity check (as close as possible to the protection equipment)

not only checks the current input circuit as a whole, it also checks the
phase-angle of the CT.
Primary injection checks for a ratio error and the wiring to the protec-
tion equipment. Each phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase circuit
should be injected. In each case, the phase currents and the neutral
current should be measured.
The relative polarities of the CTs and their ratios can also be checked
using load current.
Plotting the excitation curve verifies that the protection is connected to
a protection core and not a metering core.
Each electrically independent current circuit may only be earthed in
one place, in order to avoid balancing currents created by potential
differences.
Core-balance CTs
If the residual current is obtained from a core-balance CT, the ground
for the cable screen must first be taken back through the core-balance
CT before connecting it to ground. The purpose of this is to ensure that
any spurious E/F current flowing along the screen of the cable cancels
itself and is not measured falsely as an E/F on the relays own feeder.
7.4.7. Checking the VT connections

The VTs must be connected in strict accordance with diagram supplied
with the equipment.
The following checks must be carried out to check the VT circuits:
polarity check
wiring check
VT circuit grounding
The rated voltage of an E/F protection scheme is defined as the volt-

age which occurs between the terminals 'e' and 'n' for a solid phase-to-
ground fault. An E/F of this kind, e.g. on T phase (see Fig. 7.10),
causes the voltages of R and S phases to increase from phase-to-
7-18
neutral to phase-to-phase potential and these add vectorially to pro-

duce a voltage between terminals 'e' and 'n', which is three times the
phase-to-neutral voltage.
R R
UR
U0
3
u
UR
UT US
u
T S T US S
HEST 945 002 C
a) normal load condition b) E/F on T phase
Fig. 7.10 Voltages in an ungrounded three-phase power system
7.4.8. Checking the auxiliary supply connections

Check that the supply is connected with the correct polarity. The d.c.
supply voltage must lie within the permissible operating range of the
power supply unit installed under all operating conditions (see Techni-
cal Data for the respective power supply unit).
The power supply unit, type 316NG65 is protected by a fuse, type
T 3.15 A.
7.4.9. Checking the duty of the tripping and signaling contacts
Check that the loads connected to all the contacts are within the
specified ratings given in the 'Contact ratings' section of the data sheet.
7.4.10. Checking the opto-coupler inputs
Check the polarity and supply voltage of all opto-coupler inputs in re-
lation to the ordering code (also given on the rating plate at the rear of
the equipment).
7-19
7.5. Commissioning
Before commencing commissioning, i.e. before the station is ener-
gized, carry out the checks given in Section 7.4.4.
7.5.1. Connecting the setting and control PC
Connect the serial interface of the PC to the interface connector on the
front of the equipment. Details of the communication parameters and
the connector pins are given in the following Sections.
7.5.1.1. Minimum PC requirements
The minimum requirements to be fulfilled by the HMI PC are:
MS Windows 3.1x, Windows 95 or Windows NT4.0 operating
system or higher
16 MByte RAM
1 floppy drive (3"; 1.44 MByte) and a hard disc with at least
12 MByte of free space
1 serial interface (RS-232C)
1 parallel interface (Centronics)
7.5.1.2. Serial interface parameters
The HMI initializes the serial interface and automatically sets the
corresponding parameters.
7.5.1.3. PC connecting cable
The connecting cable between the serial interface connectors on the
frontplate of the protection equipment (optical connector on the front of
the local control and display unit) and on the PC (9-pin SUB-D plug) is an
optical fiber cable with the order No. 1MRB380084-R1 (see data sheet).
7.5.2. Connecting the equipment to the auxiliary d.c. supply
The plug for the auxiliary supply is inserted upon delivery in the con-
nector at the rear of the power supply unit. This plug must be fitted to
the power supply cable as shown in Fig. 7.11.
7-20
+ POL - POL
N.C. N.C.
HEST 935 055 C
Fig. 7.11 Auxiliary supply plug
7.5.3. Connecting the binary inputs and outputs

In the case of the narrow casing (N1), the binary inputs and outputs
have to be wired to connectors C and D at the rear for the first unit and
to connectors A and B for the second unit.
In the case of the wide casing (N2), the binary inputs and outputs have
to be wired to connectors G and H at the rear for the first unit, to con-
nectors E and F for the second, to connectors C and D for the third
unit and to connectors A and B for the fourth unit.
NOTICE: All external auxiliary relays or other inductances

controlled by signals from the protection must be fitted with free-wheel
diodes across their coils.
Instructions for wiring the terminals

Type and gauge of wire:
The signal connections to the terminals are made with 1.5 mm2
stranded wire. Do not use crimped sleeves or other terminations;
the flexible cores are protected by the design of the terminals.
Terminating the wires:
Do not strip more than 10 mm of insulation from the ends of the
wires. Insert the stripped ends of the cores perpendicularly to the
rear of the device into the terminals and secure with the nearby
screw. As the channel for the wire in the terminals is slightly
curved, twisting the wires slightly when inserting them is a help.
Only insert one stranded wire into each terminal.
Take care that no strands protrude that may cause arcing or short-
circuits.
7-21
Bridging terminals:
Where it is necessary to bridge terminals, do so at external
terminals on the cubicle.
7.5.4. Connecting VT and CT circuits
Instructions for wiring the terminals

Type and gauge of wire:
The VT and CT connections to the terminals are made with
2.5 mm2 stranded wire (e.g. H07V-K). The ends of the wires in this
case must be fitted with crimped sleeves.
VT and CT connections may be made alternatively by 4 mm2 solid
wire.
Terminating the wires:
Insert the ends of the wires perpendicularly to the rear of the
device into the terminals and secure them by tightening the screw
next to each one.
Take care that no strands protrude that may cause arcing or short-
circuits.
Bridging terminals:
Where it is necessary to bridge neighboring terminals, do so
directly at the protective device using standard links (e.g. as
manufactured by PHOENIX). The terminals are designed to
accommodate these in addition to a 2.5 mm2 gauge lead.
Alternatively, circuits have to be bridged at external terminals on
the cubicle.
7.5.5. Connecting optical fiber cables for the longitudinal differential

protection
Optical fiber cables are connected using Type FC connectors.
NOTICE: Take care when inserting the connectors only to tighten

the screw fitting after checking that the ridge on the plug is properly
engaged in the groove of the base.
To exclude any risk of false tripping when connecting or disconnecting

a cable in operation, only do so after the auxiliary supply to at least
one of the terminal units has been switched off.
In cases where the terminal units are connected via communications
devices such as FOX-U, ensure that the communication in both
directions is via the same route (equal lengths).
Otherwise follow the instructions for the 'A/D Converter' in Section 3.4.1.
7-22
7.5.6. Commissioning tests

For the protection scheme as a whole to operate correctly, it is not
enough for just the protection equipment itself to be in order, the reli-
able operation of the other items of plant in the protection chain such
as circuit-breakers, CTs and VTs (e.g. protection and metering core
leads exchanged), station battery (earth fault), alarm and signaling
circuits etc. The wiring between these items is equally important.
The correct operation of the equipment itself is determined by the
following tests:
secondary injection of every current and voltage input
activating and deactivating every binary input (opto-coupler)
energizing and de-energizing every auxiliary tripping and signaling
relay
checking the settings (printed by the HMI)
These tests confirm that none of the protection hardware is defective.
The actual protection functions are contained in the software and are
continuously monitored. They do not therefore need to be especially
tested during commissioning.
The following is a list of some of the tests and the faults they are
intended to disclose.
Test Faults disclosed

Injection of rated value at all CT and VT Hardware defective
inputs (e.g. using test set Type XS 92b) Wrong rated current
Wrong rated voltage
Wrong reference value
Activation/deactivation of all binary Hardware defective
inputs (opto-couplers) Incorrect setting
(not inverted)
Incorrect assignment
Energization of all auxiliary tripping Hardware defect
relays (using the test function) Incorrect assignment
Energization/de-energization of all Hardware defect
auxiliary signaling relays (using the test Incorrect assignment
function)
A further useful facility is provided by the 'Display analog values' menu

which enables the currents and voltages applied to the protection to be
viewed. It can thus be seen whether the amplitude and phase of the
currents and voltages are correct. The Appendix in Chapter 12 includes
a test report.
7-23
7.6. Maintenance
Because of the self-testing and monitoring features included, the
equipment requires neither special maintenance nor periodic testing.
Where testing is considered necessary, the following procedure is
recommended:
Measure the currents and voltages in the secondaries of the main
CTs and VTs and compare the results with the values displayed by
the HMI.
Test the external circuits using the test functions provided by the
HMI (see Section 5.5.3.).
The life of the wet electrolytic condensers is about 20 years. This
assumes a mean ambient temperature outside the casing of 40 C. An
increase of 10 C shortens the life by half and a decrease of 10 C
extends it by half.
7.6.1. Fault-finding
7.6.1.1. Stand-by LED on the frontplate
The following may be possible causes, should the green stand-by LED
not light continuously, but be extinguished or flash although the
auxiliary supply is switched on:
Stand-by LED extinguished

The auxiliary supply unit Type 316N65 is not properly inserted or is
defective. Insert properly or replace the unit.
The input/output unit Type 316DB6. is not properly inserted or
defective. Insert properly or replace the unit.
The logic processor Type 316VC61a or 316VC61b is defective.
Replace either the main processor unit or the complete equipment.
Green stand-by LED flashes

The equipment does not have a valid set of parameter settings.
The active set of parameters and the 'software key' are not the
same.
A hardware fault has been discovered by the diagnostic function of
either the 316VC61a/316VC61b or 316EA62 unit.
To determine whether a set of settings has been downloaded to the
equipment, connect it to a PC and start the HMI. Check via the menus
'Editor' and 'Edit function parameters' and 'Edit hardware functions'
whether functions have settings and whether the hardware has been
configured.
7-24
If the settings appear in order, check whether parameters or functions

have been entered which are not permitted by the 'software key'.
Should it appear that there is a disagreement with the 'software key',
proceed as follows:
Connect the equipment to a PC and start the HMI.
Download a slightly changed set of settings to the equipment. The
HMI then compares the 'software key' with the programmed
functions before it actually downloads the settings and reports and
error if they do not agree (EPLD error).
7.6.1.2. Human/machine interface

If communication between the protection equipment and the PC is not
possible even if the stand-by LED is on, then check the serial interface
connectors and connecting cable. If the connection appears to be in
order, try to reboot the PC, and then restart the HMI.
Should this also prove unsuccessful, restart the device either by
selecting the menu item 'Warm start' in the RESET menu on the local
control and display unit (see Section 5.10.8.6.) or by holding the reset
button depressed until the stand-by LED (green) starts to flash (about
10 seconds). This is a software restart, which is equivalent to switching
the auxiliary supply off and on.
NOTICE: In the event of a defect, send the diagnostic information

obtained via 'List DiagInfo' and 'Get Hex Dump' together with the
device settings to your local support center.
The following example is of a ROM defect in the main processor unit:

List DiagInfo:
MODURES 316 Diagnosis
Relay status : fatal error

Main processor VC61 status : Fault detected
ROM
HW number : 000000B0A538
Software = 1995-08-11 11:38;00
Setting = 1992-01-03 09:44;05
Protection stop
A/D processor EA6. status : not ready
internal A/D status : no error
FUPLA status: FUPLA not loaded
Press any button to continue; press <ESC> to close.
7-25
Get Hex Dump:

1000:0000 0004 Error code = stopped
1000:0002 0000 Code segment = 00D8H
1000:0004 06D9 Module name = RUNPROT_TEXT
1000:0006 00D8 Program counter = 06D9H
1000:0008 0004
1000:000A 0052
1000:000C 01F1
1000:000E 0178 EEPROM: 00000000000000101
1000:0010 0199
1000:0012 00A0
1000:0014 00E1
1000:0016 0730
1000:0018 0000
1000:001A 0000
1000:001C 0000
1000:001E 0005.
7.6.1.3. Restarting
The detection of an error or defect by the self-testing and monitoring
functions during normal operation initiates the following:
Processing by the protection functions is stopped and their
operation blocked.
The binary outputs are reset and further operation blocked. This
includes resetting the 'Relay ready' signal, if it was activated.
The stand-by signal (green LED on the frontplate) flashes.
Communication between the PC and the protection equipment remains
intact, however, and provides facility for localizing the cause of the
problem.
Blocking of the protection is maintained until an attempt is made to
restart it by pressing the reset button on the frontplate. Should
restarting be successful, but the original defect still exists, the same
sequence is repeated and the protection is blocked once again.
Either the 316VC61a or 316VC61b unit or the complete equipment has
to be replaced in the case of error messages concerning the main or
logic processors.
Should the diagnostic function report an error in the A/D processor
(Type 316EA62) although none is fitted, the message can be ignored.
If one is fitted, however, it must be replaced.
An entry is made in the event list every time the protection is restarted.
7-26
7.7. Software updates

Updating the software with the latest version and where necessary
also the hardware can add new functions or new features to the
device.
The software version can be is given in the bottom right-hand corner of
the HMI screen when it is operating on-line (the first number is the
version of the HMI and the second number the version of the software
in the equipment).
The HMI is compatible with the equipment software when the first digit
after the point is the same in both numbers.
The equipment software can be updated without opening the equip-
ment, because it is stored in a read/write memory (flash EPROMs).
Generally the software must be updated by ABB personnel. Never-
theless, the procedure is described below so that it can be performed
by correspondingly qualified personnel (PC experience essential) if
necessary.
7.7.1. Settings
Make a backup copy of the settings using the HMI (menu items 'Enter
function parameters' and 'Save in file'). Then close the HMI.
7.7.2. Deleting the settings and the program and downloading a new
program
The following additional files which are necessary to update the firm-
ware are in the HMI directory after installation:
spa316a.h26, lon316a.h26, Software for the processor unit
vdew316a.h26: 316VC61a, depends on communi-
cations protocol.
spa316b.h26, lon316b.h26, Software for the processor unit

vdew316b.h26: 316VC61b, depends on communi-
cations protocol.
The type of processor board can be determined using the HMI diagnos-
tic function. Upon selecting 'Show diagnostic data', one of the lines
displayed is 'HW No.', which in the case of 316VC61a includes the
code '0434':
HW-No.: xxxx/0434/xx
or for 316VC61b the code '04Ax':
HW-No.: xxxx/04Ax/xx
In order to update click on the pull-down menu 'Options' and select
'Firmware download'.
7-27
As soon as the deletion process is completed, the new Firmware for

the desired communication protocol can be selected in the pop-up
window.
The file '*.h26' will be automatically downloaded to the device, which
takes about 5 minutes.
Thereafter the new program is started automatically and the timestamp
of the *.H26 file is stored in the devices.
7.7.3. Problems transferring the new software
Problems and errors can never be excluded when transferring and
saving new software (e.g. supply failure during transfer). Should
something of this kind occur, an attempt can be made to repeat the
transfer by executing the batch file again. If the equipment responds
neither to the call by the batch file nor the HMI, try to reinitialize the
equipment by switching the auxiliary supply off and back on again and
then repeat the transfer of the program file.
Should this also prove unsuccessful, the following procedure must be
executed to delete the contents of the program memory in the main
processor unit:
Devices with the main processor unit 316VC61a have to be opened
and the main processor unit removed from them. Fit the two jumpers
X601 and X602 and reinsert the main processor unit. Switch on the
auxiliary supply and wait for thirty seconds. Switch off the auxiliary
supply and withdraw the main processor again. The program is now
deleted. Remove the two jumpers, plug the main processor in again,
reassemble the equipment and repeat the program transfer procedure.
Switch of the auxiliary supply to devices equipped with main processor
316VC61b and then insert the pin supplied into the socket below the
SPA or VDEW6 communication interface. Switch on the auxiliary
supply for about thirty seconds, switch it off again and withdraw the
pin. This procedure deletes the program and the new program can be
loaded after switching on the auxiliary supply again.
Should the pin not be available, the same procedure can be used as
described in the previous paragraph for the 316VC61a with the
exception that the jumper marked 'TEST' has to be inserted instead of
X601 and X602.
CAUTION ESD: This work should be carried out only by a suitably

qualified personnel. Above all it is essential for the basic precautions
concerning protection against electrostatic discharge be observed.
7-28
Fig. 7.12 Main processor unit 316VC61a showing the jumpers X601
and X602 (derived from HESG 324 502)
7-29
7.8. Replacing hardware units
Qualifications
CAUTION ESD: Hardware units may only be replaced by suitably

qualified personnel. Above all it is essential for the basic precau-
tions concerning protection against electrostatic discharge be
observed.
It may be necessary to transfer existing settings from the relay or

download new ones to the relay, procedures which assume familiarity
with the HMI.
NOTICE: Incorrect handling of the devices and their component

parts can cause damage (to the devices or the plant).
Example of damages:
false tripping of items of plant in operation
destruction of main CTs and VTs etc.
The following are basic precautions which have to be taken to guard
against electrostatic discharge:
Before handling units, discharge the body by touching the station
ground (cubicle).
Hold units only at the edges, do not touch contacts or components.
Only store and transport units in or on the original packing.
Tools required
Relays can be opened at the rear. The backplates are secured either
by Philips screws or Torx screws. Accordingly one of the following is
required:
Philips screwdrivers No. 1 and No. 2
or
Torx screwdrivers No. 10 and No. 20.
Terminal screws are always of the normal slotted type. No other tools
are required.
7-30
Procedure
Follow the check list in the Appendix of Chapter 12. when replacing
hardware units.
The check list is primarily intended for replacing defective units by
ones of the same type (same code). If a different relay configuration is
desired or necessary, units may be have to be replaced. A change of
software may also be involved. At least the codes in the relay and on
the rating place will have to be corrected. Where problems arise,
consult ABB Switzerland Ltd.
In order to keep records of the PCBs installed up-to-date, the corre-
sponding data should be forwarded to ABB Switzerland Ltd, when
PCBs are changed (see Appendix).
NOTICE: When replacing a processor board Type 316VC61a, the

positions of the jumpers must be checked in relation to Fig. 7.13.
HEST 045 007 V HEST 045 008 V
Devices with LDU Devices without LDU
Fig. 7.13 Jumper positions on the processor board 316CV61a

for devices with and without the local control and
display unit (LDU)
7-31
NOTICE: If a processor board, type 316VC61b is replaced in a unit,

check the jumpers according to Fig. 7.14. These jumpers are located
between the two connectors.
Including LDU: X2200 X2201

X2203 X2204
X2206 X2207
Excluding LDU: X2201 X2202
X2204 X2205
X2207 X2208
Fig. 7.14 Jumper positions on the 316VC61b processor board for

devices including and excluding a local control and display
unit (LDU) on the front
7.9. Testing the protection functions

The current data, settings and protection configuration can be selected,
viewed and also printed, providing a printer is connected to the PC, via
the HMI menu 'LIST RELAY SETTINGS' (see Section 5.4.8.).
7.9.1. MODURES test set XS92b

The REL316*4 protection functions can be tested using a normal pro-
tection relay test set, e.g. MODURES XS92b. This is most conveniently
achieve in the plant by inserting the REL316*4 into the test socket
case XX93 or 316 TSS 01 which is wired to the test set.
7-32
A detailed description of the test set XS92b is to be found in data

sheet 1MDB520006-Ben and in the Instructions for Installation and
Operation 1MRB520014-Uen.
7.9.1.1. Test socket case XX93 and test connector YX91-4

Upon inserting the test plug YX91-4 (see Appendices in Chapter 12):
the secondaries of the main CTs are short-circuited
the protection equipment is isolated from the primary system CTs
and VTs
the tripping circuits are interrupted
the protections current and voltage inputs are connected to the
test set
the opto-coupler input OC101 is interrupted which automatically
switches the protection to the test mode
the signaling relay S 102 is connected to the test set.
NOTICE: Every tripping relay has two contacts in parallel. Test plug
YX91-4 can interrupt up to four DC tripping circuits. This must be taken
into account when connecting the tripping circuits.
If necessary, the DC circuits, which have been interrupted, can be

closed on the test set XS92b. For this purpose, twelve 2 mm diameter
sockets marked 1 to 12 are provided on the front of the AC93 unit in
the test set (AX91/92 in the case of XS92a). They are connected in
parallel with test plug contacts B1 to B12 which correspond to sockets
A1 to A12 on the test socket case XX93.
The connections can thus be made again by inserting jumpers in
sockets 1 to 12.
NOTICE: Take care when inserting jumpers into the 2 mm sockets,

because they are directly connected to the DC battery supply for the
tripping circuits!
The surface mounting, semi-flush mounting and 19" rack versions can
all be tested using the test socket case XX93. The corresponding
dimensioned drawings and the wiring diagram for the connections
between the REL316*4 and the XX93 are included in the Appendices
(Chapter 12).
The connections to the test set Type XS92b are established using the
cable and test connector YX91-4. This enables testing with four
currents and three voltages. An ancillary test plug Type YX93 is
optionally available for testing REL316*4 units equipped with a fifth CT
7-33
and a fourth or fifth VT The ancillary plug is inserted into the XX93
casing and connected by banana plugs and cables to the test set.
The connections between the XS92b test set and the XX93 casing via
the YX91-4 test plug are shown in the Appendices (Chapter 12).
7.9.1.2. Test socket casing 316 TSS 01, test plug RTXH 24
and test cable YX 91-7
The test socket casing 316 TSS 01 consists of a casing into which a
block of RTXP 24 test sockets has been installed.
It is suitable for testing the surface mounting, semi-flush mounting and
19" rack versions of the REL316*4. The corresponding dimensioned
drawings and the wiring diagram for the connections between the
REL316*4 and the 316 TSS 01 are included in the Appendices
(Chapter 12).
The connections to the test set Type XS92b are established using the
test connector RTXH 24 and test cable YX91-7. This enables testing
with four currents and three voltages. Banana plugs and cables are
used for connecting REL316*4 units equipped with a fifth CT and a
fourth VT to the test set.
The connections between the XS92b test set and the RTXH24 test
plug and the 316TSS01 casing via the YX91-7 cable are shown in the
Appendices (Chapter 12).
Inserting the test plug RTXH 24 and test cable YX91-7:
short-circuits the secondaries of the main CTs
isolates the protection device from the primary system CTs and VTs
interrupts two auxiliary DC supplies to the tripping relays
connects the current and voltage inputs of the protection device to
the test set
activates the opto-coupler input OC101 to switch the protection
device automatically to the test mode
connects the signaling relay S102 to the test set.
The unused contacts A8-B8 and A9-B9 are available for either inter-
rupting the two other DC circuits or for connecting a fifth VT (for the
synchrocheck function).
7.9.1.3. Switching to the test mode
The protection switches automatically to the injection test mode when
a logical '1' is applied to the binary I/P 'Inj. Test Enable' (normally opto-
coupler OC 101). In the test mode:
the distance protection signal 'Trip CB' is assigned to the output
signal 'Inj. Test Output'
all tripping and signaling relays (including 'Relay ready') are
blocked excluding the signaling relay assigned to 'Inj. Test Output'
7-34
the distance protection function is waiting to receive control data

from the test set XS92b for assigning signals to the output 'Inj. Test
Output'
the baud rate of the interface at the front is reduced to 9600 if not
already at it, because the test set XS92b cannot communicate at a
higher baud rate.
The binary input 'Inj. Test Enable' has to be inverted when using the
test socket casing XX93.
7.9.2. Testing the distance protection function

General instructions for testing the distance protection function are
given in Chapter 8 of publication 1MRB520014-Uen and for the use of
test programs in publications CH-ES 86-11.52 E and CH-ES 86-11.54 E.
7.9.3. Checking the direction of measurement

The HMI menu for checking the direction of measurement is as
follows:
In the menu 'Monitor', select 'Measurement', 'Display Function Measure-
ment', in window 'Select Function', select function ' (HV ) Distance '.
The following is displayed in the sub-window 'Measurement' e.g. in this
case in /phase:
---------- [Ref Length]
---------- + j ------ Z (RE)
---------- + j ------ Z (SE)
---------- + j ------ Z (TE)
50.00 + j 1.50 Z (RS)
50.00 + j 1.50 Z (ST)
50.00 + j 1.50 Z (TR)
This display indicates that the relay is measuring in the forwards direc-
tion, because the real component of the phase-to-phase impedance is
positive, i.e. providing the scheme is wired according to the standard
ABB diagram in the Appendices (Chapter 12.), the CTs are grounded
on the line side and power flows from the busbars into the line. If the
real component is negative, power is flowing from the line towards the
busbars.
The settings 'CT Neutral' on line and busbar sides and the binary input
'Chg Measurement Dir' on the distance protection function influence
this display.
The first four lines (fault distance and phase-to-ground loop im-
pedances) do not influence the direction of measurement.
7-35
The last three lines (phase-to-phase loop impedances) are displayed

providing the load current exceeds
U V
0,5 Ph 0 and 0.5 Imin
XA
where:
XA reactance in the tripping direction (see Section 3.5.2.2.2.)
Imin pick-up setting of the low-current enabling function
If no impedances are displayed at the normal settings, increase the

setting of the impedance parameter Xi (e.g. XBACK) until the first con-
dition is fulfilled.
A second possibility for checking the direction of measurement or for
obtaining a 'second opinion' is to use the menu Monitor / Measurement /
' Display A/D Channels' (see Section 5.5.2.1.). This method works for
load currents down to about 5 % of rating.
Since this menu is not restricted to a single protection function, it is not
dependent on the settings of the various functions (excepting the
reference for analog channels) and especially not on the 'Bus side/
Line side' setting of the 'CT neutral' parameter and the binary input
' Chg Measurement Dir ' on the distance protection function.
Example:
For a purely resistive load with power flowing from the busbar into
the line and the CT neutral on the line side, the angle between R
phase voltage and current (or US-IS, UT-IT) is zero degrees.
This method of checking the direction of measurement, however, does
not disclose whether the setting of the parameter 'CT neutral'
('Bus side/Line side') is correct.
7-36
7.9.4. Testing the directional E/F function

(for ungrounded systems)
7.9.4.1. Injecting power system voltages and currents

Where it is not possible to test the protection by installing an E/F on
the primary system, it can be tested using load current.
The test circuits of Fig. 7.17 to Fig. 7.20 differ only in the wiring of the
VTs. Version a) is used in all cases in which the terminals of all the
secondaries are accessible, e.g. three single-phase VTs. Version b) is
used in all other cases, but it must be noted that the residual voltage
can only be measured, if the power system neutral has a defined
potential.
DANGER: The following changes to the CT and VT circuits may

only be carried out when no current is flowing, respectively when the
voltage is switched off.
7.9.4.2. Real power measurement
a) Testing with the residual current of a Holmgren circuit (three

CTs in parallel)
If a staged E/F cannot be installed on the system, the protection func-
tion can be tested using load current. To this end, the connections to
the CTs and VTs must be temporarily changed (see Fig. 7.17a and b).
No changes have to be made to the wiring of the protection.:
Short-circuit the R and S phase CTs and disconnect them from the
Holmgren circuit with the T phase such that only the T phase CT
supplies current to the relay.
Interrupt the VT secondary of the same phase (T phase in the
above example) or isolate (by opening the corresponding single-
phase isolator or removing the fuse) and short-circuit its primary.
Providing load energy is flowing into the line, the red LED on the front
of the protection must now light up.
NOTICE: Be sure to re-establish the original circuit at the conclusion

of the test!
b) Injecting residual current from a core-balance CT

In the case of a core-balance CT, the load currents flowing in the three
phases cancel each other. Therefore for purposes of the test, an addi-
tional conductor supplied from an auxiliary AC source is passed
through the core. No changes have to be made to the wiring of the
protection.:
7-37
Carry out the changes to the VT circuit as described under a)

above (see Fig. 7.18a and b).
The voltage between VT terminals e and n is used as the auxiliary
AC source for the test current through the core-balance CT The
test current circuit includes a switch and a series resistor. The
series resistor limits the current to a permissible level for the VTs
and the switch limits the duration of the load on the VTs to a
minimum. It may be necessary to reduce the setting of the
parameter (P-Setting) at low injection currents.
The value of the resistor is determined as follows:
10 UH Urel
R []
PK
where:
UH voltage across the VT secondary terminals n and e
Urel voltage across the I/P terminals of the protection
P pick-up power setting
K ratio of the core-balance CT
The 'Pick-up' and 'Trip' signals must operate, if the conductor passing
through the CT is connected to terminal n on the busbar side and
terminal e on the line side.

of the test!
7.9.4.3. Apparent power measurement

The phase sequence of the power system must be R-S-T for this test.
a) Testing with the residual current of a Holmgren circuit (three

CTs in parallel)
If a staged E/F cannot be installed on the system, the protection func-
tion can be tested using load current. To this end, the connections to
the CTs and VTs must be temporarily changed (see Fig. 7.19a and b).
No changes have to be made to the wiring of the protection.:
Short-circuit the R and S phase CTs and disconnect them from the
Holmgren circuit with the T phase such that only the T phase CT
supplies current to the relay.
Interrupt the secondary circuit of the R phase VT or isolate and
short-circuit its primary.
Providing load energy is flowing into the line, the signals 'Pick-up' and
'Trip' must operate.
7-38

of the test!
b) Injecting residual current from a core-balance CT

For purposes of the test, an additional conductor supplied from an
auxiliary AC source is passed through the core. No changes have to
be made to the wiring of the protection (see Fig. 7.20a and b):
Interrupt the secondary circuit of the T phase VT or isolate and
short-circuit its primary. The phase-to-phase voltage of the two
other phases (R and S) is used as the auxiliary AC source for the
test current through the core-balance CT The test current circuit
includes a switch and a series resistor. The series resistor limits
the current to a permissible level for the VTs and the switch limits
the duration of the load on the VTs to a minimum. It may be
necessary to reduce the setting of the parameter (P set) at low
injection currents.
The value of the resistor is determined as follows:
10 UH Urel
R []
PK
where:
UH voltage across the VT secondary terminals n and e
Urel voltage across the I/P terminals of the protection
P pick-up power setting
K ratio of the core-balance CT
The 'Pick-up' and 'Trip' signals must operate, if the conductor passing
through the CT is connected to terminal v on the busbar side and
terminal u on the line side.

of the test!
7.9.4.4. Testing using a test set

The MODURES test set XS92b injects the corresponding variable AC
signals and enables the accuracy of the pick-up and time delay
settings to be determined.
7-39
a) Three single-phase VTs R

S
or a five-limb three- T
phase VT: U V W
Residual voltage across
the broken delta UR US
secondary circuit (also
applies to a normal
broken delta
three-phase VT with an
connection
interposing Y/delta U0 = UR + US
UR US
connected VTs)
U0
e n
metering wind-
ings where
u v w
fitted
HEST 945017 C
Legend:
R, S, T = three-phase primary system
U, V, W = VT primary terminals
u, v, w = VT metering terminals
n, e = broken delta terminals for E/F protection
R R
S S
T T
U V W U V W
u v w u v w
e n
U0 e n
U0 HEST 945019 FL
HEST 945018 FL
b) Five-limb VT c) Three-phase VT plus star-point VT

(must have delta-connected balanc
ing windings)
Fig. 7.15 Methods of measuring residual voltage

of the test!
7-40
R S T RST
K K K
k k k
l l l
L L L
l
HEST 945020 FL
HEST 945021 FL
a) Holmgren CT connection b) Core-balance CT
R S T
K K K
k
L L L
HEST 945022 FL
c) Special CT arrangement for sensitive E/F protection
Fig. 7.16 Methods of measuring residual current
7-41
R R
S S
T T
6 4 6 4
1 1
3 3
n e n e
K K K K K K
2 k k k 5 2 k k k 5
l l l l l l
L L L L L L
HEST 945023 FL HEST 945024 FL
a) Changes to VT secondary circuit for testing b) Changes to VT primary circuit for

testing
CTs (2): CTs (2):

T phase separated from R and S phases and T phase separated from R and S phases
supplying protection and supplying protection
R and S phases short-circuited R and S phases short-circuited
VTs (3): VTs (3):

T phase removed from broken delta T phase primary fuse removed or isolator
opened (4) and winding short-circuited
The phases used must by as shown or cyclically rotated!

Legend:
1 circuit-breaker 4 fuse
2 CTs 5 REL316*4
3 VTs 6 load direction
Fig. 7.17 Test circuit (for = 0) with Holmgren connected CTs
7-42
R R
S S
T T
8 4 8 4
1 1
3 3
6 7 n e 6 7 n e
2 k 5 2 k 5
l I

testing
CTs (2): CTs (2):

Test current passed through core-balance CT Test current passed through core-
with VT terminal e (3) supplying the line side and balance CT with VT terminal e (3)
n the busbar side supplying the line side and n the busbar
side
VTs (3): VTs (3):

Legend:
1 circuit-breaker 5 REL316*4
2 CTs 6 test switch
3 VTs 7 test resistor (see b) in Section 7.9.4.2.
4 fuse for calculation)
8 load direction
Fig. 7.18 Test circuit (for = 0) with core-balance CT
7-43
R R
S S
T T
6 4 6 4
1 1
3 3
n e n e
K K K K K K
2 k k k 5 2 k k k 5
l l l l l l
L L L L L L

testing
CTs (2): CTs (2):

T phase separated from R and S phases and T phase separated from R and S phases
supplying protection and supplying protection
R and S phases short-circuited R and S phases short-circuited
VTs (3): VTs (3):

R phase removed from broken delta R phase primary fuse removed or isolator
Legend:
1 circuit-breaker 4 fuse
2 CTs 5 REL316*4
3 VTs 6 load direction
Fig. 7.19 Test circuit (for = -90 capacitive) with Holmgren

connected CTs
7-44
R R
S S
T T
8 4 8 4
1 1
3 3
u v w u v w
6 7 6 7
n e n e
2 2
k 5 k 5
l l

testing
CTs (2): CTs (2):

Test current passed through core-balance CT with Test current passed through core-
VT terminal e (3) supplying the line side and u the balance CT with VT terminal e (3)
busbar side supplying the line side and u the busbar
side
VTs (3): VTs (3):

Legend:
1 circuit-breaker 5 REL316*4
2 CTs 6 test switch
3 VTs 7 test resistor (see b) in Section 7.9.4.3.
4 fuse for calculation)
8 load direction
Fig. 7.20 Test circuit (for = -90 capacitive) with core-balance CT
7-45
October 2004
8. TECHNICAL DATA
Data Sheet REC316*4 .............................................. 1MRK511016-Ben

Data Sheet REG316*4.............................................. 1MRK502004-Ben
Data Sheet REX010 / REX011 ................................. 1MRB520123-Ben
Data Sheet REL316*4............................................... 1MRK506013-Ben
Data Sheet RET316*4 .............................................. 1MRK504007-Ben
CT requirements for the REL316*4
distance protection function ...................................... CH-ES 45-12.30 E
CT requirements for the longitudinal
differential protection of lines not having a
transformer in the protection zone .................................... ESP 9.201 E
Protection CT core requirements for transformer
protection (also applies to transformer protection
by a longitudinal differential function) ....................... CH-ES 30-32.10 E
CT requirements for the differential
protection of generators ............................................ CH-ES 30-32.20 E
8-1
Numerical Control REC316*4
and Protection Unit
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 1
Issued: May 2003
Changed since: February 2002
Data subject to change without notice
Features Application Protection functions

MV and HV systems for power transmis- Definite time over-/undervoltage protection
sion and distribution and for the power
High-set over-/undervoltage protection
requirements of industrial plants and power
stations Definite time overcurrent protection with
inrush detection
Air or gas insulated switchgear
High-set overcurrent protection
Decentral installation in switch bay or kiosk
Inverse time overcurrent protection with
New installations, refurbishment of existing
four characteristics according to B.S. 142
plants
Directional inverse and definite time over-
A large number of standard functions for
current protection
control, metering, monitoring, automation
and protection Thermal overload protection
Customer-specific solutions. Frequency protection
Control functions
Control of circuit breakers, isolators and The product ranges entire function library
grounding devices of the RE.316*4 is available for customer-
specific solutions
State acquisition with plausibility check
Four independent, user-selectable setting
Command output with double command
groups
Runtime supervision
Multi-activation facility of the available
Bay-oriented interlocking functions
Stationwide interlocking Breaker-failure protection.
Simple adaption through graphical engi-
Automation
neering tool CAP316.
Single and/or three-phase multi-shot auto-
reclosure
ABB Switzerland Ltd Numerical Control and Protection Unit REC316*4
Utility Automation Systems
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 2
Features (contd) Synchrocheck function Self-supervision

Continuous self-supervision and diagnosis
High-speed busbar transfer
Test equipment for quantitative testing
Load shedding.
available
Metering Plausibility check of the three-phase cur-
Metering function for the measurement of rent and voltage inputs.
voltage, current, frequency and active and
reactive power. Operational control
Multi-lingual menu-based operator pro-
Process supervision gram CAP2/316 based on Windows
Sequential recorder having a resolution of
Provision for storing four independent sets
1 ms
of settings in REC316*4.
Defluttering of binary inputs
Serial interfaces
Disturbance recording of freely selectable
Frontplate interface for local connection of
analog inputs, such as vts, cts and internal
a personal computer
results of protection functions as well as
binary information. Back plane interface for remote commu-
nication with a station control system:
Functions for programming by the user LON, IEC60870-5-103, MVB (part of
Logic (AND, OR and S/R flip-flop) IEC 61375), SPA
Timer/integrator. Back plane interface for process bus: MVB
(part of IEC 61375).
Application-specific functions
Customizing of control functions with the Installation
graphical engineering tool CAP316. REC316*4 is suitable for semi-flush or sur-
face mounting or installation in a rack.
Application The numerical control unit REC316*4 is a The closure of the circuit breaker can be
compact multi-functional unit. It is designed supervised by a synchrocheck function.
for the control, metering, monitoring, auto- Motor busbars can be switched on with phase
mation and protection functions of MV and synchronization by a fast switch-over func-
HV transmission systems. Simply pro- tion.
grammable standard functions from a
comprehensive software library of the Apart from the operating asset protection in
RE.216/316*4 product range and a powerful cooperation with function block engineered
and fast function block language make the modules using the CAP316 tool, the multy-
unit a user-friendly and extremely flexible configurable frequency function allows the
terminal. generation of intelligent load shedding auto-
matics. Automatic network restoration is ena-
The control of switching objects is performed bled by integrating the REC316*4 into a
with the highest possible supervision and station control system.
safety. A large selection of protection func-
tions reduces the number of necessary de- For metering, the quantities current, voltage,
vices in HV bays through the combination of real power, apparent power and frequency are
control and back-up protection functions in available. In addition the transmission of
one unit. The integrated autoreclosure func- energy counting impulses to the control sys-
tion can be utilized by both main protection tem is possible. The recording of distur-
devices. bances, switching operations and analog
results of protection functions is performed
by the integrated disturbance recorder.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 3
Device design The REC316*4 belongs to the generation of fulfils the users expectations of a modern
fully numerical control and protection termi- control and protection terminal at a cost-
nals, i.e. analog to digital conversion of the effective price. The AVAILABILITY of a
input variables takes place immediately after device, i.e. the ratio between its mean time in
the input transformers and all further process- service without failure and the total life, is
ing of the resulting numerical signals is per- most certainly its most important charac-
formed by microprocessors and controlled by teristic. As a consequence of the continuous
programs. Resulting numerical processing supervision of its functions, this quotient in
ensures consistent ACCURACY and SENSI- the case of REC316*4 is typically always
TIVITY throughout its operational life. close to 1.
REC316*4 is noted for its process interface, The menu-based HMI (Human Machine
satisfying the highest EMC requirements, as Interface) and the terminals small size makes
well as for the standardized serial interfaces the tasks of connection, configuration and
for integration into a control system. This setting simple. A maximum of FLEXIBIL-
enables an information exchange both in a ITY, i.e. the ability to adapt the protection for
vertical direction with systems of higher application in a particular power system or to
order and in a horizontal direction between coordinate with, or replace units in an exist-
various bay control units. ing control and protection scheme, is pro-
vided in REC316*4 by the extensive library
Because of its compact design, the very few of standard functions and the powerful func-
hardware units it needs, its modular software tion block engineering. The free assignment
and the integrated continuous self-diagnostic of input and output signals is enabled via the
and supervision functions, REC316*4 ideally HMI.
Hardware The hardware concept for the REC316*4 times per period and converted to digital sig-
numerical control unit comprises four differ- nals. The analog/digital conversion is per-
ent plug-in units, a connecting mother PCB formed by a 16 Bit converter.
and housing (Fig. 1):
A DSP carries out part of the digital filtering
analog input unit and makes sure that the data for the protec-
central processing unit tion algorithms are available in the memory
to the main processor.
1 to 4 binary input/output units
power supply unit The processor core essentially comprises the
connecting mother PCB main microprocessor for the protection algo-
rithms and dual-ported memories (DPMs) for
housing with connection terminals. communication between the A/D converters
and the main processor. The main processor
In the analog input unit an input transformer performs the protection algorithms and con-
provides the electrical and static isolation trols the local HMI and the interfaces to the
between the analog input variables and the station control system. Binary signals from
internal electronic circuits and adjusts the sig- the main processor are relayed to the corre-
nals to a suitable level for processing. The sponding inputs of the I/O unit and thus con-
input transformer unit can accommodate a trol the auxiliary output relays and the light
maximum of nine input transformers (volt- emitting diode (LED) signals. The main proc-
age-, protection current- or measuring trans- essor unit is equipped with an RS232C serial
former). interface via which among other things the
protection settings are made, events are read
Every analog variable is passed through a and the data from the disturbance recorder
first order R/C low-pass filter on the main memory are transferred to a local or remote
CPU unit to eliminate what is referred to as PC.
the aliasing effect and to suppress HF inter-
ferences (Fig. 2). They are then sampled 12 On this main processor unit there are two
PCC slots and one RS232C interface. These
serial interfaces provide remote communica-
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 4
Hardware (contd)
Fibre optical connections for line differential
protection and binary signal transmission
RX Tx DC
+5V
+15V Power
CPU -15V
supply Remote I/O
A/D DSP 486 +24V DC Remote I/OTrip
DPM Outputs
Remote I/OTrip
A/D DSP Sign.
Outputs
TripOutputs
SW-Key Sign.
outputs
Trip Bin.
Outputs
outputs FLASH PCC SignalInputs
Trip Bin.
Trip EPROM outputs
Outputs I/O Inputs
TripSignal
Outputs MVB
Sign. I /IO/Ports
Outputs O (MVB) Binary
outputs a
Sign.
Outputs Ports P Process bus inputs
I/O
Sign. BinaryPorts
Outputs Tranceiver
Outputs Ports
Bin.
inputs
C
b
Bin.
Inputs M
Bin.
Inputs PCC
Inputs C
c
RAM I
LON
A
d
MVB
SCS
LED's
SMS
RS Serial RS Serial
232 controller 232 controller SPA / IEC870-5-103
HMI
Fig. 1 Hardware platform overview
tion to the station monitoring system (SMS) c) 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signalling
and station control system (SCS) as well as to relays Type 316DB63.
the remote I/Os.
When ordering REC316*4 with more than
2 I/O units, N2 casing must be selected.
REC316*4 can have one to four binary I/O
units each. These units are available in three
According to whether one or two I/O units
versions:
are fitted, there are either 8 LEDs or 16 LEDs
a) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty visible on the front of the terminal.
contacts each, 8 optocoupler inputs and 6
signalling relays Type 316DB61
b) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty
contacts each, 4 optocoupler inputs and 10
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 5
Software Both analog and binary input signals are con- before being applied to the main processor.
ditioned before being processed by the main Binary signals from the optocoupler inputs go
processor. As described under hardware straight to the main processor. The actual
above, the analog signals pass through the processing of the signals in relation to the
sequence input transformers, shunt, low-pass protection algorithms and logic then takes
filter (anti-aliasing filter), multiplexer and place.
A/D converter stages and DSP. In their digital
form, they are then separated by numerical
filters into real and apparent components
Fig. 2 Data Flow
Graphical The graphical programming language used in BINEXOUT External binary output
the tool CAP316 makes CAP316 a powerful COUNTX Shift register
engineering CNT Counter
and user-friendly engineering tool for the
tool CNTD Downwards counter
engineering of the control and protection OR OR gate
units RE.216/316*4. It is similar to IEC 1131. RSFF RS flip-flop
CAP316 permits the function blocks repre- SKIP Skip segment
senting the application to be directly trans- TFF T flip-flop with reset
TMOC Monostable constant
lated into an application program (FUPLA) TMOCS, TMOCL Monostable constant
capable of running on the processors of the short, long
control and protection units RE.316*4. The TMOI Monostable constant
program packet contains an extensive library with interrupt
of function blocks. Up to 8 projects TMOIS, TMOIL Monostable constant
with interrupt short, long
(FUPLAs created with CAP316) are able to TOFF Off delay
run simultaneously on a RE.316*4. TOFFS, TOFFL Off delay short, long
TON On delay
List of functions TONS, TONL On delay short, long
Binary functions: XOR Exclusive OR gate
AND AND gate
ASSB Assign binary
B23 2-out-of-3 selector Analog functions:
B24 2-out-of-4 selector ABS Absolute value
BINEXTIN External binary input ADD Adder/subtracter
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 6
Graphical engineering ADDL Long integer adder/sub- LOADS Load shedding function
tool (contd) tracter MAX Maximum value detector
ADMUL Adder/multiplier MIN Minimum value detector
CNVIL Integer to long integer MUL Multiplier
converter MULL Long integer multiplier
CNVLBCD Long integer to BC con- NEGP Percent negator
verter PACW Pack BINARY signals
CNVLI Long integer to integer into INTEGER
converter PDTS, PDTL Differentiator
CNVLP Long integer to percent PT1S, PT1L Delayed approximation
converter SQRT Square root
CNVPL Percentage to long inte- SWIP Percent switch
ger converter THRLL Lower limit threshold
DIV Divider THRUL Upper limit threshold
DIVL Long integer divider TMUL Time multiplier
FCTL Linear function UPACW Unpack BINARY sig-
FCTP Polynomial function nals from an INTEGER
FILT Filter
INTS, INTL Integrator
KMUL Factor multiplier
LIM Limiter
Example: .
3
B_DRIVE
CL CL Q0_CL
OP OP Q0_OP
POK Q0_Q0_POK
4
& Q0_Q0_CLOSED
5 Q0_Q0_OPEN
&
SEL
DPMIN_Q0_CLOSED
RQON GON Q0_GUIDE_ON
DPMIN_Q0_OPEN
RQOF GOF Q0_GUIDE_OFF
GEX Q0_GUIDE_EXE
2
>=1 EXE Q0_EXE
1
& SYNC GOON Q0_GOON_Q0
RQEX GOOF Q0_GOOFF_Q0
Q0_SEL_DRIVE_Q0
SYST Q0_Q0_SYST
GEN_REQUEST_ON
SREL DPMOUT_Q0_SEL_REL
GEN_REQUES_ON 30 T:SY 6
1 T:RT =1 Q0_SUP_SEL_REL_Q0
GEN_SYNC
Q1_Q1_OPEN
ALSY Q0_ALSY
Q2_Q2_OPEN
BKS Q0_BLOCK_SELECT
GEN_REQUEST_EXE
KDOF Q0_KDO_FAIL
Part of a FUPLA application (Q0: Control and interlocking logic for three objects
Q0, Q1, Q2. B_DRIVE is a macro composed of binary function blocks)
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 7
Functions The entire function library of the RE.316*4 described below. Within the constraints of the
product range is available in the REC316*4. available processing capacity, the same func-
A selection from this library for the standard tion may be included several times. Further
versions of the REC316*4 is released via a user functions, such as the control of switch-
key. Customer-specific keys and also input ing objects, are realized by the combination
transformer configurations may be made on of FUPLA modules and standard functions.
request. The available standard functions are
Function library
I> I>> I>U< U
51 50 51-27 60
I>
I I I2 I TH
51
87G 87T 46 49
F<>
81
U> U< F<> U/f
0->I 59 27 81 24
CTRL I TH
79 49
Z< X< Ucos P<-

I> CTRL SYNC 21 40 78 32
51 25
U0> CTRL Logics Timer

CPU capacity 250% 64S Counter
e.g. Z<3ph requires 17%
Control of switching objects Autoreclosure

The REC316*4 receives the control com- The autoreclosure function included in
mands from the station control system or REC316*4 permits up to four three-phase
from a local oparator control panel via fibre reclosure cycles to be carried out, each with
optic links. In both cases a three-step com- an independently adjustable dead time for fast
mand input is adhered to for safety reasons. and slow autoreclosure. Where single-phase
The user is informed about the actual switch- reclosure is being applied, the first reclosure
ing state at any time, because the state of the is the single-phase one and the others are
switching object is registered via double sig- three-phase. The function may be actuated by
nalling with plausibility check. internal protection functions or external pro-
tection relays via optocoupler inputs.
Command output is made with a double com-
mand, interlocked against all other switching Synchrocheck
objects in order to avoid undesired or simul- The synchrocheck function determines the
taneous switching operations due to short-cir- difference between the amplitudes, phase-
cuits or operator errors. Subsequent to the angles and frequencies of two voltage vec-
command output the individually adjustable tors. Checks are also included to detect a dead
run time supervision is started. line or busbar.
The bay-oriented interlocking makes sure that High-speed busbar transfer

only permissible switching operations within This function allows the fast synchronized
a particular bay can be executed. For station- transfer of motor busbars between the main
wide interlocking, interlocking signals are ex- and standby supply. Automatic transfer at
changed between the individual bay control phase coincidence of the voltages as well as
units. slow transfer (low voltage, max. time) and
manual transfer are included.
The control functions are created by the gra-
phical function block engineering tool
CAP316 and can easily be matched to the
individual process requirements.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 8
Functions (contd) Thermal overload Inverse time ground fault overcurrent

The thermal overload function can be used function
for either cables or transformers. It is equip- The inverse time ground fault overcurrent
ped with alarm and tripping stages and has a function monitors the neutral current of the
wide setting range for adjusting the time con- system which is either measured via a neutral
stant to match that of the protected unit. current input transformer or derived inter-
nally in the terminal from the three-phase cur-
Instantaneous overvoltage function rents. Four different characteristics according
(instantaneous tripping) to British Standard 142 designated normal
The frequency-dependent voltage function inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and
can be applied either as maximum or mini- long time inverse but with an extended set-
mum function for instantaneous tripping or ting range are provided.
with settable delay. Single or three-phase
measurement with maximum value detection Directional overcurrent protection
for multi-phase functions. The directional overcurrent protection func-
The voltage function is supplementary to the tion is available either with inverse time or
voltage indicator used for interlocking of the definite time overcurrent characteristic. This
feeder earthing switch. Adjustable lower lim- function comprises a voltage memory for
iting frequency. faults close to the relay location. The function
response after the memory time has elapsed
Definite time voltage function can be selected (trip or block).
The voltage function can be set to operate on
overvoltage or undervoltage with a definite Frequency function
time delay. Either single or three-phase meas- The frequency function is based on the mea-
urements can be performed. surement of one voltage. This function is able
to be configured as maximum or minimum
Instantaneous overcurrent function function and is applied as protection function
(instantaneous tripping) and for load shedding. By multiple configura-
The frequency-dependent current function tion of this function almost any number of
can be applied either as maximum or mini- stages can be realized.
mum function for instantaneous tripping or
with settable delay. Single or three-phase Rate-of-change of frequency
measurement with maximum value detection This function offers alternatively an enabling
for multi-phase functions. by absolute frequency. It contains an under-
Adjustable lower limiting frequency. voltage blocking facility. Repeated configura-
tion of this function ensures a multi-step
Definite time current function setup.
The current function can be set to operate on
overcurrent or undercurrent with a definite Measuring
time delay. Either single or three-phase meas- Both measuring functions measure the single-
urements can be performed. or three-phase rms values of voltage, current,
frequency, real power and apparent power for
Inverse time-overcurrent function display on the local HMI or transfer to the
The operating time of the inverse time-over- station control system. A choice can be made
current function reduces as the fault current bet-ween phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase
increases and it can therefore achieve shorter voltages.
operating times for fault locations closer to
the source. Four different characteristics Ancillary functions
according to British Standard 142 designated Ancillary functions such as a logic and a
normal inverse, very inverse, extremely delay/integrator enable the user to create logi-
inverse and long time inverse with an ex- cal combinations of signals and pick-up and
tended setting range are provided. The func- reset delays.
tion can be configured for single-phase mea-
surement or a combined three-phase
measurement with detection of the highest
phase current.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 9
A runtime supervision feature enables check- The software can be used either ON-LINE or
ing the opening and closing of all kinds of OFF-LINE and furthermore contains a
breakers (circuit-breakers, isolators, ground DEMO mode.
switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or
close within an adjustable time results in the
creation of a corresponding signal for further
processing.
Plausibility check
The current and voltage plausibility functions
facilitate the detection of system asymmet-
ries, e.g. in the secondary circuits of CTs and
VTs. The internal sum of phasors can be com-
pared with an external summation when
quantities are applied to an input.
Sequence-of-events recorder
The event recorder function provides capacity For each protection function a tripping char-
for up to 256 binary signals including time acteristic is displayed. Apart from the basic
marker with a resolution in the order of milli- understanding of the protection functions, the
seconds. It is also possible to activate flutter graphical display of these functions also
recognition in order to avoid filling up the makes the setting of the parameters clearer.
memory by continuously recurring signal res-
ponse (flutter).
Disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder monitors up to 9
analog inputs, 16 binary inputs and internal
results of protection functions. The capacity
for recording disturbances depends on the
duration of a disturbance as determined by its
pre-disturbance history and the duration of
the disturbance itself. The total recording
time is approximately 5 s.
Other protection functions

See data sheets of REL316*4, RET316*4
and REG316*4. Any desired protection function can be selec-
ted from the software library of all released
Human machine interface (HMI) - CAP2/316 protection functions by means of the drag-
For local communication with REC316*4, and-drop feature.
there is the setting software CAP2/316 availa-
ble which is based on Windows. This soft-
ware runs under the following operating sys-
tems:
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000.
This optimal programming tool is available

for engineering, testing, commissioning and
operation.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 10
Functions (contd) Built-in HMI Analog signals can also be connected to the
The front HMI unit serves primarily for the system via the 500AXM11 from the RIO580
signalling of actual events, measurands and family:
diagnostic data. Settings are not displayed.
DC current 4...20 mA
Features: 0...20 mA
-20...20 mA
Measurand display
DC voltage 0...10 V
- Amplitude, angle, frequency of analog
-10...10 V
channels
Temp. sensor Pt100, Pt250, Pt1000,
- Functional measurands
Ni100, Ni250, Ni1000.
- Binary signals
Self-diagnosis and supervision
Event list
RE.316*4s self-diagnosis and supervision
Operating instructions functions ensure maximum availability not
Disturbance recorder information only of the protection device itself, but also of
the power system it is protecting. Hardware
Diagnostic information failures are immediately signalled by an
Acknowledgment functions alarm contact and the communication super-
vision of the control system. In particular, the
- Resetting LEDs external and internal auxiliary supplies are
- Resetting latched outputs continuously supervised. The correct function
and tolerance of the A/D converter are tested
- Event erasing by cyclically converting two reference vol-
- Warmstart. tages. Special algorithms regularly check the
processors memories (background func-
Remote communication tions). A watchdog supervises the execution
REC316*4 is able to communicate with a sta- of the programs. The program execution in
tion monitoring system (SMS) or a station the processor itself is monitored by a watch-
control system (SCS) via an optical fibre link. dog function.
The corresponding serial interface permits
events, measurements, disturbance recorder An important advantage of the extensive self-
data and protection settings to be read as well diagnosis and supervision functions is that
as control commands and demand value pa- periodic routine maintenance and testing are
rameters to be received and sets of parameter reduced.
settings to be switched.
Supporting software
Using the LON bus permits in addition the The operator program facilitates configura-
exchange of binary information between the tion and setting of the protection, listing
individual bay controllers, e.g. signals for sta- parameters, reading events and listing the
tion interlocking. various internal diagnostic data.
Remote in- and outputs (RIO580) The evaluation programs REVAL and
Using the process bus type MVB remote in- E_wineve(Windows NT/Windows 2000) are
and output units 500RIO11 can be connected available for viewing and evaluating the dis-
to the RE.316*4 terminals. The in- and output turbances stored by the disturbance recorder.
channels can be extended to a large number
by using RIO580 remote input/output system. The program XSCON (MS Windows) is
Installing 500RIO11 I/O units close to the available for conversion of the RE.316*4s
process reduces the wiring dramatically, since disturbance recorder data to ABBs test set
they are accessible via fibre optic link from XS92b format. This enables reproduction of
the RE.316*4 terminals. electrical quantities recorded during the dis-
turbance.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 11
Example of an
application
REC316*4
Control TON FUPLA
Q1 Q2 SEQ RSFF
1
AND
Q51 CNT
SEQ
2 AND
Q0
Q53
Monitoring
Q9
UIfPQ
Protection
87T 51N 24
Id Io U/f
49 21
ITH Z<
Example for control and protection of a transformer bay
Control Protection
Control of circuit breakers, isolators and Transformer differential

grounding devices
Thermal protection
Bay-oriented interlocking
Overexcitation
Station interlocking
Distance protection
Run time supervision
etc.
Process supervision
Measuring.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 12
Technical data Table 1: Analog input variables

Hardware Number of inputs according to version, max. 9 analog inputs (voltages and currents, 4 mm2 terminals)
Rated frequency fN 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Rated current IN 1 A, 2 A or 5 A
Thermal rating of current circuit
continuous 4 x IN
for 10 s 30 x IN
for 1 s 100 x IN
dynamic (half period) 250 x IN (peak)
Rated voltage UN 100 V or 200 V
Thermal rating of voltage circuit
continuous 1.3 x UN
during 10 s 2 x UN
Burden per phase
current inputs
at IN = 1 A <0.1 VA
at IN = 5 A <0.3 VA
voltage inputs
at UN <0.25 VA
VT fuse characteristic Z acc. to DIN/VDE 0660 or equivalent
Table 2: Contact data

Tripping relays
No. of contacts 2 relays per I/O unit 316DB61 or 316DB62 with
2 N/O contacts each. 1.5 mm2 terminals
Max. operating voltage 300 V AC or V DC
Continuous rating 5A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Surge for 30 ms 250 A
Making power at 110 V DC 3300 W
Breaking capacity for L/R = 40 ms
Breaking current with 1 contact
at U <50 V DC 1.5 A
at U <120 V DC 0.3 A
at U <250 V DC 0.1 A
Breaking current with 2 contacts in series
at U <50 V DC 5A
at U <120 V DC 1A
at U <250 V DC 0.3 A
Signalling contacts
No. of contacts 6, 10 or 8 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63),
1 contact per sig. relay with 1.5 mm2 terminals
Each interface unit equipped with 1 C/O contact and the all
other N/O contacts
Breaking current for L/R = 40 ms
at U <50 V DC 0.5 A
at U <120 V DC 0.1 A
at U <250 V DC 0.04 A
The user can assign tripping and signalling contacts to protection functions
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 13
Table 3: Optocoupler inputs

No. of optocouplers 8, 4 or 14 acc. to I/O unit
(316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63)
Input voltage 18 to 36 V DC/ 36 to 75 V DC / 82 to 312 V DC / 175 to 312 V DC
Threshold voltage 10 to 17 V DC / 20 to 34 V DC / 40 to 65 V DC / 140 to 175 V DC
Max. input current <12 mA
Operating time 1 ms
The user can assign the inputs to protection functions.
Table 4: Light-emitting diodes

Choice of display modes:
Accumulates each new disturbance
Latching with reset at next pick-up
Latching only if protection trips with reset at next pick-up
Signalling without latching
1 green (standby)
1 red (trip)
6 or 14 yellow (all other signals)
The user can assign the red and yellow LEDs to functions.
Table 5: Configuration and settings

Local via the communication interface on the front port connector using an IBM-compatible PC with Win-
dows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000. The operator program can also be operated by remote control via a
modem.
Operator program in English or German
Table 6: Remote communication

RS232C interface 9 pin Sub-D female
Data transfer rate 9600 Bit/s
Protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103
Electrical/optical converter (optional) 316BM61b
PCC interface
Number 2 plug-in sockets for type III cards
PCC (optional)
Interbay bus protocol LON or MVB (part of IEC 61375)
Process bus protocol MVB (part of IEC 61375)
(interbay and process bus can be used concurrently)
LON bus PCC with fibre-optical port, ST connectors
1.25 MBit/s
Data transfer rate
MVB bus PCC with redundant fibre-optical port, ST
connectors
Data transfer rate 1.5 Mbit/s
Event memory
Capacity 256 events
Time marker resolution 1 ms
Time deviation without remote synchronizing <10 s per day
Engineering interface integrated software interface for signal
engineering with SigTOOL
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 14
Technical data Hard- Table 7: Auxiliary supply

ware (contd) Supply voltage
Voltage ranges 36 to 312 V DC
Voltage interruption bridging time >50 ms

Fuse rating 4 A
Load on station battery at normal operation
(1 relay energized) <20 W
during a fault
(all relays energized)
with 1 I/O unit <22 W
with 2 I/O units <27 W
Additional load of the options
line differential protection 7.5 W
SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or LON interface 1.5 W
MVB interface 2.5 W
Buffer time of the event list and fault recorder data at >2 days (typ. 1 month)
loss of auxiliary supply
Table 8: General data

Temperature range
operation -10 C to +55 C EN 60255-6 (1994),
storage -40 C to +85 C IEC 60255-6 (1988)
Humidity 93%, 40 C, 4 days IEC 60068-2-3 (1969)
Seismic test 5 g, 30 s, 1 to 33 Hz IEC 60255-21-3 (1995),
(1 octave/min) IEEE 344 (1987)
Leakage resistance >100 M, 500 V DC EN 60255-5 (2001),
IEC 60255-5 (2000)
Insulation test 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min EN 60255-5 (2001),
1 kV across open contacts IEC 60255-5 (2000),
EN 60950 (1995)
Surge voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 s EN 60255-5 (2001),
IEC 60255-5 (2000) *
1 MHz burst disturbance test 1.0/2.5 kV, Cl. 3; 1MHz, IEC 60255-22-1 (1988),
400 Hz rep.freq. ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
(1989)
Fast transient test 2/4 kV, Cl. 4 EN 61000-4-4 (1995),
IEC 61000-4-4 (1995)
Electrostatic discharge test 6/8 kV (10 shots), Cl. 3 EN 61000-4-2 (1996),
(ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 (2001)
Immunity to magnetic interfer- EN 61000-4-8 (1993),
ence at power system frequen- 300 A/m; 1000 A/m; 50/60 Hz IEC 61000-4-8 (1993)
cies
Radio frequency interference test 0.15-80 MHz, 80% amplitude modulated EN 61000-4-6 (1996)
(RFI) 10 V, Cl. 3 EN 61000-4-6 (1996),
80-1000 MHz, 80% amplitude modulated EN 61000-4-3 (1996),
10 V/m, Cl. 3 IEC 61000-4-3 (1996),
900 MHz, puls modulated ENV 50204 (1995)
10 V/m, Cl. 3
Emission Cl. A EN 61000-6-2 (2001),
EN 55011 (1998),
CISPR 11 (1990)
* Reduced values apply for repeat tests according to IEC publication 255-5, Clauses 6.6 and 8.6.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 15
Table 9: Mechanical design

Weight
Size N1 casing approx. 10 kg
Methods of mounting semi-flush with terminals at rear
surface with terminals at rear
19" rack mounting, height 6U, width N1: 225.2 mm (1/2 19" rack).
Width N2: 271 mm.
Enclosure
Protection Class IP 50 (IP 20 if MVB PCC interfaces are used)
IPXXB for terminals.
Technical data Table 10: Autoreclosure (79)

Functions Single and three-phase autoreclosure.
Operation in conjunction with distance, longitudinal differential, overcurrent and synchrocheck functions
and also with external protection and synchrocheck relays.
Logic for 1st. and 2nd. main protections, duplex and master/follower schemes.
Up to four fast or slow reclosure shots.
Detection of evolving faults.
Settings:
1st. reclosure none
1P fault - 1P reclosure
1P/3P fault - 3P reclosure
1P/3P fault - 1P/3P reclosure
2nd. to 4th. reclosure none
two reclosure cycles
three reclosure cycles
four reclosure cycles
Single-phase dead time 0.05 to 300 s
Three-phase dead time 0.05 to 300 s
Dead time extension by ext. signal 0.05 to 300 s
Dead times for 2nd., 3rd. and 4th. reclosures 0.05 to 300 s
Fault duration time 0.05 to 300 s
Reclaim time 0.05 to 300 s
Blocking time 0.05 to 300 s
Single and three-phase discrimination times 0.1 to 300 s
All settings in steps of 0.01 s
Table 11: Synchrocheck function (25)

Determination of synchronism
Single-phase measurement. The differences between the amplitudes, phase angles and frequen-
cies of two voltage vectors are determined.
Voltage supervision
Evaluation of instantaneous values and therefore wider frequency range
Determination of maximum and minimum values in the case of three-phase inputs
Phase selection for voltage inputs
Provision for switching to a different voltage input (double busbar systems)
Remote selection of operating mode
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 16
Technical data Func- Settings:

tions (contd)
Max. voltage difference 0.05 to 0.4 UN in steps of 0.05 UN
Max. phase difference 5 to 80 in steps of 5
Max. frequency difference 0.05 to 0.4 Hz in steps of 0.05 Hz
Min. voltage 0.6 to 1 UN in steps of 0.05 UN
Max. voltage 0.1 to 1 UN in steps of 0.05 UN
Supervision time 0.05 to 5 s in steps of 0.05 s
Resetting time 0 to 1 s in steps of 0.05 s
Accuracy for 0.9 to 1.1 fN
Voltage difference 5% UN
Phase difference 5
Frequency difference 0.05 Hz
Table 12: High-speed busbar transfer (HBT)

Frequency range 0.8 to 1.04 fN
Operating modes - Manual transfer (with-break or no-break), with synchronism check
- High-speed automatic transfer (max. phase angle and/or closing at
phase coincidence)
- Slow automatic transfer (low voltage and/or max. time)
Parameters:
Closing time CB1 and CB2 0 to 150 ms in steps of 1 ms
For more details see separate data sheet 1MRB520156-Ben
Table 13: Thermal overload function (49)

Thermal image for the 1st. order model.
Single or three-phase measurement with detection of maximum phase value.
Settings:
Base current IB 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Alarm stage 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N
Tripping stage 50 to 200% N in steps of 1% N
Thermal time constant 2 to 500 min in steps of 0.1 min
Accuracy of the thermal image 5% N (at fN) with protection CTs
2% N (at fN) with metering CTs
Table 14: Definite time current function (51DT)

Over and undercurrent detection.
Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase current.
2nd. harmonic restraint for high inrush currents.
Settings:
Pick-up current 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Delay 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) 5% or 0.02 IN
Reset ratio
overcurrent >94% (for max. function)
undercurrent <106% (for min. function)
Max. operating time without intentional delay 60 ms
Inrush restraint optional
pick-up setting 0.1 I2h/I1h
reset ratio 0.8
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 17
Table 15: Definite time voltage function (27/59)

Over and undervoltage detection
Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest, respectively lowest phase voltage
Also applied for detection of:
stator ground faults (95%)
rotor ground faults (requires external measuring bridge YWX111 and coupling capacitors)
interturn faults
Settings:
Pick-up voltage 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.002 UN
Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) 2% or 0.005 UN
Reset ratio (U 0.1 UN)
overvoltage >96% (for max. function)
undervoltage <104% (for min. function)
Table 16: Inverse time-overcurrent function (51)

Single or three-phase measurement with detection of the highest phase current
Stable response to transients
Inverse time characteristic t = k1 / ((I/IB)C- 1)
(acc. to B.S. 142 with extended setting range)
normal inverse c = 0.02
very inverse c=1
extremely inverse c=2
long time inverse c=1
or RXIDG characteristic t = 5.8 - 1.35 In (I/IB)
Settings:
Number of phases 1 or 3
Pick-up current Istart 1 to 4 IB in steps of 0.01 IB
Min. time setting tmin 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s
k1 setting 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s
Accuracy classes for the operating time
according to British Standard 142 E 5.0
RXIDG characteristic 4% (1 - I/80 IB)
Reset ratio >94 %
Table 17: Directional definite time overcurrent protection (67)

Suppression of DC- and high-frequency components
Definite time characteristic
Settings:
Current 0.02 to 20 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Angle -180 to +180 in steps of 15
Delay 0.02 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
tWait 0.02 s to 20 s in steps of 0.01 s
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 18
Technical data Func- Memory duration 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s

tions (contd)
Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) 5% or 0.02 IN
Reset ratio >94%
Accuracy of angle measurement 5
(at 0.94 to 1.06 fN)
Voltage input range 0.005 to 2 UN
Voltage memory range <0.005 UN
Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage memory 20
Frequency dependence of angle measurement at
voltage memory 0.5/Hz
Max. response time without delay 60 ms
Table 18: Directional inverse time overcurrent function (67)

Inverse time characteristic
Settings:
Current I-Start 14 IB in steps of 0.01 IB
Angle -180+180 in steps of 15
normal inverse c = 0,02
very inverse c=1
long-time earth fault c=1
k1-setting 0.01 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s
t-min 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.1 s
IB-value 0.04 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Memory duration 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Accuracy of pick-up setting (at fN) 5%
Reset ratio >94%
Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 5
fN )
Accuracy class of the operating time acc. to British E 10
Standard 142
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 19
Table 19: Inverse time ground fault overcurrent function (51N)

Neutral current measurement (derived externally or internally)
Inverse time characteristic t = k1 / ((I/IB)C - 1)
very inverse c=1
Settings:
Reset ratio >94%
Table 20: Metering function UIfPQ

Single-phase measurement of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power
Choice of measuring phase-to-ground or phase-to phase voltages
Suppression of DC components and harmonics in current and voltage
Compensation of phase errors in main and input CTs and VTs
Settings:
Phase angle -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1
Reference value of the power SN 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN
Refer to Tabelle 33 for accuracy.
Table 21: Three-phase measuring module

Three-phase measurement of voltages (star or delta) und currents. Measurement of frequency, real and
apparent power and power factor.
Two independent impulse counter inputs for calculation of interval and accumulated energy. The three-
phase measurement and the impulse counters can be used independently and may also be disabled.
This function may be configured four times.
Settings:
Angle -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1
Reference value for power 0.2 to 2.5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN
t1-Interval 1 min., 2 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 60 min. or
120 min.
Scale factor of power 0.0001 to 1
Max. impulse frequency 25 Hz
Min. impulse duration 10 ms
Accuracy of time interval 100 ms
See Tabelle 33 for accuracy
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 20
Technical data Func- Table 22: Instantaneous overcurrent (50)

tions (contd) Features:
Maximum or minimum function (over- and undercurrent)
Single- or three-phase measurements
Wide frequency range (0.04 to 1.2 fN)
Peak value evaluation
Settings:
Delay 0 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Accuracy of pick-up value (at 0.08 to 1.1 fN) 5% or 0.02 IN
Reset ratio >90% (for max. function)
<110% (for min. function)
Max. trip time with no delay (at fN) 30 ms (for max. function)
60 ms (for min. function)
Table 23: Instantaneous overvoltage protection function (59, 27) with peak value
evaluation
Features:
Evaluation of instantaneous values, therefore extremely fast and frequency-independent on a wide scale
Storing of the highest instantaneous value after start
No suppression of DC components
1- or 3phase
Maximum value detection for multi-phase functions
Variable lower limiting frequency fmin
Settings:
Voltage 0.01 to 2.0 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
Limiting fmin 25 to 50 Hz in steps of 1 Hz
Accuracy of pick-up value (at 0.08 to 1.1 fN) 3% or 0.005 UN
Max. trip time at no delay (at fN) <30 ms (for max. function)
<50 ms (for min. function)
Table 24: Frequency (81)

Features:
Maximum or minimum function (over-, underfrequency)
Minimum voltage blocking
Settings:
Frequency 40 to 65 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Minimum voltage 0.2 to 0.8 UN in steps of 0.1 UN
Accuracy of pick-up value 30 mHz (at UN and fN)
Reset ratio 100%
Starting time <130 ms
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 21
Table 25: Rate-of-change of frequency df/dt (81)

Features:
Combined pick-up with frequency criterion possible
Blocking by undervoltage
Settings:
df/dt -10 to +10 Hz/s in steps of 0.1 Hz/s
Frequency 40 to 55 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz at fN = 50 Hz
50 to 65 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz at fN = 60 Hz
Accuracy of df/dt (at 0.9 to 1.05 fN) 0.1 Hz/s
Accuracy of frequency (at 0.9 to 1.05 fN) 30 mHz
Reset ratio df/dt 95% for max. function
105% for min. function
Table 26: Power function (32)

Measurement of real or apparent power
Protection function based on either real or apparent power measurement
Reverse power protection
Over and underpower
Single, two or three-phase measurement
Settings:
Power pick-up -0.1 to 1.2 SN in steps of 0.005 SN
Characteristic angle -180 to +180 in steps of 5
Phase error compensation -5 to +5 in steps of 0.1
Rated power SN 0.5 to 2.5 UN IN in steps of 0.001 UN IN
Reset ratio 30% to 170% in steps of 1% of power pick-up
Accuracy of the pick-up setting 10% of setting or 2% UN IN
(for protection CTs)
3% of setting or 0.5% UN IN
(for core-balance CTs)
Table 27: Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Features
Individual phase current recognition
External blocking input
Two independent time steps
Remote tripping adjustable simultaneously with retripping or back-up tripping
Possibility of segregated activating/deactivating each trip (Redundant trip, retrip, back-up trip and
remote trip).
Settings
Delay t1 (repeated trip) 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 22
Technical data Func- Delay t2 (back-up trip) 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s

tions (contd)
Delay tEFS (End fault protection) 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset time for retrip 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset time for back-up trip 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pulse time for remote trip 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Accuracy of pick-up current (at fN) 15%
Reset ratio of current measurement >85%
Reset time (for power system time constants 28 ms (with main CTs TPX)
up to 300 ms and short-circuit currents up to 28 ms (with main CTs TPY and
40 IN) current setting 1,2 IN)
38 ms (with main CTs TPY and
current setting 0,4 IN)
Table 28: Disturbance recorder

Max. 16 CT/VT channels
Max. 16 binary channels
Max. 12 analog channels of internal measurement values
12 samples per period (sampling frequency 600 or 720 Hz at a rated frequency of 50/60 Hz)
Available recording time for 9 CT/VT and 8 binary signals approximately 5 s
Recording initiated by any binary signal, e.g. the general trip signal.
Data format EVE
Dynamic range 70 x IN, 1.3 x UN
Resolution 12 bits
Settings:
Recording periods
Pre-event 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms
Event 100 to 3000 ms in steps of 50 ms
Post-event 40 to 400 ms in steps of 20 ms
Ancillary functions
Table 29: Logic

Logic for 4 binary inputs with the following 3 configurations:
1. OR gate
2. AND gate
3. Bistable flip-flop with 2 set and 2 reset inputs (both OR gates), resetting takes priority
All configurations have an additional blocking input.
Provision for inverting all inputs.
Table 30: Delay/integrator

For delaying pick-up or reset or for integrating 1 binary signal
Provision for inverting the input
Settings:
Pick-up or reset time 0 to 300 s in steps of 0.01 s
Integration yes/no
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 23
Table 31: Plausibility check

A plausibility check function is provided for each three-phase current and three-phase voltage input which
performs the following:
Determination of the sum and phase sequence of the three-phase currents or voltages
Provision for comparison of the sum of the phase values with a corresponding current or voltage sum
applied to an input
Function blocks for currents exceeding 2 x IN, respectively voltages exceeding 1.2 UN
Accuracy of the pick-up setting at rated frequency 2% IN in the range 0.2 to 1.2 IN
2% UN in the range 0.2 to 1.2 UN
Reset ratio >90% whole range
>95% (at U >0.1 UN or I >0.1 IN)
Current plausibility settings:
Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation current
or between internal and external summation currents 0.05 to 1.00 IN in steps of 0.05 IN
Amplitude compensation for summation CT -2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01
Voltage plausibility settings:
Pick-up differential for sum of internal summation voltage
or between internal and external summation voltages 0.05 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.05 UN
Amplitude compensation for summation VT - 2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01
Table 32: Runtime supervision

The runtime supervision feature enables checking the opening and closing of all kinds of breakers (circuit-
breakers, isolators, ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or close within an adjustable time
results in the creation of a corresponding signal for further processing.
Settings
Setting time 0 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Accuracy of runtime supervision 2 ms
Table 33: Accuracy of the metering function UIfPQ and three-phase measuring module
(including input voltage and input current CT)
Input variable Accuracy Conditions
Core balance CTs Protection CTs
with error compensation without error com-
pensation
Voltage 0.5% UN 1% UN 0.2 to 1.2 UN
f = fN
Current 0.5% IN 2% IN 0.2 to 1.2 IN
f = fN
Real power 0.5% SN 3% SN 0.2 to 1.2 SN
0.2 to 1.2 UN
0.2 to 1.2 IN
f = fN
Apparent power 0.5% SN 3% SN
Power factor 0.01 0.03 S = SN, f = fN
Frequency 0.1% fN 0.1% fN 0.9 to 1,1 fN
0.8 to 1,2 UN
SN = 3 UN IN (three-phase)
SN = 1/3 3 UN IN (single-phase)
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 24
Wiring diagram
CURRENT
AND VOLTAGE
INPUTS
ACC. TO K-CODE
SIGNALLING
COMMUNICATION
PORT
(LOCAL HMI) (PC))
SERIAL COMMUNI-
CATION WITH SUB-
STATION CONTROL
EARTHING SCREW
ON CASING
OPTOCOUPLER TRIP
INPUTS
DC SUPPLY
Fig. 3 Typical wiring diagram of REC316*4 in size N1 casing with two input/output units 316DB62
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 25
Ordering Please specify:

Quantity
Ordering number
ADE code + key
The following basic versions can be ordered:
Stand-alone units REC316*4 with built-in HMI (see table below) HESG448750M0003
Table 34: REC316*4 basic versions

Relay ID code
HBT BAS 533

HBT BAS 535
OCInv Dir
Basic-SW
OCDT Dir
OCINV
OCInst
OCDT
CTRL
Freq
HBT
df/dt
AR
TH
A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX100 T*** X X
HESG448750M0003
A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX200 T*** X X X X X X X X X

A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX300 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X
A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX900 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X
Order No.
A*B*C*D*U*K64E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* SX900 T903 X X X X X X X X X X X X X

A*B*C*D*U*K64E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* SX900 T904 X X X X X X X X X X X X X
A*B*C*D*U*K**E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SX992 T*** Entire function library of RE.316*4
Legend
CTRL: project-specific control logic (FUPLA)

Basic-SW: basic software including the following functions:
- synchrocheck function
- definite time overvoltage function
- instantaneous overvoltage protection function with peak value evaluation
- metering function UIfPQ
- three-phase measuring module
- power function
- logic
- delay
- counter
- disturbance recorder function
- flutter recognition
- inverse time ground fault overcurrent
- breaker-failure protection
- runtime supervision
Options
AR: - single or three-phase autoreclosure
OCDT: - definite time overcurrent protection
OCInst: - instantaneous overcurrent protection
OCInv: - inverse time overcurrent protection
OCInv Dir - directional inverse time overcurrent protection
OCDT Dir - directional definite time overcurrent protection
TH: - thermal overload
Freq: - frequency protection
df/dt - rate-of-change of frequency
HBT: - high-speed busbar transfer
HBT BAS 533: - high-speed busbar transfer, 2 breakers standard solution
HBT BAS 535: - high-speed busbar transfer, 3 breakers standard solution
All the functions of the basic version can be applied in any combination providing the maximum capacity of
the processor and the number of analog channels is not exceeded.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 26
Ordering (contd) Other functions (function library of RE.316*4)

< Z: - Distance including power swing
Long.diff: - Line differential
BST: - Binary signal transmission
E/Fungnd: - Directional ground fault function for ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen
coils
F/Fgnd: - Directional ground fault function for grounded systems
Diff T: - Transformer differential
Diff G: - Generator differential
OCDT(REF): - Restricted earth fault
EFStat100: - Stator earth fault 95%, 100%
EFRot100: - Rotor earth fault
NPSDT: - Negative-sequence current
NPS Inv: - Inverse time negative phase-sequence
U/F(inv): - Overexcitation
UZ: - Underimpedance
LossEx: - Loss of excitation
Polsl: - Pole slipping
VTDT (EF Stat): - Definite time voltage function for stator earth fault protection
VTDT (EF Rot): - Definite time voltage function for rotor earth fault protection
>I/<U: - Combined overcurrent/undervoltage protection
V bal: - Balanced voltage measurement protection
V check: - Voltage plausibility
I check - Current plausibility
OL Stat: - Stator overload
OL Rot: - Rotor overload
<Z HV Dist: - High-voltage distance protection
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 27
Table 35: Definitions of the relay ID codes in Table 34

Sub code Significance Description Remarks
A- A0 none rated current state
A1 1A
A2 2A
A5 5A
B- B0 none rated current state
B1 1A
B2 2A
B5 5A
C- C0 none rated current state
C1 1A
C2 2A
C5 5A
D- D0 none rated current state
D1 1A
D2 2A
D5 5A
U- U0 none rated voltage state
U1 100 V AC
U2 200 V AC
K- K41 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) CT = current transformer
1 VT (1ph Code U-) VT = voltage transformer
1 VT (1ph Code U-) MT = metering transformer
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
3 VTs (3ph star Code U-)
K42 3 CTs (3ph Code A-)
3 CTs (3ph Code C-)
3 CTs (3ph Code D-)
K44 1 CT (1ph Code A-)
1 CT (1ph Code A-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
K45 1 CT (1ph Code A-)
1 CT (1ph Code A-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 CT (1ph Code A-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
3 VTs (3ph delta Code U-)
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 28
Ordering (contd) K00 Free arrangement of voltage and On request

current analog inputs. There is a
maximum of 9 analog inputs per
unit.
E- E1 8 optocouplers 1. binary input/output unit see previous table
6 signal. relays Type 316DB61
2 command relays
8 LED's
E2 4 optocoupler 1. binary input/output unit
2 command relays
8 LED's
8 LED's
I- I3 82 to 312 V DC 1. binary input/output unit state
I4 36 to 75 V DC optocoupler input voltage
I5 18 to 36 V DC
I9 175 to 312 V DC
F- F0 none
F1 8 optocoupler 2. binary input/output unit see previous table
2 command relays
8 LED's
F2 4 optocoupler 2. binary input/output unit
2 command relays
8 LED's
8 LED's
J- J0 none
J3 82 to 312 V DC 2. binary input/output unit state
J4 36 to 75 V DC optocoupler input voltage
J5 18 to 36 V DC
J9 175 to 312 V DC
Q- Q0 none
Q1 8 optocoupler 3. binary input/output unit see previous table
2 command relays
Q2 4 optocoupler 3. binary input/output unit
2 command relays
V- V0 none
V3 82 to 312 V DC 3. binary input/output unit state
V4 36 to 75 V DC optocoupler input voltage
V5 18 to 36 V DC
V9 175 to 312 V DC
R- R0 none
R1 8 optocoupler 4. binary input/output unit see previous table
2 command relays
R2 4 optocoupler 4. binary input/output unit
2 command relays
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 29

W- W0 none
W3 82 to 312 V DC 4. binary input/output unit state
W4 36 to 75 V DC optocoupler input voltage
W5 18 to 36 V DC
W9 175 to 312 V DC
Y- Y0 no comm. protocol Interbay bus protocol
Y1 SPA
Y2 IEC 60870-5-103
Y3 LON
Y41) MVB (part of IEC 61375)
N- N1 casing width 225.2 mm see previous table
N2 casing width 271 mm
M- M1 Semi-flush mounting Order M1 and sepa-
M51) Surface mounting, standard ter- rate assembly kit for
minals 19" rack mounting
S- SX000 basic versions REC316*4 see previous table
to
SY990
SZ990 order not acc. to Data Sheet
T- T000 none Customer-specific logic Defined by
T001x FUPLA logic x = version of the FUPLA ABB Switzerland Ltd
to logic
T999x
T903x FUPLA logic for HBT standard
solution for 2 breakers
T904x FUPLA logic for HBT standard
solution for 3 breakers
1)MVB interface (for interbay or process bus) not applicable for surface-mounted version
The order number has been defined for the basic version as above and the required accessories
can be ordered according to the following Table.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 30
Ordering (contd) .
Table 36: Accessories
Assembly kits
Description Order No.
19"-mounting plate for hinged frames, light-beige for use
with:
1 REC316*4 (size 1 casing) HESG324310P1
REC316*4 size 1 surface mounting kit HESG448532R0001
REC316*4 size 2 surface mounting kit HESG448532R0002
PCC card interface
Type Protocol Connector Optical fibre* Gauge ** Order No.
For interbay bus:
PCCLON1 SET LON ST (bajonet) G/G 62.5/125 HESG448614R0001
500PCC02 MVB ST (bajonet) G/G 62.5/125 HESG448735R0231
For process bus:
RS232C interbay bus interface

316BM61b SPA ST (bajonet) G/G 62.5/125 HESG448267R401
316BM61b IEC 60870-5-103 SMA (screw) G/G 62.5/125 HESG448267R402
316BM61b SPA Plug/plug P/P HESG448267R431
* receiver Rx / transmitter Tx, G = glass, P = plastic **optical fibre conductor gauge in m
Human machine interface

Type Description Order No.
CAP2/316 * Installation CD German/English 1MRB260030M0001
* Unless expressly specified the latest version is supplied.
Optical fibre PC connecting cable
Type Order No.
500OCC02 communication cable for device with LDU 1MRB380084-R1
Disturbance recorder evaluation program
Type, description Order No.
REVAL English 3-Disk 1MRK000078-A
REVAL German 3-Disk 1MRK000078-D
E_wineve English/German (Professional) Single-licence 1MRB260034R0011
E_wineve English/German (Expert) Single-licence 1MRB260034R0021
E_wineve English/German (Professional) Multy-licence 1MRB260034R0012
E_wineve English/German (Expert) Multy-licence 1MRB260034R0022
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 31
Dimensioned
drawings Mounting element
Rear view
219 1
254 1
Panel cutout
T = Instr. transformer inputs

cross section = 4 mm2
A to D = Commands, input and output signals
cross section = 1.5 mm2
H1 = Auxiliary voltage
Fig. 4 Semi-flush mounting, rear connections. Size N1 casing.

1MRK511016-Ben
Page 32
Dimensioned draw-
ings (contd)
Mounting element
Rear view
Panel cutout

A to H = Commands, input and output signals

1MRK511016-Ben
Page 33
Fig. 6 Surface mounting, casing able to swing to the left, rear connections. Size N1 casing
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 34
Dimensioned draw-
ings (contd)
Fig. 7 Surface mounting, casing able to swing to the left, rear connections. Size N2 casing.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 35
Example of an Rated current 1 A, rated voltage 100 V AC 1 mounting kit HESG324351P1

order 6 phase voltages, three-phase currents 1 PC-Card LON
110 V DC aux. supply 1 CD RE.216 / RE316*4
1MRB260030M0001
8 command relays
1 PC connecting cable (if not already
24 signalling relays
available) 1MRB380084-R1
32 optocoupler inputs (110 V DC)
1 relay for 19" rack mounting Alternatively, the relay ID code may be given
instead. In this case the order would be:
Frequency function
1REC316*4, A1B0U1K42E1I3F1J3Q
Autoreclosure 1V3R1W3Y3M1N2SX300T0
Communication with the station control 1 mounting kit HESG324351P1
system (e.g. LON)
1 CD RE.216 / RE316*4
Operator program in English on CD 1MRB260030M0001
The corresponding order is as follows: 1 PC-Card HESG448614R1
1 REC316*4, HESG448750M0003 1 PC connecting cable (if not already

110 V DC aux. supply
Optocoupler input voltage 110 V DC Relay ID codes are marked on all relays. The
significance of the sub codes can be seen
Rated current 1 A from Table 35.
Rated voltage 100 V AC
Example of a Numerical control unit with extensive self- The checking of feeder and busbar voltages
specification monitoring and analog/digital conversion of for synchronization shall be guaranteed by a
all input quantities. synchrocheck function integrated in the con-
trol unit.
It shall be suitable for bay-oriented data
recording and supervision and control of MV The control unit shall be configurable with an
and HV switchgear plants. integrated voltage indication, entering the
interlocking conditions of the feeder ground-
A compact design and modular software shall
ing device.
enable a high flexibility of the control system
in order to adapt itself easily to the require- The integrated metering function shall be able
ments of the different switch bays. to calculate complementary the real power,
apparent power and frequency, starting from
Apart from semi-flush mounting in a 19"
the primary CT.
electronic equipment rack, the control unit
shall be able to be mounted directly in the The integrated disturbance recorder should
control panel of the primary plant. have a capacity of recording at least 9 analog
and 16 binary signals. It should be possible to
The bay control logic shall be able to be
assign CT and VT inputs as well as internal
designed for SF6 gas-insulated (GIS) plants
results of any included protection function,
as well as for indoor and outdoor switchgear
e.g. OCDT trip, to the disturbance recorder.
plants in single, double and multiple busbar
arrangements. This logic shall cover supervi- The control unit shall be supported by a soft-
sion and control of switching devices, inter- ware library which supplies protection func-
locking devices, command outputs and alarm tions. A menu-assisted HMI (human machine
registration. It shall be able to be easily com- interface) shall allow the user to activate pro-
plemented by means of a graphical function tection functions available in the library.
plan language.
1MRK511016-Ben
Page 36
References Operating instructions (printed) 1MRB520044-Uen

Operating instructions (CD) 1MRB260030M0001
Reference list REC316/REC316*4 1MRB520209-Ren
Data sheet CAP316 1MRB520167-Ben
Data sheet Test Set XS92b 1MRB520006-Ben
Data sheet SigTOOL 1MRB520158-Ben
Data sheet High-speed Bus Transfer (HBT) 1MRB520156-Ben
Data sheet REL316*4 1MRK506013-Ben
Data sheet RET316*4 1MRK504007-Ben
Data sheet REG316*4 1MRK502004-Ben
Data sheet RIO580 1MRB520176-Ben
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Brown-Boveri-Strasse 6
CH-5400 Baden/Switzerland
Tel. +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77
E-mail: substation.automation@ch.abb.com
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Printed in Switzerland (0311-0600-0)

Numerical Generator Protection REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 1
Issued: May 2003
Features Selectable protection functions Display of events, their acknowledgment

and printout
Multitude of applications
Disturbance recording
Setting menu-assisted with personal com-
puter by means of the Windows-based Self-documentation
operator program CAP2/316
Long-term stability
Fully numerical signal processing
Serial port for communication
Continuous self-monitoring by hardware
Available for 19" rack mounting in panel,
Cyclically executed testing routines, mostly surface or flush mounting.
by software
Four independent, user-selectable parame-
Setting of parameters and recording of the ter sets able to be activated via binary input
settings
Display of measured values functions.
Application The main areas of application of the Different degrees of redundancy are possible,
REG316*4 terminal are the protection of gen- availability and reliability of the protection
erators, motors and unit transformers. can be chosen to suit the application by dupli-
cating of REG316*4 units, but also by multi-
The modular design makes it extremely flexi- ple configuration of the protection functions.
ble and simple to adapt to the size of the pri-
mary system installation and the desired pro- The use of standard interfaces makes
tection schemes to be included. Economic REG316*4 compatible with process control
solutions can thus be achieved in the full systems. Different forms of data exchange
range of applications for which it is intended. with higher process control levels are possi-
ble, e.g. one-way reporting of digital states
and events, measured values and protection
parameters.
ABB Switzerland Ltd Numerical Generator Protection REG316*4
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 2
Application (contd) Protection functions External signals applied to the digital in-
All important protection functions required puts can be processed in any desired fash-
for the protection of generators, motors and ion.
unit transformers are included. The system
Digital signals can be combined to per-
can therefore replace several relays of a con-
form logical functions, e.g. external en-
ventional protection scheme. The following
abling or blocking signals with the output
table gives a survey of the most significant
signals of an internal protection function
protection functions of REG316*4.
and then used to block one of the other
The desired protection functions to suit the protection functions.
particular application can simply be selected
from a comprehensive library using the per- Protection functions:
sonal computer. No knowledge of program- Generator differential
ming whatsoever is required. Transformer differential
All setting ranges are extremely wide to make Definite time overcurrent (undercurrent)
(optionally with inrush detection)
the protection functions suitable for a multi-
tude of applications. The following main pa- Instantaneous overcurrent (undercurrent)
rameters can be set, among others: Voltage-controlled overcurrent
input channel or channels Inverse time overcurrent

Directional overcurrent protection with definite
pick-up setting
or inverse time characteristic
time delay Negative phase sequence current
definition of the operating characteristics Definite time overvoltage (undervoltage)
Stator earth fault (95%)
tripping logic
Rotor earth fault
control signal logic. Instantaneous overvoltage (undervoltage)
with peak value evaluation
Setting a corresponding parameter enables Voltage balance
the protection functions to be connected to 100% stator earth fault (+ rotor earth fault)
particular input channels. Digital input and Underimpedance
output signals can also be connected together
logically: Minimum reactance (loss of excitation)
Power
The tripping outputs of each protection Overload
function can be allocated to channels of
Inverse negative phase-sequence current
thetripping auxiliary relay assembly in a
man-ner corresponding to a matrix. Overtemperature
Frequency
The pick-up and tripping signals can be al-
located to the channels of the signalling df/dt
auxiliary relay assembly. Overexcitation
Provision is made for blocking each pro- Logical functions
tection function with a digital signal (e. g. Pole slip protection
digital inputs or the tripping signal of an-
other protection function).
Design The REG316*4 belongs to the generation of data such as reactionless reporting of binary
fully numerical generator protection termi- states, events, measurements and protection
nals, i.e. analog-to-digital conversion of the parameters or the activation of a different set
input variables takes place immediately after of settings by higher level control systems.
the input transformers and all further process-
ing of the resulting numerical signals is per- Because of its compact design, the very few
formed by microprocessors and controlled by hardware units it needs, its modular software
programs. and the integrated continuous self-diagnosis
and supervision functions, REG316*4 ideally
Standard interfaces enable REG316*4 to fulfils the users expectations of a modern
communicate with other control systems. protection terminal at a cost-effective price.
Provision is thus made for the exchange of The AVAILABILITY of a terminal, i.e. the
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 3
ratio between its mean time in service with- tion in a particular power system or to coordi-
out failure and the total life, is most certainly nate with, or replace units in an existing pro-
the most important characteristic required of tection scheme, is provided in REG316*4 by
protection equipment. As a consequence of ancillary software functions and the assign-
the continuous supervision of its functions, ment of input and output signals via the HMI.
this quotient in the case of REG316*4 is typi-
cally always close to 1. REG316*4s RELIABILITY, SELECTIV-
ITY and STABILITY areked by decades of
The menu-based HMI (human machine inter- experience in the protection of generators and
face) and the REG316*4 small size makes the motors in transmission and distribution sys-
tasks of connection, configuration and setting tems. Numerical processing ensures consis-
simple. A maximum of FLEXIBILITY, i.e. tent ACCURACY and SENSITIVITY
the ability to adapt the protection for applica- throughout its operational life.
Hardware The hardware concept for the REG316*4 nals to a suitable level for processing. The
generator protection equipment comprises input transformer unit can accommodate a
four different plug-in units, a connecting maximum of nine input transformers (volt-
mother PCB and housing (Fig. 1): age-, protection current- or measuring
transformer).
analog input unit
central processing unit Every analog variable is passed through a
first order R/C low-pass filter on the main
CPU unit to eliminate what is referred to as
power supply unit the aliasing effect and to suppress HF inter-
connecting mother PCB ferences (Fig. 2). They are then sampled 12
times per period and converted to digital sig-
housing with connection terminals. nals. The analog/digital conversion is per-
formed by a 16 Bit converter. A DSP carries
In the analog input unit an input transformer out part of the digital filtering and makes sure
provides the electrical and static isolation that the data for the protection algorithms are
between the analog input variables and the available in the memory to the main proces-
internal electronic circuits and adjusts the sig- sor.
DC
+5V
+15V Power
CPU -15V
supply Remote I/O
486 +24V DC Remote I/OTrip

DPM Outputs
Remote I/OTrip
A/D DSP Sign.
Outputs
Trip
Outputs
SW-Key Sign.
outputs
Trip Bin.
Outputs
Trip Bin.
Trip EPROM outputs
Outputs I/O Inputs
TripSignal
Outputs MVB
Sign. I /IO/Ports
outputs a
Sign.
I/O
Sign. BinaryPorts
Outputs Tranceiver
Outputs Ports
Bin.
inputs
C
b
Bin.
Inputs M
Bin.
Inputs PCC
Inputs C
c
RAM I
LON
A
d
MVB
SCS
LED's
SMS
RS Serial RS Serial
HMI

1MRK502004-Ben
Page 4
Hardware (contd.) The processor core essentially comprises the REG316*4 can have one to four binary I/O
main microprocessor for the protection algo- units each. These units are available in three
rithms and dual-ported memories (DPMs) for versions:
communication between the A/D converters
a) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty
and the main processor. The main processor
contacts, 8 optocoupler inputs and 6
performs the protection algorithms and con-
trols the local HMI and the interfaces to the
station control system. Binary signals from
the main processor are relayed to the corre-
contacts, 4 optocoupler inputs and 10 sig-
sponding inputs of the I/O unit and thus con-
nalling relays Type 316DB62
trol the auxiliary output relays and the light
emitting diode (LED) signals. The main pro-
c) 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signalling
cessor unit is equipped with an RS232C serial
relays Type 316DB63.
interface via which among other things the
When ordering REG316*4 with more than 2
and the data from the disturbance recorder
I/O units, casing size N2 must be selected.
memory are transferred to a local or remote
PC.
On this main processor unit there are two
visible on the front of the REG316*4.
tion to the station monitoring system (SMS)
and station control system (SCS) as well as to
the remote I/Os.
Software Both analog and binary input signals are conform, they are then separated by numerical
ditioned before being processed by the main filters into real and apparent components
processor. As described under hardware before being applied to the main processor.
above, the analog signals pass through the Binary signals from the optocoupler inputs go
sequence input transformers, shunt, low-pass straight to the main processor. The actual pro-
filter (anti-aliasing filter), multiplexer and cessing of the signals in relation to the protec-
A/D converter stages and DSP. In their digital tion algorithms and logic then takes place.
Fig. 2 Data Flow

1MRK502004-Ben
Page 5
Graphical The graphical programming language used in TOFFS, TOFFL Off delay short, long
engineering tool the tool CAP316 makes CAP316 a powerful TON On delay
and user-friendly engineering tool for the en- TONS, TONL On delay short, long
XOR Exclusive OR gate
gineering of the control and protection units
RE.216/316. It is similar to IEC 1131. Analog functions:
CAP316 permits the function blocks repre- ABS Absolute value
senting the application to be directly trans- ADD Adder/subtracter
ADDL Long integer adder/sub-
lated into an application program (FUPLA) tracter
capable of running on the processors of the ADMUL Adder/multiplier
control and protection units RE.316*4. The CNVIL Integer to long integer
program packet contains an extensive library converter
of function blocks. Up to 8 projects (FUPLAs CNVLBCD Long integer to BC con-
verter
created with CAP316) are able to run simul- CNVLI Long integer to integer
taneously on a RE.316*4. converter
CNVLP Long integer to percent
List of functions converter
Binary functions: CNVPL Percentage to long inte-
AND AND gate ger converter
ASSB Assign binary DIV Divider
B23 2-out-of-3 selector DIVL Long integer divider
B24 2-out-of-4 selector FCTL Linear function
BINEXTIN External binary input FCTP Polynomial function
BINEXOUT External binary output FILT Filter
COUNTX Shift register INTS, INTL Integrator
CNT Counter KMUL Factor multiplier
CNTD Downwards counter LIM Limiter
OR OR gate LOADS Load shedding function
RSFF RS flip-flop MAX Maximum value detector
SKIP Skip segment MIN Minimum value detector
TFF T flip-flop with reset MUL Multiplier
TMOC Monostable constant MULL Long integer multiplier
TMOCS, TMOCL Monostable constant NEGP Percent negator
short, long PACW Pack BINARY signals
TMOI Monostable constant into INTEGER
with interrupt PDTS, PDTL Differentiator
TMOIS, TMOIL Monostable constant PT1S, PT1L Delayed approximation
with interrupt short, long SQRT Square root
TOFF Off delay SWIP Percent switch
THRLL Lower limit threshold
THRUL Upper limit threshold
TMUL Time multiplier
UPACW Unpack BINARY sig-
nals from an INTEGER
Example:
3
B_DRIVE
CL CL Q0_CL
OP OP Q0_OP
POK Q0_Q0_POK
4
& Q0_Q0_CLOSED
5 Q0_Q0_OPEN
&
SEL
DPMIN_Q0_CLOSED
DPMIN_Q0_OPEN
GEX Q0_GUIDE_EXE
2
>=1 EXE Q0_EXE
1
&
SYNC GOON Q0_GOON_Q0
Q0_SEL_DRIVE_Q0
SYST Q0_Q0_SYST
GEN_REQUEST_ON
GEN_SYNC
Q1_Q1_OPEN
ALSY Q0_ALSY
Q2_Q2_OPEN
BKS Q0_BLOCK_SELECT
GEN_REQUEST_EXE
KDOF Q0_KDO_FAIL
Part of FUPLA application (Q0) : control and interlocking logic for three objects Q0,
Q1, Q2. B_DRIVE is a macro based on binary function blocks.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 6
Functions This is an overview of the possible functions may be applied in accordance with the PT
according to the hardware variants. These connections (e.g. three phase for minimum
functions can be activated within the scope of impedance or single phase for rotor and stator
the CPU capacity. One or the other function earth fault protection).
Variant
Protection Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Definite time overcurrent (51)
Overcurrent with peak value evaluation (50)
Inverse time overcurrent (51)
Directional definite time overcurrent protection (67)
Directional inverse time overcurrent function (67)
Voltage-controlled protection (51-27)
Thermal overload function (49)
Stator overload (49S)
Rotor overload (49R)
Inverse time negative phase sequence (46)
Negative phase sequence current (46)
Generator differential (87G)
Transformer differential (87T)
3-winding trafo differential (87T)
* High-impedance REF
Definite time overvoltage (27,59)
Instant. overvolt. with peak value eval. (59,27)
Undervoltage (27)
Overexcitation with inverse time delay (24)
Overexcitation (24)
Frequency (81)
df/dt
80-95% Stator earth fault
** 100% Stator earth fault (64S)
Pole slip (78)
*** Rotor earth fault (64R)
** Rotor earth fault with injection principle
Minimum reactance (40)
Interturn fault
Underimpedance (21)
Reverse power (32) 1 1 1
Voltage comparison (60)
Voltage plausibility
Current plausibility
Metering
Delay
Counter
Logic
Project-specific control logic
Fig. 3 Main versions
* Requires external stabilizing resistor and VDR

** Requires injection unit REX010 and injection transformer block REX011
*** Requires external measuring bridge YWX111-.. and coupling capacitors
1 minimum setting: >2%.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 7
Version 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CTs' protection
characteristic 9 6 3 3 6 3 3 1A, 2A or 5A
CTs' measuring
characteristic - - 3 - 1 1 - 1A, 2A or 5A
VTs - 3 3 6 2 5 2 100 V or 200 V
VTs - - - - - - 4 only for 100% stator and rotor earth
fault protection and for 95% stator
earth fault protection
Fig. 4 Analog inputs (9 channels max.)
Directional overcurrent protection

ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to
The directional overcurrent protection func- open or close within an adjustable time
tion is available either with inverse time or
results in the creation of a corresponding sig-
definite time overcurrent characteristic. This nal for further processing.
function comprises a voltage memory for
faults close to the relay location. The function Plausibility check
response after the memory time has elapsed The current and voltage plausibility functions
can be selected (trip or block). facilitate the detection of system asymmet-
ries, e.g. in the secondary circuits of CTs and
Frequency function
VTs.
The frequency function is based on the mea-
surement of one voltage. This function is able Sequence-of-events recorder
to be configured as maximum or minimum The event recorder function provides capacity
function and is applied as protection function for up to 256 binary signals including time
and for load shedding. By multiple configura- marker with a resolution in the order of milli-
tion of this function almost any number of seconds.
stages can be realized.
Rate-of-change of frequency The disturbance recorder monitors up to 9
This function offers alternatively an enabling analog inputs, up to 16 binary inputs and
by absolute frequency. It contains an under- internal results of protection functions. The
voltage blocking facility. Repeated configura- capacity for recording disturbances depends
tion of this function ensures a multi-step on the duration of a disturbance as determi-
setup. ned by its pre-disturbance history and the
duration of the disturbance itself. The total
Measuring
recording time is approximately 5 s.
Both measuring functions measure the single-
or three-phase rms values of voltage, current, Human machine interface (HMI) - CAP2/316
frequency, real power and apparent power for For local communication with REG316*4,
display on the local HMI or transfer to the there is the setting software CAP2/316 availa-
station control system. A choice can be made ble which is based on Windows. This soft-
between phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase ware runs under the following operating sys-
voltages. tems:
Ancillary functions Windows NT 4.0
Ancillary functions such as a logic and a de- Windows 2000.
lay/integrator enable the user to create logical
combinations of signals and pick-up and reset This optimal programming tool is available
delays. for engineering, testing, commissioning and
operation. The software can be used either
A runtime supervision feature enables check- ON-LINE or OFF-LINE and furthermore
ing the opening and closing of all kinds of contains a DEMO mode.
breakers (circuit-breakers, isolators,
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 8
Functions (contd) Features:

Measurand display
channels
- Binary signals
Event list
Operating instructions
Disturbance recorder information
Diagnostic information
For each protection function a tripping char- Acknowledgment functions
acteristic is displayed. Apart from the basic - Resetting LEDs
understanding of the protection functions, the - Resetting latched outputs
graphical display of these functions also
makes the setting of the parameters clearer. - Event erasing
- Warm start.
Remote communication
REG316*4 is able to communicate with a sta-
tion monitoring and evaluation system (SMS)
or a station control system (SCS) via an opti-
cal fibre link. The corresponding serial inter-
face permits events, measurements, distur-
bance recorder data and protection settings to
be read and sets of parameter settings to be
switched.
Using the LON bus permits in addition the

exchange of binary information between the
Any desired protection function can be selec- individual bay controllers, e.g. signals for sta-
ted from the software library of all released tion interlocking.
protection functions by means of the drag-
and-drop feature. Remote in- and outputs (RIO580)
Using the process bus type MVB, remote in-
and output units 500RIO11 can be connected
to the RE.316*4 terminals. The input and out-
put channels can be extended to a large num-
ber by using the RIO580 remote input/output
system. Installing the 500RIO11 I/O units
close to the process reduces the wiring dra-
matically, since they are accessible via fibre-
optic link from the RE.316*4 terminals.
Analog signals can also be connected to the

system via the 500AXM11 from the RIO580
family:
0...20 mA
Built-in HMI
-20...20 mA
The front HMI unit serves primarily for the
signalling of actual events, measurands and DC voltage 0...10 V
diagnostic data. Settings are not displayed. -10...10 V
Ni100, Ni250, Ni1000.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 9
Self-diagnosis and supervision Supporting software

RE.316*4s self-diagnosis and supervision The operator program facilitates configura-
functions ensure maximum availability not tion and setting of the protection, listing pa-
only of the protection terminal itself, but also rameters, reading events and listing the vari-
of the power system it is protecting. Hard- ous internal diagnostic data.
ware failures are immediately signalled by an
alarm contact. In particular, the external and The evaluation programs REVAL and
internal auxiliary supplies are continuously E_wineve (Windows NT/Windows 2000) are
supervised. The correct function and toler- available for viewing and evaluating the dis-
ance of the A/D converter are tested by cycli- turbances stored by the disturbance recorder.
cally converting two reference voltages. Where the disturbance data are transferred via
Special algorithms regularly check the pro- the communications system to the distur-
cessors memories (background functions). A bance recorder evaluation station, the file
watchdog supervises the execution of the pro- transfer program WinCom (Windows NT/
grams. Windows 2000) is also used.
An important advantage of the extensive self- The program XSCON (MS Windows) is
diagnosis and supervision functions is that available for conversion of the RE.316*4s
periodic routine maintenance and testing are disturbance recorder data to ABBs test set
reduced. XS92b format. This enables reproduction of
electrical quantities recorded during the dis-
turbance.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 10

continuous 4 x IN
for 10 s 30 x IN
for 1 s 100 x IN
continuous 2.2 x UN
Burden per phase
current inputs <0.1 VA at IN = 1 A
<0.3 VA at IN = 5 A
voltage inputs <0.25 VA at UN

Tripping relays
2 N/O contacts each
1.5 mm2 terminals
at U <50 V DC 1.5 A
at U <120 V DC 0.3 A
at U <250 V DC 0.1 A
at U <50 V DC 5A
at U <120 V DC 1A
at U <250 V DC 0.3 A
Signalling contacts
No. of contacts 6, 10 or 8 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or
316DB63),
Each interface unit equipped with 1 C/O contact
and all others N/O contacts
Making power at 110 VDC 550 W
at U <50 V DC 0.5 A
at U <120 V DC 0.1 A
at U <250 V DC 0.04 A
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 11

(316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63)
Input voltage 18 to 36 V DC / 36 to 75 V DC / 82 to 312 V DC / 175 to 312 V DC
Threshold voltage 10 to 17 V DC / 20 to 34 V DC /40 to 65 V DC / 140 to 175 V DC
Operating time 1 ms

Latching with reset by next pick-up
Latching only if protection trips with reset by next pick-up
Colours 1 green (standby)
1 red (trip)
The user can assign the LEDs to protection functions.

modem.

PCC interface
PCC (optional)
Data transfer rate 1.25 MBit/s
MVB bus PCC with redundant fibre-optical port, ST
connectors
Event memory
Capacity 256 events
Time definition without synchronizing <10 s per day
Engineering interface integrated software interface for signal
engineering with SigTOOL
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 12

Voltage range 36 to 312 V DC
Fuse rating 4 A
during a fault
MVB interface 2.5 W

Temperature range
storage -40 C to +85 C IEC 60255-6 (1988)
IEC 60255-5 (2000)
EN 60950 (1995)
IEC 60255-5 (2000) *
(1989)
IEC 61000-4-4 (1995)
(ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 (2001)
cies
(RFI) 10 V, Cl. 3 EN 61000-4-6 (1996),
10 V/m, Cl. 3 IEC 61000-4-3 (1996),
10 V/m, Cl. 3
Emission Cl. A EN 61000-6-2 (2001),
EN 55011 (1998),
CISPR 11 (1990)
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 13

Weight
Width N2: 271 mm.
Enclosure IP 50 (IP 20 if MVB PCC are used)
Protection Class IPXXB for terminals.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 14
Technical Data Table 10: Thermal overload function (49)

Functions Thermal image for the 1st. order model.
Settings:
2% N (at fN) with core-balance CTs

Settings:
Reset ratio
overcurrent >94 % (for max. function)
undercurrent <106 % (for min. function)
reset ratio 0.8

Also applied for detection of:
stator ground faults (95%)
rotor ground faults (requires external measuring bridge YWX111 and coupling capacitors)
interturn faults
Settings:
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 15

Settings:
Reset ratio >94%
Accuracy of angle measurement
(at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) 5
Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage mem-
ory 20
Frequency dependence of angle measurement
at voltage memory 0.5/Hz

Settings:
very inverse c=1
Reset ratio >94%
(at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) 5
Accuracy class of the operating time acc. to British
Standard 142 E 10
Accuracy of angle measurement at voltage mem-
ory 20
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 16
Technical Data Func- Table 15: Metering function UIfPQ

tions (contd) Single-phase measurement of voltage, current, frequency, real power and apparent power
Choice of measuring phase-to-ground or phase-to phase voltages
Settings:
Phase-angle -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1
Refer to Table 46 for accuracy.

Three-phase measurement of voltage (star or delta), current, frequency, real and apparent power and
power factor.
Settings:
t1-Interval 1 min., 2 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min.,
30 min., 60 min. or 120 min.
See Table 46 for accuracy
Table 17: Generator differential (87G)

Features:
Three-phase function
Current-adaptive characteristic
High stability for external faults and current transformer saturation
Settings:
g-setting (basic sensitivity) 0.1 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.05 IN
v-setting (slope) 0.25 or 0.5
Max. trip time
- for I >2 IN 30 ms
- for I 2 IN 50 ms
Accuracy of pick-up value of g 5% IN (at fN)
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 17
Table 18: Transformer differential (87T)

Features:
For two- and three-winding transformers
No auxiliary transformers necessary because of vector group and CT ratio compensation
Inrush restraint using 2nd harmonic
Settings:
g-setting 0.1 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.1 IN
v-setting 0.25 or 0.5
b-setting 1.25 to 5 in steps of 0.25 IN
Max. trip time (protected transformer loaded)
- for I > 2 IN 30 ms
- for I 2 IN 50 ms
Accuracy of pick-up value 5% IN (at fN)
Reset conditions I <0.8 g-setting
Differential protection definitions:
I = I1+ I2 + I3
IH = I 1 I 2 cos
for cos 0
0 for cos <0
= arg (I1' - I2')
2-winding: I 1 ' = I1 , I 2 ' = I2

3-winding: I1' = MAX (I1, 2, 3) Fig. 5 Differential protection characteristic
I2' = I1 + I2 + I3 - I1'
Table 19: Instantaneous overcurrent (50)

Features:
Settings:
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 18
Technical Data Func- Table 20: Voltage-controlled overcurrent (51-27)

Maximum current value memorized after start
Reset of function after voltage return or after trip
Single- or three-phase measurement for current
Positive-sequence voltage evaluation
Settings:
Hold time 0.1 to 10 s in steps of 0.02 s
Accuracy of pick-up value 5% (at fN)
Reset ratio >94%
Starting time 80 ms

very inverse c=1
Settings:
according to BritishStandard 142 E 5.0
Reset ratio >94 %

very inverse c=1
Settings:
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 19

Reset ratio >94%
Table 23: Negative phase sequence current (46)

Features:
Protection against unbalanced load
Definite time delay
Settings:
Negative phase-sequence current (I2) 0.02 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Accuracy of pick-up value 2% IN (at fN, I IN) (with measuring transformers)
Reset ratio
I2 0.2 IN >94%
I2 <0.2 IN >90%
Starting time 80 ms
Table 24: Instantaneous overvoltage prot. function (59, 27) with peak value evaluation
Features:
Evaluation of instantaneous values, therefore extremely fast and frequency-independent on a wide scale
Storing of the highest instantaneous value after start
No suppression of DC components
1- or 3phase
Maximum value detection for multi-phase functions
Variable lower limiting frequency fmin
Settings:
Accuracy of pick-up value (at 0.08 to 1.1 fN) 3% or 0,005 UN
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 20
Technical Data Func- Table 25: Underimpedance (21)

Detection of two- and three-phase short circuits (back-up protection)
Single- or three-phase measurement
Circular characteristic centered at origin of R-X diagram
Lowest phase value evaluation for three-phase measurement
Fig. 6 Underimpedance protection function

characteristics
Settings:
Impedance 0.025 to 2.5 UN/lN in steps of 0.001 UN/lN
Reset ratio <106%
Starting time <50 ms (at fN)
Accuracy of pick-up values 5%
Table 26: Minimum reactance (40)

Features:
Detection of loss-of-excitation failure of synchronous machines
Out-of-step detection with additional time delay or count logic
Circular characteristic
Tripping possible inside or outside the circle
Fig. 7 Minimum reactance protection function characteristics

Settings:
Reactance XA -5 to 0 UN/lN in steps of 0.01 UN/lN
Reactance XB -2.5 to +2.5 UN/lN in steps of 0.01 UN/lN
Accuracy of pick-up values 5% of highest absolute value of XA, XB (at fN)
Reset ratio (related to origin of circle),
105% for min. function, 95% for max. function.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 21
Table 27: Stator overload (49S)

Features:
Operating characteristics according to ASA-C50.13
Highest phase value for three-phase measurement
Wide time multiplier setting.
Fig. 8 Stator overload protection function

characteristics
Settings:
Base current (IB) 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Time multiplier k1 1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
Pick-up current (Istart) 1.0 to 1.6 IB in steps of 0.01 IB
tmin 1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
tg 10 to 2000 s in steps of 10 s
tmax 100 to 2000 s in steps of 10 s
treset 10 to 2000 s in steps of 10 s
Accuracy of current measurement 5% (at fN), 2% (at fN) with measuring transformer
Starting time 80 ms
Table 28: Rotor overload (49R)

Features:
Same as stator overload function, but three-phase measurement
Settings:
Same as for stator overload function
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 22
Technical Data Func- Table 29: Inverse time negative phase sequence current (46)
Protection against unbalanced load
Inverse time delay
Fig. 9 Inverse time negative phase

sequence current protection function
characteristics
Settings:
Base current (IB) 0.5 to 2.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Time multiplier k1 5 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s
Factor k2 (pick-up) 0.02 to 0.20 in steps of 0.01
tmin 1 to 120 s in steps of 0.1 s
tmax 500 to 2000 s in steps of 1 s
treset 5 to 2000 s in steps of 1 s
Accuracy of NPS current (I2) measurement 2% (at fN) with measuring transformers
Starting time 80 ms

Features:
Settings:
Accuracy of pick-up value 30 mHz at UN and fN
Reset ratio 100%
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 23

Features:
Combined pick-up with frequency criterion possible
Blocking by undervoltage
Settings:
Table 32: Overexcitation (24)

Features:
U/f measurement
Settings:
Pick-up value 0.2 to 2 UN/fN in steps of 0.01 UN/fN
Accuracy (at fN) 3% or 0.01 UN/fN
Reset ratio >97% (max.), <103% (min.)
Starting time 120 ms
Table 33: Overexcitation function with inverse time delay (24)

Features:
Inverse time delay according to IEEE Guide C37.91-1985
Setting made by help of table settings
Settings:
Table settings U/f values: (1.05; 1.10 to 1.50) UN/fN
Start value U/f 1.05 to 1.20 UN/fN in steps of 0.01 UN/fN
tmin 0.01 to 2 min in steps of 0.01 min
tmax 5 to 100 min in steps of 0.1 min
Reset time 0.2 to 100 min in steps of 0.1 min
Reference voltage 0.8 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
Accuracy of pick-up value 3% UN/fN (at fN)
Reset ratio 100%
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 24
Technical Data Func- Table 34: Voltage balance function (60)

Comparing of the voltage amplitudes of two groups of voltage inputs (line 1, line 2)
1- or 3-phase voltage measurement
Signalling of the group having the lower voltage
Evaluation of the voltage differences per phase for the 3-phase function and logic OR connection for
the tripping decision
Variable tripping and reset delay
Suppression of d. c. components
Suppression of harmonics
Fig. 10 Tripping characteristic Voltage comparison (shown for the phases R and the setting value volt.
diff. = 0.2 . UN)
Settings:
Voltage difference 0.1 to 0.5 UN in steps of 0.05 UN
Trip delay 0.00 to 1.0 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset delay 0.1 to 2.0 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset ratio >90%
Accuracy of pick-up value (at fN) 2% or 0.005 UN
Numbers of phases 1 or 3
Maximum tripping time without delay 50 ms
U1R: phase R voltage amplitude, voltage channel 1 (line 1)
U2R: phase R voltage amplitude, voltage channel 2 (line 2)
For 3-phase function: the characteristic is valid accordingly for the phases S and T
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 25
Table 35: Dead machine protection (51, 27)

Features:
Quick separation from network at accidental energization of generator (e.g. at stand-still or on turning
gear)
Instant overcurrent measurement
Voltage-controlled overcurrent function e.g. blocked at voltage values >0.85 UN
This function does not exist in the library, it must be combined from the voltage, current and time function
Settings:
Voltage 0.01 to 2 UN in steps of 0.002 UN
Reset delay 0 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Table 36: 100% Stator earth fault protection (64S)

Features:
Protection of the entire stator winding, including star points, even at standstill. Works also for most of
the operating conditions.
Also suitable when 2 earthings (groundings) are in the protection zone
Permanent supervision of the alsostate of the insulation
Based on the earth (ground) voltage displacement principle and calculation of the earth (ground) fault
resistance
Alarm and tripping values are entered, resp. measured and displayed in k
Type of earthings (groundings):
Star point earthing with resistors (requires REX011)
Star point earthing with grounding transformer (requires REX011-1)
Earthing transformers on generator terminals (requires REX011-2)
Settings:
Alarm stage 100 to 20 k in steps of 0.1k
Tripping stage 100 to 20 k in steps of 0.1k
RES 400 to 5 k in steps of 0.01k
Number of star points 2
RES-2. starpoint 900 to 30 k in steps of 0.01k
Reset ratio 110% for setting values of 10 k
Accuracy 0.1 k to 10 k: <10%
Starting time 1.5 s
Functional requirements:
- max.earthing current I0 <20A (recommended I0 = 5A)
- stator earthing capacity 0.5 F to 6 F
- stator earthing resistance RPS 130 to 500
- stator earthing resistance RES 700 to 5 k (4.5 x RPS)
(All values are based on the starpoint side)
The actual earthing resistances RES + RPS have to be calculated in accordance with the Users Guide:
The 100% stator earth fault protection function always requires an injection unit type REX010, an injection
transformer block type REX011 and a 95% stator earth fault protection function.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 26
Technical Data Func- Table 37: Rotor earth fault protection (64R)
Continuous supervision of the insulation level and calculation of the earthing (grounding) resistance
Alarm and tripping values are entered resp. measured and displayed in k
Settings:
Alarm stage 100 to 25 k in steps of 0.1k
Tripping stage 100 to 25 k in steps of 0.1k
RER 900 to 5 k in steps of 0.01k
Coupling capacity 2 F to 10 F
Reset ratio 110%
Accuracy 0.1 k to 10 k <10%
Starting time 1.5 s
Functional requirements:
- total rotor earthing capacity 200 nF to 1F
- rotor earthing resistance RPR 100 to 500
- rotor earthing resistance RER 900 to 5 k
- coupling capacity 4 F to 10 F
- time constant T = RER, x C = 3 to 10 ms
The actual earthing resistance RER + RPR have to be calculated in accordance with the Users Guide.
The 100% rotor earth fault protection function always requires an injection unit type REX010 and an injec-
tion transformer block type REX011 which are connected to the plant via coupling capacitors.
Table 38: Pole slip protection (78)

Features:
Recording the pole wheel movements from 0.2 Hz to 8 Hz
Differentiation of the pendulum center inside or outside of the generator-transformer block zone by two
independent tripping stages
Adjustable warning angle for pole wheel movements
Number of slips adjustable before tripping
Fig. 11 Characteristic of the function

Settings:
ZA (system impedance) 0 to 5.0 UN/lN in steps of 0.001
ZB (generator impedance) -5.0 to 0 UN/lN in steps of 0.001
ZC (impedance step 1) 0 to 5.0 UN/lN in steps of 0.001
Phi 60 to 270 in steps of 1
warning angle 0 to 180 in steps of 1
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 27
tripping angle 0 to 180 in steps of 1

n1 0 to 20 in steps of 1
n2 0 to 20 in steps of 1
t-reset 0.5 s to 25 s in steps of 0.01 s

Over and underpower
Settings:
Reset ratio 30% to 170% in steps of 1%
Max. operating time without intentional 70 ms
delay

Features
remote trip).
Settings
Delay t2 (back-up trip) 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 28
Technical Data Func- Number of phases 1 or 3

tions (contd)

Available recording time for 9 CT/VT- and 8 binary signals approximately 5 s
Data format EVE
Resolution 12 bits
Settings:
Recording periods
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 29
Ancillary functions
Table 42: Logic

1. OR gate
2. AND gate

Settings:
Integration yes/no

applied to an input
Accuracy of the pick-up setting at rated frequency 2% IN (at 0.2 to 1.2 IN
2% UN (at 0.2 to 1.2 UN
Reset ratio >90%
>95% (at U >0.1 UN or I >0.1 IN)
Amplitude compensation for summation VT - 2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01

Settings
Accuracy of run time supervision 2 ms
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 30
Technical Data Func- Table 46: Accuracy of the metering function UIfPQ and three-phase measuring module
tions (contd) (including input voltage and input current CT)
pensation
f = fN
f = fN
0.2 to 1.2 UN
0.2 to 1.2 IN
f = fN
0.8 to 1,2 UN
SN = 3 UN IN (dreiphasig)
SN = 1/3 3 UN IN (einphasig)
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 31
Wiring diagram
CURRENT
AND VOLTAGE
INPUTS
(ACC. TO K-CODE)
SIGNALLING
COMMUNICATION
PORT
(LOCAL HMI) (PC))
SERIAL COMMUNI-
CATION WITH SUB-
STATION CONTROL
EARTHING SCREW
ON CASING
TRIP
OPTOCOUPLER
INPUTS
CD SUPPLY
Fig. 12 Typical wiring diagram of REG316*4 in size N1 casing with two input/output units 316DB62
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 32
Ordering Specify:
Quantity
Ordering number
(Basic version ordering number + stand-alone unit ordering number,
or only stand alone unit ordering number)
ADE code + key (see table below)

Stand-alone units REG316*4 with built-in HMI (see table below) HESG448750M0004
Table 47: REG316*4 basic versions
VTDT(EFStat)
OCDT (REF)
VTDT(EFrot)
EFStat100
OC Inv Dir
EFRot100
OCDT Dir
Basic-SW
Relay ID code
LossEx
U/f(inv)
VTInst
Power
VTDT
>I<U
DiffG
Polsl
DiffT
Freq
Vbal
df/dt
UZ
A*B0C*D*U0K65E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR100 T*** X X X
HESG448750M0004
A*B0C*D0U*K63E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR200 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

A*B*C0D0U*K66E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR300 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
A*B0C0D0U*K64E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR400 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Order No.
A*B*C*D0U*K61E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR500 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

A*B*C0D0U*K62E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR600 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
A*B0C0D0U*K67E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*SR700 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Legend
* required sub-codes in Table 48:
OCDT(REF) definite time over current function for high-impedance differential protection
OCDT Dir Directional definite time overcurrent protection
OC Inv Dir Directional inverse time overcurrent function
VTDT definite time voltage function
VTDT (EFStat) definite time voltage function for stator ground fault protection
VTDT (EFrot) definite time voltage function for rotor ground fault protection
VTinst instantaneous overvoltage function with peak value evaluation
>I<U combined overcurrent undervoltage
Freq. frequency protection (minimum, maximum)
df/dt rate-of-change of frequency protection
U/f(inv) overexcitation protection with inverse time delay
Vbal voltage balance protection
Power power function
LossEx minimum reactance protection
UZ minimum impedance protection
Polsl pole slip protection
DiffT transformer differential protection
DiffG generator differential protection
EFStat100 100% stator ground fault protection
EFRot100 100% rotor ground fault protection
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 33
Basic-SW basic software including the following functions:

OCDT definite time overcurrent
OCInst overcurrent protection with peak value evaluation
IoInv inverse time ground fault current
TH thermal overload
OCInv inverse time overcurrent protection
Ucheck voltage plausibility (only if 3-phase voltage is available)
Icheck current plausibility
UlfPQ metering (only if at least 1 voltage is available)
MeasMod three-phase measuring module
Delay delay/integrator
Count counter
Logic logic interconnection
NPSDT negative phase sequence current protection
NPSInv inverse time negative phase sequence current protection
OLStat stator overload
OLRot rotor overload
CAP316 project-specific control logic
DRec disturbance recorder
BFP breaker failure protection
RTS runtime supervision
All the functions of the basic version can be applied in any combination providing the maximum capacity
of the processor and the number of analog channels is not exceeded.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 34
Ordering (contd) Table 48: Definitions of the relay ID codes in Table 47

A1 1A
A2 2A
A5 5A
B1 1A
B2 2A
B5 5A
C1 1A
C2 2A
C5 5A
D1 1A
D2 2A
D5 5A
U1 100 V AC
U2 200 V AC
K- K61 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) CT = current transformer see previous table
3 CTs (3ph Code C-) VT = voltage transformer
1 MT (1ph Code B-) MT = metering transformer
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
3 CTs (3ph Code C-)
3 CTs (3ph Code C-)
3 CTs (3ph Code D-)
3 MTs (3ph Code B-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
3 VTs (special for 100% EFP)
E- E1 8 optocoupler 1. binary input/output unit see previous table
2 command relays
8 LED's
2 command relays
8 LED's
8 LED's
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 35

I5 18 to 36 V DC
I9 175 to 312 V DC
F- F0 none
2 command relays
8 LED's
2 command relays
8 LED's
8 LED's
J- J0 none 2. binary input/output unit state
J4 36 to 75 V DC
J5 18 to 36 V DC
J9 175 to 312 V DC
Q- Q0 none
2 command relays
2 command relays
V- V0 none state
V3 82 to 312 V DC 3. binary input/output unit
V5 18 to 36 V DC
V9 175 to 312 V DC
R- R0 none
2 command relays
2 command relays
W- W0 none
W5 18 to 36 V DC
W9 175 to 312 V DC
Y1 SPA
Y2 IEC 60870-5-103
Y3 LON
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 36
Ordering (contd) N- N1 casing width 225.2 mm see previous table

S- SR000 basic versions REG316*4 see previous table
to
SS990
to logic
T999x
1)
The MVB interface (for interbay or process bus) is not applicable for the surface-mounted version
The order number has been defined for the basic version as above und the required accessories
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 37

Assembly kits
Item Description Order No.
with:
1REG316*4 (size 1 casing) HESG324310P1
2 REG316*4 (size 1 casing) HESG324310P2
1 REG316*4 (size 2 casing HESG324351P1
REG316*4 size 1 surface mounting kit HESG448532R0001
REG316*4 size 2 surface mounting kit HESG448532R0002
PCC card interface
For interbay bus:
For process bus:
500PCC02 MVB ST (bajonet) G/G 62.5/125 HESG 448735R0232


CAP2/316 * Installation CD German/English 1MRB260030M0001
Type Order No.
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 38
Dimensioned
Rear view
219 1
254 1
Panel cutout


1MRK502004-Ben
Page 39
Mounting element
Rear view
Panel cutout

2
cross section = 1.5 mm
Fig. 14 Semi-flush mounting, rear connections. Size N2 casing

1MRK502004-Ben
Page 40
Dimensioned draw-
ings (contd)
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 41
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 42
Example of an Rated current 1 A, rated voltage 100 VAC 1 PC card LON

order 3-phase voltages, 6-phase currents 1 CD, RE.216 / RE.316*4
1MRB260030M0001
110 VDC aux. supply
4 heavy duty relays (3 tripping, 1 CB clos-
ing) 20 signalling relays
8 optocoupler inputs (110 VDC) Alternatively, the relay ID code may be given
instead. In this case the order would be:
1 relay for 19" rack mounting
1 REG316*4, A1B0C1D0U1K63E2I-
Communication with the station control
3F2J3Q0V0R0W0Y1N1M1SR200T0
system (e.g. LON)
1 mounting kit HESG324310P1
Operator program on CD
1 CD, RE.216 / RE.316*4
The corresponding order is as follows: 1MRB260030M0001
1 REG316*4, HESG448750M0004 1 PC card HESG448614R1
110 V DC aux. supply 1 PC connecting cable (if not already
Optocoupler input voltage 110 VDC
Rated current 1 A Relay ID codes are marked on all relays. The
significance of the sub-codes can be seen
Rated voltage 100 VDC from Table 48:
References Operating instructions (printed) 1MRB520049-Uen

Operating instructions (CD) 1MRB260030M0001
Reference list REG316/REG316*4 1MRB520210-Ren
Data sheet CAP316 1MRB520167-Ben
Data sheet REX010/011 1MRB520123-Ben
Data sheet Test Set XS92b 1MRB520006-Ben
Data sheet SigTOOL 1MRB520158-Ben
Data sheet RIO580 1MRB520176-Ben
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 43
1MRK502004-Ben
Page 44
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Tel. +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77

Auxiliary unit for REG216/316*4 REX010/011
for 100% stator and rotor earth
1MRB520123-Ben
fault protection Page 1
Issued: March 2003
Changed since: June 2002
Features Compact design Auxiliary DC power supply from station bat-

tery from 36 to 312 V DC
Perfectly matched for the REG216/
REG316*4 Applicable for all commonly used earthing-
and excitation-systems for generators
Provides protection of the whole stator
winding including the neutral point Continuous supervision of the insulation
resistance and calculation of the earth fault
Continuous supervision of the injection
resistance
voltage and the primary earthing system
The principle is based on the well-known
Suitable for two separate earthing points
offset method, using injection of a low
within the protected zone
frequency signal
Continuous self-supervision of the injection
Suitable for updating existing plants
signal with respect to amplitude and fre-
quency Insensitive to external disturbances
Application The unit is applied for the protection of gen- former REX011 are required. This injection
erators in block configuration for earth faults equipment can be applied to all common
on the generator side. For the implementation generator earthing- and excitation-systems.
of the 100% stator and rotor earth fault The protection is active during all states of
protection using a REG216/316*4, an injec- the machine, standstill as well as run-up and
tion unit REX010 and the injection trans- run-down.
ABB Switzerland Ltd Auxiliary unit for REG216/316*4 for 100% REX010/011
stator and rotor earth fault protection 1MRB520123-Ben
Page 2
Design General dent protection functions are applied: one for

The earth fault protection is based on the in- 95% and one, using a different algorithm, for
jection of a coded signal. The resulting offset 100% of the stator winding. The 100% func-
voltage is utilized to calculate the earth resis- tion is calculating the earth resistance and the
tance (Rf). 95% function is measuring the neutral voltage
displacement of the generator.
The injection signal is produced in the injec-
tion unit REX010 and applied to the genera- a) The 100% function protects 35% of the
tor through the transformer unit REX011. For stator windings from the neutral point
the coupling to the protected unit resistors for Rf = 0 and I0max = 15 A
(RE, RP) are used. For the rotor earth fault
protection two capacitors are required in b) The 95% function (U>) protects 95% of
addition. the generator stator winding from the
terminals. This results in an overlap
The measurement signals for earth fault pro- (redundancy) of the two protection func-
tection are processed by the REG216 or the tions as seen in Fig. 1.
REG316*4 respectively.
The 100% function increases in sensitivity
The equipment described protects 100% of with increasing earth fault resistance and
the generator stator winding. Two indepen- decreasing earth fault current.
Overlap
95% Stator earth fault protection

100% Stator earth fault
function Rf = 0 Rf > 0
Winding
Neutral point Terminal
Running machine
Fig. 1
At standstill the full stator winding (100%) is

protected by the 100% function as seen in 100% Stator earth fault function
Fig. 2. At the same time the entire excitation
winding is protected for earth faults. Because
of the excellent rejection of external interfer-
ences, the REX010/011 can be applied to all
types of excitation systems including thyris-
tor type. Fig. 2
Hardware The protection equipment consists of the fol- - Voltage transformers

lowing units (Figures 4 8):
The injection unit (REX010) together with
the injection transformer (REX011) produces
REG216/316*4: Numerical generator protection three coded square wave signals (Uis, Uir,
REX010: Injection unit
Ui) with a frequency fN/4. These square wave
REX011: Injection transformer unit
signals are injected into the protected object
with auxiliary contactor
via the coupling components. The three
In addition the following components are square waves have different amplitudes: Uis
required: (Injection signal for the stator), Uir (Injection
signal for the rotor) and Ui (reference signal
- Earthing resistors in the generator neu- for the REG216/316*4). The injection unit
tral point (REs, RPs) and in the excita- REX010 is connected to the station battery
tion circuit (REr, RPr) and the injection signal voltage is generated
- Coupling capacitors in the excitation either by the battery or by an internal DC/DC
circuit of the rotor converter.
Page 3
The coding is achieved by alternating the type P8. In the case that the earth fault current
transmission of the square wave with a quies- exceeds 5 A the contactor will open the input
cent period, as seen in Fig. 3. circuit to the injection unit to protect it
against high voltages during earth faults near
the generator terminals. The 95% function is
always active and will detect any earth faults.
The resistors RES, RPS are used to provide

high-resistance earthing of the generator
neutral point and for coupling the injection
signal to RPS as well as the measurement sig-
Fig. 3 nal to RES. A similar arrangement applies for
the generator rotor where coupling is made
The REG216/316*4 evaluates and compares with the resistors RER and RPR; however, two
the measured injected voltage with the refer- additional capacitors C1 and C2 are required.
ence voltage during the transmitting period.
In the quiescent period the evaluation of pos- There are three connection variants for the
sible interferences is active, ensuring the cor- stator and two for the rotor earth fault protec-
rect protection response. The injection trans- tion.
former REX011 is equipped with a contactor,
Software Three protection functions are available in the the protected zone by including the monitor-
REG216/316*4 library: ing of the generator circuit breaker status.
- 100% Stator earth fault The function is capable of measuring the ef-
protection Stator EFP fective value of RES and of the transformation
- Rotor earth fault protection Rotor EFP ratio of the voltage transformer while the ma-
- 95% Stator earth fault chine is at standstill. This allows optimizing
the function with the actual parameters of the
protection Overvoltage U>
protected machine.
During the transmitting period, the digital fil-
Alarm and trip levels are entered and read out
ter algorithms are calculating the instanta-
in k.
neous earth fault resistance from the input
signal pairs Uis, Ui and Uir, Ui respectively. Settings:
Alarm level 100 to 20 k
During the quiescent period the filtered sig-
Delay 0.2 s to 60s
nals Uis and Uir are examined for interfer-
Trip level 100 to 20 k
ence from the protected object or the
Delay 0.2 s to 60 s
connected network. This examination is used
RES 250 to 5 k
to validate the previous calculation of the
earth fault resistance. Number of neutral points 2
RES-2. neutral point 900 to 30 k
The reference signal Ui is continuously Reset ratio 110% (with
supervised with respect to amplitude and fre- settings of <10 k)
quency. This ensures that the injection signal 120% (with
is correct and that it has the correct frequency. settings of >10 k)
Accuracy 100 to 10 k:
The primary earth connection of the protected
<10%
machine is checked through evaluation of the
0 to 100 , 10 k
capacitive component of the earth fault cur-
to 20 k: <20%
rent during the transmitting period.
Operating time 1.5 s
100% Stator earth fault protection function
Machine and system parameters:
This function consists of an alarm level and a
- Max. earth fault
trip level with corresponding signalling and
current l0 <20 A (recom-
tripping outputs.
mended l0 5 A)
It is possible to compensate for a second - Stator earth
high-resistance earth to neutral point within capacitance 0.5 F to 6 F
Page 4
Software (contd) - Stator earth REr 900 to 5 k

resistance RPS 75 to 500 Coupling capacitance 2 F to 10F
- Stator earth 250 to 5 k Reset ratio 110% (with
- resistance RES (4.5* RPS) settings of <10 k)
120% (with
- RPS // RES >70 settings of >10 k)
The effective earth resistances RES, RPS and Accuracy 100 to 10 k:
the transformation ratio of the voltage trans- <10%
former must be calculated in accordance with 0 to 100 ,
the operating instructions. 10 k to 25 k:
<20%
Further details about settings of the various Operating time 1.5 s
functions can be obtained from the REG216/
316*4 data sheet. Machine and system parameters:
- Rotor earth
Rotor earth fault protection capacitance 200 nF to 1 F
This function incorporates an alarm as well as - Rotor earth
a trip level with separate tripping and signal- resistance RPr 100 to 500
ling outputs. - Rotor earth
resistance REr 900 to 5 k
The function allows the measurement of the - Coupling
actual coupling capacitance while the ma- capacitance 4 F to 10 F
chine is standing still. This measurement per- - Time constant T = REr x C
mits optimum settings with respect to the pro- = 3 to 10 ms
tected machine.
The effective earth resistances REr and RPr
Alarm and trip levels are entered and read out must be calculated in accordance with the
in k. operating instructions.
Settings: Further details about settings of the various

Alarm level 100 to 25 k functions can be obtained from the REG216/
Delay 0.2 s to 60 s 316*4 data sheet.
Trip level 100 to 25 k
Delay 0.2 s to 60 s
Technical data REX010 Injection unit

The injection unit REX010 is contained in a REG316*4 housing, therefore the specifications of
the design details and the general data of the REG316*4 are applicable.
Supply voltage range: 36 to 312 V DC

Power consumption <180 VA
Optocoupler inputs: 18 to 312 V DC (refer to table below)
Connection terminals: HDFK (type Phoenix) 4 mm2
Control and signalling devices:
green LED on: Device ready
red LED on: Overload
yellow LED on: No injection
ENABLE switch: Injection on
DISABLE switch: Injection off
RESET push button: Reset after interruption of injection
Optocoupler input: Interruption of injection, reset after interruption of
injection
Page 5
REX011 Injection transformer

Type of auxiliary transformer WU30Z
Primary voltage 2 x 110 V
Secondary voltage
REX011 110 V / 50 V Terminals UK5 (Phoenix) 5 mm2
REX011-1 4 x 0.86 V / 50 V Terminals UHV50 (Phoenix) 50 mm2
REX011-2 4 x 6.4 V / 50 V Terminals UHV50 (Phoenix) 50 mm2
Auxiliary contactor P8nax (8 normally open contacts)
HV test 2.5 kV common mode
Dimensions
REX011 Mounting surface, 180 x 290 mm and 245 mm high
REX011-1, -2 Mounting surface, 180 x 290 mm and 275 mm high
Diagrams
Fig. 4 Stator earth fault protection, star point Fig. 5 Stator earth fault protection with earthing
transformer on generator terminals
Fig. 6 Stator earth fault protection with Fig. 7 Single pole rotor connection earthing with
earthing transformer on star point resistors
Page 6
Diagrams (contd)
Fig. 8 Two pole rotor connection Fig. 9 Connection diagram REX010/REX011
Dimensions All dimensions in mm
Front view Rear view
Fig. 10 REX010 T = Input and output voltages cross-section = 4 mm2

H = Auxiliary supply
Front view Panel cutout

Fig. 11 REX010
Page 7
Fig. 12 Dimensions REX011, -1, -2
Ordering Order codes for REX010/REX011
REX011 Injection transformer unit
REX011 HESG 323888 M1 Starpoint earthing with resistors Fig. 4

REX011-1 RPs >8 m HESG 323888 M11 Starpoint earthing with earthing transformer Fig. 6
REX011-2 RPs >0.45 HESG 323888 M21 Earthing transformer on generator terminals Fig. 5
If RPs is not yet known when ordering, please order M11 resp. M21. The version required later may be
rewired.
REX010 Injection unit

Function Value Code
Battery voltage 36 to 312 V DC U0
Frequency 50 Hz F5
60 Hz F6
Optocoupler voltage 82 to 312 V DC I3
36 to 75 V DC I4
18 to 36 V DC I5
Order-No. HESG324426M0001 + Code

REX010 offers two options according to the available battery voltage.
Page 8
Ordering (contd) Ordering example

Generator with the earthing transformer at the The associated earthing resistors as well as
neutral point (RPs >32 m), system fre- the coupling capacitors 2*2 F (Leclanche
quency 50 Hz, battery voltage 110 V DC, MIH 800-2) for the rotor earth fault protec-
which is also used for optocoupler inputs. tion may be ordered through ABB Switzer-
land Ltd.
Order description:
1 REX010 - HESG324426M0001 The associated protection package/system
Code U0/ F5 /13 REG216/REG316*4 must be ordered sepa-
1 REX011- HESG323888M12 rately, according to the appropriate Data
Sheet.
References REG 316*4 Data Sheet 1MRK502004-Ben

REG316*4 Operating Instructions (printed) 1MRB520049-Uen
REG316*4 Operating Instructions (CD) 1MRB260030M0001
REG216 Data Sheet 1MRB520004-Ben
REG216 Operating Instructions (printed) 1MRU02005-EN
REG216 Operating Instructions (CD) 1MRB260030M0001
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Tel. +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77

Numerical Line Protection REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 1
Issued: May 2003
Changed: since February 2002
Features Application - fixed reactance slope

MV and HV systems with distance or longi- - reactance slope dependent on load
tudinal differential protection as main pro- value and direction (<ZHV)
tection as well as combined in a terminal
Parallel line compensation
Overhead lines, cables and transformer
feeders. Phase-selective tripping for single and
three-pole autoreclosure
Distance protection Four independent, user-selectable setting
Overcurrent or underimpedance starters groups
with polygonal characteristic
Suitable for application with CVTs acc. to
Five distance zones with polygonal imped- IEC 60044.
ance characteristic for forwards and
reverse measurement Longitudinal differential protection
Definite time-overcurrent back-up protec- Independent measurement per phase
tion (short-zone protection) Single-phase tripping (additional FUPLA
VT supervision logic available)
Power swing blocking Fast operation (typically 25 ms)
System logic Optical fiber data exchange between termi-
- switch-onto-fault nal equipment at 64 kBit/s
- overreach zone Provision for transmitting 8 binary signals,
Teleprotection e.g. for direct transfer tripping or blocking
- The carrier-aided schemes include: Continuous supervision of protection signal
- permissive underreaching transfer communication
tripping
Provision for a power transformer in the
- permissive overreaching transfer zone of protection
tripping
- phase compensation without interposing
- blocking scheme with echo and CTs
transient blocking functions
- inrush restraint function.
Load-compensated measurement
ABB Switzerland Ltd Numerical Line Protection REL316*4
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 2
Features (contd) Earth fault protection Distance protection

Sensitive earth fault protection for un-
grounded systems and systems with All six fault loops are measured simulta-
Petersen coils neously (6 systems) allowing the fast
detection of evolving faults also in the case
Directional comparison function for detect- of double-circuit lines
ing high-resistance faults in neutral earth-
ing systems Fast operation, minimum 21 ms and typi-
cally 25 ms, see isochrones below
Inverse time overcurrent function with four
characteristics according to B.S. 142. Suitable for application with CVTs accord-
ing to IEC 60044
Current and voltage functions Polygonal underimpedance starter with
Definite time-overcurrent function with instability against load encroachment
rush detection
Distance measurement with polygonal
Inverse time-overcurrent function with four operating characteristic
characteristics according to B.S. 142 and
one characteristic identical to the zero- Two selectable criteria for the differentia-
sequence relay type RXIDG tion of short circuits with or without earth.
Improved detection of the earth fault with
Directional inverse and definite time over- application of I2 compared with I0
current protection
The three distance zones responsible for
Definite time overvoltage and undervoltage the protection of the line are measured
function simultaneously and oprate without delay
Thermal overload function. - 1 underreaching zone
- 1 overreaching zone for comparison
Control and monitoring functions schemes
Single and three-phase multi-shot auto-
- 1 reverse measuring zone for compari-
reclosure
son schemes (echo and tripping logic at
Synchrocheck weak infeed, stabilization for double li-
Breaker failure protection nes, resp.transmission of the blocking
order for blocking systems)
Metering Load compensation of the reach of the first
Real and apparent power measurement underreaching distance zone in order to
avoid a possible overreach on the load
2 different measuring functions of voltage,
exporting line-side even for high-resistance
current and frequency
faults and double-end infeed
Fault location
Two time-delayed overreaching back-up
Sequence-of-events records zones
Disturbance recorder Delayed back-up operation by the under-
impedance starter, directional or nondirec-
Runtime supervision.
tional
Distance protection for high-voltage lines VT supervision
(<ZHV)
Back-up overcurrent function
(Identification code SN100 and SN300)
The phase selection can be set directional
Application and limited to the effective range of the
220 kV and 380 kV high-voltage lines in overreach zone providing improved phase
grids with grounded star-points selection for single-pole autoreclosing
Overhead lines and cables.

1MRK506013-Ben
Page 3
Elimination of possible overreach in case Functions for programming by the user

of resistive phase-to-phase-to-earth faults Logic (AND, OR and S/R flip-flop)
Improved performance under high SIR Timer/integrator.
Power swing blocking independent from
Application-specific ancillary functions
the operating characteristic and from the (optional)
place of installation of the distance relay Graphical engineering of a logic to user
System logic and carrier logic: specifications (CAP316). An editor and
code compiler are used to generate data,
- automatic switch-onto-fault protection which is loaded into the equipment via the
- overreach zone, effective for all types of HMI. This software allows signals from all
fault or for single-phase faults only, con- functions to be interconnected and the
trolled by the autoreclosure function and realization of new functionalities if neces-
current starter via external input or auto- sary.
matically in case of failure of the PLC
channel Self-supervision
- underreaching permissive transfer trip- Continuous self-supervision and diagnosis
ping with or without voltage criterion at Test equipment for quantitative testing
weak infeed available
- overerreaching permissive transfer trip- Continuous supervision of the optical fiber
ping with echo and tripping logic at weak link for the longitudinal differential function
infeed
- overreaching system with blocking sig- Plausibility check of the three-phase cur-
nal rent and voltage inputs.
- stabilization of the overreaching sys-
Operational control
tems at change of energy direction on Multi-lingual menu-based operator pro-
parallel lines gram CAP2/316 based on Windows
The distance protection function may be
applied for capacitive voltage transformers. Four independent, user-selectable parame-
ter sets able to be activated via binary input
Back-up protection* can be stored in REL316*4
Non-directional overcurrent protection with Multi-activation and allocation of functions.
definite time delay and/or inverse time
Directional earth fault protection with signal Serial interfaces
Frontplate interface for local connection of
comparison for selective detection of very
a personal computer
high-resistance earth faults
Back plane interface for remote communi-
cation with a station control system:
function.
LON, IEC 60870-5-103, MVB (part of
* also available in the distance protection IEC 61375), SPA
function.
Back plane interface for process bus:
Process supervision MVB (part of IEC 61375).
Sequence-of-events recorder (with fault
indication) Installation
REL316*4 is suitable for semi-flush or sur-
Disturbance recorder with analog and
face mounting or installation in a rack.
binary channels.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 4
Application The fully numerical protection terminal Distance and longitudinal differential protec-
REL316*4 is a compact line terminal. It is tion combined in one terminal allows a better
designed to provide high-speed selective pro- protection concept. For example, distance
tection in distribution, MV and HV transmis- protection as a backup in addition to the tradi-
sion systems. It can be applied at all power tional overcurrent backup in case of a com-
system voltages and in solidly earthed, low- munication failure.
impedance grounded or ungrounded systems
or in systems equipped with arc suppression Another application may be longitudinal dif-
(Petersen) coils. ferential protection for transformer protection
with distance protection as a backup.
REL316*4 can be used on overhead lines and
cables, long feeders, short feeders, parallel REL316*4 also takes account of power
circuit lines, heavily loaded lines, lines with swings and changes of energy direction. A
weak infeeds and on short zone lines. It switch-onto-fault condition is tripped instan-
detects all kinds of faults including close taneously. The demands on CT and VT per-
three-phase faults, cross-country faults, formance are moderate and the relays
evolving faults and high-resistance ground response is uninfluenced by their charac-
faults. teristics.
The distance function for high-voltage lines The distance protection function and the di-
(<ZHV) essentially has identical starting and rectional comparison function for high-resis-
measuring characteristics. tance earth faults can communicate with the
opposite end of the line by all the usual com-
The differences refer to their speciality for munication media as well as by the integrated
these lines. With regard to their settings this is direct optical connection used for the longitu-
especially noticeable during phase selection dinal differential protection. The communica-
and the adaption to source-to-line impedance tion between the terminals of the phase-seg-
conditions. The relay detects evolving faults ragated longitudinal differential protection
and follow-up faults. Also at follow-up faults can be performed using the integrated or sep-
between parallel lines, the probability of suc- arate optical fiber link.
cessful single-phase autoreclosure on both
systems increases significantly. The reason
for this is the limited phase selection within
the reach.
Example
Autoreclosure for 1 breaker scheme
Three-pole tripping and autoreclosing
79 (AR) 79 (AR) 79 (AR)

25 (sync) 25 (sync) 25 (sync)
RE.316*4 RE.316*4 RE.316*4
A B C
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
21 (dist.) 87 (line diff.) 21 (dist.) 21 (dist.)

REL316*4 REL316*4 REL316*4 REL316*4
SN100 SP100 SN100 SN100
Fig. 1 Autoreclosing for 1 breaker scheme (line-line diameter), three-pole application

1MRK506013-Ben
Page 5
The promoted solution for 1 breaker scheme with three-pole tripping and autoreclosing is
shown in Fig. 1.
- 21 Distance protection: REL316*4 SN100
- 87 Line differential protection: REL316*4 SP100
- 79/25 Autorecloser/synchrocheck: REL316*4 SD050 or REC316*4.
Single-pole tripping and autoreclosing
79 (AR) 79 (AR) 79 (AR)

25 (sync) 25 (sync) 25 (sync)
RE.316*4 RE.316*4 RE.316*4
T142 T142 T142
A B C
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
21 (dist.) 87 (line diff.) 21 (dist.) 21 (dist.)

REL316*4 REL316*4 REL316*4 REL316*4
SN100,T141 SP100,T129 SN100,T141 SN100,T141
Fig. 2 Autoreclosing for 1 breaker scheme (line-line diameter), single-pole application
The promoted solution for 1 breaker scheme with single-pole tripping and autoreclosing is
shown in Fig. 2.
- 21 Distance protection: REL316*4 SN100, T141
- 87 Line differential protection: REL316*4 SP100, T129
- 79/25 Autorecloser/synchrocheck: REL316*4 SD050, T142
or REC316*4, T142.
In these figures two lines are connected to The autoreclosure functions used for the bus
one diameter. Each line is protected by two breakers A and C are set as Masters and the
REL316*4 relays. For the line on the right, one for the centre breaker B as Follower. Co-
the main relay is a distance protection relay ordination is required between the autorec-
(SN100), while the back-up relay is a line dif- losure functions. A synchrocheck function is
ferential relay (SP100). The line on the right also loaded in each relay to permit 3-pole
is protected with two distance protection re- autoreclosing.
lays (SN100). The autoreclosure functionality
is achieved by one RE.316*4 relay per Each line protection relay starts both bus and
breaker (e.g. REL316*4 SD050). centre breakers for the concerned line. After a
successful reclosure of the bus breaker, the
For a single-pole application, the distance centre breaker will be reclosed after a supple-
protection relay (SN100) is loaded with the mentary time delay. Should the bus CB
supplementary FUPLA logic T141, the line autorecloser relay not be successful in its
differential relay (SP100) with the logic T129 reclosing attempt, the centre CB autorecloser
and the autorecloser (e.g. SD050) with the is blocked. If the bus CB is open or its autore-
logic T142. closer relay is not ready or out of service, the
centre CB autorecloser will reclose the centre
breaker after its own dead time without any
supplementary time delay.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 6
Design The REL316*4 belongs to the generation of certainly the most important characteristic re-
fully numerical line protection terminals, i.e. quired of protection equipment. As a conse-
analog-to-digital conversion of the input vari- quence of the continuous supervision of its
ables takes place immediately after the input functions, this quotient in the case of
transformers and all further processing of the REL316*4 is typically always close to 1.
resulting numerical signals is performed by
microprocessors and controlled by programs. The menu-based HMI (Human Machine
Interface) and the REL316*4s small size
Standard interfaces enable REL316*4 to makes the tasks of connection, configuration
communicate with other control systems. and setting simple. A maximum of FLEXI-
Provision is thus made for the exchange of BILITY, i.e. the ability to adapt the protection
data such as reactionless reporting of binary for application in a particular power system
states, events, measurements and protection or to coordinate with, or replace units in an
parameters or the activation of a different set existing protection scheme, is provided in
of settings by higher level control systems. REL316*4 by ancillary software functions
and the assignment of input and output sig-
Because of its compact design, the very few nals via the HMI.
hardware units it needs, its modular software
and the integrated continuous self-diagnosis REL316*4s RELIABILITY, SELECTIVITY
and supervision functions, REL316*4 ideally and STABILITY are backed by decades of
fulfils the users expectations of a modern experience in the protection of lines and feed-
protection terminal at a cost-effective price. ers in transmission and distribution systems.
The AVAILABILITY of a terminal, i.e. the Numerical processing ensures consistent
ratio between its mean operating time in ser- ACCURACY and SENSITIVITY throughout
vice without failure and its total life, is most its operational life.
Hardware The hardware concept for the REL316*4 line input transformer unit can accommodate a
protection equipment comprises four differ- maximum of nine input transformers (volt-
ent plug-in units, a connecting mother PCB age-, protection current- or measuring trans-
and housing (Fig. 3): former).
analog input unit Every analog variable is passed through a
central processing unit first order R/C low-pass filter on the main
CPU unit to eliminate what is referred to as
power supply unit ferences (Fig. 4). They are then sampled 12
connecting mother PCB times per period and converted to digital sig-
nals. The analog/digital conversion is per-
housing with connection terminals. formed by a 16 Bit converter.
In the analog input unit an input transformer A powerful digital signal processor (DSP)
provides the electrical and static isolation carries out part of the digital filtering and
between the analog input variables and the makes sure that the data for the protection
internal electronic circuits and adjusts the sig- algorithms are available in the memory to the
nals to a suitable level for processing. The main processor.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 7
Fibre optical connections for line differential

protection and binary signal transmission
RX Tx DC
+5V
+15V
CPU -15V
Power
Supply
Remote I/O
A/D DSP 486 +24V
DC
Remote I/OTrip
DPM Outputs
Remote I/OTrip
A/D DSP Sign.
Outputs
TripOutputs
SW-Key Sign.
OutputsBin.
Trip Outputs
Outputs
Trip FLASH PCC Sign.Inputs
Trip EPROM Bin.
Outputs
Outputs
Trip Sign.
Outputs I/O IEC1375 Inputs
I/O (MVB) Bin.
Sign.
Outputs
Outputs
Sign. / OPorts
I Ports a
Process bus Inputs
Outputs
Sign. I /Ports
O P
OutputsBin. Tranceiver
Outputs Ports
Bin.
C
Inputs b
Bin.
Inputs M
Bin.
Inputs PCC
Inputs C
c
RAM I LON
A IEC1375
d
SCS
LED's
SMS
RS Serial RS Serial
232 Controller 232 Controller SPA / IEC870-5-103
HMI
Fig. 3 Hardware platform overview (RE.316*4)
The processor core essentially comprises the REL316*4 can have one to four binary I/O
main microprocessor (Intel 80486) for the units each. These units are available in three
protection algorithms and dual-ported memo- versions:
ries (DPMs) for communication between the
a) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty
A/D converters and the main processor. The
contacts, 8 optocoupler inputs and 6
main processor performs the protection algo-
signalling relays Type 316DB61.
rithms and controls the local HMI and the in-
terfaces to the station control system. Binary
signals from the main processor are relayed to
the corresponding inputs of the I/O unit and
nalling relays Type 316DB62.
thus control the auxiliary output relays and
the light emitting diode (LED) signals. The
c) 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signalling
main processor unit is equipped with an
relays Type 316DB63.
RS232C serial interface via which among
other things the protection settings are made,
When ordering REL316*4 with more than
events are read and the data from the distur-
2 I/O units, casing size N2 must be selected.
bance recorder memory are transferred to a
local or remote PC.
On this main processor unit there are two
visible on the front of the REL316*4.
tion to the station monitoring system (SMS)
and station control system (SCS) as well as to
the remote I/Os.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 8
ditioned before being processed by the main filters into real and apparent components be-
processor: As described under hardware fore being applied to the main processor. Bi-
above, the analog signals pass through the nary signals from the optocoupler inputs go
Fig. 4 Data flow
Graphical The graphical programming language used in COUNTX Shift register

the tool CAP316 makes CAP316 a powerful CNT Counter
engineering CNTD Downwards counter
and user-friendly engineering tool for the en-
tool OR OR gate
gineering of the control and protection units RSFF RS flip-flop
RE.216/316*4. It is similar to IEC 1131. SKIP Skip segment
CAP316 permits the function blocks repre- TFF T flip-flop with reset
senting the application to be directly trans- TMOC Monostable constant
TMOCS, TMOCL Monostable constant
lated into an application program (FUPLA) short, long
capable of running on the processors of the TMOI Monostable constant
control and protection units RE.316*4. The with interrupt
program packet contains an extensive library TMOIS, TMOIL Monostable constant
of function blocks. Up to 8 projects (FUP- with interrupt short, long
TOFF Off delay
LAs created with CAP316) are able to run TOFFS, TOFFL Off delay short, long
simultaneously on a RE.316*4. TON On delay
TONS, TONL On delay short, long
List of functions XOR Exclusive OR gate
Binary functions:
AND AND gate Analog functions:
ASSB Assign binary ABS Absolute value
B23 2-out-of-3 selector ADD Adder/subtracter
B24 2-out-of-4 selector ADDL Long integer adder/sub-
BINEXTIN External binary input tractor
BINEXOUT External binary output
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 9
ADMUL Adder/multiplier LIM Limiter

CNVIL Integer to long integer LOADS Load shedding function
converter MAX Maximum value detector
CNVLBCD Long integer to BC con- MIN Minimum value detector
verter MUL Multiplier
CNVLI Long integer to integer MULL Long integer multiplier
converter NEGP Percent negator
CNVLP Long integer to percent PACW Pack binary signals
converter into integer
CNVPL Percentage to long inte- PDTS, PDTL Differentiator
ger converter PT1S, PT1L Delayed approximation
DIV Divider SQRT Square root
DIVL Long integer divider SWIP Percent switch
FCTL Linear function THRLL Lower limit threshold
FCTP Polynomial function THRUL Upper limit threshold
FILT Filter TMUL Time multiplier
INTS, INTL Integrator UPACW Unpack binary sig-
KMUL Factor multiplier nals from an integer.
Example:
Example: 3
B_DRIVE
CL CL Q0_CL
OP OP Q0_OP
POK Q0_Q0_POK
4
& Q0_Q0_CLOSED
5 Q0_Q0_OPEN
&
SEL
DPMIN_Q0_CLOSED
DPMIN_Q0_OPEN
GEX Q0_GUIDE_EXE
2
>=1 EXE Q0_EXE
1
& SYNC GOON Q0_GOON_Q0
Q0_SEL_DRIVE_Q0
SYST Q0_Q0_SYST
GEN_REQUEST_ON
GEN_SYNC
Q1_Q1_OPEN
ALSY Q0_ALSY
Q2_Q2_OPEN
BKS Q0_BLOCK_SELECT
GEN_REQUEST_EXE
KDOF Q0_KDO_FAIL
Part of a FUPLA application (Q0: Control and interlocking logic for three objects
Q0, Q1, Q2. B_DRIVE is a macro composed of binary function blocks)
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 10
Functions The library of function modules for A VT supervision function is also included
REL316*4 includes a variety of protection which monitors the zero-sequence component
and ancillary functions from which the user (U0 I0) and/or the negative-sequence compo-
can choose according to relay version (see nent (U2 I2), the latter being of advantage in
Ordering data). Within the constraints of ungrounded systems or systems with poor
the available processing capacity, the same grounding.
function may be included several times. Four
parameter sets may be selected via binary in- An independent overcurrent back-up mea-
puts. The individual functions are described surement is provided which becomes a short-
below. zone scheme as soon as the feeder isolator is
opened. When the back-up overcurrent mea-
Distance protection surement picks up, the distance relay is
The distance protection function can have enabled in spite of any blocking signals (e.g.
either overcurrent or underimpedance start- VT supervision or power swing blocking)
ers. They are equally suitable for use in sol- which may be active. The power swing
idly grounded, ungrounded or impedance blocking feature included in the distance
grounded systems. In the case of ungrounded function is based on the evaluation of the
and impedance grounded systems, all the variation of U cos. This principle of detect-
relays in the system have to have identically ing power swings is entirely independent of
set phase-preference logics to maintain selec- the operating characteristic and location of
tivity for cross-country faults. The following the distance relay. It covers the range 0.2 to
phase-preference schemes are available: 8 Hz.
RTS acyclic (R before T before S)

RST acyclic (R before S before T)
TSR acyclic (T before S before R)
TRS acyclic (T before R before S)
SRT acyclic (S before R before T)
STR acyclic (S before T before R)
RTSR cyclic (R bef. T, T bef. S, S bef. R)
TRST cyclic (T bef. R, R bef. S, S bef. T).
The relay detects ground faults on the basis of

the neutral current and/or neutral voltage.
Distance measurement is performed in the

first, overreach and reverse zones simulta-
neously. Every zone has a wide, completely
independent setting range and an independent
setting for the direction of measurement. Four
directional zones are provided, the last of
which can also be configured to be non-direc-
tional. Overreach and reverse measuring
zones are for use in transfer tripping schemes.
The distance measuring characteristic is a
polygon with a slightly inclined reactance
line which has proved to be an optimum in
practice. Where the voltage measured by the Fig. 5 Distance function characteristic
relay for a fault is too low, the inclusion of a
healthy phase voltage as reference, respec-
tively the use of a memory feature (close The tripping logic can be configured for all
three-phase faults) ensures the integrity of the the usual transfer tripping schemes such as:
directional decision. The mutual impedance overreaching (for autoreclosure with or
on parallel circuit lines can be compensated without communications channel)
by correspondingly setting the zero-sequence
compensation factor (k0) or by taking account permissive underreaching transfer trip-
of the neutral current of the parallel circuit. ping (including weak infeed logic)
permissive overreaching transfer tripping infeed and blocking logic for change of
(with echo tripping in the case of a weak- energy direction)
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 11
blocking scheme (with blocking logic for The setting parameters for not effectively
change of energy direction). earthed networks have been omitted and a
few new ones added, especially in connection
The tripping logic provides access for the with an improved phase selection.
user to disable or enable a variety of func-
tions such as the type communications chan- The operating times for the "HV distance"
nel, the switch-onto-fault logic, the overfunction are shown in the form of isochrones.
reaching zone, the VT supervision logic and (see Section 'High-voltage distance protec-
whether tripping by the function should be tion function operating times'). All other
single or three-phase. functions remain unchanged.
Distance protection for high-voltage lines Longitudinal differential protection

The distance protection function (<ZHV) is The longitudinal differential protection func-
especially suited for 220 kV and 380 kV tion included with REL316*4 is suitable for
lines. the protection of
overhead lines
The "HV distance" function essentially has
identical starting and measuring characteris- cables
tics and the same setting parameters as the
transformer feeders.
standard "distance" function.
It operates according to the proven trans-
former protection algorithm used in
RET316*4 and exhibits the same outstanding
characteristics with respect to through-fault
stability and minimum CT performance.
The scheme is phase-selective and takes full

advantage of the high data transfer rate of
64 kBit/s possible with an optical fiber link to
sample the analog input variables at both
ends of the line and transfers the correspond-
ing values to the opposite station without al-
most any delay.
I2
Fig. 6 Operating characteristic of the longitudinal differential function

1MRK506013-Ben
Page 12
Functions (contd)
OFL
Fig. 7 Longitudinal differential protection with a power transformer in the protected zone
Tripping takes place should the comparison tion where they are evaluated in relation to
of the values in the terminal stations result in the local current signals. Similarly the cur-
a differential current I above a given level rents measured and digitized in the remote
(see operating characteristic in Fig. 6). The station are transferred to the local station and
self-supervision function of the optical fiber evaluated. A digital signal processor (DSP)
link operates at such a speed that an addi- ensures that the sampling and coordination of
tional enabling signal is not necessary. the signals in the two stations and also the
transmission between the stations is properly
Interposing CTs are not needed where the synchronized. Thus there are two current sig-
protected unit includes a power transformer nals available for the longitudinal differential
(Fig. 7). The settings for the protection are comparison of each phase in both stations.
made using a convenient control program Comparison is performed in the main proces-
running on a personal computer. sor according to the proven algorithm men-
tioned above.
Provision is made for transmitting other sig-
nals via the optical fiber link in addition to As previously explained, the longitudinal dif-
those of the longitudinal differential function. ferential function operates in conjunction
These might be intertripping signals to the with an optical fiber link between the stations
remote station generated by other internal at the ends of the transmission line. The sig-
protection functions or applied to the terminals are transmitted by a LED diode with a
nals binary inputs by some other external ter- wavelength of 1300 nm and are coupled by a
minal. A ground fault comparison scheme Type FC optical connector. Depending on the
can thus operate via the same optical fiber attenuation of the of the optical cable used,
link. When the terminal equipment in one sta- distances of up to 28 km can be covered.
tion is being tested, the equipment in the Repeaters have to be used for longer dis-
other station can be remotely blocked. tances which in the case of FOX 6 Plus or
Fox 20 enable transmission over distances up
When the longitudinal protection function is to 120 km (Fig. 8).
in use, a maximum of six analog inputs is
available, e.g. three current and three voltage In REL316*4 units for longitudinal differen-
measurements for main and back-up protec- tial applications, the standard distance protec-
tions and for the disturbance recorder. Fol- tion function can also be activated. The ope-
lowing analog-to-digital conversion, the ration for single-pole autoreclosure is fore-
signals branch in two directions. All six go to seen with the T129 logic. The other standard
the main processor for evaluation for the local software of the line protection terminal is un-
protection functions and the three correspon- influenced. Other optional functions from the
ding to the local phase currents are addition- software library are also provided (see Table
ally converted to light signals by an optical of codes).
modem for transmission to the opposite sta-
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 13
Fig. 8 Optical fiber link (OFL) using communications system Type FOX with a data transfer rate of
2 MBit/s
Autoreclosure Synchrocheck
The autoreclosure function included in The synchrocheck function determines the
REL316*4 permits up to four three-phase difference between the amplitudes, phase
reclosure cycles to be carried out, each with angles and frequencies of two voltage vec-
an independently adjustable dead time for fast tors. Checks are also included to detect a dead
and slow autoreclosure. Where single-phase line or busbar.
reclosure is being applied, the first reclosure
is the single-phase one and the others are Thermal overload
three-phase. The thermal overload function can be used
for either cables or overhead lines. It is equip-
The autoreclosure function can also be loaded ped with alarm and tripping stages and has a
several times in the same parameter set. This wide setting range for adjusting the time con-
function also contains an integrated additio- stant to match that of the protected unit.
nal logic (FUPLA). This allows a customer-
specific AR functionality. Both these possi- Definite time voltage function
bilities have been used for the CH standard The voltage function can be set to operate on
AR. Two AR functions are loaded for this: overvoltage or undervoltage with a definite
the first function with additional logic serves time delay. Either single or three-phase mea-
as fast autoreclosure and the second function surements can be performed.
as slow autoreclosure.
Definite time current function
The integrated autoreclosure function for The current function can be set to operate on
high-voltage lines (REL316*4/SN300) is overcurrent or undercurrent with a definite
employed on lines without local protection time delay. Either single or three-phase mea-
redundancy. surements can be performed.
A separate autoreclosure unit is especially Inverse time overcurrent function

suitable for lines with redundant protection. The operating time of the inverse time over-
current function reduces as the fault current
This unit enables practically all conventional increases and it can therefore achieve shorter
and all modern line protection relays suitable operating times for fault locations closer to
for single-phase tripping to be connected to the source. Four different characteristics ac-
one system. cording to British Standard 142 designated
normal inverse, very inverse, extremely in-
verse and long time inverse but with an ex-
tended setting range are provided. The func-
tion can be configured for single-phase mea-
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 14
Functions (contd) surement or a combined three-phase mea- Frequency function

surement with detection of the highest phase The frequency function is based on the mea-
current. surement of one voltage. This function is able
to be configured as maximum or minimum
Directional overcurrent protection function and is applied as protection function
The directional overcurrent protection func- and for load shedding. By multiple configura-
tion is available either with inverse time or tion of this function almost any number of
definite time overcurrent characteristic. This stages can be realized.
function comprises a voltage memory for
faults close to the relay location. The function Rate-of-change of frequency
response after the memory time has elapsed This function offers alternatively an enabling
can be selected (trip or block). by absolute frequency. It contains an under-
voltage blocking facility. Repeated configura-
Inverse time ground fault overcurrent tion of this function ensures a multi-step
function setup.
The inverse time ground fault overcurrent
function monitors the neutral current of the Measuring
system which is either measured via a neutral Both measuring functions measure the single-
current input transformer or derived inter- phase rms values of voltage, current, frequen-
nally in the terminal from the three-phase cur- cy, real power and apparent power for display
rents. Four different characteristics according on the local HMI or transfer to the station
to British Standard 142 designated normal control system. A choice can be made bet-
inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and ween phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase
long time inverse but with an extended set- voltages.
ting range are provided.
Ancillary functions
Directional ground fault function for Ancillary functions such as a logic and a de-
ungrounded systems or systems with lay/integrator enable the user to create logical
Petersen coils combinations of signals and pick-up and reset
The sensitive ground fault protection function delays.
for ungrounded systems and systems with
Petersen coils can be set for either forwards A runtime supervision feature enables check-
or reverse measurement. The characteristic ing the opening and closing of all kinds of
angle is set to 90 (U0 I0 sin) in ungroun- breakers (circuit-breakers, isolators, ground
ded systems and to 0 or 180 (U0 I0 cos) switches...). Failure of a breaker to open or
for systems with Petersen coils. The neutral close within an adjustable time results in the
current is always used for measurement in the creation of a corresponding signal for further
case of systems with Petersen coils, but in processing.
ungrounded systems its use is determined by
the value of the capacitive current and mea- Plausibility check
surement is performed by a core-balance CT The current and voltage plausibility functions
to achieve the required sensitivity. facilitate the detection of system asymme-
tries, e.g. in the secondary circuits of CTs and
Directional ground fault function for VTs.
grounded systems
A sensitive directional ground fault function Sequence-of-events recorder
based on the measurement of neutral current The event recorder function provides capacity
and voltage is provided for the detection of for up to 256 binary signals including time
high-resistance ground faults in solidly or marker with a resolution in the order of milli-
low-resistance grounded systems. The seconds and gives the distance to a fault ex-
scheme operates either in a permissive or pressed as a percentage of a specified refer-
blocking mode and can be used in conjunc- ence reactance, e.g. the reactance of the pro-
tion with an inverse time ground fault over- tected line.
current function. In both cases the neutral
current and voltage can be derived either Disturbance recorder
externally or internally. The disturbance recorder monitors up to 9
analog inputs, up to 16 binary inputs and
internal results of protection functions. The
capacity for recording disturbances depends
on the duration of a disturbance as deter-
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 15
mined by its pre-disturbance history and the Any desired protection function can be selec-
duration of the disturbance itself. The total ted from the software library of all released
recording time is approximately 5 s. protection functions by means of the drag-
and-drop feature.
Human Machine Interface (HMI) - CAP2/316
For local communication with REL316*4,
there is the setting software CAP2/316 availa-
ble which is based on Windows. This soft-
tems:
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000.
This optimal programming tool is available

operation. The software can be used either
ON-LINE or OFF-LINE and furthermore
contains a DEMO mode.
Built-in HMI
signalling of actual events, measurands and
diagnostic data. Settings are not displayed.
Features:
Measurand display
channels
- Binary signals
Event list
For each protection function a tripping char- Disturbance recorder information
acteristic is displayed. Apart from the basic
understanding of the protection functions, the Distance to fault indication
graphical display of these functions also Diagnostic information
makes the setting of the parameters clearer.
Acknowledgment functions
- Resetting LEDs
- Resetting latched outputs
- Event erasing
- Warm start.
REL316*4 is able to communicate with a sta-
tion monitoring and evaluation system (SMS)
or a station control system (SCS) via an opti-
cal fiber link. The corresponding serial inter-
switched.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 16
Functions (contd) Using the LON bus permits in addition the The program execution itself is monitored by
exchange of binary information between the a watchdog function for each processor.
individual bay controllers, e.g. signals for sta-
tion interlocking. An important advantage of the extensive self-
diagnosis and supervision functions is that
Remote in- and outputs (RIO580) periodic routine maintenance and testing are
Using the process bus type MVB remote in- reduced.
and output units (500RIO11) can be connec-
ted to the RE.316*4 terminals. The input and The optical fiber link is also supervised on
output channels can be extended to a large terminal equipped with the longitudinal dif-
number by using the RIO580 remote input/ ferential function. For this purpose test data
output system. Installing 500RIO11 I/O close are transmitted in addition to the protection
to the process reduces the wiring dramati- signals to test the integrity of the communica-
cally, since they are accessible via fiberoptic tions channel. The supervision function also
link from the RE.316*4 terminals. detects the failure of the auxiliary supply in
one terminal station. In the event that the
Analog signals can also be connected to the optical fiber link should fail, the back-up pro-
system via the 500AXM11 from the RIO580 tection functions remain operational.
family:
Supporting software
The operator program facilitates configura-
0...20 mA
tion and setting of the protection, listing para-
-20...20 mA
meters, reading events and listing the various
DC voltage 0...10 V internal diagnostic data.
-10...10 V
Temp. sensor Pt100, Pt250, Pt1000, The evaluation programs REVAL and
Ni100, Ni250, Ni1000. E_wineve (Windows NT/Windows 2000) are
available for viewing and evaluating the dis-
Self-diagnosis and supervision turbances stored by the disturbance recorder.
RE.316*4s self-diagnosis and supervision Where the disturbance data are transferred via
functions ensure maximum availability not the communications system to the distur-
only of the protection terminal itself, but also bance recorder evaluation station, the file
of the power system it is protecting. Hard- transfer program WinCom (Windows NT/
ware failures are immediately signalled by an Windows 2000) is also used.
alarm contact. In particular, the external and
internal auxiliary supplies are continuously The program XSCON is available for conver-
supervised. The correct function and toler- sion of the RE.316*4 disturbance recorder
ance of the A/D converter are tested by cycli- data to ABBs test set XS92b format. This
cally converting two reference voltages. Spe- offers reproduction of electrical quantities
cial algorithms regularly check the proces- recorded during a fault.
sors memories (background functions). A
watchdog supervises the execution of the pro-
grams.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 17

hardware Number of inputs according to version, max. 9 analog inputs (voltages and currents, 4 mm2 terminals)
continuous 4 x IN
for 10 s 30 x IN
for 1 s 100 x IN
continuous 1.3 x UN
during 10 s 2 x UN
Burden per phase
current inputs
at IN = 1 A <0.1 VA
at IN = 5 A <0.3 VA
voltage inputs
at UN <0.25 VA

Tripping relays
2 N/O contacts each, 1.5 mm2 terminals
at U <50 V DC 1.5 A
at U <120 V DC 0.3 A
at U <250 V DC 0.1 A
at U <50 V DC 5A
at U <120 V DC 1A
at U <250 V DC 0.3 A
Signalling contacts
No. of contacts 6, 10 or 8 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or
316DB63),
Each interface unit equipped with 1 C/O contact
and the all others N/O contacts
at U <50 V DC 0.5 A
at U <120 V DC 0.1 A
at U <250 V DC 0.04 A
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 18
Technical data hard- Table 3: Optocoupler inputs

ware (contd) No. of optocouplers 8, 4 or 14 acc. to I/O unit
(316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63)
Input voltage 18 to 36 V DC / 36 to 75 V DC / 82 to 312 V DC /175 to 312 V DC
Operating time 1 ms

Colors 1 green (standby)
1 red (trip)

modem.

PCC interface
PCC (optional)
LON bus PCC with fiber-optical port, ST connectors
MVB bus PCC with redundant fiber-optical port, ST
connectors
Event memory
Capacity 256 events
Engineering interface integrated software interface for signal engi-
neering with SigTOOL
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 19
Table 7: Auxiliary supply

Supply voltage
Voltage range 36 to 312 V DC
Fuse rating 4 A
during a fault
line differential protection (code SPxxx) 7.5 W
MVB interface 2.5 W
Buffer time of the event list and fault recorder
data at loss of auxiliary supply >2 days (typ. 1 month)

Temperature range
operation -10C to +55C EN 60255-6 (1994),
storage -40C to +85C IEC 60255-6 (1988)
Humidity 93%, 40C, 4 days IEC 60068-2-3 (1969)
IEC 60255-5 (2000)
EN 60950 (1995)
IEC 60255-5 (2000) *
(1989)
IEC 61000-4-4 (1995)
(ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 (2001)
cies
(RFI) 10 V, Cl. 3 EN 61000-4-6 (1996),
10 V/m, Cl. 3 IEC 61000-4-3 (1996),
10 V/m, Cl. 3
Emission Cl. A EN 61000-6-2 (2001),
EN 55011 (1998),
CISPR 11 (1990)
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 20
Technical data hard- Table 9: Mechanical design

ware (contd) Weight
Width N2: 271 mm.
Enclosure IP 50 (IP 20 if MVB PC cards are used)
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 21
Technical data Table 10: Distance and high-voltage distance protection (21)
functions All values of settings referred to the secondaries, every zone can be set independently of the others,
4 independent files for sets of settings.
Impedance measurement -300 to 300 /ph in steps of 0.01 /ph (IN = 1 A or 2 A)
-30 to 30 /ph in steps of 0.001 /ph (IN = 5 A)
Zero-sequence current compensation 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01,
-180 to +90 in steps of 1
Mutual impedance for parallel circuit lines 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01,
Time step setting range 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01 s
Underimpedance starters -999 to 999 /ph in steps of 0.1 /ph (IN = 1 A or 2 A)
-99.9 to 99.9 /ph in steps of 0.01 /ph (IN = 5 A)
Overcurrent starters (not included in the high- 0.5 to 10 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
voltage distance protection function <ZHV)
Min. operating current 0.1 to 2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Back-up overcurrent 0 to 10 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Neutral current criterion 0.1 to 2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Neutral voltage criterion 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
Low voltage criterion for detecting, for exam- 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
ple, a weak infeed
VT supervision
NPS/neutral voltage criterion 0.01 to 0.5 UN in steps of 0.01UN
NPS/neutral current criterion 0.01 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Accuracy (applicable for current time con-
stants between 40 and 150 ms)
amplitude error 5% for U/UN >0.1
phase error 2 for U/UN >0.1
Supplementary error for
- frequency fluctuations of +10% 5%
- 10% third harmonic 10%
- 10% fifth harmonic 10%
Operating times of the high-voltage distance
protection function <ZHV (including tripping
relay)
minimum 21 ms
typical 25 ms
(see also isochrones)
all permitted additional functions activated 4 ms in addition
The operating times of the (standard-)
distance functions are higher by 5 to 10 ms
Typical reset time 30 ms
VT-MCB auxiliary contact requirements
Operating time <15 ms
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 22
Technical data func- High-voltage distance protection function operating times

tions (contd) (Versions SN 100 and SN 300)
Isochrones
Single phase fault (min) Single phase fault (max)

1 1
0.8 0.8 35ms

30ms
0.6 0.6
ZF/ZL
ZF/ZL
0.4 25ms 0.4 27ms
22ms 0.2
0.2
0 0
0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.1 1 10 100 1000
SIR (ZS/ZL) SIR (ZS/ZL)
Two phase fault (min) Two phase fault (max)

1 1
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
ZF/ZL
ZF/ZL
25ms 26ms 32ms

0.4 22ms 23ms 0.4
0.2 0.2
0 0
0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.1 1 10 100 1000
Three phase fault (min) Three phase fault (max)

1 1
24ms 35ms
0.8 0.8 30ms
22ms
ZF/ZL
0.6 0.6
ZF/ZL
0.4 0.4
25ms
0.2 0.2
0 0
0.1 1 10 100 1000 0.1 1 10 100 1000
Abbreviations: ZS = source impedance

ZF = fault impedance
ZL = zone 1 impedance setting
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 23
Table 11: Longitudinal differential protection function (87)

Three-phase measurement with current comparison per phase
Adaptive current characteristic
Provision for two-winding power transformer in protection zone
- compensation of group of connection
- compensation of differing CT ratios
- 2nd harmonic inrush restraint
Settings:
Basic setting g = 0.1 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.1 IN
Pick-up ratio v = 0.25 / 0.5
Restraint criterion b = 1.25 to 5 in steps of 0.25
Typical operating time (incl. tripping relay) 25 ms
Pick-up accuracy of g 5% IN (at fN)
Condition for resetting I <0.8 setting for g
Communications link to the remote station Two optical fiber connectors for transmit (Tx) and
receive (Rx)
Data transfer rate 64 kBit/s
Optical fiber conductors multi-mode MM (50/25 m)
single-mode SM (9/125 m)
Max. attenuation of link MM 18 dB, SM 14 dB
Optical connectors Type FC
Operating wave length 1300 nm
Max. permissible transmission time per direc- 11.5 ms at fN = 50 Hz
tion 9.5 ms at fN = 60 Hz
Range
MM <18 km (1 dB/km incl. splice)
SM <28 km (0.5 dB/km incl. splice)
Long distance range using FOX20 <87 km (0.5 dB/km incl. splice for SM, 1300 nm)
<124 km (0.35 dB/km incl. splice for SM, 1550 nm)
Table 12: Binary signal transmission function

Transmission of binary signals via the optical fiber link of 316EA63
(link used for the longitudinal protection function)
Max. 8 binary signals of which the first 4 are assignable to the tripping logic
Typical transmission time for 1 binary signal 18 ms (13 to 25 ms)
Table 13: Autoreclosure (79)

Single and three-phase autoreclosure.
Operation in conjunction with distance, longitudinal differential, overcurrent and synchrocheck functions
and also with external protection and synchrocheck relays.
Logic for 1st and 2nd main protections, duplex and master/follower schemes.
Up to four fast or slow reclosure shots. The autoreclosure function may also be loaded several times in
the same parameter set.
Detection of evolving faults.
Settings:
1st reclosure none
1P/3P fault - 3P reclosure
1P/3P fault - 1P/3P reclosure
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 24
Technical data func- 2nd to 4th reclosure none

tions (contd) two reclosure cycles
three reclosure cycles
four reclosure cycles
Single-phase dead time 0.05 to 300 s
Three-phase dead time 0.05 to 300 s
Dead time extension by ext. signal 0.05 to 300 s
Dead times for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reclosures 0.05 to 300 s
Fault duration time 0.05 to 300 s
Reclaim time 0.05 to 300 s
Blocking time 0.05 to 300 s
Single and three-phase discrimination times 0.1 to 300 s
All settings in steps of 0.01 s
Table 14: Synchrocheck function (25)

Determination of synchronism
- Single-phase measurement. The differences between the amplitudes, phase angles and
frequencies of two voltage vectors are determined.
Voltage supervision
- Single or three-phase measurement
- Evaluation of instantaneous values and therefore wider frequency range
- Determination of maximum and minimum values in the case of three-phase inputs
Phase selection for voltage inputs
Provision for switching to a different voltage input (double busbar systems)
Remote selection of operating mode
Settings:
Max. voltage difference 0.05 to 0.4 UN in steps of 0.05 UN
Max. phase difference 5 to 80 in steps of 5
Max. frequency difference 0.05 to 0.4 Hz in steps of 0.05 Hz
Min. voltage 0.6 to 1 UN in steps of 0.05 UN
Max. voltage 0.1 to 1 UN in steps of 0.05 UN
Supervision time 0.05 to 5 s in steps of 0.05 s
Resetting time 0 to 1 s in steps of 0.05 s
Accuracy for 0.9 to 1.1 fN
Voltage difference 5% UN
Phase difference 5
Frequency difference 0.05 Hz
Table 15: Thermal overload function (49)

Thermal image for the 1st order model.
Settings:
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 25

2nd harmonic restraint for high inrush currents.
Settings:
Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) 5%
Reset ratio
reset ratio 0.8

Settings:
Table 18: Inverse time overcurrent function (51)

very inverse c=1
Settings:
Reset ratio >94%
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 26
Technical data func- Table 19: Inverse time ground fault overcurrent function (51N)
tions (contd) Neutral current measurement (derived externally or internally)
very inverse c=1
Settings:
Reset ratio >94%

Directional overcurrent protection
Settings:
Reset ratio >94%
(at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) 5
Max. Response time without delay 60 ms
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 27

Directional overcurrent protection with detection of the power direction
Back-up protection for distance protection scheme
Settings:
very inverse c=1
Reset ratio >94%
Accuracy of angle measurement (at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) 5
Standard 142 E 10
Max. Response time without delay 60 ms
Table 22: Directional ground fault function for ungrounded systems and systems with
Petersen coils (32N)
Determination of real or apparent power from neutral current and voltage
Settings:
Pick-up power 0.005 to 0.1 SN in steps of 0.001 SN
Reference value of the power SN 0.5 to 2.5 UN IN in steps of 0.001 UN IN
Characteristic angle -180 to +180 in steps of 0.01
Phase error compensation of current input -5 to +5 in steps of 0.01
Reset ratio 30 to 95% in steps of 1%
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 28
Technical data func- Table 23: Directional ground fault function for grounded systems (67N)
tions (contd) Detection of high-resistance ground faults
Current enabling setting 3I0
Direction determined on basis of neutral variables (derived externally or internally)
Permissive or blocking directional comparison scheme
Echo logic for weak infeeds
Logic for change of energy direction
Settings:
Current pick-up setting 0.1 to 1.0 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Voltage pick-up setting 0.003 to 1 UN in steps of 0.001 UN
Accuracy of the current pick-up setting 10% of setting

Choice of measuring phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages
Settings:
Phase angle -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1
Refer to Table 33 for accuracy.

Three-phase measurement of voltage (star or delta), current, frequency, real and apparent power and
power factor.
Settings:
t1-Interval 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min,
60 min or 120 min
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 29

Over and underpower
Settings:
Reset ratio 30% to 170% in steps of 1%

Features
remote trip).
Settings
Delay t2 (back-up trip) 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
Accuracy of current operating time (at fN) 15%
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 30
Technical data func- Table 28: Disturbance recorder

tions (contd) Max. 9 CT/VT channels
Available recording time for 9 CT/VT- and 8 binary signals approximately 5 s
Data format EVE
Resolution 12 bits
Settings:
Recording periods
Ancillary functions
Table 29: Logic
1. OR gate
2. AND gate

Settings:
Integration yes/no

applied to an input
Reset ratio 90% whole range
>95% (at U >0.1 UN or I >0.1 IN)
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 31

Amplitude compensation for summation VT -2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01

Settings
pensation
f = fN
f = fN
0.2 to 1.2 UN
0.2 to 1.2 IN
f = fN
0.8 to 1,2 UN
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 32
Connection
diagram
CURRENT
AND VOLTAGE
INPUTS
(VALID FOR CODE K03)
SIGNALLING
COMMUNICATION
PORT
(LOCAL HMI) (PC))
SERIAL COMMUNI-
CATION WITH SUB-
STATION CONTROL
EARTHING SCREW
ON CASING
TRIP
OPTOCOUPLER
INPUTS
DC SUPPLY
Fig. 9 Typical wiring diagram of REL316*4 in size N1 casing with two input/output units 316DB62
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 33

Quantity
Ordering number
ADE code + key

Stand-alone units REL316*4 with built-in HMI (see table below) HESG448750M0001
Table 34: REL316*4 basic versions

Relay ID code
Basic-SW
E/Fungnd
Long. diff
E/Fgnd
<ZHV
BST
AR
SC
<Z
A*B0U*K01E*I*F0J0 Q0V0R0W0Y*N*M* SA010 T*** X
A*B0U*K01E*I*F0J0 Q0V0R0W0Y*N*M* SA100 T*** X X
A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SE010 T*** X
A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SE100 T*** X X
A*B*U*K04E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SG100 T*** X X X
A*B*U*K04E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SH100 T*** X X X X
A*B*U*K09E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SH300 T*** X X X X X
A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SK100 T*** X X X
A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SK300 T*** X X X X
A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SL100 T*** X X X
HESG448750M0001
A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SM100 T*** X X X X

A*B0U*K08E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SM300 T*** X X X X X
A*B0U*K01E*I*F0J0 Q0V0R0W0Y*N*M* SA020 T*** X
Order No.
A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SC020 T*** X

A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SC050 T*** X X
A*B0U*K03E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SD020 T*** X X
A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SD050 T*** X X X
A*B*U*K04E*I*F0J0 Q0V0R0W0Y*N*M* SG020 T*** X X
A*B*U*K04E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SH020 T*** X X X
A*B*U*K09E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M* SH050 T*** X X X X
A*B0U*K16E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SP100 T*** X X X X X
A*B0U*K16E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SP200 T*** X X X X X X
A*B*U*K17E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SP300 T*** X X X X X X
A*B0U0K15E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SP400 T*** X X X X
A*B0U*K16E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SP400 T*** X X X X
A*B*U*K17E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SP400 T*** X X X X
A*B0U*K16E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M* SP500 T*** X X X X X
A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* SN100 T*** X X X
A*B0U*K05E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* SN300 T*** X X X X X
A*B0U*K08E*I*F*J*Q*V*R*W*Y*N2M* SN300 T*** X X X X X
T0129 is to be ordered additionally in case that single-pole autoreclosure for line differential protection is
required.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 34
Ordering (contd) Legend:

* required sub-code in Table 35
<Z distance protection
<ZHV high-voltage distance protection
E/Fungnd direction ground fault function for ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils
E/Fgnd direction ground fault function for grounded systems
AR autoreclosure
SC synchrocheck
Long. diff. longitudinal differential function
BST binary signal transmission
Basic SW Basic software including the following functions:

OCDT Dir directional definite time overcurrent protection
OCDT Inv Dir directional inverse time overcurrent protection
TH thermal overload
OCInv inverse definite minimum time-overcurrent
Ucheck voltage plausibility
UlfPQ metering
Logic AND gate, OR gate or bistable flip-flop
FUPLA project-specific logic
l0inv inverse time ground fault overcurrent function
All the functions of the basic versions can be applied in any combination providing the maximum capacity of
the processor and the number of analog channels is not exceeded.
The basic versions with the longitudinal differential function include the additional 316EA62 board and
another back plate.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 35

A1 1A
A2 2A
A5 5A
B1 1A
B2 2A
B5 5A
C1 1A
C2 2A
C5 5A
D1 1A
D2 2A
D5 5A
U1 100 V AC
U2 200 V AC
K- K01 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) VT, CT and MT combination see previous table
3 CTs (3ph Code A-) in input transformer unit type
316GW61
K03 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) CT = current transformer
3 CTs (3ph Code A-) VT = voltage transformer
1 CT (1ph Code A-) MT = metering transformer
1 CT (1ph Code A-)
K04 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-) K01 to K14:
1 VT (1ph Code U-) without differential function
3 CTs (3ph Code A-) K15 to K20:
1 CT (1ph Code A-) with differential function
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
K05 3 VTs (3ph star Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
3 CTs (3ph Code A-)
1 CT (1ph Code A-)
1 CT (1ph Code A-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
3 CTs (3ph Code A-)
1 CT (1ph Code A-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
3 CTs (3ph Code A-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
3 not defined
3 remote CTs optical link to the remote sta-
tion
tion
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 36
Ordering (contd) Sub code Significance Description Remarks

1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
tion
2 command relays
8 LEDs
E2 4 optocoupler 1.binary input/output unit
2 command relays
8 LEDs
E3 14 optocoupler 1.binary input/output unit
8 LEDs
I5 18 to 36 V DC
I9 175 to 312 V DC
F- F0 none
2 command relays
8 LEDs
2 command relays
8 LEDs
8 LEDs
J- J0 none 2. binary input/output unit state
J4 36 to 75 V DC
J5 18 to 36 V DC
J9 175 to 312 V DC
Q- Q0 none
2 command relays
2 command relays
V- V0 none 3. binary input/output unit state
V4 36 to 75 V DC
V5 18 to 36 V DC
V9 175 to 312 V DC
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 37

R- R0 none
2 command relays
2 command relays
W- W0 none
W5 18 to 36 V DC
W9 175 to 312 V DC
Y1 SPA
Y2 IEC 60870-5-103
Y3 LON
S- SA000 basic versions REL316*4 Different versions of func- see previous table
to without differential function tions
SO990
SP000 basic versions REL316*4
to with differential function
SQ990
T- T000 without FUPLA logic Customer-specific logic Defined by
to logic
T999x
T129x Logic for single-phase
autoreclosure for line differ-
ential protection
autoreclosure for the distance
protection with a 1-breaker
scheme
autoreclosure for a reclosure unit
with a 1-breaker scheme
1)
MVB interface (for interbay or process bus) not applicable for surface-mounted version.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 38
Ordering (contd)

Assembly kits
19"-mounting plate for hinged frames, light-beige for use with:
1 1 REL316*4 (size 1 casing) HESG324310P1
4 1 REL316*4 and 1 test socket block XX93, Test adapter and accessories: HESG324310P3
5 Semi-flush test socket block for Item 4 XX93/HESG112823R1
6 Test kit including 19" mounting plate to fit 1 REL316*4 in a hinged frame 316TSS01/HESG448342R1
7 Test kit1 for semi-flush panel mounting 316TSS01/HESG448342R3
8 Test kit1 for surface mounting 316TSS01/HESG448342R11
9 Test socket block for surface mounting XX93/HESG112823R2
10 Connecting cable XX93/XS92b for use with Items 5 and 9 YX91-4/HESG216587R4
11 Test plug with 4 mm terminals for use with test set 316TSS01 RTXH24/RK926016-AA
12 Connecting cable for XS92b with 4 mm terminals for use with test plug RTXH24 YX91-7/HESG216587R7
13 1 REL316*4 size 1, surface mounting kit HESG448532R0001
14 1 REL316*4 size 2, surface mounting kit HESG448532R0002
1A test kit Type 316TSS01 comprises:

- casing for semi-flush or surface mounting
- test socket block RTXP24.
PCC card interface
Type Protocol Connector Optical fiber* Gauge ** Order No.
For interbay bus:
PCCLON1 SET LON ST (bajonet) G/G 62,5/125 HESG 448614R0001
500PCC02 MVB ST (bajonet) G/G 62,5/125 HESG 448735R0231
For process bus:
500PCC02 MVB ST (bajonet) G/G 62,5/125 HESG 448735R0232

Type Protocol Connector Optical fiber* Gauge ** Order No.
316BM61b SPA ST (bajonet) G/G 62,5/125 HESG448267R401
316BM61b IEC 60870-5-103 SMA (screw) G/G 62,5/125 HESG448267R402
* receiver Rx / transmitter Tx, G = glass, P = plastic **optical fiber conductor gauge in m

CAP2/316* Installation German/English 1MRB260030M0001
CD
Optical fiber PC connecting cable
Type Order No.
500OCC02 communication cable for device with LDU. 1MRB380084-R1
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 39
Dimensioned
Rear view
219 1
254 1
Panel cutout


1MRK506013-Ben
Page 40
Dimensioned draw-
ings (contd) Mounting element
Rear view
Panel cutout


1MRK506013-Ben
Page 41
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 42
Dimensioned draw-
ings (contd)
Fig. 13 Surface mounting, casing able to swing to the left, rear connections. Size N2 casing.
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 43
Example of an Rated current 1 A, rated voltage 100 V AC Rated voltage 100 V AC

order 3-phase voltages, 3-phase currents, 1 neu- 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1
tral current
1 electro-optical converter
110 V DC aux. supply HESG448267R401
4 heavy duty relays (3 tripping, 1 CB clos- 1 CD RE.216 / RE.316*4
ing), 20 signalling relays 1MRB260030M0001
8 optocoupler inputs (110 V DC) 1 PC connecting cable (if not already
available) 1MRB380084-R1.
1 relay for 19" rack mounting
Distance protection function (Z starters Alternatively, the relay ID code may be given
with provision for all transfer tripping instead. In this case the order would be:
schemes)
1 REL316*4, A1B0U1K03E2I3F2
Autoreclosure J3Y1N1M1SK100T0
Communication with the station control 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1
system (e.g. LON)
1 CD RE.216 / RE.316*4
Operator program on CD. 1MRB260030M0001
The corresponding order is as follows: 1 electro-optical converter

HESG448267R401
1 REL316*4, HESG448750M0001
110 V DC aux. supply available) 1MRB380084-R1.
Optocoupler input voltage 110 V DC
Relay ID codes are marked on all relays. The
Rated current 1 A significance of the sub-codes can be seen
from Table 35.
Example of a Numerical line protection terminal with ex- be transmitted via the same communications
specification tensive self-supervision of the internal func- channel. Provision shall be made for the com-
tions and A/D conversion of all input vari- bination with a distance protection scheme, a
ables. The terminal shall be suitable for the directional ground fault scheme and back-up
protection of single and double-circuit lines functions.
and cables in solidly or low-impedance
grounded systems, ungrounded systems and The protection functions shall be in the form
systems with Petersen coils. It shall be capa- of software such that additional or different
ble of detecting all kinds of power system functions, i.e. power swing blocking, sensi-
faults including close three-phase faults, tive ground fault, overcurrent, thermal over-
cross-country faults (in ungrounded systems load, single or three-phase autoreclosure,
or systems with Petersen coils), evolving application-specific logics etc., can be readily
faults and high-resistance ground faults. Due implemented without changes to the existing
account shall be taken of power swings and hardware. All configuration and setting oper-
changes in the direction of energy flow. ations shall be made using a menu-based
operator program running on a PC connected
The distance protection terminal shall have at locally to the terminal for the purpose.
least three distance zones with independent
settings and in addition zones of measure- The assignment of input and output signals to
ment for all the usual transfer tripping sche- the protection functions shall be possible lar-
mes. Provision shall be made for compensat- gely without restrictions. An event recorder
ing the mutual impedance in the case of par- with fault locator function shall be provided.
allel circuit lines using the neutral current of
the parallel circuit to obtain a correct setting. The data exchange between the control sys-
The integrity of the VT circuit shall be super- tem and the station control system shall be
vised. ensured via a communication interface. The
data connection itself shall be able to be de-
The longitudinal differential protection termi- signed with fiberoptic conductors.
nal shall measure the three phases indepen-
dently and permit other protection signals to
1MRK506013-Ben
Page 44
Other relevant Operating Instructions REL316*4 (printed) 1MRB520050-Uen

documents Operating Instructions REL316*4 (CD) 1MRB260030M0001
Operating Instructions Testing program using XS92b CH-ES 86-11.52 E
Data Sheet CAP316 1MRB520167-Ben
Data Sheet Test Set XS92b 1MRB520006-Ben
Reference List REL316*4 1MRB520212-Ren
Description Current transformer requirements CH-ES 45-12.30 E
Data Sheet SigTOOL 1MRB520158-Ben
Data Sheet RIO580 1MRB520176-Ben
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Tel. +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77

Numerical Transformer Protection RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 1
Issued: May 2003
Features One three-phase differential function for Breaker failure protection

two- or three-winding transformers
Standard wiring diagram regardless of
No interposing CTs power transformer group
Current compensation of ratio and phase Compact design, few hardware units, part
of the 316*4-family
Programmable facility on inputs and out-
puts to provide trip and/or indication of Modular software
external protection features (Buchholz,
Continuous self-monitoring and diagnosis
temperature, etc.)
Fully numerical signal processing
Overcurrent stage in differential circuit
Menu-driven user interface program
Overcurrent functions on high- and low-
CAP2/316 based on Windows
voltage side
Additional project-specific logic functions
Directional inverse and definite time over-
can be programmed with CAP316
current protection
Event recording and measuring values
Overvoltage function (by adequate hard-
ware version) Three serial interfaces:
Thermal overload function - Front port connector for local connection
of a personal computer
Distance protection
- Back plane interface for remote commu-
- Overcurrent and underimpedance
nication with a station control system:
starters
LON, IEC 60870-5-103, MVB, SPA
- Five distance zones (polygon for for-
- Back plane interface for process bus:
wards and reverse measurement)
MVB
- VT supervision
Available for 19" rack mounting in a panel,
- Power swing blocking surface or flush mounting
- Load-compensated measurement Four independent, user-selectable parame-
ter sets able to be activated via binary input
Overexcitation
Frequency
functions.
ABB Switzerland Ltd Numerical Transformer Protection RET316*4
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 2
Application The numerical transformer protection unit The overcurrent protection function is rec-
RET316*4 is designed for the fast, selective ommendable as back-up protection
protection of two- or three-winding trans- In some cases the overvoltage function is
formers. In addition the application for the
desired
protection of autotransformers and block gen-
erator-transformer units is possible. The thermal overload function protects the
insulation against thermal stress. This pro-
The relay will detect different kinds of faults, tection function is normally equipped with
such as: two independently set levels and is used
when oil overtemperature detectors are not
all-phase faults installed
earth faults where the power transformer Other functions on request (e.g. frequency
star-point is solidly or low-impedance function)
earthed
The distance protection scheme is also
interturn faults. often used as a back-up protection and is
included in the RET316*4.
RET316*4 can be supplied with different
protection functions. RET316*4 has low requirements with respect
to the main CTs. No interposing CTs requi-
The differential protection function is one red.
of the most important functions for the fast
and selective protection of all transformers
with ratings greater than a few MVA
Design The RET316*4 belongs to the generation of most important characteristic required of pro-
fully numerical transformer protection termi- tection equipment. As a consequence of the
nals, i.e. analog to digital conversion of the continuous supervision of its functions, this
input variables takes place immediately after quotient in the case of RET316*4 is typically
the input transformers and all further process- always close to 1.
ing of the resulting numerical signals is per-
formed by microprocessors and controlled by The menu-based HMI (human machine inter-
programs. face) and the RET316*4 small size makes the
tasks of connection, configuration and setting
Standard interfaces enable RET316*4 to simple. A maximum of FLEXIBILITY, i.e.
communicate with other control systems. the ability to adapt the protection for applica-
Provision is thus made for the exchange of tion in a particular power system or to coordi-
data such as reactionless reporting of binary nate with, or replace units in an existing pro-
states, events, measurements and protection tection scheme, is provided in RET316*4 by
parameters or the activation of a different set ancillary software functions and the assign-
of settings by higher level control systems. ment of input and output signals via the HMI.
Because of its compact design, the very few RET316*4s reliability, SELECTIVITY and
hardware units it needs, its modular software STABILITY are backed by decades of expe-
and the integrated continuous self-diagnosis rience in the protection of transformers in
and supervision functions, RET316*4 ideally transmission and distribution systems.
fulfils the users expectations of a modern Numerical processing ensures consistent
protection terminal at a cost-effective price. ACCURACY and SENSITIVITY throughout
its operational life.
The AVAILABILITY of a device, i.e. the
ratio between its mean time in service with-
out failure and its total life, is most certainly
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 3
Hardware The hardware concept for the RET316*4 maximum of nine input transformers
transformer protection equipment comprises (voltage-, protection current- or measuring
four different plug-in units, a connecting transformer).
mother PCB and housing (Fig. 1):
Every analog variable is passed through a
analog input unit first order R/C low-pass filter on the main
central processing unit CPU unit to eliminate what is referred to as
ferences (Fig. 2). They are then sampled 12
power supply unit times per period and converted to digital sig-
connecting mother PCB nals. The analog/digital conversion is per-
formed by a 16 Bit converter.
housing with connection terminals.
A DSP (Powerful Digital Signal Processor)
In the analog input unit an input transformer carries out part of the digital filtering and
provides the electrical and static isolation makes sure that the data for the protection
between the analog input variables and the algorithms are available in the memory to the
internal electronic circuits and adjusts the sig- main processor.
nals to a suitable level for processing. The
input transformer unit can accommodate a
DC
+5V
+15V Power
CPU -15V
supply Remote I/O
486 +24V DC Remote I/OTrip

DPM Outputs
Remote I/OTrip
A/D DSP Sign.
Outputs
Trip
Outputs
SW-Key Sign.
outputs
Trip Bin.
Outputs
Trip Bin.
Trip EPROM outputs
Outputs I/O Inputs
TripSignal
Outputs MVB
Sign. I /IO/Ports
outputs a
Sign.
I/O
Sign. BinaryPorts
Outputs Tranceiver
Outputs Ports
Bin.
inputs
C
b
Bin.
Inputs M
Bin.
Inputs PCC
Inputs C
c
RAM I
LON
A
d
MVB
SCS
LED's
SMS
RS Serial RS Serial
HMI
The processor core essentially comprises the and the data from the disturbance recorder
main microprocessor for the protection algo- memory are transferred to a local or remote
rithms and dual-ported memories (DPMs) for PC.
communication between the A/D converters
and the main processor. The main processor On this main processor unit there are two
performs the protection algorithms and con- PCC slots and one RS232C interface. These
trols the local HMI and the interfaces to the serial interfaces provide remote communica-
station control system. Binary signals from tion to the station monitoring system (SMS)
the main processor are relayed to the corre- and station control system (SCS) as well as to
sponding inputs of the I/O unit and thus con- the remote I/Os.
trol the auxiliary output relays and the light
emitting diode (LED) signals. The main pro- RET316*4 can have one to four binary I/O
cessor unit is equipped with an RS232C serial units each. These units are available in three
interface via which among other things the versions:
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 4
Hardware (contd) a) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty c) 14 optocoupler inputs and 8 signalling
contacts, 8 optocoupler inputs and 6 relays Type 316DB63.
When ordering RET316*4 with more than
b) two tripping relays with two heavy-duty 2 I/O units, casing size N2 must be selected.
nalling relays Type 316DB62 According to whether one or two I/O units
are fitted, there are either 8 LED's or 16
LED's visible on the front of the RET316*4.
ditioned before being processed by the main filters into real and apparent components
processor. As described under hardware before being applied to the main processor.
above, the analog signals pass through the Binary signals from the optocoupler inputs go
Fig. 2 Data Flow
Graphical The graphical programming language used in List of functions

engineering the tool CAP316 makes CAP316 a powerful Binary functions:
and user-friendly engineering tool for the en- AND AND gate
tool gineering of the control and protection units ASSB Assign binary
RE.216/316*4. It is similar to IEC 1131. B23 2-out-of-3 selector
CAP316 permits the function blocks repre- B24 2-out-of-4 selector
senting the application to be directly trans- BINEXTIN External binary input
lated into an application program (FUPLA) BINEXOUT External binary output
capable of running on the processors of the COUNTX Shift register
control and protection units RE.316*4. The CNT Counter
program packet contains an extensive library CNTD Downwards counter
of function blocks. Up to 8 projects (FUPLAs OR OR gate
created with CAP316) are able to run simul- RSFF RS flip-flop
taneously on a RE.316*4. SKIP Skip segment
TFF T flip-flop with reset
TMOC Monostable constant
TMOCS, TMOCL Monostable constant
short, long
TMOI Monostable constant
with interrupt
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 5
TMOIS, TMOIL Monostable constant DIVL Long integer divider

with interrupt short, long FCTL Linear function
TOFF Off delay FCTP Polynomial function
TOFFS, TOFFL Off delay short, long FILT Filter
TON On delay INTS, INTL Integrator
TONS, TONL On delay short, long KMUL Factor multiplier
XOR Exclusive OR gate LIM Limiter
LOADS Load shedding function
MAX Maximum value detector
Analog functions: MIN Minimum value detector
ABS Absolute value MUL Multiplier
ADD Adder/subtracter MULL Long integer multiplier
ADDL Long integer adder/sub- NEGP Percent negator
tracter PACW Pack BINARY signals
ADMUL Adder/multiplier into INTEGER
CNVIL Integer to long integer PDTS, PDTL Differentiator
converter PT1S, PT1L Delayed approximation
CNVLBCD Long integer to BC con- SQRT Square root
verter SWIP Percent switch
CNVLI Long integer to integer THRLL Lower limit threshold
converter THRUL Upper limit threshold
CNVLP Long integer to percent TMUL Time multiplier
converter UPACW Unpack BINARY sig-
CNVPL Percentage to long inte- nals from an INTEGER
ger converter
DIV Divider
Example:
3
B_DRIVE
CL CL Q0_CL
OP OP Q0_OP
POK Q0_Q0_POK
4
& Q0_Q0_CLOSED
5 Q0_Q0_OPEN
&
SEL
DPMIN_Q0_CLOSED
DPMIN_Q0_OPEN
GEX Q0_GUIDE_EXE
2
>=1 EXE Q0_EXE
1
&
SYNC GOON Q0_GOON_Q0
Q0_SEL_DRIVE_Q0
SYST Q0_Q0_SYST
GEN_REQUEST_ON
GEN_SYNC
Q1_Q1_OPEN
ALSY Q0_ALSY
Q2_Q2_OPEN
BKS Q0_BLOCK_SELECT
GEN_REQUEST_EXE
KDOF Q0_KDO_FAIL
Part of FUPLA application (Q0) : control and interlocking logic for three objects Q0,
Q1, Q2. B_DRIVE is a macro based on binary function blocks.
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 6
Functions The library of function modules for constraints of the available processing capac-
RET316*4 includes a variety of protection ity, the same function may be included sev-
and ancillary functions from which the user eral times.
can choose according to relay version (see
Ordering data and Fig. 3 below). Within the
Variant
Protection function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Current biased differential 2-Winding
Current biased differential 3-Winding
Distance
Earth fault inverse time
Frequency
df/dt
Overcurrent definite time
Overcurrent instantaneous
Overcurrent inverse time
Directional definite time overcurrent protection
Directional inverse time overcurrent protection
Overexcitation (V/Hz)
Overvoltage
Restricted earth fault
Thermal overload
Undervoltage
Power
Variant 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CTs protection characteristic 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 6 6 6 6
CTs measuring characteristic 2 2
VTs 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 3
Fig. 3 Overview of protection functions and analog inputs
High inrush stability age at an internal fault due to the 5th har-
One major task associated with differential monic restraint applied in other transformers
protection is to provide discrimination bet- differential protections.
ween internal fault currents and inrush in the
event that a transformer is energized, another Back-up functions
transformer switched in parallel or an exter- Different functions can be provided as back-
nal fault cleared or a voltage increase on the up functions: overcurrent, neutral current or
transformer terminals suddenly occurs. For neutral point voltage, underimpedance or dis-
all these phenomena functions are provided in tance function.
the protection device.
Distance protection
Increased magnetizing stability The RET316*4 versions with three voltage
In case of increased magnetizing current due inputs are also provided with this function.
to overvoltages on the transformer terminals a
higher "g" parameter setting of the differen- The distance protection function can have
tial function (e.g. to 2In) can be activated either overcurrent or underimpedance start-
over one binary input. This input is activated ers. They are equally suitable for use in sol-
by either an internal or external instantaneous idly grounded, ungrounded or impedance
overvoltage function. The advantage of this grounded systems.
solution is the absence of any risk of block-
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 7
Distance measurement is performed in the station control system. A choice can be made
first, overreach and reverse zones simulta- between phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase
neously. Every zone has a wide completely voltages.
independent setting range and an independent
setting for the direction of measurement. Four Ancillary functions
directional zones are provided, the last can Ancillary functions such as a logic and a de-
also be configured to be non-directional. lay/integrator enable the user to create logical
Overreach and reverse measuring zones are combinations of signals and pick-up and reset
for use in transfer tripping schemes. The dis- delays.
tance measuring characteristic is a polygon
with a slightly inclined reactance line which A run-time supervision feature enables
has proved to be an optimum in practice. checking the opening and closing of all kinds
Where the voltage measured by the relay for of breakers (circuit-breakers, isolators,
a fault is too low, the inclusion of a healthy ground switches...). Failure of a breaker to
phase voltage as reference, respectively the open or close within an adjustable time
use of a memory feature (close three-phase results in the creation of a corresponding sig-
faults) ensures the integrity of the directional nal for further processing.
decision.
Plausibility check
A VT supervision function is also included The current and voltage plausibility functions
which monitors the zero-sequence component facilitate the detection of system asymme-
(U0 I0) and/or the negative-sequence compo- tries, e.g. in the secondary circuits of CTs and
nent (U2 I2), the latter being of advantage in VTs.
ungrounded systems or systems with poor
grounding. Sequence-of-events recorder
The event recorder function provides capacity
Directional overcurrent protection for up to 256 binary signals including time
The directional overcurrent protection func- marker with a resolution in the order of milli-
tion is available either with inverse time or seconds.
definite time overcurrent characteristic. This
function comprises a voltage memory for Disturbance recorder
faults close to the relay location. The function The disturbance recorder monitors up to 9
response after the memory time has elapsed analog inputs and up to 16 binary inputs. The
can be selected (trip or block). capacity for recording disturbances depends
on the duration of a disturbance as deter-
Frequency function mined by its pre-disturbance history and the
The frequency function is based on the duration of the disturbance itself. The total
measurement of one voltage. This function is recording time is approximately 5 s.
able to be configured as maximum or mini-
mum function and is applied as protection Human machine interface (HMI) - CAP2/316
function and for load shedding. By multiple For local communication with RET316*4,
-
configuration of this function almost any there is the setting software CAP2/316 availa-
number of stages can be realized. ble which is based on Windows. This soft-
Rate-of-change of frequency tems:
This function offers alternatively an enabling Windows NT 4.0
by absolute frequency. It contains an under-
voltage blocking facility. Repeated configura- Windows 2000.
tion of this function ensures a multi-step
setup. This optimal programming tool is available
Measuring operation.
The measuring functions measure the single-
or three-phase rms values of voltage, current, The software can be used either ON-LINE or
frequency, real power and apparent power for OFF-LINE and furthermore contains a
display on the local HMI or transfer to the DEMO mode.
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 8
Functions (contd) - Binary signals

Event list
Disturbance recorder information
Diagnostic information
Acknowledgment functions
- Resetting LEDs
- Resetting latched outputs
- Event erasing
- Warmstart.
For each protection function a tripping char-
acteristic is displayed. Apart from the basic RET316*4 is able to communicate with a sta-
understanding of the protection functions, the tion monitoring and evaluation system (SMS)
graphical display of these functions also or a station control system (SCS) via an opti-
makes the setting of the parameters clearer. cal fibre link. The corresponding serial inter-
switched.
Using the LON bus permits in addition the

exchange of binary information between the
individual bay controllers, e.g. signals for sta-
tion interlocking.
Remote in- and outputs (RIO580)

Using the process bus type MVB, remote in-
and output units 500RIO11 can be connected
Any desired protection function can be selec- to the RE.316*4 terminals. The input and out-
ted from the software library of all released put channels can be extended to a large num-
protection functions by means of the drag- ber by using RIO580 remote input/output
and-drop feature. system. Installing 500RIO11 I/O units close
to the process reduces the wiring dramati-
cally, since they are accessible via fibreoptic
link from the RE.316*4 terminals.
Analog signals can also be connected to the

system via the 500AXM11 from the RIO580
family:
0...20 mA
-20...20 mA
DC voltage 0...10 V
-10...10 V
Built-in HMI Ni100, Ni250, Ni1000.
signalling of actual events, measurands and Self-diagnosis and supervision
diagnostic data. Settings are not displayed. RE.316*4s self-diagnosis and supervision
Features: functions ensure maximum availability not
only of the protection terminal itself, but also
Measurand display of the power system it is protecting. Hard-
- Amplitude, angle, frequency of analog ware failures are immediately signalled by an
channels alarm contact. In particular, the external and
- Functional measurands internal auxiliary supplies are continuously
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 9
supervised. The correct function and toler- The evaluation programs REVAL and
ance of the A/D converter are tested by cyc- E_wineve (Windows NT/Windows 2000) are
lically converting two reference voltages. available for viewing and evaluating the dis-
Special algorithms regularly check the pro- turbances stored by the disturbance recorder.
cessors memories (background functions). Where the disturbance data are transferred via
A watchdog supervises the execution of the the communications system to the distur-
programs. bance recorder evaluation station, the file
transfer program WinCom (Windows NT/
An important advantage of the extensive self- Windows 2000) is also used.
diagnosis and supervision functions is that
periodic routine maintenance and testing are The program XSCON is available for conver-
reduced. sion of the RE.316*4 disturbance recorder
data to ABBs test set XS92b format. This
Supporting software offers reproduction of electrical quantities
The operator program facilitates configura- recorded during a fault.
tion and setting of the protection, listing pa-
rameters, reading events and listing the vari-
ous internal diagnostic data.
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 10

continuous 4 x IN
for 10 s 30 x IN
for 1 s 100 x IN
continuous 2.2 x UN
Burden per phase
current inputs
at IN = 1 A <0.1 VA
at IN = 5 A <0.3 VA
voltage inputs
at UN <0.25 VA

Tripping relays
2 N/O contacts each
1.5 mm2 terminals
at U <50 V DC 1.5 A
at U <120 V DC 0.3 A
at U <250 V DC 0.1 A
at U <50 V DC 5A
at U <120 V DC 1A
at U <250 V DC 0.3 A
Signalling contacts
No. of contacts 6, 10 or 8 acc. to I/O unit (316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63),
Each interface unit equipped with 1 C/O contact and all
others N/O contacts
at U <50 V DC 0.5 A
at U <120 V DC 0.1 A
at U <250 V DC 0.04 A
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 11

(316DB61, 316DB62 or 316DB63)
Input voltage 18 to 36 V DC / 36 to 75 V DC / 82 to 312 V DC / 175 to 312 V DC
Operating time 1 ms

Colours 1 green (standby)
1 red (trip)

modem.

PCC interface
PCC (optional)
(interbay and process bus can be used
concurrently)
MVB bus PCC with redundant fibre-optical port, ST connectors
Event memory
Capacity 256 events
Engineering interface integrated software interface for signal engineering with
SigTOOL
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 12

Voltage ranges 36 to 312 V DC
Fuse rating 4 A
during a fault
MVB interface 2.5 W

Temperature range
storage -40 C to +85 C IEC 60255-6 (1988)
IEC 60255-5 (2000)
EN 60950 (1995)
IEC 60255-5 (2000) *
1 MHz burst disturbance test 1.0/2.5 kV, Cl. 3; 1 MHz, IEC 60255-22-1 (1988),
(1989)
IEC 61000-4-4 (1995)
(ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 (2001)
cies
(RFI) 10 V, Cl. 3 EN 61000-4-6 (1996),
10 V/m, Cl. 3 IEC 61000-4-3 (1996),
10 V/m, Cl. 3
Emission Cl. A EN 61000-6-2 (2001),
EN 55011 (1998),
CISPR 11 (1990)
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 13

Weight
width N2: 271 mm.
Enclosure IP 50 (IP 20 if MVB PCC interface are used)
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 14
Technical data Table 10: Thermal overload function (49)

Functions Thermal image for the 1st. order model.
Settings:

May also be used as restricted earth fault relay with additional external hardware (high-resistance and
VDR in parallel). Special metering transformer.
Settings:
Reset ratio
reset ratio 0.8

Settings:
Accuracy of the pick-up setting (at fN) +2% or 0.005 UN
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 15

Choice of measuring phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages
Settings:
Phase-angle -180 to +180 in steps of 0.1
See Table 34 for accuracy.

Three-phase measurement of voltages (star or delta) and currents. Measurement of frequency, real and
apparent power and power factor.
Settings:
Reference value for power 0.2 to 5 SN in steps of 0.001 SN
t1-Interval 1 min., 2 min., 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 60 min. or
120 min.
Table 15: Transformer differential (87T)

Features:
For two- and three-winding transformers
No auxiliary transformers necessary because of vector group and CT ratio compensation
Inrush restraint using 2nd harmonic
Settings:
g-setting 0.1 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.05 IN
v-setting 0.25 or 0.5
b-setting 1.25 to 5 in steps of 0.25 IN
Max. trip time (protected transformer loaded)
- for I >2 IN 30 ms
- for I 2 IN 50 ms
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 16
Technical data Func- Accuracy of pick-up value 5% IN (at fN)

tions (contd)
Reset conditions I <0.8 g-setting
Differential protection definitions:
I = I1+ I2 + I3
IH = I 1 I 2 cos
for cos 0
0 for cos <0
= arg (I1' - I2')
2-winding: I1' = I1, I2' = I2

3-winding: I1' = MAX (I1, 2, 3) Fig. 4 Differential protection characteristic
I2' = I1 + I2 + I3 - I1'
Table 16: Instantaneous overcurrent (50)

Features:
Settings:

very inverse c=1
Settings:
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 17

Reset ratio >94 %

Settings:
Reset ratio >94%
(at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) 5

Settings:
very inverse c=1
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 18
Technical data Func- Memory duration 0.2 s to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s

tions (contd)
Reset ratio >94%
(at 0.94 to 1.06 fN) 5
Standard 142 E 10

very inverse c=1
Settings:
Reset ratio >94%
Table 21: Instantaneous overvoltage protection function (59, 27) with peak value
evaluation
Features:
evaluation of instantaneous values, therefore extremely fast and frequency-independent on a wide scale
storing of the highest instantaneous value after start
no suppression of DC components
no suppression of harmonics
1- or 3phase
maximum value detection for multi-phase functions
variable lower limiting frequency fmin
Settings:
Accuracy of pick-up value (at 0.08 to 1.1 fN) 3% or 0.005 UN
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 19

Features:
Settings:
Accuracy of pick-up value 30 mHz at UN and fN
Reset ratio 100%

Features:
combined pick-up with frequency criterion possible
blocking by undervoltage
Settings:
Table 24: Overexcitation (24)

Features:
U/f measurement
Settings:
Pick-up value 0.2 to 2 UN/fN in steps of 0.01 UN/fN
Accuracy (at fN) 3% or 0.01 UN/fN
Reset ratio >98% (max.), <102% (min.)
Starting time 120 ms
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 20
Technical data Func- Table 25: Overexcitation function with inverse time delay (24)
Inverse time delay according to IEEE Guide C37.91-1985
Setting made by help of table settings
Settings:
Table settings U/f values: (1.05; 1.10 to 1.50) UN/fN
Start value U/f 1.05 to 1.20 UN/fN in steps of 0.01 UN/fN
tmin 0.01 to 2 min in steps of 0.01 min
tmax 5 to 100 min in steps of 0.1 min
Reset time 0.2 to 100 min in steps of 0.01 min
Reference voltage 0.8 to 1.2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
Accuracy of pick-up value 3% UN/fN (at fN)
Reset ratio 100%

Protection function based on real or apparent power measurement
Over and underpower
Settings:
Reset ratio 30 % to 170 % in steps of 1 % of power pick-up
Max. operating time without intentional 70 ms
delay
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 21

Features
remote trip).
Settings
Delay t2 (backup trip) 0.02 to 60 s in steps of 0.01 s
40 IN) current setting 1.2 IN)
current setting 0.4 IN)
Table 28: Distance protection (21)

All values of settings referred to the secondaries, every zone can be set independently of the others,
4 independent files for sets of settings.
Impedance measurement -300 to 300 /ph in steps of 0.01 /ph (IN = 1 A or 2 A)
-30 to 30 /ph in steps of 0.001 /ph (IN = 5 A)
Zero-sequence current compensation 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01,
Mutual impedance for parallel circuit lines 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01,
Time step setting range 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01 s
Underimpedance starters -999 to 999 /ph in steps of 0.1 /ph (IN = 1 A or 2 A)
-99.9 to 99.9 /ph in steps of 0.01 /ph (IN = 5 A)
Overcurrent starters 0.5 to 10 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Min. operating current 0.1 to 2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Back-up overcurrent 0 to 10 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Neutral current criterion 0.1 to 2 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
Neutral voltage criterion 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
Low-voltage criterion for detecting, for exam- 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
ple, a weak infeed
VT supervision
NPS/neutral voltage criterion 0.01 to 0.5 UN in steps of 0.01 UN
NPS/neutral current criterion 0.01 to 0.5 IN in steps of 0.01 IN
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 22
Technical data Func- Accuracy (applicable for current time con-

tions (contd) stants between 40 and 150 ms)
amplitude error 5% for U/UN >0.1
phase error 2 for U/UN >0.1
Supplementary error for
- frequency fluctuations of 10% 5%
- 10% third harmonic 10%
- 10% fifth harmonic 10%
Minimum operating time (incl. tripping relay): 21 ms
Typical operating time (incl. tripping relay):
Basic distance protection function 30 ms
With ancillary functions activated +8 ms
Typical reset time 45 ms

Available recording time for 9 CT/VT and 8 binary signals approximately 5 s
Data format EVE
Resolution 12 bits
Settings:
Recording periods
Ancillary functions
Table 30: Logic
1. OR gate
2. AND gate

Settings:
Integration yes/no
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 23

Determination of the sum and phase sequence of the 3 phase currents or voltages
applied to an input
Reset ratio >90% whole range
>95% (at U >0.1 UN or I >0.1 IN)
Amplitude compensation for summation VT -2.00 to +2.00 in steps of 0.01

Settings
pensation
f = fN
f = fN
0.2 to 1.2 UN
0.2 to 1.2 IN
f = fN
0.8 to 1,2 UN
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 24
Wiring diagram
CURRENT
AND VOLTAGE
INPUTS
(ACC. TO K-CODE) SIGNALLING
COMMUNICATION
PORT
(LOCAL HMI) (PC))
SERIAL COMMUNI-
CATION WITH SUB-
STATION CONTROL
EARTHING SCREW
ON CASING
TRIP
OPTOCOUPLER
INPUTS
DC SUPPLY
Fig. 5 Typical wiring diagram of RET316*4 in size N1 casing with two input/output units 316DB62
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 25

Quantity
Ordering number
(basic version ordering number + stand-alone unit ordering number,
or only stand alone ordering number)
ADE code + key

Stand-alone units RET316*4 with built-in HMI (see table below) HESG448750M0002
Table 35: RET316*4 basic versions

Code
OCDT Inv Dir

OCDT(REF)
OCDT Dir
Basic-SW
Diff(2w)
Diff(3w)
U/f(inv)
OCInst
VTInst
OCInv
Power
OCDT
VTDT
Freq
df/dt
TH
<Z
A*B0C*D0U0K21E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST210 T*** X X X
A*B*C*D0U*K24E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y*N*M*ST220 T*** X X X X X X X X X
A*B0C*D0U0K21E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST220 T*** X X X X X
A*B*C*D0U*K24E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST230 T*** X X X X X X X X X X
HESG448750M0002
A*B0C*D0U0K21E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST230 T*** X X X X X X

A*B0C*D*U0K22E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST310 T*** X X X
Order No.
A*B0C*D*U0K22E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST320 T*** X X X X X

A*B0C*D*U0K22E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST330 T*** X X X X X X
A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST410 T*** X X X X X X
A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST420 T*** X X X X X X X X X X
A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST430 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X
A*B0C*D0U*K23E*I*F*J* Q*V*R*W*Y* N*M*ST440 T*** X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Legend
* required sub-codes in Table 36
<Z distance
Diff(2W) two-winding transformer differential protection
Diff(3W) three-winding transformer differential protection
TH thermal overload
Freq frequency function (min, max)
df/dt rate-of-change of frequency
U/f(inv) overexcitation protection with inverse time delay
OCInv inverse time overcurrent protection
OCDT(REF) definite time overcurrent function for high-impedance differential protection
OCInst overcurrent protection with peak value evaluation
OCDT Dir directional definite time overcurrent protection
OCDT Inv Dir directional inverse time overcurrent protection
VTinst instantaneous overvoltage function with peak value evaluation
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 26
Ordering (contd) Basic-SW basic software including the following functions:

Ucheck voltage plausibility (only if 3-phase voltage available)
UlfPQ metering (only if at least 1 voltage available)
Count counter
Logic logic interconnection
FUPLA project-specific control logic
IoInv inverse time ground fault overcurrent
All the functions of the basic version can be applied in any combination providing the maximum capacity of
the processor and the number of analog channels is not exceeded
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 27

A1 1A
A2 2A
A5 5A
B1 1A
B2 2A
B5 5A
C1 1A
C2 2A
C5 5A
D1 1A
D2 2A
D5 5A
U1 100 V AC
U2 200 V AC
K- K21 3 CTs (3ph Code A-) CT = current transformer see previous table
3 CTs (3ph Code C-) VT = voltage transformer
MT = metering transformer
3 CTs (3ph Code C-)
3 CTs (3ph Code D-)
3 CTs (3ph Code C-)
3 CTs (3ph Code C-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
1 MT (1ph Code B-)
1 VT (1ph Code U-)
2 command relays
8 LEDs
2 command relays
8 LEDs
8 LEDs
I5 18 to 36 V DC
I9 175 to 312 V DC
F- F0 none
2 command relays
8 LEDs
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 28
Ordering (contd) F2 4 optocoupler 2. binary input/output unit

2 command relays
8 LEDs
8 LEDs
J- J0 none
J3 82 to 312 V DC 2. binary input/output unit state
J5 18 to 36 V DC
J9 175 to 312 V DC
Q- Q0 none
2 command relays
2 command relays
V- V0 none
V3 82 to 312 V DC 3. binary input/output unit state
V5 18 to 36 V DC
V9 175 to 312 V DC
R- R0 none
2 command relays
2 command relays
W- W0 none
W5 18 to 36 V DC
W9 175 to 312 V DC
Y- Y0 no comm. protocol
Y1 SPA
Y2 IEC 60870-5-103
Y3 LON
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 29
S- ST000 basic versions RET316*4 Protection function versions see previous table
to
SU990
to logic
T999x
1)
MVB interface (for interbay or process bus) not applicable for surface-mounted version
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 30
Ordering (contd)

Assembly kits
with:
1 RET316*4 (size 1 casing) HESG324310P1
2 RET316*4 (size 1 casing) HESG324310P2
1 RET316*4 (size 2 casing HESG324351P1
RET316*4 size 1 surface mounting kit HESG448532R0001
RET316*4 size 2 surface mounting kit HESG448532R0002
PCC card interface
For interbay bus:
For process bus:
500PCC02 MVB ST (bajonet) G/G 62.5/125 HESG 448735R0232


CAP2/316* Installation CD German/English 1MRB260030M0001
Type Order No.
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 31
Dimensioned
Rear view
219 1
254 1
Panel cutout


1MRK504007-Ben
Page 32
Dimensioned draw-
ings (contd) Mounting element
Rear view
Panel cutout

2
cross section = 4 mm

1MRK504007-Ben
Page 33
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 34
Dimensioned draw-
ings (contd)
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 35
Example of an Rated current 1 A, rated voltage 100 V AC 1 PC card LON

order 3 phase voltages, 6 phase currents 1 CD RE.216 / RE316*4
1MRB260030M0001
110 V DC aux. supply
4 heavy duty relays (3 tripping, 1 CB clos-
ing 20 signalling relays
8 opto-coupler inputs (110 V DC) Alternatively, the relay ID code may be given
1 relay for 19" rack mounting instead. In this case the order would be:
Communication with the station control 1 RET316*4, A1B0C1D0U1K23E2I3F

system (e.g. LON) 2J3Q0V0R0W0Y1N1M1ST410T0
Operator program in English on CD 1 mounting kit HESG324310P1
1 CD RE.216 / RE316*4
The corresponding order is as follows: 1MRB260030M0001
1 RET316*4, HESG448750M0002 1 PC card HESG448614R1
110 V DC aux. supply 1 PC connecting cable (if not already
Opto-coupler input voltage 110 V DC
Rated current 1 A Relay ID codes are marked on all relays. The
Rated voltage 100 V DC significance of the sub-codes can be seen
from Table 36.
Sample Numerical transformer protection with exten- Different types of protection functions shall
specification sive self-monitoring and analog/digital con- be implemented by adding software only.
version of all input quantities.
The power source shall be either a dc or ac
It shall be suitable for the protection of two- supply voltage for the standard voltage
or three-winding transformers, autotrans- ranges. The design shall enable all types of
formers, reactors and block-generator trans- mounting.
former units.
Communication with the relay shall be per-
No interposing current transformers for formed using a menu-driven user interface
matching transformer group and main CTs program. This communication shall be per-
ratio shall be required. formed locally via personal computer.
Total immunity to magnetizing inrush current The relay shall be designed such that the nec-
due to 2nd harmonic blocking with possibil- cessary hardware for fault recording or cou-
ity of indicating this shall be provided. High- pling to a station control system can be instal-
set overcurrent function in differential circuit led at any time.
(2nd harmonic independent) shall be avail-
able. A high flexibility of input and output signal
allocation shall be provided. Event recording
The protection shall be stable in the case of and disturbance recording shall be included.
high through-faults.
1MRK504007-Ben
Page 36
References Operating Instructions (printed) 1MRB520051-Uen

Operating Instructions (CD) 1MRB260030M0001
Reference List RET316/RET316*4 1MRB520211-Ren
Data Sheet CAP316 1MRB520167-Ben
Data Sheet Test Set XS92b 1MRB520006-Ben
Data Sheet SigTOOL 1MRB520158-Ben
Data Sheet RIO580 1MRB520176-Ben
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Tel. +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77

CH-ES 45-12.30 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

04-11-24
DEMANDS ON MEASURING TRANSFORMERS FOR Version 3.10

REL316 and REL316*4 and higher
Introduction
The operation of any distance protection is influenced by distortion in the
measuring quantities. The current to the protection will be heavily distorted when
the current transformer is saturated. In most cases it is not possible to avoid
current transformer saturation for all fault conditions, therefore measures are taken
in the distance protections to allow for current transformer saturation with
maintained proper operation. REL316 / REL316*4 can allow for relatively heavy
current transformer saturation but not an unlimited one.
Requirements on current transformers
Choice of current transformers

The current transformer should be of the type TPS, TPX or TPY with accuracy
according IEC 44-6 or better. The use of the linearized current transformer type
TPZ results only in a turn (anti clock wise) of the relay characteristic of some
degrees.
The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to the
protection is larger than the minimum operating value for all faults that shall be
detected. Minimum operating current for the distance protection in REL316 /
REL316*4 is 10 % of nominal current.
Conditions for the CT requirements

The requirements for REL316 / REL316*4 are a result of investigations performed
in our network simulation program. The tests have been performed with a digital
current transformer model.
The setting of the current transformer model was representative for current trans-
formers type TPX and TPY.
The performance of the distance protection was checked for both symmetrical and
fully asymmetrical fault currents. A source with a time constant from 40 up to 120
milliseconds was used at the tests. The current requirements below are thus
applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
Both phase to ground, phase to phase and three phase faults were tested.
Released: Department: Rev.: C
UTAST
1/4
CH-ES 45-12.30 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The protection was checked with regard to directionality, security to trip and
overreach. All testing was made with and without remanence flux in the current
transformer core. It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional
margins for remanence flux. It depends on the demands of reliability and economy.
When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additional margin is
needed due to the anti remanence air gap. For current transformer of Type TPX,
the small probability of a fully asymmetrical fault together with maximum
remanence flux in the same direction as the flux generated by the fault has to be
kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault
current will be achieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations
have proved that 95% of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is
between 40 and 90.
Fault current
The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for
faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three phase faults
or single phase to ground faults. The current for a single phase to ground fault will
exceed the current for a three phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in
the total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance.
When calculating the current transformer requirements, the maximum fault current
should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered.
Cable resistance and additional load

The current transformer saturation is directly affected by the voltage at the current
transformer secondary terminals. This voltage, for a ground fault, is developed in a
loop containing the phase and neutral conductor and additional load in this loop.
For three phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only the phase conductor and
additional phase load have to be considered.
In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase to ground faults and
the phase resistance for three phase faults.
REL316 / REL316*4 current transformer requirements

The current transformer secondary limiting emf (E2max) should meet the two
requirements below. The requirements assume 20 to 120 ms maximum dc time
constant for the network and 100 % DC offset.
2/4
CH-ES 45-12.30 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1. Faults close to the relay location

Ik max Isn 0 .2
E 2 max > a R CT + RL + 2
Ipn Ir

Ikmax : maximum primary fundamental frequency component

for forward and reverse fault
Ipn : primary nominal ct current
Isn : secondary nominal ct current
Ir : REL316 / REL316*4 rated current
RCT : ct secondary winding resistance
RL : ct secondary cable resistance and additional load
a : the factor is a function of the frequency and the time constant for the
dc component in the fault current
for forward or reverse faults according to the
diagram in Figure 1 below.
bw : backward resp. reverse
fw : forward
4 50 Hz bw
60 Hz bw
a3
50 Hz fw
2 60 Hz fw
1
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
DC Time Constant ms
Figure 1: Factor a as a function of the frequency and the time constant

Values valid for memory direction mode = block
3/4
CH-ES 45-12.30 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd
2. Faults at zone 1 reach

Ikzone1 Isn 0. 2
Emax > k R CT + RL + 2
Ipn Ir

Ikzone1 : maximum primary fundamental frequency current

component for a fault at zone 1 reach
Ipn : primary nominal ct current
Isn : secondary nominal ct current
Ir : REL316 / REL316*4 rated current
RCT : ct secondary winding resistance
RL : ct secondary cable resistance and additional load
k= the factor is a function of the frequency and the time constant for the
dc component in the fault current
for faults at the set reach of zone 1, according to the
diagram in Figure 2 below. The time constant is normally
less than 50 ms.
14
12
10
8
50 Hz
k
6 60 Hz
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
DC Time Constant ms
Figure 2: Factor k as a function of the frequency and the time constant
4/4
REL316*4: Line differential protection, for applications
without transformer in the protected zone.
Setting instructions and requirements to current transformers. ESP 9.201E
The recommendations below are the result of extensive measurements on

our transient network simulator and take into account the requirement of
stability and tripping time of the protection.
1. Definitions
As reference current for all recommendations below, a current Ibase has to be
defined.
Ibase is chosen to be equal or greater than the maximal load current of the line,
normally Ibase is made equal to the rated CT primary current.
The settings g, b and I-Inst are per unit values referred to Ibase.
2. Settings
2.1. Choice of current input

To simplify the setting of a1, a2, s1 and s2, reversing the selection of the
channels on master and slave is recommended irrespective of whether the
protected unit includes a power transformer or not.
This procedure enables a1 and a2 as well as s1 and s2 to have identical
settings in both master and slave.
Settings:
Master: Current Inp. Ch. 1 to channel No.1
Slave: Current Inp. Ch. 1 to channel No.7
2.2. a1 and a2- settings (CT-ratio adaptation)

Range 0.05 ... 2.20, Steps 0.01.
These settings allow adaptation of Ibase, when the rated CT primary current
differs from the maximal load current.
2.2.1. Case 1 CTs in the line feeder with equal CT ratios

Lines in substations with single or multiple bus arrangement and 112 CB
stations with CTs in the line feeder.
The CT ratio is matched to the maximal load current, i.e. rated CT primary
current = max. Iload
a1 = 1; a2 = 1
2.2.2. Case 2 CTs in the line feeder with unequal CT ratios

Lines in substations with single or multiple bus arrangement and 112 CB
stations with CTs in the line feeder. CTs of unequal ratio at the two line ends.
Adaptation to the lower rated CT primary current:
a = ICT / Ibase
ABB Switzerland Ltd Page 1 13. October 2004

Master Slave Slave Master
1000/1 A 800/5 A 1000/1 A 800/5 A

a1 = 1000/800 = 1.25 a1= 1.25 a1 = 1 a1 = 1
a2 = 1 a2 = 1 a2 = 1000/800 = 1.25 a2 = 1.25
Ibase = 800 A Ibase = 800 A
2.2.3. Case 3 CTs in the diameter

Lines in substations with 112 - or 2 - CB arrangement. 2 CTs of a diameter
connected in parallel, high CT-ratio.
The CT ratio of the current transformers located in the diameter of 112 CB
stations are usually matched to the through current from one bus to the other
and not to the rated line current.
a = ICT / Ibase
2.3. s- setting (Connection/Vector group correction)

For a line alone, no phase group compensation necessary and the following
is selected:
s1=D, s2=d0
With this setting the zero sequence component of the currents is included in
the measurement, and the best sensitivity and correct phase selection is
achieved.
No other s- setting shall be selected, unless there is a transformer in the
protected zone.
2.4. v- setting (bias at small currents, below Ibase b)

0.25 or 0.50
v= 0.50 is chosen as a standard setting
2.5. Minimum operating current

Two ranges can be set: g and g-High
2.5.1. g- setting (lower range)

Range 0.1 ... 0.5, Step 0.1
Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always FALSE
The g setting defines the minimum operating current.

The protection will pick up for a fault current of > Ibase g.
In most line protection applications the range 0.1 ... 0.5 is too low.
Settings as given in Section 2.5.2. are preferred

2.5.2. g-High setting (upper range)

Range 0.50 ... 2.5, Step 0.25
Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always TRUE
With this setting the g-setting is not active any more, the g-High setting
determines the pick-up current.
The protection will pick up at a fault current of > Ibase g-High.
2.5.3. Minimum allowed setting
capacitive ch arg ing current of the protected Line

g or g High 2.5
Ibase
This setting ensures full stability in an effectively grounded network. In non-

effectively grounded networks apply a factor 3.0 instead of 2.5.
With this setting transient capacitive inrush currents will not endanger the
stability.
It may be an advantage to set g-High b, thereby minimising the

requirements imposed on the CTs. See examples in Section 3.
The pick-up current shall be set lower than the minimum fault current and
shall allow for sufficient ground-fault resistance.
Justification of factors 2.5 and 3.0 (used above)
The capacitive charging currents are measured by the protection as

differential currents. The minimum operating current therefore has to be set
higher then the maximum capacitive charging current occurring for a fault
outside the line.
Since the measurement is made on a per phase basis, the capacitive current
to be taken into account is the highest possible charging current per phase.
This current arises in the healthy phases during a single phase-ground fault
(voltage rises). The 'capacitive charging current of the protected line' is the
phase-current measured at single ended infeed, i.e. current measured with
the circuit open at the remote end.
f = 2.5 = f1 f2' f3 In solidly grounded systems

f = 3.0 = f1 f2" f3 In systems with isolated neutral or Petersen coil
compensation (non-effectively ground networks)
f1 = 1.2 Max. system voltage
f2' = 0.8 3 Max. phase to ground voltage in solidly grounded
systems (Z0 / Z1 < 4)
f2" = 3 Max. phase to ground voltage in non-effectively
grounded systems (4 < Z0 / Z1 < )
f3 = 1.5 Safety factor
The pick-up current 'g-High' may be used in most applications and may be set
relatively high, since the operating current is referred to the actual short circuit
current flowing through the fault (= differential current) rather than to the
individual infeed currents.

A fast supervision logic blocks the differential function in the case of a

communication failure in the fibre optic link, no second release criterion is
therefore required. For this reason the differential protection trips both ends of
the line and is not dependent on the individual infeed currents nor faces a
problem in case of weak infeed from one end.
Max. fault resistance
The max. ground fault resistance, which can be detected is approximately

(source impedances neglected):
Urated
RF =
3 Ibase g high
2.6. Inrush restraint

Parameter 'InrushInp' = Always TRUE
This setting allows optimal stability also in case of heavy through flowing
transformer inrush currents with long DC time constants.
2.7. Pick-up value for the directional comparison feature (v = )
2.7.1. b- setting
Switching over to v = , the 2nd harmonic inrush restraint remains active
Range 1.25 ... 2.50, Steps 0.25
(b Ibase) has to be set above ILoad_max.
Recommended setting: b = 1.5.
2.7.2. I-Inst setting

v = , the 2nd harmonic inrush restraint is not active above this current level.
Range 5 ... 15, Steps 1.0 for SW-Versions < V4.0

Range 3 ... 15, Steps 1.0 for SW-Versions V4.0
I-Inst = 3 is chosen as a standard setting
I-Inst = 5 is recommended for a line with single end infeed, feeding a

transformer with high MVA rating.
With this setting the protection tolerates high inrush currents flowing over the
line. Such currents might produce unequal saturation phenomena in the CTs
at the two line ends. The peak value of the inrush current may reach up to
15 Ibase.

3. Current transformers requirements:

The requirement depend on the a, g- and b- setting.
3.1. g-High setting b setting
3.1.1. For through faults (faults on opposite bus): n1' > 20
3.1.2. For faults on the line: n2' > I-Inst 10 / a
A symmetrical current with 10 times the amplitude of (Ibase I-Inst) shall not
produce any saturation phenomena.
In the case where this requirement cannot be met, the tripping time might
increase.
The effective accuracy limiting factor n' shall fulfill 2 conditions:

n' > n2' and n' > 20
3.2. g- or g-High setting < b setting
3.2.1. For through faults (faults on opposite bus): n1' > X/R b / a
Taking the effects of DC offset in consideration, no saturation shall occur up
to a current value of (Ibase b).
3.2.2. For faults on the line: n2' > I-Inst 10 / a

A symmetrical current with 10 times the amplitude of (Ibase I-Inst) shall not
produce any saturation phenomena.
In the case where this requirement cannot be met, the tripping time might
increase.
The effective accuracy limiting factor n' shall fulfil 3 conditions:

n' > n1', n' > n2' and n' > 20
The effective accuracy limiting factor is calculated as follows:

Pn + Pw Vk
n' = n or n' =
P + Pw Ins [Rw + 2 RL + RB]
where:
n rated accuracy limiting factor (ALF) E.g. 20 for 5P20

Pn rated VA's VA E.g. 30
Pw secondary winding losses in VA at rated current
P effective burden = (2 RL + RB) Ins2
n' effective ALF (at effectively connected burden) or
Kssc according IEC 44-6
Vk Knee point voltage

Ins Rated secondary current
RL Resistance of secondary leads (single length)
RB Total resistance of effective burden
Rw Resistance of CT secondary winding.

Example 1 (g = b)
Ipssc = 25 kA for close-in faults on the line
CT 500/1 A 20 VA, 5P20, Rw = 4
Burden = 2 RL+RB = 1 = 1 VA
a1=a2 = 1
g-High = 1.5 Parameter 'HighSetInp' = Always
TRUE
b= 1.5
I-Inst = 4
n' = 20 (20 + 4 ) / (1 + 4 ) = 96
n1' required = 20
n2' required = 4 / 1 10 = 40
This CT is suitable.
Example 2 (g < b)
Tp = 100 ms X / R = 31
Primary system DC time constant at min. generation
CT 500/1A 20 VA, 5P20, Rw = 4
Burden = 2 RL+RB = 1
a1=a2 = 1
TRUE
b= 1.5
I-Inst = 4
n' = 20 (20 + 4 ) / (1 + 4 ) = 96
n1' required = 31 1.5 / 1 = 46
n2' required = 4 / 1 10 = 40
Example 3 (Generator line in 112 CB substation)
Tp = 180 ms X/R = 57
Primary system DC time constant at min. generation
(contribution of power plant)
Load current = 600 A
CT 1200/1A 20VA, 5P20, R2 = 8
Burden = 2 1
a1=a2 = 2
TRUE
b= 1.5
I-Inst = 10
n' = 20 (20+8 ) / (1+8 ) = 62
n1' required = 57 1.5 / 2 = 42
n2' required = 10 / 2 10 = 50

If a check shows, that the following effective ALF factors are met, a more
detailed check is not required for normal applications.
n' = 75 for applications in HV and EHV networks
n' = 50 for applications in sub transmission and distribution networks.

CH-ES 30-32.10 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

24.11.2004
DEMANDS ON MEASURING TRANSFORMERS FOR RET316 / RET316*4 Version 3.10

and higher
Introduction
The operation of any transformer protection is influenced by distortion in the
measuring quantities. The current to the protection will be heavily distorted when
the current transformer is saturated.In most cases it is not possible to avoid
in the transformer protections to allow for current transformer saturation with
maintained proper operation. RET316 / RET316*4 can allow for heavy current
transformer saturation but not an unlimited one.

The current transformer should be to type TPS,TPX or TPY with accuracy class
5P20 or better. The use of the linearized current transformer type TPZ leads only
to a small phase angle shift and they can be used without problems, if the same
type is on both sides of the transformer. Possibly ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Auto-
mation can be contacted for confirmation that the actual type can be used.
The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to the protec-
tion is larger than the minimum operating value for all faults that shall be detected.
Minimum operating current for the transformer protection in RET316 / RET316*4 is
10 % of nominal current.

The requirements for RET316 / RET316*4 are a result of investigations performed
in our network simulation program. The tests have been performed with a digital
current transformer model.
The performance of the transformer protection was checked for internal and ex-
ternal both symmetrical and fully asymmetrical fault currents. A source with a time
constant from 40 up to 300 milliseconds was used at the tests. The current require-
ments below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault
currents.
Both phase to ground, and three phase faults were tested.
Released: Department: Rev.: E
UTAST
1/3
CH-ES 30-32.10 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The protection was checked with regard to security to block. All testing was made
with and without remanence flux in the current transformer core. It is difficult to
give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence flux. It
depends on the demands of reliability and economy.
When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additional margin
is needed due to the anti remanence air gap. For current transformer of Type TPX,
kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault
current will be achieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations
have proved that 95 % of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is
between 40 and 90.
Fault current

For three phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only the phase conductor and
additional phase load have to be considered.
In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase to ground faults
and the phase resistance for three phase faults.
RET316 / RET316*4 current transformer requirements

The current transformer effective overcurrent factor should meet the two
requirement below. The requirement assume 40 to 300 msec maximum dc time
constant for the network.
Pr + PE IN of ct.
1. n' n
PB + PE IN
2/3
CH-ES 30-32.10-E
ABB Switzerland Ltd
n : rated overcurrent factor (ALF = accuracy limit factor)

n' : necessary effective overcurrent factor, as a function of fault current IK,
(at nominal frequency and time constant of the network)
PB : connected burden at rated current
PE : ct losses of secondary windings
Pr : rated ct burden
IN : nominal current related to the protected object
and 2.
the dependence of the curves of Figure 1 and 2, where:
for fault currents 3 * IN the CT's should not saturate
n'
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
IK/IN
with 50% remanence without remanence
Figure 1: Transformer with 2 windings
n'
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
IK/IN
Figure 2: Transformer with 3 windings

3/3
CH-ES 30-32.20 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd

24.11.2004
DEMANDS ON MEASURING TRANSFORMERS FOR GENERATOR- Version 3.01

DIFFERENTIAL-PROTECTION FOR REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 and higher
Introduction
The operation of any generator differential protection is influenced by distortion in
the measuring quantities. The current to the protection will be heavily distorted
when the current transformer is saturated.In most cases it is not possible to avoid
in the generator differential protections to allow for current transformer saturation
with maintained proper operation. REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 can allow for
heavy current transformer saturation but not an unlimited one.
For transformer differential protection see document
CH-ES 30-32.10 E for RET316 / RET316*4.
The current transformer should be to type TPS,TPX or TPY with accuracy class
5P20 or better. The use of the linearized current transformer type TPZ leads only
to a small phase angle shift and they can be used without problems, if the same
type is on both sides of the generator. Possibly ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Auto-
mation can be contacted for confirmation that the actual type can be used.
The current transformer ratio should be selected so, that the current to the
protection is larger than the minimum operating value for all faults that shall be
detected. Minimum operating current for the generator differential protection in
REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 is 10 % of nominal current.
The requirements for REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 are a result of investigations
performed in our network simulation program. The tests have been performed with
a digital current transformer model.
The performance of the generator differential protection was checked for internal
and external both symmetrical and fully asymmetrical fault currents. A source with
a time constant from 40 up to 300 milliseconds was used at the tests. The current
requirements below are thus applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault
currents.
Both phase to ground, and three phase faults were tested.
Released: Department: Rev.: B
UTAST
1/3
CH-ES 30-32.20 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The protection was checked with regard to security to block. All testing was made
with and without remanence flux in the current transformer core. It is difficult to
give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence flux. It de-
pends on the demands of reliability and economy.
When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additional margin
is needed due to the anti remanence air gap. For current transformer of Type TPX,
kept in mind at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault cur-
rent will be achieved when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations
have proved that 95 % of the faults in the network will occur when the voltage is
between 40 and 90.
Fault current
For three phase faults, the neutral current is zero, and only the phase conductor
and additional phase load have to be considered.
In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase to ground faults
and the phase resistance for three phase faults.
REG316 / REG316*4 / REG216 current transformer requirements
The current transformer effective overcurrent factor should meet the two require-
ment below. The requirement assume 40 to 300 msec maximum dc time constant
for the network.
2/3
CH-ES 30-32.20 E
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Pr + PE IN of CT
1. n' n
PB + PE IN
n : rated overcurrent factor (ALF = accuracy limit factor)

n' : necessary effective overcurrent factor, as a function of
fault current IK, (at nominal frequency and time constant of
the network)
PB : connected burden at rated current
PE : ct losses of secondary windings
Pr : rated ct burden
IN : nominal current related to the protected object
and 2.
the dependence of the curves of Figure 1, where:
for fault currents 3 * IN the CT's should not saturate, respectively
the exact boundary is at b*3 (b = setting value of the characteristic).
n'
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 3 4 6 8 10 12 14
IK/ IN
Figure 1: Overcurrent factors
3/3
October 2004
9. INTERBAY BUS (IBB) INTERFACE
9.1. Connection to a station control system ..............................................9-3
9.2. Configuration with the HMI.................................................................9-4

9.2.1. General Parameters...........................................................................9-4
9.2.2. SPA/IEC103 Parameters ...................................................................9-5
9.2.3. IBB MW Parameters ..........................................................................9-6
9.3. Transferring disturbance recorder data via the IBB ...........................9-7
9.4. Synchronization .................................................................................9-9
9.5. SPA bus address format ....................................................................9-9

9.5.1. Masking events ................................................................................9-10
9.6. SPA address list...............................................................................9-11

9.6.1. Channel 0.........................................................................................9-11
9.6.2. Channel 0 event list .........................................................................9-12
9.6.6. Channel 4 analog input ....................................................................9-13
9.6.7. Binary input signals..........................................................................9-13
9.6.8. IBB input signals ..............................................................................9-14
9.6.9. Binary output signals........................................................................9-15
9.6.10. Tripping signals................................................................................9-15
9.6.11. LED signals......................................................................................9-15
9.6.12. IBB output signals ............................................................................9-16
9.6.13. IBB output signal event masks.........................................................9-17
9.6.14. Binary input event masks.................................................................9-19
9.6.15. Hardware ....................................... 35 .............................................9-20
9.6.16. Channel 8 system I/Os................... 34 .............................................9-21
9.6.17. IBB I/O ........................................... 43 .............................................9-23
9.6.18. Current-DT ....................................... 2 .............................................9-24
9.6.19. Current ............................................. 3 .............................................9-25
9.6.20. Diff-Transf ........................................ 4 .............................................9-26
9.6.21. Underimped ..................................... 5 .............................................9-29
9.6.22. MinReactance .................................. 6 .............................................9-30
9.6.23. NPS-DT............................................ 7 .............................................9-31
9.6.24. NPS-Inv.......................................... 11 .............................................9-32
9.6.25. Voltage........................................... 12 .............................................9-33
9.6.26. Current-Inv ..................................... 13 .............................................9-34
9.6.27. OLoad-Stator ................................. 14 .............................................9-35
9.6.28. OLoad-Rotor .................................. 15 .............................................9-36
9.6.29. Power............................................. 18 .............................................9-37
9.6.30. Imax-Umin...................................... 20 .............................................9-38
9.6.31. Delay.............................................. 22 .............................................9-39
9-1
9.6.32. Diff-Gen.......................................... 23 .............................................9-40

9.6.33. Distance ......................................... 24 .............................................9-41
9.6.34. Frequency ...................................... 25 .............................................9-51
9.6.35. Overexcitat..................................... 26 .............................................9-52
9.6.36. Count ............................................. 27 .............................................9-53
9.6.37. Check-I3ph..................................... 29 .............................................9-55
9.6.38. Check-U3ph ................................... 30 .............................................9-56
9.6.39. Logic .............................................. 31 .............................................9-57
9.6.40. Disturbance Rec ............................ 32 .............................................9-58
9.6.41. Voltage-Inst.................................... 36 .............................................9-61
9.6.42. Autoreclosure................................. 38 .............................................9-62
9.6.43. EarthFaultIsol................................. 40 .............................................9-66
9.6.44. Voltage-Bal .................................... 41 .............................................9-67
9.6.45. U/f-Inv ............................................ 47 .............................................9-68
9.6.46. Measurands ................................... 48 .............................................9-70
9.6.47. SynchroCheck................................ 49 .............................................9-71
9.6.48. Rotor-EFP ...................................... 51 .............................................9-74
9.6.49. Stator-EFP ..................................... 52 .............................................9-76
9.6.50. I0-Invers ......................................... 53 .............................................9-78
9.6.51. Pole-Slip......................................... 55 .............................................9-79
9.6.52. Diff-Line.......................................... 56 .............................................9-81
9.6.53. RemoteBin ..................................... 57 .............................................9-84
9.6.54. EarthFltGnd2.................................. 58 .............................................9-85
9.6.55. FUPLA ........................................... 59 .............................................9-87
9.6.56. FlutterRecog .................................. 60 .............................................9-88
9.6.57. HV distance.................................... 63 .............................................9-89
9.6.58. LDU events .................................... 67 .............................................9-99
9.6.59. Debounce....................................... 68 ...........................................9-100
9.6.60. df/dt ................................................ 69 ...........................................9-101
9.6.61. DirCurrentDT.................................. 70 ...........................................9-102
9.6.62. DirCurrentInv.................................. 71 ...........................................9-104
9.6.63. BreakerFailure ............................... 72 ...........................................9-106
9.6.64. MeasureModule ............................. 74 ...........................................9-109
9-2
9. INTERBAY BUS (IBB) INTERFACE

9.1. Connection to a station control system
An electrical-to-optical converter Type 316BM61b is plugged onto the
rear of the protection to convert the electrical RS232 signals from the
316VC61a or 316VC61b into optical signals.
Fig. 9.1 Electrical-to-optical converter Type 316BM61b

RS232 interface:
Pin 2: Rx
Pin 3: Tx
Pin 4: +12 V
Pin 5: 0V
Pin 9: -12 V
9-3
Optical cable connections:

Optical fiber cables with bayonet connectors (ST) are used for the
SPA bus (62.5 m fibers for 316BM61b).
Screw connectors (SMA plugs) are used instead of the bayonet
connectors for the IEC60870-5-103 bus.
9.2. Configuration with the HMI

The settings for the IBB/RIO are made via the following HMI menus:
Configuration / IBB/PB Configuration /
SPA/IEC870-5-103/LON/MVB/PB
The sub-menus for the IBB / PB are shown in the Fig. 9.1
Fig. 9.2 Opening the 'IBB configuration' window
NOTICE:
The settings for

the LON interbay bus are to be found in the publication
1MRB520225-Uen,
for the MVB interbay bus in 1MRB520270-Uen,
for the IEC60870-5-103 Interbaybus in 1MRB520226-Uen to
1MRB520229-Uen
for the MVB process bus in 1MRB520192-Uen.
9.2.1. General Parameters
Slave/NodeAddr
Range 2- 255. Must be set to the correct SPA bus address.
IBB Runs on CPU

This parameter has no influence for the RE.316*4 versions with the
SPA and IEC60870-5-103 Bus.
RBIO Runs on CPU

This parameter has no influence for the RE.316*4 versions with the
SPA and IEC60870-5-103 Bus.
9-4
TouchScreen/SMS
Setting determines whether the touch screen or an SMS has to be
controlled:
Inactive Connection not in operation (default)
Active Connection in operation
Note that this parameter has no influence for the RE.316*4 versions
with the SPA and IEC60870-5-103 Bus.
The versions for the LON or (either / or) MVB bus has a fully functional
SPA interface in parallel with the LON / MVB interbay bus for
connecting either a touch screen or an SMS. The parameter
'TouchScreen/SMS' should only be set to 'active', when the second
interface is in use, while in this case the response time of the LON or
MVB bus is more.
Read Distr. Data

This parameter defines which IBB can be used for upload of
disturbance recorder data:
Via LON/MVB The disturbance recorder data can be uploaded
via interbay bus (SCS).
Via SPA The disturbance recorder data can be uploaded
via the SPA bus.
Disturbance recorder data can always be read by the HMI regardless
of the setting.
Note that this parameter has no relevance in the versions with the SPA
or IEC60870-5-103 bus protocol (Ordering codes Y1 and Y2).
Timesynchr.
Defines the time for synchronization via the IBB when the summer
time bit is set:
Standard time Only the summer time bit is set and standard
time is used for synchronization (preferred
setting).
Summer time Summer time is used for synchronization in spite
of the fact that the summer time bit is also set.
'Standard time' has to be selected when the summer time bit is not set
(e.g. as in the case of the SPA bus).
9.2.2. SPA/IEC103 Parameters
The parameters must be set as follows:
Baud rate
Default 9600 for SPA bus. Do not change.
9-5
Master mask
Bit mask
The bit masks set for every function via the SPA bus apply for all
binary events. No masks are used for analog events.
Q events off
As above, but all analog events are blocked. This is the default
setting and must always be used when the device is connected to
an SCS.
Event off
All events are masked (not recorded).
This setting is intended for testing and during commissioning when
it is not wanted that events be transmitted to the control room.
Receiving
Indicates that valid SPA telegrams have been received.
Initiating
Indicates that the device is being initialised.
The following parameters determine the access rights of the remote
HMI and can only be configured on the local HMI:
Remote MMI On / Off
Enables or disables the remote HMI.
TestFunctions On/Off
Enables or disables the test function on the remote HMI.
TimeSynchronization On / Off
Enables or disables synchronization by the remote HMI.
Downloading On / Off
Enables or disables the downloading of a 'setfile' from the remote
HMI.
9.2.3. IBB MW Parameters
Upto 32 IBB measurands can be selected on the following source
signals:
The measurand output from a protection function
The measurand output from an SCS
Input measurand values from a distributed analog input / output
module (RIO580)
9-6
9.3. Transferring disturbance recorder data via the IBB

Disturbance recorder data (records) can be read and transferred via
the SPA bus with the aid of the EVECOM program. Further details are
contained in the Operating Instructions for EVECOM.
The disturbance recorder data are available in the EVE format when
transfer is requested. Data transfer is controlled using the SPA BUS
variables V20, M28, M30, M31, V16 and V17 controlled via Channel 0.
V20:
Write: WV20:1 starts the transmission of a telegram.
Read: RV20 returns the number of disturbance recorder
records available.
V17:
Write: WV17:1...5 determines the compression factor, i.e.
1 %...5 %.
Read: RV17 returns the compression factor.
Compression reduces the number of periods that have to be
transferred per channel. Assuming the 12 points of a period deviate by
less than the specified compression factor from the corresponding
points of the preceding period, the points themselves are not
transferred, but simply the number of repeats in relation to the
preceding period. For example, if a record consists of 100 periods all
the same, then only the 12 points of one period and the number of
repeats are transferred. Compression is applied independently for
each individual channel.
M28:
Write: WM28:n selects a disturbance recorder record for
transfer. n has a value between 1 and the number of
records that that can be read using RV20. The
conversion of the record to the EVE format starts and
the first response is NAK. WM28:n has to be repeated
until the response is ACK. (From firmware V4.0.)
Read: RM28 returns the directory information, time stamp and
record number.
1995-05-10 12.34;23.423 RE001.001
9-7
M29:
Write: NAK
Read: returns the number of lines in a record (0...1023). A line
contains 26 Byte of data. 0 is returned if a record has
not been selected (M28).
M30:
Write: WM30:n moves the pointer to the line to be transferred.
The pointer is automatically incremented by one every
time a line is transferred until there are no lines left. The
pointer is set to 1 at the commencement of data transfer
(WM28:n).
Read: RM30 returns the number of the line that was
transferred last.
M31:
Write: NAK
Read: RM31 transfers the line indicated by the pointer.
V16:
Write: WV16:1, WV16:0, deletes the oldest record.
Read: RV16 returns the status of the disturbance recorder.
0: Disturbance recorder not full.
1: Disturbance recorder full.
V20:
Write: WV20:0 terminates data transfer.
9-8
9.4. Synchronization
The internal clock is synchronised either by the station control system
(SCS 100) or a radio clock (DCF77). Synchronization via the IBB takes
priority over synchronization by the HMI.
After the device is switched off and on again, the clock continues at
the time before it was switched off until the next time telegram is
received
9.5. SPA bus address format

The structure of the SPA bus telegram is as follows:
<slave address><operation><channel No.><data type><data/event No.>
The slave address identifies the device.
The default address is 2. The slave address can be changed using the
operator program (HMI). The HMI has to be used to assign an address
to the device as defined in the station control system. The device also
responds to data with the address 900 which is used to synchronise all
the devices in an SPA bus loop simultaneously.
Possible operations are:
Read data from the device (R) and write data in the device (W).
The channel number identifies the active functions.
All channel numbers from 0 to 13 are reserved for system functions.
Channel numbers from 14 to 60 are used for numbering the protection
and control functions configured for the device.
Data type enables the different kinds of data in a device to be
addressed specifically. The following types of data are used:
S settings
I binary or analog inputs
O binary or analog outputs
E single events
V measurements, system variables and event masking
Q measurements stored at the instant of tripping
T time
D date
L event memory
B back-up event memory
Data and event numbers are needed to designate individual items of
data and events in data channels.
9-9
The table below shows the channel number mapping for a typical
configuration:
Function Funct. No. Chan. No. Comment

Current 1 14 First protection function
Voltage 2 15 Second protection function
Delay 3 16 Third protection function
The function numbers in the above table correspond to the HMI

numbers.
The measured variable of the first function (current) in a device with
the slave address 2 is read as follows:
2R14V1
The SPA bus syntax is defined in SPA BUS COMMUNICATION
PROTOCOL V2.x, 34 SPACOM EN1C.
9.5.1. Masking events

Once all those binary inputs, IBB output signals and system and
protection function events which are not to be recorded as events
(masked) have been loaded into the device (e.g. using W14V155),
they have to be copied to the non-volatile memory using the save
command W255V255:1 so that they are not lost should the auxiliary
supply fail.
9-10
9.6. SPA address list

9.6.1. Channel 0
Address Access Text Default Step

V102 R VC type identification 316VC61
V104 R VC software version
V110 R, W Master event mask 1 Q events 0 Bit mask active
masked
2 All events masked
V115 R Time telegram counter
V116 R Date telegram counter
V120 R Restart counter 0
V200 R, W SPA address 2 2...255
V201 R, W Baud rate 9600 4800, 9600, 19200
F R Module Type REC316 REG316, REL316,
RET316
S0 R Number of functions 0 1...60
S1 R Function type number S1...S60
S100 R, W Parameter set switch 1 1...4
T R, W Time
D R, W Date and time
L R Read event
B R Read event again
Date format: YY-MM-DD hh.mm;ss.sss
9-11
9.6.2. Channel 0 event list
Event No. Cause Event mask Enable code

0E1 No error V155 1
0E2 Minor error V155 2
0E4 Major error V155 4
0E8 Fatal error V155 8
0E47 Protection stopped V155 16
0E48 Protection restarted V155 32
0E49 Warm protection start V155 64
0E50 Cold protection start V155 128
0E51 Event buffer overflow V155 256

1E11 AD error V155 1
1E31 Bus failure V155 256
1E41 Supply failure V155 4096

3E1 CPU OK V155 1
3E2 CPU failure V155 2
3E3 CPU RAM failure V155 4
3E4 CPU ROM failure V155 8
3E11 EA62 OK V155 16
3E12 EA62 failure V155 32
3E13 EA62 RAM failure V155 64
3E14 EA62 ROM failure V155 128
3E21 Internal AD OK V155 256
3E22 Internal AD failure V155 512
3E23 Internal AD RAM failure V155 1024
3E24 Internal AD ROM failure V155 2048
9-12
Event No Cause Event mask Enable code

4E21 PC-Card No failure V156 16
4E22 PC-Card Fatal error V156 32
4E23 PC-Card Non-urgent error V156 64
4E24 PC-Card Not ready V156 128
9.6.6. Channel 4 analog input

Channel 4 provides 64 data points which are available either for
analog FUPLA inputs or analog outputs via the distributed input/output
unit 500AXM11. The numerical range is -32768...+32767 (16 Bit
integers).
The data can be entered in decimal or 4-digit hexadecimal format.
The data remains intact in the event of a supply failure.
Real values are converted to integers,
integer = real 100.
Input format: nnn.mm.
FFFFH
Data point number: O1...O64
9.6.7. Binary input signals

The significance of the events, for standard as well as for double
signals, is explained in Section 9.6.14.
Channel Inputs Events Slot

101 I1 - I16 E1 - E32 1
102 I1 - I16 E1 - E32 2
103 I1 - I16 E1 - E32 3
104 I1 - I16 E1 - E32 4
9-13
9.6.8. IBB input signals
Channel Inputs Group No.

121 I1 I32 1 1-32
122 I1 I32 2 33-64
123 I1 I32 3 65-96
124 I1 I32 4 97-128
125 I1 I32 5 129-160
126 I1 I32 6 161-192
71 I1 I32 7 193-224
72 I1 I32 8 225-256
73 I1 I32 9 257-288
74 I1 I32 10 289-320
75 I1 I32 11 321-352
76 I1 I32 12 353-384
77 I1 I32 13 385-416
78 I1 I32 14 417-448
79 I1 I32 15 449-480
80 I1 I32 16 481-512
81 I1 - I32 17 513-544
82 I1 - I32 18 545-576
83 I1 - I32 19 577-608
84 I1 - I32 20 609-640
85 I1 - I32 21 641-672
86 I1 - I32 22 673-704
87 I1 - I32 23 705-736
88 I1 - I32 24 737-768
9-14
9.6.9. Binary output signals
Channel Outputs Events Slot

101 O1 - O16 None 1
102 O1 - O16 None 2
103 O1 - O16 None 3
104 O1 - O16 None 4
9.6.10. Tripping signals
Channel Outputs Events Slot

101 M1 - M16 None 1
102 M1 - M16 None 2
103 M1 - M16 None 3
104 M1 - M16 None 4
9.6.11. LED signals
Channel Outputs Events

120 O1 - O16 None
9-15
9.6.12. IBB output signals
Channel Outputs Group Event No.

121 O1 - O32 1 121E1...E64
122 O1 - O32 2 122E1...E64
123 O1 - O32 3 123E1...E64
124 O1 - O32 4 124E1...E64
125 O1 - O32 5 125E1...E64
126 O1 - O32 6 126E1...E64
71 O1 - O32 7 71E1...E64
72 O1 - O32 8 72E1...E64
73 O1 - O32 9 73E1...E64
74 O1 - O32 10 74E1...E64
75 O1 - O32 11 75E1...E64
76 O1 - O32 12 76E1...E64
77 O1 - O32 13 77E1...E64
78 O1 - O32 14 78E1...E64
79 O1 - O32 15 79E1...E64
80 O1 - O32 16 80E1...E64
81 O1 - O32 17 81E1...E64
82 O1 - O32 18 82E1...E64
83 O1 - O32 19 83E1...E64
84 O1 - O32 20 84E1...E64
85 O1 - O32 21 85E1...E64
86 O1 - O32 22 86E1...E64
87 O1 - O32 23 87E1...E64
88 O1 - O32 24 88E1...E64
9-16
9.6.13. IBB output signal event masks
Output Event Event No. Mask Enable code

O1 On 1 V155 1
Off 2 V155 2
O2 On 3 V155 4
Off 4 V155 8
O3 On 5 V155 16
Off 6 V155 32
O4 On 7 V155 64
Off 8 V155 128
O5 On 9 V155 256
Off 10 V155 512
O6 On 11 V155 1024
Off 12 V155 2048
O7 On 13 V155 4096
Off 14 V155 8192
O8 On 15 V155 16384
Off 16 V155 32768
O9 On 17 V156 1
Off 18 V156 2
O10 On 19 V156 4
Off 20 V156 8
O11 On 21 V156 16
Off 22 V156 32
O12 On 23 V156 64
Off 24 V156 128
O13 On 25 V156 256
Off 26 V156 512
O14 On 27 V156 1024
Off 28 V156 2048
O15 On 29 V156 4096
Off 30 V156 8192
9-17
Output Event Event No. Mask Enable code

O16 On 31 V156 16384
Off 32 V156 32768
O17 On 33 V157 1
Off 34 V157 2
O18 On 35 V157 4
Off 36 V157 8
O19 On 37 V157 16
Off 38 V157 32
O20 On 39 V157 64
Off 40 V157 128
O21 On 41 V157 256
Off 42 V157 512
O22 On 43 V157 1024
Off 44 V157 2048
O23 On 45 V157 4096
Off 46 V157 8192
O24 On 47 V157 16348
Off 48 V157 32768
O25 On 49 V158 1
Off 50 V158 2
O26 On 51 V158 4
Off 52 V158 8
O27 On 53 V158 16
Off 54 V158 32
O28 On 55 V158 64
Off 56 V158 128
O29 On 57 V158 256
Off 58 V158 512
O30 On 59 V158 1024
Off 60 V158 2048
O31 On 61 V158 4096
Off 62 V158 8192
O32 On 63 V158 16348
Off 64 V158 327680
9-18
9.6.14. Binary input event masks
Channel Event Event No. Mask Enable code

I1 On E1 V155 1
Off E2 V155 2
I2 On E3 V155 4
Off E4 V155 8
I3 On E5 V155 16
Off E6 V155 32
I4 On E7 V155 64
Off E8 V155 128
I5 On E9 V155 256
Off E10 V155 512
I6 On E11 V155 1024
Off E12 V155 2048
I7 On E13 V155 4096
Off E14 V155 8192
I8 On E15 V155 16384
Off E16 V155 32768
I9 On E17 V156 1
Off E18 V156 2
I10 On E19 V156 4
Off E20 V156 8
I11 On E21 V156 16
Off E22 V156 32
I12 On E23 V156 64
Off E24 V156 128
I13 On E25 V156 256
Off E26 V156 512
I14 On E27 V156 1024
Off E28 V156 2048
I15 On E29 V156 4096
Off E30 V156 8192
I16 On E31 V156 16384
Off E32 V156 32768
In the case of a double signal the significance of the events changes

as shown in the following example where the inputs 2 and 3 are
configured as double signal.
9-19
Input Event No. Significance Significance at

double signal
I2 E3 on 1-0
E4 off 0-1
I3 E5 on 0-0
E6 off 1-1
9.6.15. Hardware 35
Address Access Text Unit Default Min. Max. Step

1S1 R SWVers SX... <Select> X 1 25 1
A 1
B 2
C 3

9-20
9.6.16. Channel 8 system I/Os 34


8S1 R LEDSigMode <Select> AccumSigAll 1 4 1
AccumSigAll 1
ResetOnStart 2
ResetOnTrip 3
NoLatching 4
8S2 R Confirm Pars <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
8S3 R TimeFromPC <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
Event list

8E1 GenTrip Set V155 1
8E2 dito Reset V155 2
8E3 GenStart Set V155 4
8E5 Test active Set V155 16
8E7 InjTstOP Set V155 64
8E9 Relay Ready Set V155 256
8E11 ParSet1 Set V155 1024
9-21

8E19 HMI is on Set V156 4
8E21 Modem error Set V156 16
8E23 QuitStatus Set V156 64
8E25 MVB_PB_Warn Set V156 256
8E27 MVB_PB_Crash Set V156 1024
8E29 PB_BA1Ready Set V156 4096
8E37 PB LA faulty Set V157 16
8E39 PB LB faulty Set V157 64
9-22
9.6.17. IBB I/O 43

Event list

9E1 Receive Set V155 1
9E3 Initialisation Set V155 4
9E5 PrDatBlckSig Set V155 16
Measured variables
Function 9 (IBB I/O) makes measured variables available the number
and significance of which depend on the FUPLA configuration. The
number of measured variables is limited to 64.
Address Access Text Format

9V1 R IBBMW 1 Longinteger
9Vn R IBBMW n Longinteger
9V64 R IBBMW 64 Longinteger
9-23
9.6.18. Current-DT 2
Basic channel No.: 14

14S4 R ParSet4..1 <Select> P1 00000010B 00011110B
14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay S 00.01 0.00 60.00 0.01
14S10 R I-Setting IN 04.00 0.1 20 0.1
14S11 R f-min Hz 040.0 2 50 1
14S12 R MaxMin <Select> MAX -1 1 2
MIN -1
MAX 1
14S13 R NrOfPhases 001 1 3 2
Measured variables
Address Access Text Dec.

14V1 R IN 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 2
Event list
Event No. Cause Event mask Enable code Status

14E1 Trip Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 Start Set V155 4 14I2
9-24
9.6.19. Current 3

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay s 01.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
14S10 R I-Setting IN 02.00 0.02 20.00 0.01
14S11 R MaxMin <Select> MAX (1ph) -3 5 2
MIN (3ph) -3
MIN (1ph) -1
MAX (1ph) 1
MAX (3ph) 3
Max-Inrush 5
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-25
9.6.20. Diff-Transf 4

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R g IN 0.20 0.10 0.50 0.10
14S10 R v 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.25
14S11 R b 1 1.50 1.25 5.00 0.25
14S12 R g-High IN 2.00 0.50 2.50 0.25
14S13 R I-Inst IN 10 3 15 1
14S14 R a1 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
14S15 R s1 <Select> Y 0 1 1
Y 0
D 1
14S16 R a2 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
14S17 R s2 <Select> y0 00 21 1
y0 0
y1 1
y5 2
y6 3
y7 4
y11 5
d0 6
d1 7
d5 8
d6 9
d7 10
d11 11
z0 12
z1 13
z2 14
9-26

z4 15
z5 16
z6 17
z7 18
z8 19
z10 20
z11 21
14S18 R a3 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
14S19 R s3 <Select> y0 00 21 1
y0 0
y1 1
y5 2
y6 3
y7 4
y11 5
d0 6
d1 7
d5 8
d6 9
d7 10
d11 11
z0 12
z1 13
z2 14
z4 15
z5 16
z6 17
z7 18
z8 19
z10 20
z11 21
14S20 R InrushRatio % 10 6 20 1
14S21 R InrushTime s 5 0 90 1
9-27
Measured variables
Address Access Text Dec. Address Access Text Dec.

14V1 R IN (Id-R) 2 14V4 R IN (IhR) 2
14V2 R IN (Id-S) 2 14V5 R IN (IhR) 2
14V3 R IN (Id-T) 2 14V6 R IN (IhR) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN (Id-R) 2
14Q2 R IN (Id-S) 2
14Q3 R IN (Id-T) 2
Event list

14E3 Trip-R Set V155 4 14I2
14E5 Trip-S Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 Trip-T Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 Inrush Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 Stabil Set V155 1024 14I6
9-28
9.6.21. Underimped 5

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay s 00.50 0.20 60.00 0.01
14S10 R Z-Setting UN/IN 0.250 0.025 2.500 0.001
Measured variables

14V1 R UN/IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN/IN 3
Event list

9-29
9.6.22. MinReactance 6

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay s 00.50 0.20 60.00 0.01
14S10 R XA-Setting UN/IN -2.00 -5.00 00.00 0.01
14S11 R XB-Setting UN/IN -0.50 -2.50 +2.50 0.01
14S13 R Angle deg 000 -180 180 005
14S14 R MaxMin <Select> MIN -1 1 2
MIN -1
MAX 1
Measured variables

14V1 R UN/IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN/IN 3
Event list

9-30
9.6.23. NPS-DT 7

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay s 01.00 0.50 60.0 0.01
14S10 R I2-Setting IN 00.20 0.02 0.50 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-31
9.6.24. NPS-Inv 11

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R k1-Setting s 10.00 5.00 60.00 0.10
14S10 R k2-Setting I2/IB 0.05 0.02 0.20 0.01
14S11 R t-min s 010.0 1.0 120.0 0.1
14S12 R t-max s 1000 500 2000 1
14S13 R t-Reset s 0030 5 2000 1
14S14 R IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-32
9.6.25. Voltage 12

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay s 02.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
14S10 R U-Setting UN 1.200 0.010 2.000 0.002
14S11 R MaxMin <Select> MAX (1ph) -3 3 2
MIN (3ph) -3
MIN (1ph) -1
MAX (1ph) 1
MAX (3ph) 3
Measured variables

14V1 R UN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN 3
Event list

9-33
9.6.26. Current-Inv 13

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R c-Setting <Select> 1.00 0 2 1
0.02 0
1.00 1
2.00 2
RXIDG 3
14S10 R k1-Setting s 013.50 0.01 200.00 0.01
14S11 R I-Start IB 1.10 1.00 2.00 0.01
14S13 R IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.20 2.50 0.01
14S14 R t-min s 00.00 00.00 10.00 00.10
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-34
9.6.27. OLoad-Stator 14

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R k1-Setting s 041.4 1.0 120.0 0.1
14S10 R I-Start IB 1.10 1.00 1.60 0.01
14S11 R t-min s 0010.0 1.0 120.0 0.1
14S12 R tg s 0120.0 10.0 2000.0 10.0
14S13 R t-max s 0300.0 100.0 2000.0 10.0
14S14 R t-Reset s 0120.0 10.0 2000.0 10.0
14S15 R IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-35
9.6.28. OLoad-Rotor 15

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R k1-Setting s 033.8 1.0 50.0 0.1
14S10 R I-Start IB 1.10 1.00 1.60 0.01
14S11 R t-min s 0010.0 1.0 120.0 0.1
14S12 R tg s 0120.0 10.0 2000.0 10.0
14S13 R t-max s 0300.0 100.0 2000.0 10.0
14S14 R t-Reset s 0120.0 10.0 2000.0 10.0
14S15 R IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-36
9.6.29. Power 18

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R P-Setting PN -0.050 -0.100 1.200 0.005
14S10 R Angle deg 000.0 -180.0 180.0 5.0
14S11 R Drop-Ratio % 60 30 170 1
14S12 R Delay s 00.50 0.05 60.00 0.01
14S13 R MaxMin <Select> MIN -1 +1 2
MIN -1
MAX 1
14S14 R Phi-Comp. deg 0.0 -5.0 5.0 0.1
14S16 R PN UN*IN 1.000 0.500 2.500 0.001
Measured variables

14V1 R PN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R PN 3
Event list

9-37
9.6.30. Imax-Umin 20

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay s 01.00 0.5 60.00 0.01
14S10 R Strom IN 02.00 0.5 20 0.1
14S11 R Hold-Voltage UN 00.70 0.4 1.1 0.01
14S12 R Hold-Time s 01.00 0.1 10 0.02
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
14V2 R UN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-38
9.6.31. Delay 22

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Trip-Delay s 01.00 0.00 300.00 0.01
14S10 R Reset-Delay s 00.01 0.00 300.00 0.01
14S11 R Integration 0/1 0 0 1 1
Measured variables

14V1 R s 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R s 3
Event list

9-39
9.6.32. Diff-Gen 23

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R g-Setting IN 0.10 0.10 0.50 0.05
14S10 R v-Setting 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.25
Measured variables

14V1 R IN (Id-R) 2
14V2 R IN (Id-S) 2
14V3 R IN (Id-T) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN (Id-R) 2
14Q2 R IN (Id-S) 2
14Q3 R IN (Id-T) 2
Event list

14E3 Trip-S Set V155 4 14I2
14E5 Trip-T Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 Trip Set V155 64 14I4
9-40
9.6.33. Distance 24
The starter and measurement settings (in columns Min., Max. and
Step) with the unit 'ohms/phase' have to be divided by 10 for relays
with a rated current of 5 A.

14S5 R TRIP CB R 00000000B
14S6 R TRIP CB S 00000000B
14S7 R TRIP CB T 00000000B
14S9 R X (1) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S10 R R (1) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S11 R RR (1) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S12 R RRE (1) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S13 R k0 (1) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
14S14 R k0Ang(1) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
14S15 R Delay(1) s 000.000 0 10 0.001
14S16 R X (2) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S17 R R (2) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S18 R RR (2) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S19 R RRE (2) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S20 R k0 (2) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
14S21 R k0Ang(2) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
14S22 R Delay(2) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
14S23 R X (3) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S24 R R (3) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S25 R RR (3) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S26 R RRE (3) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S27 R k0 (3) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
14S28 R k0Ang(3) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
14S29 R Delay(3) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
9-41

14S30 R X (4/OR) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S31 R R (4/OR) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S32 R RR (4/OR) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S33 R RRE (4/OR) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S34 R k0 (4/OR) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
14S35 R k0Ang(4/OR) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
14S36 R Delay(4/OR) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
14S37 R X (BACK) /ph 000.00 -300 0 0.01
14S38 R R (BACK) /ph 000.00 -300 0 0.01
14S39 R RR (BACK) /ph 000.00 -300 0 0.01
14S40 R RRE (BACK) /ph 000.00 -300 0 0.01
14S41 R StartMode <Select> I> 2 6 2
UZ 4
OC 6
14S42 R PhasSelMode <Select> solid ground 0 8 1
Solid ground 0
RTS(R) cycl 1
TRS(T) cycl 2
RTS acycl 3
RST acycl 4
TSR acycl 5
TRS acycl 6
SRT acycl 7
STR acycl 8
14S43 R ComMode <Select> off 0 5 1
off 0
PUTT Nondir 1
PUTT Fward 2
PUTT OR2 3
POTT 4
BLOCK OR 5
9-42

14S44 R VTSupMode <Select> off 0 4 1
off 0
I0 1
I2 2
I0*I2 3
Special 4
14S45 R Ref Length /ph 01.000 0.01 30.000 0.001
14S46 R CT Neutral <Select> Busside -1 1 2
Busside -1
Lineside 1
14S47 R k0m 1 000.00 0 8 0.01
14S48 R k0mAng deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01
14S49 R Imin IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01
14S50 R 3I0min IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01
14S51 R U0 VTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01
14S52 R I0 VTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01
14S53 R U2 VTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01
14S54 R I2 VTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01
14S55 R Istart IN 004.00 0.5 10 0.01
14S56 R XA /ph 000.0 0 999 0.1
14S57 R XB /ph 000.0 -999 0 0.1
14S58 R RA /ph 000.0 0 999 0.1
14S59 R RB /ph 000.0 -999 0 0.1
14S60 R RLoad /ph 000.0 0 999 0.1
14S61 R AngleLoad deg 045.0 0 90 0.1
14S62 R Delay(Def) s 002.00 0 10 0.01
14S63 R UminFault UN 000.05 0.01 2 0.01
14S64 R MemDirMode <Select> Trip 0 2 1
Block 0
Trip 1
Cond Trip 2
9-43

15S1 R SOFT <Select> off 0 2 1
off 0
Non-dir 1
Fwards OR2 2
15S2 R EventRecFull <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S3 R 3U0min UN 000.00 0 2 0.01
15S4 R U Weak UN 000.00 0 2 0.01
15S5 R I OC BU IN 000.00 0 10 0.01
15S6 R Del OC BU s 005.00 0 10 0.01
15S7 R GndFaultMode <Select> I0 0 3 1
I0 0
I0 OR U0 1
I0 AND U0 2
Blocked 3
15S9 R Dir Def <Select> Non-dir 1 2 1
Non-dir 1
Fwards 2
15S10 R TripMode <Select> 1PhTrip 1 3 1
1PhTrip 1
3PhTrip 2
3PhTripDel3 3
15S11 R SOFT10sec <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S12 R t1EvolFaults s 003.00 0 10 0.01
15S13 R ZExtension <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S14 R Weak <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
9-44

15S15 R Unblock <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S16 R Block Z1 <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S17 R Echo <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S18 R TransBl <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S19 R t1TransBl s 000.05 0 0.25 0.01
15S20 R t2TransBl s 003.00 0 10 0.01
15S21 R t1Block s 000.04 0 0.25 0.01
15S22 R tPSblock s 000.00 0 10 0.01
15S23 R VTSupBlkDel <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S24 R VTSupDebDel <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S25 R TIMER_1 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S26 R TIMER_2 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S27 R TIMER_3 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S28 R TIMER_4 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S29 R TIMER_5 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S30 R TIMER_6 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S31 R TIMER_7 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S32 R TIMER_8 ms 0 0 30000 1
9-45
Measured variables

14V1 R [Ref Length] 2
14V2-14V3 R Z (RE) 2
14V4-14V5 R Z (SE) 2
14V6-14V7 R Z (TE) 2
14V8-14V9 R Z (RS) 2
14V10-14V11 R Z (ST) 2
14V12-14V13 R Z (TR) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R [Ref Length] 2
14Q2-14Q3 R Z (RE) 2
14Q4-14Q5 R Z (SE) 2
14Q6-14Q7 R Z (TE) 2
14Q8-14Q9 R Z (RS) 2
14Q10-14Q11 R Z (ST) 2
14Q12-14Q13 R Z (TR) 2
Note:
A tripping value will only be overwritten (e.g. Z(RS)) if the same loop
(RS) trips again.
The Real and Imaginary values of the loop impedance are transmitted
on successive addresses.
The 'distance to the fault' is as derived from the last trip signal.
The correct distance to fault value is furnished only if the parameter
'Ref Length' is correctly configured.
9-46
Event list

14E1 Start I0 Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 Start U0 Set V155 4 14I2
14E5 Meas Oreach Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 Trip O/C Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 Power Swing Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 Trip CB R Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 Trip CB S Set V155 4096 14I7
14E15 Trip CB T Set V155 16384 14I8
14E17 Trip SOFT Set V156 1 14I9
14E19 Start O/C Set V156 4 14I10
14E21 Meas Main Set V156 16 14I11
14E23 Trip CB Set V156 64 14I12
14E25 Start R+S+T Set V156 256 14I13
14E27 Com Send Set V156 1024 14I14
14E29 Dist Blocked Set V156 4096 14I15
9-47

14E31 FreqDev Set V156 16384 14I16
14E33 Start R Set V157 1 14I17
14E35 Start S Set V157 4 14I18
14E37 Start T Set V157 16 14I19
14E39 Start E Set V157 64 14I20
14E41 Start I> Set V157 256 14I21
14E43 Start Z< Set V157 1024 14I22
14E45 Delay 2 Set V157 4096 14I23
14E47 Delay 3 Set V157 16384 14I24
14E49 Delay 4 Set V158 1 14I25
14E51 Delay Def Set V158 4 14I26
14E53 Start RST Set V158 16 14I27
14E55 Weak infeed Set V158 64 14I28
14E57 Meas Bward Set V158 256 14I29
14E59 Trip CB 3P Set V158 1024 14I30
14E61 Trip CB 1P Set V158 4096 14I31
9-48

15E1 Trip RST Set V155 1 15I1
15E3 Trip Com Set V155 4 15I2
15E5 Delay 1 Set V155 16 15I3
15E7 Com Boost Set V155 64 15I4
15E9 Trip Stub Set V155 256 15I5
15E11 VTSup Set V155 1024 15I6
15E13 VTSup Delay Set V155 4096 15I7
15E15 Start R Aux Set V155 16384 15I8
15E17 Start S Aux Set V156 1 15I9
15E19 Start T Aux Set V156 4 15I10
15E21 Start E Aux Set V156 16 15I11
15E23 Start RST Aux Set V156 64 15I12
15E25 Trip RST Aux Set V156 256 15I13
15E27 Start SOFT Set V156 1024 15I14
15E29 Delay >= 2 Set V156 4096 15I15
9-49

15E31 Meas Fward Set V156 16384 15I16
15E33 BOOL_OUT1 Set V157 1 15I17
15E37 BOOL_OUT3 Set V157 16 15I19
15E39 BOOL_OUT4 Set V157 64 15I20
15E41 BOOL_OUT5 Set V157 256 15I21
15E43 BOOL_OUT6 Set V157 1024 15I22
15E45 BOOL_OUT7 Set V157 4095 15I23
15E47 BOOL_OUT8 Set V157 16384 15I24
15E49 Start 1ph Set V158 1 15I25
15E51 DelDistBlock Set V158 4 15I26
9-50
9.6.34. Frequency 25

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Frequency Hz 48.00 40.00 65.00 0.01
14S10 R U-Block UN 0.20 0.20 0.80 0.10
14S11 R Delay s 01.00 0.10 60.00 0.01
14S12 R MaxMin <Select> MIN -1 1 2
MIN -1
MAX 1
Measured variables

14V1 R Hz 3
14V2 R UN 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R Hz 3
Event list

14E1 Block.(U<) Set V155 1 14I1

9-51
9.6.35. Overexcitat 26

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay s 01.00 0.10 60.00 0.01
14S10 R U/f-Setting UN/fN 01.20 0.20 2.00 0.01
MIN -1
MAX 1
Measured variables

14V1 R UN/fN 2
14V2 R Hz 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN/fN 2
Event list

9-52
9.6.36. Count 27

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R CountThresh 1 1 100 1
14S10 R Drop time s 00.04 00.01 30.00 00.01
14S11 R Reset-Delay s 010.0 000.1 300.0 000.1
Measured variables

14V1 R 0
Tripping levels

14Q1 R 0
Event list

9-53
Overtemp. (RE.316*4) 28

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Theta-Beginn % 100 000 100 001
14S10 R Theta-Warn % 105 050 200 001
14S11 R Theta-Trip % 110 050 200 001
14S13 R TimeConstant min 005.0 002.0 500.0 000.1
14S14 R IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R Theta-Nom 3
14V2 R Pv-Nom 3
14V3 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R Theta-Nom 3
14Q2 R Pv-Nom 3
14Q3 R IN 3
Event list

14E1 Alarm Set V155 1 14I1
9-54
9.6.37. Check-I3ph 29

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R I-Setting IN 0.20 0.05 1.00 0.05
14S10 R Delay s 10.0 0.1 60.0 0.1
14S11 R CT-Compens +1.00 -2.00 +2.00 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-55
9.6.38. Check-U3ph 30

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R U-Setting UN 0.20 0.05 1.20 0.05
14S10 R Delay s 10.0 0.1 60.0 0.1
14S11 R VT-Compens +1.00 -2.00 +2.00 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R UN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN 3
Event list

9-56
9.6.39. Logic 31

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Logic Mode <Select> OR 0 2 1
OR 0
AND 1
RS-Flipflop 2
Event list

14E1 BinOutput Set V155 1 14I1
9-57
9.6.40. Disturbance Rec 32


14S9 R StationNr No. 01 00 99 01
14S10 R preEvent ms 40 40 400 20
14S11 R Event ms 100 100 3000 50
14S12 R postEvent ms 40 40 400 20
14S13 R recMode <Select> A 0 1 1
A 0
B 1
14S14 R TrigMode <Select> TrigOnStart 0 5 1
TrigOnStart 0
TrigOnTrip 1
TrigOnBin 2
TrigAnyBi 3
TrigStart&Bi 4
TrigTrip&Bin 5
14S15 R BinInp 1 <Select> No trig 0 2 1
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
9-58

No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
9-59

No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
No trig 0
Trigger 1
Inv. Trigger 2
14S31 R StorageMode <Select> StopOnFull 0 1 1
StopOnFull 0
Overwrite 1
Event list

14E1 BinOutput Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 Mem full Set V155 4 14I2
9-60
9.6.41. Voltage-Inst 36

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Delay s 00.01 0.00 60.00 0.01
14S10 R U-Setting UN 1.40 0.01 2.00 0.01
14S11 R f-min Hz 040.0 25 50 1
MIN -1
MAX 1
Measured variables

14V1 R UN 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN 2
Event list

9-61
9.6.42. Autoreclosure 38

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S6 R CB2 close 00000000B
14S9 R 1. AR Mode <Select> 1. 1P3P-1P3P 1 5 1
1. 1P-1P 1
1. 1P-3P 2
1. 1P3P-3P 3
1. 1P3P-1P3P 4
ExtSelection 5
14S10 R 2..4AR Mode <Select> off 0 3 1
off 0
2 AR 1
3 AR 2
4 AR 3
14S11 R Master Mode <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S12 R ZE Prefault <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S13 R ZE 1. AR <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
off 0
on 1
off 0
on 1
9-62

off 0
on 1
14S17 R SCBypass 1P <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S18 R SCBypass1P3P <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S19 R t Dead1 1P s 001.20 0.05 300 0.01
14S20 R t Dead1 3P s 000.60 0.05 300 0.01
14S21 R t Dead1 Ext s 001.00 0.05 300 0.01
14S22 R t Dead2 s 001.20 0.05 300 0.01
14S23 R t Dead3 s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
14S24 R t Dead4 s 060.00 0.05 300 0.01
14S25 R t Oper. s 000.50 0.05 300 0.01
14S26 R t Inhibit s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
14S27 R t Close s 000.25 0.05 300 0.01
14S28 R t Discrim.1P s 000.60 0.10 300 0.01
14S29 R t Discrim.3P s 000.30 0.10 300 0.01
14S30 R t Timeout s 001.00 0.05 300 0.01
14S31 R t AR Block. s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
14S32 R TMSEC_Timer1 ms 0 0 30000 1
9-63
Event list

14E1 CB Close Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 CB2 Close Set V155 4 14I2
14E5 Trip 3-Pol Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 ZExtension Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 Def. Trip Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 Delay Flwr. Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 Blk. to Flwr Set V155 4096 14I7
14E15 Inhibit Outp Set V155 16384 14I8
14E17 AR Ready Set V156 1 14I9
14E19 AR Blocked Set V156 4 14I10
14E21 AR in Prog Set V156 16 14I11
14E23 First AR 1P Set V156 64 14I12
14E25 First AR 3P Set V156 256 14I13
14E27 Second AR Set V156 1024 14I14
14E29 Third AR Set V156 4096 14I15
9-64

14E31 Fourth AR Set V156 16384 14I16
14E33 P_OUTPUT1 Set V157 1 14I17
14E35 P_OUTPUT2 Set V157 4 14I18
14E37 P_OUTPUT3 Set V157 16 14I19
14E39 P_OUTPUT4 Set V157 64 14I20
14E41 P_OUTPUT5 Set V157 256 1421
14E43 P_OUTPUT6 Set V157 1024 1422
14E45 P_OUTPUT7 Set V157 4096 1423
14E47 P_OUTPUT8 Set V157 16384 14I24
9-65
9.6.43. EarthFaultIsol 40

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
149 R P-Setting PN 0.050 0.005 0.100 0.001
14S10 R Angle deg 000.00 -180.00 180.00 0.01
14S11 R Drop-Ratio % 60 30 95 1
14S12 R Delay s 00.50 0.05 60.00 0.01
14S13 R Phi-Comp. deg 0.00 -5.00 5.00 0.01
14S14 R PN UN*IN 1.000 0.500 2.500 0.001
Measured variables

14V1 R PN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R PN 3
Event list

9-66
9.6.44. Voltage-Bal 41

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R V-Unbalance UN 0.20 0.10 0.50 0.05
14S10 R Delay s 0.04 0.00 1.00 0.01
14S11 R t-Reset s 1.50 0.10 2.00 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R UN (Ud-1) 2
14V2 R UN (Ud-2) 2
14V3 R UN (Ud-3) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN (Ud-1) 2
14Q2 R UN (Ud-2) 2
14Q3 R UN (Ud-3) 2
Event list

14E5 Trip-Line1 Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 Trip-Line2 Set V155 64 14I4
9-67
9.6.45. U/f-Inv 47

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R V/f-Setting UN/fN 01.10 1.05 1.20 0.01
14S10 R t-min min 0.20 0.01 2.00 0.01
14S11 R t-max min 60.0 5.0 100.0 0.1
14S12 R t-Reset min 60.0 0.2 100.0 0.1
14S13 R t[V/f=1.05] min 70.00 00.01 100.00 0.01
14S14 R t[V/f=1.10] min 70.00 00.01 100.00 0.01
14S15 R t[V/f=1.15] min 06.00 00.01 100.00 0.01
14S16 R t[V/f=1.20] min 01.000 00.001 30.000 0.001
14S17 R t[V/f=1.25] min 00.480 00.001 30.000 0.001
14S18 R t[V/f=1.30] min 00.300 00.001 30.000 0.001
14S19 R t[V/f=1.35] min 00.220 00.001 30.000 0.001
14S20 R t[V/f=1.40] min 00.170 00.001 30.000 0.001
14S21 R t[V/f=1.45] min 00.140 00.001 30.000 0.001
14S22 R t[V/f=1.50] min 00.140 00.001 30.000 0.001
14S23 R UB-Setting UN 01.00 0.80 1.20 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R UN/fN 2
14V2 R Hz 2
9-68
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN/fN 2
Event list

9-69
9.6.46. Measurands 48

14S9 R Angle deg 000.0 -180.0 180.0 0.1
14S10 R PN UN*IN 1.000 0.200 2.500 0.001
14S11 R Voltage mode <Select> direct 1 2 1
direct 1
ph-to-ph 2
Measured variables

14V1 R UN 3
14V2 R IN 3
14V3 R P (PN) 3
14V4 R Q (PN) 3
14V5 R Hz 3
9-70
9.6.47. SynchroCheck 49

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R maxVoltDif UN 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05
14S10 R maxPhaseDif deg 10.0 05.0 80.0 05.0
14S11 R maxFreqDif Hz 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05
14S12 R minVoltage UN 0.70 0.60 1.00 0.05
14S13 R maxVoltage UN 0.30 0.10 1.00 0.05
14S14 R Operat.-Mode <Select> SynChck only 0 4 1
SynChck only 0
DBus + LLine 1
LBus + DLine 2
DBus DLine 3
DBus + DLine 4
14S15 R SupervisTime s 0.20 0.05 5.00 0.05
14S16 R t-Reset s 0.05 0.00 1.00 0.05
14S17 R LiveBus <Select> 1ph R-S 0 7 1
1ph R-S 0
1ph S-T 1
1ph T-R 2
1ph R-E 3
1ph S-E 4
1ph T-E 5
3ph-delta 6
3ph-Y 7
9-71

14S18 R LiveLine <Select> 3ph-Y 0 7 1
1ph R-S 0
1ph S-T 1
1ph T-R 2
1ph R-E 3
1ph S-E 4
1ph T-E 5
3ph-delta 6
3ph-Y 7
Measured variables

14V1 R UN (dU) 2
14V2 R deg (dPhi) 2
14V3 R Hz (|df|) 2
14V4 R UN (max. bus V) 2
14V5 R UN (min. bus V) 2
14V6 R UN (max. line V) 2
14V7 R UN (min. line V) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN (dU) 2
14Q2 R deg (dPhi) 2
14Q3 R Hz (|df|) 2
9-72
Event list

4E1 PermitToClos Set V155 1 14I1
14E5 SyncBlockd Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 TrigBlockd Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 SyncOverrid Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 AmplDifOK Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 PhaseDifOK Set V155 4096 14I7
14E15 FreqDifOK Set V155 16384 14I8
14E17 LiveBus Set V156 1 14I9
14E19 DeadBus Set V156 4 14I10
14E21 LiveLine Set V156 16 14I11
14E23 DeadLine Set V156 64 14I12
9-73
9.6.48. Rotor-EFP 51

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Alarm-Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.05
14S10 R Trip-Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.05
14S11 R RFr-AlarmVal kOhm 10.0 0.1 25.0 0.1
14S12 R RFr-TripVal kOhm 01.0 0.1 25.0 0.1
14S13 R REr kOhm 1.00 0.90 5.00 0.01
14S14 R Uir <Select> 50 Volt 1 3 1
20 Volt 1
30 Volt 2
50 Volt 3
14S15 R RFr-Adjust kOhm 10.00 8.00 12.00 0.01
14S16 R CoupC-Adjust uF 4.00 2.00 10.00 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R Rfr (kOhm) 1
14V2 R Ck" (uF) 2
14V3 R REr" (kOhm) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R Rfr (kOhm) 1
14Q2 R Ck" (uF) 2
14Q3 R REr" (kOhm) 2
9-74
Event list for Rotor-EFP

14E3 Start Trip Set V155 4 14I2
14E7 Start Alarm Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 InterruptInt Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 InterruptExt Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 Rer-Adjust Set V155 4096 14I7
14E15 CoupC-Adjust Set V155 16384 14I8
14E17 Extern-Block Set V156 1 14I9
9-75
9.6.49. Stator-EFP 52

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R Alarm-Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.05
14S10 R Trip-Delay s 0.50 0.20 60.00 0.05
14S11 R RFs-AlarmVal kOhm 10.0 0.1 20.0 0.1
14S12 R RFs-TripVal kOhm 01.0 0.1 20.0 0.1
14S13 R REs kOhm 1.00 0.70 5.00 0.01
14S14 R REs-2.Starpt kOhm 1.00 0.90 30.00 0.01
14S15 R RFs-Adjust kOhm 10.00 8.00 12.00 0.01
14S16 R MTransRatio 100.0 10.0 200.0 0.1
14S17 R NrOfStarpt 1 1 2 1
Measured variables

14V1 R Rfs (kOhm) 1
14V2 R Inst. trans. ratio 1
14V3 R REs" (kOhm) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R Rfs (kOhm) 1
14Q2 R Inst. trans. ratio 1
14Q3 R REs" (kOhm) 2
9-76
Event list

14E3 Start Trip Set V155 4 14I2
14E7 Start Alarm Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 InterruptInt Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 InterruptExt Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 2.Starpt Set V155 4096 14I7
14E15 MTR-Adjust Set V155 16384 14I8
14E17 Res-Adjust Set V156 1 14I9
14E19 Extern-Block Set V156 4 14I10
9-77
9.6.50. I0-Invers 53

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R c-Setting <Select> 1 0 2 1
0.02 0
1.00 1
2.00 2
RXIDG 3
14S10 R k1-Setting s 013.50 0.01 200.00 0.01
14S11 R I-Start IB 1.10 1.00 2.00 0.01
14S13 R IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.20 2.50 0.01
14S14 R t-min s 00.00 00.00 10.00 00.10
Measured variables

14V1 R IN 3
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN 3
Event list

9-78
9.6.51. Pole-Slip 55

14S5 R TRIP1 00000000B
14S9 R ZA UN/IN 0.00 0.000 5.000 0.001
14S10 R ZB UN/IN 0.00 -5.000 0.000 0.001
14S11 R ZC UN/IN 0.00 0.000 5.000 0.001
14S12 R Phi deg 090 60 270 1
14S13 R WarnAngle deg 000 0 180 1
14S14 R TripAngle deg 090 0 180 1
14S15 R n1 01 0 20 1
14S16 R n2 01 0 20 1
14S17 R t-Reset s 5.000 0.500 25.000 0.010
Measured variables

14V1 R UN/IN 3
14V2 R Hz 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R UN/IN 3
14Q2 R Hz 2
9-79
Event list

14E1 Warning Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 Generator Set V155 4 14I2
14E5 Motor Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 Zone1 Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 Zone2 Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 Trip1 Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 Trip2 Set V155 4096 14I7
9-80
9.6.52. Diff-Line 56

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R g IN 0.20 0.10 0.50 0.10
14S10 R v 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.25
14S11 R b 1 1.50 1.25 5.00 0.25
14S12 R g-High IN 2.00 0.50 2.50 0.25
14S13 R I-Inst IN 10 3 15 1
14S14 R a1 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
14S15 R s1 <Select> D 0 1 1
Y 0
D 1
14S16 R a2 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
14S17 R s2 <Select> d0 00 21 1
y0 0
y1 1
y5 2
y6 3
y7 4
y11 5
d0 6
d1 7
d5 8
d6 9
d7 10
d11 11
9-81

z0 12
z1 13
z2 14
z4 15
z5 16
z6 17
z7 18
z8 19
z10 20
z11 21
14S18 R InrushRatio % 10 6 20 1
14S19 R InrushTime s 0 0 90 1
Measured variables
Address Access Text Dec. Address Access Text Dec.

14V1 R IN (Id-R) 2 14V4 R IN (IhR) 2
14V2 R IN (Id-S) 2 14V5 R IN (IhS) 2
14V3 R IN (Id-T) 2 14V6 R IN (IhT) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN (Id-R) 2
14Q2 R IN (Id-S) 2
14Q3 R IN (Id-T) 2
9-82
Event list

14E5 Trip-S Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 Trip-T Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 Inrush Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 Stabil Set V155 1024 14I6
9-83
9.6.53. RemoteBin 57

14S5 R RemTRIP 1 00000000B
14S6 R RemTRIP 2 00000000B
14S7 R RemTRIP 3 00000000B
14S8 R RemTRIP 4 00000000B
Event list

14E1 RemChan 1 Set V155 1 14I1
14E11 RemChan 6 Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 RemChan 7 Set V155 4096 14I7
14E15 RemChan 8 Set V155 16384 14I8
14E17 RemBinError Set V156 1 14I9
9-84
9.6.54. EarthFltGnd2 58

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R V-Setting UN 0.200 0.003 0.100 0.001
14S10 R I-Setting IN 0.10 0.10 1.00 0.01
14S11 R Angle deg 60.0 0.0 90.0 5.0
14S12 R tBasic s 0.050 0.000 1.000 0.001
14S13 R tWait s 0.050 0.000 0.500 0.001
14S14 R tTransBl s 0.100 0.000 0.500 0.001
14S15 R CT Neutral <Select> Lineside 0 1 1
Lineside 0
Busside 1
14S16 R ComMode <Select> Permissive 0 1 1
Permissive 0
Blocking 1
14S17 R SendMode <Select> MeasBwd 0 1 1
Non-dir 0
MeasBwd 1
14S18 R 1 Channel <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
off 0
Weak 1
Bkr 2
Weak & Bkr 3
9-85
Measured variables

14V1 R UN 2
14V2 R IN 2
14V3 R Forwards 0
Note: This function does not provide tripping levels (Q).
Event list

14E5 MeasFwd Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 MeasBwd Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 Senden Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 Recve Inh Set V155 1024 14I6
9-86
9.6.55. FUPLA 59

14S8 R NoFUPMV x 0 0 1
14S9 R RepRate x low (2) low (2) high (0) 1
14S10 R CycleTime x 20 0 1000 1
Measured variables
The number of FUPLA measured variables depends on the con-
figuration. Within this total configured, the order of the FUPLA
measured variables measured variable numbers can be determined by
assigning numbers to them.

14V1 R FUPMV 1 2
14V2 R FUPMV 2 2
14Vn R FUPMV n 2
Events
FUPLA events can only be configured as IBB events. Events are not
recorded under the FUPLA function number. Because of the variable
number of signals/events, FUPLA would require a variable number of
channels.
IBB events
FUPLA 'Extout' to IBB channel and ER:
Events are recorded under their SPA address, IBB group and event
number,
Addr 121 E1 .
Binary signals are assigned to IBB channels using the HMI. It is not
possible to mask IBB events.
9-87
9.6.56. FlutterRecog 60

14S9 R SupervisTime s 1.0 0.1 60.0 0.1
14S10 R NoOfChanges 2 2 100 1
Event list

14E1 InputStatus1 Set V155 1 14I1
14E9 FlatterSig1 Set V155 256 14I2
9-88
9.6.57. HV distance 63
The starter and measurement settings (in columns Min., Max. and
Step) with the unit 'ohms/phase' have to be divided by 10 for relays
with a rated current of 5 A.

14S5 R TRIP CB R 00000000B
14S6 R TRIP CB S 00000000B
14S7 R TRIP CB T 00000000B
14S9 R X (1) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S10 R R (1) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S11 R RR (1) /ph 000.00 -300 300
14S12 R RRE (1) /ph 000.00 -300 300
14S13 R k0 (1) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
14S14 R k0Ang(1) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
14S15 R Delay(1) s 000.000 0 10 0.001
14S16 R X (2) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S17 R R (2) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S18 R RR (2) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S19 R RRE (2) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S20 R k0 (2) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
14S21 R k0Ang(2) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
14S22 R Delay(2) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
14S23 R X (3) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S24 R R (3) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S25 R RR (3) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S26 R RRE (3) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S27 R k0 (3) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
14S28 R k0Ang(3) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
14S29 R Delay(3) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
9-89

14S30 R X (4/OR) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S31 R R (4/OR) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S32 R RR (4/OR) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S33 R RRE (4/OR) /ph 000.00 -300 300 0.01
14S34 R k0 (4/OR) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01
14S35 R k0Ang(4/OR) deg 000.00 -180 90 0.01
14S36 R Delay(4/OR) s 000.00 0 10 0.01
14S37 R X (BACK) /ph 000.00 -300 0 0.01
14S38 R R (BACK) /ph 000.00 -300 0 0.01
14S39 R RR (BACK) /ph 000.00 -300 0 0.01
14S40 R RRE (BACK) /ph 000.00 -300 0 0.01
14S41 R PhasSelMode <Select> Non-dir 9 10 1
Non-dir 9
Fward OR 10
14S42 R ComMode <Select> off 0 5 1
off 0
PUTT Nondir 1
PUTT Fward 2
PUTT OR2 3
POTT 4
BLOCK OR 5
14S43 R VTSupMode <Select> off 0 4 1
off 0
I0 1
I2 2
I0*I2 3
Special 4
14S44 R Ref Length /ph 01.000 0.01 30.000 0.001
14S45 R CT Neutral <Select> Busside -1 1 2
Busside -1
Lineside 1
9-90

14S46 R k0m 1 000.00 0 8 0.01
14S47 R k0mAng deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01
14S48 R Imin IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01
14S49 R 3I0min IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01
14S50 R U0 VTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01
14S51 R I0 VTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01
14S52 R U2 VTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01
14S53 R I2 VTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01
14S54 R XA /ph 000.0 0 999 0.1
14S55 R XB /ph 000.0 -999 0 0.1
14S56 R RA /ph 000.0 0 999 0.1
14S57 R RB /ph 000.0 -999 0 0.1
14S58 R RLoad /ph 000.0 0 999 0.1
14S59 R AngleLoad deg 045.0 0 90 0.1
14S60 R SR error deg 0.00 -2.00 2.00 0.01
14S61 R TR error deg 0.00 -2.00 2.00 0.01
14S62 R Delay(Def) s 002.00 0 10 0.01
14S63 R UminFault UN 000.05 0.01 2 0.01
Block 0
Trip 1
Cond Trip 2
15S1 R SOFT <Select> off 0 2 1
off 0
Non-dir 1
Fwards OR2 2
15S2 R EventRecFull <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S3 R 3U0min UN 000.00 0 2 0.01
15S4 R U Weak UN 000.00 0 2 0.01
9-91

15S5 R I OC BU IN 000.00 0 10 0.01
15S6 R Del OC BU s 005.00 0 10 0.01
15S7 R GndFaultMode <Select> I0 4 7 1
I0 4
I0 OR U0 5
I0(I2) 6
I0(I2) OR U0 7
15S9 R Dir Def <Select> Non-dir 1 2 1
Non-dir 1
Fwards 2
15S10 R TripMode <Select> 1PhTrip 1 3 1
1PhTrip 1
3PhTrip 2
3PhTripDel3 3
15S11 R SOFT 10sec <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S12 R t1EvolFaults s 003.00 0 10 0.01
15S14 R Weak <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S15 R Unblock <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
off 0
on 1
15S17 R TransBl <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S18 R t1TransBl s 000.05 0 0.25 0.01
9-92

15S19 R t2TransBl s 003.00 0 10 0.01
15S20 R t1Block s 000.04 0 0.25 0.01
15S21 R tPSblock s 000.00 0 10 0.01
15S22 R VTSupBlkDel <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S23 R VTSupDebDel <Select> off 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
15S24 R TIMER_1 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S25 R TIMER_2 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S26 R TIMER_3 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S27 R TIMER_4 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S28 R TIMER_5 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S29 R TIMER_6 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S30 R TIMER_7 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S31 R TIMER_8 ms 0 0 30000 1
15S32 R I Load IN 0.5 0 2 0.1
9-93
Measured variables

14V1 R [Ref Length] 2
14V2-14V3 R Z (RE) 2
14V4-14V5 R Z (SE) 2
14V6-14V7 R Z (TE) 2
14V8-14V9 R Z (RS) 2
14V10-14V11 R Z (ST) 2
14V12-14V13 R Z (TR) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R [Ref Length] 2
14Q2-14Q3 R Z (RE) 2
14Q4-14Q5 R Z (SE) 2
14Q6-14Q7 R Z (TE) 2
14Q8-14Q9 R Z (RS) 2
14Q10-14Q11 R Z (ST) 2
14Q12-14Q13 R Z (TR) 2
Note:
A tripping value will only be overwritten (e.g. Z(RS)) if the same loop
(RS) trips again.
The real and imaginary values of the loop impedance are transmitted
on successive addresses.
The 'distance to the fault' is as derived from the last trip signal.
The correct distance to fault value is furnished only if the parameter
'Ref Length' is correctly configured.
9-94
Event list

14E1 Start I0 Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 Start U0 Set V155 4 14I2
14E5 Meas Oreach Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 Trip O/C Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 Power Swing Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 Trip CB R Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 Trip CB S Set V155 4096 14I7
14E15 Trip CB T Set V155 16384 14I8
14E17 Trip SOFT Set V156 1 14I9
14E19 Start O/C Set V156 4 14I10
14E21 Meas Main Set V156 16 14I11
14E23 Trip CB Set V156 64 14I12
14E25 Start R+S+T Set V156 256 14I13
14E27 Com Send Set V156 1024 14I14
14E29 Dist Blocked Set V156 4096 14I15
9-95

14E31 FreqDev Set V156 16384 14I16
14E37 Start T Set V157 16 14I19
14E39 Start E Set V157 64 14I20
14E41 Delay 2 Set V157 256 14I21
14E43 Delay 3 Set V157 1024 14I22
14E45 Delay 4 Set V157 4096 14I23
14E47 Delay Def Set V157 16384 14I24
14E49 Start RST Set V158 1 14I25
14E51 Weak Set V158 4 14I26
14E53 Meas Bward Set V158 16 14I27
14E55 Trip CB 3P Set V158 64 14I28
14E57 Trip CB 1P Set V158 256 14I29
14E59 Trip RST Set V158 1024 14I30
9-96

14E61 Trip Com Set V158 4096 14I31
15E1 Delay 1 Set V155 1 15I1
15E3 Com Boost Set V155 4 15I2
15E5 Trip Stub Set V155 16 15I3
15E7 VTSup Set V155 64 15I4
15E9 VTSup Delay Set V155 256 15I5
15E11 Start R Aux Set V155 1024 15I6
15E13 Start S Aux Set V155 4096 15I7
15E15 Start T Aux Set V155 16384 15I8
15E17 Start E Aux Set V156 1 15I9
15E19 Start RST Aux Set V156 4 15I10
15E21 Trip RST Aux Set V156 16 15I11
15E23 Start SOFT Set V156 64 15I12
15E25 Delay >= 2 Set V156 256 15I13
15E27 Meas Fward Set V156 1024 15I14
9-97

15E29 BOOL_OUT1 Set V156 4096 15I15
15E31 BOOL_OUT2 Set V156 16384 15I16
15E37 BOOL_OUT5 Set V157 16 15I19
15E39 BOOL_OUT6 Set V157 64 15I20
15E41 BOOL_OUT7 Set V157 256 15I21
15E43 BOOL_OUT8 Set V157 1024 15I22
15E45 Start 1ph Set V157 4096 15I23
15E47 DelDistBlock Set V157 16384 15I24
9-98
9.6.58. LDU events 67


14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
Event list

14E1 BinOutput1 Set V155 1 14I1
9-99
9.6.59. Debounce 68

14S9 R SupervisTime1 ms 1 1 10000 1
9-100
9.6.60. df/dt 69

14S5 R TRIP 00000000B
14S9 R df/dt Hz/s -1.0 -10.0 10.0 0.1
14S10 R Frequency Hz 48.00 00.00 65.00 0.01
14S11 R BlockVoltage UN 0.2 0.2 0.8 0.1
14S12 R Delay s 00.10 0.10 60.00 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R Hz/s 2
14V2 R Hz 3
14V3 R UN 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R Hz/s 2
4Q2 R Hz 3
Event list

14E1 Blocked(U<) Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 TRIP Set V155 4 14I2
9-101
9.6.61. DirCurrentDT 70
Basisc channel No.: 14
Summery of parameters:

14S5 R Trip 00000000B
14S9 R I-Setting IN 2.00 0.20 20.00 0.01
14S10 R Angle deg 45 -180 +180 15
14S11 R Delay s 01.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
14S12 R tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01
Trip 0
Block 1
14S14 R MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R IN (R) 3
14V2 R IN (S) 3
14V3 R IN (T) 3
14V4 R PN (IR, UST) 3
14V5 R PN (IS, UTR) 3
14V6 R PN (IT, URS) 3
14V7 R UN (ST) 3
14V8 R UN (TR) 3
14V9 R UN (RS) 3
9-102
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN (R) 3
14Q2 R IN (S) 3
14Q3 R IN (T) 3
14Q4 R PN (IR, UST) 3
14Q5 R PN (IS, UTR) 3
14Q6 R PN (IT, URS) 3
14Q7 R UN (ST) 3
14Q8 R UN (TR) 3
14Q9 R UN (RS) 3
Event list

14E9 Start T Set V155 256 14I5
9-103
9.6.62. DirCurrentInv 71

14S5 R Trip 00000000B
14S9 R I-Start IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
14S10 R Angle deg 45 -180 +180 15
14S11 R c-Setting <Select> 1.00 0 2 1
0.02 0
1.00 1
2.00 2
14S12 R k1-Setting s 13.50 0.01 200.00 0.01
14S13 R t-min s 0.00 0.00 10.00 0.01
14S14 R IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
14S15 R tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01
Trip 0
Block 1
14S17 R MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01
Measured variables

14V1 R IN (R) 3
14V2 R IN (S) 3
14V3 R IN (T) 3
14V4 R PN (IR, UST) 3
14V5 R PN (IS, UTR) 3
14V6 R PN (IT, URS) 3
14V7 R UN (ST) 3
14V8 R UN (TR) 3
14V9 R UN (RS) 3
9-104
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN (R) 3
14Q2 R IN (S) 3
14Q3 R IN (T) 3
14Q4 R PN (IR, UST) 3
14Q5 R PN (IS, UTR) 3
14Q6 R PN (IT, URS) 3
14Q7 R UN (ST) 3
14Q8 R UN (TR) 3
14Q9 R UN (RS) 3
Event list

14E9 Start T Set V155 256 14I5
9-105
9.6.63. BreakerFailure 72

14S5 R 23105 TRIP t1 00000000B
14S9 R 23110 TRIP t1 L1 00000000B
14S13 R 23115 TRIP t1 L2 00000000B
14S17 R 23120 TRIP t1 L3 00000000B
14S21 R 23125 TRIP t2 00000000B
14S25 R 23130 REMOTE TRIP 00000000B
14S29 R 23135 RED TRIP L1 00000000B
14S33 R 23140 RED TRIP L2 00000000B
14S37 R 23145 RED TRIP L3 00000000B
14S41 R 23150 EFS REM TRIP 00000000B
14S45 R 23155 EFS BUS TRIP 00000000B
14S49 R I Setting IN 1.20 0.2 5 0.01
14S50 R Delay t1 s 0.15 0.02 60 0.01
14S51 R Delay t2 s 0.15 0.02 60 0.01
14S52 R Delay tEFP s 0.04 0.02 60 0.01
14S53 R t Drop Retrip s 0.05 0.02 60 0.01
14S54 R t Drop BuTrip s 0.05 0.02 60 0.01
14S55 R t Pulse RemTrip s 0.05 0.02 60 0.01
14S56 R t1 active <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S57 R t2 active <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S58 R RemTrip active <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
9-106

14S59 R EFP active <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S60 R Red active <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S61 R Start Ext act. <Select> on 0 1 1
off 0
on 1
14S62 R RemTrip after <Select> t1 0 1 1
t2 0
t1 1
Measured variables

14V1 R IN (L1) 2
14V2 R IN (L2) 2
14V3 R IN (L3) 2
Tripping levels

14Q1 R IN (L1) 2
14Q2 R IN (L2) 2
14Q3 R IN (L3) 2
Event list

14E1 23305 Trip t1 Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 23315 Trip t1 L1 Set V155 4 14I2
9-107
Event Cause Event Enable Status

No. mask code
14E5 23320 Trip t1 L2 Set V155 16 14I3
14E7 23325 Trip t1 L3 Set V155 64 14I4
14E9 23310 Trip t2 Set V155 256 14I5
14E11 23340 Remote trip Set V155 1024 14I6
14E13 23345 Red Trip L1 Set V155 4096 14I7
14E15 23350 Red Trip L2 Set V155 16384 14I8
14E17 23355 Red Trip L3 Set V156 1 14I9
14E19 23375 EFP Rem Trip Set V156 4 14I10
14E21 23370 EFP Bus Trip Set V156 16 14I11
14E23 23330 Retrip t1 Set V156 64 14I12
14E25 23360 Uncon Trip t1 Set V156 256 14I13
14E27 23380 Ext Trip t1 Set V156 1024 14I14
14E29 23335 Backup Trip t2 Set V156 4096 14I15
14E31 23365 Uncon Trip t2 Set V156 16384 14I16
9-108
9.6.64. MeasureModule 74
Basic channel number: 14
Parameter summary:

14S4 R ParSet4..1 Select P1 00000010B 000111110B
14S9 R PN UN*IN*3 1.000 0.200 2.500 0.001
14S10 R AngleComp Deg 0.000 -180.0 180.0 0.1
14S11 R t1-Interval Select 0 8
1 min 0
2 min 1
5 min 2
10 min 3
15 min 4
20 min 5
30 min 6
60 min 7
120 min 8
14S12 R ScaleFact1 1 1.0000 0.0001 1.0000 0.0001
14S13 R t2-Interval Select 4 0 8
1 min 0
2 min 1
5 min 2
10 min 3
15 min 4
20 min 5
30 min 6
60 min 7
120 min 8
14S14 R ScaleFact2 1 1.0000 0.0001 1.0000 0.0001
9-109
Measured variables

14V1 R URS(UN) 3
14V2 R UST(UN) 3
14V3 R UTR(UN) 3
14V4 R UR(UN) 3
14V5 R US(UN) 3
14V6 R UT(UN) 3
14V7 R IR(IN) 3
14V8 R IS(IN) 3
14V9 R IT(IN) 3
14V10 R P (PN) 3
14V11 R Q (PN) 3
14V12 R cos phi 3
14V13 R Hz 3
14V14 R E1Int 3
14V15 R P1Int 0
14V16 R E1Acc 3
14V17 R P1Acc 0
14V18 R E2Int 3
14V19 R P2Int 0
14V20 R E2Acc 3
14V21 R P2Acc 0
Tripping levels

14Q16 R E1Acc 3
14Q17 R P1Acc 0
14Q20 R E2Acc 3
14Q21 R P2Acc 0
9-110
Event list

14E1 Cnt1New Set V155 1 14I1
14E3 Cnt2New Set V155 4 14I2
9-111
RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN ABB Switzerland Ltd
October 2004
10. SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
10.1. Changes in Version 5.0 in relation to Version 4.5............................10-3

10.1.1. Local display unit (LDU)...................................................................10-3
10.1.2. New 'LDU events' function ...............................................................10-3
10.1.3. New processor unit 316VC61a ........................................................10-3
10.2. Known software weaknesses in V5.0 ..............................................10-3

10.2.1. Year 2000 conformity.......................................................................10-3
10.2.2. 'LDU events' function .......................................................................10-3

10.3.1. Distributed input/output system RIO580 ..........................................10-3
10.3.2. Year 2000 conformity.......................................................................10-4
10.3.3. 'LDU events' function .......................................................................10-4
10.4. Changes in Version 5.1a in relation to Version 5.1..........................10-4

10.4.1. 'I0-Invers' function ............................................................................10-4
10.5. Changes in Version 5.1b in relation to Version 5.1a........................10-4

10.5.1. 'Min-Reactance' function..................................................................10-4
10.6. Changes in Version 5.1c in relation to Version 5.1b ........................10-4

10.6.1. Year 2000 conformity.......................................................................10-4
10.7. Changes in Version 5.2 in relation to Version 5.1c ..........................10-4

10.7.1. Frequency rate of change protection ...............................................10-4
10.7.2. Touch screen or SMS in parallel with the SCS connection..............10-4
10.8. Changes in Version 5.2a in relation to Version 5.2..........................10-5

10.8.1. Frequency rate of change protection 'df/dt'......................................10-5
10.9. Changes in Version 6.0 in relation to Version 5.2(a) .......................10-5

10.9.1. Directional overcurrent functions 'DirCurrentDT' and
'DirCurrentInv' ..................................................................................10-5
10.9.2. Breaker failure protection 'BreakerFailure'.......................................10-5
10.9.3. Runtime supervision ........................................................................10-5
10.9.4. New processor unit 316VC61b ........................................................10-5
10.10. Changes in Version Version 6.2 in relation to Version 6.0...............10-5

10.10.1. Analogue input/output unit 500AXM11 ............................................10-5
10.10.2. 'Analogue RIO Trigger' function .......................................................10-5
10.10.3. Measurement module ......................................................................10-6
10.10.4. Commands via a Stage 2 LON bus .................................................10-6

10.11.1. A/D converter unit 316EA63 ............................................................10-6
10.11.2. Updating the 316EA63 firmware ......................................................10-6
10-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd RE. 316*4 1KHA000835-UEN

10.12.1. Autoreclose Function .......................................................................10-7
10.12.2. Resetting of the LEDs on the LDU...................................................10-7
10-2
10. SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION

10.1. Changes in Version 5.0 in relation to Version 4.5
10.1.1. Local display unit (LDU)
From Version V5.0, the software supports the local display unit (see
Section 5.10.).
10.1.2. New 'LDU events' function
The LDU events list only includes tripping levels. The new function
'LDU events' enables additional events to be selected for listing (see
Section 3.6.5.).
10.1.3. New processor unit 316VC61a
All devices equipped with the local display unit (LDU) also have the
new processor unit 316VC61a; devices not equipped with the LDU can
have either the 316VC61 or 316VC61a.
Whether there is a 316VC61a in a device not equipped with a local
control and display unit can be determined using the HMI diagnostic
function. Upon selecting 'Show diagnostic data', one of the lines
displayed is 'HW No.', which in the case of 316VC61a includes the
code '0434':
HW-Nr.: xxxx/0434/xx
The computing capacity of the 316VC61a is 250 % (compared with
200 % in the case of 316VC61).
10.2. Known software weaknesses in V5.0

10.2.1. Year 2000 conformity
Version V5.0 is influenced to a minor extent by the year 2000 problem,
but the correct operation of the devices during and after the change of
the century is assured. The only shortcoming concerns the time stamp,
which retains '19' in the year instead of changing to '20'. All other data
is correct and the events are listed in the correct chronological order.
10.2.2. 'LDU events' function
The 'LDU events' function is not available when the HMI is operating
off-line.

10.3.1. Distributed input/output system RIO580
From Version V5.1, the software supports the distributed input/output
system RIO580. The latter comprises a number of distributed
input/output units that are connected to an RE.316*4 device via an
MVB (multipurpose vehicle bus) and an MVB PC board. Refer to Data
10-3
Sheet 1MRB520176-Ben and Operating Instructions 1MRB520192-

Ben for further details.
With the exception of the VDEW version, for which the synchroni-
sation of the time will not function via the VDEW bus in the year 2000,
all Version V5.1 devices are fully immune to the year 2000 problem.
10.3.3. 'LDU events' function
The 'LDU events' function is also now available when the HMI is
operating off-line.
10.4. Changes in Version 5.1a in relation to Version 5.1

10.4.1. 'I0-Invers' function
The 'I0-Invers' is always enabled regardless of the software key in use.
10.5. Changes in Version 5.1b in relation to Version 5.1a

10.5.1. 'Min-Reactance' function
The underreactance function can now also be connected to
Y-connected VTs.
10.6. Changes in Version 5.1c in relation to Version 5.1b

All devices are immune to the year 2000 problem from Version V5.1c
onwards.
10.7. Changes in Version 5.2 in relation to Version 5.1c
10.7.1. Frequency rate of change protection
A df/dt function has been added to the function block library. Because
of an error, however, it is not displayed for all the software keys there
are (see Section 10.8.1.).
10.7.2. Touch screen or SMS in parallel with the SCS connection
Where a station control system (SCS) is connected via a LON or MVB
bus, there is a second fully functional SPA interface available in
parallel which can be used for connecting a touch screen an SMS.
10-4
10.8. Changes in Version 5.2a in relation to Version 5.2

10.8.1. Frequency rate of change protection 'df/dt'
V5.2a of the HMI shows the 'df/dt' function for all software keys, for
which the 'Frequency' function has been enabled.
10.9. Changes in Version 6.0 in relation to Version 5.2(a)

10.9.1. Directional overcurrent functions 'DirCurrentDT' and
'DirCurrentInv'
Two directional overcurrent functions 'DirCurrentDT' with definite time
and 'DirCurrentInv' with inverse time characteristic have been added to
the function block library. They are accessible for all software keys for
which the current and voltage functions are enabled.
10.9.2. Breaker failure protection 'BreakerFailure'
A 'BreakerFailure' function has been added to the function block library
which is accessible to all software keys.
10.9.3. Runtime supervision
A runtime supervision function can be specified for pairs of inputs that
have been configured as double indications (see Section 5.4.2.2.).
10.9.4. New processor unit 316VC61b
Version 6.0 supports the new 316VC61b processor unit. To determine
whether a device contains a 316VC61b processor unit or not, open
'List diagnostic information' in the HMI diagnostic function and check
the code '04Ax' on line 'HW No.':
HW No.: xxxx/04Ax/xx
10.10. Changes in Version Version 6.2 in relation to Version 6.0

10.10.1. Analogue input/output unit 500AXM11
Versions from V6.2 onwards support the analogue input/output unit
500AXM11 of the distributed input/output system RIO580.
10.10.2. 'Analogue RIO Trigger' function
An 'Analogue RIO Trigger' function has been added to the function
block library which is available for all software keys and facilitates the
supervision of the input signals of the analogue input/output unit
500AXM11. Refer to the Operating Instructions for the distributed
input/output system RIO580, Publication 1MRB520192-Uen, for further
details.
10-5
10.10.3. Measurement module

The 'MeasureModule' function has been added to the function block
library. It is available for all software keys and facilitates the three-
phase measurement of voltage, current, active and reactive power,
power factor and frequency. Two counter impulse inputs are also
provided for metering energy.
10.10.4. Commands via a Stage 2 LON bus
In automation systems equipped with a Stage 2 LON interbay bus,
commands can be transferred from the automation system to the bay
units.

10.11.1. A/D converter unit 316EA63
From Version V6.3, the software supports the new A/D converter unit
316EA63 which supersedes the previous plug-in unit 316EA62.
10.11.2. Updating the 316EA63 firmware
The new A/D converter unit 316EA63 allows the firmware to be
downloaded without opening the unit. If updating is necessary, this is
done in a similar fashion as updating the main processor firmware (see
Section 7.5.). After each update of the main processor firmware, the
316EA63 firmware must also be updated.
When applying the DOS HMI, updating is made by calling up the batch
file 'loadEA63.bat', which is listed in the HMI directory.
When applying the Windows HMC CAP2/316, the item 'EA63
download' in the menu 'Options' must be selected.
10-6

10.12.1. Autoreclose Function
The Autoreclose function provides two new events
First AR completed
2. ...4 AR completed
These can be transmitted on the IEC60870-5-103 bus with the
information numbers 128 and 129.
10.12.2. Resetting of the LEDs on the LDU
From V6.4 the resetting of the LEDSon the LDU is handled in the
same way as that of the LEDs on the front plate. The resetting occurs:
With the external resetting input signal
The resetting key behind the front plate
The common reset menu on the LED
10-7
Oktober 04
12. APPENDICES
12.1 List of abbreviations and symbols ....................................................12-2
Fig. 12.2 Numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4 (front view) ...........12-3
Fig. 12.3 Numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4,

View from the rear showing the location of units
in the narrow N1 case (top) and wide N2 case (bottom). .................12-4
Fig. 12.4 Example of the input transformer connections for a directional

protection function (DirCurrentDT, DirCurrentInv, MinReactance,
Power, Pole-Slip, UIfPQ and MeasureModule) .............................12-5
Fig. 12.5 Example of the input transformer connections for the differential
protection functions (Diff-Transf, and Diff-Gen) ............................12-6
Fig. 12.6 Dimensioned drawings for semi-flush and surface mounting of

the test socket cases Types 316TSS01 (top) and XX93 (bottom) ..12-7
Fig. 12.7 Test socket case type XX93 A C Connectors for test plug
YX91-4 D Ancillary test connector YX93, where fitted .....................12-8
Fig. 12.8 Set-up for testing: with the test set Type XS92b
and the test socket case Type XX93................................................12-9
Fig. 12.9 Set-up for testing: with the test set Type XS92b
and the test socket case Type 316TSS01 .......................................12-9
Fig. 12.10 Wiring diagram for the test socket case Type XX93
(corresponds to HESG 324 171)....................................................12-10
Fig. 12.11 Wiring diagram for the test socket case Type 316TSS01
(corresponds to HESG 324 348)....................................................12-11
Check list for replacing hardware units

Report for replacing hardware units
TEST REPORT
Typical wiring diagram for the numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4
Notification
12-1
12.1 List of abbreviations and symbols
IA : balancing current
IB : load current
IN : rated current
IK : fault current
k0 : zero-sequence compensation or
residual current coefficient
KI : main CT ratio
KU : main VT ratio
KZ : impedance ratio
UN : rated voltage
Zi : impedance reach of zone i
ZL = RL + jXL : positive-sequence line impedance
Z0L : zero-sequence line impedance
ZLp : primary positive-sequence line impedance
ZLs : secondary positive-sequence line impedance
ZOR : impedance setting of the overreach zone
Index i : zone No.
12-2
Fig. 12.2 Numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4

(front view)
1 Green LED (stand-by)

2 LEDs for 1st I/O unit
3 LEDs for 2nd.. I/O unit
4 Reset button behind frontplate
5 Local display unit (LDU) with optical serial interface
6 Text space
12-3
12-4
316GW61 316GW61
Fig. 12.3
316EA62/316EA63 316EA62/316EA63
316VC61a/316VC61b 316DB61/316DB62/316DB63
ABB Switzerland Ltd
316DB61/316DB62/316DB63 316VC61a/316VC61b
316DB61/316DB62/316DB63 316DB61/316DB62/316DB63
316DB61/316DB62/316DB63
wide N2 case (bottom).

316DB61/316DB62/316DB63 316NG65
in the narrow N1 case (top) and

316NG65
HEST 965023 C
View from the rear showing the location of units

Numerical protection and control unit RE.316*4,
RE.316*4 1KHA000835-UEN
Fig. 12.4 Example of the input transformer connections for a

directional protection function (DirCurrentDT,
DirCurrentInv, MinReactance, Power, Pole-Slip,
UIfPQ and MeasureModule)
Providing the c.ts, v.ts and input transformers are connected as

shown in Fig. 12.4, the details concerning direction given in Chapter 3
apply, i.e. when active power is flowing from the generator to the
power system, the power measured by the power function is positive.
The star-point c.ts may also be used (dotted connections).
12-5
Fig. 12.5 Example of the input transformer connections for the

differential protection functions (Diff-Transf, and
Diff-Gen)
Providing the c.ts, and input transformers are connected as shown in

Fig. 12.5, the details given in Sections 3.5.2.1. (Diff-Transf) and
3.5.2.2. (Diff-Gen) apply, i.e. the differential current becomes zero for
a through-fault.
12-6
Panel cutout
Panel cutout
Fig. 12.6 Dimensioned drawings for semi-flush and

surface mounting of the test socket cases
Types 316TSS01 (top) and XX93 (bottom)
12-7
Fig. 12.7 Test socket case type XX93
AC Connectors for test plug YX91-4

D Ancillary test connector YX93, where fitted
12-8
Test socket case XX93 Numerical line protection

REL 316*4
Ancillary test
connector
YX93
Test set
Test plug XS92b
and cable Printer
YX91-4
PC
HEST 985 004 FL
Fig. 12.8 Set-up for testing:

with the test set Type XS92b
and the test socket case Type XX93
Test socket case Numerical line protection

316TSS01 REL 316*4
Test set
XS92b
Test connector Printer
RTXH24 and
cable YX91-7
PC
HEST 985 005 FL
Fig. 12.9 Set-up for testing:

with the test set Type XS92b
and the test socket case Type 316TSS01
12-9
Fig. 12.10 Wiring diagram for the test socket case Type XX93
12-10
Checklist for replacing hardware modules
in RE.316*4 units
99-06
Not applicable Completed

Not fitted
Read out and save the existing unit settings
(always necessary when replacing the 316VC61).
Read out or print the diagnostic and event lists (for defects)
Switch off the auxiliary supply.
Short-circuit the external CT leads and then disconnect them. 1)
Disconnect the external VT leads. 1)
Disconnect the current and voltage circuits from the unit. 1)
Unscrew the electrical-to-optical converter Type 316BM61 (OBI)

or withdraw the PC card.
If necessary, fit a coupling device to loop the optical fiber cable so
that the rest of the system can continue to operate.
Remove the covers from the unit. 2)
Mark the slot of the module to be replaced and withdraw it. 3)
Make a note of the modules technical data.
Compare the ordering code and software of old and new modules.
Make a note of the technical data of the new module.
Insert the new module in the slot previously marked.
Refit the covers on the unit.

Refit the electrical-to-optical converter Type 316BM61 (OBI) or
reinsert the PC card.
Reconnect the ground to the unit if it was removed.
Reconnect CT and VT circuits.

Switch on the auxiliary supply.
Download to the unit the settings previously saved (always
necessary when replacing the 316VC61) and also any FUPLA logic on the disc.
Check the operation of the unit
(e.g. check the voltages and currents in the Display analog
channels menu. Depending on the type of module that has been
replaced, other checks may be necessary such as for a
316DB61/62/63 the alarms, tripping signals and binary inputs).
1) Only necessary when replacing the input transformer module 316GW61.

2) Flush-mounted version: Remove the auxiliary supply plug, unscrew the backplate (4 large and
4 small screws around the edge, 2 screws holding the power supply unit and 2 screws holding the
RS232 interface; the connectors do not have to be removed).
Surface-mounted version: Swing the relay out on its hinges and remove the backplate as for the
flush-mounted version.
3) Refer to the respective Operating Instructions for the locations of the modules (slots).
Fig. 12.11 Wiring diagram for the test socket case

Type 316TSS01 (corresponds to HESG 324 348)
12-11
Report to be filled in after replacing hardware modules
in RE.316*4 units
02-05
To enable a record of the modules to be kept (traceability), please forward the following information to
ABB Switzerland Ltd (by fax or mail) whenever modules are replaced:
Address ABB Switzerland Ltd

Repair Center
Warenannahme PT EG
Bruggerstrasse 72
CH-5401 Baden
Switzerland Fax ++ 41 58 585 31 30
General data
Client .............................................. Station ......................................... Feeder ....................................
RE.316*4 data (sticker on unit)
Type of unit ..................................................................

Unit ID ..................................................................
Serial No. .................................................................. Item ..........
Drawing No. / Revision index ..................................................................
Ordering code ..................................................................
Software version FW: .................... HMI: ....................
(sticker below reset button)
Module data
Old module New module
Type of module / Revision ........................................ ........................................

Module ID ........................................ ........................................
Serial No. ........................................ ........................................
Drawing No. / Revision index ........................................ ........................................
Barcode No. ........................................ ........................................
Software version of ICs (if any) A .......... Vers. ..........
A .......... Vers. ..........
A .......... Vers. ..........
A .......... Vers. ..........
Date when hardware replaced ....................
Remarks: ................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
Name: Signature: Date:

TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Control and Protection Unit Type REC316*4
Checklist
Kind of check Remarks
Relay number
Visual check for transport damage
Visual check of external wiring
Check of relay grounding
Check of supply voltage (DC/AC)
Check of settings
Check of C.T. circuits
Check of P.T. circuits
Secondary injection with test set type ......
Check of input signals
Check of control and interlocking
Check of signalisation/alarms
Point to point test to the SCS refer to the SCS test sheets
Check of starting breaker failure protection
Check of tripping
Final check
Checked by Client
Date: Signature: Date: Signature:
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Settings
According to separate print out

Software version of the relay ....................
Secondary injection
Channel Main AD channel AD channel Injected Display AD Channels

number C.T./P.T. ratio rated value * ref. value value calculated displayed
[A/A], [kV/V] [A], [V] [-] [A], [V] [UN], [IN] [UN], [IN]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
* 100/200 V or 1/2/5 A respectively
Remark: If the AD channel reference value is not 1.0 it is advisable to inject rated value ref. value to get
on the display 1.00 UN/IN.
Example: Rated current generator = 540 A, C.T. ratio = 600/5 ---> Ref. value = 0.9
Injected current = 5 0.9 A = 4.5 A ---> Display = 1.00 [4.50 A]
Special checks/ functions Result

............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Activation/Deactivation of Binary Inputs
DB61 DB62 DB63 DB61 DB62 DB63
Function/Remarks Result Function/Remarks Result
OC 101 ............................................ .............. OC 201 ............................................ ..............

OC 102 ............................................ .............. OC 202 ............................................ ..............
OC 103 ............................................ .............. OC 203 ............................................ ..............
OC 104 ............................................ .............. OC 204 ............................................ ..............
OC 105 ............................................ .............. OC 205 ............................................ ..............
OC 106 ............................................ .............. OC 206 ............................................ ..............
OC 107 ............................................ .............. OC 207 ............................................ ..............
OC 108 ............................................ .............. OC 208 ............................................ ..............
OC 109 ............................................ .............. OC 209 ............................................ ..............
OC 110 ............................................ .............. OC 210 ............................................ ..............
OC 111 ............................................ .............. OC 211 ............................................ ..............
OC 112 ............................................ .............. OC 212 ............................................ ..............
OC 113 ............................................ .............. OC 213 ............................................ ..............
OC 114 ............................................ .............. OC 214 ............................................ ..............
OC 301 ............................................ .............. OC 401 ............................................ ..............

OC 302 ............................................ .............. OC 402 ............................................ ..............
OC 303 ............................................ .............. OC 403 ............................................ ..............
OC 304 ............................................ .............. OC 404 ............................................ ..............
OC 305 ............................................ .............. OC 405 ............................................ ..............
OC 306 ............................................ .............. OC 406 ............................................ ..............
OC 307 ............................................ .............. OC 407 ............................................ ..............
OC 308 ............................................ .............. OC 408 ............................................ ..............
OC 309 ............................................ .............. OC 409 ............................................ ..............
OC 310 ............................................ .............. OC 410 ............................................ ..............
OC 311 ............................................ .............. OC 411 ............................................ ..............
OC 312 ............................................ .............. OC 412 ............................................ ..............
OC 313 ............................................ .............. OC 413 ............................................ ..............
OC 314 ............................................ .............. OC 414 ............................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Activation/Deactivation of Alarm Relays
Function/Remarks Result
DB61 S 101 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB62 S 102 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 103 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 104 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 105 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 106 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 107 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 108 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 109 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 110 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 201 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 202 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 203 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 204 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 205 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 206 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 207 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 208 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 209 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 210 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 301 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 302 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 303 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 304 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 305 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 306 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 307 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 308 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 309 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 310 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 401 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 402 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 403 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 404 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 405 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 406 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 407 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 408 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 409 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 410 ............................................................................................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Activation of Tripping Relays
DB61 C 101 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 101 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 102 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 102 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 201 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 201 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 202 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 202 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 301 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 301 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 302 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 302 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 401 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 401 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 402 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 402 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: UNIT:
04-11
Generator Protection Type REG316*4
Checklist
Relay number
Check of settings
Check of tripping
Primary tests
Final check
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: UNIT:
04-11
Generator datas
Manufacturer .............................. Type of turbine ..............................

Type .............................. (Steam, hydro etc.)
Rated power .............................. MVA Synchronous reactance Xd .................... p.u.

Rated voltage .............................. kV Transient reactance Xd' .................... p.u.
Rated current .............................. A
Settings
According to separate print out

Software version of the relay ....................
Secondary injection
Channel Main AD channel AD channel Injected Display AD Channels

number C.T./P.T. ratio rated value * ref. value value calculated displayed
[A/A], [kV/V] [A], [V] [-] [A], [V] [UN], [IN] [UN], [IN]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
* 100/200 V or 1/2/5 A respectively
Remark: If the AD channel reference value is not 1.0 it is advisable to inject rated value ref. value to get
on the display 1.00 UN/IN.
Example: Rated current generator = 540 A, C.T. ratio = 600/5 ---> Ref. value = 0.9
Injected current = 5 0.9 A = 4.5 A ---> Display = 1.00 [4.50 A]
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: UNIT:
04-11
OC 101 ............................................ .............. OC 201 ............................................ ..............

OC 102 ............................................ .............. OC 202 ............................................ ..............
OC 103 ............................................ .............. OC 203 ............................................ ..............
OC 104 ............................................ .............. OC 204 ............................................ ..............
OC 105 ............................................ .............. OC 205 ............................................ ..............
OC 106 ............................................ .............. OC 206 ............................................ ..............
OC 107 ............................................ .............. OC 207 ............................................ ..............
OC 108 ............................................ .............. OC 208 ............................................ ..............
OC 109 ............................................ .............. OC 209 ............................................ ..............
OC 110 ............................................ .............. OC 210 ............................................ ..............
OC 111 ............................................ .............. OC 211 ............................................ ..............
OC 112 ............................................ .............. OC 212 ............................................ ..............
OC 113 ............................................ .............. OC 213 ............................................ ..............
OC 114 ............................................ .............. OC 214 ............................................ ..............
OC 301 ............................................ .............. OC 401 ............................................ ..............

OC 302 ............................................ .............. OC 402 ............................................ ..............
OC 303 ............................................ .............. OC 403 ............................................ ..............
OC 304 ............................................ .............. OC 404 ............................................ ..............
OC 305 ............................................ .............. OC 405 ............................................ ..............
OC 306 ............................................ .............. OC 406 ............................................ ..............
OC 307 ............................................ .............. OC 407 ............................................ ..............
OC 308 ............................................ .............. OC 408 ............................................ ..............
OC 309 ............................................ .............. OC 409 ............................................ ..............
OC 310 ............................................ .............. OC 410 ............................................ ..............
OC 311 ............................................ .............. OC 411 ............................................ ..............
OC 312 ............................................ .............. OC 412 ............................................ ..............
OC 313 ............................................ .............. OC 413 ............................................ ..............
OC 314 ............................................ .............. OC 414 ............................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: UNIT:
04-11
DB61 S 101 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB62 S 102 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 103 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 104 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 105 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 106 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 107 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 108 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 109 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 110 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 201 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 202 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 203 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 204 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 205 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 206 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 207 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 208 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 209 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 210 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 301 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 302 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 303 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 304 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 305 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 306 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 307 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 308 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 309 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 310 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 401 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 402 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 403 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 404 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 405 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 406 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 407 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 408 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 409 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 410 ............................................................................................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: UNIT:
04-11
DB61 C 101 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 101 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 102 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 102 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 201 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 201 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 202 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 202 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 301 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 301 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 302 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 302 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 401 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 401 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 402 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 402 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Line Protection Type REL316*4
Checklist
Relay number
Check of settings
Check of HF circuits
HF - End to End test
Check of tripping
Check of reclosing
Directional check
Stability check (longitudinal diff. function)
Final check
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Primary line datas Settings
Length ..................... km According to separate print out
Pos. seq. impedance ..................... /ph angle .................... Software version of the relay ........
Zero seq. impedance ..................... /ph angle ....................
Main C.T./P.T. ratio

Analogue inputs 1 - 3 ..................... / ................... Analogue input 4 .................... / ............
Analogue inputs 7 - 9 ..................... A / ................... A Analogue input 5 .................... / ............
Analogue input 6 .................... / ............
Secondary injection
Impedance function "Distance" Directional earth fault function "EarthFaultIsol"

Nom. val. Measured value [/ph] Nom. val. Measured value
[/ph] R S T [VA] [V A = VA]
X (1) Forward
X (2) --- --- Backward
X (3) --- --- Directional earth fault function "EarthFltGnd2"
X (4/OR) --- --- I-Setting [A] V-Setting [V]
XA --- --- Nom. val. Meas. val. Nom. val. Meas. val.
XB --- ---
Longitudinal differential function "Diff-Line

Measuring of the basic setting g
Phase Nominal val. [A] Measured value [A] If the fibre optic link or the relay at the opposite
R station is not ready, the Diff-Line function is
S blocked and the analogue inputs can only be
T checked using the menue Display AD Channels.
Synchrocheck function "SynchroCheck"

Parallel injection (1phase) of "uLineInput" and "uBusInput1" or "uBusInput2" respectively
Injected "uLineInput" parallel "uBusInput1" "uLineInput" parallel "uBusInput2"
Differential voltage Differential angle Differential voltage Differential angle
voltage Unom. Umeas. * nom. meas. * Unom. Umeas. * nom. meas. *
[V] [UN] [UN] [deg] [deg] [UN] [UN] [deg] [deg]
* To be read in the menu "Display Function Measurements" ---> "SynchroCheck"

Synchrocheck function must be released
Additional functions Result

............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
OC 101 ............................................ .............. OC 201 ............................................ ..............

OC 102 ............................................ .............. OC 202 ............................................ ..............
OC 103 ............................................ .............. OC 203 ............................................ ..............
OC 104 ............................................ .............. OC 204 ............................................ ..............
OC 105 ............................................ .............. OC 205 ............................................ ..............
OC 106 ............................................ .............. OC 206 ............................................ ..............
OC 107 ............................................ .............. OC 207 ............................................ ..............
OC 108 ............................................ .............. OC 208 ............................................ ..............
OC 109 ............................................ .............. OC 209 ............................................ ..............
OC 110 ............................................ .............. OC 210 ............................................ ..............
OC 111 ............................................ .............. OC 211 ............................................ ..............
OC 112 ............................................ .............. OC 212 ............................................ ..............
OC 113 ............................................ .............. OC 213 ............................................ ..............
OC 114 ............................................ .............. OC 214 ............................................ ..............
OC 301 ............................................ .............. OC 401 ............................................ ..............

OC 302 ............................................ .............. OC 402 ............................................ ..............
OC 303 ............................................ .............. OC 403 ............................................ ..............
OC 304 ............................................ .............. OC 404 ............................................ ..............
OC 305 ............................................ .............. OC 405 ............................................ ..............
OC 306 ............................................ .............. OC 406 ............................................ ..............
OC 307 ............................................ .............. OC 407 ............................................ ..............
OC 308 ............................................ .............. OC 408 ............................................ ..............
OC 309 ............................................ .............. OC 409 ............................................ ..............
OC 310 ............................................ .............. OC 410 ............................................ ..............
OC 311 ............................................ .............. OC 411 ............................................ ..............
OC 312 ............................................ .............. OC 412 ............................................ ..............
OC 313 ............................................ .............. OC 413 ............................................ ..............
OC 314 ............................................ .............. OC 414 ............................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
DB61 S 101 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB62 S 102 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 103 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 104 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 105 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 106 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 107 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 108 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 109 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 110 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 201 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 202 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 203 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 204 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 205 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 206 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 207 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 208 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 209 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 210 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 301 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 302 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 303 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 304 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 305 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 306 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 307 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 308 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 309 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 310 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 401 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 402 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 403 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 404 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 405 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 406 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 407 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 408 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 409 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 410 ............................................................................................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
DB61 C 101 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 101 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 102 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 102 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 201 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 201 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 202 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 202 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 301 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 301 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 302 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 302 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 401 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 401 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 402 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 402 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Transformer Protection Type RET316*4
Checklist
Relay number
Check of settings
Point to point test to the SCS
Stability test of differential function
Check of tripping
Final check
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
Transformer data
Manufacturer ............................................... Type of cooling ....................

Type ............................................... (ONAN, ONAF etc.)
Rated power SN .............../.............../............... MVA Vector group ....................
Primary side HV Secondary side LV Tertiary side TV

Rated voltage .................... kV .................... kV .................... kV .................... kV
Rated current .................... A .................... A .................... A
Positive-sequence HV-LV .................... % at .................... MVA

impedance LV-TV .................... % at .................... MVA
HV-TV .................... % at .................... MVA
Main C.T./P.T. ratio Settings

Analogue inputs 1 - 3 ...................../................... A/A According to separate print out
Analogue inputs 4 - 6 ...................../................... A/A Software version of the relay ..........
Analogue inputs 7 - 8 ...................../................... ...../.....
Analogue input 9 ...................../................... ...../.....
Secondary injection
Differential function "Diff-Transf"

Measuring of the basic setting g
Primary side HV Secondary side LV Tertiary side TV
Phase Nom. val. [A]* Meas. val. [A] Nom. val. [A]* Meas. val. [A] Nom. val. [A]* Meas. val. [A]
R
S
T
* Nominal value with single phase injection = g (1/a) IN * k
k = 3 for star connection; k = 1 for delta connection; k = 1.5 for zigzag connection
Overvoltage function "Voltage-DT" Phase Nom. val. [V] Meas. val. [V]
P.T. location on ............... kV side R
S
T
Additional functions Result

............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
OC 101 ............................................ .............. OC 201 ............................................ ..............

OC 102 ............................................ .............. OC 202 ............................................ ..............
OC 103 ............................................ .............. OC 203 ............................................ ..............
OC 104 ............................................ .............. OC 204 ............................................ ..............
OC 105 ............................................ .............. OC 205 ............................................ ..............
OC 106 ............................................ .............. OC 206 ............................................ ..............
OC 107 ............................................ .............. OC 207 ............................................ ..............
OC 108 ............................................ .............. OC 208 ............................................ ..............
OC 109 ............................................ .............. OC 209 ............................................ ..............
OC 110 ............................................ .............. OC 210 ............................................ ..............
OC 111 ............................................ .............. OC 211 ............................................ ..............
OC 112 ............................................ .............. OC 212 ............................................ ..............
OC 113 ............................................ .............. OC 213 ............................................ ..............
OC 114 ............................................ .............. OC 214 ............................................ ..............
OC 301 ............................................ .............. OC 401 ............................................ ..............

OC 302 ............................................ .............. OC 402 ............................................ ..............
OC 303 ............................................ .............. OC 403 ............................................ ..............
OC 304 ............................................ .............. OC 404 ............................................ ..............
OC 305 ............................................ .............. OC 405 ............................................ ..............
OC 306 ............................................ .............. OC 406 ............................................ ..............
OC 307 ............................................ .............. OC 407 ............................................ ..............
OC 308 ............................................ .............. OC 408 ............................................ ..............
OC 309 ............................................ .............. OC 409 ............................................ ..............
OC 310 ............................................ .............. OC 410 ............................................ ..............
OC 311 ............................................ .............. OC 411 ............................................ ..............
OC 312 ............................................ .............. OC 412 ............................................ ..............
OC 313 ............................................ .............. OC 413 ............................................ ..............
OC 314 ............................................ .............. OC 414 ............................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
DB61 S 101 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB62 S 102 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 103 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 104 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 105 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 106 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 107 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 108 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 109 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 110 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 201 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 202 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 203 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 204 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 205 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 206 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 207 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 208 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 209 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 210 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 301 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 302 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 303 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 304 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 305 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 306 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 307 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 308 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 309 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 310 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB61 S 401 ............................................................................................................ ..............

DB62 S 402 ............................................................................................................ ..............
DB63 S 403 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 404 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 405 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 406 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 407 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 408 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 409 ............................................................................................................ ..............
S 410 ............................................................................................................ ..............
Checked by Client
TEST SHEET
STATION: FEEDER:
04-11
DB61 C 101 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 101 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 102 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 102 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 201 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 201 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 202 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 202 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 301 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 301 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 302 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 302 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
DB61 C 401 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............

DB62 C 401 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 402 Contact 1 ............................................................................................. ..............
C 402 Contact 2 ............................................................................................. ..............
Checked by Client
Delete data
Notification Form for Errors in this Document

Dear User,
We constantly endeavour to improve the quality of our technical publications and would
like to hear your suggestions and comments. Would you therefore please fill in this
questionnaire and return it to the address given below.
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Betreuung Dokumentation, PTU-BD1
Bruggerstrasse 72
CH-5401 Baden
Telefax +41 58 585 35 82
Concerns publication: 1KHA000835-UEN (RE-316*4 V6.4 to V7.0)

Have you discovered any mistakes in this publication? If so, please note here the pages,
sections etc.
Do you find the publication readily understandable and logically structured? Can you make
any suggestions to improve it?
Is the information sufficient for the purpose of the publication? If not, what is missing and
where should it be included?
Name Date
Company
Postal code Town Country

Notification Form for Equipment Faults and Problems
Dear User,
Should you be obliged to call on our repair service, please attach a note to the unit
describing the fault as precisely as possible. This will help us to carry out the repair swiftly
and reliably, which after all is to your own advantage.
Please attach a completed form to every unit and forward them to the address below.
Place of delivery Baden/Switzerland:
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Repair Center
Warenannahme Terminal PT-EG
Bruggerstrasse 72
CH-5401 Baden
Equipment data:
Unit type:
Serial No.: .....................................
In operation since:
Reason for return: (tick where applicable)

Overfunction
No function
Outside tolerance
Abnormal operating temperature
Sporadic error
Unit for checking
Remarks/Description of fault:
Customer: Date:
Address:
Please contact: Phone: Fax:

Notification Form for Software Errors and Problems
Dear User,
As we all know from practice, software does not always function as expected for all
applications. A precise description of the problem and your observations will help us to
improve and maintain the software. Please complete this form and send it together with any
supporting information or documents to the address below.
ABB Power Technologies AB

Substation Automation
Product Support, Supportline
SE-721 59 Vsters
Sweden
Telefax +46 21 14 69 18
E-mail: sa-t.supportline@se.abb.com
Unit/ REC316*4 SW Version: REC216 SW Version:

System: REG316*4 SW Version: REG216 SW Version:
REL316*4 SW Version: HMI SW Version:
RET316*4 SW Version: other: SW Version:
XS92a / XS92b SW Version:
Problem: Program error (unit/system) Program error (HMI /PC)

Error in manual Suggestion for improvement
other:
Can the error be reproduced at will? yes no
Particulars of hardware and software (unit/system configuration including jumper positions,

type of PC etc.):
Problem located? yes no

Suggested changes enclosed? yes no
The following are enclosed (floppy with settings etc.):

Floppy Unit/system settings, file name:
other:
Description of problem:
Customer: Date:
Address:
Please contact: Phone: Fax:

DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM: (continuation)
ACTION (internal use of ABB Sweden only)

Received by: Date:
Answered by: Date:
Problem solved? yes no
Week: Name: Position: Consequence:

IMPORTANT NOTICE!
Experience has shown that reliable operation of our products is

assured, providing the information and recommendations contained in
these Operating Instructions are adhered to.
It is scarcely possible for the instructions to cover every eventuality

that can occur when using technical devices and systems. We would
therefore request the user to notify us directly or our agent of any
unusual observations or of instances, in which these instructions
provide no or insufficient information.
In addition to these instructions, any applicable local regulations and

safety procedures must always be strictly observed both when
connecting up and commissioning this equipment.
Any work such as insertion or removal of soldered jumpers or setting

resistors, which may be necessary, may only be performed by
appropriately qualified personnel.
We expressly accept no responsibility for any direct damage, which

may result from incorrect operation of this equipment, even if no
reference is made to the particular situation in the Operating
Instructions.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bruggerstrasse 72
CH-5400 Baden / Switzerland
Telefon +41 58 585 77 44
Telefax +41 58 585 55 77
E-mail substation.automation@ch.abb.com

1KHA000835-UEN en RE.316 4 Numerical Protection and Control Unit - Operating Instructions (Edition Oct 2004) PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

1KHA000835-UEN en RE.316 4 Numerical Protection and Control Unit - Operating Instructions (Edition Oct 2004) PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

RE.

Numerical Protection and Control Devices

Applies for software version V6.4 and higher

3. Setting the functions

4. Description of function and application

6. Self-testing and diagnostics

7. Installation and maintenance

9. Interbay bus (IBB) interface

10. Supplementary information

* How to install Checks upon receipt S 7.2.1.

* How to set and Installing the HMI S 5.2.2.

* How to check, test Checking the connections S 7.4.6. to S 7.4.10.

* How to maintain it Fault-finding S 5.5.4., S 7.6.1.

* How to view and Sequential recorder S 5.5.1.

1.1. General ..............................................................................................1-2

1.2. Safety instructions..............................................................................1-3

1.3. Line Protection REL316*4..................................................................1-5

1.4. Transformer Protection RET316*4.....................................................1-8

1.5. Generator Protection REG316*4 .....................................................1-10

1.6. Control Device REC316*4 ...............................................................1-12

1.2. Safety instructions

DANGER: This symbol indicates immediate danger due to high elec-

WARNING: This symbol draws attention to a dangerous situation.

CAUTION ESD: This symbol indicates specific information for the

CAUTION LASER/LED: This symbol indicates the use of a laser of

NOTICE: An important instruction that must be observed.

IMPORTANT: It must be ensured that no possibly damaging situation

1.2.2. General rules

DANGER: Live electrical equipment is in the immediate vicinity of

WARNING: Only properly authorized, professionally qualified and

1.3. Line Protection REL316*4

blocking scheme (also for reversal of fault energy direction)

1.4. Transformer Protection RET316*4

1.4.2. Main features

peak value overvoltage protection (Voltage-Inst)

1.5. Generator Protection REG316*4

1.5.2. Main features

1.6. Control Device REC316*4

integration of the local mimic.

Measurement and monitoring functions:

REC316*4 is equipped with serial interfaces for the connection of a

2.2. Mechanical design .............................................................................2-4

2.3. Auxiliary supply unit ...........................................................................2-6

2.4. Input transformer unit.........................................................................2-6

2.5. Main processor unit............................................................................2-7

2.6. Binary I/O unit ....................................................................................2-8

2.7. Interconnection unit............................................................................2-8

2.8. Injection unit REX010 ........................................................................2-9

2.9. Injection transformer block REX011 ................................................2-13

2.10. Testing without the generator ..........................................................2-27

2.2. Mechanical design

2.2.1. Hardware versions

Installation in a 19" rack

2.2.6. Test facilities

2.3. Auxiliary supply unit

2.4. Input transformer unit

2.5. Main processor unit

2.6. Binary I/O unit

2.7. Interconnection unit

2.8. Injection unit REX010

Battery voltage Tolerance Output

Versions U2 and U3 operate with a DC/DC converter.

The frequency of the injection voltage, which corresponds precisely to